Primelink c9065 c9070 Mfp Service Manual
Primelink c9065 c9070 Mfp Service Manual
Primelink c9065 c9070 Mfp Service Manual
CAUTION: This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions documentation, may cause interference
to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to subpart B of part 15 of FCC rules, which are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the
user, at his own expense, will be required to correct the interference.
Introduction 2nd Issue
Introduction
About this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
How to Use this Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Symbology and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Health and Safety Incident reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Translated Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Section 4: Repairs/Adjustments
This section contains all the Adjustments and Repair procedures.
Repairs
Repairs include procedures for removal and replacement of parts which have the following special
conditions:
• When removal or replacement cannot be determined from the exploded view of the Parts
List.
Use the repair procedures for the correct order of removal and replacement, for warnings, cautions,
and notes.
Adjustments
Adjustments include procedures for adjusting the parts that must be within specification for the cor-
rect operation of the system.
Use the adjustment procedures for the correct sequence of operation for specifications, warnings,
cautions and notes.
It should be noted that the BSDs no longer contain an Input Power Block referring to Chain 1. It will
be necessary to refer to the Wirenets in order to trace a wire back to its source.
Sy m b o l o g y a n d N o m e n c l a t u r e
The following reference symbols are used throughout the documentation.
WARNING: Do not perform repair activities with the power on or electrical power
supplied to the machine. The machine could activate and cause serious personal injury
when the power is on or electrical power is supplied.
DANGER: Ne pas effectuer de dépannage avec le contact principal activé ou avec l'ali-
mentation électrique appliquée à la machine: celle-ci pourrait démarrer et causer de
graves blessures.
AVVERTENZA: Non effettuare alcuna riparazione con la macchina accesa o con l'ali-
mentazione elettrica inserita. La macchina potrebbe avviarsi all'improvviso e causare
gravi ferite.
Machine Safety Icons WARNING: Do not defeat or electrically bypass the ROS Safety Interlock Switch for
The following safety icons are displayed on the machine: any reason. The ROS emits an undetectable laser beam that could cause serious per-
manent damage to the eyes if directly viewed or viewed from a surface that may have
WARNING: Use extreme care when replacing the Raster Output Scanner (ROS) or
reflected the laser beam.
touching the high voltage lead. Discharge the laser assembly by touching the high
voltage lead to the machine frame. The ROS utilizes a laser assembly that stores a high DANGER: Ne pas shunter le contact de sécurité du ROS, quelle que soit la raison. Le
voltage charge after the power has been removed and represents a shock hazard that ROS émet un rayon laser indétectable qui peut causer de graves blessures perma-
could cause serious personal injury if not discharged. nentes aux yeux s'il est regardé directement ou par le biais d'une surface qui le
réfléchit.
DANGER: Faire très attention lors du changement du générateur de balayage (ROS) ou
lors de la manipulation du câble de haute tension. Décharger le système laser en tou- AVVERTENZA: Non ostacolare o bypassare elettronicamente l'interruttore blocco di si-
chant le câble HT au bâti machine: le ROS utilise un système laser qui retient une haute curezza ROS per nessun motivo. Il ROS emette un raggio laser invisibile che può cau-
tension après la coupure de l'alimentation, représentant un risque de choc et de graves sare gravi ferite permanenti agli occhi se viene guardato direttamente o attraverso
blessures. una superficie riflettente.
AVVERTENZA: Fare estrema attenzione nel sostituire il Raster Output Scanner (ROS) o VORSICHT: Den ROS (Rasterausgabescanner)-Sicherheitssperrschalter auf keinen Fall
nel toccare il cavo di alta tensione. Scaricare il complessivo laser collegando il cavo di vernichten oder elektronisch umgehen. Der ROS sondert einen nicht feststellbaren La-
alta tensione col telaio della macchina. Il ROS utilizza un complessivo laser che ritiene serstrahl ab, der irreparable Augenschäden verursachen kann, wenn direkt oder über
una carica di alta tensione dopo il taglio dell'alimentazione con conseguente grave eine Spiegelfläche hineingesehen wird.
pericolo di scossa elettrica e serie ferite.
AVISO: No intente modificar o desviar electrónicamente el interruptor de seguridad
VORSICHT: Beim Ersetzen der Lasereinheit (ROS) und beim Umgang mit Hochspan- por ningún motivo. El ROS emite un rayo láser que no se puede detectar, que podría
nungsleitern ist äußerste Vorsicht geboten. Die Lasereinheit muss durch Berühren des puede causar grave daño permanente a los ojos si se lo mira directamente o desde
Hochspannungsleiters mit dem Gehäuse des Geräts entladen werden. Nach Betrieb una superficie que refleja el rayo láser.
der Lasereinheit (ROS) bleibt immer eine Hochspannungsladung zurück, welche ein
hohes Elektroschockrisiko darstellt. Äußerste Vorsicht ist geboten.
AVISO: Use extrema precaución para sustituir el Escáner de salida ráster (ROS) o tocar
el cable de alto voltaje. Descargue el sistema láser tocando el cable de alto voltaje del Figure 1 Laser Hazard Symbol
bastidor de la máquina. El ROS utiliza un sistema láser que retiene carga de alto vol-
Laser Hazard Statement
taje después de interrumpir la alimentación de energía y representa un grave peligro
que puede ocasionar daños personales graves si no se descarga. DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
CAUTION: The use of controls or adjustments other than those specified in the Laser
Safety Training Program may result in an exposure to dangerous laser radiation.
An arrow points to the location to install, to gain access to, or to release an object.
This symbol indicates that a surface can be hot. Use caution when reaching in the machine to avoid
touching the hot surfaces.
Danger label indicates where electrical currents exist when the machine is closed and operating.
Use caution when reaching in the machine.
These symbols indicate components that may be damaged by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).
This program will reduce Field Service costs that are charged to PWB failures. Ninety percent of all
PWB failures that are ESD related do not occur immediately. Using the ESD Field Service Kit will
eliminate these delayed failures and intermittent problems caused by ESD. This will improve prod-
uct reliability and reduce callbacks.
The ESD Field Service Kit should be used whenever Printed Wiring Boards or ESD sensitive compo-
nents are being handled. This includes activities like replacing or reseating of circuit boards or con-
nectors. The kit should also be used in order to prevent additional damage when circuit boards are
returned for repair.
The instructions for using the ESD Field Service Kit can be found in ESD Field Service Kit Usage in
the General Procedures section of the Service Documentation.
Illustration Symbols
Figure 6 shows symbols and conventions that are commonly used in illustrations.
In this example, the red meter lead would be placed on TP7 and the black meter lead on TP68.
Figure 7 Signal Nomenclature Other examples of a statement found in a RAP might be:
Voltage Measurement and Specifications • There is -15 VDC from TP21 to TP33.
Measurements of DC voltage must be made with reference to the specified DC Common, unless • -15 VDC is measured between TP21 and TP33.
some other point is referenced in a diagnostic procedure. All measurements of AC voltage should be
• In these examples, the red meter lead would be placed on TP21 and the black meter lead would
made with respect to the adjacent return or ACN wire.
be placed on TP33.
Table 1 Voltage Measurement and Specifications
• If a second test point is not given, it is assumed that the black meter lead may be attached to
VOLTAGE SPECIFICATION
the copier frame.
INPUT POWER 220 V 198 VAC TO 242 VAC
S a fe t y I n fo r m a t i o n
The WARNING that follows is for general guidance when live working.
WARNING: Do not work in a confined space. 1m (39 inches) space is needed for safe
working.
Toner Cartridge
Safety Icons
The product contains a toner cartridge that is recyclable. Under various state and local laws, it may
The safety icons that follow are displayed on the machine:
be illegal to dispose of the cartridge into the municipal waste. Check with the local waste officials
ESD Caution Symbol for details on recycling options or the proper disposal procedures.
Fuses
WARNING: Do not install a fuse of a different type or rating. Installing the wrong
type or rating of fuse can cause overheating and a risk of fire.
Part Replacement
Only use genuine Xerox approved spare parts or components to maintain compliance with legisla-
tion and safety certification. Also refer to GP 25 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS).
CAUTION: Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from elec-
trostatic discharge. Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage. Disassembly Precautions
Do not leave the machine with any covers removed at a customer location.
Location Arrow Symbol
The location arrow symbol points to the location to install, to gain access to, or to release an object. Reassembly Precautions
Use extreme care during assembly. Check all harnesses to ensure they do not contact moving parts
and do not get trapped between components.
General Procedures
Observe all warnings displayed on the machine and written in the service procedures. Do not at-
tempt to perform any task that is not specified in the service procedures.
Hot Surface Symbol
This symbol indicates hot surfaces. Take care when servicing the machine.
H e a l t h a n d S a fe t y I n c i d e n t r e p o r t i n g a. Preserve the Xerox product involved and the scene of the incident inclusive of any associated
equipment located in the vicinity of the incident.
I. Summary
This section defines requirements for notification of health and safety incidents involving Xerox b. Return any affected equipment/part(s) to the location designated by Xerox EH&S and/or the
1. Xerox organizations shall establish a process for individuals to report product incidents to Xerox
Environment Health and Safety within 24 hours of becoming aware of the event.
2. The information to be provided at the time of reporting is contained in Appendix A (Health and
Safety Incident Report involving a Xerox product).
Note: If sending a fax, please also send the original via internal mail.
1. Business Groups/Product Design Teams responsible for the product involved in the incident shall:
Tra n s l a t e d Wa r n i n g s
Translated Warnings are located at point of need in the Service Documentation.
SCP 4 Cleaning Procedures disconnect the machine from the customer’s network.
The cleaning procedures list what needs to be cleaned at each service call. c. If a new installation, refer to Rigger Install/Removal instructions (Adobe PDF files in the Serv-
ice Interface Library) to be sure all packing material is removed.
SCP 5 Final Actions
The Final Actions will test the copier/printer and return it to the customer. Administrative activities d. Check that the power cords are in good condition, correctly plugged in to the power source,
are also performed in the Final Actions. and free from any defects that would be a safety hazard. Repair or replace the power cords
as required. Check that the circuit breaker is not tripped.
e. If the machine appears to be inoperative, go to SCP 2 Call Flow and repair the problem.
Then continue below.
f. Inspect any rejected copies. Inquire as to, or otherwise determine, the paper quality and
weight. The specified paper for optimum image quality with this machine is Section 6 Prod-
uct Specifications Paper Capacities. Look for any damage to the copies, oil marks, image
quality defects, or other indications of a problem the customer did not report.
4. Exit diagnostics. Try to duplicate the problem by running the same jobs that the customer ran • Black lines/Black bands
once repairs are complete to verify repairs are effective. • Other image quality defects
5. Go to SCP 2 Call Flow to further investigate machine condition. 3. If there is a problem with image quality, refer to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP in Section 3
Image Quality Troubleshooting, or refer to other published technical information in the Eureka
and Service Bulletin databases.
3. If there are any codes with frequent jams recorded, handle them as secondary Fault Codes.
4. Check the number of misfeeds dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) from each Tray.
5. If there are any codes with frequent misfeeds recorded, handle them as secondary Fault Codes.
6. After repairing any secondary Fault Codes, clear the code by pressing the Refresh button.
2. Scan the HFSIs looking for components that are near their threshold.
3. Inspect items that are near their threshold and make a determination as to whether or not the
items will last until the next service call. Replace as necessary and reset the counters. Continue
the service call with HFSI Counter.
S C P 3 D e ta i l e d M a i n t e n a n c e A c t i v i t i e s ( H F S I ) 2. Perform the service actions in Table 1 for any High Frequency Service Item (HFSI) counters that
are over threshold or approaching the threshold. Using the customer's output volume numbers
Procedure
(high, medium, or low volume), evaluate which HFSI actions should be performed now to avoid
1. Print an HSFI Report and scan the list for items that have reached replacement threshold: Enter
an additional service call in the near future.
Diagnostics>Machine Status>Print Reports>CE>HSFI Report>Start
Xero 954 80- Drum Cartridge Y (PL 90.1) Drum Cartridge Y NVM Initialize Drum Cycle 86,000/
0 C9070
81,000/
C9065
Xero 954 80- Drum Cartridge M (PL 90.1) Drum Cartridge M NVM Initialize Drum Cycle 86,000/
1 C9070
81,000/
C9065
Xero 954 80- Drum Cartridge C (PL 90.1) Drum Cartridge C NVM Initialize Drum Cycle 86,000/
2 C9070
81,000/
C9065
Xero 954 80- Drum Cartridge K (PL 90.1) Drum Cartridge K NVM Initialize Drum Cycle 219,000/
3 C9070
206,000/
C9065
Deve 954 80- Deve Housing Y (PL 90.6) Deve Motor Y Deve Motor On 1,500,000
5
Deve 954 80- Deve Housing M (PL 90.6) Deve Motor M Deve Motor On 1,500,000
6
Deve 954 80- Deve Housing C (PL 90.6) Deve Motor C Deve Motor On 1,500,000
7
Deve 954 80- Deve Housing K (PL 90.6) Deve Motor K Deve Motor On 1,500,000
8
X’ter 954 80- 1st BTR Roll Y (PL 90.15) 1sr BTR View/Reset Count 800,000
9
X’ter 954 81- 1st BTR Roll M (PL 90.15) 1sr BTR View/Reset Count 800,000
0
X’ter 954 81- 1st BTR Roll C (PL 90.15) 1sr BTR View/Reset Count 800,000
1
X’ter 954 81- 1st BTR Roll K (PL 90.15) 1sr BTR View/Reset Count 800,000
2
X'fer 954 81- 2ND BTR Roll Assembly (PL 80.19) 2nd BTR 2 Process 216.0mm:BW,FC/+1 Process 216.0mm:BW, 300,000
3 FC/+2
Li-
Mod- Chain nk
ule No No HFSI Description Description Action Count
X'fer 954 81- IBT Belt Unit (PL 90.12) IBT Belt 2 Process 216.0mm:BW,FC/+1 Process 216.0mm:BW, 600,000
4 FC/+2
X'fer 954 81- IBT Cleaner Assembly (PL 90.14) IBT Belt Cleaner 2 Process 216.0mm:BW,FC/+1 Process 216.0mm:BW, 300,000
5 FC/+2
Drive & 954 81- CC Filter (PL 40.9) CC Filter Fuser (DuplexSide1) (Simple Duplex) Process 216.0mm: 280,000
NO- 6 BW/+1,FC/+2 Process 216.0mm: BW/+2,FC/+4
HAD
Drive & 954 81- Suction Filter (PL 40.7) Ozone Suction Filter Fuser (DuplexSide1) (Simplex Duplex Process 840,000
NO- 7 216.0mm: BW/+1,FC/+2 Process 216.0mm: BW/+2,FC/
HAD +4
Drive & 954 81- Fuser Filter (PL 40.7) Fusing Unit Filter Fuser (DuplexSide1 (Simplex Duplex Process 216.0mm: 800,000
NO- 8 BW/+1,FC/+2 Process 216.0mm: BW/+2,FC/+4
HAD
Fusing 954 81- Standard Fusing Unit (PL 10.1) Standard Fuser Fusing Unit Process 216.0mm:BW,FC/+1 Process 200,000
9 216.0mmà:BW,FC/+2
P/H 954 82- Tray 1 Feed/Retard/Nudger Roll (PL 80.2) Tray 1 Feed Roll, Tray 1 Retard Roll, View/Reset Count 300,000
0 Tray 1 Nudger Roll, Feed
P/H 954 82- Tray 2 Feed/Retard/Nudger Roll (PL 80.3) Tray 2 Feed Roll, Tray 2 Retard Roll, View/Reset Count 300,000
1 Tray 2 Nudger Roll, Feed
P/H 954 82- Tray 3 Feed/Retard/Nudger Roll (PL 80.6) Tray 3 Feed Roll, Tray 3 Retard Roll, View/Reset Count 300,000
2 Tray 3 Nudger Roll, Feed
P/H 954 82- Tray 4 Feed/Retard/Nudger Roll (PL 80.8) Tray 4 Feed Roll, Tray 4 Retard Roll, View/Reset Count 300,000
3 Tray 4 Nudger Roll, Feed
P/H 954 82- MSI/Tray 5 Feed/Retard/Nudger Roll (PL 80.15) MSI/Tray 5 Feed Roll, MSI/Tray 5 Re- View/Reset Count 300,000
4 tard Roll, MSI/Tray 5 Nudger Roll,
Feed
P/H 954 82- Take Away Roll 1 (PL 80.10) Take Away Roll 1 (Tray 1 Feeder) View/Reset Count 1,500,000
7
P/H 954 82- Take Away Roll 2 (PL 80.10) Take Away Roll 2 (Tray 2 Feeder) View/Reset Count 1,500,000
8
P/H 954 82- Take Away Roll 3 (PL 80.10) Take Away Roll 3 (Tray 3 Feeder) View/Reset Count 1,500,000
9
P/H 954 83- Take Away Roll 4 (PL 80.10) Take Away Roll 4 (Tray 4 Feeder) View/Reset Count 1,500,000
0
P/H 954 83- Take Away Roll 5 (PL 80.14) Take Away Roll 5 (Tray 5 Feeder) View/Reset Count 1,500,000
1
P/H 954 83- Take Away Clutch 1 (PL 80.12) Take Away Clutch1 On/Off View/Reset Count 1,500,000
5
Li-
Mod- Chain nk
ule No No HFSI Description Description Action Count
P/H 954 83- Take Away Clutch 2 (PL 80.12) Take Away Clutch2 On/Off View/Reset Count 1,500,000
6
P/H 954 83- Tray 1 Feeder Unit (PL 80.1) Tray 1 Feeder Unit Feed View/Reset Count 1,500,000
7
P/H 954 83- Tray 2 Feeder Unit (PL 80.3) Tray 2 Feeder Unit Feed View/Reset Count 1,500,000
8
P/H 954 83- Tray 3 Feeder Unit (PL 80.5) Tray 3 Feeder Unit Feed View/Reset Count 1,500,000
9
P/H 954 84- Tray 4 Feeder Unit (PL 80.7) Tray 4 Feeder Unit Feed View/Reset Count 1,500,000
0
P/H 954 84- MSI/Feeder Unit (PL 80.15) MSI Feeder Unit Feed View/Reset Count 1,500,000
1
P/H 954 84- MSI Pre Regi Roll (PL 80.14) MSI Pre Registration Roll View/Reset Count 1,500,000
9
Fuser 954 85- Fuser (PL 10.1) Conductive Fuser Unit Fuser Process 216.0mm:BW,FC/+1 Process 216.0mm: 200,000
0 BW,FC/+2
Drive 954 86- Filter Assembly (PL 1.1) UPF Filter View/Reset Count 128,000
0
S C P 4 C l e a n i n g Pr o c e d u r e s
3. Refer to SCP 4 Cleaning Procedures for detailed cleaning instructions. Purpose
4. Reset any HSFI Counter that has been replaced: The purpose is to provide cleaning procedures to be performed at every call.
General Cleaning
Use a dry lint free cloth or a lint free cloth moistened with water for all cleaning unless directed oth-
erwise by the Service Manual. Wipe with a dry lint free cloth if a moistened cloth is used.
3. Jam Sensors
Clean the sensors with a dry cotton swab.
5. Scanner
6. DADF
Check the paper path for debris or damage. Clean the rolls with a clean cloth and Film Remover
as required.
Procedure
1. Verify that the exterior of the copier/printer and the adjacent area are clean. Use a dry cloth or
a cloth moistened with water to clean the copier/printer. Do not use solvents.
2. Check the supply of consumables. Verify that an adequate supply of consumables is available
according to local operating procedures.
3. Conduct any operator training that is needed. Verify that the operator understands that the Au-
tomatic Gradation Adjustment procedure in the User Guide should be used to adjust the colors.
5. Perform the following steps to make a copy of the Demonstration Original for the Customer:
b. Place the Color Test Pattern on the glass with the short edge of the test pattern registered
to the left edge of the glass. Select Tray 1 and make a single copy.
c. Print out the Machine Settings (Configuration Report). Store this report with the service log
in Tray 1.
6. Exit Diagnostics.
9. Discuss the service call with the customer to Verify that the customer understands what has
been done and is satisfied with the results of the service call.
0 0 1 To n e r C R U M M i s m a t c h R A P
One or more Toner Cartridges are of the wrong type (i.e., a “Sold” cartridge installed in a “metered”
configured machine.
Refer to 001 for more information on the PrimeLink Adaptive Vivid and Vivid + Flourescent Toner
configuration.
Procedure
1. Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel.
2. Select Supplies.
3. The UI displays Cartridge Error for the mismatched cartridge.
4. Set NVM values:
Before installing or changing an Adaptive Kit or the CMYK toner dispenser assembly, assign the
Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) values for each toner assembly.
CAUTION: Before installing or changing an Adaptive Kit or the CMYK toner dispenser
assembly, assign the Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) values for each toner assembly.
a. At the device control panel, log in as Administrator.
1. Press the Log In/Out button.
2. Type [admin] , then touch Next.
3. Type the administrator password, refer to GP 11, then touch Enter.
b. Press the Machine Status button, then touch the Tools tab.
c. Touch System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance > NVM Read/Write ,
Figure 1.
0 0 2 - 4 0 0 Pr o Ce s s i n g Pr e v i o u s J o b I n AW P M Fa i l R A P 0 0 2 - 5 0 0 U I S c a n Pa n e l R A P
An error has occurred when the previous Job is being processed at AWPM
Error in CUI scan panel UI detection.
Procedure
1. Stop the job monitoring at the AWPM. Primary Causes
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. IIT being occupied.
3. Perform the job again. 2. Fault is occurring.
3. Service is not CUI.
4. The upper limit number of sheet for XSA.
Procedure
1. Clear all faults listed on the UI.
2. Remove any documents from the IIT.
3. Check for any restrictions due to XSA.
4. Repeat the operation again.
0 0 2 - 7 7 0 I n s u f fi c i e n t H D D C a p a c i t y R A P
Insufficient HDD capacity while processing the job template within a job.
Procedure
1. Delete any possible documents on the hard drive to free up disk space.
2. Enter CE MODE, Accessing UI Diagnostics.
3. Perform dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test.
4. After the machine restarts, and if the fault persists, reenter CE MODE, then perform dC 355 Initi-
alize Hard Disk.
5. If the fault persists, install a new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
IISS extended memory capacity shortage in spite of [with FaxCard] (below 256MB). After avoiding DADF CDI I/F software mismatch
detection condition of 116-389 at power on, extended memory capacity in document scanning
area below 256MB is detected with DADFsc-detected FaultCode, while FaxCard is mounted. Limita- Procedure
tions at the error occurrence are as follows: Upgrade DADF software to same version as controller.
• PF1.5 DADF, Not usable when this fault occurs. Fax send is performable using platen.
• PF1 DADF, DADF is operable even when this fault occurs. Duplex scanning is conducted with me-
chanical reverse operation.
Procedure
CAUTION: The accessories have their own power cord. Whenever a procedure states
to Power Off and then Power On, POPO, etc., powering Off and then powering On the
IOT does NOT Power Off the Accessory. The Accessory will have to be Powered Off and
then On separately from the IOT by unplugging the Accessory power cord. Power Off
and then Power On the DFE prior to Powering Off/On the IOT and accessories.
• If powering Off then ON does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Reinstall the software.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 1 3 , 0 0 3 - 3 1 4 I I Ts c R A M A c c e s s Fa i l u r e R A P 0 0 3 - 3 1 8 DA D F S o f t w a r e Fa u l t
003-313 When attempting to read/write into the RAM, the IITsc detected that an NG was DADF Software Fault.
returned.
Initial Actions
003-314 When attempting to read/write into the NVRAM, the IITsc detected that an NG was
returned. For a blank UI or if the machine fails to boot correctly go to OF 1.1 Power On.
Refer to OF 2.1 IOT DC Power (+3.3 / +5 VDC), OF 2.2 IOT DC Power (+24 VDC) and OF 2.4 DADF
Procedure DC Power to Verify that the DADF LVPS power applied is correct.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
The fault persists. Procedure
Y N • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. 1. Reinstall the software.
Upgrade the software GP 2.
The fault persists. If the fault persists:
Y N
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
2. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, when the UI is completely dark, disconnect the power cord, then let
machine site for at least 5 minutes. Reconnect the power cord, then switch on the machine.
The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Switch off the machine, then remove and reinstall the Controller RAM DIMM. Switch on the
machine.
CAUTION: When removing and reinstalling the RAM, the main power must be
switched off and the power cord disconnected.
The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the installation of the MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Backplane PWB, NVM
PWB, and the IIT Trans PWB connectors and harnesses to make sure that they are installed prop-
erly, then perform the same operation where the error occurred.
The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new DIMM 4G, PL 3.2 Item 2. Switch on the machine, then perform the same operation
where the error occurred.
The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 1 9 DA D F V i d e o D r i v e r D e t e c t i o n Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 3 2 0 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1
Description
DADF Video Driver Detection Fault. An internal processing error occurred in the Controller PWB.
• An abnormal parameter is set as the argument for the Send function.
Procedure Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1. Reinstall the software.
If the fault persists:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 2 1 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 2 0 0 3 - 3 2 2 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 3
Description Description
• After commands were sent twice from the Cont, the Cont could not receive the ACK from the • After commands were sent twice from the Cont, the Cont could not receive the ACK from the
IISS (the Sequence No. of the sent Message Packet is not correct). IISS (the Packet No. of the sent Message Packet is not correct).
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 0 3 - 3 2 3 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 4 0 0 3 - 3 2 4 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 5
Description Description
• After commands were sent twice from the Cont, the Cont could not receive the ACK from the • After commands were sent twice from the Cont, the Cont could not receive the ACK from the
IISS (the message length of the sent Message Packet is not correct). IISS (the check code of the sent Message Packet is not correct).
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 0 3 - 3 2 5 DA D F - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t 6 0 0 3 - 3 2 6 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 7
Description
Controller PWB detected a communication Fault between DADF and Controller. (DADF-Controller
Communication Fault 6.) • After commands were sent twice from the Cont, the Cont could not receive the ACK from the
IISS (framing error was detected at the IISS Hardware).
Procedure Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1. Reinstall the software.
If the fault persists:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 2 7 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 8 0 0 3 - 3 2 8 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 9
Description After a command was sent twice from the Cont, the Cont could not receive the ACK from the IISS
(the receiving abortion error was detected after the header has been recognized at the IISS).
• After commands were sent twice from the Cont, the Cont could not receive the ACK from the
IISS (overrun error was detected at the IISS Hardware).
Procedure
Procedure • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 0 3 - 3 2 9 Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 0 0 0 3 - 3 3 0 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 1
Description Description
• The NAK that notifies of the occurrence of a transmission failure is received. (The Sequence No. • The NAK that notifies of the occurrence of a transmission failure is received. (The Packet No. of
of the received Message Packet is incorrect.) the received Message Packet is incorrect.)
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 0 3 - 3 3 1 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 2 0 0 3 - 3 3 2 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 3
Description Description
• The NAK that notifies of the occurrence of a transmission failure is received. (The message • The NAK that notifies of the occurrence of a transmission failure is received. (The check code of
length of the received Message Packet is incorrect.) the received Message Packet is incorrect.)
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 0 3 - 3 3 3 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 4 0 0 3 - 3 3 4 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 5
Description Description
• The NAK that notifies of the occurrence of a transmission failure is received. (A parity error was • The NAK that notifies of the occurrence of a transmission failure is received. (A framing error
detected by hardware of the UART.) was detected by hardware of the UART.)
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 0 3 - 3 3 5 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 6 0 0 3 - 3 3 6 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 7
Description Description
• The NAK that notifies of the occurrence of a transmission failure is received. (An overrun error • The NAK that notifies of the occurrence of a transmission failure is received. (Abortion of receiv-
was detected by hardware of the UART.) ing was detected after the header has been recognized.)
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 0 3 - 3 3 7 I I S S - E S S Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 1 8 0 0 3 - 3 3 8 DA D F - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t 1 9
Description
Controller PWB detected a communication Fault between DADF and Controller. (DADF-Controller
• After recovering from Power Saver mode, there was no response for a specified time after the Communication Fault 19.)
Power ON command was sent to the IISS.
Procedure Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1. Reinstall the software.
If the fault persists:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 3 9 DA D F - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t 2 0 0 0 3 - 3 4 0 DA D F - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t 2 1
Controller PWB detected a communication Fault between DADF and Controller. (DADF-Controller Controller PWB detected a communication Fault between DADF and Controller. (DADF-Controller
Communication Fault 20.) Communication Fault 21.)
Procedure Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Reinstall the software. 1. Reinstall the software.
If the fault persists: If the fault persists:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 4 1 DA D F - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t 2 2 0 0 3 - 3 4 2 DA D F - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t 2 3
Controller PWB detected a communication Fault between DADF and Controller. (DADF-Controller Controller PWB detected a communication Fault between DADF and Controller. (DADF-Controller
Communication Fault 22.) Communication Fault 23.)
Procedure Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Reinstall the software. 1. Reinstall the software.
If the fault persists: If the fault persists:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 4 3 DA D F - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t 2 4 0 0 3 - 3 4 4 Po w e r O n H o t l i n e Fa u l t
This status code is displayed for a power on hotline Fault.
Controller PWB detected a communication Fault between DADF and Controller. (DADF-Controller
Communication Fault 24.) Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: 1. Reinstall the software.
If the fault persists: 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 4 5 X P I O U n m a t c h Fa u l t 1 0 0 3 - 3 4 6 X P I O U n m a tc h Fa u l t 1
X PIO Unmatch Fault 1. An abnormality with the X hot line was detected when an X job Fault was X PIO Mismatch Fault 2. An abnormality with the X hot line was detected when DADF image deliv-
received from the DADF. ered was received from the DADF.
Procedure Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Reinstall the software. 1. Reinstall the software.
If the fault persists: If the fault persists:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 3 4 7 , 0 0 3 - 3 4 8 I I Ts c S D Ca r d / H D D A c c e s s Fa i l u r e 0 0 3 - 7 0 0 Re t u r n e d a l o t o f D o c u m e n t s e r r o r
003-347 When attempting to read/write into the SD Card, the IITsc detected that an NG was Description
returned.
• When the originals are ejected due to a Jam, etc., it was detected that the number of ejected
003-348 When attempting to read from/write into the Hard Disk, the IITsc detected that an NG originals is more than the number that was taken in.
was returned.
Procedure
Procedure • Check the output, reload the originals that were not copied yet and start again.
CAUTION: When removing and reinstalling the RAM, the main power must be
switched off.
The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check the installation of the MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Backplane PWB, NVM
PWB, and the IIT Trans PWB connectors and harnControlleres to make sure that they are installed
properly, then perform the same operation where the error occurred.
The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new DIMM 4G, PL 3.2 Item 2. Switch on the machine, then perform the same operation
where the error occurred.
The fault persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
00 3 - 7 0 1 D u p l ic at i o n pr e ve n t io n c o d e d e t ec t 0 0 3 - 7 0 2 D i f fe r e n t m a g n i fi c a t i o n , fo r s u r fa c e a n d b a c k o f a
Description document
• When the document was scanned, the HWM Detection H/W detected copy restriction codes in Different magnification, for surface and back of a document
the document.
Primary Causes
Procedure
In copying the two sides of the document simultaneously, the machine detected such settings as
• Use a document which does not have any copy restriction codes embedded.
apply different magnification ratios to the face (side 1) and the back (side 2) of the document.
If the fault persists, perform the following procedure to correct it.
Detection error due to Hybrid Watermark Board failure. Procedure
Replace the Hybrid Watermark Board. • Change the settings so that the same magnification ratio can be applied to the face (side 1)
and the back (side 2) of the document.
0 0 3 - 7 0 3 A u t o Co l o r Co r r e c t i o n Pa t c h Po s i t i o n Fa i l 0 0 3 - 7 0 4 Co l o r Co r r e c t i o n Va l u e D i f fe r e n c e Fa i l
Auto Color Correction Patch Position Fail Color Correction Value Difference Fail
Color Correction Patch position error during 2 Sided Simultaneous Scan. Color correction color difference error during 2 Sided Simultaneous Scan.
Procedure
• Load the 2 Sided Simultaneous Scan Correction Chart correctly.
0 0 3 - 7 0 5 Pa p e r S i z e M i s m a tc h o f t h e E n e r g y S a v i n g Re t u r n Fa i l 0 0 3 - 7 0 6 L a s t D o c F i x W i t h o u t Pe r fe c t B i n d B o d y Pa g e
Paper Size Mismatch of the Energy Saving Return Fail Description
A Paper Size mismatch error when returning from Energy Saver mode. • When it was confirmed that there is no next document even before scanning the body page dur-
ing Perfect Bind.
Primary Causes <Examples of conceivable occurrence cases>
• When the Paper Size was changed in the middle of Energy Saver mode (partial sleep) and, upon -No next document was confirmed due to timeout of Auto Resume Timer (including the wait for
returning from the Energy Saver mode, a Copy Job (tray specification) was performed before addition of cover pages)
the change in Tray Size was detected. -The no next document button was selected after the separator scan before scanning the body
Procedure -No next document was confirmed as the Maximum Stored Number of Sheets had been
exceeded
• Cancel the job and then retry/reset the Job.
Procedure
• Perform the copy again while making sure that the body pages are scanned properly.
0 0 3 - 7 5 0 B o o k D u p l e x - I n s u f fi c i e n t D o c s 0 0 3 - 7 5 1 U n d e r PA N T H E R C a p a c i t y ( S c a n )
Book Duplex-Insufficient Docs. Insufficient original sheets for a duplex book. Under PANTHER Capacity (Scan). Was below the PANTHER capacity in the Scan service (DADF sc).
Procedure Procedure
• Change the parameters and repeat the operation. If the problem continues, Power Off and then • Increase the resolution or enlarge the scan area (Width MM. x Length MM.).
On.
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
Software Mismatch. Reinstall the software
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 7 5 2 6 0 0 d p i C a n n o t B e S c a n n e d ( DA D F ) 0 0 3 - 7 53 Can no t s c an o ve r 3 0 0 DP I
This status code is displayed if 600dpi cannot be scanned (DADF). Description
• The 300 dpi resolution or more which cannot be scanned was detected after the DADF Mixed
Procedure 2-Sided Mode job is accepted.
• Perform scanning below 400 dpi resolution or perform scanning in other than mixed mode.
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: Procedure
• Perform scanning at 200 dpi or lower resolution, or specify a job to scan with NON-MIX mode.
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
Procedure Procedure
• Execute the same job again. • Execute the same job again.
0 0 3 - 7 6 0 S c a n S e t t i n g s Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 7 6 1 I n c o r r e c t Pa p e r Tra y S i z e
Scan Settings Fault. Read settings were incorrect. Description
• When the Cover Content Tray or Separator + N set Tray is selected in APS, the paper size is dif-
Procedure ferent from that in the Cover Tray or the Transparency Tray.
1. Abort the job. change the parameters, then repeat the operation.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Procedure
3. If the fault persists, update the software, GP 2. • Change the job activation parameters such as Tray No., Paper Size, and repeat the operation.
0 0 3 - 7 6 3 A d j u s t m e n t C h a r t N o t Fo u n d 0 0 3 - 7 6 4 D o c u m e n t i n s u f fi c i e n t ( i m a g e o v e r l a y )
Adjustment Chart Not Found. Error reading the contrast correction chart. Description
• During Image Overlay, only 1 page can be stored (single sheet document).
Procedure
This occurs in B/W machines and does not occur in Color machines
• Place the auto gradation adjustment chart properly and retry.
– If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: Procedure
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB. • Abort job automatically.
0 0 3 - 7 8 0 S c a n I m a g e Co m p r e s s i o n Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 7 9 5 A M S L i m i t Fa u l t
Scan Image Compression Fault. Read image Compression error. AMS Limit Fault. When using the automatic magnification specification (AMS) it was outside the
magnification range (25% ~ 400%) after the original was automatically detected.
Procedure
• Abort the job. change the scan resolution parameters and repeat the operation. Procedure
• Abort the job. change the parameters and repeat the operation.
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 9 1 0 Pe r fe c t B i n d Co v e r D o c Co u n t O v e r 0 0 3 - 9 1 3 D o c u m e n t S i z e E r r o r ( W i t h o u t A b i l i t y fo r A u t o D e t e c t )
Description Description
• When the required number of cover pages had been scanned, • When using IIT/DADF without ability for auto detect, and virtual original size prohibition func-
1. A next document still exists at the DADF tion is selected
2. A document that was specified for Duplex Scan only had its Side 1 scanned Procedure
3. 2 Sided Scan was instructed at Platen Book Copying, but only 1 side was scanned • Enter the appropriate value for original size.
Procedure
• As the scanning for cover page was forcibly ended, you can continue by starting the scan for the
middle documents.
To end, press <C>.
0 0 3 - 9 1 5 DA D F M u l t i Fe e d D e t e c t i o n S e n s o r B r o ke n / 0 0 3 - 9 30 Can no t s c an o ve r 3 0 0 DP I
Disconnected For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 300dpi, 400dpi and 600dpi are not available.
Description Primary Causes
• When a DADF Job is active and Multi-Feed Detection is available, the DADF detected 005-600 • Because DAM memory is not enough, a selected resolution is not available for scanning a A3
(DADF Multi-Feed Detection - Error Fail) or 005-601 (DADF Multi-Feed Detection - AMP Not Con- document. It is available for scanning a A4/B4 document.
nected Fail)
(During detection, IITsc is changed to 003-915 and issued) Procedure
• Operate for scanning at below 300dpi.
Procedure
• If the fault persists, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Select [Resume Job (no DADF multi-feed)] or [Delete Job] (same operation as user actions).
00 3 - 9 3 1 Ca n n o t s c an o ve r 40 0 D P I 0 0 3 -9 32 Can not s c an 6 0 0D PI
For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 400dpi and 600dpi are not available. For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 600dpi is not available.
Procedure Procedure
• Operate for scanning at below 400dpi. • Operate for scanning at below 600dpi.
• If the fault persists, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • If the fault persists, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure Procedure
• Operate for scanning at below 300dpi. • Operate for scanning at below 400dpi.
• If the fault persists, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • If the fault persists, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
00 3 - 9 3 5 N e xt Do cu me n t s Can n o t s c a n o ve r 6 0 0 DP I 0 0 3 - 9 4 0 I n s u f fi c i e n t M e m o r y Fa u l t
For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 600dpi is not available (when the next document This status code is displayed if the DAM Memory is insufficient.
exists).
Procedure
Primary Causes Cancel the job
• Because DAM memory is not enough, a selected resolution is not available for scanning a A3 • Clear the B/W setting for Color mode or the Side 2 cover image setting, and execute the job
document. It is available for scanning a A4/B4 document. again.
Procedure • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• Operate for scanning at below 600dpi. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
• If the fault persists, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 9 4 1 Pa g e m e m o r y i n s u f fi c i e n t 0 0 3 - 9 4 2 D o c u m e n t S i z e Fa u l t
A shortage of page memory Document Size Fault. The size of the original could not be automatically recognized.
0 0 3 - 9 4 4 I m a g e Re p e a t Co u n t Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 9 4 6 A P S I m a g e Ro t a t i o n Fa u l t
Image Repeat Count Fault. The image repeat count was incorrect, so images have been omitted. Copy Vertical/Horizontal Difference (APS). Without rotation the image would be truncated, but a
paper size that cannot be rotated was selected.
Procedure
• Change the image repeat count parameter and repeat the operation. Procedure
• Select an appropriate paper tray manually.
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 9 4 7 Re p l a c e d O r i g i n a l Co u n t Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 9 4 8 Re p l a c e d O r i g i n a l M i s m a t c h
Replaced Original Count Fault. The number of original sheets replaced by the user is less than the Replaced Original Mismatch. The originals that have been put into position are different (original
number of sheets originally put into position. size, direction, or ACS color mode) from those before the replacement.
Procedure Procedure
• Reload the correct number of documents. • Return a document with the correct size again.
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
00 3 - 9 5 1 1 j o b m ax p a ge o ve r 0 0 3 - 9 5 2 Re t u r n D o c u m e n t s C o l o r M i s m a t c h
Stored pages limit for a job exceeded Return Documents Color mismatch. The originals were replaced but the color of the originals re-
placed by the user was different.
Primary Causes
• The number of pages that can be scanned for a job is exceeded. Procedure
• Return a document with the correct color again.
Procedure • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions.
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 9 6 3 A P S Tra y Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 9 6 5 AT S / A P S N o Pa p e r
This is an Auto Paper Select fault. One of the following conditions exist: ATS/APS No Paper. There is no paper in the trays that can be selected with APS.
• There is no APS tray that can supply paper without truncating the image.· The image is larger
than A3 or 17".
Initial Actions
• A tray other than TTM is not set up for APS and the image is larger than A4 or letter.· Enter the System Admin mode. (press the Log In/Out button, enter the user name and the pass-
word. Defaults are admin and 1111 ). Select System Settings / System Settings / Common Set-
• All trays set up for APS are broken. tings / Paper Tray Settings / Paper Type Priority. Verify that the paper trays are not all set to Auto
• All trays that could be set up for APS are not set up that way. Paper Off.
• All trays have an irregular specification.
Procedure
• All trays have the color attribute and the copies are black-and-white. • Add paper.
• All trays have the black-and-white attribute and the copies are color. • If the problem occurs frequently, check the No Paper Sensor of the tray.
Initial Actions • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
Enter the System Administrator mode (press Log In/Out , enter user name - admin and the default 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
password - 1111 ) and follow this path:
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
• System Settings
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
• System Settings
• Common Settings
• Paper Tray Settings
• Paper Type Priority
Verify that the paper trays are not all set to Auto Paper Off.
Procedure
Select the tray and retry.
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 9 6 6 AT S / A P S D e s t i n a t i o n Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 9 6 7 DA D F A P S N o D e s t i n a t i o n
ATS/APS No Destination Fault. There are no trays that can be selected with APS. Description
• The detected paper size is not in the Tray.
Procedure
• Change the setting and retry. Procedure
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: 1. Either load the paper size that is displayed on the Panel into the Tray or select a Tray that con-
tains the desired paper size.
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. In the case where an A4SEF document was misdetected to be a Letter document, first cancel
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. the job, set the DADF Document Guide properly to both sides of the scanned document and
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. then operate again.
0 0 3 - 9 6 8 P u n c h Po s i t i o n Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 9 6 9 P u n c h S i z e Fa u l t
Punch Position Fault. It is not possible to punch at the selected location. Punch Size Fault. It is not possible to punch with the selected paper size.
Procedure Procedure
• Specify an appropriate punch position, clear Punching or cancel Punch, and execute the job • Clear Punching and retry.
again.
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 9 7 0 FA X L i n e M e m o r y O v e r f l o w 0 0 3 - 9 7 1 Pr e v e n t i o n Co d e D e t e c t w i t h t h e R i g h t t o Ca n c e l
The number of FAX slow-scan lines is over. Copy restriction codes detected in document to be copied (for users who has the permission to tem-
porarily clear the detection)
Primary Causes
• The number of slow-scan lines has exceeded the upper limit due to Fax parallel composition, Primary Causes
long- document enlargement, etc. • When job scan was executed by a user who has the permission to temporarily clear the copy re-
striction code detection, copy restriction codes were detected in the document.
Procedure
• Press the Continue button to store data up to the memory capacity and continue scanning the Procedure
next document, or, press the Cancel button to abort the job. • Because this document cannot be copied, press the [Cancel] or [Continue] button on the panel.
• Switch off, then SWITCH on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, check the installation of
the page memory.
0 0 3 - 9 7 2 S t o r e d Pa g e O v e r f l o w 0 0 3 - 9 7 3 I m a g e Ro ta t i o n Fa u l t
Maximum Stored Page Over Flow. The number of original sheets exceeded the maximum number The directions of the original and the image are different, and the image would be truncated if it
of sheets that can be stored. isn't rotated, but it isn't possible to rotate.
Procedure Procedure
• Keep the qty of docs within the max qty of docs to be stored. • Start, leaving the condition as it is, or cancel the job.
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 9 7 4 N e x t O r i g i n a l S p e c i fi c a t i o n 0 0 3 - 9 7 6 FA X L i n e M e m o r y O v e r f l o w ( N u p )
Next Original Specification. All the originals that were put into position have been scanned. No. of lines in the Slow Scan direction exceeded during Fax N-up.
0 0 3 - 9 8 0 S ta p l e Po s i t i o n Fa u l t 0 0 3 - 9 8 1 S t a p l e S i z e Fa u l t
Staple Position Fault. It is not possible to staple at the specified location. Staple Size Fault. It is not possible to staple with the selected paper size.
Procedure Procedure
• Specify a Staple position again, change the setting, or cancel Staple, and execute the same job • Specify a Staple position again, change the setting, or cancel Staple, and execute the same job
again. again.
• If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following: • If powering Off then On does not resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB. 1. Check the connection between the DADF PWB and Controller PWB.
2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. 2. Install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 3 - 9 8 2 I I Ts c H D D a c c e s s e r r o r
HDD was determined to be full due to collate, stored or interrupted jobs.
Procedure
1. Process or delete the jobs (documents) stored in the same HDD partition, then repeat the
operation.
2. Expand the HDD partition size of the Copy service.
3. If the fault persists, install a new HDD Assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
0 0 5 - 1 2 1 DA D F Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n J a m 0 0 5 - 1 2 2 DA D F S i m p l e x / S i d e 1 DA D F Pr e Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r
On Jam
DADF Feed Out Sensor On Jam
• The Feed Sensor did not come on within a given time after the start of pre-feed. DADF Simplex/Side 1 DADF Pre Registration Sensor On Jam.
• In the duplex case, the Feed Sensor did not detect the original within a given time after the start 1. The DADF Pre Registration Sensor did not come on within a given time after the Feed Sensor
of the first feed operation (Feed Motor On (CW)). came on for the first original.
Procedure 2. The DADF Pre Registration Sensor did not come on within a given time after the start of the
Refer to the following procedures as required: pre-registration operation for the second or later original.
3. The DADF Feed Out Sensor (dC330, code [005-205]) for operation failure, PL 5.9 Item 2. • Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper.
4. The DADF Feed Motor (dC330, code [005-004]) for operation failure, PL 5.5 Item 1. • Check for any damaged/out-of-spec/improperly loaded document.
5. The Nudger Roll for Nip operation failure. • Feed Roll/Nudger Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation.
6. The Drive Gear for wear and damage. • Pre Registration Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation.
7. The Timing Belt for skipped teeth and improper Belt tension. • DADF Pre Regi Sensor (DC330 [005-206]) for operation failure, PL 5.9 Item 2.
8. The amount of grease at the Pulley and Gear. • DADF Feed Motor (DC330 [005-004]) for operation failure, PL 5.5 Item 1.
9. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. • DADF Pre Regi Motor (DC330 [005-013]) for operation failure, PL 5.10 Item 1.
• DADF Takeaway Clutch (DC330 [005-087]) for operation failure, PL 5.10 Item 6.
• Drive gears for wear/breakage.
• The Timing Belt for skipped teeth and improper Belt tension.
• The amount of grease at the Pulley and Gear.
• Feed Clutch for an improper operation.
• If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
0 0 5 - 1 2 3 DA D F S i m p l e x / S i d e 1 R e g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m 0 0 5 - 1 2 4 DA D F L e a d R e g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m
DADF Simplex/Side 1 Registration Sensor On Jam. The Registration Sensor did not come on within a DADF Lead Registration Sensor On Jam. The Lead Registration Sensor did not come on within a giv-
given time after the DADF Pre Registration Sensor came on. en time after the start of reading (Registration motor On).
Procedure Procedure
1. Transportation failure due to foreign substance in the document path. Check the following:
2. The surface of the Takeaway Roll and Pre Regi Roll for foreign substances. • Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper
3. The surface of the Takeaway Roll and Pre Regi Roll for wear. • Check for any damaged/out-of-spec document.
4. The DADF Regi Sensor (DC330 [005-110]) for operation failure, PL 5.9 Item 2. • Registration Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
5. The DADF Pre Regi Sensor (DC330 [005-206]) for operation failure, PL 5.9 Item 2. • Drive gears for wear/breakage
6. The DADF Pre Regi Motor (DC330 [005-013]) for operation failure, PL 5.10 Item 1. • Check the following for an open wire or poor contact:
7. The DADF Takeaway Clutch (DC330 [005-087]) for operation failure, PL 5.10 Item 6. – Lead Registration Sensor P/J 779-2 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B8
8. The Drive Gear for wear and damage. – Lead Registration Sensor P/J 779-1 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B9
9. The Timing Belt for skipped teeth and improper Belt tension. – Lead Registration Sensor P/J 779-3 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B7
10. The amount of grease at the Pulley and Gear. • If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
11. If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
0 0 5 - 1 2 5 DA D F R e g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r O f f J a m 0 0 5 - 1 2 6 DA D F P l a t e n E x i t S e n s o r O n J a m
DADF Registration Sensor Off Jam. The Lead Registration Sensor did not turn off within a given DADF Platen Exit Sensor On Jam. The Out Sensor did not come on within a given time after the
time after the start of reading (Registration Motor On). start of reading (Registration Motor On).
Procedure Procedure
Check the following: Check the following:
• Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper • Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper
• Check for any damaged/out-of-spec document • Check for any damaged/out-of-spec document
• Registration Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation • Registration Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Platen Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation • Platen Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Drive gears/Belt for wear/breakage/poor tension • Out Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Check the following for an open wire or poor contact: • Drive gears/Belt for wear/breakage/poor tension
– DADF Registration Sensor P/J 776-2 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A8 • Check the following for an open wire or poor contact:
– DADF Registration Sensor P/J 776-1 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A9 – Platen Exit Sensor P/J 778-2 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B5
– DADF Registration Sensor P/J 776-3 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A7 – Platen Exit Sensor P/J 778-1 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B6
• If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3. – Platen Exit Sensor P/J 778-3 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B4
• If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
0 0 5 - 1 2 7 DA D F P l a t e n E x i t S e n s o r O f f J a m 0 0 5 - 1 2 8 DA D F E x i t S e n s o r 1 O n J a m ( S i m p l e x M o d e )
DADF Platen Exit Sensor Off Jam. The Platen Exit Sensor did not turn off within a given time after DADF Exit Sensor 1 On Jam (Simplex Mode). In simplex mode, Exit Sensor #1 did not come on with-
the Registration Sensor turned off. in a given time after the Out Sensor turned off.
Procedure Procedure
Check the following: Check the following:
• Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper • Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper
• Check for any damaged/out-of-spec document. • Check for any damaged/out-of-spec document.
• Registration Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation • Registration Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Platen Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation • Platen Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Out Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation • Out Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Simp/Dup Gate for an improper operation (Simp/Dup Gate Solenoid for an improper operation) • Simp/Dup Gate for an improper operation (Simp/Dup Gate Solenoid for an improper operation)
• Drive gears/Belt for wear/breakage/poor tension • Drive gears/Belt for wear/breakage/poor tension
• Check the following for an open wire or poor contact: • Check the following for an open wire or poor contact:
– Platen Exit Sensor P/J 778-2 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B5 – DADF Exit Sensor 1 P/J 774-2 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A2
– Platen Exit Sensor P/J 778-1 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B6 – DADF Exit Sensor 1 P/J 774-1 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A3
– Platen Exit Sensor P/J 778-3 to DADF PWB P/J 757-B4 – DADF Exit Sensor 1 P/J 774-3 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A1
• If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3. • If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
0 0 5 - 1 2 9 DA D F E x i t S e n s o r 1 O f f J a m ( S i m p l e x M o d e ) 0 0 5 - 1 4 1 DA D F Fe e d S e n s o r O f f J a m
DADF Exit Sensor 1 Off Jam (Simplex Mode). In simplex mode, Exit Sensor 1 did not turn off within
DADF Feed Sensor Off Jam. The DADF Pre Registration Sensor turned off before the Feed Sensor
a given time after the Platen Exit Sensor turned off.
turned off.
Procedure Procedure
Check the following:
Check the following:
• Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper
• Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper
• Check for any damaged/out-of-spec document.
• Check for any damaged/out-of-spec document.
• Registration Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Retard Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Platen Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Feed Roll/Nudger Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Out Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Check if any out-of-spec doc was transported.
• No.1 Exit Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Check the following for an open wire or poor contact:
• Exit Area for a foreign object/the deformed Static Elimination Brush
– DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J -2763 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A8
• Simp/Dup Gate for an improper operation (Simp/Dup Gate Solenoid for an improper operation)
– DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J 763-1 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A9
• Drive gears/Belt for wear/breakage/poor tension
– DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J 763-3 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A7
• Check the following for an open wire, short or poor contact:
• If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
– DADF Exit Sensor 1 P/J 774-2 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A2
– DADF Exit Sensor 1 P/J 774-1 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A3
– DADF Exit Sensor 1 P/J 774-3 to DADF PWB P/J 757-A1
• If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
0 0 5 - 1 4 4 DA D F DA D F P r e R e g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m 0 0 5 - 1 4 6 DA D F DA D F Pr e Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m
DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor On Jam. The DADF Pre Registration Sensor came on before a DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor On Jam. The DADF Pre Registration Sensor came on before a
given time due to original skew. given time due to original skew.
Procedure Procedure
Check the following: Check the following:
• Check if the document guides are properly set. • Check if the document guides are properly set.
• Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper • Document Path for a foreign object/a burr/a piece of paper
• Nudger Roll for uniform contact with the tray loaded with documents. • Nudger Roll for uniform contact with the tray loaded with documents.
• Feed Roll/Retard Roll for uniform contact with the document. • Feed Roll/Retard Roll for uniform contact with the document.
• Check for any damaged/curled/out-of-spec/improperly loaded doc. • Check for any damaged/curled/out-of-spec/improperly loaded doc.
• Check for an out-of-spec combination of sizes (Mixed Sizes) • Check for an out-of-spec combination of sizes (Mixed Sizes)
• Check the following for an open wire or poor contact: • Check the following for an open wire or poor contact:
– DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J 763-2 to DADF PWB P/J 754-A8 – DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J 763-2 to DADF PWB P/J 754-A8
– DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J 763-1 to DADF PWB P/J 754-A9 – DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J 763-1 to DADF PWB P/J 754-A9
– DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J 763-3 to DADF PWB P/J 754-A7 – DADF DADF Pre Registration Sensor P/J 763-3 to DADF PWB P/J 754-A7
• If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3. • If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
0 0 5 - 1 5 3 DA D F Le a d Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r O f f J a m ( Pe r fo ra t e d 0 0 5 - 1 6 0 DA D F Tra y L i f t U p Fa u l t ( D o c u m e n t S e t ) ( W i t h i n J o b )
Original Mode)
DADF Tray Lift Up Fault (Document Set) (Within Job). The originals were put into position and the
Stack Height sensor did not come on within a given time after the tray began rising. Or, it was de-
DADF lead registration sensor off jam (perforated original mode). In perforated original mode, the
tected that the Bottom Sensor did not turn off. (Detected during run, stop, or purge.).
lead registration sensor did not turn off within a given time after the sensor came on.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Manually rotate the Tray Motor drive gears.
• Check the hole (not the center, the farthest periphery from the doc trail edge (TE)) at the doc TE The gears rotate with no load.
is within 19mm from the doc TE. Y N
• Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-207] to activate Remove any load like binding gears that causes an improper DADF Tray Up operation.
the DADF lead registration sensor. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-086]. Select Start.
• If the DADF lead registration sensor fails, install a new DADF lead registration sensor, PL 5.9 The Tray Motor rotates. (The Feeder Cover Interlock should be closed.)
Item 4. Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 758-1 (+) on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 753-1 (+) on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Referring to Chapter 7 Wirenets, check the INTLK On +24VDC circuit to the DADF
PWB.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect P/J 758 from the DADF PWB.
Approx. 19 ohms are measured between the 1 pin and 2/3/4/5 pins each of Connector
J758.
Y N
If the fault persists, install a new DADF Tray Motor Assembly, PL 5.5.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-203] (DADF Stack
Height Sensor). Select Start.
Manually raise and lower the Nudger Roll. The display toggles between H and L.
Y N
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the Tray Full Sensor, PL 12.2.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-202] (DADF Bottom
Sensor). Select Start.
Manually raise and lower the DADF Tray. The display toggles between H and L.
Y N
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the DADF Bottom Sensor, PL 5.6.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Procedure Procedure
Follow the instructions on the UI. Follow the instructions on the UI. If the originals are all the same size, or if this fault is declared dur-
ing a single-original copy job.
0 0 5 - 1 9 7 Pr o h i b i t Co m b i n e S i z e J a m 0 0 5 - 1 9 8 To o S h o r t S i z e J a m
Prohibit Combine Size Jam. A size that does not allow combining was detected. Too Short Size Jam. The originals could not be transported because the length was too short in the
secondary scan direction. (When the leading edge of the original reached the DADF Pre Registration
Procedure Sensor the trailing edge had already passed the Feed Sensor.).
Follow the instructions on the UI.
Procedure
Check the size of the doc the user ran. If it is within the allowable DADF paper transport length
[min. size=A5 (140mmx210mm)], check the following:
dC330 code [005-206] DADF Pre Registration Sensor, PL 5.9.
dC330 code [005-204] DADF Feed Sensor 1/2, PL 5.8.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
0 0 5 - 1 9 9 To o Lo n g S i z e J a m 0 0 5 - 2 1 0 DA D F D o w n l o a d Fa i l
When the IISS starts up (Power ON/Sleep recovery), it was detected that the DADF is in Download
Too Long Size Jam. Originals were detected that were longer than the secondary scan length that Mode.
the DADF can transport.
Cause/Action
• Simplex mode: 670.0 mm or more.
Perform the DADF software download.
• Duplex mode: 477.4 mm or more.
Procedure
Check the size of the doc the user ran. If it is within the allowable DADF paper transport length,
check the following:
dC330 [005-206] DADF Pre Registration Sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2.
dC330 [005-204] DADF Feed Sensor 1/2, PL 5.9 Item 2.
If the fault persists, replace DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
0 0 5 - 2 1 2 B o t t o m S e n s o r Lo g i c Fa i l 0 0 5 - 2 7 5 DA D F R A M Fa u l t
When the IISS starts up (Power ON/Sleep recovery), it was detected that the DADF is in Download
Mode. DADF RAM Fault. An error was detected in the DADF PWB RAM. (Checked when power is switched
on.).
Cause/Action
Perform the DADF software download. Procedure
If switching the Machine Off then On does not resolve the problem, install a new DADF PWB, PL
5.3.
0 0 5 - 2 8 0 DA D F E E P R O M Fa u l t 0 0 5 - 2 8 1 DA D F Tra y L i f t D o w n Fa u l t
DADF EEPROM Fault. A write error to DADF EEPROM or a communication error with EEPROM was DADF Tray Lift Down Fault. The Bottom Sensor did not come on within a given time after the DADF
detected. tray began to lower.
Procedure Initial Actions
If switching the Machine Off then On does not resolve the problem, replace DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Check that there is no foreign object under the Tray.
Procedure
Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Manually rotate the Tray Motor drive gears.
The gears rotate with no load.
Y N
Remove any load like binding gears that causes an improper DADF Tray Down operation.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-091]. Select Start.
The Tray Motor rotates. (Feeder Cover Interlock should be closed.)
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 758-1 (+) on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 753-1 (+) on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Referring to Chapter 7 Wirenets, check the INTLK On +24VDC circuit to J753-1
on the DADF PWB.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect P/J 758 from the DADF PWB.
Approx. 19 ohms are measured between the 1 pin and 2/3/4/5 pins each of Connector
J758.
Y N
If the fault persists, install a new DADF Tray Motor Assembly, PL 5.5.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-202] (DADF Bottom
Sensor). Select Start.
Manually raise and lower the DADF Tray. The display toggles between H and L.
Y N
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the DADF Bottom Sensor, PL 5.6.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
0 0 5 - 2 8 2 DA D F Tra y L i f t U p Fa u l t ( N o D o c u m e n t ) 0 0 5 - 2 8 3 DA D F S t a c k H e i g h t S e n s o r Lo g i c Fa u l t
DADF Tray Lift Up Fault (No Document). During the initializing movement when no document had DADF Stack Height Sensor Logic Fault.
been put into position, the Bottom Sensor did not turn off within a given time after the tray began
to rise. Procedure
No corrective action is required, for information only.
Procedure
Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Manually rotate the Tray Motor drive gears.
The gears rotate with no load.
Y N
Remove any load like binding gears that causes an improper DADF Tray Up operation.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-086]. Select Start.
The Tray Motor rotates. (The Feeder Cover Interlock should be closed.)
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 758-1 on the DADF PWB (+) and GND (-).
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 758-1 (+) on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Referring to Chapter 7 Wirenets, check the INTLK On +24VDC circuit to P/J 753-1
on the DADF PWB.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect P/J 758 from DADF PWB.
Approx. 19 ohms are measured between the 1 pin and 2/3/4/5 pins each of Connector P/J
758.
Y N
If the fault persists, install a new DADF Tray Motor Assembly, PL 5.5.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-203] (DADF Stack
Height Sensor). Select Start.
Manually raise and lower the Nudger Roll. The display toggles between H and L.
Y N
Perform, GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the DADF Stack Height Sensor.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-202] (DADF Bottom
Sensor). Select Start.
Manually raise and lower the DADF Tray. The display toggles between H and L.
Y N
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the DADF Bottom Sensor, PL 5.5.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
0 0 5 - 2 8 4 DA D F A P S S e n s o r Lo g i c Fa u l t 0 0 5 - 3 0 5 DA D F Fe e d e r Co v e r I n t e r l o c k O p e n ( R u n )
DADF APS Sensor Logic Fault. There is a logical inconsistency among the outputs of APS Sensors 1 ~
3. DADF Feeder Cover Interlock Open (Run). During a DADF operation the Feeder Cover Interlock
opened.
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, then check the following sensors. Procedure
If any of the sensors exhibits a problem, troubleshoot that sensor, Perform GP 21, How to Check a Manually close the Feeder Cover Interlock Switch.
Sensor, to troubleshoot the sensor. If none of the sensors have a problem, install a new DADF PWB,
PL 5.3. 005-305 has disappeared. (005-308 appears.)
Y N
dC330 [005-218] DADF APS Sensor 1, PL 5.9 Item 2. +24VDC is measured between P/J 753-1 (+) on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
dC330 [005-219] DADF APS Sensor 2, PL 5.9 Item 2. +24VDC is measured between Feeder Cover Interlock Switch F1-1(+) and GND (-).
dC330 [005-220] DADF APS Sensor 3, PL 5.9 Item 2. Y N
+24VDC is measured between the Feeder Cover Interlock Switch F2-2 (+) and
GND (-).
Y N
+24 VDC is measured at P/J 753-2 on the DADF PWB.
Y N
+24 VDC is measured at P/J 755 (pins A10-A14 and B1-B4) on the
DADF PWB.
Y N
Check the +24 VDC circuit through the DADF PWB, to the IIT
+24 V LVPS, PL 1.3. Check for a blown Fuse (F1000 on the
DADF PWB), open wire, short, or poor contact. Refer to, OF 2.4
DADF DC Power RAP.
Replace:
• Fuse F1 on the DADF PWB.
• DADF PWB.
Check the circuit between P/J 753-2 on the DADF PWB and the Feeder Cov-
er Interlock Switch F2-2 for an open wire, short or poor contact.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF Cover Interlock Switch, PL 5.7.
Check the circuit between the Feeder Cover Interlock Switch F1-1 and P/J 753-1 on the
DADF PWB for an open wire, short or poor contact.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
The problem is a misalignment between the DADF Feeder Cover and the Switch. Check for a bent
Feeder Cover actuator and/or an improperly positioned Switch.
0 0 5 - 3 0 9 DA D F L / H C o v e r I n t e r l o c k O p e n ( R u n ) 0 0 5 - 5 0 0 W r i t e t o DA D F - R O M e r r o r d e t e c t i o n ( D u r i n g D L D
method)
DADF L/H Cover Interlock Open (Run). During a DADF operation the L/H Interlock opened.
Description
Procedure • An error was detected when writing data to the DADF-ROM.
Not able to carry out normal operation because ROM content is missing.
Open and close the DADF L/H Cover to check if the Sensor actuator operates properly.
The Sensor actuator has operated properly. Procedure
Y N • Retry job. If retry failed, replace the DADF-ROM and perform VerUP operation on the DLD meth-
Check for the following: od again.
• Improperly installed DADF L/H Cover
• Foreign objects.
• Disconnected/bent Sensor Actuator
Remove the DADF Front Cover. Close DADF L/H Cover.
+5VDC is measured between P/J 755-A2 (+)on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
+5VDC is measured between P/J 786-2 (+) of the L/H Cover Interlock Sensor and GND (-).
Y N
Check the circuit between P/J 786-2 of the L/H Cover Interlock Sensor and P/J 755-A2 on the
DADF PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
+5VDC is measured between P/J 786-1 (+) and -3 (-) of L/H Cover Interlock Sensor.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J 755-A3 (+) and -A1 (-) on the DADF PWB.
Y N
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3.
Check the circuits each between P/J 755-A3 on the DADF PWB and P/J 786-1 of the L/H Cover
Interlock Sensor, and between P/J 755-A1 on the DADF PWB and P/J 786-3 of the L/H Cover
Interlock Sensor for an open wire or poor contact.
If the fault persists, install a new L/H Cover Interlock Sensor, PL 5.7.
0 0 5 - 9 0 5 , 9 0 6 DA D F Fe e d I n / O u t S e n s o r S ta t i c J a m 0 0 5 - 9 0 7 , 9 2 0 DA D F P r e R e g i s t r a t i o n / S k e w D e t e c t S e n s o r S t a t i c
Jam
005-905 The DADF feed in sensor 1/2 went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock closed BSD 5.6 DADF Document Pre Registration and Skew Detect
or platen interlock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected.
005-907 The DADF pre registration sensor went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock
005-906 The DADF feed out sensor went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock closed or closed or platen interlock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected.
platen interlock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected.
005-920 The DADF skew detect sensor went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock
Procedure closed or platen interlock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected.
Check the following:
Procedure
1. Check for a piece of paper/foreign object on the sensor. Check the following:
2. Verify correct sensor installation.
1. Check for a piece of paper/foreign object on the sensor.
3. Check the following for an open wire, short or poor contact:
2. Verify proper sensor installation.
• DADF feed in sensor 1 J120-2 to DADF PWB J762-2
3. Check the following for an open wire, short or poor contact:
• DADF feed in sensor 2 J121-2 to DADF PWB J762-5
• DADF pre registration sensor J 105-1 to DADF PWB J 753-A15
• DADF feed out sensor J112-2 to DADF PWB J754-5
• DADF pre registration sensor J 105-3 to DADF PWB J 753-A13
4. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
• DADF pre registration sensor J 105-2 to DADF PWB J 753-A14
a. DADF feed in sensor 1/2, PL 5.8 Item 3. • DADF skew detect sensor J 111-1 to DADF PWB J 754-3
b. DADF feed out sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2. • DADF skew detect sensor J 111-3 to DADF PWB J 754-1
c. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. • DADF skew detect sensor J 111-2 to DADF PWB J 754-2
4. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
a. DADF pre registration sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2.
b. DADF skew detect sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2.
c. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
0 0 5 - 9 0 8 , 9 0 9 DA D F R e g i s t r a t i o n / L e a d R e g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r 0 0 5 - 9 1 0 DA D F O u t S e n s o r S t a t i c J a m R A P
Static J am
The DADF out sensor went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock closed or platen inter-
BSD 5.7 DADF Document Registration lock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected.
005-908 The DADF registration sensor went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock closed
or platen interlock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected. Procedure
Check the following:
005-909 The DADF lead registration sensor went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock
closed or platen interlock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected. 1. Check for a piece of paper/foreign object on the sensor.
2. Verify proper sensor installation.
Procedure
3. Check the following for an open wire, short or poor contact:
Check the following:
• DADF out sensor J 104-1 to DADF PWB J 753-A10
1. Check for a piece of paper/foreign object on the sensor.
• DADF out sensor J 104-3 to DADF PWB J 753-A12
2. Verify proper sensor installation.
• DADF out sensor J 104-2 to DADF PWB J 753-A11
3. Check the following for an open wire, short or poor contact:
4. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
• DADF registration sensor J 101-1 to DADF PWB J 753-A3
a. DADF out sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2.
• DADF registration sensor J 101-3 to DADF PWB J 753-A1
b. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
• DADF registration sensor J 101-2 to DADF PWB J 753-A2
• DADF lead registration sensor J 102-1 to DADF PWB J 753-A4
• DADF lead registration sensor J 102-3 to DADF PWB J 753-A6
• DADF lead registration sensor J 102-2 to DADF PWB J 753-A5
4. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
a. DADF registration sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2.
b. DADF lead registration sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2.
c. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
0 0 5 - 9 1 1 DA D F E x i t S e n s o r S t a t i c J a m 0 0 5 - 9 1 5 , 9 1 6 , 9 1 7 DA D F A P S S e n s o r S t a t i c J a m
The DADF exit sensor went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock closed or platen inter- The DADF APS sensor 1/2/3 went active during: power ON or feeder cover interlock closed or platen
lock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected. interlock closed causing the DADF sensor paper detected.
Procedure Procedure
Check the following: Check the following:
1. Check for a piece of paper/foreign object on the sensor. 1. Check for a piece of paper/foreign object on the sensor.
2. Verify proper sensor installation. 2. The sensor for improper installation
3. Check the following for an open wire, short or poor contact: 3. Check the following for an open wire, short or poor contact:
• DADF exit sensor J 113-3 to DADF PWB J 754-7 • No.1 APS Sensor J 106-1 to DADF PWB J 753-B3
• DADF exit sensor J 113-1 to DADF PWB J 754-9 • No.1 APS Sensor J 106-3 to DADF PWB J 753-B1
• DADF exit sensor J 113-2 to DADF PWB J 754-8 • No.1 APS Sensor J 106-2 to DADF PWB J 753-B2
4. If the fault persists, install new components as required: • No.2 APS Sensor J 107-1 to DADF PWB J 753-B6
a. DADF exit sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2. • No.2 APS Sensor J 107-3 to DADF PWB J 753-B4
b. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4. • No.2 APS Sensor J 107-2 to DADF PWB J 753-B5
• No.3 APS Sensor J 108-1 to DADF PWB J 753-B9
• No.3 APS Sensor J 108-3 to DADF PWB J 753-B7
• No.3 APS Sensor J 108-2 to DADF PWB J 753-B8
4. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
a. DADF APS sensor 1/2/3, PL 5.9 Item 2.
b. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
0 0 5 - 9 1 9 DA D F Tra y L i f t U p Fa u l t ( D o c u m e n t S e t ) 0 0 5 - 9 2 1 Le t S E F D e t e c t E r r o r
The originals were put into position and the stack height sensor did not come on within a given The DADF document guide width detected a Letter SEF width.
time after the tray began rising. Or, it was detected that the bottom sensor did not turn off. (De-
tected at a time other than run, stop, or purge.) Procedure
Follow the instructions on the UI screen.
Procedure
Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Manually rotate the Tray Motor drive gears.
The gears rotate with no load.
Y N
Remove any load like binding gears that causes an improper DADF Tray Up operation.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-086]. Select Start.
The Tray Motor rotates. (The Feeder Cover Interlock should be closed.)
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 768-4 (+) on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 760-2(+) on the DADF PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Referring to Chapter 7 Wirenets, check the INTLK On +24VDC circuit to P/J 760-2
on the DADF PWB.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect P/J 759 from the DADF PWB. Approximately
19 ohms are measured between the 1 pin and 2/3/4 pins each of Connector J759.
Y N
If the fault persists, install a new DADF tray motor assembly, PL 5.5 Item 9.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-202] (DADF bottom
sensor). Select Start.
Manually raise and lower the DADF Tray. The display toggles between H and L.
Y N
1. Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the DADF bottom sensor, PL 5.6
Item 6.
2. If the DADF bottom sensor fails, install a new DADF bottom sensor, PL 5.6 Item 6.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [005-203] (DADF Level Sen-
sor). Select Start.
Manually raise and lower the DADF Tray. The display toggles between H and L.
Y N
1. Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the DADF level sensor, PL 5.8 Item
6.
2. If the DADF level sensor fails, install a new DADF level sensor, PL 5.8 Item 6.
If the fault persists, install a new DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
0 0 5 - 9 4 0 DA D F N o O r i g i n a l Fa u l t 0 0 5 - 9 4 1 DA D F N o t E n o u g h D o c u m e n t
It was detected the original document was removed. After all originals were returned it was detected that the number of originals was insufficient.
Procedure Procedure
Follow the instructions on the UI. Follow the instructions on the UI.
0 0 5 - 9 4 2 DA D F Tra y S ta c k O v e r Fa u l t 0 0 5 - 9 4 5 o r 0 0 5 - 4 9 7 F S - S i z e M i s m a tc h J a m o n N o M i x - S i z e o r
SS Mix-Size
The tray level sensor or bottom sensor detected more paper in the tray than the job performed
expected. 005-945 FS-Size Mismatch Jam on No Mix-Size or SS Mix-Size (no paper fed)
Initial Actions 005-947 FS-Size Mismatch Jam on No Mix-Size or SS Mix-Size (paper fed)
• Reduce the number of originals, then repeat the operation. In No Mix or Slow Scan (SS) Mixed mode, it was detected that a document with a different size in
• Remove the loaded document and check the display. Fast Scan (FS) direction was transported from the DADF.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Initial Actions
• Follow the instructions on the UI display.
Check the paper in the feed tray for multiple paper sizes, remove the odd sized sheets from the
Procedure feeder, then rerun the operation initiating the fault.
Check the connection of each DADF PWB connector. Procedure
The connectors are OK. Follow the instructions on the UI screen, is the fault persists, pperform the following steps:
Y N
Correct the connector issues. 1. Refer to BSD 5.3, verify the paper width meets the criteria in the table for the APS sensors. Pay
Refer to REP 5.19, check the harness and connector on the bottom sensor. Correct any loose connec- close attention to the NOTE in BSD 5.3
tions and repair any damage to the harness if found. 2. Refer to REP 5.19, check the harness and each connector on each tray APS sensor 1 through 4
The fault persists. and the DADF document set sensor. Correct any loose connections and repair any damage to
Y N the harness if found.
Perform SCP 5. 3. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
Refer to REP 5.26, check the harness and connector on the DADF level sensor. Correct any loose con- 4. Enter dC330, code (below), actuate the tray APS sensors to verify proper operation. Install new
nections and repair any damage to the harness if found. components as required.
The fault persists.
Y N • [005-215] - tray APS sensor 1, PL 5.6 Item 6.
Perform SCP 5. • [005-216] - tray APS sensor 2, PL 5.6 Item 6.
• [005-217] - tray APS sensor 3, PL 5.6 Item 6.
1. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
• [005-302] - tray APS sensor 4, PL 5.6 Item 6.
2. Enter dC330, code [005-202] to actuate the bottom sensor, then code [005-203] to actuate the
DADF level sensor to verify proper operation. If either sensor fails, install new components as 5. While still in dC330, enter code [005-102]. Actuate the DADF document set sensor to verify
required: proper operation. If the DADF document set sensor fails, install a new DADF document set sen-
sor, PL 5.6 Item 10.
• Bottom sensor, PL 5.6 Item 6.
6. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
• DADF level sensor, PL 5.8 Item 6.
The fault persists. a. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
Y N b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
Perform SCP 5.
Install new components as required:
1. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
2. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
Initial Actions
Check the paper in the feed tray for multiple paper sizes, remove the odd sized sheets from the
feeder, then rerun the operation initiating the fault.
Procedure
Follow the instructions on the UI screen, is the fault persists, pperform the following steps:
1. Refer to BSD 5.3, verify the paper width meets the criteria in the table for the APS sensors. Pay
close attention to the NOTE in BSD 5.3
2. Refer to REP 5.34, check the harness and each connector on each DADF APS sensor 1, 2, 3, the
DADF pre-regi sensor, and the DADF feed in sensor. Correct any loose connections and repair
any damage to the harness if found.
3. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
4. Enter dC330, code (below), actuate the DADF APS sensors to verify proper operation. Install new
components as required.
• [005-218] - DADF APS sensor 1, PL 5.9 Item 2.
• [005-219] - DADF APS sensor 2, PL 5.9 Item 2.
• [005-220] - DADF APS sensor 3, PL 5.9 Item 2.
5. While still in dC330, enter code [005-206]. Actuate the DADF pre-regi sensor to verify proper op-
eration. If the DADF pre-regi sensor fails, install a new DADF pre-regi sensor, PL 5.9 Item 2.
6. While still in dC330, enter code [005-204/205]. Actuate the DADF feed in sensor 1/2 to verify
proper operation. If the DADF feed in sensor 1/2 fails, install a new DADF feed in sensor 1/2, PL
5.8 Item 3.
7. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
a. DADF PWB, PL 5.3 Item 4.
b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 0 7 - 9 5 4 S M H S i z e M i s m a tc h R A P 0 0 7 - 9 5 9 O H P K i n d M i s m a t c h ( N o t w h i t e fr a m e O H P ) R A P
The size information specified for printing through this machine is different from the size of SMH When checking Transparencies for borders (by the OHP Sensor) after feeding has started, jam oc-
paper (=the Tray Dial-set size). curs when borders were detected.
Procedure Precedure
1. Load the SMH with paper of the size that the customer selected for the job. Use Xerox transparencies without borders.
2. Set the SMH Dial for the size that the customer selected for the job.
Note: If the dial does not have the desired paper size, set it for Other.
0 0 7 - 9 6 0 Pa p e r K i n d M i s m a t c h R A P 0 0 7 - 9 6 9 Ce n t r e Tra y Fu l l S t a c k R A P
When Plain Paper was fed although the User has specified for Transparency, or when Transparency Paper full stack on the center tray was detected.
was fed when the specification was for anything other than Transparency.
Procedure
Procedure Remove the paper from the tray.
Load transparency, plain paper, or the correct paper type as specified, and then clear the error.
0 1 0 - 3 2 0 H e a t Ro l l O v e r H e a t Fa u l t R A P
Heat Roll Over Heat Fault. A high temperature was detected for fuser heat roll STS-1, fuser heat roll
STS-2, or Fuser Heat Roll STS-3.
0 1 0 - 3 2 1 Fu s e r N i p Fa u l t R A P 0 1 0 - 3 2 2 Fu s e r N C Ce n t e r S e n s o r D i s c o n n e c t i o n Fa u l t Ra p
Fuser Nip Fault. Fuser NC Center Sensor Disconnection Fault. (Fuser Temperature Sensor Fault).
0 1 0 - 3 2 3 Fu s e r Re a r N C S e n s o r D i s c o n n e c t i o n Fa u l t Ra p 0 1 0 - 3 2 4 Fu s e r N V M Fa u l t Ra p
Fuser NVM Fault.
Fuser Rear Sensor Disconnection Fault. (Fuser Temperature Sensor Fault).
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Note: It is necessary to set NVM [745-418] to 0 in order to clear this fault and then Power machine
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, to attempt clearing the fault. Off then On.
• Check if the Drawer is pushed in with the Fuser Unit improperly seated before the power is
turned on. Procedure
• Check that there is no paper wrapped around the roller/s. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, to attempt clearing the fault.
• Check if the Drawer is pushed in with the Fuser Unit improperly seated before the power is
Procedure turned on.
Check the following wires for continuity: • Check that there is no paper wrapped around the roller/s.
• MCU P/J 405-A4 to NC Rear Sensor P/J 151-1 • Check that all connectors on the MCU PWB (PL 1.2) are properly connected.
• MCU P/J 405-A5 to NC Rear Sensor P/J 151-2 • Reload system software.
• MCU P/J 405-A6 to NC Rear Sensor P/J 151-3 • Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
The wires check out OK.
Y N
• Verify connectors are properly connected.
• Repair wires or Install a new Fuser (PL 10.1).
• Install a new Fuser Assy (PL 10.1).
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 1 0 - 3 2 7 S ta n d b y H e a t Ro l l Fu s e r O n Ti m e Fa u l t Ra p 3. Disconnect the connectors (P/J 63A, P/J 63B) from the Sub Heat Rod. Measure the resistance be-
tween both ends of the Sub Heat Rod. The resistance is 10 ohms or less.
Check the following for continuity.
• MCU PWB P/J 407-B5 to AC Power Supply P/J 510-12
Standby Heat Roll Fuser On Time Fault. Main Lamp #1, Main Lamp #2, or the Sub Lamp is continu- • MCU PWB P/J 407-B13 to AC Power Supply P/J 510-4
ally flashing abnormally during standby state or low power state.
4. Install a new Fuser Assy (PL 10.1) (Machine Consumables)
Note: Standby state: the state during which the heat roll is maintained at the temperature re-
quired for printing.
Procedure
Power On Checks
1. Turn On the power. Check the Input Power to the AC Power Supply (BSD 1.1).
2. Remove the Fuser Front Cover. Cheat the Front Door Interlock SW. Enter Diagnostics, Entering
and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [010-007] (Main Heat Rod 1). Select Start. The
Main Heat Rod 1 (Figure 1) is lit. Main
3. Enter code [010-008] (Main Heat Rod 2). Select Start. The Main Heat Rod 2 (Figure 1) is lit. Sub Heat Rod Heat
Rod 2
4. Enter code [010-009] (Sub Heat Rod). Select Start. The Sub Heat Rod (Figure 1) is lit.
Power Off Checks
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 10.1). Disconnect the connectors (P/J 61A, P/J 61B) from the Main
Heat Rod 1. Measure the resistance between both ends of the Main Heat Rod 1. The resistance
is 10 ohms or less.
• Check the following:
– Measure the resistance between both ends of the Thermostat. The resistance is 10
ohms or less.
– Heat Roll Sensor for dirt/improper installation
– The wire between P/J 407-B7 on the MCU PWB and P/J 510-10 on the AC Power Supply
for an open circuit
– See dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Fault History. If it shows 010-320 occurred in the
past, go to 010-320.
2. Disconnect the connectors (P/J 62A, P/J 62B) from the Main Heat Rod 2. Measure the resistance
between both ends of the Main Heat Rod 2. The resistance is 10 ohms or less.
Check the following:
• Measure the resistance between both ends of the Thermostat. The resistance is 10 ohms or
less.
• Heat Roll Sensor for dirt/improper installation
• The wire between P/J 407-B6 on the MCU PWB and P/J 510-11 on the AC Power Supply for
an open circuit
• The wire between P/J 407-B5 on the MCU PWB to P/J 510-12 on the AC Power Supply for an
open circuit
0 1 0 - 3 2 8 Fu s e r N o t Re a d y Ti m e Fa u l t Ra p 0 1 0 - 3 3 0 Fu s e r M o t o r Fa u l t Ra p
Fuser Motor Fault. A rotation abnormality was detected in the Fuser Motor.
Fuser Not Ready Time Fault.
NVM Status Information provided during IOT Fusing Process
Procedure
• NVM 745-472 Fuser Internal State when Not Ready Time Fault occurs Manually rotate the Fuser Drive Motor rotor.
– 0: No Fault occurs The rotor rotates without any load.
Y N
– 1: Warmup Heat Roll Does Not Rotate Remove any load from the Fuser Unit, such as binding Fuser Drive gears and binding
– 2: Warmup Heat Roll Does Not Rotate bearings.
– 3: Hot Not Ready Wait Turn On the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnos-
tics Mode, dC330, code [010-001] (Fuser Drive Motor). Select Start.
– 4: Standby The Fuser Drive Motor has rotated.
– 5: Control Y N
– 6: Print Process Ended +24VDC is measured between P/J211-1 (+) and -2 (-) on the Fuser Drive Motor.
Y N
– 7: Low Power
+24VDC is measured between P/J 514-8 (+) and -4 (-) on the AC Power Supply.
• NVM 745-473 - Center NC Sensor monitor temperature at the point in time when Not Ready Y N
Time Fail occurs +24VDC is measured between P/J 400-10 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
• NVM 745-474 - Rear NC Sensor monitor temperature at the point in time when Not Ready Time Y N
Fail occurs Check the +24VDC INTLK circuit to P/J 400-10 (+) on the MCU PWB.
• NVM 745-475 - Heart Roll STS monitor temperature at the point in time when Not Ready Time Install a new AC Power Supply (PL 1.3).
Fail occurs Check the circuits each between P/J 514-8 on the MCU PWB and P/J 211-1 on the Fuser
Drive Motor, and between P/J 514-4 on the MCU PWB and P/J 211-2 on the Fuser Drive
Note: Standby state: the state during which the heat roll is maintained at the temperature re- Motor for an open wire or poor contact.
quired for printing. +5VDC is measured between P/J 212-1 (+) and -2 (-) on the Fuser Drive Motor.
Y N
Procedure CR9 on the MCU PWB is lit.
• Check that there is no foreign object or paper wound around the Heat Roll surface. Y N
• Check the Fuser Sensors are free of dirt. Check the +5VDC circuit to P/J 400-2 on the MCU PWB.
• Check that the Drawer Connectors connecting the Fuser Unit and the main unit do not have Check the circuits each between P/J 412-A8 on the MCU PWB and P/J 212-1 on the Fu-
bent pins, foreign objects and overheated components. ser Drive Motor, and between P/J 412-A7 on the MCU PWB and P/J 212-2 on the Fuser
Drive Motor for an open wire or poor contact.
• Install a new Fuser Assy (PL 10.1) (Machine Consumables)
Check the following for continuity:
• MCU PWB P/J 412-A6 to Fuser Drive Motor P/J 212-3
• MCU PWB P/J 412-A5 to Fuser Drive Motor P/J 212-4
• MCU PWB P/J 412-A4 to Fuser Drive Motor P/J 212-5
• MCU PWB P/J 412-A3 to Fuser Drive Motor P/J 212-6
Every resistance is 10 ohms or less.
Y N
Check any wire that exhibits more than 10ohms for an open wire or poor contact.
Install a new Fuser Drive Assembly (PL 1.1) and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2) in order.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Check the following for continuity:
• MCU PWB P/J 412-A5 to Fuser Drive Motor P/J 212-4
• MCU PWB P/J 412-A4 to Fuser Drive Motor P/J 212-5
• MCU PWB P/J 412-A3 to Fuser Drive Motor P/J 212-6
Every resistance is 10 ohms or less.
Initial Actions
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, to attempt clearing the fault.
• Check if the Drawer is pushed in with the Fuser Unit improperly seated before the power is
turned on.
• Check that there is no paper wrapped around the roller/s.
Procedure
Check the following wires for continuity:
• MCU P/J 405-A7 to NC Center Sensor P/J 150-1
• MCU P/J 405-A8 to NC Center Sensor P/J 150-2
• MCU P/J 405-A9 to NC Center Sensor P/J 150-3
• MCU P/J 405-A4 to NC Rear Sensor P/J 151-1
• MCU P/J 405-A5 to NC Rear Sensor P/J 151-2
• MCU P/J 405-A6 to NC Rear Sensor P/J -3151
The wires check out OK.
Y N
• Verify connectors are properly connected.
• Repair wires or Install a new Fuser, PL 10.1.
Install a new Fuser, PL 10.1.
0 1 0 - 3 3 8 Wa i t H e a t Ro l l Fu s i n g O n Ti m e Fa i l 0 1 0 - 3 5 7 Fu s e r P i t c h Re j e c t i o n Fa u l t Ra p
In the Wait state, warm up does not complete because the H/Roll temperature has not risen within Fuser Pitch Rejection Fault. Main Lamp #1, Main Lamp #2, or the Sub Lamp is continually flashing
the specific time. abnormally during standby state or low power state.
Initial Actions NVM Status Information provided during IOT Fusing Process
• NVM 745-695 Fuser Center NC Sensor temperature monitor value 1Count=1[C deg] at time of
Refer to the BSD and check the related connectors of the target electrical parts for partial
Pitch denial Fail occurrence
connections.
• NVM 745-696 - Fuser Rear NC Sensor temperature monitor value 1Count=1[C deg] at time of
Cause/Action Pitch denial Fail occurrence
Check the following: • NVM 745-697 - Fuser Heat Roll STS Sensor temperature monitor value 1Count=1 [C deg] at time
• Main Lamp 1: dC330 [010-007], PL 10.2. of Pitch denial Fail occurrence
• Main Lamp 2: dC330 [010-008], PL 10.2. • NVM 745-698 - Pitch denial primary factor 0 at time of Pitch denial Fail occurs instead of 1~4
• Sub Lamp: dC330 [010-009], PL 10.2. Note: Standby state: the state during which the heat roll is maintained at the temperature re-
• The Drawer Connector for poor contact. quired for printing.
• The Center NC Sensor or Rear NC Sensor for dropped parts, contamination on sensor, and clog- Initial Action
ging due to foreign substances.
• Check that there is no foreign object on the Heat Roll surface and no paper wound around it.
• The Heat Roll for wound up, stuck paper.
• Check the Heat Roll Sensor is free from dirt.
• Check if the Lamp turns ON during the warm up. (When normal, the Main 1 Lamp and Main 2
• Check that the Drawer Connectors (P/J 612) connecting the Fuser Unit and the main unit are
Lamp turn ON alternately.)
free from bent pins, foreign objects and burnout.
If no problems are found, Install a new following parts in sequence: • Check that P/J 146 (white) on the Heat Roll Sensor is connected.
• Fusing Unit Assembly, PL 10.1.
Procedure
• AC Power Supply N11A, PL 1.3.
Power On Checks
• MCU PWB, PL 1.2.
1. Remove the Fuser Front Cover. Cheat the Front Door Interlock SW. Enter Diagnostics, Entering
and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [010-007] (Main Heat Rod 1). Select Start. The
Main Heat Rod 1 (Figure 1) is lit.
2. Enter code [010-008] (Main Heat Rod 2). Select Start. The Main Heat Rod 2 (Figure 1) is lit.
3. Enter code [010-009] (Sub Heat Rod). Select Start. The Sub Heat Rod (Figure 1) is lit.
Power Off Checks
1. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 10.1). Disconnect the connectors (P/J 61A, P/J 61B) from the Main
Heat Rod 1. Measure the resistance between both ends of the Main Heat Rod 1. The resistance
is 10 ohms or less.
• Check the following:
– Measure the resistance between both ends of the Thermostat. The resistance is 10
ohms or less.
– Heat Roll Sensor for dirt/improper installation
– The wire between P/J 407-B7 on the MCU PWB and P/J 510-10 on the AC Power Supply
for an open circuit
– See dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Fault History. If it shows 010-320 occurred in the
past, go to 010-320.
2. Disconnect the connectors (P/J 62A, P/J 62B) from the Main Heat Rod 2. Measure the resistance
between both ends of the Main Heat Rod 2. The resistance is 10 ohms or less.
Check the following:
Main
Heat
Rod 1
Main
Sub Heat Rod Heat
Rod 2
0 1 0 - 4 2 0 Fu s e r A s s e m b l y L i fe N e a r E n d 0 1 0 - 4 2 1 Fu s e r A s s e m b l y L i fe E n d
Fuser Assembly Life Near End. The time for replacing the fuser assembly is getting close. Fuser Assembly Life End. It is time to Install a new Fuser Assembly.
Procedure Procedure
Install a new Fuser Assembly (PL 10.1). Install a new Fuser Assembly (PL 10.1).
0 1 6 - 2 1 0 S o f t w a r e O p t i o n Fa u l t ( H D D D o e s N o t E x i s t )
Software Option Fault (HDD Does Not Exist). The HDD is not installed.
Initial Actions
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following
procedures.
Procedure
Check the Controller PWB-HDD connection,P/J310.
There is +5VDC at P/J310.
Y N
Install a new Controller PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Install a new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
0 1 6 - 2 1 1 , 0 1 6 - 2 1 2 , 0 1 6 - 2 1 3 S o f t w a r e O p t i o n Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 2 1 4 S W O p t i o n Fa i l ( Fa x U n i t N o t E x i s t )
016-210 SW Option Fault (System Memory Low Volume). The Fax Unit is not installed or an error is detected when SW optional fax function was enabled.
016-212 SW Option Fault (Page Memory Low). Procedure
016-213 SW Option Fault (Printer CARD Does Not Exist). 1. Verify the fax unit is to be installed, disable the SW optional fax if no fax for the machine.
2. Install the Fax module kit, P/N 497K20240, PL 20.1.
Procedure 3. If the fault persists, install a new Fax PWB, PL 20.2 Item 11.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Remove, then reinstall the DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
• Install new components as required:
1. DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
2. Controller PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 1 6 - 2 2 0 t h r o u g h 0 1 6 - 2 2 8 S 2 X Fa u l t s 0 1 6 - 2 2 9 S W O p t i o n Fa i l ( FC W - U I N o t E x i s t )
016-220 S2X Unrecoverable Fault. The HB-UI is connected when the FCW Panel option is set.
016-221 S2X communication error Procedure
016-222 S2X self-diag error Disconnect the HB-UI and connect the FCW-UI.
Procedure
This feature is not present on this machine. If this code appears, a software problem may exist. Up-
grade the software, GP 2.
0 1 6 - 2 3 1 S W O p t i o n Fa i l ( I m a g e E x t P W B N o t E x i s t ) 0 1 6 - 2 3 2 M RC H W I n i t i a l i z e E r r o r
When the SW Option function is set to [Enabled], the Controller PWB either detected that the Im- An error has occurred during High ComprController on Board initialization.
age Ext PWB is not installed, or the Image Ext PWB has failed.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Check if the device supports the High ComprController on Board.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
3. Install a new High ComprController on Board.
4. Install new components, in order, as required:
a. DIMM (4GB), PL 3.2 Item 2.
b. Backplane PWB, PL 1.2 Item 2.
c. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
01 6 - 2 3 6 X C P No t A c t ive 0 1 6 - 2 37 A u t h p l u g in n o t ac t ive
A fault occures when the SecSys Task detected any of the following conditions during Start Up: A fault occures when the SecSys Task detected any of the following conditions during Start Up:
• Condition 1: The Authentication Mode is Custom Authentication and the embedded plug-in fea- • Condition 1: The Authentication Mode is Custom Authentication and the embedded plug-in fea-
ture has become disabled. ture has become disabled.
• Condition 2: The Authentication Mode is Custom Authentication and the XPC smart card selec- • Condition 2: The Authentication Mode is Custom Authentication and the XPC smart card selec-
tion service status has not become [Active]. tion service status has not become [Active].
• Condition 3: Failure when reading the file of authentication custom plug-in.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Procedure
2. If the fault persists, perform checks as follows: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
a. Enable the embedded plug-in feature. 2. Login as System Administrator. Select [Properties] > [Security] > [Plug-in Settings] > [enable] ,
register the authentication custom plug-in, then restart the machine.
For UI Panel:
1. Login as System Administrator, select [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] >
[Plug-in Settings].
2. Set [Embedded Plug-ins] to [Enabled], then restart the machine.
For CWIS:
1. Login as System Administrator. Select [Properties] > [Security] > [Plug-in Settings] >
[Plug-in Settings] , enable [Plug-in Settings], then restart the machine.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Input the software key for the External AccController Kit. 2. Register the authentication custom service.
0 1 6 - 2 4 0 S 2 X N V M C h e c k S u m Fa i l 0 1 6 - 2 4 1 S W O p t i o n Fa i l ( S I P _ FA X N o t E x i s t )
S2X failed the NVM CheckSum Test. The NGN optional function is set to [Enabled] and the SIP_FAX SW Key is not enabled.
Procedure Procedure
Install a new NVM PWB, PL 1.2 Item 16. 1. If no fax kit is installed, disable NGN option function.
2. Install the fax module kit 497K20240, then enable the SIP_FAX SW Key.
3. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 1 6 - 2 4 2 Sy s t e m G MT C l o c k Fa i l 0 1 6 - 2 4 4 S e l f - S i g n e d Ce r t i fi c a t e A u t o U p d a t e Fa i l u r e
System GMT Clock Fail. The self-signed certificate automatic update function has failed for some reason.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Install a new NVM PWB, PL 1.2 Item 16.
3. Install a new controller PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
016-245 Invalid Accessory in Auth and Account Mode 016-246 Invalid Accessory in Auth and Account Mode
When the machine starts up, a combination of authentication and accounting modes that is for the When the machine starts up, a combination of authentication and accounting modes that is prohib-
accessory connection is detected. ited for the accessory connected is detected.
Procedure Procedure
If the connected accessory is not required. 1. Verify the correct accessory is installed.
1. Disable the accessory connection in KO mode. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 2. Change the settings for the accessory in KO mode.
3. Switch off the machine, GP 19.
If the connected accessory is required.
4. Remove the incorrect accessory, install the correct accessory, then switch on the machine.
1. Re-set the authentication and accounting modes in KO mode. Switch off, then switch on the ma-
chine, GP 19.
Procedure Procedure
• Extract the job log file from the external application (AWAS) via SSMI. After that switch off, the There is +12 VDC on the IIT PWB.
switch on the machine, GP 19. Y N
Go to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) and BSD 1.8 DC Power Generation IIT +24VDC and
check for an open wire between P/J 720 pins 1 and 2 on the IIT PWB and P/J 504 pins 6 and
3 on the Main LVPS.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the problem still exists, check the connection be-
tween IIT PWB and Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 1 2 S W O p t i o n Fa i l ( H y b r i d Wa t e r M a r k N o t E x i s t ) 0 1 6 - 3 1 3 H y b r i d Wa t e r M a r k s e t t i n g m i s m a t c h
• Hybrid Watermark detection H/W is not installed, the SW option (Secure Watermark Kit) did not
become available. Description
• The Hybrid WaterMark Detection H/W was detected but the SW option (Secure Watermark Kit)
• When the SW optional function is being enabled, the system detected that the Hybrid Water- did not become enabled. The detection timing is only during power ON/reboot, and is performed
mark Detection H/W is not installed. This is detected prior to 016-313. Option name to be de- after 016-312.
tected [Secure Watermark Kit].
Procedure
Procedure
• Enable the SW option (Secure Watermark Kit).
1. Check the installation of the Hybrid Watermark Detection H/W. If it is installed, switch off, the
switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, it could be due to detection error. Install a
new Hybrid Watermark Detection H/W or the IISS Board.
0 1 6 - 3 1 4 S W O p t i o n Fa i l ( H y b r i d Wa t e r M a r k N o t E x i s t ) 0 1 6 - 3 1 5 N I I T I n t e r fa c e Fa u l t
Description NIIT Interface Fault. An error was detected in the I/F between the scanner and the main chassis.
• When the SW optional function is set to [Available] and DADF: PF1.5 and IIT:PF1-BW are com-
bined, the machine with two HWM boards (for the face and the back) is supposed to detect Pro- Procedure
tection Code for both sides in scanning them simultaneously. However, when only either of the Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
boards is installed, the Paper Security function is available for the detected side.
Check the IIT-DADF Cable, PL 5.3 Item 3, between the DADF PWB and the Controller PWB.
Procedure Install a new IIT-DADF Cable, PL 5.3 Item 3, as required.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Install the board for detecting the back (side 2) of a document if it is not installed.
0 1 6 - 3 1 6 Pa g e M e m o r y i s N o t D e t e c t e d 0 1 6 - 3 1 7 Pa g e M e m o r y B r o k e n - S t a n d a r d
Page Memory is Not Detected. It was detected that the page memory (standard) for the scanner Page Memory Broken-Standard. An error was detected with the page memory (standard) for the
portion was not installed. scanner portion.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
If the problem still exists, switch the power off. Remove then reinstall the Page Memory (standard) If the problem still exists, switch the power off. Remove then reinstall the Page Memory (standard)
from Controller PWB. from Controller PWB.
If the problem still exists, install a new Page Memory and Controller PWB (PL 3.2) in order. If the problem still exists, replace Page Memory and Controller PWB (PL 3.2) in order.
0 1 6 - 3 1 8 Pa g e M e m o r y B r o k e n - O p t i o n 0 1 6 - 3 1 9 Lo n g B o o t D i a g I I T I n t e r fa c e Fa i l
Page Memory Broken-Option. An error was detected with the page memory (option) for the scanner Description
portion.
• An error in the I/F between the scanner and the Main Unit was detected.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Turn the power OFF/ON. If the fault persists, do the following:
If the problem still exists, switch the power off. Remove then reinstall the Page Memory (standard) 1. Install or install a new I/F between the scanner and the Main Unit.
from Controller PWB. 2. Install a new Controller PWB or the IISS PWB.
If the problem still exists, replace Page Memory and Controller PWB (PL 3.2) in order.
0 1 6 - 3 2 0 D o c u m e n t Fo r m a t t e r Fa t a l E r r o r 0 1 6 - 3 2 1 Fa x M o d u l e E r r o r
Description Description
• A software error was detected when documents were converted. • SysCheckFax() returned error. When PFNOTEXIST is returned, the system is determined to have
a configuration without Fax.
Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 1 6 - 3 2 2 J B A A c c o u n t Fu l l 0 1 6 - 3 2 3 B - Fo r m a t t e r Fa ta l E r r o r
JBA Account Full. The JBA accounting data is full. Description
• An unrecoverable error was detected in the image conversion procControllering section of the B-
Procedure Formatter task used for sending Fax from the extended Mailbox for [Multi-Send using Instruc-
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. tion Manual] or [Multi-Send UI].
If the problem still exists, switch the power off and check the Controller PWB and IIT PWB
connections.
Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Reinstall the software.
If the problem still exists, replace Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
After an external Accounting Server has read the accounting data, turn the power Off then On.
01 6 - 3 2 4 S c h e d u l ed Im ag e O ve rw r it e 0 1 6 - 3 2 5 U s i n g Pe r s o n a l Ce r t i fi c a t e
Description Description
• SysCon is issued when it is time to perform the Scheduled Image Overwrite. • The IC Card personal certificate is set in the certificate for signing.
Procedure Procedure
• Wait until the Scheduled Image Overwrite has completed. • Set system data 790-389 to 0.
To cancel it, turn the power OFF and ON.
0 1 6 - 3 2 6 Co n t - U I C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 2 7 B a c k P l a n e Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l
Description Description
• The controller has detected a failure at its cable connection with the UI • The controller has detected a failure at its connection with the BackPlane
Procedure Procedure
• Turn the power OFF and ON • Turn the power OFF and ON.
If the fault persists, perform the following: If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Check the connection of the cable between the controller and UI. 1. Pull out and reinsert the controller.
2. Install a new cable.
0 1 6 - 3 2 8 Co n t - M C U C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 2 9 Lo n g B o o t D i a g Pa g e M e m o r y N o t D e t e c t e d Fa i l
Description Description
• The controller has detected a failure at its cable connection with the MCU • Controller Section Page Memory (Standard) was detected to be not installed.
Procedure Procedure
• Turn the power OFF and ON. • Turn the power OFF/ON. If the fault persists, do the following:
If the fault persists, perform the following: 1. Remove and reinstall the Page Memory (Standard)
1. Check the connection of the cable between the controller and MCU. 2. Install a new Page Memory (Standard)
0 1 6 - 3 3 0 Co n t Sy s t e m M e m o r y Fa i l - 1 0 1 6 - 3 3 1 Co n t Sy s t e m M e m o r y Fa i l - 2
Description Description
• The memory size that is installed in Slot 1 is detected to be outside the specification value. • The memory size that is installed in Slot 2 is detected to be outside the specification value.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and insert Controller RAM DIMM #1. 1. Remove and insert Controller RAM DIMM #2.
2. Replace Controller RAM DIMM #1. 2. Replace Controller RAM DIMM #2.
3. Install a new Controller PWB. 3. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 3 2 Co n t Sy s t e m M e m o r y Fa i l - 3 0 1 6 - 3 3 3 Lo n g B o o t D i a g Pa g e M e m o r y B r o ke n S t a n d a r d Fa i l
Description Description
• The total memory size that is installed in Slot 1 and 2 is detected to be outside the specification • Controller Section Page Memory (Standard) error was detected.
value.
Procedure
Procedure • Turn the power OFF/ON. If the fault persists, do the following:
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: 1. Remove and reinstall the Page Memory (Standard)
1. Remove and insert Controller RAM DIMM #1 and Controller RAM DIMM #2. 2. Install a new Page Memory (Standard)
2. Replace Controller RAM DIMM #1 and Controller RAM DIMM #2.
3. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 3 4 Lo n g B o o t D i a g Pa g e M e m o r y B r o ke n O p t i o n Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 3 5 Co n t Pr o g ra m R O M Fa i l - 1
Description Description
• Controller Section Page Memory (Option) error was detected. • The Checksum of Program ROM2 does not match.
Procedure Procedure
• Turn the power OFF/ON. If the fault persists, do the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and reinstall the Page Memory (Option) 1. Install a new DIMM 4GB.
2. Install a new Page Memory (Option)
2. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 3 6 Co n t Pr o g ra m R O M Fa i l - 2 0 1 6 - 3 3 7 Co n t Pr o g ra m R O M Fa i l - 3
Description Description
• Program ROM1 write command has failed. • Program ROM2 write command has failed.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and insert DIMM 4GB. 1. Remove and insert DIMM 4GB.
2. Install a new DIMM 4GB. 2. Install a new DIMM 4GB.
3. Remove and insert the Printer Kit. 3. Install a new Controller PWB.
4. Install a new Printer Kit.
5. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 3 8 Co n t Fo n t R O M Fa i l - 1 0 1 6 - 3 3 9 Co n t Fo n t R O M Fa i l - 2
Description Description
• The Font ROM ID that is installed OnBoard is detected to be outside the specification value. • The Font ROM ID that is installed in Slot 1 is detected to be outside the specification value.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Install a new Printer Kit. 1. Remove and insert Controller Font ROM DIMM #1.
2. Install a new Controller PWB. 2. Replace Controller Font ROM DIMM #1.
3. Remove and insert the Printer Kit.
4. Install a new Printer Kit.
5. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 4 0 Co n t Fo n t R O M Fa i l - 3 0 1 6 - 3 4 1 Co n t Fo n t R O M Fa i l - 4
Description Description
• The Font ROM ID that is installed in Slot 2 is detected to be outside the specification value. • The Checksum of Font ROM that is installed in Slot 2 does not match.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and insert Controller Font ROM DIMM #2. 1. Remove and insert Controller Font ROM DIMM #2.
2. Replace Controller Font ROM DIMM #2. 2. Replace Controller Font ROM DIMM #2.
3. Install a new Controller PWB. 3. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 4 2 Co n t RT C Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 4 3 Lo n g B o o t D i a g Ti m e r Fa i l
Description Description
• The range of RTC time is out of the specification value (E.g. Day 36 Month 13) • A Timer error was detected.
The time is not moving forward
Procedure
Procedure • Turn the power OFF/ON. If the fault persists, do the following:
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. If an NVM PWB exists, install a new NVM PWB.
If the fault persists, perform the following procedures in sequence. 2. Install a new Controller PWB
1. Install a new failed component.
2. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 4 5 Co n t N V - M e m o r y Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 4 6 Co n t A 4 FA X M o d e m D i a g n o s i s Fa i l
Description Description
• The data of the header addrController is detected to be 0x00. • An A4 Fax Modem diagnosis error was detected by the Boot Diag.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Turn the power OFF and ON, perform the same operation and check whether the problem is re-
occurring.If the trouble persists, install a new Controller PWB.
1. Install a new NV-RAM board.
2. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 4 7 Co n t Pa g e M e m o r y Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 4 8 Co n t Pa g e M e m o r y Fa i l - 2
Description Description
• The memory size that is installed in Slot 2 is detected to be outside the specification value. • An error occurred in the W/R/V test on the Page Memory.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and insert the Page Memory (option). 1. Check the Page Memory for contact.
2. Install a new Page Memory (option). 2. Install a new Page Memory.
3. Install a new Controller PWB. 3. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 4 9 Co n t M A C A d d r Co n t r o l l e r D a ta Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 5 0 Co n t S E E P - R O M Fa i l - 1
Description Description
• The 3-byte header of the MAC AddrController is not an FX Code (08-00-37). • The Product ID cannot be obtained.
Procedure Procedure
• Turn the power OFF and ON, perform the same operation and check whether the problem is • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
reoccurring.
1. Check SEEPROM for contact (a bent pin, etc.).
[When the SEEP ROM is installed on the BP PWB]
2. Check the Controller PWB and the BP board for contact (disconnected cable, etc.).
1. Check the SEEP ROM contacts (for bent and broken pins, etc.)
3. Install a new Controller PWB.
2. Check the contacts between the Controller PWB and the BP PWB (for disconnected cables,
etc.)
3. BP PWB
4. Controller PWB
[When the SEEP ROM is installed on the Controller PWB]
1. Check the SEEP ROM contacts (for bent and broken pins, etc.)
2. Install a new Controller PWB
0 1 6 - 3 5 1 Co n t S E E P - R O M Fa i l - 2 0 1 6 - 3 5 2 I n t e r n a l N e t w o r k I n i t i a l i z e Fa i l
Description Failure to initialize internal network I/F when power On (failed to set loopback addrController) is
detected.
• An error occurred during W/R/V test.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off the machine, confirm the control panel light is off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Check SEEPROM for contact (a bent pin, etc.).
2. Check the Controller PWB and the BP board for contact (disconnected cable, etc.).
3. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 5 3 Co n t I OT - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 5 4 Co n t I I T - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l
Description Description
• When the IOT is unable to communicate with the Controller. • When the Scanner is unable to communicate with the Controller.
Procedure Procedure
• 1. Pull out and reinsert the System Memory. • 1. Pull out and reinsert the System Memory.
2. Pull out and reinsert the Controller PWB. 2. Pull out and reinsert the Controller PWB.
3. Pull out and reinsert the BP PWB. 3. Disconnect and reconnect the IIT harnController (at the BP PWB side and the Trans PWB
If performing 1 to 3 does not improve the situation, install new components in the order of Con- side).
troller PWB -> BP PWB -> MCU PWB. If performing 1 to 3 does not improve the situation, install new components in the order of Con-
troller PWB -> BP PWB -> IIT harnController -> Trans PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 5 5 Co n t I o A s i c Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 5 6 Co n t V i d e o A S I C Fa i l
Description Description
• At Scanner diagnostic, an error has occurred at (Copy path, Scan path). • At IOT diagnostic, an error has occurred (Print path).
Procedure Procedure
• 1. Pull out and reinsert the System Memory. • 1. Pull out and reinsert the System Memory.
2. Pull out and reinsert the Page Memory. 2. Pull out and reinsert the Page Memory.
3. Pull out and reinsert the Controller PWB. If the fault persists, install new components in the order of System Memory -> Page Memory ->
4. Disconnect and reconnect the IIT harnController (at the BP PWB side and the Trans PWB Controller PWB.
side).
If the fault persists, install new components in the order of System Memory -> Page Memory ->
Controller PWB -> BP PWB -> IIT harnController -> Trans PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 5 7 Co n t E P - Co n t r o l l e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 5 8 Co n t Pa ra l l e l C a r d Fa i l
Description Description
• When the EP Device is unable to communicate with the Controller. • When error has occurred at W/R/V test on the internal register of the Parallel Card.
Procedure Procedure
• 1. Disconnect and reconnect the EP I/F Connection Cable. • 1. Remove and reinstall the Parallel Port.
2. If possible, check the EP I/F Power Supply (check for blown FUSE). 2. Pull out and reinsert the PCI Riser PWB.
If the fault persists, install new components in the order of Controller PWB -> EP Device. If the fault persists, install new components in the order of Parallel Port -> PCI Riser PWB -> Con-
troller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 5 9 Co n t U S B H U B Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 6 0 Co n t U I Fa i l - 1
Description Description
• When the USB HUB connection is invalid. • An error occurred during W/R/V test of PCI Config interval.
Procedure Procedure
• Install a new Controller PWB. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and insert the UI card.
2. Install a new UI card.
3. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 6 1 Co n t U S B 3 . 0 D e v i c e Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 6 2 Co n t U I Fa i l - 2
Description Description
• When error has occurred at W/R/V test on the internal register of the USB 3.0 Device. • UI Communication error has occurred.
An error occurred during W/R/V test of VRAM. The Command/Status line is normal if entering
Procedure the Long Boot Mode.
• Install a new Controller PWB.
Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Disconnect, then reconnect the UI cable.
2. Install a new control panel assembly. PL 2.1 Item 1.
3. Install a new Controller PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 1 6 - 3 6 3 Co n t Ly ra C a r d Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 6 4 Co n t U S B 2 . 0 H o s t Fa i l
Description Description
• An error occurred during W/R/V test of PCI Config interval or W/R/V test of internal register. • An error occurred during W/R/V test of PCI Config interval or W/R/V test of internal register.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and insert the Lyzer card. 1. Remove and insert the Lyzer card.
2. Remove and insert the JPEG board. 2. Remove and insert the USB 2.0 Host card.
3. Install a new Lyzer card. 3. Install a new Lyzer card.
4. Install a new JPEG board. 4. Install a new USB2.0Host card.
5. Install a new Controller PWB. 5. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 6 5 Co n t U S B 2 . 0 D e v i c e Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 6 6 Co n t H D D Fa i l - 1
Description Description
• An error occurred during W/R/V test of PCI Config interval or W/R/V test of internal register. • An error has occurred during IDE Controller check (ideDrv equivalent)
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the Lyzer card. 1. Disconnect and connect the HDD cable.
2. Remove and install the USB 2.0 Device card. 2. Remove and insert the HDD.
3. Install a new Lyzer card. 3. Install a new HDD and the HDD cable.
4. Install a new USB 2.0 Device card. 4. Install a new Controller PWB.
5. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 6 7 Co n t H D D Fa i l - 2 0 1 6 - 3 6 8 Co n t To r i n o Fa i l
Description Description
• An error occurred during W/R/V test of HDD. • An error occurred during W/R/V test of PCI Config interval or W/R/V test of internal register.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Disconnect and connect the HDD cable. 1. Remove and insert the Lyzer card.
2. Remove and insert the HDD. 2. Remove and insert the Torino board.
3. Install a new HDD and the HDD cable. 3. Install a new Lyzer card.
4. Install a new Controller PWB. 4. Install a new Torino board.
5. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 6 9 Co n t S 2 X P W B Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 7 0 Co n t Fa i l
Description Description
• An error occurred during W/R/V test of PCI Config interval. • A defect was detected during a diagnostic check of the Rendering Engine.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following.
1. Remove and insert the Lyzer card. 1. Install a new Controller PWB.
2. Remove and insert the S2X board.
3. Install a new Lyzer card.
4. Install a new S2X board.
5. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 7 1 Co n t U S B 1 . 1 H o s t Fa i l 0 1 6 - 3 7 2 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - A
Description Description
• A defect was detected during a diagnostic check of USB1.1Host (No communication with the • Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition A).
Fax Unit could be established).
Procedure
Procedure • Do this procedure.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Power OFF then ON.
1. Check the cable for connection.
2. Initialize the HDD.
2. Install a new cable.
3. Install a new Fax Unit.
4. Install a new Controller PWB.
0 1 6 - 3 7 3 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - B 0 1 6 - 3 7 4 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - C
Description Description
• Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition B). • Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition C).
Procedure Procedure
• Do this procedure. • Do this procedure.
1. Power OFF then ON. 1. Power OFF then ON.
2. Initialize the HDD. 2. Initialize the HDD.
0 1 6 - 3 7 5 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - D 0 1 6 - 3 7 6 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - E
Description Description
• Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition D). • Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition E).
Procedure Procedure
• Do this procedure. • Do this procedure.
1. Power OFF then ON. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Initialize the HDD. 2. Initialize the HDD.
0 1 6 - 3 7 7 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - F 0 1 6 - 3 7 8 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - G
Description Description
• Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition F). • Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition G).
Procedure Procedure
• Do this procedure. • Do this procedure.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Initialize the HDD. 2. Initialize the HDD.
0 1 6 - 3 7 9 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - H 0 1 6 - 3 8 0 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - I
Description Description
• Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition H). • Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition I).
Procedure Procedure
• Do this procedure. • Do this procedure.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Initialize the HDD. 2. Initialize the HDD.
0 1 6 - 3 8 1 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - J 0 1 6 - 3 8 2 Co n t H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa i l - P
Description Description
• Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition J). • Boot Diag detected a logic error with HDD (Partition P).
Procedure Procedure
• Do this procedure. • Do this procedure.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Initialize the HDD. 2. Initialize the HDD.
Procedure Procedure
• Store in the M/C the Root Certificate of Server Certificate of Authentication Sever. • Retry the operation.
• If Root Certificate is not available, set “Server Certificate Verification” in Device 802.1x setting • Check the Log File.
item to INVALID.
0 1 6 - 4 0 5 Ce r t i fi c a t e d a t a b a s e fi l e fa i l u r e 0 1 6 - 4 0 6 8 0 2 . 1 x C l i e n t Ce r t i fi c a t e Fa i l u r e
Certificate data base file failure. Header abnormal/size abnormal detected when certificate data Description
base file being read during system startup.
• [EAP-TLS] is selected as the authentication method for 802.1x authentication for Network 1, but
the SSL client certificate is not set or has been deleted.
Procedure
• Execute Certificate initialization from Maintenance. See (Delete All Certificates / Initialize Procedure
Settings).
• (1) Store the client certificate to this machine SSL and set as SSL client certificate.
(2) If the setting of SSL client certificate cannot be made, select other than [EAP-TLS] as the au-
thentication method.
Procedure Procedure
• Correct the plug-in and then install it again. • Correct the plug-in and then install it again.
0 1 6 - 4 0 9 X C P P l u g i n Ve r s i o n I n c o m p a t i b l e 0 1 6 - 4 1 0 X C P _ P LU G I N _ P R O P E RT Y _ I N VA L I D
Description Description
• The Package Management function has detected a version mismatch. • The Package Management function has detected the invalid definition file.
Procedure Procedure
• Correct the plug-in and then install it again. • Correct the plug-in and then install it again.
0 1 6 - 4 1 3 Co u l d n t d e t e c t p r o x y s e r v e r a u t o m a t i c a l l y . 0 1 6 - 4 1 4 Co u l d n t c o n n e c t t o Xe r o x s e r v e r o r p r o x y .
Description Description
• The proxy server could not be detected automatically. • The machine could not connect to the Xerox Communication Server or the proxy server.
When the proxy server is not manually set up, an automatic attempt is made to obtain the (A network path problem, an open wire, etc.)
proxy server setting from the DHCP server. However, the attempt has failed.
For the details, see below: Procedure
• Check the following:
– The contents of the obtained PAC file have a problem. (An error occurred during the running
of JavaScript.) – the connection of the LAN Cable
– The PAC file could not be obtained. (Timeout/Connection error) – the IP AddrController setting
– The PAC file could not be obtained. (No PAC file/Too large) – the default Gateway setting
– PAC File URL info could not be obtained. (Timeout) – the subnet mask setting
– PAC File URL info could not be obtained. (No URL is included in the response to the inquiry.) – the DNS Server addrController setting
– the proxy server addrController setting
Procedure
• Check the following: If despite the confirmation of the above settings, the situation has not improved, contact the
customers network administrator because there is a possibility of a network failure.
– the default Gateway setting When after the implementation of the corrective actions, the machine has established normal
– the subnet mask setting communication with the Xerox Communication Server, the fault will be cleared.
– the DNS Server addrController setting
If despite the confirmation of the above settings, the situation has not improved, contact the
network administrator for advice because there is a possibility of a network failure, DHCP Server
failure, or an improper DHCP Server setting. (For example, if the DHCP Server is not set up in the
way that allows it to give back the proxy server addrController, an error of this code will occur.)
The Network Environment check items are as follows:
– The HTTP server that provides the PAC file (CFILE) is operating normally, or the server can
be reached on the network.
– The contents of the PAC file have no mistakes in syntax or selected server addrController, or
the file size is 64KB or lController.
– The DHCP server that has an entry of CURL info is operating normally, or the server can be
reached on the network.
When after the implementation of the corrective actions, the machine has established normal
communication with the Xerox Communication Server, the fault will be cleared.
If the network is normal but the situation has not improved, collect the pfshowinfo9 log and
network log immediately after the occurrence of the problem and contact the support division
for directions.
0 1 6 - 4 1 5 Co n n e c t i o n t o Xe r o x s e r v e r h a s t i m e d o u t . 0 1 6 - 4 1 6 A n i n v a l i d s t a t e m C o n t r o l l e r a g e r e c e i v e d fr o m s e r v e r .
Description Description
• There is no response from the Xerox Communication Server for a certain period of time, resulting • The Xerox Communication Server has responded with a mControllerage indicating an abnormal
in a timeout. condition.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
When after the implementation of the corrective action, the machine has established normal When after the implementation of the corrective action, the machine has established normal
communication with the Xerox Communication Server, the fault will be cleared. communication with the Xerox Communication Server, the fault will be cleared.
0 1 6 - 4 1 7 I n v a l i d n e t w o r k s e t t i n g s w e r e fo u n d . 0 1 6 - 4 2 1 I n p u t Tra y i s Re m o v e d
Description Description
• An invalid or improper network setting has prevented the machine from communicating. • The Paper Tray is removed.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the following: • Install the Paper Tray.
– the IP addrController setting
– the default Gateway setting
– the subnet mask setting
– the DNS Server addrController setting
– the proxy server addrController setting
– the Xerox Communication Server URL setting
– Set [Verify the remote server certificate] to OFF.
If despite the confirmation of the above settings, the situation has not improved, contact the
customers network administrator because there is a possibility of a network failure.
When after the implementation of the corrective actions, the machine has established normal
communication with the Xerox Communication Server, the fault will be cleared.
Procedure Procedure
• Cancel the Power Saver from the Panel or remotely. The Power Saver will also be canceled when • Cancel the Power Saver from the Panel or remotely. The Power Saver will also be canceled when
a Job is issued. a Job is issued.
0 1 6 - 4 2 9 8 0 2 . 1 x a u t h e n t i c a t i o n fa i l u r e b y t i m i n g o u t ( N e t w o r k 0 1 6 - 4 3 0 8 0 2 . 1 x c e r t i fi c a t e fa i l u r e ( N e t w o r k 2 )
2) Description
Description • (1) The route certificate of the server certificate (for Network 2)of the authentication server is
not stored in the machine or it does not match.
• Authentication timeout since there was no response signal from the [Authentication Device]
that is physically network connected with the network 2 of this machine.
Procedure
Procedure • 1. Store the Route Certificate for the server certificate (for Network 2) of the authentication
server in the machine.
• Check the switch setting or network connection of the [Authentication Device] which is physi-
cally network connected to Network 2 of this machine and connect it correctly. 2. If unable to obtain the route certificate of the server certificate, disable the [Server Authenti-
cation Inspection] for the 802.1x setting item (Network 2) of the device.
0 1 6 - 4 3 1 8 0 2 . 1 x i n s i d e fa i l u r e ( N e t w o r k 2 ) 0 1 6 - 4 3 2 8 0 2 . 1 x c l i e n t c e r t i fi c a t e fa i l u r e ( N e t w o r k 2 )
Description Description
• An internal error has occurred in the 802.1x supplicant function of the machine. • [EAP-TLS] is selected as the authentication method for 802.1x authentication for Network 2, but
(1) Received an invalid protocol signal from the authentication server in Network 2 of this the SSL client certificate is not set or has been deleted.
machine
Procedure
Procedure • (1) Store the client certificate to this machine SSL and set as SSL client certificate.
• Repeat the operation. (2) If the setting of SSL client certificate cannot be made, select other than [EAP-TLS] as the au-
thentication method.
0 1 6 - 4 5 4 D N S Re n e w a l Fa u l t o f D y n a m i c 0 1 6 - 4 5 5 S N T P S e r v e r Ti m e - O u t
DNS Renewal Fault of Dynamic. An IP addrController could not be obtained from DNS. SNTP Server Time-Out. There was no response from the SNTP server within the given time (60
seconds).
Procedure
1. Check that DNS server addrController is set properly in the device. Procedure
Manually set the correct time if the time that the machine shows is different from the correct time.
2. Check with a customer System Administrator that the DNS server settings that allow Dynamic
DNS have been made.
0 1 6 - 4 5 6 S N T P Ti m e A sy n c h r o n o u s 0 1 6 - 4 6 1 U n d e r n o n - t ra n s m i t t e d i m a g e l o g s ta g n a t i o n
SNTP Time Asynchronous. A mControllerage was received that was not synchronized with the Description
standard synchronization source from the SNTP.
• When system data [Level of Ensuring Image Log Transfer] is set to [High] creation of a new job
becomes restricted because image logs yet to be transferred are piled up and delayed.
Procedure
Manually set the correct time if the time that the machine shows is different from the correct time. Procedure
• Check the image log management server status and the network status, and clear any cause
that may impede the transfer of image logs to the image log server.
Check the transfer settings and transfer all logs that are yet to be transferred.
Or, change the transfer guarantee level to [Low]. Note that setting the transfer guarantee level
to [Low] may cause the image logs to get deleted in sequence even before they are transferred.
Procedure Procedure
• Retry job. If retry failed, install a new Controller-ROM and perform VerUP operation on the DLD • Retry job. If retry failed, install a new S2X-ROM and perform VerUP operation on the DLD meth-
method again. od again.
0 1 6 - 5 0 2 W r i t e t o Co n t / S 2 X / I I S S / DA D F / I OT / F i n / Fa x C a r d e r r o r 0 1 6 - 5 0 3 S MT P S e r v e r A d d r Co n t r o l l e r Re s o l u t i o n Fa u l t
detection (During PJL method) SMTP Server AddrController Resolution Fault. The SMTP server name was not correct when sending
mail.
Description
• An error was detected when writing data to one of the ROMs in the machine Procedure
Not able to carry out normal operation because content of one of the ROMs is missing. Specify the correct SMTP Server name or use IP AddrController to specify the server.
Procedure
• Perform download in DLD Mode, and follow the Error Code displayed by the machine to identify
the faulty ROM.
Install a new faulty ROM and perform VerUP operation on the DLD method again.
0 1 6 - 5 0 4 P O P S e r v e r A d d r Co n t r o l l e r Re s o l u t i o n Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 5 0 5 P O P A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Fa u l t
POP Server AddrController Resolution Fault. The POP3 server name was not correct when sending POP Authentication Fault. There was a failure logging in to the POP3 server when sending mail.
mail.
Procedure
Procedure Correctly specify authentication info registered at the POP server.
Specify the correct POP Server name or use IP AddrController to specify the server.
0 1 6 - 5 0 6 I m a g e L o g H D D Fu l l 0 1 6 - 5 0 7 I m a g e Lo g S e n d Fa i l 0 1
Description Description
• When the system data [Level of Ensuring Log image Creation] is set to [High] the log image • With the system data [Auto Transfer Setting] set to [Transfer by the job] a log image transfer
storage area on the disk becomes full (during procControllering any job other than copy/scan fails, making it impossible to continue a target job.
jobs).
Procedure
Procedure • Check the state of the destination image log control server and that of the network, and clear
• Try to rerun the job. any factor preventing image logs from being transferred to the image log control server.
If the situation is the same despite some re-attempts, delete unnecessary documents saved in
the device or change the level of ensuring creation (to Low). However, the level is set to Low, log
image creation cannot be ensured.
0 1 6 - 5 0 8 I m a g e Lo g S e n d Fa i l 0 2 0 1 6 - 5 0 9 I m a g e Lo g N o S e n d R u l e 0 1
Description Description
• An image log transfer fails. • With the system data [Auto Transfer] set to [Transfer by Job], transfer rules are not registered,
causing a job to be discontinued.
Procedure
• Check the state of the destination image log control server and that of the network, and clear Procedure
any factor preventing image logs from being transferred to the image log control server. • Register rules for transfer from the destination image log control server to the device.
0 1 6 - 5 1 0 I m a g e Lo g N o S e n d R u l e 0 2 0 1 6 - 5 1 1 I m a g e Lo g I n v a l i d S e n d R u l e 0 1
Description Description
• Because transfer rules are not registered, a transfer fails. • With the system data [Auto Transfer] set to [Transfer by Job], illegal transfer rules cause a job to
be discontinued.
Procedure
• Register rules for transfer from the destination image log control server to the device. Procedure
• Overwrite rules for transfer from the destination image log control server to the device.
0 1 6 - 5 1 2 I m a g e Lo g I n v a l i d S e n d R u l e 0 2 0 1 6 - 5 1 3 S M T P S e r v e r Re c e p t i o n E r r o r
Description Description
• Illegal transfer rules cause a transfer failure. • SMTP Server Response Receive Timeout
Procedure Procedure
• Overwrite rules for transfer from the destination image log control server to the device. 1. Timeout has occurred.
• Server Load is Heavy/Network Traffic is High
-> Wait awhile before re-executing job.
• Check that SMTP Send Port No. is correct.
->If the fault persists, consult with the Network Administrator.
0 1 6 - 5 1 6 X P S Pr i n t Ti c ke t d e s c r i p t i o n e r r o r 0 1 6 - 5 1 7 P S B o o k l e t I l l e g a l Co l o r M o d e C h a n g e
PrintTicket included in a XPS document is based on [grammar not supported by this machine] or Description
has [print instructions not supported by this machine].
While PS Decomp was interpreting a booklet job, a change to ProcController Color Model or the res-
olution/binary/multi-valued parameter was detected.
Procedure
Check whether the users way of using the application that sends a print job and the print instruc- Procedure
tions have problems.
Rewrite the PostScript file in the way that does not allow the page device, ProcController Color Mod-
If they have no problems, ask not Fuji Xerox but a vendor that produces the application that sends el, to be changed in the procController.
a print job about the operation of the application. If this does not resolve the problem, get a list of
printer settings, a job history report, and the print data with PrintTicket to send, and go to the fol-
lowing to resolve the problem.
0 1 6 - 5 1 8 P S B o o k l e t Co n f l i c t W M 0 1 6 - 5 1 9 D e v i c e DV - R e a c h e d L i m i t
Description Description
• PS Booklet and Watermarks were specified at the same time. • A number of printable sides is set in the device and the number of printed sides as the job is run-
ning has reached that number.
Procedure
• PS Booklet and Watermark/UUID cannot be specified at the same time. Cancel either one. Procedure
• Contact the System Administrator to request for a change in the limit of the printable sides.
0 1 6 - 5 2 0 M RC H W J o b E r r o r 0 1 6 - 5 2 1 S m a r t C a r d N o t Fo u n d
Description Description
• An error has occurred during the usage of High ComprControllerion Board. • After a personal signature scan job has started up, the Smart Card was removed or the Card
Reader was detached, which causes the personal signature to fail.
Procedure
• Repeat the operation or change the output file format/color mode. Procedure
If the fault persists, perform the following procedure to correct it. • Insert the Smart Card into the Reader and check the PIN again before performing the personal
signature scan.
Install a new High ComprControllerion Board.
If the Card Reader was detached, reconnect it again and restart the device.
If the cause of error is not clear, perform the following and check whether the status improved.
– Install a new Memory Modules on the Main PWBA
– Install a new Main PWBA.
0 1 6 - 5 2 2 L DA P S S L e r r o r 1 1 2 0 1 6 - 5 2 3 L DA P S S L e r r o r 1 1 3
Description Description
• SSL authentication error of the LDAP Server. • SSL authentication error of the LDAP Server.
The SSL client certificate cannot be obtained. The Server certificate data is incorrect
Procedure Procedure
• Install the SSL client certificate into the device as the LDAP Server will request for it. • The device cannot trust the SSL certificate of the LDAP Server.
Register the root certificate of the LDAP Server SSL certificate in the device.
0 1 6 - 5 2 4 L DA P S S L e r r o r 1 1 4 0 1 6 - 5 2 5 L DA P S S L e r r o r 1 1 5
Description Description
• SSL authentication error of the LDAP Server. • SSL authentication error of the LDAP Server.
The Server certificate is close to expiring The Server certificate has expired
Procedure Procedure
• Change the LADP Server SSL certificate to one that is valid. • Change the LADP Server SSL certificate to one that is valid.
Although this error can also be avoided by setting [SSL Communication During Authentication] Although this error can also be avoided by setting [SSL Server Authentication] to [OFF] at the
of [LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings] to [Disabled] at the device, keep in mind that it device, keep in mind that it would also no longer guarantee the legitimacy of the connected
would also no longer guarantee the legitimacy of the connected LDAP Server. LDAP Server.
0 1 6 - 5 2 6 L DA P S S L e r r o r 1 1 6 0 1 6 - 5 2 7 L DA P S S L e r r o r 1 1 7
Description Description
• SSL authentication error of the LDAP Server. • SSL authentication error of the LDAP Server.
The Server Name and the certificate do not match. SLL authentication internal error has occurred.
Procedure Procedure
• Ensure that the addrController of the LDAP Server set in the device matches the addrController • An internal error has occurred in the program.
of the LDAP Server defined in the SSL certificate.
Although this error can also be avoided by setting [SSL Server Authentication] to [OFF] at the
device, keep in mind that it would also no longer guarantee the legitimacy of the connected
LDAP Server.
01 6 -5 2 8 S ma rt Ca rd N ot Aut h 0 1 6 - 5 2 9 Re m o t e D o w n l o a d s e r v e r t i m e o u t
Description Description
• After a personal signature scan job has started up, the Smart Card PIN check status was cleared, • There was no response within the specified time (45 sec) when connecting to the Remote Down-
which causes the personal signature to fail. load server.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the PIN and again perform the personal signature scan. • Check the network connection. Check that the Remote Download server is properly configured
and operating on the network.
Procedure Procedure
• The clock difference between the device and the Kerberos server has exceeded the clock skew • Although the Kerberos Server exists in a realm that is set in the device, the addrController of the
limit of the Kerberos server. Check that the clocks of the device and Kerberos server are set Kerberos Server that was set cannot be connected to.
correctly. Check that the realm name and Server addrController in the Kerberos Settings of the device are
At the same time, check that the daylight saving time and time zone settings for the device and set correctly.
the Kerberos server are the same. When connected to a Microsoft Windows 2000/2003 Server, use all upper case for the realm
name.
0 1 6 - 5 3 5 Re m o t e D o w n l o a d fi l e a c c C o n t r o l l e r e r r o r 0 1 6 - 5 3 6 H o s t n a m e s o l u t i o n e r r o r i n Re m o t e D o w n l o a d
Description Description
• The specified FW update file (Download image file) is not found in the Remote Download • Failed to resolve the hostname (server name) during the DNS accController before connecting
server. to the Remote Download server. DNS library call error.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Remote Download server for the FW update file. • Check the connection to the DNS.
Or, check whether the Remote Download server name has been registered in the DNS.
0 1 6 - 5 3 7 Re m o t e D o w n l o a d s e r v e r c o n n e c t i o n e r r o r 0 1 6 - 5 3 8 Re m o t e D o w n l o a d fi l e w r i t e e r r o r
Description Description
• The port of the connection destination Remote Download server is not open. • The FW update file that was obtained from the Remote Download server cannot be saved prop-
erly into the HDD.
Procedure
• Check the network connection setting (port) of the Remote Download server. Procedure
• Check the HDD for free space and delete unnecessary files. Or, install a new HDD.
016-545 Atte stati on Agent e rr or 545 016-546 Atte station Age nt er r or 546
Description Description
• A Clock skew error has occurred in attestation. • A general user has attempted to obtain other users user information (GetUserInformation
The time of ApeosWare Authentication Agent and ActiveDirectory is out of sync with the upper method only).
limit of the Kerberos ClockSkew set in the ActiveDirectory. The User Name included in the WWW-Authorization of the http header is different from the
<UserID> included in the request mControllerage of the GetUserInformation method.
Procedure
• Match the time of the PC where the ApeosWare Authentication agent is installed in with the Procedure
time of the PC where the ActiveDirectory is. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Furthermore, if the Windows Time Service in the PC where the ApeosWare Authentication Agent
is installed is stopped, start it up.
Refer to the ApeosWare Authentication agent User Guide for solutions.
016-548 Atte stati on Agent e rr or 548 016-553 Atte station Age nt er r or 553
Description Description
• The information of the machine that is performing the authentication operation is not in the • The version information written in the SOAP Header cannot be understood. The ApeosWare Au-
database (GetUserInformation method only). thentication Agent does not support the version of the device interface.
The device is not registered in the ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
Procedure
Procedure • The version of the ApeosWare Authentication Agent needs to be upgraded.
• Register the device in the ApeosWare Authentication Agent. Refer to the [ApeosWare Authenti- Check that the machine is a product that is supported by the upgraded version of the Apeos-
cation Agent User Guide] for solutions. Ware Authentication Agent.
016-554 Atte stati on Agent e rr or 554 016-555 Atte station Age nt er r or 555
Description Description
• The existence check for the specified user in the event of an authentication error has failed. • Timed out when connecting to the authentication server.
The domain user reference login name or the reference password of the ApeosWare Authentica- The ApeosWare Authentication Agent cannot connect to the database or the Active Directory.
tion Agent domain is incorrect.
Procedure
Procedure • Check that the ApeosWare Authentication Agent can connect to the database or the Active
• Set the domain user reference login name or the reference password of the ApeosWare Authen- Directory.
tication Agent domain to the correct items. Refer to the ApeosWare Authentication Agent User Guide for solutions.
016-556 Atte stati on Agent e rr or 556 016-557 Atte station Age nt er r or 557
Description An internal error has occurred in the ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
• Timeout during database procControllering.
Procedure
Error has occurred in the database that the ApeosWare Authentication Agent is connected to
• Check the ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
due to overloading.
Refer to the ApeosWare Authentication Agent User Guide for solutions.
Procedure
• Wait for a while before authenticating again as the service is overloaded.
If that did not solve the problem, check the ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
Refer to the ApeosWare Authentication Agent User Guide for solutions.
Procedure Procedure
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Check that all system data that must be set to perform the Remote Download have been prop-
erly set.
Example: Check the server settings corresponding to the IP mode, etc.
016-560 Atte stati on Agent e rr or 560 016-562 ADetected user duplication, in a cert agent
Description Description
• A communication error has occurred between the ApeosWare Authentication Agent and the • Two or more entries with the same IC card information were found in the temporary user DB of
machine. Active Directory or Authentication Agent.
Procedure Procedure
1. Check that the network cable is connected and check the settings of the Authentication Agent • Make corrections so that the temporary user entries of the Active Directory or Authentication
function. Agent do not have the same IC card information.
2. If DNS addrController of the Server is set as the Server name/IP addrController of the Apeos-
Ware Authentication Agent in the printer function settings list, check that DNS is enabled.
0 1 6 - 5 6 3 I m a g e Lo g M e m o r y Fu l l ( E x p . K i t ) 0 1 6 - 5 6 4 Re m o t e D o w n l o a d S e r v e r A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Fa i l e d
Description Description
• When the system data [Log/Image Creation Guarantee Level] is set to [High], the Image Exten- • When accControllering the Remote Download server, an authentication error notification was is-
sion Kit has insufficient memory. sued from the server.
Procedure Procedure
• Set the image quality to [Normal]. • Check that the correct user name and password was specified when accControllering the Re-
mote Download server.
0 1 6 - 5 6 5 B a c k u p Re s t o r e E r r o r 0 1 6 - 5 6 6 B a c k u p Re s t o r e C o n d i t i o n E r r o r
Description Description
• When performing backup, there is no backup storage destination. • During backup, the FW download file that has the same version as the machine cannot be
• When performing restore or deletion of backup files, there are no backup files. found.
• During restore, the machine configuration during backup and restore does not match. Therefore,
Procedure the restore cannot be performed.
• For USB backup, check that the USB Memory is properly installed. If the fault persists, use a PC • At an attempt to restore a specific backed-up file, a backed-up file for another device or a wrong
to check the USB memory for a [backup] directory. If it is not there, create it. backed-up file has been selected.
• When performing restore or deletion of backup files from the USB backup file, check that the
USB Memory is properly installed. Procedure
• During backup, save the FW download file into the dwld directory in the USB memory, plug it in-
to the machine, and then perform the backup.
• During restore, use the same IOT and IIT ROM versions as those during backup. When perform-
ing restore using a USB backup file, also use the same HDD configuration.
• If there is no HDD, use the same Controller ROM versions as well. If the same configuration can-
not be attained, delete the backup file from the panel.
• If the problem occurred at an attempt to restore a backed-up file from an external place, check
that the Controller/IIT/IOT/FAX ROM version is still the same as the version used when the
backed-up file was created. Furthermore, check the device is the same as the one that generated
the backed-up file.
0 1 6 - 5 6 7 B a c k u p C a p a c i t y Fu l l 0 1 6 - 5 6 8 B a c k u p Re s t o r e Fa i l e d
• The backup destination has insufficient capacity. • An HDD accController error has occurred.
• The memory is not enough for data-to-back-up to be encrypted. • A USB Memory accController error has occurred.
• The backup file was corrupted during restore.
Procedure
1. Before performing the HDD backup, delete existing backup files through the panel to increase • An unexpected error has occurred.
the capacity.
Procedure
2. Before performing USB backup, delete the backup files in the USB memory through the panel,
1. Initialize the HDD, dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk.
or use a PC to delete unnecessary files in the USB memory to increase the capacity.
2. Before performing restore using the HDD backup file, delete backup files through the UI panel.
If the fault persists, initialize the HDD, dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk.
3. For USB backup, check that the USB Memory is properly installed. If the fault persists, use a PC
to format the USB Memory.
4. When performing restore using USB backup files, check that the USB Memory is properly in-
stalled. If the fault persists, use the UI panel or a PC to delete the backup files.
5. If the problem still persists, use a PC to format the USB Memory.
0 1 6 - 5 7 1 J o b t i c ke t w r o n g p a ra m 0 1 6 - 5 7 2 J o b t i c ke t m e d i a e r r o r
Description Description
• Decomposer detects job ticket has instructed Device to do what is inconsistent with device spec. • Decomposer detects paper whose properties are specified by job ticket cannot be recognized as
paper (size/type/color) supported by device.
Procedure
• Check for a mismatch between parameters specified by job ticket, correct the parameters and Procedure
then resend the job. • Check that the device that receives data can print it onto paper whose properties (size/type/
weight/color/punched) are specified by job ticket.
0 1 6 - 5 7 7 Pr o b l e m i n F T P s e r v i c e 0 1 6 - 5 7 8 L o g i n / Pa s s w o r d E r r o r
Description A login name or password error in FTP scan.
• Failed to connect to the FTP service of the destination server.
Procedure
Procedure Print a Configuration Report and have the customer confirm that the Default File Destination or Al-
ternate File Destination settings listed on the last page of the report are correctly set in the ma-
• Take any one of the following actions:
chine, especially the Login Name.
– Check that the FTP service of the Server is operating.
Ask the customer to reset or change the Password for the machine's User account on their FTP serv-
– Check that the FTP port number of the Server matches the FTP port number that is set on er as the Password may have expired. If they change the Password at their server, then the new
the machine. Password must be entered into the File Destination settings in the machine. Refer to the System Ad-
ministrator Guide.
Have the customer attempt to log in to their FTP server from a PC on their network and using the
Login Name and Password specified in the machine. This will verify that the Name and Password
are correct.
If the machine problem persists, then have the customer refer to the product's System Administra-
tor Guide to be sure that the machine is properly configured or have them contact the Xerox Cus-
tomer Support Center.
Procedure Procedure
1. Check that the scanned image storage destination on the FTP scan server is correct. 1. Check the accController right to the FTP scan server.
0 1 6 - 5 8 1 F i l e n a m e s u f fi x l i m i t o v e r i n F T P 0 1 6 - 5 8 2 F i l e c r e a t i o n fa i l u r e i n F T P
Description Description
• When determining the file/folder name in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the file • When creating a file in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the file creation has failed.
name/folder name suffix exceeded the limit.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Check that the specified name is a file name that can be created in the storage destination
1. Change the file name/destination folder. Else, move or delete the files in the destination folder. 2. Check that the storage destination has enough free space.
0 1 6 - 5 8 3 Lo c k Fo l d e r C r e a t i o n Fa i l u r e I n F t p 0 1 6 - 5 8 4 Fo l d e r C r e a t i o n Fa i l u r e
Description A failure in creating a FTP scan folder
• When creating a lock folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the lock folder crea-
tion has failed. Procedure
Print a Configuration Report and have the customer confirm that the Default File Destination or Al-
Procedure ternate File Destination settings listed on the last page of the report are correctly set in the ma-
chine, especially the Login Name.
1. When a lock directory (*.LCK) remained in the transfer destination, delete it manually and retry
the job. Have the customer perform the following:
2. Check that the specified name is a folder name that can be created in the storage destination.
1. Log in to their FTP server from a PC on their network and using the Login Name and Password
3. Check whether a folder with the same name as the specified name already exists. specified in the machine.
4. Check that the storage destination has enough free space. 2. Create a Folder on the FTP server in the location that the machine should be transferring files in-
to and copy a file into the Folder. Then delete the file and folder. This will verify that the ma-
chine's User account has proper permissions on the FTP server.
3. Have them verify that there is sufficient file space in the destination on the FTP server to allow
the machine to transfer files.
4. Have the customer check for an abundance of files and folders and delete some of them if
possible.
If the machine problem persists, then have the customer refer to the product's System Administra-
tor Guide to be sure that the machine is properly configured or have them contact the Xerox Cus-
tomer Support Center.
0 1 6 - 5 8 5 F i l e D e l e t e Fa i l u r e I n F t p 0 1 6 - 5 8 6 Lo c k Fo l d e r D e l e t e Fa i l u r e I n F t p
Description Description
• When deleting a file in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the deletion has failed. • When deleting a lock folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the deletion has
failed.
Procedure
1. Check the accController right to the server. Procedure
1. Check the accController right to the server.
2. When a lock directory (*.LCK) remained in the transfer destination, delete it manually and retry
the job.
0 1 6 - 5 8 7 Fo l d e r d e l e t e fa i l u r e i n F T P 0 1 6 - 5 8 8 D a t a w r i t e - i n fa i l u r e t o F T P s e r v e r
Description Description
• When deleting a folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the deletion has failed. • Failed to write data into the server after connecting to the FTP server.
Procedure Procedure
1. Check the accController right to the server. 1. Check that the storage destination has enough free space.
0 1 6 - 5 8 9 D a t a r e a d fa i l u r e fr o m F T P s e r v e r 0 1 6 - 5 9 0 D a t a r e a d i n g fa i l u r e fr o m F T P s e r v e r
Description Description
• Failed to read data from the FTP server after connecting to the FTP server during scanner (Save • Unable to save a file after connecting to the FTP server during scanner (Save to PC) FTP transfer
to PC) FTP transfer. because File Name Conflict is set to Cancel Job.
Procedure Procedure
• Check whether there is accController right to the FTP server and grant the proper rights. • Set File Name Conflict to other than Cancel Job.
0 1 6 - 5 9 1 F T P s c a n fi l i n g p o l i c y i n j u s t i c e 0 1 6 - 5 9 2 N E X T N A M E . DAT fi l e a c c Co n t r o l l e r e r r o r i n F T P
Description Description
• Incorrect filing policy (when additional items are selected) was detected after connecting with • An error has occurred when accControllering the NEXTNAME.DAT file after connecting to the
the FTP server. FTP server during scanner (Save to PC) FTP transfer.
Procedure Procedure
1. When Add is selected for File Name Conflict, check that the file format is not set to Multi-page. 1. When Add is selected for File Name Conflict, check that the NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct.
Procedure Procedure
• Repeat the operation. • Repeat the operation.
0 1 6 - 5 9 5 P O RT c o m m a n d fa i l u r e i n F T P 0 1 6 - 5 9 6 C D U P c o m m a n d fa i l u r e i n F T P
Description Description
• The PORT command has failed after connecting to the FTP server. (Network error) • The CDUP command has failed after connecting to the FTP server. (Network error)
Procedure Procedure
• Repeat the operation. • Repeat the operation.
0 1 6 - 5 9 7 S a m e n a m e fi l e e x i s t s i n F T P s e r v e r 0 1 6 - 5 9 8 E m a i l m Co n t r o l l e ra g e s i z e o v e r
Description Description
• The procController was cancelled because a file/folder with the same name was detected after • In paginating, mail data size per page exceeds system data max mControllerage size.
connecting to the FTP server. (CreditMutuel specifications)
Procedure
Procedure • Perform the following:
• Perform the same operation again without multiple machines accControllering the same folder
in the same server. 1. Reduce a send parameter of resolution (image-to-send quality) and resend the job.
2. Reduce a send parameter of magnification and resend the job. (A3 to A4, etc.)
3. Change max mControllerage size to a larger value. (10MB recommended as default)
0 1 6 - 5 9 9 E m a i l m Co n t r o l l e ra g e s i z e o v e r 0 1 6 - 6 0 0 K O A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Lo c ke d
Description KO Authentication Locked. The number of consecutive KO authentication errors reached the num-
ber specified in system data: ‘Maximum Consecutive KO Authentication Errors [700-563]).
• In paginating, mail data size per page exceeds system data max mControllerage size.
Procedure Procedure
Only record the data to the history.
• Perform the following:
1. Reduce a send parameter of resolution (image-to-send quality) and resend the job.
2. Reduce a send parameter of magnification and resend the job. (A3 to A4, etc.)
3. Change max mControllerage size to a larger value. (10MB recommended as default)
0 1 6 - 6 0 1 I l l e g a l A c c Co n t r o l l e r D e t e c t i o n 0 1 6 - 6 0 3 H D D n o t fo u n d Fa i l
Illegal AccController Detection. The number of authentication errors (including CO/KO) within a giv- Description
en time reached the number specified in system data: ‘Maximum Number of Authentication Errors
• Although the HDD was connected in the previous Power ON, now it cannot be detected.
(dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-564]).
Procedure Procedure
• (No User intervention needed)
Only record the data to the history.
0 1 6 - 6 0 4 C r e a t E d D e b u g - l o g By S y s t e m 0 1 6 - 6 0 5 C r e a t e d D e b u g - l o g By E x t C o n t
Description Description
• 1. When the power is turned OFF and a debug log is automatically created during job execution • When a debug log is created by a request from an external DFE such as DocuSP
2. When the power is turned ON and a debug log is automatically created while the power is
turned OFF and the Power OFF Sequence is not executed Procedure
• Collect the debug log if necControllerary.
Procedure
• Collect the debug log if necControllerary.
0 1 6 - 6 0 6 Co n t - B P C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l 0 1 6 - 6 0 7 Co n t - U I C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l
Description Description
• Fault in the connection with the back plane is detected by the controller. • Fault in the connection with the UI Cable is detected by the controller.
Procedure Procedure
• Repair the connection fault. • Repair the connection fault.
0 1 6 - 6 0 8 Co n t - M C U C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l 0 1 6 - 6 0 9 P C I O p t i o n N o S u p p o r t D e v i c e Fa i l
Description Description
• Fault in the connection with the MCU Cable is detected by the controller. • Unknown PCI Option is detected by the controller.
Procedure Procedure
• Repair the connection fault. • Remove unknown PCI Option.
0 1 6 - 6 1 0 P C I E X O p t i o n N o S u p p o r t D e v i c e Fa i l 0 1 6 - 6 1 1 S D C a r d Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l
Description Description
• Unknown PCI Ex Option is detected by the controller. • SD Card not inserted is detected by controller.
Procedure Procedure
• Remove unknown PCI Ex Option. • Insert SD Card.
0 1 6 - 6 1 2 Lo g I m a g e C r e a t i o n Fa i l u r e 0 1 6 - 7 0 0 P a s s w o r d i s u n d e r m i n i m u m fi g u r e s
Description Description
• An error has occurred during the creation of the log image. (This is limited to when the assur- • The number of password digits for the job received is lController than the minimum.
ance level is Low for log image creation.) *Enable setting the minimum number of password digits for a security print and an authentica-
tion print in order not to store any job for which a lController-than-minimum number of pass-
Procedure word digits are entered.
• (No CE intervention needed)
Procedure
• Use a minimum or larger number of password digits for the job to print out.
If the fault persists, perform the following:
0 1 6 - 7 0 1 O u t o f A RT E X M e m o r y 0 1 6 - 7 0 2 O u t o f Pa g e B u f fe r
Out of ART EX Memory. Insufficient memory was detected while using ART EX. Out of Page Buffer. Even a single page could not be comprControllered. It was detected that the
print page buffer was insufficient.
Procedure
1. Increase the allocated memory of the ART EX. (In some cases, actual memory must be Procedure
increased) 1. Change the Print mode (Example: High Quality mode → Normal mode).
2. Change the print mode. (Example: High Quality mode → Normal mode) 2. Reduce the resolution.
3. Lower the resolution. 3. Set [Page Print mode] to [Enabled].
4. Set [Page Print mode] to [Enabled]. 4. Increase the page buffer.
5. Execute [Image ComprControllerion] in the [Graphics] tab of the printer driver. 5. Execute [Image ComprControllerion] in the [Graphics] tab of the printer driver.
6. For PCL, set the [PCL Heap Memory/Band Buffer Ratio] to above 1:2.
Procedure Procedure
Check that HDD is installed. Remove any unnecessary doc/user to perform reprinting.
If the problem occurs with the machine with HDD, check that the correct operation for security print
is performed.
0 1 6 - 7 0 7 S a m p l e Pr i n t Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 7 0 8 H D Fu l l b y A n n o t a t i o n / Wa t e r m a r k I m a g e
Sample Print Fault. A sample print was not possible because the HDD was not installed. HD Full by Annotation/Watermark Image. The job terminated because the full condition was de-
tected during HD storage of an annotation or watermark image.
Procedure
Check that HDD is installed. If the problem occurs with the machine with HDD, check that the cor- Procedure
rect operation for proof print is performed. • Cancel Annotation/Watermark and repeat the operation.
• Reduce the number of document pages. In Mixed Size mode, only a single size is available.
• For printing Stored Document, delete unnecessary documents from the HDD and repeat the
operation.
• Expand the capacity of the HDD partition of the relevant service.
0 1 6 - 7 0 9 A RT E X Co m m a n d Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 7 1 0 D e l a ye d Pr i n t Fa u l t
ART EX Command Fault. An ART EX command error occurred during PLW procControllering. Delayed Print Fault.
Procedure Procedure
Set a correct password and try again. Open the appropriate mailbox and try again.
0 1 6 - 7 1 5 E S C P Fo r m I n v a l i d Pa s s w o r d 0 1 6 - 7 1 6 T I F F D a ta O ve r f l o w
Description TIFF Data Overflow. A TIFF file could not be spooled because the capacity of the HDD was
exceeded.
• Incorrect password was input when attempting to use ESCP form. Job is aborted.
Procedure Procedure
Install the HDD or increase the capacity of the HDD.
• Input the correct password to use ESCP Form.
0 1 6 - 7 1 7 Fa x / I n t e r n e t FA X S e n d Re s u l t N o t Fo u n d 0 1 6 - 7 1 8 I n s u f fi c i e n t P C L 6 M e m o r y
Description Out of PCL6 Memory. Insufficient memory was detected when using PCL6.
• Failed attempt to create Unsent Report or Monitor Report because the Send Result Data that is
required to create the report is not stored in the memory/HDD of the device. Procedure
Decrease resolution or avoid using Duplex Print/N-Up, to instruct the MC to reprint.
– HDD Full due to an Internet FAX document send with size exceeding the partition C size
(2GB or 4GB), resulting in the Internet FAX Send Result Data being unable to be stored.
– Over 200 jobs were executed since the last selected Output Report job, resulting in the Inter-
net FAX Send Result Data being overwritten.
Procedure
• Split any Internet FAX documents that would exceed 2GB in document storage size into several
jobs and control the usage amount of memory, HDD, etc.
• If there is a large amount of Scanner/Internet FAX documents being procControllered, please
wait until the other scanner/Internet FAX jobs are completed before performing your Scanner/
Internet FAX job.
• Do not perform over 200 jobs in between the end of the job that you want to output the report
for until the actual report output operation.
0 1 6 - 7 1 9 I n s u f fi c i e n t P C L M e m o r y 0 1 6 - 7 2 0 P C L Co m m a n d Fa u l t
Out of PCL Memory. Insufficient memory was detected when using PCL. PCL Command Fault. A PCL command error occurred during PCL procControllering.
Procedure Procedure
Increase the PCL memory size. Increasing the memory for the whole system will increase the memo- Cancel the job to retry.
ry to be allocated to the Decomposer in some measure.
UI settings or other ways cannot explicitly increase the PCL memory.
Therefore, if a job is aborted due to insufficient memory when the memory has been increased to
the maximum capacity, change the printer driver settings to see if printing becomes available.
0 1 6 - 7 2 1 O t h e r Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 7 2 2 J o b C a n c e l b y S t a p l e Po s i t i o n N G
Other Fault. An unexpected error occurred during print procControllering. Job Cancel by Staple Position NG. A job was cancelled because the staple position was impossible.
Procedure Procedure
Check the following: • Check the Staple settings for the print data to be sent to the printer.
• Check that with ‘Paper Tray Settings set to ‘Auto Tray Selection disabled for all the trays in • Check the client driver settings or PC settings.
‘Common Settings under System Settings, Auto Tray Selection is not selected.
• Check ESC/P Command Fault then Print Fault.
0 1 6 - 7 2 3 J o b C a n c e l b y P u n c h Po s i t i o n N G 0 1 6 - 7 2 4 Co m p l e x Po s i t i o n Fa u l t o f S t a p l e a n d Pu n c h
Job Cancel by Punch Position NG. A job was cancelled because the punch position was impossible. Complex Position Fault of Staple and Punch.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Punch settings for the print data to be sent to the printer. Change settings so that the same binding position (same side of output paper) is specified.
• Check the client driver settings or PC settings.
0 1 6 - 7 2 5 B - Fo r m a t t e r L i b ra r y I m a g e Co n v e r s i o n E r r o r 0 1 6 - 7 2 6 P D L A u t o S w i tc h Fa u l t
Description PDL Auto Switch Fault. The print language could not be automatically selected when the print mode
specification was ‘automatic.
• An error has occurred where the Mailbox document cannot be converted to Facsimile Data when
Job Flow function of the machine is used to send the scanned documents stored in the Mailbox
to the Facsimile Device. Procedure
In parallel connection, check it according to the procedures given below.
Procedure 1. Set a longer time for [Auto Output Time] by selecting [Port Settings]>[Parallel] in CWIS.
• Do not use the Job Flow function.
2. Install a new parallel cable.
On the Facsimile selection screen of the machine, specify to directly scan the document and
send it to the Facsimile recipient. 3. If a long parallel cable is used, use a short cable (genuine) and try printing again.
4. Change the print language from [Auto] to [ARTEX] or [PS] fixed by selecting [Emulation Set-
tings]>[Print Mode] in CWIS.
If not in parallel connection, check Step 4 above.
Procedure Procedure
Wait for a while and then resend the data. Resend the form data.
0 1 6 - 7 3 3 D e s t i n a t i o n A d d r Co n t r o l l e r Re s o l u t i o n Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 7 3 4 S i m p l i fi e d D e s t i n a t i o n Re s u l t Re p o r t O u t p u t Fa u l t
Destination AddrController Resolution Fault. Simple Transmission report invocation error. An error occurred while outputting a simple destination
addrController result report.
1. An IP addrController could not be obtained from the character string on the right side of the @
sign in the destination mail addrController when sending mail by a peer-to-peer communication Procedure
method.
1. Set [Receive via SMTP] for E-mail receive setting on the sending device.
2. The character string on the right side of the @ sign could not be resolved by DNS as an FQDN
2. Remove the restriction on receiving E-mails from a self-domain in the receivable domain list if
when sending mail by a peer-to-peer communication method.
any.
Procedure
• Check if the destination addrController has been entered properly.
• Set a correct DNS server addrController.
0 1 6 - 7 3 5 U p d a t i n g J o b Te m p l a t e 0 1 6 - 7 3 6 Re m o t e D i r e c t o r y Lo c k Fa u l t
Updating Job Template. It decided to print the ‘Job Template List while updating a job template. Remote directory lock error. Lock directory creation failed.
Procedure Procedure
After the job template update is complete, retry. 1. Delete any existing lock directories (*.LCK) in the transfer destination manually and then execute
the job again.
2. Make correct settings for the permissions to the transfer destination directories.
3. Secure a disk capacity if the HDD for the transfer destination directory is full.
0 1 6 - 7 3 7 Lo c k D i r e c t o r y D e l e t i o n Fa i l 0 1 6 - 7 3 8 P S B o o k l e t P r i n t O u t p u t Pa p e r S i z e I n c o r r e c t
Remote lock directory remove Fault. Lock directory deletion failed. PS Booklet Print Output Paper Size is illegal. Designated paper size is incorrect.
Procedure Procedure
Delete any existing lock directories (*.LCK) in the transfer destination manually and then execute Specify the paper size that allows booklet printing.
the job again.
Procedure Procedure
Specify the combination of the document/paper sizes that allows booklet printing. Specify the tray that allows booklet printing.
0 1 6 - 7 4 1 D o w n l o a d M o d e N G J o b Fa i l 0 1 6 - 7 4 2 D o w n l o a d D a t a Pr o d u c t I D E r r o r
Description Description
• Unable to transit to Download Mode because download prohibition was detected due to SysDa- • The Product ID sent in the download data and the Product ID (SysData: 700-421 to 700-428)
ta:700-420 = 1, or because a job exists. stored in the SEEP-ROM do not match.
• The machine did not transit to Download Mode because it detected User Operation in ProgrCon-
troller. (The machine remains in the User Operation in ProgrController state for 1 minute after Procedure
panel operation was completed) • Because this could be due to incorrect download data, re-obtain the download data and perform
the operation again.
Procedure
• Cancel the Download Prohibited mode and check that the jobs have completed before retrying
the operation. Check that the Communicating LED is OFF.
• After completing a panel operation, wait for 1 minute or longer before starting the download
operation.
If the fault persists, carry out the following procedure:
Cancel the Download Prohibited mode (set SysData:700-420 to 0) before retrying the
operation.
0 1 6 - 7 4 3 D o w n l o a d D a ta M o d e l M i s m a tc h 0 1 6 - 7 4 4 D o w n l o a d D a t a Ce c k S u m E r r o r
Description The checksum of download data is incorrect.
• The Model Name obtained from the installed IISS/DADF/IOT/Fax Unit/Finisher and the Model
Name contained in each firmware CDI header in the downloaded file do not match. Procedure
1. Connect the connection cables to the device properly and try again.
In the Controller, the comparison is between the [Model Name obtained from currently installed
ROM header] and the [Model Name in download file].
[Exception]
Model Names are not checked in DCC450G IOT MACS because their I/F specifications are old.
• The panel type (HB or FCW) connected to the device during the download and the panel type
(HB or FCW) contained in the Controller firmware CDI header in the download file do not
match.
Procedure
• The download file is incorrect. Obtain the download file for the same model as the machine to
be updated and perform the operation again.
Or, obtain the download file that supports the panel type (FCW-UI or HB-UI) connected to the
machine and perform the operation again.
0 1 6 - 7 4 7 N o M e m o r y Fo r D ra w i n g A n n o t a t i o n 0 1 6 - 7 4 8 H D Fu l l
Description HD Full. The full condition was detected during HD accController.
• When drawing an annotation image with the copy repeat function specified, there would be in-
sufficient memory in this machines Controller PWB. Procedure
Increase free HDD space and reprint.
Procedure
1. Increase the annotation image size.
2. Reduce the number of repeat images for the repeat function.
Avoid insufficient memory by performing a combination of the above steps 1 and 2.
0 1 6 - 7 4 9 J C L Sy n t a x Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 7 5 0 Pr i n t j o b t i c ke t d e s c r i p t i o n e r r o r
JCL Syntax Fault. A syntax error was detected in a JCL or PJL command. PDF print job ticket description error has occurred.
Procedure When the customer uses applications such as ContentsBridge2005, etc. to send a PDF directly, the
machine received the print job ticket that was sent together with the PDF. However, the print job
1. If a long cable is used for parallel connection, use a short cable (genuine) and try printing again.
ticket data is either text that is not supported in this machine or print instruction that is not sup-
2. Check whether the PC has sufficient memory. ported in this machine.
3. Check the HDD in the PC for breakage.
Procedure
4. Check whether the settings in the printer driver properties>[Printer Configuration] are different 1. Check the operation instruction used by the operator for correct sending of PDF documments
from the actual configuration. from the machine.
2. Inform the customer of the of the unsupported application type and the description in the
above information.
3. Attept the operation using a stardard operation for sending a PDF from the machine.
4. If the fault persists, verify the machine software is the most current version, then upgrade the
software, GP 2, then run the send operation again.
Procedure Procedure
Print from Acrobat Reader by using the driver. Change a print mode as follows: from ‘High Resolution to ‘Standard or from ‘Standard to ‘High
Speed.
If the problem still persists, add a memory. If despite a max capacity of memory the problem still
persists, print from Acrobat Reader by using the driver.
0 1 6 - 7 5 3 P D F Pa s s w o r d M i s m a t c h e d 0 1 6 - 7 5 4 P D F L Z W N o t I n s ta l l e d
PDF Password Mismatched. The password specified on the UI panel and the password specified in PDF LZW Not Installed. A PDF file that used LZW comprControllerion technology was procControl-
XJPL (specified by the contents bridge) did not agree when procControllering a PDF file that was lered by the PDF bridge when the ‘Contents Bridge Expansion Kit was not installed.
password protected.
Procedure
Procedure Install ‘Contents Bridge Expansion Kit, or print from Acrobat Reader by using the driver.
Specify the correct password on UI Panel or through Contents Bridge.
0 1 6 - 7 5 5 P D F Pr i n t Pr o h i b i t e d 0 1 6 - 7 5 6 A u d i t r o n - Pr o h i b i t S e r v i c e
PDF Print Prohibited. A PDF file for which it had been specified that printing was prohibited was Auditron-Prohibit Service. The use of this service is prohibited.
procControllered.
Procedure
Procedure Ask the account administrator to permit the use of services.
Clear the prohibition of printing a PDF file and then print it by using Acrobat.
Procedure Procedure
Set the correct account and retry. 1. Reset to another function available for the account and retry.
2. Ask the account administrator to add the right.
0 1 6 - 7 5 9 A u d i t r o n - Re a c h e d L i m i t 0 1 6 - 7 6 0 P S D e c o m p o s e Fa u l t
Auditron-Reached Limit. The upper bound to the number of pages that can be copied was reached. PS Decompose Fault. An error occurred during postscript (option) procControllering.
Procedure Procedure
Ask the account administrator to set a new paper qty. • Set a print mode to ‘Speed Preferred.
• Resend the job. (If the fault persists, check the execution environment and data.)
0 1 6 - 7 6 1 F I FO E m p t y . 0 1 6 - 7 6 2 Pr i n t L A N G N o t I n s t a l l e d
FIFO Empty. Image expansion error (FIFO empty error). Print LANG Not Installed. A function that is not installed (such as a print language or print utility)
was specified.
Procedure
Print in the Speed Preferred mode. If this does not resolve the problem, use the Print Guarantee Procedure
mode for print. (Only for the machine with this mode.) In ‘Printer Mode specify a print language.
0 1 6 - 7 6 3 P O P s e r v e r i s n o t fo u n d . 0 1 6 - 7 6 4 S MT P S e r v e r Co n n e c t Fa u l t
Description SMTP Server Connect Fault. It was not possible to connect to the SMTP server.
• The destination requested could not resolve the POP server destination.
Procedure
Procedure Take out mail from the Server HDD. Restart SMTP Services.
1. Check the following to see if the POP server, which is a destination, and this machine can com-
municate with each other on the network.
• The server IP addrController is correct.
• The network cable is connected.
0 1 6 - 7 6 5 S MT P S e r v e r H D Fu l l 0 1 6 - 7 6 6 S MT P S e r v e r F i l e Sy s t e m Fa u l t
SMTP Server HD Full. It was not possible to send mail because the HDD capacity of the SMTP server SMTP Server File System Fault. An error occurred in the SMTP server.
was full.
Procedure
Procedure Contact the SMTP Server administrator. Reconsider the preset limit to the server capacity.
Take out mail from the Server HDD. Reconsider the capacity of the server.
0 1 6 - 7 6 7 I n v a l i d E - m a i l A d d r Co n t r o l l e r 0 1 6 - 7 6 8 I n v a l i d S e n d e r A d d r Co n t r o l l e r
Invalid E-mail AddrController. It was not possible to send because the mail addrController was Invalid Sender AddrController. It was not possible to connect to the SMTP server because the mail
wrong. addrController of this equipment was not correct.
Procedure Procedure
Verify the mail addrController is correct and resend the mail. Check the set-up MC mail addrController to see if the Email addrController is valid in the domain.
0 1 6 - 7 6 9 S MT P S e r v e r U n s u p p o r t e d D S N 0 1 6 - 7 7 0 T h e d i r e c t fa x fu n c t i o n i s c a n c e l e d by N V M .
SMTP Server Unsupported DSN. The SMTP server does not support path verification (DNS). Description
• Direct FAX job prohibition by the System Data Settings.
Procedure
Enable the ESMTP function of the nearest SMTP server, or set DNS to Off and send. Procedure
• To release the direct FAX job prohibition, set the target system to 0.
0 1 6 - 7 7 1 S c a n D a t a Re p o s i t o r y Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 7 7 2 S c a n D a t a Re p o s i t o r y Fa u l t
Scan Data Repository Fault. The scan data repository addrController cannot be obtained with the Scan Data Repository Fault. The scan data repository addrController cannot be obtained with the
CentreWare scan service. CentreWare scan service.
Procedure Procedure
Check the connection to DNS, or check to see if the scan data repository domain name is registered Set the DNS addrController, or use the IP addrController as the scan data repository addrController.
at DNS.
0 1 6 - 7 7 3 I n v a l i d I P A d d r Co n t r o l l e r 0 1 6 - 7 7 4 H D Fu l l - Co m p r Co n t r o l l e r i o n Co n v e r t
Invalid IP AddrController. The IP addrController of this equipment is not specified correctly. HD Full-ComprControllerion Convert. ComprControllerion and conversion procControllering is not
possible because there is insufficient HDD capacity.
Procedure
Check the DHCP environment, or set the fixed IP addrController for this machine. Procedure
Remove un-necControllerary data from HDD to increase free space, and retry.
0 1 6 - 7 7 5 H D Fu l l - I m a g e C o n v e r t 0 1 6 - 7 7 6 I m a g e Co n v e r t Fa u l t
HD Full-Image Convert. Image conversion procControllering is not possible because there is insuffi- Image Convert Fault. An error occurred during image conversion procControllering.
cient HDD capacity.
Procedure
Procedure 1. In CentreWare Internet Services, check data. (A portion of the data might have finished image
Remove un-necControllerary data from HDD to increase free space, and retry. conversion procControllering.)
2. Attempt to take out data by forced polling.
0 1 6 - 7 7 7 H D A c c Co n t r o l l e r Fa u l t - I m a g e 0 1 6 - 7 7 8 H D Fu l l - S c a n I m a g e Co n v e r t
HD AccController ERR-Image Convert. An error occurred in the HDD during image procControllering. HD Full-Scan Image Convert. Scan image procControllering was interrupted because the HDD ca-
pacity was exceeded.
Procedure
1. Enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diag Program and format the HDD. Procedure
Increase free HDD space and rescan.
2. If the problem still persists, install a new HDD (PL 3.2).
016-779 0 1 6 - 7 8 0 H D A c c Co n t r o l l e r Fa u l t - I m a g e Co n v e r t
Scan Image Conversion Fault. An error occurred during scan image conversion procControllering. HD AccController ERR-Image Convert. An error occurred in the HDD during scan image conversion
procControllering.
Procedure
Retry the operation. Procedure
1. Enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diag Program and format the HDD.
2. If the problem still persists, install a new HDD (PL 3.2).
0 1 6 - 7 8 1 S c a n S e r v e r Co n n e c t Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 7 8 2 S c a n S e r v e r Lo g i n Fa u l t
Scan Server Connect Fault. The CentreWare scan service could not connect to the server to send a Scan Server Login Fault. The CentreWare scan service could not log into the server to send a file.
file.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Set up the login name and password at the destination server.
1. Set up the proper machine ‘Subnet Mask and ‘Gateway.
2. Set up the proper login name and password in attributes that the Job Template file has.
2. ‘PING from the destination server, check that the machine is connected.
3. In CentreWare and on the client PC, set the same account as the above at resources.
3. Check that the machine with Windows or UNIX can connect to the destination server via ftp.
0 1 6 - 7 8 3 I n v a l i d S e r v e r Pa t h 0 1 6 - 7 8 4 S e r v e r W r i t e Fa u l t
Invalid Server Path. The CentreWare scan service could not find the specified server path to send a Server Write Fault. An error occurred when writing to the server with the CentreWare scan service.
file.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Check for ‘Write Authorization into the server directory.
Check the name of the path to the server which path is set up on the job template.
2. Check the server disk for free space.
0 1 6 - 7 8 5 S e r v e r H D Fu l l 0 1 6 - 7 8 6 H D Fu l l - S c a n W r i t e Fa u l t
Server HD Full. The CentreWare scan service could not send a file because the HDD of the server HD Full-Scan Write Fault. It was not possible to write a file while using the scan function because
had insufficient capacity. the HDD capacity was insufficient.
Procedure Procedure
Check that there is ‘Write Authorization in the server directory and increase free space on the server 1. A print job may make HDD full for a while, so wait for a while and retry.
disk. 2. Enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diag Program and format HDD.
3. Install a new HDD (PL 3.2).
01 6 - 7 8 7 I n va l id Se r ver IP A D D 0 1 6 - 7 8 8 Re t r i e v e t o B r o w s e r Fa u l t
Invalid Server IP ADD. The server addrController specified in a job template was wrong. Retrieve to Browser Fault. The retrieval of a file from a web browser failed.
Procedure Procedure
Specify the correct job template, or check the contents (string Repository Name) of the job tem- 1. Reload the browser page and perform retrieval operation again.
plate file.
2. Activate the browser again and perform retrieval operation again.
3. Turn the device Off then On and perform retrieval operation again.
Note that no actions are required if the job was canceled by a user.
4. Improve the connection status to a network.
5. Check whether there are problems such as duplicated IP addrControlleres.
0 1 6 - 7 8 9 H D Fu l l - J o b M e m o r y 0 1 6 - 7 9 1 F i l e Re t r i e v e Fa u l t
HD Full-Job Memory. ProcControllering was interrupted because the required HDD capacity to proc- File Retrieve Fault. There was an error in obtaining a file.
Controller mail was exceeded.
Procedure
Procedure Check server directory structure and files (whether files exist, etc.). Check for the right to accControl-
Reduce resolution or reduction/enlargement ratio to decrease the data size or send in several ler both. Check whether accController to the specified transfer destination server is available.
pieces.
0 1 6 - 7 9 2 S p e c i fi e d J o b N o t Fo u n d 0 1 6 - 7 9 3 M F I / O H D Fu l l
Specified Job Not Found. The job log for a job specified in the panel could not be obtained when MF I/O HD Full. The HDD capacity was insufficient.
outputting an aggregate report by job.
Procedure
Procedure Delete the files in the HDD. Or, initialize the HD (dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk).
Remove unnecessary data from HDD to increase free space.
0 1 6 - 7 9 4 M e d i a Re a d e r 0 1 6 - 7 9 5 M e d i a Re a d e r : Fo r m a t Fa u l t
Media Reader: Media No Insert. Media Reader: Format Fault.
Procedure Procedure
• Check that the Media is inserted. Check the contents in the Media from the PC. Check the file format/directory in the media and the
selected mode (Digital Camera Print/Document Print), then make settings again.
0 1 6 - 7 9 6 D o c u m e n t I n s e r t O p e ra t i o n Fa u l t 0 1 6 - 7 9 7 M e d i a Re a d e r : I m a g e F i l e Re a d Fa u l t
Document insert operation fault. Media Reader: Image File Read Fault.
Procedure Procedure
Check the contents in the Media from the PC. Check whether the print file attribute data is dis- Check the contents in the Media from the PC. Check whether the print file images are displayed in
played in the PC and make settings again. the PC and make settings again.
0 1 6 - 7 9 8 N o Tr u s t M a r k i n g O p t i o n 0 1 6 - 7 9 9 Pr i n t I n s t r u c t i o n Fa u l t
No Trust Marking Option. When the decomposer called the S-image library the error of no HDD was Print Instruction Fault. A print parameter was incorrect.
returned.
Procedure
Procedure Perform the job again.
Install the necControllerary options (HD) (PL 3.2).
0 1 6 - 9 1 0 Re q u i r e d Re s o u r c e N o t Re a d y ( I OTs c d e t e c t ) 0 1 6 - 9 1 1 M u l t i - Pa p e r Re q u i r e d O n A S i n g l e Tra y
Description Description
• The paper and staples requested by the selected print parameters are not installed. • The paper and staples requested by the print specification are not loaded
Or,
Procedure
Different sizes and/or types of paper switching are requested from the same Tray
• Install the paper, the install the staples.
Procedure
• Force this Job to run and follow the panel display to replenish the paper, switch the paper, and
replenish the staples, or, cancel this Job.
0 1 6 - 9 1 2 I n s e r t Po s i t i o n N G B e fo r e Pe r fe c t B i n d Co v e r 0 1 6 - 9 1 3 Pa g e D e l e t e N G Pe r fe c t B i n d Co v e r
Description Description
• When the insertion of separator before cover page was detected. • When the page deletion of cover page was detected.
Procedure Procedure
• Specify the Job such that it avoids the detection conditions. • Specify the Job such that it avoids the detection conditions.
0 1 6 - 9 1 4 Pa g e D e l e t e N G Pe r fe c t B i n d B o d y A l l Pa g e 0 1 6 - 9 1 6 H E L D _ BY _ J O B _ L I M I T S
Description Description
• When a page deletion instruction that would have resulted in the deletion of the whole Perfect • When referring to the instruction PFIP_JOB_LIMIT_BY_ACCOUNT, the JobLimit is enabled.
Bind document body page was detected.
* Even if the separators had remained, as long as the body pages are gone, this Fault will occur. Procedure
• Take action to satisfy the requirements of JobLimits.
Procedure
• Cancel the Job and then re-specify the Job such that it avoids the detection conditions.
0 1 6 - 9 1 7 J o b H e l d b y To n e r Y L i fe E n d ( O p e ra t i o n ) 0 1 6 - 9 1 8 J o b H e l d by To n e r M L i fe E n d ( O p e ra t i o n )
Description Description
• An instruction for Color Print was received when the device is in an unable to print state because • An instruction for Color Print was received when the device is in an unable to print state because
it is out of Y/Y-Flou/Clear Toner. it is out of Magenta/Magenta Flourescent/Silver Toner.
Procedure Procedure
• Install a new Y/Y-Flou/Clear Toner Cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 17. • Install a new M/M-Flour/Silver Toner Cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 15.
0 1 6 - 9 1 9 J o b H e l d b y To n e r C L i fe E n d ( O p e ra t i o n ) 0 1 6 - 9 2 0 J o b H e l d by AT S / A P S N o D e s t i n a t i o n E r r o r
Description Description
• An instruction for Color Print was received when the device is in an unable to print state because • The paper instructed for printing is not loaded in the Tray.
it is out of C/C-Flou/White Toner.
Procedure
Procedure • Change the paper settings.
• Install a new C/C-Flou/White Toner Cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 14.
Procedure Procedure
Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions. Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions.
Procedure Procedure
Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions. Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions.
0 1 6 - 9 4 5 I n s e r t d o c D u p l e x Pr i n t N G 0 1 6 - 9 4 6 I n s e r t d o c i n t o Co v e r s / S e p a ra t o r s N G
A document unavailable for duplex print was inserted after a document for which Duplex was A document or a divider was inserted after the cover or divider page.
selected.
Procedure
Procedure Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions.
Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions.
Procedure Procedure
• Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions. • Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions.
0 1 6 - 9 4 9 B o o k l e t C o v e r / S e p a r a t o r / B l a n k Pa p e r N G 0 1 6 - 9 8 1 H D D A c c Co n t r o l l e r Fa u l t
After specifying page connection, the user inserted a doc different in size/orientation from the page A failure in accController to HDD
to be procControllered.
Procedure
Procedure If no user action can resolve the problem, increase HDD partition size for a specific service.
Specify the job to avoid the detection conditions.
0 1 6 - 9 8 2 H D D A c c Co n t r o l l e r Fa u l t 2 0 1 6 - 9 8 3 I m a g e Lo g H D D Fu l l
HDD AccController Fault 2. It was determined that the HDD was full during a collation job, destina- Description
tion storage job, or divided job.
• With the system data Level of Ensuring Log Image Creation set to High the log image storage
area on the disk becomes full (during procControllering a copy/scan job).
Procedure
Increase HDD partition size for a specific service. Procedure
• PrController the Cancel Job button to cancel the job.
Rerun the job.
If the situation is the same despite some re-attempts, delete unnecessary documents saved in
the device or change the level of ensuring creation (to Low). However, if the level is set to Low,
log image creation cannot be ensured.
Note: If it is possible to log in to the Embedded Web Server by entering the IP address of the ma-
chine, then the network controller on the controller PWB is good.
Check that the date and time are set correctly on the machine, refer to Date / Time.
The time and date are correct.
Y N
Set the time and date parameters correctly.
Check the LED link lights at the controller PWB ethernet connection.
The LEDs illuminate.
Y N
If possible, perform the following to try and eliminate the problem of a faulty network port:
• Check the connections at the network port and controller PWB are good.
• Connect the machine to another network port.
• Advise the customer to a provide a new network port to controller PWB cable.
• Check the operation of a known good machine to the network port.
If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
The LEDs illuminate.
Y N
Contact 2nd level support.
Perform the Final Actions.
Perform the Final Actions.
Final Actions
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Attempt to ping the machine:
a. Print a configuration report to obtain the IP address of the machine, GP 6.
b. Open a command window (CMD):
• Select Start and in the Search box above the Start button, type CMD , then press Enter.
c. In the Command window (where the blinking cursor is) type ping. Press the space bar once,
then enter the IP address of the machine. Press Enter.
d. If the ping command is successful, the machine will reply four times. This should not take
more than two or three seconds.
e. If the ping command times out, or responds with ‘host unreachable’, check the IP address
that was entered. If the IP address is correct, contact 2nd level support.
0 1 7 - 5 0 0 J o b L i m i t I l l e g a l Re s p o n s e R A P 0 1 7 - 5 0 1 M u l t i p l e Pe r m i s s i o n Re s t r i c t i o n s R A P
Invalid response from job limit server. A print rights violation has occurred.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to change the user privileges.
1. Check the job parameter settings, then re-run the job.
2. Check the response packet from the job limit server.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check the network status and the operating status of JobLimit server.
0 1 7 - 5 0 6 J o b L i m i t Re j e c t e d R A P 0 1 7 - 5 0 7 J o b H i s t o r y Fu l l R A P
The job was canceled because the JobLimitServer sent Reject. The job was cancelled because the job history is full.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to contact the System Administrator. Advise the customer to clear the job history and repeat the job.
017-516, 517, 518, 519, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524, 526 SFTP 0 1 7 - 5 2 7 S F T P S c a n I n t e r n a l Fa i l
S e r v e r Fa i l R A P A redirector internal error has occurred during SFTP scan.
Requested SFTP server process failures.
Procedure
017-516 File name acquisition from SFTP server Fail 1. Verify there are no intermittent network connectivity issues.
017-517 Folder delete in SFTP Fail 2. Switch off, then swich on the machine, GP 19.
3. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
017-518 Data read from SFTP server Fail
a. Enter, dC131 NVM Read/Write, code [840-354].
017-519 Data write-in to SFTP server Fail
b. Check the SFTP Communications Character Code Setting.
017-520 Login name or a password in SFTP Fail • 0: Communicate in UI current language.
017-521 File delete in SFTP Fail • 1: Communicate in UTF-8 [default].
017-522 File creation in SFTP Fail c. Verify the settings are correct for the customer network and SFTP server the machine is con-
necting to. Change the NVM value as required.
017-523 Folder creation in SFTP Fail 4. Exit Diagnostics, then attempt the operation again.
017-524 Scan destination path in SFTP Fail
017-525 Host name solution in SFTP Fail
017-526 Server connection in SFTP Fail
Procedure
1. Verify with the customer the machine settings are directed to the correct network path. Correct
as required, or ask the customer to correct as required.
2. Re-run the job requested causing the fault.
0 1 7 - 5 2 9 Fo l d e r A c c e s s D e n i e d V i a N e t w o r k 0 1 7 - 5 3 0 Pr o t o c o l N o t S u p p o r t e d Fo r N e t w o r k
An attempt to store/retrieve/transfer documents was prohibited due to Restrict Folder Access by Unable to transfer documents due to problems with Transfer Protocol.
Network is set to [Enabled].
Procedure
Procedure Check the specified Transfer Protocol is appropriate for the operation.
Change Restrict Folder Access by Network to [Disabled].
0 1 7 - 7 0 0 T h i n Pr i n t Co n n e c t i o n Ti m e o u t Fa i l 0 1 7 - 7 0 1 T h i n Pr i n t Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l
The connection with the ThinPrint.print Engine has timed-out. An error has occurred in the connection to the ThinPrint.print Engine.
Procedure Procedure
Reestablish the connection to the ThinPrint.print engine, then re-run the job causing the fault. 1. Check the connection to the ThinPrint.print Engine.
2. Check the ThinPrint.print Engine logs for errors.
3. Check the network connection for any issues: disconnected Ethernet cable, disconnected wireless
connection.
0 1 7 - 7 0 2 T h i n Pr i n t I n v a l i d D a t a Fa i l 0 1 7 - 7 0 3 T h i n Pr i n t O v e r M a x i m u m D a t a S i z e Fa i l
The data sent from the ThinPrint.print Engine is incorrect. The data that was sent from the ThinPrint.print Engine has exceeded the maximum data size that
can be handled by the device.
Procedure
1. Check for errors in the ThinPrint.print Engine. Procedure
Split the job into several batches and try again.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
3. Perform the operation causing the fault.
0 1 7 - 7 0 4 T h i n Pr i n t I n t e r n a l Fa i l 0 1 7 - 7 0 5 , 7 0 6 , 7 0 7 , 7 0 8 T h i n Pr i n t S S L A u t h e n t i c a t i o n I n v a l i d
An error has occurred inside the device. Ce r t i fi c a t i o n Fa i l R A P
The server certificate being used by the ThinPrint.print engine is incorrect.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 017-705 ThinPrint SSL Authentication Invalid Certification Fail
2. Perform the operation causing the fault. 017-706 ThinPrint SSL Authentication Before Expiration Fail
017-707 ThinPrint SSL Authentication Expired Fail
017-708 ThinPrint SSL Authentication Misrepresentation Fail
Procedure
Check the server certificate registered in the ThinPrint.print engine.
0 1 7 - 7 0 9 T h i n Pr i n t S S L Fa i l 0 1 7 - 7 1 0 M e d i a Ty p e i s N o t S u p p o r t e d b y Re m o t e
An SSL communication error with the ThinPrint.print Engine has occurred. The request received a connection refused response because the target connection has mismatched
media.
Procedure
Check the device settings. Procedure
Check the connection status of the communication device at the recipient.
0 1 7 - 7 1 1 S I P Re d i r e c t Re s p o n s e Fa i l 0 1 7 - 7 1 2 S I P S e s s i o n Ti m e o u t Fa i l
Received a redirect response during SIP connection. There was no session refresh within the session interval.
Procedure Procedure
Check the address of the recipient. Check the device at the recipient side.
0 1 7 - 7 1 3 S ta r t T L S U n s u p p o r t e d Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 1 4 S MT P O v e r S S L Fa i l R A P
Start TLS unsupported fail. SSL communication failure with SMTP server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to change the SSL operation mode setting to other than STARTTLS mode. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check if this occurred in TLS Mode, it may be due to an incorrect port
number. Check the Port Number settings of the SMTP Server.
2. If the fault persists, update the software, GP 2.
0 1 7 - 7 1 5 S S L Ce r t U n t r u s t e d Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 1 6 , 7 1 7 , 7 1 8 S S L Ce r t Fa i l R A P
An SSL Server Authentication Error has occurred because there is something wrong in the Server The validity period of the Server Certificate has not started yet.
Certificate Data.
017-716 SSL Cert Date Invalid Fail.
Procedure 017-717 SSL Server Cert Expired Fail.
Advise the customer to register the root certificate of the SMTP server SSL certificate in the
machine. 017-718 SSL Server Cert Invalid Fail.
017-762 SSL Server Cert Date Invalid Fail (POP)
017-768 SSL Cert Date Invalid Fail (POP)
017-769 SSL Server Cert Expired Fail (POP)
017-770 SSL Server Cert Invalid Fail (POP)
017-763 SSL Server Cert Fail (POP)
017-764 SSL Server Cert Invalid Fail (POP)
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Verify the SMTP server clock and machine clock are correct.
2. Check the validity period of the SMTP server certificate.
3. Verify the server name registered in the SMTP server certificate and the server address are
correct.
4. If the clocks are correct, change the SMTP server SSL certificate to one that is valid.
Note: This problem can also be corrected by switching off the machine’s SSL Server Verification
setting; however, this will render the machine unable to guarantee the authenticity of the SMTP
server that it is connecting to.
0 1 7 - 7 1 9 S MT P O v e r S S L I n t e r n a l Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 2 0 , 0 1 7 - 7 2 1 Co n t ra c t Ty p e Fa i l R A P
Internal software error has occurred during SMTP over SSL process. 017-720 Contract type value is incorrect.
0 1 7 - 7 2 1 G e o g ra p h i c Re g i o n Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 2 2 To t a l I m p r e s s i o n s O v e r Fa i l R A P
The Geographic Region value specified by PJL Command is wrong. The total impressions of billing meter in the data for PJL diag is 9,999,900 or more.
Procedure Procedure
Correct the Geographic Region value specified by PJL Command, then try the operation causing the Advise the customer to perform the operation when the value of total impressions is between 0 and
fault again. 9,999,900.
0 1 7 - 7 2 3 D o c u Wo r k s U n s u p p o r t e d C h a ra c t e r Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 2 4 D e n s h i - Pe n Sy n t a x Fa i l
When the DocuWorks decomposer is working, it detected some text that cannot be output is in use. Denshi-Pen is not suported on this device.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to print from the DocuWorks viewer using the print driver (ART-EX, PCL,
etc.).
2. If the fault persists, update the software, GP 2.
0 1 7 - 7 2 5 Fo r c e d A n n o t a t i o n Sy n ta x Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 2 8 S c a n J o b F l o w D o c u m e n t Fa i l
Syntax error in Forced Annotation instructions is detected. 1. MS Word or MS Excel is specified as the output format in the instructions, but the target docu-
ment for processing does not possess the conditions required for format processing.
Procedure 2. Extension Scanner Kit not installed
Perform the steps that follow:
(Scan To Office Selection Service not enabled)
1. Advise the customer to check the driver settings.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, update the software, GP 2.
1. MS Word or MS Excel is specified as the output format:
a. Change output to a format other than MS Word or MS Excel.
b. Start Job Flow Service after satisfying all conditions below:
1. The document for processing is a Scan document.
2. The document for processing is full color.
3. Size of the document for processing is 50mmx50mm or more, 297mmx432mm or less.
4. Color space of the document for processing is standard color space.
5. Resolution of the document for processing is 300dpi.
6. Magnification of the of the document for processing is 100%.
2. Adjust the Extension Scanner Kit position.
0 1 7 - 7 2 9 Te m p o ra r y E r r o r i n P D L Tra n s fe r R A P 0 1 7 - 7 3 0 N e t w o r k E r r o r i n P D L Tra n s fe r R A P
Temporary inability to send due to maximum jobs exceeded at the destination machine, or spool Network occurred during PDL data transfer.
area of print data full, etc.
Procedure
Procedure Advise the customer to:
Advise the customer to:
1. Check the connection of the network cable.
1. Set the spooling of the print data at the destination machine to hard disk. 2. Check the destination machine is powered on.
2. Change spooling setting to Spool to Hard Disk. 3. Verify the IPP port of the destination machine is enabled.
0 1 7 - 7 3 1 P O P S e r v e r N o t Co n n e c t Fa i l 0 1 7 - 7 3 2 O f f l i n e E r r o r i n P D L Tra n s fe r R A P
Failed to connect to the POP server. Unable to send because destination printer is offline.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine is physically connected to the network either through WiFi or Ethernet. Advise the customer to disable the offline status of the destination machine.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
3. Verify the network settings are correct in the machine UI settings for the customer network.
a. Check the machine IPv4 settings are either DHCP or static.
b. If static, verify the IP address, DNS, and gateway addresses are correct for the customer net-
work. Change the settings as required.
c. On a computer connected to the same customer network, start a command prompt, then
PING the machine IPv4 address to verify the machine is communicating on the network and
can be seen by other network devices.
4. Test the POP server connection again. If the fault persists or the connection cannot be estab-
lished, advise the customer to resolve the connection issue to the POP server before continuing.
5. Once the connection issues on the customer side have been resolved and the fault is no longer
active, perform the operation previously causing the fault.
0 1 7 - 7 3 3 I n t e r n a l E r r o r i n P D L Tra n s fe r R A P 0 1 7 - 7 3 4 I P P D a ta E r r o r R A P
Unable to send because destination printer is offline. Syntax error, usage of undefined command, parameter error, damage of the file, or internal error of
the decomposer has occurred during the decomposer process of a direct print job that used IPP in
Procedure its network protocol.
Advise the customer to repeat the operation.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to print by using a different print method (printer driver or utility other
than print from IPP) that is supported by the machine.
2. If the fault persists, update the software, GP 2.
0 1 7 - 7 3 5 A u d i t r o n - Pr o h i b i t D e v i c e Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 3 7 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r O u t o f M e m o r y R A P
Unauthorized user is detected. A HDD unavailable error was returned when the decomposer called the S-image library.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to get permission to use the machine from the account administrator. 1. Advise the customer to deactivate or delete all unnecessary plug-ins.
2. If the fault persists, update the software, GP 2. 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
3. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC355 Initialize Hard Disk.
0 1 7 - 7 3 8 , 0 1 7 - 7 4 6 H D D I n t e r n a l Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 3 9 , 0 1 7 - 7 4 0 Tra n s fe r S e r v i c e N o t A v a i l a b l e R A P
017-738 The system detected that the JVM has stopped due to internal error. 017-739 Custom transfer XCP not activated error.
017-746 Custom transfer plug-in local disk malfunction. 017-740 Custom transfer plug-in not activated error.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Enable the embedded plug-in feature.
2. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure 2. Input the software key for the customization kit.
Prediction Test. Follow the prompts to verify the HDD is functional and how to resolve.
3.
CAUTION: Initiate dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test before initializing the
HDD. Initializing the HDD could result in lost customer data stored on the HDD. Hard
Disk Failure Prediction Test may resolve the HDD failure without losing the customer’s
data.
After the dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test is completed and the fault persists, renter Di-
agnostics, then run dC355 Initialize Hard Disk to initialize partition A.
4. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
a. HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 1 7 - 7 4 1 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r I n v a l i d P l u g - I n R A P 0 1 7 - 7 4 2 , 7 4 3 , 7 4 4 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r P l u g - I n Co n n e c t i o n R A P
The instruction that was specified by the instruction set to the plug-in and the feature provided by 017-742 Custom transfer plug-in server connection error.
the plug-in (API) are mismatched when the custom transfer job is in progress.
017-743 Custom transfer plug-in authentication error.
Procedure 017-744 Custom transfer plug-in server access error.
Advise the customer to:
1. Upgrade the embedded plug-in feature (install the latest version). Procedure
Advise the customer to:
2. Check the contents of the instruction set that is being used. If the instruction set was generated
by a custom service, revise the custom service contents. 1. Check whether the transfer destination server and the machine are able to communicate via the
network using the specified user name and password.
0 1 7 - 7 4 5 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r P l u g - i n D i s k Fu l l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 4 7 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r P l u g - I n Co n n e c t i o n Ti m e o u t R A P
Insufficient hard disk area for processing was detected. Custom transfer plug-in communication timed out error.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to take any one of the actions that follow: 1. Wait a while, then re-run the job.
a. Lower the resolution, then re-send. 2. If the situation does not improve, consult with the Network Administrator.
b. Reduce the size, then re-send.
c. Reduce the page count, then re-send the job in several batches.
d. Change the output color to black & white, then re-send.
0 1 7 - 7 4 8 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r P l u g - I n I n v a l i d m a c h i n e R A P 0 1 7 - 7 4 9 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r P l u g - I n X M L Fa i l R A P
Custom transfer plug-in invalid machine settings data error. When extracting the custom transfer parameter from XML file, the obtaining of the parameter has
failed, the parameter format is inconsistent, or the parameter value cannot be processed due to
Procedure wrong grammar.
Advise the customer to check the machine settings required for file transfer.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check the contents of the instruction set that is being used. If the instruction
set was generated by a custom service, revise the custom service contents.
0 1 7 - 7 5 0 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r P l u g - I n I n t e r n a l Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 5 1 C u s t o m Tra n s fe r P l u g - I n O t h e r Fa i l R A P
An internal logic error was detected in the custom transfer plug-in. An error specific to the custom transfer plug-in was detected.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to refer to the error details in the job undelivered transmission report, then take
appropriate action.
1. Advise the customer to revise the custom transfer plug-in and then reinstall it.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 1 7 - 7 5 4 S c a n D i s a b l e D u r i n g D F E A S R S Pr i n t Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 5 5 S o f t w a r e D o w n l o a d V i a N e t w o r k Fa i l R A P
During a DFE Print Job (Heavyweight, etc. speed mode), the activation of a job that uses the IIT A software download via the network was performed when the software download via network set
was detected. as prohibited.
Procedure Procedure
1. Clear the DFE Print job or wait for the DFE Print job to complete. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Verify the DFE Print job is setup to be performed within the machine specification. 1. Either set the software download via network to allowed or perform the software download us-
• No job is set for the ITT to perform. ing a USB.
• Settings and media type are correct for the DFE print job requested. 2. If the fault persists, update the software, GP 2.
3. Perform the operation again causing the fault.
4. If the fault persists, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
5. Verify the DFE Print job is setup to be performed within the machine specification.
6. Perform the operation again causing the fault.
Procedure Procedure
Correct the registered data then perform the operation again causing the fault. Advise the customer to re-obtain the download data then perform the operation again.
0 1 7 - 7 6 0 , 7 7 1 P O P O v e r S S L Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 6 1 , 7 6 7 S S L S e r v e r Ce r t U n t r u s t e d Fa i l ( P O P ) R A P
SSL communication failure with POP Server. An SSL Server Authentication Error has occured as there is something wrong in the Server Certificate
Data.
017-760 POP Over SSL Fail
017-761 SSL Server Cert Untrusted Fail (POP)
017-771 POP Over SSL Internal Fail
017-767 SSL Cert Untrusted Fail (POP)
Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check if this occurred in TLS Mode, it may be due to an incorrect port Procedure
number. Check the Port Number settings of the POP Server. Advise the customer to register the Root Certificate of the POP Server SSL Certificate in the
machine.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 2.
0 1 7 - 7 6 2 , 7 6 8 , 7 6 9 , 7 7 0 S S L S e r v e r Ce r t Fa i l ( P O P ) R A P 0 1 7 - 7 6 5 P O P O v e r S S L I n t e r n a l Fa i l R A P
The validity period of the Server Certificate has not started yet. Software internal error has occurred when POP Over SSL process is in progress.
017-762 SSL Server Cert Date Invalid Fail (POP) Procedure
017-768 SSL Cert Date Invalid Fail (POP) 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Repeat the operation causing the fault.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
017-769 SSL Server Cert Expired Fail (POP)
017-770 SSL Server Cert Invalid Fail (POP)
017-763 SSL Server Cert Fail (POP)
017-764 SSL Server Cert Invalid Fail (POP)
Procedure
1. Verify the clock of the POP server and the machine UI settings are correct.
2. If the clock is correct, change the POP server SSL certificate to a valid certificate.
Note: Disabling the [SSL Server Verification] render the machine unable to guarantee the au-
thenticy of the POP server it is connecting to.
0 1 7 - 7 6 6 P O P O v e r S S L Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 7 2 S c a n A l l B l a n k Pa g e Fa i l R A P
SSL communication failure with POP Server. It was detected that all the pages are blank.
Procedure Procedure
If the fault occurs in TLS Mode, verify the Port Number settings of the POP Server are correct the 1. Increase the [density] during Scan.
customer network.
2. Turn off the [blank suppression] instruction.
3. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC131 NVM Read/Write.
a. Enter NVM value [840-223], File Size Based Blank Paper Detection Level.
• The defualt value is [2]. Reduce the value as requeired to clear the fault.
b. Enter NVM value [840-224], Black Score Based Blank Paper Detection Level.
• The default value is [2]. Reduce the value as required to clear the fault.
0 1 7 - 7 7 3 N e t l o g Ta s k E r r o r R A P 0 1 7 - 7 7 4 M e s s a g e Lo s t E r r o r R A P
Detected fatal error during Netlog operation. Message discard error.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check the setting related to the Netlog function. For information only, no service action necessary.
0 1 7 - 7 8 0 H e l d J o b Ti m e o u t R A P 0 1 7 - 7 8 2 , 7 8 4 , 7 8 5 , 7 8 6 C u s t o m I m a g e Pr o c e s s i n g P l u g - I n R A P
Auto delete due to the timeout of held Job that has been overtaken. 017-782 Detected mismatch of the version of image processing module.
0 1 7 - 7 8 3 C u s t o m I m a g e Pr o c e s s i n g M e m o r y R A P 0 1 7 - 7 8 7 G o o g l e C l o u d Pr i n t D a t a E r r o r R A P
The operation was unable to continue due to the memory shortage of the image processing mod- Syntax error, undefined command, parameter error, file corruption, decomposer internal error oc-
ule that is executed in the controller. curred when the decomposer is processing at the Google Cloud Print processing path.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to take any one of the actions that follow: 1. Advise the customer to use a different print method supported by the machine (print driver, util-
ity other than Google Cloud Print).
a. Lower the resolution.
2. If the fault persists, update the software, GP 2.
b. Change the output color to black & white.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 1 7 - 7 8 9 J o b L i m i t E s t i m a t i o n Lo g i c Fa i l R A P 0 1 7 - 7 9 0 t o 0 1 7 - 7 9 9 P r i n t Pe r m i s s i o n R A P
During job limit estimate acquisition, a logic error was detected in the ComlDvm_GetEstimation. 017-790 Color print made in a time zone that is prohibited.
Procedure
Advise the customer to set the permissions as required.
0 1 8 - 4 0 0 I P S E C E r r o r ( C o n fi g u r a t i o n M i s m a t c h ) R A P
One of the following has been detected:
• While IPSEC is set to Enable the password is not set in authentication mode = [Pre-shared key].
•
OR
The IPSEC certificate is not set in authentication mode = [Digital signature].
Procedure
Change the IPSEC setting to consistent with Authentication mode and enable IPSEC again.
0 1 8 - 4 0 1 I n c o n s i s t e n t S I P Co n fi g u r a t i o n R A P 0 1 8 - 4 0 2 S I P S e r v e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l R A P
One of the following has been detected: Failed to register system info to the SIP registration server due to any of the following reasons:
• The IP Operation Mode setting and the Method of Obtaining SIP Server Address setting on the 1. Failed to acquire SIP server address via DHCP or DHCP v6.2.
device are inconsistent with each other.
2. Could not communicate with SIP registration server, (server address set by static address).
•
3. Could not communicate with SIP registration server, (server address acquired by DHCP or
OR DHCPv6.4).
The IP Operation Mode setting and the SIP Server Address setting are inconsistent.
4. Could not communicate with SIP registration server.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify [IP Operation Mode] is set to [IPv4] and [IP Address Obtainment Mode] is set to [man- 1. If [SIP server address acquisition method] is [DHCP] or [DHCPv6] , verify the system is com-
ual] , then set [Method of Obtaining SIP Server Address] to [manual]. municating with DHCP server or DHCPv6 server properly.
2. In any case other than, [IP Operation Mode] set to [IPv4] and [IP Address Obtainment Mode] 2. Check all connections on the network; cables, switches, network hubs.
is set to [manual] , set [Method of Obtaining SIP Server Address] to [manual] or [DHCP].
3. If [SIP server address acquisition method] is [DHCP] or [DHCPv6] , verify [DHCP] server or
3. When [IP Operation Mode] set to [IPv6] , set [Method of Obtaining SIP Server Address] to [DHCPv6] server is [ON].
[manual] or [DHCPv6].
4. If [SIP server address acquisition method] is set to [Static] addressing, Verify the address is set
4. If [Method of Obtaining SIP Server Address] to [manual] and the address is set using FQDN
correctly for the customer network.
strings, set up the DNS Server in the way that enables DNS to properly solve an address
problem. 5. If address is set by using [FQDN] name, verify DNS setting is correct, correct as required.
5. When [IP Operation Mode] is set to [IPv4] and [IP Address Obtainment Mode] is set to [man- 6. If [SIP server address acquisition method] is [DHCP] or [DHCPv6] , verify SIP server address
ual] , set up SIP Server Address using an [IPv4] address or FQDN strings. distributed by DHCP server or DHCPv6 server is correct.
6. When [IP Operation Mode] is set to [IPv6] , set up [SIP Server Address] using an [IPv6] ad-
dress or FQDN strings.
7. It is mandatory to set up [Primary SIP Registration Server Address] and [Primary SIP Proxy
Server Address].
0 1 8 - 4 0 3 S I P Re g i s t ra t i o n Fa i l ( A u t h e n t i c a t i o n ) R A P 0 1 8 - 4 0 4 S I P Re g i s t ra t i o n Fa i l ( O t h e r ) R A P
Failed to register system info to the SIP registration server due to authentication error. Failed to register system info to the SIP registration server due to any reason other than authentica-
tion error.
Procedure
When the SIP Registration Server is set up in a way that requires the SIP Registration Server to au- Procedure
thenticate a machine, set the correct user name and password for authentication. Verify SIP registration server is ready to receive system info and retry job.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to verify with the server administrator the active directory settings are correct Change the machine IPv4 setting to a different IP address.
for the user.
018-407 S etti ng S tatus of Sa me I P Addr e ss (IP v6) R AP 018-408 Duplicate IP Address IPv4 (Ether2) RAP
Detected that the same Pv6 address was assigned when each I/F is connected to an independent Ether1 and Ether2 have the same IPv4 address.
network and the same IP address setting is prohibited when multiple I/F operation is possible.
Procedure
Procedure Change the machine Ether2 IPv4 setting to a different IP address than Ether1.
Change the machine IPv6 setting to a different IP address.
Procedure Procedure
Change the machine Ether2 IPv6 setting to a different IP address than Ether1. Advise the customer to verify with network administrator the IPv4 dynamic DNS settings for the
machine are correct for the customer network.
Procedure
Change the machine Ether2 IPv6 setting to a different IP address than Ether1.
0 1 8 - 4 3 7 L P D Co m m u n i c a t i o n Ti m e o u t R A P 0 1 8 - 4 3 8 L P D Pr i n t D a t a S i z e E x c e e d i n g T h e L i m i t R A P
Data from the host could not be received within a specified time. The print data size sent from the host exceeds the maximum size that can be accepted by the LPR
host.
Note: This Chain-Link is not displayed on the panel. It can only be found in the Error History.
Note: This Chain-Link is not displayed on the panel. It can only be found in the Error History.
Procedure
1. Advise the customer to verify with the network administrator the LPD host and the customer Procedure
machine IPv4 settings are the same for the customer network. 1. Verify the customer is sending only one print job request at a time. If the job request was multi-
2. Verify that [LPR Byte Count] is enabled in the Windows printer settings for the machine. ple print jobs, resnd the request with only one print job.
2. Verify the Windows pronter port is correct for the LDP host receive request.
a. Open the control panel, then select [View devices and printers] in the [Hardware and Sound]
category. 3. Change the machine printer port in the Windows printer settings to a port protocol correct for
the requested print job: e.g. port 9100 instead of LPD.
b. Right click on the printer in question, then select [Printer Properties] in the menu dialog box.
c. In the [new printer properties] window, select the [Port] tab.
d. Locate the port used for the machine, a check will be in the box to the left of the port text.
e. Click on [Configure Port].
f. In the [Configure Standatrd TCP/IP Port Monitor] window, check the box left of [LPR Byte
Counting Enabled].
g. Select [OK] on each window to complete the change and close the Windows control panel.
3. Perform the procedure causing the fault.
0 1 8 - 4 3 9 W i - F i D i r e c t S t o p s by t h e Co n f l i c t S e t t i n g fo r A d - h o c 0 1 8 - 4 4 0 W i - F i D i r e c t S t o p s by t h e Co n f l i c t S e t t i n g fo r I P v 6
RAP Mode RAP
When Wi-Fi Direct is active, the Wi-Fi Network Type Ad-hoc setting was detected. When Wi-Fi Direct is active, IPv6 mode setting was detected at the IP Protocol stack related config-
uration data.
Procedure
Change the Wi-Fi Network Type setting of the device to DHCP or set a static IPv4 address, switch Procedure
off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, then check the device UI or print a Configuration Report to 1. Change the machine UI network settings to DHCP, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP
verify the machine IPv4 addressing is correct. 19.
2. Verify with the customer the correct network configuration for the customer network, then
change the machine UI network settings to statically assigned.
0 1 8 - 4 4 1 W i - F i D i r e c t S t o p s by t h e Co n f l i c t S e t t i n g fo r 5 G H z 0 1 8 - 5 0 0 C A M e s s a g e Re c e i v e r B o o t E r r o r ( S _ c e r t l o s t ) R A P
Mode RAP Job cannot be executed with designated combination of parameters (storage file size, paper size,
paper tray, duplex designation, output tray).
When Wi-Fi Direct is active, the 5 GHz mode setting was detected at Wi-Fi Band.
Procedure Procedure
Re-set paper size, paper tray, duplex designation and output tray etc. and retry job.
Connect the machine to a 2.4GHz network or to an Ethernet connection.
0 1 8 - 5 0 1 C A S e r v e r Co n n e c t i o n E r r o r R A P 0 1 8 - 5 0 2 Lo g i n Fa i l u r e i n S M B R A P
When server certificate and secret key are not available at device start, SSL server necessary to CA Limitation of the workstation to log in the server in SMB Scan is detected at SMB server login.
cannot be started.
Procedure
Procedure Verify designated user property information to verify workstation can login to the server is limited
Set server certificate or disable CA function. or not.
0 1 8 - 5 0 3 C A M e s s a g e Re c e i v e r T i m e o u t R A P 0 1 8 - 5 0 4 C A S e s s i o n I D M i s m a tc h R A P
At SMB server login, limitation of workstation that can be logged in with SMB scan is detected. When message is received from CA server, no reaction of JRM/UI is made, resulting in timeout.
Procedure Procedure
Verify designated user property information to verify workstation can login to the server is limited Timeout occurs while waiting for a response to CA server due to inside load of the device. Retry au-
or not. thentication operation.
0 1 8 - 5 0 5 S M B - D O S Pr o t o c o l E r r o r R A P 0 1 8 - 5 0 6 C A F i e l d I D M i s m a tc h R A P
Unable to authenticate due to an incorrect SMB user name or password. When the fault occurs in SMB authentication:
• In SMB Authentication: • Unable to authenticate due to wrong user name or password
– The user could not be identified because of his/her wrong user name or password. • Time of SMB server and that of M/C are not the same. The fault occurs with Windows Server
– The time SMB Server tells differs from the time the machine tells. (This occurs under Win- 2003
dows Server 2003) • When the fault occurs while scanner transfers scanned data to PC storage to SMB:
In Scanner to SMB: – Unable to log in to SMB server while in scanned data transfer due to wrong user name or
– When trying to send a scanned image, the user could not log in to the SMB server because password
of his/her wrong user name or password. – Time of SMB server and that of M/C are not the same. The fault occurs with Windows Server
– The time SMB Server tells differs from the time the machine tells. (This occurs under Win- 2003.
dows Server 2003)
Note: Designated user name is not registered as user allowed to use shared Windows MacOS X
The following applies to DMP6-2 and later products only: v10.4.
– The specified user name is not registered as a user that can use Share Windows. (MacOS X
v10.4) Procedure
Take any of the following actions:
Procedure • Check user name or password with network administrator
• Take either of the following actions to resolve the problem.
• Windows Server 2003, to make time of SMB server and that of this M/C identical.
– Contact the network administrator for the correct user name or password.
• Password cannot be verified.
– In the case of Windows Server 2003, synchronize the time SMB Server tells with the time this
machine tells. If the password needs to be reset:
Note: There is no way to confirm Password. If the user forgets his/her password, he/she needs 1. Select [Start] > [All programs] >[Management tool] >[Active Directory users and computesr]
to set up a new password. on domain controller of active directory where user information is set.
This is how to reset Password: 2. Select [Active Directory users and computers] >[Domain] >[Users] and list user information
from the left frame of [Active Directory users and computers] window.
1. On the domain controller for the active directory that has user info, select [Start] >[All Pro- 3. Right-click target user from the right frame of [Active Directory users and computers] window
grams]>[Management Tool]>[Active Directory Users and Computers].
and select [Reset password].
2. From the left frame of the [Active Directory Users and Computers] window, select [Active
Directory Users and Computers Server]>[Domain]>[Users] , and list user information. Verify Windows Share MacOS X v10.4 according to the following procedure:
3. Right-click the target user on the right frame of the [Active Directory Users and Com- 1. Activate [System setting] icon from [Dock].
puters] window and select [Reset Password].
2. Click [Share] icon in [System setting] window.
The following applies to DMP6-2 and later products only.
3. Select [Windows Share] on Service selection screen, then click [Account] button.
– Confirm users that are allowed to use Share Windows. (MacOS X v10.4)
4. Verify the user account is valid, then click [Complete] button.
This is how to confirm users.
1. From [Dock] start the [System Environment Settings] icon.
2. On the [System Environment Settings] window, click the [Share] icon.
3. From the Select Service window, select [Share Windows] and click the [Account] button.
Procedure Procedure
Error occurs in authentication operation between CA server and the device. Retry authentication User authentication fails. Input user name or password is not correct. Verify and input correct user
operation. name and password.
Procedure Procedure
Verify the login name (username) and password are correct. Check the following:
1. The specified filename is allowed in storage location.
2. The specified filename is in use by any other user.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify no prohibited characters are in the filename. If any exist, change filename accordingly. Verify the storage location is not full, dlete or move files on the storage location to free up storage
space.
2. Verify the filename is not duplicated on the server.
3. Verify the user has write access to the storage location.
4. Shorten the file name being saved to the storage location.
Procedure Procedure
Allow one minute, then repeat the operation. Check the following:
1. Verify the customer network and BMLinkS settings are correct.
2. Verify the customer has write access to the destination folder.
Procedure 2. Verify the machine network settings are correct for the customer network.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, then repeat the operation causing the fault. 3. Once network connectivity is fully established, re-run the operation causing the fault.
0 1 8 - 5 2 5 H D D Fu l l o r H D D A c c e s s E r r o r R A P 0 1 8 - 5 2 6 Re j e c t e d t o b e Re fr e s h R A P
During CUI scan start processing, an internal HDD Full error occurs. CUI scan start request is received while in job template polling.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following steps in order. Re-run the operation after completing each step, stopping once Retry the operation after a short interval.
the fault clears:
1. Check the HDD for the available space amount.
2. Delete, or copy off to a USB drive, all unnecessary files to increase the availabe space on the
HDD.
3. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, select [Delete All Data] to delete all
data on the HDD, controller NVM, and buffer RAM.
4. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC355 Initialize HDD to
fully wipe all data and restore the HDD to factory settings.
5. Install new components in order:
a. HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
Procedure Procedure
Retry the operation. Verify the custom service setting is correct.
0 1 8 - 5 3 1 Fa i l e d t o C r e a t e a N e w J o b R A P 0 1 8 - 5 3 2 To o M a n y J o b s t o C r e a t e a N e w J o b R A P
Error of JRM detection while in CUI scan job start Error of JRM detection while in CUI scan job start
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, then retry the operation. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, then retry the operation.
Procedure Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then dC131 and NVM code [800- 1. Check the shared name specified and set the correct name.
343].
2. Verify the user has the right to access the shared name specified.
2. Verify the value is [0] (default), then advise the customer delete the invalid email in the POP
server. Perform the following:
3. Resend the email. a. Log in as the specified user.
b. Select [Dock] > [Finder] > [Home] > [File] > [File Info].
c. Select [Proprietary Right and Access Right], verify “Read/Write” is selected in the [Access]
box for the owner.
0 1 8 - 5 4 7 N u m b e r Re s t r i c t i o n O v e r o f S M B S c a n U s e r s R A P 0 1 8 - 5 56 H T T P S e rve r S c r ip t E r r o r R A P
The limited number of SMB scan users is exceeded. Due to some reason, the abnormal detection code [XRXERROR" was received from the HTTP server.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the use limit is not exceded, then reduce the number of uses listed in the SMB scan users Perform the following.
database.
1. Verify the drive and directory that are specified in the HTTP server that sends scanned docu-
ments are accessible.
2. Repeat the operation.
Procedure Procedure
Verify the file name that is specified in the scanned document destination does not contain any in- Perform the following.
valid characters.
1. Verify the directory that is specified in the scanned document destination HTTP server exists.
2. Verify the file name that is specified in the scanned document destination HTTP server exists.
0 1 8 - 5 5 9 H T T P F i l e D u p l i c a t i o n Fa i l R A P 0 1 8 - 5 6 0 H T T P S e r v e r Lo g i n Fa i l R A P
“Prohibit Overwrite” is selected for scan “File Name Conflict” HTTP User Authentication Error. Status 401 was received.
Procedure Procedure
When performing scan Jobs, set “File Name Conflict” to other than “Cancel Job”. Perform the following.
1. Verify the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the PC.
2. Check the login user name.
3. Check the login password.
4. Check the name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
5. Check the server path name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
Procedure Procedure
• Perform the following. Perform the following.
1. Verify the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the PC. • Verify the scanned document destination HTTP server has been registered in the DNS.
2. Check the server settings. • Verify it is connected to the DNS server.
• Verify the DNS server address is set.
0 1 8 - 5 6 5 Pr o x y N a m e S o l u t i o n E r r o r i n H T T P R A P 0 1 8 - 5 6 6 S e r v e r Co n n e c t E r r o r i n H T T P R A P
DNS resolution of the proxy server name that is set in the device has failed. Failed to connect to the HTTP server.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following. Perform the following.
• Verify the proxy server name that is set in the device has been registered in the DNS. 1. Check the network cable of the device.
• Verify it is connected to the DNS server. 2. Verify the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the PC.
• Verify the DNS server address is set.
0 1 8 - 5 6 7 H T T P S e r v e r A c c e s s Fa i l R A P 0 1 8 - 5 6 8 H T T P S e r v e r S S L A c c e s s Fa i l R A P
One of the following has occurred: An error has occurred during SSL/TLS connection
• The communication was cut when reading.
Procedure
• The communication was cut when writing. Perform the following.
• The file close process has failed.
1. Verify the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the PC.
Procedure 2. Verify the SSL setting of the scanned document destination HTTP server is valid.
Verify the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the PC. 3. Check the name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
4. Check the server path name of scanned document destination HTTP server.
0 1 8 - 5 6 9 H T T P S e r v e r Ce r t i fi c a t e Fa i l R A P 0 1 8 - 5 7 0 H T T P Ce r t i fi c a t e Fa i l R A P
There is a problem with SSL certificate of the server. A client certificate authentication error has occurred in the HTML server.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following. Perform the following.
1. Verify the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the PC. 1. Verify the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the PC.
2. Verify the SSL server certificate of the scanned document destination HTTP server is registered 2. Verify the SSL client certificate is set correctly in the device.
in the device. 3. Verify a valid device certificate is registered in the scanned document destination HTTP server.
3. Verify the SSL server certificate of the scanned document destination HTTP server is valid.
For example, check the following:
• The certificate has not expired yet.
• The time that is set in the device is correct.
• It is not in the discard list.
• The certificate path of the SSL server certificate and import any necessary CA certificate.
4. If the certificate is not registered in the scanned document destination HTTP server, disable the
device certificate validation.
Procedure Procedure
Repeat the operation. Verify the specified context name is correct.
01 8 - 5 7 3 I n va l id C h ar in S er ve r R A P 0 1 8 - 5 7 4 I n v a l i d C h a r i n Vo l u m e R A P
A connection name that contains invalid characters was specified. A volume name that contains invalid characters was specified.
Procedure Procedure
Verify the specified connection name is correct. Verify the specified volume name is correct.
0 1 8 - 5 7 5 I n v a l i d C h a r i n Lo g i n R A P 0 1 8 - 5 7 6 I n v a l i d C h a r i n Pa t h R A P
Invalid Netware Login. A user name or password that contains invalid characters was specified. A path name that contains invalid characters was specified
Procedure Procedure
Verify the specified user name/password is correct. Verify the specified path name is correct.
Procedure Procedure
Verify the specified file name is correct. Perform the following.
1. Check the network cable of the device.
2. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC.
3. Check the server name/tree name.
4. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server.
0 1 8 - 5 7 9 N W S e r v e r D i s k Fu l l R A P 0 1 8 - 5 8 0 N e t w a r e I n v a l i d Vo l u m e R A P
Netware Error - Hard Disk Full Netware Error - A nonexistent volume name was specified.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following. Perform the following.
1. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC. 1. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC.
2. Check the capacity of the data storage server. 2. Check the volume name.
3. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server. 3. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server.
0 1 8 - 5 8 1 N e t w a r e I n v a l i d Pa t h R A P 0 1 8 - 5 8 2 A c c e s s R i g h t Fa i l R A P
Netware Error - Path Does Not Exist. Netware Resources Access Rights Verification. One of the following conditions exist:
• The User who is logged in does not have the right to open the file.
Procedure
Perform the following. • The User who is logged in does not have the right to create the file.
• The User who is logged in does not have the right to access the directory.
1. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC.
• The User who is logged in does not have the right to read the file.
2. Check the directory path name.
• The User who is logged in does not have the right to write to the file.
3. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server.
• The User who is logged in does not have the right to delete the directory/file.
• Although all the specified directories/files are read-only, a deletion request was issued.
• Although some of the specified directories/files are read-only, a deletion request was issued.
Procedure
Perform the following.
1. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC.
2. Check the rights of the User - Example:
Verify the user has the right to open the file.
Verify the user has the right to create the file.
Verify the user has the right to access the directory.
Verify the user has the right to read the file.
Verify the user has the right to write to the file.
Verify the user has the right to delete the file/directory.
3. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server.
01 8 - 5 8 3 N W Se r ver Di sk E r r o r R A P 0 1 8 - 5 8 4 N W S e r v e r A c c e s s Fa i l R A P
Netware Error - Disk Access Error Netware Error
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following. Perform the following.
1. Check the HDD of the Netware server. 1. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC.
2. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC. 2. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server.
3. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following. Perform the following.
1. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC. 1. Verify the NetWare server is accessible from the PC.
2. Check the current usage status of other users. 2. Check the login user name.
3. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server. 3. Check the login password.
4. Check the volume name.
5. Check the server name/tree name.
6. Check the context name.
7. Execute DSREPAIR from the Server Console of the NetWare server.
0 1 8 - 5 8 7 F i l e D u p l i c a t i o n Fa i l R A P 0 1 8 - 5 8 8 S c a n F i l i n g Po l i c y I n v a l i d R A P
File Name Conflict Stop. “Prohibit Overwrite” is selected for scan “File Name Conflict” Invalid filing policy (when additional items are selected) was detected after connecting with the
server.
Procedure
Set “File Name Conflict” to other than “Cancel Job”. Procedure
When “Add” is selected for “File Name Conflict”, verify the file format is not set to Multi-page.
Procedure Procedure
When “Add” is selected for “File Name Conflict”, verify the NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct. Perform the same operation again without multiple machines accessing the same folder in the
same server.
0 1 8 - 5 9 1 F i l e N a m e S u f fi x L i m i t O v e r R A P 0 1 8 - 5 9 2 Lo c k Fo l d e r C r e a t e Fa i l R A P
When determining the file/folder name in the server after connecting to the server, the suffix of the Scan Lock Folder Creation Failed
file name/folder name has exceeded the limit.
Procedure
Procedure Check the following:
Change the file name/destination folder on the scan server. Else, move or delete the files in the des-
tination folder. 1. If a lock directory (*.LCK) remained in the transfer destination, delete it manually and retry the
job.
2. Verify there is a folder that has the same name as the specified name.
0 1 8 - 5 9 3 Lo c k Fo l d e r D e l e t e Fa i l R A P 0 1 8 - 5 9 5 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 5 9 5 R A P
Scan Lock Folder Deletion Failed Attestation Server detected a duplicated user. LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
0 1 8 - 5 9 6 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 5 9 6 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 0 0 N e t w o r k S t a c k i s n o t I n i t i a l i z e d Fa i l R A P
(1) Error other than 018-595 that occurs with authentication LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access The Remote Authentication Library has detected a Network Stack Not Initialized Error during re-
Protocol) protocol (ProtocolCategory=7)(2) Protocol type delivered to Coml_Fault_GetNETCeCode(?) mote access.
is unexpected.FTP/HTTP is designated or protocol type larger than LDAP_NETAUTH(=7) is desig-
nated.(DMP6-2) Procedure
Allow Network Stack initializion to complete, then re-run the procedure causing the fault.
Procedure
Retry the operation.
0 1 8 - 7 0 1 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 0 1 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 0 2 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 0 2 R A P
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) protocol error in Address Book operation 01(Operation There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error. LDAP protocol error in Address Book
error). operation 02 (Protocol Error).
Procedure Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
tings are indicated. tings are indicated.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Y N Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re- customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
mote LDAP server. mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 0 3 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 0 3 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 0 4 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 0 4 R A P
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) protocol error in Address Book operation 03 (Search LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) protocol error in Address Book operation 04 (Search
timeout). target data volume is too large).
Procedure Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
tings are indicated. tings are indicated.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Y N Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re- customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
mote LDAP server. mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 0 5 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 0 5 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 0 6 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 0 6 R A P
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Comparison request result is false). There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Comparison request result is true).
Procedure Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
tings are indicated. tings are indicated.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Y N Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the The message means that the result has come out as designated and is not error message.
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 0 7 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 0 7 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 0 8 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 0 8 R A P
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Designated authentication method is There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Stronger authentication is required).
not supported).
Procedure
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- tings are indicated.
tings are indicated. The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. Y N
Y N Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the customer to change authentication method. Check with network administrator to reexamine au-
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re- thentication setting. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the remote LDAP server.
mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 0 9 A c t i v e Co m m u n i c a t i o n i s U n a v a i l a b l e N o w Fa i l R A P 0 1 8 - 7 1 0 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 0 9 R A P
The Remote Authentication Library has detected that the device is in active communication state There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (No registration in search range).
during remote access.
Procedure
Procedure
In either IPv4 or IPv6 environment: Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
The machine is connected on the customer network. tings are indicated.
Y N The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Y N
1. If connected via the Ethernet, the Ethernet cable is connected and the network card lights Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
are active in the machine. lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
2. If connected via WiFi, the WiFi is active in the UI settings of the machine, and no Ether- There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
net cable is connected to the machine. customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
Verfiy the machine UI network settings are correct for the customer network. mote LDAP server.
UI network settings are correct.
Y N
Adjust the UI network setting as correct for the customer network.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 1 8 - 7 1 1 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 1 1 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 1 2 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 1 2 R A P
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Administration limit exceeded). There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Extended function is not usable).
Procedure Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
tings are indicated. tings are indicated.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Y N Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re- customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
mote LDAP server. mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 1 3 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 1 3 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 1 4 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 1 4 R A P
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Confidentiality is required). There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (SASL bind processing in progress).
Procedure Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
tings are indicated. tings are indicated.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Y N Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re- customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
mote LDAP server. mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 1 6 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 1 6 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 1 7 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 1 7 R A P
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Requested attribute does not exist). There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Designated attribute is undefined).
Procedure Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
tings are indicated. tings are indicated.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Y N Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re- customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
mote LDAP server. mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 1 8 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 1 8 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 1 9 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 1 9 R A P
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Inappropriate combination). There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Constraint violation).
Procedure Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
tings are indicated. tings are indicated.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Y N Y N
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re- customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
mote LDAP server. mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 2 0 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 2 0 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 2 1 L DA P P r o t o c o l E r r o r 2 1 R A P
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Designated attribute exists already). There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Designated attribute value syntax
error).
Procedure
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
tings are indicated. Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set-
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. tings are present.
Y N The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings.
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob- Y N
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service. Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re- There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server. Ask the
mote LDAP server. customer to verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is OK, there may be a problem with the re-
mote LDAP server.
0 1 8 - 7 2 2 G C P N e t w o r k Fa i l 0 1 8 - 7 2 3 G C P Ce r t i fi c a t i o n Fa i l
Network-related error has occurred during HTTP communication with Google server. Connection error of certificate has occurred during HTTP communication with Google server.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Confirm with the network administrator the correct root CA certificate is present, certificate authen-
tication settings are correct .
2. Confirm the network connection status, network settings status with the system administrator.
0 1 8 - 7 2 4 G C P S S L Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l 0 1 8 - 7 2 5 K e r b e r o s A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Pr o t o c o l E r r o r ( 2 2 ) R A P
Connection error of SSL has occurred during HTTP communication with Google server. User's Kerberos password expired.
Procedure Procedure
Confirm with the network administrator the network (SSL Communication) connection status, SSL Ask server's administrator to extend the password expiration date.
settings status.
0 1 8 - 7 2 6 K e r b e r o s A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Pr o t o c o l E r r o r ( 7 0 ) R A P 0 1 8 - 7 2 7 K e r b e r o s A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Pr o t o c o l E r r o r ( 7 1 ) R A P
Upper CA authentication of user's Smart Card is not registered on the device. Authentication in user's Smart Card is invalid (rejected by Kerberos server).
Procedure Procedure
Verify upper CA authentication of user's Smart Card is registered on the device. If not, register it on Verify authentication of user's Smart Card is valid. If not valid, renew Smart card. If Kerberos server
the device. is set to not allow use user's Smart Card, ask the server administrator to give permission to such
user.
0 1 8 - 7 2 8 K e r b e r o s A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Pr o t o c o l E r r o r ( 7 2 ) R A P 0 1 8 - 7 2 9 G C P N e t w o r k Ti m e o u t Fa i l
KDC authentication of Kerberos server is invalid (rote CA authentication is not registered on the de- Timeout error has occurred during HTTP communication with Google server.
vice, or KDC authentication is expired, or KDC authentication address is incorrect).
Procedure
Procedure Check the network connection status, settings status.The network might be congested.
1. Verify route CA authentication is registered on the device, if not, register it on the device.
2. Verify KDC authentication is expired, if expired, get renewed.
3. Verify the Kerberos server add
3+ress set on the device matches the address written in the Kerberos server KDC authentication.
If they are different:
a. Change the Kerberos Server address set on the device.
b. Check the Kerberos Server KDC certificate.
c. In this case, there is a possibility of a wrong setting or Kerberos Server impersonation.
0 1 8 - 7 3 0 G C P N e t w o r k O t h e r Fa i l 0 1 8 - 7 3 1 G C P H D D L i m i t Fa i l R A P
Other network-related internal error has occurred during HTTP communication with Google server. Job is aborted because there is not enough capacity in the HDD.
Procedure Procedure
Check the network connection status, settings status.If the problem occurs again, contact the Call Check the HDD available capacity, and free up space.Print again after executing all print jobs which
Center. are being spooled.
018-732 to 736, 748, 749, 750 to 754, 764 to 771, 780, 782 018-791 LDAP Protocol Error 91 RAP
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (No corresponding object). 018-793 LDAP Protocol Error 93 RAP
018-732 LDAP Protocol Error 32 RAP 018-794 LDAP Protocol Error 94 RAP
018-733 LDAP Protocol Error 33 RAP 018-795 LDAP Protocol Error 95 RAP
018-734 LDAP Protocol Error 34 RAP 018-796 LDAP Protocol Error 96 RAP
018-735 LDAP Protocol Error 35 RAP 018-797 LDAP Protocol Error 97 RAP
0 1 8 - 7 3 7 G C P O t h e r Fa i l R A P 0 1 8 - 7 3 8 t h r o u g h 0 1 8 - 7 4 6 G C P Fa i l R A P
Other internal error has occurred during GCP module processing. Network-related error has occurred during communication through XMPP protocol with Google
server.
Procedure
018-738 GCP XMPP Network Fail
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the network settings in the UI are correct for the customer network, then perform the op- 018-739 GCP XMPP Network Other Fail
eration causing the fault.
018-740 GCP XMPP Certification Fail
018-741 GCP XMPP Other Fail
018-743 GCP Network Proxy Fail
018-744 GCP Network DNS Resolve Fail
018-745 GCP XMPP Network Proxy Fail
018-746 GCP XMPP Network DNS Resolve Fail
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the network settings in the UI are correct for the customer network, then perform the op-
eration causing the fault.
0 1 8 - 7 4 7 S e r v e r n o t fo u n d i n S M B R A P 0 1 8 - 7 5 5 S e r v e r Co n n e c t i o n E r r o r i n S M B R A P
• During scanner (Scan to PC) SMB transfer, there was a name resolution failure at WINS/Net- There was no response from the transfer destination SMB Server to the Main Unit during the scan-
BIOS broadcast. ner (Scan to PC) SMB transfer.
•
Procedure
OR 1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
During scanner (Scan to PC) SMB transfer, the port of file sharing service is blocked (failed to es-
tablish TCP/IP session). 2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server.
3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports.
Procedure
4. Verify the SMB related ports are not blocked:
1.
• Port No. 139/NetBIOS Session Service (TCP).
2. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
• Direct hosting service [Port No. 445 (TCP).
3. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server.
4. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports.
5. Verify the SMB related ports are not blocked:
• Port No. 137/NetBIOS Name Service (UDP).
• Port No. 138/NetBIOS Datagram Service (UDP).
• Port No. 139/NetBIOS Session Service (TCP).
• Direct hosting service [Port No. 445 (TCP).
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the SMB server is or is not inside the Windows Server Active Directory Domain. If the SMB Take any one of the following actions:
server is inside the WSADD, verify the server is active and available within the network domain
servers list. 1. If the transfer destination server name that is set in the Main Unit was input using FQDN char-
acters (e.g.: mypc01.fuji0.co.jp), check the Network Settings at the Main Unit for whether the
2. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network. DNS Server Address was set correctly.
3. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server. 2. If there is no problem with the connection to the DNS Server, check the whether the transfer
destination address that is set at the Main Unit is registered in the DNS Server.
0 1 8 - 7 5 8 P i c t u r e Pr e s e r v a t i o n P l a c e o r F i l e N a m e M i s t a ke R A P 0 1 8 - 7 5 9 P i c t u r e Pr e s e r v a t i o n P l a c e o r F i l e N a m e I n v a l i d R A P
There is a problem with the storage destination or file name of the specified scan image during There is a problem with the storage destination or file name of the specified scan image during
scanner (Scan to PC) SMB transfer. This could be due to the following reasons: scanner (Scan to PC) SMB transfer. This could be due to the following reasons:
• There is a problem with either the image storage location or the file name.
Procedure
• The specified storage location does not exist on the server. Verify the storage destination or file name of the scan image that is set at the Main Unit contain
any of the following restricted characters.
Procedure
Take any one of the following actions: 1. There is a blank space at the beginning or the end of a text string.
1. Verify the storage location is correct. 2. There is a period at the beginning or the end of a text string.
2. Verify the specified file name is one that can be created on the SMB Server.
Procedure Procedure
Check for the settings of the distributed file system (DFS) with the system administrator. 1. Verify the usage condition at the storage destination PC has caused all the memory to be used.
The checking method is as follows: 2. If the available free memory is low, terminate the applications that are currently not in use.
1. On the SMB Server, select [Start] menu -> [All Programs] -> [Admin Tools] -> [Distributed File
System].
2. On the left frame of the [Distributed File System] window, select the specified storage location
and check the [Target] information in the right frame of the window.
3. Based on the information that was checked, directly specify the SMB Server, shared name, and
storage location.
0 1 8 - 7 6 2 S e r v e r Re s p o n s e T i m e o u t i n S M B R A P 0 1 8 - 7 6 3 C h a r Co n v e r t E r r o r i n S M B
The response from the storage destination PC had taken a long time and caused a time-out to oc- The character code conversion process in the multifunction device has failed during the scanner
cur during scanner (Scan to PC) SMB transfer. (Scan to PC) SMB transfer.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify an anti-virus software is operating at the storage destination PC. Verify the Server Name, Shared Name, Path Name, etc. contains machine-dependent characters
such as (special symbol), (number symbol), IV (roman number). Edit the names as required to cor-
a. If the size of the transfer file is large, the PC response time might be lengthened due to the rect the issue.
anti-virus software.
b. If it is operating, reduce the number of document sheets to make the size of the transfer file
smaller.
0 1 8 - 7 7 2 S h a r e d n a m e n o t fo u n d i n s e r v e r 0 1 8 - 7 73 Sh ar ed n a me er r o r i n s er ve r
The Shared Name that was set does not exist on the transfer destination server during scanner 1. The Shared Name that was set at the transfer destination contains restricted characters during
(Scan to PC) SMB transfer. scanner SMB transfer.
Procedure Procedure
Verify the Shared Name set at the Main Unit exists on the transfer destination PC. 1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server.
3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports.
0 1 8 - 7 7 4 C S B Pr i n t H o s t N a m e Re s o l v e Fa i l 0 1 8 - 7 7 5 C S B Pr i n t Pr o x y S e r v e r Co n n e c t Fa i l
During CSB Print, a network related (DNS name resolution) error has occurred when communicating During CSB Print, a network related (proxy connection) error has occurred when communicating
with the Server via HTTP. with the Server via HTTP.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network. 1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server. 2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server.
3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports. 3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports.
0 1 8 - 7 7 6 C S B Pr i n t N e t w o r k Ti m e o u t O v e r 0 1 8 - 7 7 7 C S B Pr i n t N e t w o r k Co n n e c t Fa i l
During CSB Print, an error has occurred due to timeout when communicating with the Server via During CSB Print, a network related error has occurred when communicating with the Server via
HTTP. HTTP.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network. 1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server. 2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server.
3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports. 3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports.
0 1 8 - 7 7 8 C S B Pr i n t Ce r t i fi c a t i o n Fa i l 0 1 8 - 7 7 9 C S B Pr i n t S S L Co n n e c t Fa i l
During CSB Print, a connection error with the Certificate has occurred when communicating with During CSB Print, an SSL connection error has occurred when communicating with the Server via
the Server via HTTP. HTTP.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network. 1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server. 2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server.
3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports. 3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports.
0 1 8 - 7 8 1 L DA P Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 8 1 R A P 0 1 8 - 7 9 8 C S B Pr i n t N e t w o r k O t h e r Fa i l
There is a LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) error (Cannot connect with server). During CSB Print, a network related other internal error has occurred when communicating with the
Server via HTTP.
Procedure
Procedure
Verify that print jobs are printing or print a Configuration Report and verify that network setup set- 1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
tings are indicated.
The printer is operational or the Config Report indicates valid network settings. 2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server.
Y N 3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports.
Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a prob-
lem with the network. Tell the customer that the network requires service.
Request the customer to verify the machine LDAP settings.
1. Verify the network cable is connected and the Ethernet port is active, blinking with activity.
2. Verify activation status of the requested server.
3. Verify the server name is correct: [Specification setting > Network setting > External authenti-
cation server/Directory service setting > LDAP server/Directory service setting].
4. If the fault persists, request the customer to verify there are no issues at the remote LDAP server.
Once any server issues have been corrected, run the test again.
0 1 8 - 7 9 9 C S B P r i n t A b o r t t o G e t F i l e fr o m C S B
During CSB Print, the document retrieval process from the Server was interrupted (abandoned).
Procedure
1. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
2. Verify the user has write access to the storage destination on the SMB server.
3. Verify a firewall is not blocking communication ports.
0 2 1 - 2 1 0 U S B I C C a r d Re a d e r C o n n e c t i o n E r r o r R A P 0 2 1 - 2 1 1 U S B I C C a r d Re a d e r B r o k e n R A P
1. When powering ON the machine: the EPA Lib/EP Cont detected that the setting requires a USB The device failed to respond.
IC Card to control jobs and that the USB IC Card is not connected.
2. Procedure
Connect a known good USB IC Card Reader. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
OR
When the machine is in Ready state: the EPA Lib/EP Cont detected that the setting requires a
USB IC Card to control jobs and that the USB is disconnected or the USB IC Card Reader is
malfunctioning.
Procedure
1. USB disconnected: Reconnect the disconnected USB connector. Switch off, then switch on the
machine, GP 19.
2. USB connected: Connect an known good USB IC Card Reader. Switch off, then switch on the ma-
chine, GP 19.
0 2 1 - 2 1 2 U S B I C C a r d Re a d e r P r e p a r i n g E r r o r R A P 0 2 1 - 2 1 3 Co n t r o l l e r Pr i c e Ta b l e E r r o r R A P
When the machine is turned ON, the accessory connected through USB has not finished starting up With a new type of subtraction system (M/C Unit-Price Table system) ON (850-027=1), an available
within a certain period of time, which is set as SystemData. unit price (855-xxx) is set to a value out of the range of 1 to 9999999.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. CAUTION: Obtain the values to set the prices from the customer before changing
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 16, Foreign Device Interface Setup. any price values.
1. Using CWIS, export the Unit-Price Table as a text file.
2. Set a value between 1 and 9999999 at the location(s) where a value out of the range is set.
3. Using CWIS, write the file containing the corrected Unit Price Table.
• New type of subtraction system not used:
(M/C Unit-Price Table system): NVM [850-027] to 0, the function is OFF.
• New type of subtraction system used:
(M/C Unit-Price Table system): set every available unit price, NVM [855-xxx] to a value be-
tween 1 and 9999999.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 2 1 - 2 1 4 U S B I C C a r d Re a d e r E n c r y p t i o n S e t t i n g E r r o r R A P 0 2 1 - 2 1 5 I n v a l i d A c c e s s o r y Ty p e R A P
When an USB IC Card Reader error is detected during the setting of the USB IC Card Reader encryp- FDI has been removed from the IOT or an invalid FDI is connected to the machine
tion settings.
Procedure
OR
1. Verify the correct FDI is attached to the machine. Connect the correct FDI.
When connected to an USB IC Card Reader with incorrect encryption settings (the Mutual Authenti- 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 16, Foreign Device Interface Setup.
cation Key not matching the Specified Key), causing encrypted communication to fail.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Connect a USB IC Card Reader that has never been used before, or one that has had its encryp-
tion settings initialized as factory default settings to the machine.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 2 1 - 3 6 0 A c c e s s o r y Fa i l R A P 0 2 1 - 3 6 1 E P A c c e s s o r y K i n d C o n fi g E r r o r R A P
An error occurred in the connection to the foreign accessory. The accessory that should be installed The system data 850-007 has not been set properly.
is not found.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1. Verify the FDI cable is fully insterted into the connector, there is no damage to the cable at ei-
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 16, Foreign Device Interface Setup.
ther end, reseat the connectors at each end.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
4. Change the FDI to a known good FDI.
5. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 2 1 - 4 0 0 C h e c k Re q u e s t R A P 0 2 1 - 4 0 1 U S B I C C a r d Re a d e r Co n n e c t i o n E r r o r I n fo R A P
Detected Check Request. The number of USB IC Card Readers is greater than the machine setting.
Procedure Procedure
Perform checks. Disconnect the USB IC Card Reader that caused this error to occur from the USB connector.
021-402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 502, 503, 504, 507, 0 2 1 - 4 0 9 A M i s c e l l a n e o u s H T T P S e s s i o n E r r o r w a s D e t e c t e d Fa i l
5 0 8 N e t w o r k Fa i l R A P RAP
021-402 Couldn’t Resolve Proxy Name Fail. An error (uncategorized) has occurred in the communication library.
021-403 Couldn’t Resolve Host Name Fail. Procedure
021-404 Couldn't Connect to Host/Proxy Fail. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
3. Verify the proxy server and port settings are correct for the customer network.
4. Install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
021-410, 411, 412, 413, 414, 415, 416, 417, 546, 547, 548, 021-427, 428, 431, 432, 434, 435, 437, 438, 439, 440 4G/3G
5 4 9 , 5 5 0 , 5 5 1 , 5 5 2 , 5 5 3 C A Fa i l R A P Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l ( 4 G / 3 G n e t - B O X ) R A P
Communication with the Certificate Authority (CA) failure. 4G/3G line connection failed using 4G/3Gnet-BOX.
021-410 Couldn’t Connect to CA Fail 021-427 4G/3G connection timeout Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-411 A Connection to CA has Timed Out Fail 021-428 Out of range Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-412 Couldn't resolve proxy name (CA) Fail. 021-431 USB connection timeout Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-413 Couldn't resolve host name (CA) Fail. 021-432 Cannot routing Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-414 Couldn't connect to host/proxy (CA) Fail. 021-433 Mismatch net-Box use Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-415 Couldn't establish SSL session (CA) Fail. 021-434 4G/3G Adapter Error Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-416 An invalid peer certificate has received (CA) Fail. 021-435 Cannot open 4G/3G connection Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-417 Proxy unauthorized access (CA) Fail. 021-436 DNS Resolver init Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-546 Couldn't Resolve Proxy Name (CA) Fail. 021-437 DNS connect Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-547 Couldn't Resolve Host Name (CA) Fail. 021-438 DNS resolve host Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-548 Couldn't connect to host/proxy (CA) Fail. 021-439 DNS resolve Host (CA) Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-549 Couldn't establish SSL session (CA) Fail. 021-440 IP Protocol inactive Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-550 An invalid peer certificate has received (CA) Fail. 021-565 LTE/3G connection timeout Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX).
021-551 Proxy unauthorized access (CA) Fail. 021-566 Out of range Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-552 Couldn't use specified cipher (CA) Fail. 021-567 SIM card NG Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-553 An Invalid Message has received (CA) Fail. 021-568 Time setting Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
5. Check the EP server settings. Chain-Link [920-003] to [920-006]. 021-573 4G/3GAdapter Error Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
6. Install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 021-574 Cannot open LTE/3G connection Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-575 DNS Resolver init Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-576 DNS connect Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-577 DNS resolve host Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-578 DNS resolve Host (CA) Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-579 DNS Resolver misc Error (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-580 IP Protocol inactive Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
021-581 DNS resolve Host (Fwrt) Fail (4G/3Gnet-BOX)
Procedure 0 2 1 - 4 2 9 S I M c a r d N G Fa i l ( 4 G / 3 G n e t - B O X )
1. Verify the 4G/3Gnet-BOX is correctly connected to the machine and status is [connected].
The status of the SIM card inserted in the 4G/3Gnet-BOX is error.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
3. If the signal is out of range or low, carry out the following: Procedure
• Check the 4G/3Gnet-BOX attenna for proper positioning. 1. Verify the 4G/3Gnet-BOX SIM card is properly inserted.
• Move any item blocking the attenna signal. 2. Reset 4G/3Gnet-BOX.
4. Check that appropriate values are stored in the USB RNDIS adapter such as the LAN-IP address, 3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
WAN-DNS server address. 4. Insert a known-good SIM card into the 4G/3Gnet-BOX to verify the 4G/3Gnet-BOX is working
5. Reset the 4G/3Gnet-BOX. correctly.
5. If the fault persists, install a new 4G/3Gnet-BOX.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the URL is correctly formatted and the destination name is correct. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
0 2 1 - 5 0 6 A n I n v a l i d Pe e r Ce r t i fi c a t e H a s Re c e i v e d R A P 0 2 1 - 5 0 9 S O A P Fa u l t : A n I n v a l i d M e s s a g e D e t e c t e d R A P
The SSL certificate of the server is invalid. The server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating the message from the machine is invalid.
Procedure OR
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. An unexpected SOAP Fault was notified because of a failure in the server.
2. Verify the machine UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
0 2 1 - 5 1 0 S O A P Fa u l t : T h e M C A L R E A DY U n r e g i s t e r e d R A P 0 2 1 - 5 1 1 S O A P Fa u l t : T h e M C a l r e a d y r e g i s t e r e d ( W E P ) R A P
The server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating that the machine is already in recalled status on the When performing installation, the server detected that it already has the WEP Installed.
EP system.
When performing installation, the server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating that the machine al-
Procedure ready has WEP installed on the EP system.
1. If the error corresponds to a recall operation, no action is required. Allow the operation to
complete. Procedure
Check with the EP Center for the EP contract status and registration status.
2. If the error is related to operations other than recall, check whether the EP contract has expired.
If it has already expired, no action is required.
3. If the fault occurs when the EP contract is not expired, switch off, then switch on the machine,
GP 19.
a. Verify the certificate is the correct certificate for the operation, is valid, and is not expired.
b. Perform the operation again once the certificate has been validated.
0 2 1 - 5 1 2 S O A P Fa u l t : T h e M C A l r e a d y Re g i s t e r e d ( E P - S V ) R A P 0 2 1 - 5 1 3 S O A P Fa u l t : T h e M C A l r e a d y Re g i s t e r e d ( E P - D X ) R A P
When performing installation, the server detected that it already has the EP-SV Installed. When performing installation, the server detected that it already has the EP-DX Installed.
When performing installation, the server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating that the machine al- When performing installation, the server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating that the machine al-
ready has EP-SV installed on the EP system. ready has EP-DX installed on the EP System.
Procedure Procedure
Check with the EP Center for the EP contract status and registration status. Check with the EP Center for the EP contract status and registration status.
0 2 1 - 5 1 4 S O A P Fa u l t : T h e M C A l r e a d y Re g i s t e r e d ( E P - T R E S S ) 0 2 1 - 5 1 5 , 5 1 6 W r o n g M / C Ty p e o r S e r i a l N u m b e r R A P
RAP SOAP Fault indicating that illegal product code, wrong serial number, or internal error is reported.
When performing installation, the server detected that it already has the TRESS Installed. 021-515 Wrong M/C Type Code.
When performing installation, the server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating that the machine al- 021-516 Wrong Serial Number.
ready has EP-TRESS installed on the EP System.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Check with the EP Center for the EP contract status and registration status.
2. Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI.
3. Update the software, GP 2.
4. Disconnect, then reconnect: all connectors, HDD, SD Card, and DIMM verifying all connections
are fully secure.
5. Install new components as required:
a. DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
6. If the fault persists, reinstall the original components, then contact Xerox technical support cen-
ter or NTS.
0 2 1 - 5 1 7 , 5 1 8 , 5 1 9 S O A P Fa u l t : T h e S e r v i c e N o t Re s p o n d e d R A P 0 2 1 - 5 2 0 , 5 2 1 , 5 2 2 Co u l d n ' t c o n n e c t t o C A .
021-517 SOAP Fault: The Service Not Responded. A communication or timeout error has occurred when obtaining the EP certificate.
The server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating that communication failure has occurred between 021-520 Couldn't connect to CA.
the Edge Server (EPA-Server for configurations installed with EPA) and its back-end.
021-521 A connection to CA has timed out.
021-518 SOAP Fault: An Internal Error Occurred On Server.
021-522 A miscellaneous CA comm error has detected.
The server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating that an internal error has occurred in the Edge
Server. Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
021-519 SOAP Fault: Service is temporarily unavailable.
2. Verify the machine UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
The server has notified a SOAP Fault indicating that EP Center is in high load status.
3. Check the EP proxy server settings, NVM [920-035] to [920-039] or KO settings.
Procedure 4. Check the EP server settings, NVM [920-003]~[920-006)].
1. Check with the EP Center for the system operation status.
2. If a failure has occurred in the EP Center, retry the operation from the UI after the EP Center
has recovered.
0 2 1 - 5 2 7 A n i n v a l i d M e s s a g e Wa s Re c e i v e d R A P 0 2 1 - 5 2 8 Co m m u n i c a t i o n S e t t i n g E r r o r R A P
An invalid message was received from the server. At the start of communication, communication-disabling setting is detected.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI.
3. Update the software, GP 2.
4. Disconnect, then reconnect: all connectors, HDD, SD Card, and DIMM verifying all connections
are fully secure.
5. Install new components as required:
a. DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
6. If the fault persists, reinstall the original components, then contact Xerox technical support cen-
ter or NTS.
0 2 1 - 5 3 1 S e r v i c e I s Te m p o ra r i l y U n a v a i l a b l e O n U p d a t e Sv r R A P 0 2 1 - 5 3 2 Fo u n d A n U n s u p p o r t e d R O M S e t R A P
The software update server has sent this machine an answering message showing it has a big load. As a result of an inquiry to the software update server about the versions of software this machine
has, this machine has been found to have a combination of ROM versions an update on which is
Procedure not supported by EP.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
2. Ask the EP center (software update server) about the system operation status.
Upgrade the software, GP 2.
3. If the EP center is having a problem, wait until it recovers. As soon as it recovers, retry the opera-
tion from the UI.
0 2 1 - 5 3 3 S o f t w a r e U p d a t e U n o p e r a t i o n a l By U s e r R A P 0 2 1 - 5 3 4 Fo u n d A n U n s u p p o r t e d S u b m o d u l e R A P
As a result of an inquiry to the software update server about the versions of software this machine As a result of an inquiry to the software update server about the versions of software this machine
has, this machine has been found to have a combination of ROM versions that prohibits the key op- has, this machine has been found to have a submodule among its ROMs which is excluded from
erator (KO) from doing update. software update.
Procedure Procedure
Upgrade the software, GP 2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
0 2 1 - 5 3 7 A S o f t w a r e U p d a t e Co n f l i c t H a s D e t e c t e d R A P 0 2 1 - 5 3 8 Co u l d n ’ t S t a r t S o f t w a r e U p d a t e D u e To U s e r O p e ra -
When the appointment date for the software upgrade was reached, it was detected that another tion RAP
software upgrade is already in progress.
When the appointment date for the software upgrade was reached, it was detected that the soft-
OR ware upgrade cannot be started temporarily as the machine is being operated by a User, etc.
When instructing to perform the software upgrade from the UI Panel, it was detected that the ap- Procedure
pointed software upgrade process is already started. No action necessary.
Procedure
No action necessary.
0 2 1 - 5 3 9 T h e Po w e r S u p p l y Wa s O f f A t Re s e r v e d Ti m e R A P 0 2 1 - 5 4 0 T h e Po w e r Wa s Tu r n e d O f f D u r i n g D o w n l o a d i n g H a s
When the machine is turned ON, it was detected that the appointment date for the software up- Detected RAP
grade had passed during the yime the machine was powered off and the software upgrade process
It was detected that the power had turned OFF while the software upgrade file is being
was not able to be performed.
downloaded.
Procedure Procedure
No action necessary.
No action necessary.
0 2 1 - 5 4 1 A n I n v a l i d S o f t w a r e U p d a t e C o n fi g u r a t i o n H a s D e - 0 2 1 - 5 4 2 Re s e r v e d S o f t w a r e U p d a t e C a p a b i l i t y Fa i l R A P
tected RAP Although it is now the appointed date for software upgrade, it was detected that the date specified
firmware upgrade is unable to be performed.
When the software upgrade is about to commence, it was detected that the feature settings of the
software upgrade is disabled.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Verify the HDD is installed, install the HDD if removed.
1. Check the customer’s contract information and set the service parameter of the machine 2. Enter UI Diagnostics, dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test, to verify the HDD is functioning
appropriately. correctly.
2. Obtain permission from the customer to perform the software upgrade again from the UI Panel 3. If dC355 returns [NG], perform dC355 Initialize HDD.
as neccessary or schedule another software upgrade appointment. 4. If the HDD fails to initialize, install a new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
5. Once the HDD is initialized, or a new HDD has been installed, perform the software update man-
ually using GP 2, Software Upgrade, [USB Software Upgrade], or, request the customer resched-
ule a network software upgrade as per the customer documentation.
Note: Network - used by the customer for software installation. This procedure is included in
the customer documentation: GP 2, Software Upgrade.
0 2 1 - 5 4 3 I n v a l i d S o f t w a r e Ve r s i o n I n fo r m a t i o n D e t e c t Fa i l R A P 0 2 1 - 5 8 2 S W U p d a t e A n d B a t c h Co n f l i c t Fa i l R A P
During the Software Upgrade, the software version data that was obtained for version matching The software update failed during upload.
was found to be invalid.
Procedure
Procedure Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Perform the software update again.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 2 1 - 5 8 3 A N e w F i r m w a r e Wa s D e t e c t e d A f t e r T h e D o w n l o a d 0 2 1 - 7 0 0 A c c e s s o r y Fa i l u r e
RAP EP accessory - service canceled by disable-USB accessory failure or disconnect.
The software version downloaded is not the same version found on the download server. 021-700 Accessory Failure
Procedure 021-701 Accessory Preparing
1. Verify the version on the download server is the correct version expected, then perform the serv-
er dowload operation again. One of the following USB-related local fails occurring, a job has been started.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 2, USB software download. • 021-210 USB IC Card Reader connection error.
• 021-211 USB IC Card Reader broken.
• 021-212 USB IC Card Reader preparing error.
Procedure
One of the fault codes 021-210, 021-211, and 021-212 is occurring.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following in order: Contact the telephone center.
1. Verify the color limitation KeySW to enabled for color.
2. Change the card with a known upper limit value for color available.
3. Verify that the customer is programming a job within the machine UI parameters.
4. Disconnect, then reconnect, all connectors on the controller PWB and MCU PWB. remove, then
install the memory card and DIMM.
5. Upgrade the software to the most current version on Xerox.com.
6. Install new components, in oder, as required. Test the machine after each new installation to
verify the fault is no longer appearing:
a. DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
b. Memory card 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 3.
c. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 2 1 - 7 5 1 M a i n t e n a n c e Re q u e s t Fa i l ( E P - S V ) R A P 0 2 1 - 7 7 0 U Pa r t s Re q u e s t Fa i l ( E P - D X ) R A P
When an Inspection/Repair/Preliminary Diagnostic request was processed, an error was sent by the The used parts collection order could not be made because a problem was detected at startup, fax
EP-SV. card returned NG because the line was busy.
Procedure Procedure
Check that the telephone line is connected, wait and send the request again. Check that the telephone line is connected, wait and send the request again.
0 2 1 - 7 7 1 M a i n t e n a n c e Re q u e s t Fa i l ( E P - D X ) R A P 0 2 1 - 7 7 2 E P D X I n s t a l l Re m o v e E r r o r R A P
The request for inspection, repair, or preliminary diagnostic could not be made because a problem Fax Card returned NG because the line was busy.
was detected at startup.
Procedure
OR
Check the line for dial tone or wait and send the request again.
Fax Card returned NG because the line was busy.
Procedure
Check that the telephone line is connected, wait and send the request again.
0 2 1 - 9 4 1 S c a n S e r v i c e Pa u s e d B y D i s a b l e R A P 0 2 1 - 9 4 2 S c a n S e r v i c e Pa u s e d By C o l o r M o d e R A P
With a Foreign machine accessory installed, the card was missing, insufficient fee paid or a shortage With a Foreign machine accessory installed, there was Color Mode Restriction or the upper limit was
of card value. reached.
Procedure Procedure
Insert a Xerox card, copy card or cash into the accessory, and Verify that there are sufficient fees or Operate the Color Restriction Key SW to allow Color. Or, replace the card with another card that
card value. does not reach its upper limit in Color mode.
0 2 1 - 9 4 3 P r i n t S e r v i c e Pa u s e d B y D i s a b l e R A P 0 2 1 - 9 4 4 P r i n t S e r v i c e Pa u s e d By C o l o r M o d e R A P
FDI accessory card missing, insufficient fee paid, or a shortage of card value. "Color Print Prohibited" is set in the machine. When color is prohibited, this error will appear when
"Black" is not specified for printing from the PC even if the printed document contains only B/W
Procedure pages.
Insert a Xerox card, copy card, or increase the card value, then retry the operation.
OR
The number of color print sheets of the Accessory (= DocuLyzer) that is installed to the machine has
reached the upper limit.
Procedure
1. Adjust the machine UI color settings for the job requested.
2. Adust the computer printer driver for the job requested.
3. In DocuLyzer, reset the "Color Current Count Value for Each Output Color" of the target card.
4. Insert a card with count that has not reached the upper limit of the color count.
0 2 1 - 9 4 5 S e r v i c e Pa u s e d By D i s a b l e R A P 0 2 1 - 9 4 6 S e r v i c e Pa u s e d B y C o l o r M o d e R A P
FDI card is missing, insufficient fee paid, or a shortage of card value. FDI detected a Color Mode Restriction or the upper limit was reached.
Procedure Procedure
Insert a Xerox card or copy card, then verify sufficient card value is available. Change the color restriction key switch to allow color, or, install a card that has not reached its
upper limit in color mode.
0 2 1 - 9 4 7 S u b t ra c t i v e A c c e s s o r y D i s a b l e ( S c a n ) R A P 0 2 1 - 9 4 8 S u b t r a c t i v e A c c e s s o r y D i s a b l e ( Pr i n t ) R A P
If with ICCG + Dispensor or Coin Kit connected, IITsc detects that the remaining rate the Dispensor During printing on paper or direct copy with ICCG + Dispensor or Coin Kit connected, IOTsc detects
or Coin Kit has is insufficient, it causes a job to be temporarily stopped. that the remaining rate the Dispensor or Coin Kit has is insufficient, it causes a job to be temporarily
stopped.
Procedure
In the case of Dispensor, insert a card that has a remaining rate enough to continue the job. In the Procedure
case of Coin Kit, add a necessary amount of money to continue the job. In the case of dispensor, insert a card that has a remaining rate enough to continue the job. In the
case of coin kit, add a necessary amount of money to continue the job.
0 2 1 - 9 4 9 S u b t ra c t i v e A c c e s s o r y D i s a b l e R A P
ICCG + Dispensor or Coin Kit connected, EP-Cont detects that the remaining rate the Dispensor or
Coin Kit has is insufficient, it causes a job to be temporarily stopped.
Procedure
Insert a card that has a remaining rate enough to continue the job or add a necessary amount of
money to continue the job.
0 2 3 - 5 0 0 Pa n e l R O M D o w n l o a d Fa i l 0 2 3 - 6 0 0 H e l d D o w n K e y E r r o r ( U I - Pa n e l )
Panel-ROM Data Write Processing Error Detection (DLD method). Error was detected when writing A hard key on the panel has been found to be held down for one or more consecutive minutes.
into the Panel-ROM
Procedure
Procedure • This is a Fail to convey a message. No action is required.
1. Perform the download again.
2. If the fault persists, check the connection between the control panel and the controller PWB.
Verify the harness connectors are fully seated and no damage to the harness exists.
3. If the connection is good and the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 5.3 Item 7.
0 2 3 - 6 0 1 H e l d D o w n S o f t k e y E r r o r ( U I - Pa n e l )
The Touch Panel has been found to be held down for one or more consecutive minutes.
Procedure
• This is a Fail to convey a message. No action is required.
0 2 4 - 3 1 2 , 3 1 3 , 3 1 4 , 3 1 5 , 3 1 6 , 3 1 7 , 3 1 8 , 3 1 9 , 3 2 0 I OT N V M 0 2 4 - 3 2 1 3 Po s i t i o n D a t a Re c o v e r y Fa i l R A P
B a c k u p Re s t o r e Fa i l R A P When 3-point check error occurs and dC132 manual correction is executed, no 3-point check data
with any certain data, matched in all points, is found and manual correction cannot be executed
It was detected that the identifiers: Product No., Serial No. of the backed up IOT NVM Data were
different from those instructed by the restore request.
Procedure
024-312 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 2. 1. Install new components in order. Check the machine to see if the fault clears before installing
the next component:
024-313 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 3.
WARNING: Do not install the MCU PWB and the controller PWB in the same proce-
024-314 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 4. dure. Always install the MCU PWB, check the machine to see if the fault clears, then in-
stall the controller PWB, if required.
024-315 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 5.
a. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
024-316 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 6.
b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
024-317 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 7.
CAUTION:
024-318 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 8.
024-319 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 9. • Move the HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1, DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2, and memory
card (4GB), PL 3.2 Item 3 from the old controller PWB to the new controller PWB.
024-320 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 10. • Move the NVM PWB, PL 1.2 Item 16, from the old MCU PWB to the new MCU
PWB.
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, then perform the operation again. Note: If the machine receives a 123-xxx fault code, a machine ID/Billing Data mismatch has
occured from installation of the new components. Perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data to
set all machine IDs to identical numbers.
0 2 4 - 3 2 2 S E E P R O M Re fu r b i s h A l r e a d y Fa i l 0 2 4 - 3 2 3 S E E P R O M Re fu r b i s h O v e r Co u n t Fa i l
A refurbish request was detected when already using a refurbished controller PWB. Refurbish is not possible because the count value has exceeded its maximum count.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Perform the operation again. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Perform the operation again.
0 2 4 - 3 2 4 I OT N V M B a c k u p Re s t o r e Fa i l R A P 0 2 4 - 3 4 0 t o 0 2 4 - 3 6 1 , 3 7 1 t o 3 7 6 I OT - E S S C o m m u n i c a t i o n
Fa u l t / Fa i l R A P
NVM restore not completed at startup.
024-340 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 1.
Procedure
1. Enter UI Diagnostics, dC301 NVM Initialization, to initialize the NVM. 024-341 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 2.
2. If initialization fails, install a new NVM PWB, PL 1.2 Item 16. 024-342 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 3.
3. If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15. 024-343 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 4.
CAUTION: In the event of a new MCU PWB installation, move the NVM PWB, PL 1.2 024-345 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 5.
Item 16, from the old MCU PWB to the new MCU PWB, then check for the fault. If the
fault is cleared leave the original NVM PWB on the new MCU PWB. 024-346 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 6.
024-347 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 7.
024-348 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 8.
024-349 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 9.
024-350 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 10.
024-351 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 11.
024-352 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 12.
024-353 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 13.
024-354 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 14.
024-355 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 15.
024-356 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 16.
024-357 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 17.
024-358 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 18.
024-359 IOT-ESS Communication Fault 19.
024-360 IOT-ESS Initialization Fault RAP
024-361 Invalid IOT Paper Size Group Information RAP
024-371 IOT-ESS Communication Fail 21.
024-372 IOT-ESS Communication Fail 22.
024-373 IOT-ESS Communication Fail 23.
024-374 Registration Control PLL Parameter Fault.
024-375 IOT-ESS Communication Fail 24.
024-376 IOT-ESS Communication Fail 25.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
3. Verify the backplane PWB is fully seated into the connector on the MCU PWB.
Note: If the machine receives a 123-xxx fault code, a machine ID/Billing Data mismatch has
occured from installation of the new components. Perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data to
set all machine IDs to identical numbers.
0 2 4 - 3 6 3 Pa g e S y n c I l l e g a l S t o p R A P 0 2 4 - 3 6 4 D M A Tra n s fe r Fa u l t R A P
Page Sync Illegal Stop. Page Sync became invalid before the specified size was output during IOT The specified data was input but compression or expansion did not complete when compression or
output. expansion was being performed.
Procedure Procedure
Switch power Off then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1. Verify that the backplane PWB is firmly attached to the MCU PWB. 2. Enter UI Diagnostics, dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test. Test the HDD for proper opera-
tion. If the HDD test fails, perform the following steps:
2. Check the installation site environment for anything that causes excessive electrical noises such
as arcing. a. Enter dC355 Initialize Hard Disk, to initialize the HDD.
3. Install new components in order, check the machine to see if the fault clears before installing b. If initialization fails, install new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
the next component: 3. Remove, then install the DIMM 4GB on the controller PWB. If the fault persists, install a new
DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
WARNING: Do not install the MCU PWB and the controller PWB in the same proce-
dure. Always install the MCU PWB first, check the machine to see if the fault clears, 4. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
then install the next component, if required.
a. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
b. Backplane PWB, PL 1.2 Item 2.
c. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
CAUTION:
• Move the HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1, DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2, and memory
card (4GB), PL 3.2 Item 3 from the old controller PWB to the new controller PWB.
• Move the memory module, PL 1.2 Item 3, from the old backplane PWB to the new
backplane PWB.
• Move the NVM PWB, PL 1.2 Item 16, from the old MCU PWB to the new MCU
PWB.
Note: If the machine receives a 123-xxx fault code, a machine ID/Billing Data mismatch has
occured from installation of the new components. Perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data to
set all machine IDs to identical numbers.
0 2 4 - 3 6 5 D e c o m p r e s s e d D a t a E x c e e d s B u f fe r S i z e R A P 0 2 4 - 3 6 6 J B I G L i b ra r y O t h e r Fa u l t R A P
Decompressed data exceeds buffer size. JBIG Library Other Fault.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Perform the operation causing the fault again. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 2 4 - 3 6 7 D e c o m p r e s s O t h e r Fa u l t R A P 0 2 4 - 3 6 8 P C I Fa u l t R A P
Decompress Other Fault. An incorrect line sync was detected during IOT output. PCI Fault. A failure occurred during PCI access because the PCI bus was incompatible.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Enter UI Diagnostics, dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test. Test the HDD for proper opera- 2. Enter UI Diagnostics, dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test. Test the HDD for proper opera-
tion. If the HDD test fails, perform the following steps: tion. If the HDD test fails, perform the following steps:
a. Enter dC355 Initialize Hard Disk, to initialize the HDD. a. Enter dC355 Initialize Hard Disk, to initialize the HDD.
b. If initialization fails, install new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1. b. If initialization fails, install new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
3. Remove, then install the DIMM 4GB on the controller PWB. If the fault persists, install a new 3. Remove, then install the DIMM 4GB on the controller PWB. If the fault persists, install a new
DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2. DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
4. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 4. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
a. Enter dC355 Initialize Hard Disk, to initialize the HDD. 024-603 SWKey master counter repair.
b. If initialization fails, install new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1. 024-604 SWKey backup counter 1 repair.
3. Verify the MCU PWB is firmly seated to the backplane PWB.
024-605 SWKey backup counter 2 repair.
4. Remove, then install the DIMM 4GB on the controller PWB. If the fault persists, install a new
DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2. 024-606 Billing meter type master counter repair.
5. Install new components in order, check the machine to see if the fault clears before installing 024-607 Billing meter type backup counter 1 repair.
the next component:
024-608 Billing meter type backup counter 2 repair.
WARNING: Do not install the MCU PWB and the controller PWB in the same proce-
dure. Always install the MCU PWB first, check the machine to see if the fault clears, 024-609 Billing count type master counter repair.
then install the next component, if required.
024-610 Billing count type backup counter 1 repair.
a. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
024-611 Billing count type backup counter 2 repair.
b. Backplane PWB, PL 1.2 Item 2.
c. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 024-612 Modal break point master counter repair.
024-613 Modal break point backup counter 1 repair.
CAUTION:
024-614 Modal break point backup counter 2 repair.
• Move the HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1, DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2, and memory
card (4GB), PL 3.2 Item 3 from the old controller PWB to the new controller PWB. 024-616 Serial no master restore.
• Move the memory module, PL 1.2 Item 3, from the old backplane PWB to the new 024-617 Serial no backup 1 restore.
backplane PWB.
024-618 Serial no backup 2 restore.
• Move the NVM PWB, PL 1.2 Item 16, from the old MCU PWB to the new MCU
PWB. 024-619 Product no master restore.
Note: If the machine receives a 123-xxx fault code, a machine ID/Billing Data mismatch has 024-620 Product no backup 1 restore.
occured from installation of the new components. Perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data to
set all machine IDs to identical numbers. 024-621 Product no backup 2 restore.
024-625 Shipping master restore.
024-626 Shipping backup 1 restore.
024-627 Shipping backup 2 restore.
Procedure
Information only, no corrective action is required.
0 2 4 - 6 1 5 I OT U n s u p p o r t e d D r u m S h u t O f f R A P 0 2 4 - 6 2 2 T C B S ke w L i m i t O v e r Wa r n i n g R A P
Drum Shut Off not supported. The PRE REGI SNR detected skew which exceeds expectation.
Procedure Procedure
Information only, no action necessary. Information only, no action necessary.
Note: See the Customer Documentation for accessing the available memory in the machine
UI.
3. Verify the HDD is intalled in the machine. Install the HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1, if no HDD is
found.
4. If all the above conditions are met and the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2
Item 7.
0 2 4 - 7 0 2 Pa p e r J a m R A P 0 2 4 - 7 0 5 Fo r c e A n n o ta t i o n Te m p l a t e Fa i l R A P
A paper jam is detected during printing. The specified Force Annotation template cannot be found in the device.
Procedure Procedure
Clear the paper jam, then resume or restart the print job. Delete document. Store again from driver.
0 2 4 - 7 0 7 , 7 0 8 D u p l e x I n v e r s i o n Pr o h i b i t e d M e d i a Fa i l R A P 0 2 4 - 7 4 6 S e l e c t e d Pa p e r Tra y Pa ra m e t e r M i s m a tc h R A P
Duplex or face down print was instructed for paper with paper type/size that cannot be used in Du- The type of paper specified for the print job is incorrect.
plex/Invert.
Procedure
Procedure Verify the correct paper type is set in the machine UI settings, then perform the print job again.
Change the paper type or change the Duplex instruction to Simplex, then perform the print job
again.
0 2 4 - 7 4 7 Pr i n t I n s t r u c t i o n Fa u l t R A P 0 2 4 - 7 48 B at e s Nu m b er in g D ig it O ver RA P
A printing parameter is incorrect for the print job request. In the process of printing Bates Numbering, a maximum number of 9 or the user-specified number
of digits is exceeded.
Procedure
Verify the settings are correct in the machine UI for the print job, the perform the print job again. Procedure
Reduce the number of documents within the specs limits withing the UI settings.
0 2 4 - 9 1 0 Tra y 1 S i z e M i s m a t c h R A P 0 2 4 - 9 1 1 Tra y 2 S i z e M i s m a tc h
When the paper length in Slow Scan direction is measured on the paper feed path, the size detected When the paper length in Slow Scan direction is measured on the paper feed path, the size detected
is different from the size detected by the tray. is different from the size detected by the tray.
0 2 4 - 9 1 2 Tra y 3 S i z e M i s m a t c h 0 2 4 - 9 1 3 Tra y 4 S i z e M i s m a tc h
When the paper length in Slow Scan direction is measured on the paper feed path, the size detected When the paper length in Slow Scan direction is measured on the paper feed path, the size detected
is different from the size detected by the tray. is different from the size detected by the tray.
0 2 4 - 9 2 3 Y To n e r C a r t r i d g e E m p t y 0 2 4 - 9 2 4 M a g e n t a To n e r C a r t r i d g e E m p t y
Procedure Procedure
Remove toner cartridge Y/Y-flou/clear. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode. Remove toner cartridge M/M-flou/clear, then enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics
Select dC330, code [093-001] toner cartridge motor assembly Y. Select Start. Mode. Select dC330, code [093-002], toner cartridge motor assembly M. Select Start.
The toner cartridge motor assembly Y energizes. The toner cartridge motor assembly M energizes.
Y N Y N
Install a new toner cartridge motor assembly Y, PL 90.8 Item 5. Install a new toner cartridge motor assembly M, PL 90.8 Item 5.
Check the connection of P/J140 Y and P/J653B. Check the connection of P/J140 M and P/J653B.
Are P/J 140Y and P/J 653B properly connected? Are P/J 140M and P/J 653B properly connected?
Y N Y N
Connect P/J140 Y and P/J653B properly. Connect P/J140 M and P/J653B properly.
Check the wire between P/J140 Y and P/J653B for open circuit and short circuit. Check the wire between P/J140 M and P/J653B for open circuit and short circuit.
The wire between P/J 140Y and P/J 653B is OK. The wire between P/J 140M and P/J 653B is OK.
Y N Y N
Repair the open circuit or short circuit. Repair the open circuit or short circuit.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [093-006] dispense motor Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [093-007], dispense motor
Y. Select Start. M. Select Start.
Dispense motor is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.) Dispense motor M is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.)
Y N Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect connectors P/J201 Y on the Dispense Motor. Meas- Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect connector P/J201 M on the dispense motor M.
ure the wire-wound resistance of the Dispense Motor. Measure the wire-wound resistance of the dispense motor M.
The resistance between P/J 210Y-1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms. The resistance between P/J 201M-1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Y N Y N
Install a new Y Dispense Motor, PL 90.4 Item 7. Install a new dispense motor M, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Check the following for continuity: Check the following for continuity:
• IOT Drive PWB P/J438 -7 to Dispense Motor P/J201 Y -1. • IOT Drive PWB P/J438 -5 to Dispense Motor P/J201 M -1.
• IOT Drive PWB P/J438 -8 to Dispense Motor P/J201 Y -1. • IOT Drive PWB P/J438 -6 to Dispense Motor P/J201 M -2.
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less. Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact. Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following: Perform the following:
1. Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT Drive PWB and P/J402 on the MCU 1. Disconnect, the reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J402 on the MCU
PWB. PWB.
2. Remove the Y Toner Dispenser. Check that there is no such load as poor Auger rotation, 2. Remove dispense motor M, then check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking, or drive
toner blocking and Drive gears binding. gears binding.
3. If the fault persists, install new components in order as required: 3. If the fault persists, install new components in order as required:
a. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11. a. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
b. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15. b. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Install a new Toner Cartridge Y/Y-Flou/Clear, PL 90.1 Item 17. Install a new toner cartridge motor assembly M, PL 90.8 Item 5.
0 2 4 - 9 2 5 Cy a n To n e r Ca r t r i d g e E m p t y R A P 0 2 4 - 9 2 7 O C T Fu l l S t a c k R A P
The OCT Full Stack Sensor ON was detected for 5 sec consecutively.
Procedure
1. Remove paper from the OCT.
Cyan Toner Cartridge Empty 2. Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to check the tray full sensor, PL 12.2 Item 3.
Procedure 3. If the sensor check fails, install a new tray full sensor, PL 12.2 Item 3.
Remove toner cartridge C/C-flou/white. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode,
dC330, code [093-003] toner cartridge motor C. Select Start.
The toner cartridge motor C energizes.
Y N
Install a new toner cartridge motor assembly C, PL 90.8 Item 5.
Check the connection of P/J140 C and P/J653B.
Are P/J 140C and P/J 653B properly connected?
Y N
Connect P/J140 C and P/J653B properly.
Check the wire between P/J140 C and P/J653B for open circuit and short circuit.
The wire between P/J 140C and P/J 140B is OK.
Y N
Repair the open circuit or short circuit.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [093-008], dispense motor
C. Select Start.
Dispense motor C is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.)
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect connector P/J201 C on the dispense motor C.
Measure the wire-wound resistance of the dispense motor C.
The resistance between P/J 201C-1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Y N
Install a new dispense motor C, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Check the following for continuity:
• IOT Drive PWB P/J438 -3 to Dispense Motor P/J201 C -1.
• IOT Drive PWB P/J438 -4 to Dispense Motor P/J201 C -2
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following:
1. Disconnect, the reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J402 on the MCU
PWB.
2. Remove dispense motor M, then check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking, or drive
gears binding.
3. If the fault persists, install new components in order as required:
a. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
b. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Install a new toner cartridge C/C-flou/white, PL 90.1 Item 14.
0 2 4 - 9 3 3 , 0 2 4 - 9 4 0 , 0 2 4 - 9 4 1 O p e ra t i o n Y D r u m E n d o f L i fe R A P 0 2 4 - 9 3 4 Pa p e r K i n d M i s m a t c h R A P
Drum cartridge Y/C/M has reached end of life. The transparency type expected was not detected.
024-933 Operation Y Drum End of Life. Procedure
024-940 Operation C Drum End of Life. Load the specified transparencies.
Procedure
Install a new drum cartridge assembly Y/C/M as required, PL 90.1 Item 13.
Procedure
fill the tray with Xerox transparencies without borders, then rerun the print job.
0 2 4 - 9 5 0 Tra y 1 E m p t y R A P 0 2 4 - 9 5 1 Tra y 2 E m p t y R A P
0 2 4 - 9 5 2 Tra y 3 E m p t y R A P 0 2 4 - 9 5 3 Tra y 4 E m p t y R A P
0 2 4 - 9 6 5 AT S / A P S N o Pa p e r 0 2 4 - 9 6 6 AT S / A P S N o D e s t i n a t i o n Fa u l t
ATS/APS No Paper. The paper specified for printing has run out. ATS/APS No Destination Fault. The paper specified for printing cannot be detected.
0 2 5 - 5 9 6 D i a g H D D Fa u l t 1 R A P
Procedure
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect and reconnect the HDD harness, then switch on the
machine.
2. If the fault persists, install a new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
0 2 5 - 5 9 7 D i a g H D D Fa u l t 2 R A P
Procedure
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect and reconnect the HDD harness, then switch on the
machine.
2. If the fault persists, install a new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
0 2 6 - 4 0 0 E x c e e d t h e N u m b e r o f Co n n e c t i o n o f U S B H o s t Fa i l 0 2 6 - 4 0 1 I OT Re g i s t r a t i o n E r r o r O c c u r r i n g R A P
RAP Detected Registration abnormality of IOT
Info. Failure because the USB Host Port maximum connection has been exceeded. The number of
machines that are connected to the USB Host Port of this machine has exceeded the maximum per- Procedure
missible number of connections. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Advise the customer to disconnect some of the machines that are connected to this USB host
port and ensure that the number of connected machines are below the maximum permissible
number of connections.
0 2 6 - 4 0 2 C h a n g e d I OT S p e e d S l o w M o d e R A P 0 2 6 - 4 0 3 S t o p p r i n t i n g a n d w a i t fo r t o n e r c o o l i n g
The IOT print has become slow. The IOT device internal temperature has risen and the IOT has notified that a toner related cooling
is required.
Procedure
No action is required as the speed will return to normal when the device internal temperature Procedure
drops. No action is required as the job will restart automatically upon the completion of cooling.
0 2 6 - 7 0 0 L DA P Pr o t o c o l M A X E r r o r R A P 0 2 6 - 7 0 1 A d d r e s s B o o k Re q u e s t O v e r f l o w R A P
Unspecified LDAP protocol is detected in Address Book operation. JRM directory service processing ability is exceeded.
Procedure Procedure
Upgrade the software, GP 2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
02 6 - 7 0 2 A d d r e s s B o o k Di r ec t o r y Se rv ic e O ve rf l o w R A P 0 2 6 - 7 0 3 A b o r t w i t h Lo g o u t R A P
JRM directory service that is the machines internal software receives multiple requests of the same Authentication is cancelled, additional document are not allowed.
work.
Procedure
Procedure Change the machine UI settings disabling authentication cancellation during additional documents
Upgrade the software, GP 2, then run the same job causing the fault. added.
0 2 6 - 7 0 4 D o c u Wo r k s E r r o r R A P 0 2 6 - 7 0 5 D o c u Wo r k s S h o r t o f M e m o r y R A P
Syntax error, use of undefined command, parameter error, DocuWorks file damage, or DocuWorks Shortage of memory was detected during DocuWorks decomposing.
decomposer internal error occurred during DocuWorks decomposing.
Procedure
Procedure If [High Image Quality] is selected for printing, change it to [Standard] or [High Speed]. If the prob-
Use printer driver (ART-EX, PCL, etc.) of DocuWorks Viewer to print a job. lem persists though the memory has added up to the maximum, print from DocuWorks Viewer by
use of Printer Driver (ART-EX, PCL, etc.). If problem persists, additional memory is required.
0 2 6 - 7 0 6 D o c u Wo r k s Pr i n t Pr o h i b i t e d R A P 0 2 6 - 7 0 7 D o c u Wo r k s U n l o c k Fa i l e d R A P
DocuWorks is processing a DocuWorks document which is prohibited to print. This error occurs when a password entered from the UI does not match the password set in the
Content Bridge Utility while printing a [security protected] DocuWorks file.
Procedure
Because the document is prohibited to print, enter [Full Access Password] from the DocuWorks Procedure
Viewer to cancel the restriction, and print the document using printer driver (ART-EX, PCL, etc.). 1. Check if the password is correct.
2. Enter [Full Access Password] from the DocuWorks Viewer to cancel the restriction, and print the
document using printer driver (ART-EX, PCL, etc.).
0 2 6 - 7 0 8 U R L D a ta S i z e O ve r R A P 0 2 6 - 7 0 9 U R L H D D Fu l l R A P
Scan to URL stored data size too large. Scan to URL hard disk is full.
In Scan to URL, scan data size of 1 job exceeded the upper limit. In Scan to URL, the HDD partition becomes full, and job failed.
Procedure Procedure
1. Lower the scan resolution. Try a job again when there is enough space in HDD.
2. Change the scan size (e.g. from A3 to A4).3) If the max scan data size is set to a smaller num-
ber, change the number to a larger number.
0 2 6 - 7 1 0 S / M I M E U n s u p p o r t e d C i p h e r Fa i l R A P 0 2 6 - 7 1 1 M u l t i - Pa g e F i l e S i z e O v e r L i m i t R A P
E-mail was received using an unsupported encryption method. The size of a multi-page file generated by scan service exceeded the upper limit.
02 6 - 7 1 2 H T T P Ou t J o b O ver l ap E r ro r R A P 0 2 6 - 7 1 3 Co u l d N o t D e t e c t Pr o x y S e r v e r A u t o m a t i c a l l y R A P
Failed to retrieve a file in the box because retrieval of file overlaps with another CWIS job.+ The proxy server could not be detected automatically.
While high compression or OCR processing requested by a print job through network is still in prog- Procedure
ress, high compression or OCR processing was also requested by a job retrieval via HTTP.
1. Verify the machine UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
Procedure 2. Verify the proxy server settings for the customer network are correct.
Try job retrieval again after high compression or OCR processing requested by a print job through
network is completed.
0 2 6 - 7 1 4 t o 0 2 6 - 7 1 7 Co n n e c t i o n t o Xe r o x S e r v e r o r Pr o x y E r r o r s 0 2 6 - 7 1 8 P S Pr i n t I n s t r u c t i o n Fa i l R A P
RAP 026-718 An erroneous combination of print parameters selected (finishing, paper size, paper tray,
Duplex instructions, output tray) prevents the machine from running the job.
The machine could not connect to the Xerox Communication Server or the proxy server. (A network
path problem, an open wire, etc.)
Procedure
026-714 Could not connect to Xerox server or proxy. Perform the steps that follow:
026-715 Connection to Xerox Server has Timed Out. 1. Advise the customer to correctly set finishing, paper size, paper tray, duplex instructions, and
output tray options, then re-run the job.
026-716 An Invalid State Message Received from Server.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
026-717 Invalid Network Settings Were Found.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI network settings are correct for the customer network.
3. Verify the Xerox Communication Server is available from another machine, then check the ma-
chine UI settings against the machine setting connected to the Xerox Communication Server.
026-719 Internal Error in Scan RAP 026-720 to 026-723 Media Error RAP
026-719 An internal error has occurred. 026-720 The media does not have enough space available.
Procedure 026-729 An error occurred during communication with the WSD scan client. WSD scan client can-
celled the job or a scan from the DADF was performed from an application other than Windows fax
Advise the customer to shorten the specified storage location or the filename.
and scan.
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the transfer destination WSD scan client and the machine are able to communi-
cate via the network. For example:
• Check whether the WSD scan client has enough free capacity.
• Check the connection of the network cable.
2. When using DADF, perform the scan using Windows Fax & Scan. Or, change to the platen to per-
form the scan.
0 2 6 - 7 3 0 Tra y Pa p e r S i z e N o t D e t e c t e d R A P 0 2 6 - 7 3 1 t o 0 2 6 - 7 3 3 P J L Fa i l R A P
026-730 The paper size of the paper tray selected is unknown. 026-731 The PIN number that is specified by PJL command is different from the number that is cal-
culated from the machine’s serial number.
Procedure
026-732 The print count that is specified by PJL command has exceeded the machine’s total im-
Ensure the paper guides in the selected tray are set correctly.
pression meter value by +100.
026-733 The password that is specified by PJL command is different from the one that is set in the
machine.
Procedure
Advise the customer to correct the PIN number, print count or password that is specified by PJL
Command, then try again.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Information only, no action is required.
1. Ensure that the job has completed, then try again.
2. After completing a panel operation, wait at least 1 minute before starting the download
operation.
026-736 Internal Error in HTTP Upload RAP 026-737 Network Error RAP
Internal error is detected during execution of HTTP Scan Upload jobs. Network error is detected during HTTP Scan Upload.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, then repeat the operation. Verify the UI network settings are correct for the customer network, then perform the operation
again.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, repeat the operation . For one occurrence, take no action. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
0 2 7 - 3 1 0 , 0 2 7 - 3 1 1 D F E Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l ( S u b Sy s t e m ) R A P
027-310 DFE Communication Fail (SubSystem).
027-311 DFE Parameter Error (SubSystem).
Procedure
1. Disconnect the DFE connection cable.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
3. Connect the DFE connection cable.
0 2 7 - 3 1 2 , 0 2 7 - 3 1 3 E x t Pr i n t C h e c k M o d e E r r o r ( S u b Sy s t e m ) 0 2 7 - 3 1 3 E x t Pr i n t I / F M i s m a t c h ( S u b Sy s t e m )
027-312 ExtPrint Check Mode Error (SubSystem). [Fault Name]
027-313 ExtPrint I/F Mismatch (SubSystem). • ExtPrint I/F Mismatch (SubSystem)
[Procedure]
• - Make sure software version of DFE and ESS is consistent.
027-400 Net Off Line RAP 027-442, 443, 444 Duplicate IP Address 1 RAP
Net Off Line . 027-442 IPv6 - stateless auto setting IP address 1 is duplicated.
1. Communication is disabled because of other Fault occurrence. 027-443 IPv6 - stateless auto setting IP address 2 is duplicated.
2. Communication is disabled because Panel operation is underway (especially CE mode etc.). 027-444 IPv6 - stateless auto setting IP address 3 is duplicated.
3. Third party cannot communicate with remote access.
Procedure
Procedure Perform the steps that follow:
CAUTION: Power Off and then Power On the DFE prior to Powering Off/On the IOT
and Accessories. The Accessories have their own power cord. Whenever a procedure 1. Advise the customer to either change the IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting Address 1, 2 or 3 of this
states to Power Off and then Power On, POPO, etc., powering Off and then powering machine or the IPv6 address of the other machine on the network.
On the IOT does NOT Power Off the Accessory. The Accessory will have to be Powered 2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Off and then On separately from the IOT by unplugging the Accessory power cord.
If other messages are displayed, fix the fault there. If you are doing operation on Panel, complete
the operation on Panel. If Remote Access is in process, wait until the end of access. After these, if
the fault persists, Power Off/On.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 (Manual Setting Address) of this machine to the IPv6 1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 (Manual Setting Address) of this machine to the IPv6
address that can be used as the self-machine address. address that can be used as the self-machine address.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 Link Local Address of this machine or the IPv6 address 1. Advise the customer to change the duplicated IP address of the PC.
of the other machine on the network. 2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
0 2 7 - 5 0 0 S MT P S e r v e r Fa i l fo r M a i l I O R A P 0 2 7 - 5 0 1 P O P S e r v e r Fa i l fo r M a i l I O R A P
027-500 SMTP server address resolution fail for mail IO. 027-501 Incorrect POP server name was detected.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check with the System Administrator that the mail server has been launched and the environ- 1. Check with the System Administrator that the mail server has been launched and the environ-
ment is already used for other purposes (such as for PC). ment is already used for other purposes (such as for PC).
2. Check that a correct SMTP server address is reflected in the machine setting list: 2. Check that a correct POP server address is reflected in the machine setting list:
a. When the SMTP server address is specified using IP address, set a correct IP address. a. When the POP server address is specified using IP address, set a correct IP address.
b. When the SMTP server address is specified using FQDN, check that the FQDN name is cor- b. When the POP server address is specified using FQDN, check that FQDN name is correct. Also
rect. Also check that a correct DNS server address is set for the machine, and set a correct IP check that a correct DNS server address is set for the machine, and set a correct IP address.
address.
0 2 7 - 5 0 2 P O P A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Fa i l fo r M a i l I O R A P 0 2 7 - 5 0 3 , 5 0 4 , 5 3 3 , 7 7 3 , 7 8 5 , 7 8 6 S e r v e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n
027-502 POP authentication fail for mail IO. Ti m e o u t R A P
027-503 Time to communicate with the POP server ran out (after connection to the server).
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: 027-504 Internal error or unexpected server response received (at any time).
1. Advise the customer to specify the correct POP server authentication information. 027-533 An internal error has occurred during SMB scan
2. Perform the 027-501 POP Server Fail for Mail IO RAP, then advise the customer to specify a cor- 027-773 Time to communicate with the SMTP server ran out (after connection to the server).
rect POP User Name.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. 027-785 Response timeout occurs from the destination WebDAV server.
027-786 WebDAV server timeout is answered.
Procedure
Advise the customer to wait for a while, then perform the operation again.
027-513 SMB Scan Client Access RAP 027-514 Host Name Solution Error in SMB RAP
027-513 In scan to SMB, the user has no right to access the SMB server. 027-514 Unable to resolve hostname during SMB scan.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check if the specified user has read/write access in a file or folder in the Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS. Or, check whether the SMB server name
specified place. of the transfer destination has been registered in the DNS.
02 7 - 5 1 5 D N S Se r ver Se t u p i n SM B R A P 0 2 7 - 5 1 6 S e r v e r Co n n e c t i o n E r r o r i n S M B R A P
027-515 The DNS server was not set during SMB scan. 027-516 Problem with connection to server during SMB scan.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to set the DNS server address. Or, set the SMB server address of the transfer Advise the customer to:
destination using IP address.
1. Check that network communication between the transfer destination SMB server and this ma-
chine is available, by checking:
a. The connection of network cables.
b. The TCP/IP settings.
c. For communication through port 137 (UDP), port 138 (UDP) and port 139 (TCP).
2. Check the network settings that follow to see if the computer operates as an SMB server.
a. Check that the file sharing service for Microsoft network is enabled.
b. Check that NetBIOS over TCP/IP is enabled in the TCP/IP settings.
c. Check the file sharing service (communications through port 137 (UDP), port 138 (UDP) and
port 139 (TCP)) is allowed in the firewall settings.
3. For communication that goes beyond the subnet, check the WINS server settings and check
whether the server name address can be resolved correctly.
4. Check whether the NetBIOS interface machine at the transfer destination SMB server has
started.
0 2 7 - 5 1 8 L o g i n N a m e o r Pa s s w o r d E r r o r i n S M B R A P 0 2 7 - 5 1 9 S c a n n i n g P i c t u r e Pr e s e r v a t i o n P l a c e E r r o r R A P
027-518 Login name or a password error in SMB. 027-519 Scan image storage destination or file name specification error during scanner (save to
PC) SMB transfer.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check the password that was set for the shared folder. Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check if the storage destination is correct.
2. Check if a prohibited character was detected in the specified storage destination or file name.
3. Check if the specified storage destination is linked to a different shared folder due to the distrib-
uted file system (DFS).
0 2 7 - 5 2 0 F i l e N a m e A c q u i s i t i o n Fa i l u r e R A P 0 2 7 - 5 2 1 F i l e N a m e S u f fi x L i m i t O v e r i n S M B R A P
027-520 Unable to obtain the file/folder name on the SMB scan server. 027-521 The SMB scan file name/folder name suffix has exceeded the limit value.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Advise the customer to change the file name/destination folder on the SMB scan server. Else, move
or delete the files in the destination folder.
0 2 7 - 5 2 2 F i l e C r e a t i o n Fa i l u r e i n S M B R A P 0 2 7 - 5 2 3 Lo c k Fo l d e r C r e a t i o n Fa i l u r e i n S M B R A P
027-522 Failed to create an SMB scan file. 027-523 Failed to create an SMB scan lock folder.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check if the specified file name already exists on the server. 1. Manually delete the lock directory (*.LCK) from the transfer destination.
2. Check if the specified file name is in use. 2. Check whether a folder with the same name as the specified name already exists.
3. Check if the specified file name already exists as a directory.
4. Check if a prohibited character was detected in the specified file name.
0 2 7 - 5 2 4 Fo l d e r C r e a t i o n Fa i l u r e i n S M B R A P 0 2 7 - 5 2 5 , 0 2 7 - 5 2 7 F i l e D e l e t e Fa i l u r e i n S M B R A P
027-524 Failed to create an SMB scan folder. 027-525 Failed to delete an SMB scan file.
0 2 7 - 5 2 6 Lo c k Fo l d e r D e l e t e Fa i l u r e i n S M B R A P 0 2 7 - 5 2 8 D a t a W r i t e Fa i l u r e t o S M B S e r v e r R A P
027-526 Failed to delete an SMB scan lock folder. 027-528 The storage destination on the SMB scan data server has no free space.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to manually delete the lock directory (*.LCK) from the transfer destination, then Advise the customer to check that the storage destination has enough free space.
retry the job.
0 2 7 - 5 2 9 D a t a Re a d Fa i l u r e Fr o m S M B S e r v e r R A P 0 2 7 - 5 3 0 F i l e N a m e D u p l i c a t e Fa i l u r e i n S M B R A P
027-529 Unexpected error of the SMB scan data server. 027-530 Cancel Job is selected for SMB scan File Name Conflict.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to log in to the SMB server from another PC using the same user name and Advise the customer to set File Name Conflict to other than Cancel Job.
check whether they can write a file into the same storage destination on that SMB server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the file format is not set to Multi-page When Add is selected for Advise the customer to check that the NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct when Add is selected for File
File Name Conflict. Name Conflict.
0 2 7 - 5 4 3 S M B S e r v e r N a m e S p e c i fi c a t i o n E r r o r R A P 0 2 7 - 5 4 7 , 0 2 7 - 5 4 8 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r s 1 R A P
027-543 The SMB server (NetBIOS) name specification is incorrect. 027-547 SMB protocol error (4-007), the scan domain name specification is incorrect .
Procedure 027-548 SMB protocol error (4-008), the scan user name specification is incorrect
Advise the customer to check that the server name of the SMB server is correct.
Procedure
Advise the customer to have the system administrator set the domain name and user name
correctly.
0 2 7 - 5 4 9 , 0 2 7 - 5 7 2 t o 0 2 7 - 5 7 6 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 4 - 0 0 9 R A P 0 2 7 - 5 6 4 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 4 - 0 2 4 R A P
027-549 SMB protocol error (4-009), the specification of password is incorrect. 027-564 SMB protocol error (4-024), the host is missing.
027-572 SMB protocol error (4-032), incorrect parameter. Procedure
027-573 SMB protocol error (4-033), incorrect character code. Advise the customer to:
027-574 SMB protocol error (4-034), incorrect data size. 1. Check that the authentication server and the machine can communicate through the network
(check the network group, TCP/IP settings, check the communication at Port No. 137 (UDP)/Port
027-576 SMB protocol error (4-036), incorrect domain data size. No. 138 (UDP)/Port No. 139 (TCP)).
2. If the authentication server and the machine are connected to different subnets, check that the
Procedure machine has settings that can resolve the address of the authentication server.
Advise the customer to perform the operation again.
3. Check if the NetBIOS over TCP/IP has become enabled at the authentication server settings:
a. Check if the authentication server and the machine can resolve the addresses from the
WINS server.
b. Check if the authentication server and the machine can resolve the addresses from the DNS
server.
4. Check if the NetBIOS over TCP/IP has become enabled at the authentication server settings.
5. Check at the Internet connection firewall if the communication through Ports 137, 138 and 139
are not blocked.
0 2 7 - 5 6 5 , 0 2 7 - 5 7 8 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r s 2 R A P 0 2 7 - 5 6 6 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 4 - 0 2 6 R A P
027-565 SMB protocol error (4-025), cannot connect. 027-566 SMB protocol error (4-026), the library has not been initialized.
027-578 SMB protocol error (4-038), communication timeout has occurred. Procedure
Advise the customer to check if the SMB client has been started.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the authentication server and the machine can communicate
through the network (check the network group, TCP/IP settings, check the communication at Port
No. 137 (UDP)/Port No. 138 (UDP)/Port No. 139 (TCP)).
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that SMB (TCP/IP) is enabled. Advise the customer to set the authentication server to Windows other than Win95/Win98/Me.
0 2 7 - 5 8 5 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 4 - 0 4 5 R A P 0 2 7 - 5 8 6 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 4 - 0 4 6 R A P
027-585 SMB protocol error (4-045), scan login not available time period. 027-586 SMB protocol error (4-046), the password has expired.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check with the system administrator for the time period when logging in is Advise the customer to obtain a valid password from the system administrator.
allowed.
0 2 7 - 5 8 7 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 4 - 0 4 7 R A P 0 2 7 - 5 8 8 , 0 2 7 - 5 8 9 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r s 3 R A P
027-587 SMB protocol error (4-047), the password must be changed. 027-588 SMB protocol error (4-048), the user account is disabled.
0 2 7 - 5 9 0 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 4 - 0 5 0 R A P 0 2 7 - 5 9 1 S M B Pr o t o c o l E r r o r 4 - 0 5 1 R A P
027-590 SMB protocol error (4-050), the user account has expired. 027-591 SMB protocol error (4-051), the user account is restricted. Blank password is not allowed.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to obtain a valid user account from the system administrator or request the Advise the customer to request the system administrator set a user password.
system administrator extend the validity period of the account.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Advise the customer to check that the domain of the destination mail address is not designated as
a prohibited domain.
0 2 7 - 7 0 1 D i s c o n n e c t e d N e t w o r k Ca b l e R A P 0 2 7 - 7 0 2 t o 0 2 7 - 7 0 9 Ce r t i fi c a t e fo r A d d r e s s e s E r r o r R A P
027-701 In external authentication, the disconnected cable is detected. 027-702 No certificate for the destination exists (before connection to the server).
Procedure 027-703 The certificate for the destination expired (before connection to the server).
Ensure the network cable is connected correctly. 027-704 The certificate for the destination is not reliable (before connection to the server).
027-705 The certificate for the destination existed on a list of revoked certificates (before connec-
tion to the server).
027-706 No machine certificate exists (before connection to the server).
027-707 The machine certificate expired (before connection to the server).
027-708 The machine certificate is not reliable (before connection to the server).
027-709 The certificate for the destination existed on a list of revoked certificates (before connec-
tion to the server).
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Store the correct certificate for the destination in the machine. Check the items that follow:
1. That the term for which the certificate is valid.
2. The machines time is correct.
b. Check the certification path for the destination certificate and import the necessary CA
certificate.
c. Store in this machine a destination certificate that is not on the list of revoked certificates.
d. Check that the mail address written on the machine certificate is the same as that set up on
the machine.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Enable S/MIME setting in the machine.
b. Register the sender certificate in the machine or change the mailer options so that the S/
MIME signature mails from the sender will be sent with the certificate.
c. Check that the signature bearer of the CA certificate is registered in the machine.
d. Check that the mail address written on the machine certificate is the same as that set up on
the machine.
2. Advise the customer that the sender needs to send a mail that is signed with a valid certificate
because the sender certificate has expired.
3. Advise the customer that the machine may be blocking the attacks.
4. Reload the software, GP 2.
5. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
0 2 7 - 7 1 7 N o M X Re c o r d a t D N S R A P 0 2 7 - 7 20 , 0 2 7 - 7 2 1 E x t en s io n S er ve r E r r o r R A P
027-717 An enquiry was sent to the DNS server for the MX record, but it cannot be obtained. 027-720 Server for application interface cannot be found during web service interface.
Procedure 027-721 Application interface destination during web service interface - not found.
Advise the customer to:
Procedure
1. Check with the DNS server administrator on the existence of DNS/MX record. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Check that the DNS server settings of the machine are correctly set. 1. Advise the customer to check that the DNS server address is correctly set. Check that the PC run-
ning the application interface is registered in DNS.
2. Reload the software, GP 2.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
0 2 7 - 7 2 2 E x t e n s i o n S e r v e r Ti m e o u t R A P 0 2 7 - 7 2 3 E x t e n s i o n S e r v e r A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Fa i l R A P
027-722 Application interface during web service interface - timeout. 027-723 Application interface during web service interface - authentication failure.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer: 1. Advise the customer to check the user name and password to be entered for creating a job flow.
a. That if a number of documents is specified for scanning, scan one document and store it. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
b. That when scanning and storing are successful, change the application interface timeout
value. If scanning and storing are not successful,
c. To check that the scan document can be uploaded from the PC browser. When uploading is
successful, change the application interface timeout value.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
0 2 7 - 7 2 4 , 7 2 5 , 7 2 6 E x t e n s i o n S e r v e r A c c e s s Fa i l R A P 0 2 7 - 7 2 7 E x t e n s i o n S e r v e r Pa r a m e t e r s R A P
027-724 Application interface during web service interface - access failure. 027-727 Application interface during web service - invalid parameter.
027-725 Application interface during web service interface - job operation failure. Procedure
027-726 Application interface during web service interface - unknown job status. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the parameters for creating a job flow.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
1. Advise the customer to check that the application interface is working correctly.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
02 7 - 7 2 8 E x t e n s io n S er ve r F il e E x c ee d e d R A P 0 2 7 - 7 3 0 S MT P M a i l D i v i s i o n E r r o r R A P
027-728 The number of files requested to be sent exceeded the maximum number of files that can 027-730 A mail was split in linking to the system.
be sent during Web service interface (this occurs when a single-page document is being stored).
Procedure
Procedure Advise the customer to increase the preset pagination value, or reduce the number of original pages
Perform the steps that follow: scanned.
1. Advise the customer to set a job so that the maximum number of files that can be sent will not
be exceeded.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
02 7 - 7 3 2 S er ve r A c c e s s E r r o r R A P 0 2 7 - 7 33 Se r ve r SS L E r ro r R A P
027-732 Job template server access error. 027-733 The SSL setting for the job template server did not become enabled.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check that the server disk is normal and has free space, and then retry the Advise the customer to check that the SSL setting for the job template server is enabled.
operation.
0 2 7 - 7 3 4 S e r v e r C e r t i fi c a t e E r r o r R A P 0 2 7 - 7 3 5 M a c h i n e S S L C o n fi g u r a t i o n E r r o r R A P
027-734 The SSL setting for the job template server did not become enabled. 027-735 When SSL transfer was instructed, the SSL setting of the machine is disabled.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to enable the SSL settings of the machine or specify HTTP as the transfer
protocol.
1. Using the HTTPS protocol, check whether the job template server is accessible from the PC.
2. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the job template server is registered in the machine.
3. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the job template server is valid. For example, check
that:
a. The certificate has not expired yet.
b. The time that is set in the machine is correct.
c. It is not in the discard list.
d. The certificate path of the SSL server certificate and import any necessary CA certificate.
4. If the certificate is not registered in the job template server, disable the machine certificate
validation.
0 2 7 - 7 3 6 M a c h i n e C e r t i fi c a t e E r r o r R A P 0 2 7 - 7 3 7 Te m p l a t e S e r v e r Re a d E r r o r R A P
027-736 When server certificate validation is instructed, the server certificate validation of the ma- 027-737 An error was received from the server to a FTP command ’TYPE A’, ’LIST’, or ’RETR’.
chine is disabled.
Procedure
Procedure Perform the steps that follow:
Advise the customer to enable the server certificate validation settings of the machine or disable
the server certificate validation setting during transfer. 1. Advise the customer to check that Read Authorization is established for the storage destination
server directory set as a resource.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
0 2 7 - 7 3 9 I n v a l i d Te m p l a t e S e r v e r Pa t h R A P 0 2 7 - 7 4 0 Te m p l a t e S e r v e r Lo g i n E r r o r R A P
027-739 An error was received from the server to the FTP command ’CWD’. 027-740 Login to the FTP Server failed.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the resource of the storage destination path from the client PC. 1. Advise the customer to check the user information:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 4. a. Set the log-in name and password in the job template file storage destination.
b. From some other PC connected to the network, check that they can log in with the relevant
account.
c. From a client PC, set a login name and password as a resource
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
0 2 7 - 7 4 1 Te m p l a t e S e r v e r Co n n e c t Fa i l R A P 0 2 7 - 7 4 2 H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fu l l R A P
027-741 Cannot connect to the job template pool server. 027-742 The HDD was full when writing to a local HDD job template or when writing temporary
work files.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to:
a. Check hat the network cable is connected correctly.
b. From the destination server, ping the machine. a. Wait a while then try again as scanned images may cause the HDD to be full.
c. Perform the ping test on the destination server from PSW. b. Delete the files in the HDD.
d. From a client PC, check that the FTP connection to the destination server is possible. 2. If the fault persists, perform the following steps:
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2. a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
b. Check the wiring between the controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7 and the HDD assembly, PL 3.2
Item 1. Ensure that all surface mounted modules on the controller PWB are securely
connected.
c. Initialize the hard disk. Refer to dC355 Initialize Hard Disk.
d. Perform GP 14, Special Boot Modes [HDD Initialization].
e. Install a new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
0 2 7 - 7 4 3 Te m p l a t e S e r v e r I n s ta l l E r r o r R A P 0 2 7 - 7 4 4 Te m p l a t e S e r v e r E r r o r 1 R A P
027-743 The address format of the job template pool server is incorrect. 027-744 An error occurred while calling the DNS resolution library.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the parameters related to the job template pool server. 1. Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS and whether the job template pool
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2. server domain name has been registered in the DNS.
2. Reload the software, GP 2.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
0 2 7 - 7 4 5 Te m p l a t e S e r v e r E r r o r 2 R A P 0 2 7 - 7 4 6 J o b Te m p l a t e Po o l S e r v e r N o t Re a d y R A P
027-745 The job template pool server address cannot be resolved (the DNS address is not set). 027-746 The port of the protocol specified in job template pool server settings has not started.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the DNS address or set the job template pool server address using IP 1. Advise the customer to start the port of the protocol (FTP client or SMB) specified in job tem-
address. plate pool server settings.
2. Reload the software, GP 2. 2. Reload the software, GP 2.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP. 3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
0 2 7 - 7 5 0 Fa x D o c u m e n t I n h i b i t e d R A P 0 2 7 - 7 5 1 J o b Te m p l a t e A n a l y s i s E r r o r R A P
027-750 Transfer instruction when internet fax transfer is prohibited, or scan and printer document 027-751 Instruction analysis error.
print instruction during interruption.
Procedure
Procedure Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to re-examine the contents of the instruction.
1. Advise the customer to change the transfer settings to receive internet fax. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
2. Reload the software, GP 2.
3. If the fault persists, perform the 016A Scan to Network Error Entry RAP.
0 2 7 - 7 5 2 Re q u i r e d U s e r E n t r y N o t E n t e r e d R A P 0 2 7 - 7 5 3 J o b F l o w S e r v i c e Re q u e s t D i s a b l e d R A P
027-752 With the required user entry not entered, the instruction to start the job was given. 027-753 Job is executed by instruction when the service is disabled.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to enable the service.
a. Not link the box to the instruction that requires user entry. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
b. Set preset values for the items in the instruction requiring user entry.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
0 2 7 - 7 5 4 J o b Fl o w S e r v i c e F i l e S i g n a t u r e M i s m a tc h R A P 0 2 7 - 7 5 7 E x t e n s i o n S e r v e r S S L Fa i l R A P
027-754 File signature settings mismatch in instruction. 027-757 Web application linkage during service linkage SSL access failed.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the system data setting of the XDW/PDF signature and the signa- 1. Advise the customer to:
ture setting that is specified in the instruction. If the system data setting is different from the
setting in the instruction, either change the instruction or change the system data. a. Check the server/network connection.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2. b. Check the communication route that can be reached.
c. Ping the DNS server.
d. Check if the CA certificate of the connection destination server is imported to the machine
by using the browser.
e. Check if the machine does not go through the proxy that SSL has the function to check the
communication details SSL.
f. Specify the machine as out of the SSL proxy target.
g. Check if the server supports the relevant encryption method.
h. Set the client certificate to the machine.
i. Import the client certificate to the machine and set to use as the client certificate.
j. Check the daylight saving time difference to see if the date/time of the machine is correct.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
0 2 7 - 7 5 8 Sy s t e m C r e d e n t i a l S e t t i n g E r r o r R A P 0 2 7 - 7 5 9 Re fe r e n c e S e r v e r Co n n e c t i o n E r r o r R A P
027-758 Login credential setting error at remote authentication LDAP. 027-759 Reference server connection fail at remote authentication LDAP.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the login name and password have been set correctly. 1. Check whether the machines network settings are set correctly.
2. Consult with the Network Administrator to check the authentication settings at the LDAP Server. 2. Consult with the network administrator to check the connection status from the machine to the
reference server.
0 2 7 - 7 6 0 X J T Co m m a n d Fa i l R A P 0 2 7 - 7 6 1 W e b Pr i n t T i m e o u t R A P
027-760 Incorrect command from XDOD client. 027-761 Although a web print job was received, the machine did not start printing on time.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. If on-demand print for multiple documents was instructed using the external access function, re-
duce the number of documents then retry it.
a. Check if the parameter setting specified in XDOD client is out of system specifications.
2. Either extend the print on demand print duration or set it to 0.
b. Check the XDOD client and controller versions.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
0 2 7 - 7 6 2 I l l e g a l We b Pr i n t J o b Ti c ke t R A P 0 2 7 - 7 6 3 A u d i t r o n C a n n o t Ve r i fy U s e r R A P
027-762 Although a web print job was received, the attached job execution ticket is incorrect. 027-763 The machine cannot check user info with the external accounting server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to repeat the print instruction. Advise the customer to:
1. Check if the external accounting server is working correctly.
2. Connect the cable correctly.
3. Set up the machine so that it can correctly communicate with the external accounting server.
0 2 7 - 7 6 4 A i r Pr i n t S c a n D a t a Tra n s fe r Fa i l R A P 0 2 7 - 7 6 5 H o s t N a m e S o l u t i o n E r r o r i n We b DAV R A P
027-764 The machine cannot check user info with the external accounting server. 027-765 DNS failed to resolve the specified host name.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check that network communication between the transfer destination AirPrint scan client and 1. Check that the scan document destination WebDAV server is registered in DNS.
the machine is available. 2. Check that the DNS server connection is good.
2. Check whether the AirPrint scan client has enough free capacity. 3. Check that the DNS server is correctly configured.
3. Check the network cable connection.
0 2 7 - 7 6 6 P r o x y N a m e S o l u t i o n E r r o r i n W e b DA V R A P 0 2 7 - 7 6 7 We b DAV S e r v e r S S L A c c e s s Fa i l R A P
027-766 DNS failed to resolve the proxy server name. 027-767 An error has occurred during the SSL/TLS connection.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the proxy server name that is configured on the machine is registered in DNS. 1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server.
2. Check that the DNS server connection is good. 2. Check the scan document SSL settings of the destination WebDAV server.
3. Check that the address of the DNS server is correctly configured. 3. Check the scan document destination WebDAV server name and server path name.
0 2 7 - 7 6 8 We b DAV S e r v e r Ce r t i fi c a t e Fa i l R A P 0 2 7 - 7 6 9 We b DAV S e r v e r A c c e s s Fa i l R A P
027-768 There is a problem with the SSL certificate of the server. 027-769 WebDAV server connection error.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. 1. Check the network cable connection.
2. Ensure the machine is registered. 2. Check the access from the PC to the Scan document destination WebDAV server.
3. Ensure the scan SSL server certificate of the document destination WebDAV server is correct. For 3. Ensure the correct network interface is selected.
example:
a. Check the expiration date.
b. Check that the machine time is correct.
c. Check that they are not on the disposal list.
d. Check the SSL server certificate of the certification path.
4. If the Scan document certificate to the destination WebDAV server is not registered, disable the
certificate validation of the machine.
0 2 7 - 7 7 2 , 7 7 4 , 7 7 6 S MT P S e r v e r E r r o r R A P 0 2 7 - 7 7 5 To o M a n y S MT P A d d r e s s e s R A P
027-772 The SMTP server refused the HELO command (after connection to the server). 027-775 The SMTP server refused the EHLO command (after connection to the server).
027-774 Unavailable letters were specified as a destination address (after connection to the Procedure
server).
Advise the customer to reduce the number of mail addresses.
027-776 The SMTP server refused the EHLO command (after connection to the server).
Procedure
Advise the customer to use only ASCII letters for the machine host name and destination address.
0 2 7 - 7 7 7 S MT P S e r v e r N o n S u p p o r t R A P 0 2 7 - 7 7 8 N o M o d e S p e c i fi e d b y S M T P - A U T H R A P
027-777 The SMTP server does not support SMTP-AUTH (after connection to the server). 027-778 The mode specified by SMTP-AUTH was not found (after connection to the server).
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to send mail without setting SMTP-AUTH. Advise the customer to contact the network administrator to check what SMTP authentication
method the server uses.
0 2 7 - 7 7 9 A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Fa i l u r e b y S MT P - A U T H R A P 0 2 7 - 7 8 0 We b DAV N e t w o r k I n t e r fa c e Fa i l R A P
027-779 Authentication fail (after connecting to the server). 027-780 The specified network interface can not be used.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to check if the authentication information (user name/password) has been set Advise the customer to select the network interface that can be used.
correctly.
0 2 7 - 7 8 1 W e b DA V S p o o l S i z e O v e r R A P 0 2 7 - 7 8 2 W e b DA V S e r v e r R e d i r e c t o r L i m i t R A P
027-781 Writing of scan data spool file failed because the disk is full. 027-782 Maximum number of WebDAV server redirections has occurred.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to split the scan data. Advise the customer to check the redirection settings of the WebDAV server.
0 2 7 - 7 8 3 W e b DA V U s e r A u t h e n t i c a t i o n R A P 0 2 7 - 7 8 4 W e b DA V P r o x y S e r v e r A u t h e n t i c a t i o n R A P
027-783 WebDAV server is not authenticated. 027-784 WebDAV proxy server authentication failure.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to check that the user name and password for the proxy server that was con-
figured on the machine are correct.
1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server.
2. Check the login user name and password.
3. Check the scan document destination WebDAV server name and server path name.
0 2 7 - 7 8 7 We b DAV F i l e N a m e D u p u l i c a t i o n Fa i l R A P 0 2 7 - 7 8 8 , 0 2 7 - 7 9 3 We b DAV Re q u e s t Fa i l R A P
027-787 Override is selected in the scan file name duplication when processing. 027-788 Bad request answered from WebDAV server.
Procedure 027-793 Error number 400 from the WebDAV server has been answered.
Advise the customer to set the processing of duplicated filenames at the time of scanning job exe-
cution to anything other than Stop the Job (Not Save). Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether access to the directory is possible.
2. Perform the operation again.
0 2 7 - 7 8 9 , 7 9 1 , 7 9 5 A c c e s s Fo r b i d d e n R A P 0 2 7 - 7 9 0 , 0 2 9 - 7 9 2 We b DAV F i l e N o t Fo u n d R A P
027-789 Access forbidden reply from WebDAV server. 027-790 WebDAV server not found.
027-791 WebDAV server method not allowed. 027-792 WebDAV server conflict.
027-795 WebDAV server not implemented. Procedure
Advise the customer to ensure that the WebDAV storage path and directory specified in the server
Procedure exist.
Advise the customer to:
1. Check the connection to the WebDAV server.
2. Check if read/write access in a file or folder in the specified place is set.
3. Check the specified file path.
0 2 7 - 7 9 4 We b DAV S e r v e r I n t e r n a l Fa i l R A P 0 2 7 - 7 9 6 E m a i l N o t Pr i n t e d R A P
027-794 WebDAV server internal error. 027-796 Email print control through user settings.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check that the WebDAV server is up and running. 1. Advise the customer to correct the settings, then repeat the operation.
2. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to specify the output destination that can be processed by the machine, 1. Advise the customer to select another document, then repeat the operation.
then repeat the operation. 2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, reload the software, GP 2.
0 2 7 - 7 9 9 W e b DA V S e r v e r I n s u f f i c i e n t S t o r a g e R A P
027-799 There is no free space in the storage location on the WebDAV server.
Procedure
Advise the customer to check whether or not there is free space in the storage location.
0 2 8 - 9 1 0 t o 0 2 8 - 9 1 3 Fu s i n g U n i t Fa i l u r e s R A P 0 2 8 - 9 1 6 t o 0 2 8 - 9 2 4 Tra y n S e t t i n g Fa i l R A P
The fault indicates that the fuser unit currently installed is unable to process the currently specified 028-916 Envelope Folder Tray Pause Detect Fail
paper type.
028-917 Stock File Name Fail
028-910 Wrong Fusing Unit Type Fail
028-918 Tray Setting Fail
028-911 Wrong Fusing Unit Mode Fail
028-919 Stock File Fail
028-912 Fusing Unit Lever Envelope Fail
028-920 Tray 1 Setting Fail
028-914 Wrong Fusing Unit Width Fail
028-921 Tray 2 Setting Fail
Procedure 028-922 Tray 3 Setting Fail
1. Verify the correct Genuine Xerox® CRU fuser is installed in the machine.
2. Change the settings in the machine UI for the correct paper type or tray. 028-923 Tray 4 Setting Fail
3. If the fault persists, install a new standard fuser. Refer to, Machine Consumables for the CRU 028-924 SMH Setting Fail
number for ordering.
Procedure
On the machine UI [Paper Supply] screen, complete the setting for [Trayn]. Or, press <C> at the De-
vice UI to cancel the print.
0 2 8 - 9 3 0 t o 0 2 8 - 9 3 1 Tra y n S e t Co n fi r m Wa i t Fa i l R A P 0 2 8 - 9 4 0 t o 0 2 7 - 9 4 4 Tra y n Ta b Co n fi r m Wa i t Fa i l R A P
028-930 Tray 1 Set Confirm Wait Fail. 028-940 Tray 1 Tab Confirm Wait Fail.
028-931 Tray 2 Set Confirm Wait Fail. 028-941 Tray 2 Tab Confirm Wait Fail.
028-932 Tray 3 Set Confirm Wait Fail. 028-942 Tray 3 Tab Confirm Wait Fail.
028-933 Tray 4 Set Confirm Wait Fail. 028-943 Tray 4 Tab Confirm Wait Fail.
028-934 SMH Set Confirm Wait Fail. 028-944 SMH Tab Confirm Wait Fail.
Procedure Procedure
Load the paper for the [Trayn]setting that is being displayed on the Device UI, pull out and reinsert Pull out [Trayn], check the order of 1 group of paper and close [Trayn]. Or, press <C> at the Device
[Trayn]. Or, press <C> at the Device UI to cancel the print. UI to cancel the print.
0 2 8 - 9 5 0 t o 0 2 8 - 9 5 4 Tra y n O f f l i n e Fa i l R A P 0 2 8 - 9 6 0 t o 0 2 8 - 9 6 4 Tra y n Pa p e r M i s m a t c h fo r Te m p o ra r y
028-950 Tray 1 Offline Fail. Stock RAP
028-951 Tray 2 Offline Fail. 028-960 Tray 1 Paper Mismatch for Temporary Stock.
028-952 Tray 3 Offline Fail. 028-961 Tray 2 Paper Mismatch for Temporary Stock.
028-953 Tray 4 Offline Fail. 028-962 Tray 3 Paper Mismatch for Temporary Stock.
028-954 SMH Offline Fail. 028-963 Tray 4 Paper Mismatch for Temporary Stock.
028-964 SMH Paper Mismatch for Temporary Stock.
Procedure
On the machine UI [Paper Supply] screen, enable the setting for [Trayn]. Or, press <C> at the Device Procedure
UI to cancel the print.
On the machine UI [Paper Supply] screen, set the [Trayn] information that is displayed on the De-
vice UI. Or, press <C> at the Device UI to cancel the print.
0 2 8 - 9 8 8 , 0 2 8 - 9 8 9 Tra y 5 Fa u l t s R A P
028-988 Tray 5 Size Mismatch.
028-989 Tray 5 Out Of Place.
028-990 Tray 5 Size Mismatch.
Procedure
1. Check the Paper Guides and load paper of the correct size in the tray.
2. If the fault persists, refer to the GP 21, How to Check a Sensor.
0 3 0 - 9 1 0 Tra y 5 E m p t y R A P 0 3 3 - 3 1 0 Fa x C h a r g e Fu n c t i o n Fa i l R A P
Tray 5 is empty. Sub-System. The Fax send billing function was turned ON although multiple lines are installed.
Procedure Procedure
1. Load the correct paper for the print operation into tray 5, then continue. Turn off the fax send billing function or change to a single-line installation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor. Verify operation of the MSI lift up
and no paper sensors, PL 80.16 Item 12.
3. Install new components as required:
a. MSI lift up sensor, PL 80.16 Item 12.
b. MSI no paper sensor, PL 80.16 Item 12.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
3. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 3 - 3 2 8 t o 0 3 3 - 3 3 6 Fa i l e d t o I n i t i a l i z e Fa x Lo g R A P 0 3 3 - 3 3 7 , 0 3 3 - 3 3 8 Fa x C a r d M i s m a t c h R A P
033-337 FaxCard Mismatch.
033-328 Failed to Initialize Fax Log.
033-338 Illegal Type of FaxBox.
033-329 Fax Process Error.
Procedure
033-330 FoIP Unrecoverable Error. 1. Verify the fax module kit, part number 497K20240, is the correct fax module for the PrimeLink
C9065/C9070 machine.
033-331 FoIP Controller Init Fail.
2. Install the correct fax module kit 497K20240.
033-332 FoIP Cont Not Respond When System Is Booting.
033-333 FoIP Cont Not Respond When System Is sleeping.
033-334 Can Not Send A Message To FoIP CONT.
033-335 Illegal Fault Code Notice.
033-336 Access To A Non-mounted Channel.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 3 - 3 3 9 Fa x c 2 N o t Re s p o n d W h e n Sy s t e m I s S l e e p i n g R A P 0 3 3 - 3 4 0 P f l i t e _ Fa x _ Lo g _ W r i t e _ Fa i l R A P
Sleep transition process has failed. The Pflite communication log write function returned an error.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Turn OFF the power, make sure that the Control Panel has turned OFF, and then turn ON the
power again.
2. Enter Diagnostics, then enter dC355 Initialize Hard Disk. If the problem persists, enter dC301
NVM Initialization.
0 3 3 - 3 4 1 I l l e g a l Ty p e O f Fa x B o x R A P 0 3 3 - 3 6 3 Fa x Co n t r o l R A P
Something other than the fax unit, PL 20.1, is connected. There was an controller reset when the FAX PWB did not respond.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the fax unit, PL 20.1, is connected to the machine and active. Connect the fax unit if not 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
connected, or remove any incorrect fax unit from the machine. 2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 2. 4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
4. Install new components as required: 5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
a. Fax PWB. PL 20.2 Item 11.
b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
0 3 3 - 5 0 0 N o C S a f t e r R S Re q R A P 033-501 N o P IX D ata R AP
CS of the modem did not turn on in response to RS request. Image length of received fax document was [0].
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested. 2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated. 3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 2. 4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13. 5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 3 - 5 0 2 Po s t M e s s a g e Re s e n d E x c e e d e d R A P 0 3 3 - 5 0 3 , 0 3 3 - 5 0 4 , 0 3 3 - 5 0 5 Fa x T ( n ) Ti m e o u t R A P
Sent post message command three times, but no response. 033-503 T1 Timeout.
0 3 3 - 5 0 6 D C N Re c e i v e R A P 0 3 3 - 5 0 7 D e s t i n a t i o n H a s N o Re c e i v i n g A b i l i t y R A P
Received DCN (disconnect message). Fax receiving machine unable to receive fax.
Procedure Procedure
Check the status of the machine sending the fax, and retry fax job. 1. Verify the receiving fax machine is ready to receive.
2. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
0 3 3 - 5 0 8 D e s t i n a t i o n Po l l i n g E r r o r R A P 0 3 3 - 5 0 9 D C S / N S S Re - t r a n s m i s s i o n E r r o r R A P
Fax message is not ready to be sent in response to polling request. DCS/NSS resend trials reached the maximum number.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, then resend the fax. 1. Verify the status of fax receiving machine, then resend the fax once ready.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 1 0 Fa l l b a c k E r r o r R A P 0 3 3 - 5 1 1 DT C / N S C Re s e n d E r r o r R A P
Received FTT at 2400 bps No response after third DTC/NSC send.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the status of fax receiving machine, then resend the fax once ready. 1. Verify the status of fax receiving machine, then resend the fax once ready.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 1 2 Re m o t e H a s N o Re l a y R A P 0 3 3 - 5 1 3 Re m o t e H a s N o M a i l b o x R A P
Fax machine on the other end does not support relay broadcasting Fax machine on the other end does not Mailbox capability
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
03 3 -5 1 4 Ca rr ie r Dow n De t e c te d RA P 0 3 3 - 5 1 6 E O R Re c e i v e R A P
Phone line carrier down. Received EOR-Q.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 1 7 E C M P h a s e C F l a g Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 3 - 5 1 8 Re m o t e C a n n o t Re c e i v e S U B R A P
ECM Phase C Flag Timeout Receiving machine does not support SUB
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
03 3 -5 1 9 PT S Ha s No S EP Ca pa bi l it y RA P 0 3 3 - 5 2 0 Re m o t e C a n n o t Re c e i v e Pa s s w o r d R A P
Receiving machine does not support SEP Receiving machine does not support PWB/SID
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 2 9 R T N Re c e i v e R A P 0 3 3 - 5 3 0 DTM F I l l e g a l Pr o c e d u r e E r r o r R A P
0 3 3 - 5 3 1 DTM F Pr o c e d u r e E r r o r R A P 0 3 3 - 5 3 2 I l l e g a l C o m m a n d Re c e i v e d R A P
Communication cancelled due to DTMF Procedure Error
Procedure
Procedure 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 3 3 T . 3 0 Pr o t o c o l E r r o r R A P 0 3 3 - 5 3 4 U n s u p p o r t e d Fu n c t i o n a t R e m o t e R A P
Procedure Machine on the other end does not support Remote Sorting.
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 3 5 D C N Re c e i v e a t P h a s e B S e n d R A P 0 3 3 - 5 3 6 R i n g S t o p b e fo r e Fa x D e v i c e Re l e a s e R A P
Received DCN (disconnect message) in response to Phase B command (DCS/NSS/NSC/DTC) A collision of incoming call and outgoing call.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 3 7 I n / O u t Co n f l i c t R A P 0 3 3 - 5 3 8 Fa x S e n d i n g I m a g e Pr o c e s s E r r o r R A P
Fax send was canceled due to incoming call/outgoing call conflict
Procedure
Procedure 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 3 9 Fa x Re c e i v e I m a g e Pr o c e s s E r r o r R A P 0 3 3 - 5 4 0 Fa x Pr i n t i n g I m a g e Pr o c e s s E r r o r R A P
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 4 1 N o D e s t i n a t i o n S p e c i fi e d R A P 0 3 3 - 5 4 2 I l l e g a l C h a n n e l Re q u e s t R A P
Unable to initiate call because no auto dial specified Fax service was requested for a channel which is not present on Fax PWB.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 4 5 T 0 Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 3 - 5 4 6 N o D i a l To n e R A P
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 4 7 A b o r t D u r i n g Tra n s m i s s i o n R A P 0 3 3 - 5 4 8 C a n n o t Pe r fo r m M a n u a l S e n d R A P
The fax job was intentionally aborted.
No line available for manual fax send.
Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. Procedure
Verify dial tone on the send machine, then resend.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 4 9 Fa x S e r v i c e D i s a b l e d R A P 0 3 3 - 5 5 0 C a n n o t D i s a b l e Fa x S e r v i c e R A P
Fax service was disabled because of shortage of memory, too many jobs in queue, or system fail The machine attempted to enter Diag mode but could not because fax transmission is in process
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 5 1 Fa x I / F E r r o r R A P 0 3 3 - 5 5 2 G 3 Re c e i v e E r r o r R A P
Some operation interrupted the fax job before the fax transmission was completed While G3 fax is receiving image data, the number of detected Phase-C errors exceeded the specified
number.
Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. Procedure
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 5 3 N o M a i l b o x / Re l a y R A P 0 3 3 - 5 5 4 W r o n g Pa s s w o r d / Re c e i v e R A P
F code sent from the machine on the other end requests a function which this fax machine does Received Fax message without password or password not matched. Communication disconnected
not have. because of Direct Mail prevention function.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 5 5 I n c o r r e c t M a c h i n e Pa s s w o r d R A P 0 3 3 - 5 5 6 W r o n g Pa s s w o r d / S e n d R A P
The password entered from this machine did not match password received from other machine. The machine on the other end did not send remote ID, or mismatch of fax send password and re-
mote ID
Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. Procedure
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 6 3 W r o n g Pa p e r S i z e R A P 0 3 3 - 5 6 4 Fa x Po w e r Fa i l R A P
The available paper does not match the size of the faxed document Power discontinuity error occurred during communication. The machine is powered off, or system is
reset.
Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
Auto dial data contains invalid data. No response from FCM within a specified time during fax transmission.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 6 9 I m a g e D i r e c t i o n Co n f l i c t R A P 0 3 3 - 5 7 0 Re t r y O v e r f l o w R A P
Orientation of image data does not match orientation of paper from paper source. The number of retries exceeded the specified number.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
Unauthorized domain was selected when selecting destination. A message to a channel that is not installed is received. (invalid DI)
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 7 5 M o d e m Po l a r i t y I n v e r s i o n D e t e c t e d R A P 0 3 3 - 5 7 6 I n a c c u ra t e D i a l D a t a R A P
Polarity Inversion has been detected.
Dial data is invalid.
Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 8 0 M i s s i n g Vo I P G a t e w a y R A P 0 3 3 - 5 8 1 A c c e s s A u t h e n t i c a t i o n Fa i l u r e R A P
VoIP gateway, which corresponds to the entered phone number, does not exist. SIP call connection was rejected because it failed to get authentication.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
SIP connection was rejected due to inconsistency in capability information. Destination of SIP communication is temporarily short of resources and rejected connection.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 8 4 S I P Re q u e s t T i m e o u t R A P 0 3 3 - 5 8 5 S I P Re q u e s t E r r o r R A P
SIP communication ended by timeout. Other error occurred during SIP communication.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
The IPv4 address could not be determined, or, the machine failed to get an IP address through Unable to establish T38 session (including RTP session).
DHCP.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 8 8 T 3 8 Pa c k e t L o s t R A P 0 3 3 - 5 8 9 T 3 8 M a l fo r m e d Pa c ke t Re c e i v e d R A P
Detected a unrecoverable loss of T38 packet data. Received T38 data contains invalid content (ASN.1 decode error, etc.).
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 5 9 2 Fo I P I n t e r n a l Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 3 - 5 9 3 C a n c e l e d b y Re m o t e Pe e r R A P
Received a request from the machine on the other end to cancel SIP session.
A timeout is reported, caused by a factor which does not require to send a Timeout Notification. Ei-
ther receiving image data ended as timeout or FoIP (FAX Over Internet Protocol) internal processing Procedure
ended as timeout. Advise the customer to verify the receiving machine is available, then resend the fax message.
Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 0 0 T 1 Ti m e o u t Fa i l 0 3 3 - 7 0 1 Re t r y T i m e o u t R A P
T1 timeout has occurred when sending or at Phase B and later when receiving. The communication did not end normally within the retry timeout time.
Procedure Procedure
1. If the occurrence is at sending, repeat the operation. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. If the occurrence is at receiving, it could be due to the sender canceling the transmission while it 2. Advise the customer to verify the receiving fax is available, then resend the fax job.
is in progress:
a. Check the remote machine, then repeat the operation.
b. Check the line condition and a dailtone is available.
3. If the fault persists, perform, GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
Procedure Procedure
Request the customer to verify the user has access rights to the mailbox requested. Advise the customer to verify the document requested is present, then resend.
0 3 3 - 7 1 1 Pa g e E r r o r R A P 0 3 3 - 7 1 2 , 0 3 3 - 7 1 3 Fa x Co n t r o l R A P
Specified page does not exist, or, specified page has data error. Memory is at maximum limit.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, switch on the machine, GP 19, then rerun the fax job. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Advise the customer to reduce the pages/fax, then
resend.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. Information only. This error occurs during maintenance system operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 1 6 N o S p e c i fi e d M a i l b o x R A P 0 3 3 - 7 1 7 I n c o r r e c t Pa s s w o r d R A P
The specified mailbox does not exist. Verification of the specified password failed.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify machine is connected to dedicated analog line (not ISDN).
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. Verify that no password is set:
a. Enter Admin mode, GP 11.
b. Select System Settings.
c. Select System Settings again.
d. Select FAX Mode Settings.
e. Select Local Terminal Settings.
f. Check that Machine Password is (not set).
If it is (not set), select close/exit as required. If a password is set, continue.
g. Select Machine Password and select Change Settings.
h. Select Backspace as required to delete the password.
i. Select Save.
j. Select Close/Exit as required.
k. Select Close again.
l. Select Close again.
m. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to resend the job. Advise the customer to resend the job.
0 3 3 - 7 2 0 D o c u m e n t C r e a t i o n Fa i l e d R A P 0 3 3 - 7 2 1 Fa x Pa g e C r e a t i o n Fa i l e d R A P
The specified document cannot be generated.
The specified page cannot be created.
Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. Procedure
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. Advise customer to cancel the job and resend.
0 3 3 - 7 2 2 Fa x I m m e d i a t e S e n d S t o r e J o b C a n c e l l e d 0 3 3 - 7 2 4 Fa x Re c e i v e M e m o r y O v e r f l o w R A P
IIT failure (document jam or stored sheet count exceeded) or stop request was detected while send-
ing Fax immediately. The total data amount of received image data exceeded the upper limit of the image data amount
that can be received for one system data communication.
OR
Cancellation is performed only for Scan operation. The document that has already been scanned Procedure
will continue to be sent. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Advise the customer to reduce the number of pages/fax, then resend.
Procedure
Repeat the operation.
0 3 3 - 7 2 5 I n s u f fi c i e n t H D D S p a c e R A P 0 3 3 - 7 2 6 Fa x D u p l e x Pr i n t E r r o r R A P
The HDD was full during fax receive, format or report creation. Duplex printing of received fax document is disabled.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Enable duplex printing for received faxes.
2. Advise the customer to reduce the number of files on the HDD to free up space, then resent the
fax job.
0 3 3 - 7 2 7 C a n n o t Ro t a t e I m a g e R A P 0 3 3 - 7 2 8 A u t o Pr i n t Ca n c e l e d R A P
Formatting for fax auto printing was aborted because a command for fax manual printing was giv-
Rotation is not available when receiving Fax (insufficient memory). en during the operation.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. After the manually requested printing job completes the machine will automatically recover print-
ing the job. No action is required.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 3 2 Pr i n t J o b C a n c e l e d R A P 0 3 3 - 7 3 3 Fa x D o c u m e n t N u m b e r R A P
Stored jobs are deleted in Forced Polling. As there was a print job during Forced Polling, the job was
canceled. The job document number related to the job could not be obtained.
Procedure Procedure
This is an error during maintenance system operation. No action is required. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 3 4 Fa x Pr i n t S u s p e n s i o n R A P 0 3 3 - 7 3 5 Fa x M e m o r y A l l o c a t e Ti m e o u t R A P
Fax Print and Fax Auto Report were started at the same time. An error occurred in reserving fax receive memory.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 3 6 I n t e r n e t FA X O f f Ra m p Fa i l R A P 0 3 3 - 7 3 7 Fa x C a r d J o b C a n c e l e d R A P
Fax was not transferred as the data capacity exceeded the threshold value while the Fax Transfer The Fax Controller detected a failure and could not continue processing the job.
Prohibition Function was activated, based on the data capacity of the Internet Fax Off Ramp.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
Advise the customer to cancel the job and resend. No action is required because this is limitation 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
specification violation by user setting.
0 3 3 - 7 3 8 J B I G I n fo r m a t i o n Fa i l R A P 0 3 3 - 7 4 0 Fa x I m m e d i a t e Re c e i v e Pr i n t C a n c e l e d R A P
The Fax Controller detected an error in JBIG data during coding/decoding of the JBIG data. The user canceled immediate printing upon receiving.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 4 1 Fa x Pa g e Re a d O p e n Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 3 - 7 4 2 Fa x Pa g e Re a d C l o s e Ti m e o u t R A P
When transferring image data to the FAX PWB, the conditions for sending the response to the FAX • When transferring image data to the Fax Card, the conditions for sending the response to the
PWB did not match. Fax Card did not match.
This often occurs when the HD free area is equal to or less than the HD capacity immediate
Procedure threshold (820-053) during immediate send operation.
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. When the remaining memory is low at approx. 10%, delete the images stored in the HD to se-
cure the HD capacity and perform the same operation again.
Set the HD capacity immediate threshold (820-053) to a larger value if this occurred during im-
mediate send operation.
3. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 4 3 Fa x Pa g e W r i t e O p e n Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 3 - 7 4 4 Fa x Pa g e W r i t e C l o s e Ti m e o u t R A P
When transferring image data to the FAX PWB, the conditions for sending the response to the FAX When transferring image data to the FAX PWB, the conditions for sending the response to the FAX
PWB did not match. PWB did not match.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 4 5 Fa x D a t a W r i t e Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 3 - 7 4 6 Fa x D a ta Re a d Ti m e o u t R A P
When transferring image data to the FAX PWB, the conditions for sending the response to the FAX When transferring image data to the FAX PWB, the conditions for sending the response to the FAX
PWB did not match. PWB did not match.
Procedure Procedure
1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. 2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 4 7 Fa x S e r v i c e S t a r t R A P 0 3 3 - 7 4 8 Fa x S e r v i c E I l l e g a l S e q u e n c e R A P
During Service Sequencing, a message indicating that the operation was not allowed in Sequencing
When requesting to start the service from the FAX PWB, the job could not be created due to causes was received from the Fax Card.
such as job number overflow.
Procedures
Procedure Repeat the operation.
Advise the customer to request a re-resend.
0 3 3 - 7 4 9 Fa x C a r d M e m o r y E r r o r R A P 0 3 3 - 7 5 0 Fa x Fo r m a t E r r o r R A P
During Fax formatting, the extended image data is larger than the memory reserved.
During formatting, when image data was retrieved from the Fax Card, even though the image data
Procedure was determined to be free from error, extension failed.
No action necessary since the job failed due to insufficient extended memory and it can be recov-
ered using the encoding method that can be stored in the extended memory. Advise the customer Procedure
to cancel the job and resend. 1. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the requested operation.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 5 1 A c t i v i t y Re p o r t S u s p e n d e d R A P 0 3 3 - 7 5 5 Fa x Pr i n t i n g i s C a n c e l e d R A P
When a communication management report occurred at a print prohibited time period, the ma-
chine just goes into sleep mode and the report output is postponed. Fax document printing is canceled as fax service is inoperative.
Procedure Procedure
No action is necessary as it will automatically restart after exiting the print prohibited time period. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Check the fault history report for faults with chain-link [133-xxx] or [134-xxx]. Follow the RAP
procedure for the relevant fault code.
3. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
0 3 3 - 7 9 0 Fa x Co n t r o l R A P 0 3 3 - 7 9 1 Fa x Co n t r o l R A P
The FAX PWB Re-dial Wait Status was set without calculating the number of re-dial attempts. The number of re-dial attempts was calculated and FAX PWB Re-dial Wait Status was set.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to cancel the job and resend. Advise the customer to cancel the job and resend.
0 3 3 - 7 9 2 Fa x Co n t r o l R A P
The RCC Service was immediately terminated.
Procedure
Advise the customer to cancel the job and resend.
0 3 4 - 2 1 1 S l o t 1 B o a r d Fa i l u r e R A P 0 3 4 - 2 1 2 S l o t 2 B o a r d Fa i l u r e R A P
Failure was detected on the Fax PWB. Failure was detected on the AG3 PWB.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, the switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, the switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Upgrade the Software, GP 2. 2. Upgrade the Software, GP 2.
3. Perform Fax Diagnostics, GP 13. 3. Perform Fax Diagnostics, GP 13.
4. Verfiy the fax PWB, PL 20.2 Item 11, is fully seated into the riser PWB, PL 20.2 Item 13. 4. Verfiy the AG3 PWB, PL 20.2 Item 12, is fully seated into the riser PWB, PL 20.2 Item 13.
5. Install new components, in order, as required: 5. Install new components, in order, as required:
a. Fax PWB, PL 20.2 Item 11. a. AG3 PWB, PL 20.2 Item 12.
b. Riser PWB, PL 20.2 Item 13. b. Riser PWB, PL 20.2 Item 13.
c. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. c. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
034-500 Dial Error RAP 034-501 Selected Channel Dial Error RAP
There is incorrect information in the dial data (Recipient telephone number). The specified channel is not installed.
Procedure Procedure
1. Check the recipient fax number, then perform the operation again. 1. Ask customer to verify that the specified channel is installed, then repeat the operation.
0 3 4 - 5 0 5 Fa x Wo r k M e m o r y E x c e e d e d R A P 0 3 4 - 5 0 6 U n s u p p o r t e d Fu n c t i o n a t R e m o t e R A P
Transmission exceeded memory capacity. A send error is detected in the Recipients Print Sets function when the receiving Fax does not sup-
port remote collating and copying.
Procedure
Advise the customer to reduce the file size or number of pages, then repeat the operation. Procedure
Ask customer to reconfigure the job and resend.
0 3 4 - 5 0 7 Pa s s w o r d C h e c k E r r o r R A P 0 3 4 - 5 0 8 Tra n s m i s s i o n C a n c e l e d v i a DTM F R A P
• The password is incorrect. The Fax controller sent a reject command signal and stopped the transmission.
• An error in the mailbox number is detected.
• No documents for polling are found.
Procedure
1. Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
Procedure 2. Ask customer to allow a 5 minute recovery time and then resend.
1. Advise customer to check if the password, mailbox number, or document for valid polling. 3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 4. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
3. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested. 5. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
4. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated. 6. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 2. 7. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
6. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 4 - 5 0 9 DTM F I l l e g a l Pr o c e d u r e R A P 0 3 4 - 5 1 0 DTM F Pr o c e d u r e E r r o r R A P
The Fax controller stopped the transmission after receiving the invalid procedure signal from the re- The Fax controller stopped the transmission after receiving the reject command signal from the re-
ceiving Fax. ceiving Fax.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested. 2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated. 3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 2. 4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13. 5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 4 - 5 1 1 U n a b l e t o S e n d F i l e a t Re m o t e R A P 0 3 4 - 5 1 2 D e t e c t E n d l e s s Lo o p R A P
The remote machine does not support the file transfer function. An infinite loop was detected at the receiving Fax relay broadcast.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested. 2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated. 3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 2. 4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13. 5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 4 - 5 1 3 Re c e i v e C o m m a n d E r r o r R A P 0 3 4 - 5 1 4 Re q u e s t e d Fu n c t i o n U n s u p p o r t e d R A P
The Fax controller received an illegal command from the receiving Fax during remote maintenance. The Fax controller received a remote maintenance request from the receiving Fax but the Fax con-
troller does not support this function.
Procedure
Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). Procedure
Check Fax setup.
Ask customer to cancel the job and then resend.
Ask customer to cancel the job and then resend.
034-520 No. of Services Exceeded RAP 034-521 Internal I/F Error RAP
The number of services exceeded the limit. Service designated with SI does not exist.
Procedure Procedure
1. Ask customer to reduce the number of selections and then resend. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
3. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested. 3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
4. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated. 4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 2. 5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
6. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
6. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13. 5. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
6. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 4 - 5 2 4 U n a b l e To C a n c e l O p e ra t i o n R A P 0 3 4 - 5 2 5 S p e c i fi e d C h a i n - L i n k N o t E x i s t R A P
The service cannot be prohibited because it was in operation. The Chain-Link does not exist.
Procedures Procedure
Alloow time for the process to complete, then rerun the operation. Enter the correct Chain-Link number.
Procedure Procedure
Enter the Chain-Link number within the range. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
3. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
5. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 4 - 5 2 8 C a n n o t Pe r fo r m M a n u a l S e n d R A P 0 3 4 - 5 2 9 D o c u m e n t Pa p e r S i z e R A P
A manual transmission was requested during dialing. When confirming and receiving print jobs, the jobs cannot be printed when the document size does
not match the paper size.
Procedure
1. Cancel the current operation, then resend. If the fault persists: Procedure
1. Verify the correct paper is loaded and the correct tray assigned for the operation requested,
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. then resend. If the fault persists:
b. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
c. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
b. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the job requested.
d. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
c. Verify all harnesses between the FAX unit and the controller PWB and fully seated.
e. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
d. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
e. If the fault persists, perform FAX Diagnostics, GP 13.
0 3 4 - 5 3 0 DTM F I / F Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 4 - 5 5 0 W r i t e t o Fa x Ca r d - R O M E r r o r D e t e c t i o n R A P
DTMF I/F Time-out is detected when an operation did not occur within the specified time. An error has occurred during the process of writing data to the Fax Card-ROM. During Download.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). Retry job. If retry failed, replace the Fax Card-ROM and perform download again.download
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 0 0 G C P Lo c k - G 3 D i c e p B u sy - Co d e C h a n g R A P 0 3 4 - 7 0 1 S o f t w a r e Re s e t R A P
-GCP lock Date task noRTC ACK). Hardware failure, software I/F error.-G3 Dicep not changed to idle Software Reset.
status, causing timeout.-CODEC hang-up.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Power OFF/ON
Power OFF/ON
Procedure
Procedure • Verify software version, if required, upgrade to the latest version.
• Verify software version, if required, upgrade to the latest version. • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing the UI.
the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Replace the FAX PWB.
• Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 0 6 I S D N L a y e r 1 S t o p p e d - Po w e r O f f R A P 0 3 4 - 7 0 7 F R M R Re c e i v e d R A P
Layer 1 is deactivated with the power off. There is an internal fax communication error during preparation to transmit the fax.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 0 8 I l l e g a l Fr a m e Re c e i v e d N ( R ) R A P 0 3 4 - 7 0 9 I l l e g a l Fr a m e Re c e i v e d R A P
There is an internal fax communication error during preparation to transmit the fax. There is an internal fax communication error during preparation to transmit the fax.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 1 0 D L L i n k E s t a b l i s h m e n t Re c e i v e d R A P 0 3 4 - 7 1 1 Wa i t i n g fo r L i n k Ti m e o u t R A P
There is an internal fax communication error during preparation to transmit the fax. Fax controller is waiting for a data link time-out.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the self-terminal status and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 1 4 L i n e D i s c o n n e c t e d - Ti m e o u t T 3 0 5 R A P 0 3 4 - 7 1 5 L i n e D i s c o n n e c t e d - Ti m e o u t 3 0 8 2 R A P
There is a wait release time-out. There is a wait release complete time-out.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 1 6 Co n n e c t i o n Ti m e o u t ( T 3 1 3 ) R A P 0 3 4 - 7 1 7 Re s u m e T i m e o u t R A P
There is a connection time-out. There is an internal fax communication error during preparation to transmit the fax.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the self-terminal status and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI.
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Replace the FAX PWB.
• Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 2 0 Ti m e o u t ( 6 0 s , T 3 3 0 , 3 0 9 , 3 0 1 , 3 1 0 ) R A P 0 3 4 - 7 2 1 Fo r m a t , Co n t e n t s E r r o r R A P
There is an internal fax communication error during preparation to transmit the fax. Upper layer primitive format error, Content error.
• 60sec Card Timer Timeout
Initial Actions
• T.330 Timeout (Response Message Timeout)
Power OFF/ON
• T.309 Timeout (Link Resetting Error)
• T.301 Timeout (Response Message Timeout) Procedure
• T.310 Timeout (Call, Response Message Timeout) • Verify software version, if required, upgrade to the latest version.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
Procedure
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. the UI.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
the UI.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Replace the FAX PWB.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 2 2 S u s p e n s i o n Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 4 - 7 2 3 N o Ti m e r A s s i g n e d R A P
There is an internal fax communication error during preparation to transmit the fax. No assigned time.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the self-terminal status and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 2 6 H D 8 1 5 0 1 I / F B u f fe r B u sy R A P 0 3 4 - 7 2 7 N o Re p l y fo r 3 s e c . fo r 1 3 0 0 H z R A P
The I/F buffer is busy. No response over 3 sec. at 1300Hz incoming call.
034-728 Invalid Destination RAP 034-729 Line Disconnect, In-Channel PB Send RAP
Calling is disabled due to wrong dial data. The line was disconnected when sending In-channel PB.
0 3 4 - 7 3 0 I n a n d O u t C a l l Co n f l i c t R A P 0 3 4 - 7 3 1 Fa x N e t w o r k D i s c o n n e c t e d R A P
There is a conflict between incoming and outgoing calls The network disconnected the Fax setup.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 3 6 W r o n g N o t i c e fr o m FA X N e t w o r k R A P 0 3 4 - 7 3 7 I n c o m i n g C a l l Re s p o n s e E r r o r R A P
The Fax network sent the wrong notice. The control failed during call response.
Procedure Procedure
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 3 8 La ye r 1 S ta r t U p E r r o r R A P 0 3 4 - 7 3 9 L a y e r 1 N o t Sy n c h r o n i z e d R A P
There is a Layer 1 start up or activation error. Layer 1 synchronization is lost.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 4 0 Tra n s m i s s i o n o f Fra m e E r r o r R A P 0 3 4 - 7 4 1 U n a b l e t o S e n d Fr a m e R A P
There is a frame transmission error. There is a frame send error.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 4 2 Fr a m e S e n d E r r o r R A P 0 3 4 - 7 4 3 A b n o r m a l Fr a m e - S e n d i n g D M A R A P
A frame send error is detected. When sending frames, the DMA (Dynamic Memory Access) was abnormally terminated.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 4 4 U n a c c e p ta b l e C h a n n e l R A P 0 3 4 - 7 4 5 O u tg o i n g Ca l l t o C h a n n e l S e t R A P
An incorrect channel was terminated. A call is initiated to the configured channel.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 4 8 S p e c i fi e d L i n e C a n n o t b e U s e d R A P 0 3 4 - 7 4 9 N e t w o r k Co n g e s t i o n E r r o r R A P
The specified line can not be used. There is a network busy error.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 5 2 D e s t i n a t i o n Te r m i n a l B u sy R A P 0 3 4 - 7 5 3 D e s t i n a t i o n N o t Re s p o n d i n g R A P
The receiving Fax is busy. The receiving Fax is not responding.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 5 4 N o Re s p o n s e f r o m D e s t i n a t i o n R A P 0 3 4 - 7 5 5 D e s t i n a t i o n Re j e c t i n g C a l l R A P
The receiving Fax is not responding. The receiving Fax refused the call.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 5 8 I n c o r r e c t D e s t i n a t i o n Fa x D i a l N o . R A P 0 3 4 - 7 5 9 N o R e l a y N e t w o r k Ro u t e R A P
The destination Fax number is invalid or incorrect. There is a network error.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 6 0 N o L i n e To D e s t i n a t i o n R A P 0 3 4 - 7 6 1 I n c o r r e c t Fo r m a t D e s t i n a t i o n Fa x N o . R A P
There is no line or route to the destination. The Fax number format is invalid.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 6 2 Fa c i l i t y Re j e c t e d R A P 0 3 4 - 7 6 3 Co m m u n i c a t i o n C a p a b i l i t y D i s a l l o w e d R A P
There is a problem with the destination. Fax communication with the receiving Fax is not authorized.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 6 4 C o m m u n i c a t i o n C a p a b i l i t y N o t C o n fi g u r e d R A P 0 3 4 - 7 6 5 Fe a t u r e L i m i t E r r o r R A P
Communication capability is not configured. There is a feature limit error.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 6 8 Re s t r i c t e d D i g i ta l I n fo r m a t i o n O n l y R A P 0 3 4 - 7 6 9 E r r o r b y S e r v i c e , Fe a t u r e R A P
Restricted digital information is insufficient for Fax operation. There is a feature error.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 7 0 Re p l y t o S t a t u s Q u e r y R A P 0 3 4 - 7 7 1 A c c e s s I n fo r m a t i o n D i s c a r d e d R A P
There is a reply and response to status query. Access information was discarded.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 7 2 Fa x Co n n e c t i o n E r r o r R A P 0 3 4 - 7 7 3 I n v a l i d D i a l N u m b e r S p e c i fi e d R A P
There is an internal connection error. An invalid Fax number was dialed.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Ask customer to verify the Fax number and resend.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
the UI. • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. the UI.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 7 6 I n s u f fi c i e n t Re q u i r e d I n fo r m a t i o n R A P 0 3 4 - 7 7 7 U n d e fi n e d M e s s a g e Ty p e R A P
A required information element is missing. An undefined type of message was received.
Procedure Procedure
1. Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
2. Advise the customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
3. Check the fax line cable or Ethernet cable are fully seated in the machine. Repair or replace any • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
damaged components.
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
4. Verify the machine UI settings are correct for the fax job requested. the UI.
5. Verify the fax USB cable, PL 20.1 Item 5, and the fax power harness, PL 20.1 Item 6, and both • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
fully seated. Repair or replace any damaged components. • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
6. Upgrade the Software, GP 2. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
7. Perform Fax Diagnostics, GP 13. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 7 8 I n c o r r e c t M e s s a g e o r Ty p e R A P 0 3 4 - 7 7 9 N o i n fo r m a t i o n o r N o t D e fi n e d R A P
An incorrect message was received. No information was received, or the information is not defined.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 8 2 E r r o r C l e a r e d d u e t o Ti m e o u t R A P 0 3 4 - 7 8 3 O t h e r E r r o r s ( O p e ra t i o n , e t c ) R A P
An error cleared due to time-out. An unspecified protocol error occurred.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
03 4 -7 8 8 S how O t he r Caus es R AP 0 3 4 - 7 8 9 G 4 Pr e s e n t a t i o n I l l e g a l Ev e n t R A P
The cause for a Fax failure is not identified. There is a presentation of an illegal event.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 9 0 L i n e 0 ( E x t ) n o t Co n n e c t e d R A P 0 3 4 - 7 9 1 L i n e 1 n o t Co n n e c t e d R A P
Channel 0 outside line is not connected. Channel 1 outside line is not connected.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 9 2 L i n e 2 n o t Co n n e c t e d R A P 0 3 4 - 7 9 3 L i n e 3 n o t Co n n e c t e d R A P
Channel 2 outside line is not connected. Channel 3 outside line is not connected.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 9 4 L i n e 4 n o t Co n n e c t e d R A P 0 3 4 - 7 9 5 L i n e 5 n o t Co n n e c t e d R A P
Channel 4 outside line is not connected. Channel 5 outside line is not connected.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 3 4 - 7 9 6 D i a l E r r o r ( I n c o r r e c t Fa x N o . 2 ) R A P 0 3 4 - 7 9 7 C o m m u n i c a t i o n Pa r a m e t e r E r r o r R A P
Incorrect information in the dial data (Recipient Telephone Number). Job error communication option parameter has error.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again. • Check the remote machine settings and line status, then perform the operation again.
• Ask customer to cancel the job and resend. • Ask customer to cancel the job and resend.
• Check the Fax line connection (telephone line). • Check the Fax line connection (telephone line).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required • Check the sw version of the fax & controller sw - update if required
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13 • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
• Replace the FAX PWB. • Replace the FAX PWB.
0 4 1 - 3 1 1 M C U F 3 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/2).
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Remove the rear upper right cover, PL 28.3 Item 1, and rear upper left cover, PL 28.3 Item 2. Check
the +24VDC_C13 supply line to the MCU PWB.
The voltage between MCU PWB P/J400 pin-5 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J509
pin-3 and the MCU PWB P/J400 pin-5 for short circuit. Repair or install new components as
required.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the MCU PWB and
measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• PA/JA431 pin-2 and pin-3, ROS assembly Y, M.
• PB/JB431 pin-2 and pin-3, ROS assembly Y, M.
• PA/JA432 pin-48 and pin-49, ROS assembly Y, M.
• PB/JB432 pin-48 and pin-49, ROS assembly Y, M.
• PA/JA433 pin-2 and pin-3, ROS assembly C, K.
• PB/JB433 pin-2 and pin-3, ROS assembly C, K.
• PA/JA434 pin-48 and pin-49, ROS assembly C, K.
• PB/JB434 pin-48 and pin-49, ROS assembly C, K.
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Y N
Check the connections that are 5 ohm or lower for short circuits:
• Damaged connectors.
• Pinched or damaged harnesses that may be grounding on a metal surface.
• Repair or install new components as required.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 4 1 - 3 1 2 M C U F 4 Fu s e Fa i l R A P 0 4 1 - 3 3 7 M D TM F 1 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Fuse 4 on the MCU PWB has blown. Fuse 1 on the TM Drive PWB has blown.
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/2). be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC)
(2/2).
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the +24VDC_C13 supply line to the MCU PWB.
The voltage between MCU PWB P/J400 pin-5 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC. Check the +24VDC_C13 supply line to the TM drive PWB.
Y N The voltage between LVPS N11A P/J509 pin-1 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J509 Y N
pin-3 and the MCU PWB P/J400 pin-5 for short circuit. Repair or install new components as Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J509
required. pin-1 and TM Drive PWB P/J460 pin-1 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the MCU PWB and Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the TM drive PWB
measure the resistance between each connector terminal and GND. and measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• P/J406 pin-A2, MOB ADC assembly. • P/J465 pin-B14, invert gate solenoid.
• P/J417 pin-1, CC intake fan. • P/J465 pin-B11, release invert solenoid.
• P/J417 pin-15, rear cooling fan. Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Y N
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Y N Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Check the connections that are 5 ohm or lower for short circuits: Install a new TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
• Damaged connectors.
• Pinched or damaged harnesses that may be grounding on a metal surface.
• Repair or install new components as required.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 4 1 - 3 3 8 M D TM F 2 Fu s e Fa i l R A P 0 4 1 - 3 3 9 M C U F 1 1 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
Fuse 2 on the TM drive PWB has blown. be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC)
(2/2).
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) Procedure
(2/2).
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
Procedure power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- Check the +3.3VDC supply line to the MCU PWB.
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. The voltage between MCU PWB P/J400 pin-3 (+) and the GND (-) is +5VDC.
Y N
Check the +24VDC_C13 supply line to the TM drive PWB. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J502
The voltage between LVPS N11A P/J509 pin-1 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC. pin-4 and the MCU PWB P/J400 pin-3 for short circuit.
Y N Switch off the machine, GP 19, disconnect P/J416, MSI Paper Size Sensor, on the MCU PWB, then
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J509 pin-1 measure the resistance between pin-A3 and GND.
and TM drive PWB P/J460 pin-1 for short circuit. Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect the following connectors from the TM drive PWB and Y N
measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND. Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
• P/J463 pin-A1, A2, A3, A4, tray 1 feed lift motor. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
• P/J463 pin-B1, B2, B3, B4, tray 2 feed lift motor.
• P/J464 pin-A1, A2, A3, A4, tray 3 feed lift motor.
• P/J464 pin-B1, B2, B3, B4, tray 4 feed lift motor.
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Y N
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Install a new TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
0 4 1 - 3 4 4 M D I O F 1 Fu s e Fa i l R A P 0 4 1 - 3 4 6 M D I O F 3 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Fuse 1 on the IOT Drive PWB has blown. Fuse 3 on the IOT drive PWB has blown.
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC)
(2/2). (2/2).
Procedure Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the Intlk_+24VDC supply line to the IOT drive PWB. Check the Intlk_+24VDC supply line to the IOT drive PWB.
The voltage between IOT Drive PWB P/J430 pin-7 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC. The voltage between IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-7 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC.
Y N Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the AC power supply Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the AC power supply
N11A P/J514 pin-8 and the IOT Drive PWB P/J430 pin-7 for short circuit. N11A P/J514 pin-8 and the IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-7 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect the connector P/J437 from the IOT drive PWB and meas- Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the connector P/J440 from the IOT drive PWB and
ure the resistances between P/J437 pin-1 and 2 and GND. measure the resistances between P/J440 pin-9 and 12 and the GND.
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater. Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Y N Y N
Check the connections between the IOT drive PWB P/J437 pin-1 and 2 and the pre registra- Check the connections between the IOT drive PWB P/J440 pin-9 and 12 and the registration
tion motor P/J229 pin-5 and 2 for short circuits (earth faults). motor P/J230 pin-5 and 2 for short circuits.
Install a new IOT Drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11. Install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
0 4 1 - 3 4 7 TM D r i v e S e r i a l I / F E r r o r R A P 0 4 1 - 3 5 0 M D I O F 7 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
A serial communication error has occurred between the MCU PWB and the TM drive PWB.
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) Fuse 7 on the IOT Drive PWB has blown.
(2/2).
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
Procedure be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC)
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the (2/2).
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
2. If the fault persists, switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between MCU
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
PWB P/J402 and TM drive PWB P/J461 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
If the circuit is good, install new components in order: Check the +24VDC_C13 supply line to the IOT drive PWB.
• TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2. The voltage between IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-3 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC.
Y N
• MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J509
pin-2 and the IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-3 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the IOT drive PWB
and measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• P/J442 pin-5, IBT steering motor.
• P/J442 pin-10, 1st BTR retract motor.
• P/J436 pin-5, CC cleaner motor.
• P/J440 pin-2, 5, duplex motor.
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Y N
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Install a new IOT Drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
0 4 1 - 3 5 4 M D I O F 9 Fu s e Fa i l R A P 0 4 1 - 3 5 5 M D I O F 1 0 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC)
(2/2).
Fuse 10 on the IOT drive PWB has blown.
Procedure
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC)
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- (2/2).
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure
Check the Intlk_+24VDC supply line to the IOT drive PWB.
The voltage between IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-7 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC. WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
Y N power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the AC power supply
N11A P/J514 pin-8 and the IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-7 for short circuit. Check the +24VDC_C13 supply line to the IOT drive PWB.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the connector P/J437 from the IOT drive PWB and The voltage between IOT Drive PWB P/J430 pin-3 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC.
measure the resistances between P/J437 pin-3 and 4 and the GND. Y N
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater. Switch off the machine, GP 19, check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J509 pin-2
Y N and the IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-3 for short circuit.
Check the connections between the IOT drive PWB P/J437 pin-3 and 4 and the MSI feed mo- Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the IOT drive PWB
tor P/J225 pin-2 and 5 for short circuits (earth faults). and measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
Install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
• P/J435 pin-7, MSI nudger solenoid.
• P/J433 pin-8, Deve K drive clutch.
• P/J436 pin-7, 9, 11, 13, 15, toner cartridge motor K1/K2/C/M/Y.
• P/J433 pin-10, 2nd BTR retract cam drive clutch.
• P/J433 pin-9, 11, 13, 15, exit roll fan 4/3/2/1.
• P/J433 pin-17, inverter front fan.
• P/J433 pin-12, rear add fan.
• P/J433 pin-5, exit fan.
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Y N
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
0 4 1 - 3 5 6 M D I O F 1 1 Fu s e Fa i l R A P 0 4 1 - 3 5 7 M D I O F 1 2 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) Fuse 12 on the IOT Drive PWB has blown.
(2/2).
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
Procedure be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC)
(2/2).
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- Procedure
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
Check the Intlk_+24VDC supply line to the IOT drive PWB. power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
The voltage between IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-7 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC. ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the AC power supply Check the +5VDC supply line to the IOT drive PWB.
N11A P/J430 pin-8 and the IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-7 for short circuit. The voltage between IOT drive PWB P/J430 pin-5 (+) and the GND (-) is +5VDC.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect the connector P/J433 from the IOT drive PWB and meas- Y N
ure the resistances between P/J433 pin-5 and the GND. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J502
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater. pin-3 and the IOT Drive PWB P/J430 pin-5 for short circuit.
Y N Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the IOT Drive PWB
Check the connections between the IOT drive PWB P/J433 pin-5 and the V-transfer fan P/ and measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
J238 pin-1 for short circuits (earth faults). • P/J439 pin-A1, pre registration sensor.
Install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11. • P/J439 pin-A8, registration in sensor.
• P/J439 pin-A14, duplex out sensor.
• P/J439 pin-A17, registration out sensor.
• P/J439 pin-B3, post 2nd BTR sensor.
• P/J439 pin-B6, 2nd BTR contact/retract sensor.
• P/J439 pin-B14, duplex in sensor.
• P/J439 pin-B17, fusing entrance sensor.
Resistance values 5 ohm or greater.
Y N
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
0 4 1 - 3 6 5 M C U F 1 2 Fu s e Fa i l R A P 0 4 1 - 3 7 0 M D TM F 3 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
0 4 1 - 3 7 2 M D TM F 4 Fu s e Fa i l R A P 0 4 1 - 5 0 0 , 0 4 1 - 5 0 1 W r i t e To I OT - R O M E r r o r D e t e c t i o n R A P
041-500 Write to IOT-ROM Error Detection
041-501 Write to IOT-NVM-ROM Error Detection
Fuse 4 on the TM drive PWB has blown.
Procedure
Note: This fail is a sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) If retry failed, install a new DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2, then perform GP 2, Software Upgrade, using
(2/2). the DLD USB download method.
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the LH_Intlk_+24VDC supply line to the TM drive PWB.
The voltage between LVPS N11A P/J503 pin-2 (+) and the GND (-) is +24VDC.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J503
pin-2 and the TM drive PWB P/J468 pin-3 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect the following connectors from the TM drive PWB and
measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• P/J465 pin-A8, takeaway clutch 1.
• P/J465 pin-A6, takeaway clutch 2.
Resistance values are 5 ohm or greater.
Y N
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Install a new TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
0 4 2 - 3 1 3 Re a r Co o l i n g Fa n Fa u l t R A P
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/
2).
Initial Actions
• Check the vent for obstacles and blockage.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-039] to run the rear cooling fan, PL 40.7 Item 13.
The rear cooling fan rotates.
Y N
Perform GP 20, How to Check a Motor, to troubleshoot the rear cooling fan, PL 40.7 Item 13.
Check the voltage at P/J417 pin-15 and P/J417 pin-18.
+24 VDC is measured.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Install a new rear cooling fan, PL 40.7 Item 13.
0 4 2 - 3 2 0 D r u m M o t o r Fa i l Y R A P Y N
Check drum motor Y for loading by the drum cartridge (Y). Clear any obstructions causing the
drum cartridge not rotating.
The drum motor Y revolution failure was detected. When the drum motor Y fail signal of the motor
drive output was monitored at the specified time interval after a certain time has passed since the 1. Press the stop button, then switch off the machine, GP 19.
drum motor operation had started, it was found to have failed 5 times in a row. 2. Check the connection between the drum motor Y, M, C, P/J216 pin-4 and MCU PWB P/J407 pin-
A7 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/ 3. If no problem is found, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
2).
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then remove the drum cartridge (Y). Cheat the front cover inter-
lock switch to enable operation with the front cover open.
2. Remove the rear upper cover, MCU cover, cont cover, then open the chassis assembly.
3. Switch on the machine, GP 19, then enter Diagnostics GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-011] to run
the drum motor Y, M, C.
Drum Motor Y rotates.
Y N
Remove the duct to gain access to the drum motor, then perform GP 20, How to Check a
Motor.
The voltage between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J215 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is
+24VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD BSD 1.11 Interlock +24VDC Distribution , then check the +24VDC circuit
to the drum motor Y, M, C PWB.
The voltage between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
The voltage between MCU PWB P/J407 pin-A10 (+) and the GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , to check the +5VDC circuit to the
MCU PWB.
Check the connection between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216 pin-1 and MCU
PWB P/J407 pin-A10 for open circuit and poor contact.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the following:
• The connection between the MCU PWB P/J407 and the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216
for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
If no problem is found, install new components in sequence, checking if the fault is cleared
before installing the next component:
• Drum motor assembly (Y, M, C), PL 40.2 Item 2.
• Drum motor YMC PWB assembly, PL 40.2 Item 6.
• MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
1. Press the stop button, then switch off the machine. Install the drum cartridge (Y), then close the
front cover.
2. Switch on the machine, then enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-011] to run the
drum motor Y, M, C.
Drum Motor Y rotates.
0 4 2 - 3 2 1 D r u m M o t o r Fa i l M R A P Y N
Check drum motor M for loading by the drum cartridge (M). Clear any obstructions causing
the drum cartridge not rotating.
The drum motor M revolution failure was detected. When the drum motor M fail signal of the motor
drive output was monitored at the specified time interval after a certain time has passed since the 1. Press the stop button, then switch off the machine, GP 19.
drum motor operation had started, it was found to have failed 5 times in a row. 2. Check the connection between the drum motor Y, M, C, P/J216 pin-4 and MCU PWB P/J407 pin-
A7 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/ 3. If no problem is found, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
2).
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then remove the drum cartridge (M). Cheat the front cover inter-
lock switch to enable operation with the front cover open.
2. Remove the rear upper cover, MCU cover, cont cover, then open the chassis assembly.
3. Switch on the machine, then enter Diagnostics GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-011] drum motor
Y, M, C.
Drum motor M rotates.
Y N
Remove the duct to gain access to the drum motor, then perform GP 20, How to Check a
Motor.
The voltage between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J215 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is
+24VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD BSD 1.11 Interlock +24VDC Distribution , then check the +24VDC circuit
to the drum motor Y, M, C PWB.
The voltage between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
The voltage between MCU PWB P/J407 pin-A10 (+) and the GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , to check the +5VDC circuit to the
MCU PWB.
Check the connection between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216 pin-1 and MCU
PWB P/J407 pin-A10 for open circuit and poor contact.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the following:
• The connection between the MCU PWB P/J407 and the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216
for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
If no problem is found, install new components in sequence, checking if the fault is cleared
before installing the next component:
• Drum motor assembly (Y, M, C), PL 40.2 Item 2.
• Drum motor YMC PWB assembly, PL 40.2 Item 6.
• MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
1. Press the stop button, then switch off the machine. Install the drum cartridge (M), then close
the front cover.
2. Switch on the machine, then enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-011] to run the
drum motor Y, M, C.
Drum Motor M rotates.
0 4 2 - 3 2 2 D r u m M o t o r Fa i l C R A P Y N
Check drum motor C for loading by the drum cartridge (C). Clear any obstructions causing the
drum cartridge not rotating.
The drum motor C revolution failure was detected. When the drum motor C fail signal of the motor
drive output was monitored at the specified time interval after a certain time has passed since the 1. Press the stop button, then switch off the machine, GP 19.
drum motor operation had started, it was found to have failed 5 times in a row. 2. Check the connection between the drum motor Y, M, C, P/J216 pin-4 and MCU PWB P/J407 pin-
A7 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/ 3. If no problem is found, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
2).
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then remove the drum cartridge (C). Cheat the front cover inter-
lock switch to enable operation with the front cover open.
2. Remove the rear upper cover, MCU cover, cont cover, then open the chassis assembly.
3. Switch on the machine, then enter Diagnostics GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-011] drum motor
Y, M, C.
Drum motor C rotates.
Y N
Remove the duct to gain access to the drum motor, then perform GP 20, How to Check a
Motor.
The voltage between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J215 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is
+24VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD BSD 1.11 Interlock +24VDC Distribution , then check the +24VDC circuit
to the drum motor Y, M, C PWB.
The voltage between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
The voltage between MCU PWB P/J407 pin-A10 (+) and the GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , to check the +5VDC circuit to the
MCU PWB.
Check the connection between the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216 pin-1 and MCU
PWB P/J407 pin-A10 for open circuit and poor contact.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the following:
• The connection between the MCU PWB P/J407 and the drum motor Y, M, C PWB P/J216
for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
If no problem is found, install new components in sequence, checking if the fault is cleared
before installing the next component:
• Drum motor assembly (Y, M, C), PL 40.2 Item 2.
• Drum motor YMC PWB assembly, PL 40.2 Item 6.
• MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
1. Press the stop button, then switch off the machine. Install the drum cartridge (C), then close the
front cover.
2. Switch on the machine, then enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-011] to run the
drum motor Y, M, C.
Drum motor C rotates.
0 4 2 - 3 2 3 D r u m M o t o r Fa i l K R A P Y N
Check drum motor K for loading by the drum cartridge (K). Clear any obstructions causing the
drum cartridge not rotating.
The drum motor K revolution failure was detected. When the drum motor K fail signal of the motor
drive output was monitored at the specified time interval after a certain time has passed since the 1. Press the stop button, then switch off the machine, GP 19.
drum motor operation had started, it was found to have failed 5 times in a row. 2. Check the connection between the drum motor K P/J214 pin-4 and MCU PWB P/J407 pin-B5 for
open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/ 3. If no problem is found, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
2).
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then remove the drum cartridge (K). Cheat the front cover inter-
lock switch to enable operation with the front cover open.
2. Remove the rear upper cover, MCU cover, cont cover, then open the chassis assembly.
3. Switch on the machine, then enter Diagnostics GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-006] drum motor
K.
Drum motor K rotates.
Y N
Remove the duct to gain access to the drum motor, then perform GP 20, How to Check a
Motor.
The voltage between the drum motor K PWB P/J213 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is +24VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD BSD 1.11 Interlock +24VDC Distribution , then check the +24VDC circuit
to the drum motor Y, M, C PWB.
The voltage between the drum motor K PWB P/J214 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
The voltage between MCU PWB P/J407 pin-B8 (+) and the GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , to check the +5VDC circuit to the
MCU PWB.
Check the connection between the drum motor K P/J214 pin-1 and MCU PWB P/J407
pin-B8 for open circuit and poor contact.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the following:
• The connection between the MCU PWB P/J407 and the drum motor K P/J214 for open cir-
cuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
If no problem is found, install new components in sequence, checking if the fault is cleared
before installing the next component:
• Drum motor assembly K, PL 40.1 Item 8.
• MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
1. Press the stop button, then switch off the machine. Install the drum cartridge (K), then close the
front cover.
2. Switch on the machine, then enter Diagnostics, GP 3, then enter dC330, code [042-006] to run
the drum motor K.
Drum motor C rotates.
0 4 2 - 3 2 4 I BT D r i v e M o t o r Fa i l R A P Y N
Check the following IBT drive components:
The IBT drive motor rotation error was detected. The IBT drive motor fail signal of the motor drive • Drive gear for wear, damage, and gear blockage.
output was monitored at the specified time interval when a certain time has passed after the IBT • Each roll in the IBT unit for improper installation or rotation failure due to foreign
drive motor operation had started, it was found to have failed 5 times in a row. substances.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will • Rotation failure due to abnormality of the IBT belt cleaner assembly.
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/ 1. Press the [ stop ] button, then switch off the machine, GP 19.
2).
2. Check the connection between the IBT drive motor P/J204 pin-8 and the MCU PWB P/J409 pin-
Procedure B11 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
3. If no problem is found, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then remove the IBT unit, PL 90.12, then cheat the front cover in-
terlock switch to enable operation of the machine with the front cover open.
2. Remove the rear upper right cover, PL 28.3 Item 1, rear upper left cover, PL 28.3 Item 2, MCU
cover, PL 1.1 Item 4, controller cover, PL 1.1 Item 3, then open the controller door, REP 3.1.
3. Switch on the machine, then enter Diagnostics GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-015] to run the
IBT drive motor, PL 90.15 Item 1.
The IBT drive motor rotates.
Y N
Is the voltage between MCU PWB P/J409 -B18 (+) and the GND (-) +5VDC.
Y N
Refer to, BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , then check the +5VDC circuit to the MCU
PWB P/J409 pin-B18.
Enter Diagnostics GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-015], then run the IBT drive motor, PL 90.15
Item 1.
The voltage between MCU PWB P/J409 pin-B16 (+) and GND(-) is +1VDC or lower.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Press the [ stop ] button, then switch off the machine, GP 19.
1. The connection between MCU PWB P/J409 and IBT drive motor P/J204 for open circuit,
short circuit, and poor contact.
2. The connection between AC power supply N11A P/J514 pin-5 and 1, and IBT drive motor
P/J203 pin-1 and 2 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
If no problem is found, install new components in sequence. Check for the fault cleared after
each component installation before installing the next component.
1. IBT drive motor, PL 90.15 Item 1.
2. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
1. Press the [ stop ] button, the switch off the machine, GP 19. Install the IBT unit, then close the
front cover.
2. Switch on the machine, GP 19, then enter Diagnostics GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-015] to run
the IBT drive motor.
The IBT drive motor rotates.
0 4 2 - 3 2 5 M a i n M o t o r Fa i l R A P A
CAUTION: Check if the fault is cleared after installing each component, before, in-
The main motor rotation error was detected. When the main motor fail signal of the motor drive stalling the next component.
output was monitored at the specified time interval after a certain time has passed since the main
motor operation had started, it was found to have failed 5 times in a row. 1. Main motor assembly, PL 40.4 Item 14.
2. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/ 1. Press the [ stop ] button, the switch off the machine, GP 19.
2). 2. Check the connection between the main motor P/J210 pin-7 and the MCU PWB P/J412 pin-B1
for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
Procedure
3. If no problem is found, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then remove the IBT unit, PL 90.12, then cheat the front cover in-
terlock switch to enable operation of the machine with the front cover open.
2. Remove the rear upper right cover, PL 28.3 Item 1, rear upper left cover, PL 28.3 Item 2, MCU
cover, PL 1.1 Item 4, controller cover, PL 1.1 Item 3, then open the controller door, REP 3.1.
3. Turn the rotor of the Deve Motor manually.
The rotor rotates freely under zero load.
Y N
Check the following:
• The gear bracket assembly for wear, damage, and gear blockage, PL 40.1 Item 4.
• The 2nd BTR cam clutch, PL 40.4 Item 11, and the gear, PL 40.4 Item 20, for wear, dam-
age, and gear blockage.
• The developer housing kit (K), PL 90.6 Item 25, for revolution failure due to a malfunction,
including the developer K drive clutch, PL 40.4 Item 13.
• The dispense assembly K, PL 90.2, for revolution failure due to blockage etc.
Switch on the machine, GP 19, then enter Diagnostics GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-001], main
motor.
The main motor rotates.
Y N
The voltage between the main motor P/J209 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is +24VDC.
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.11 Interlock +24VDC Distribution to check the +24VDC circuit to the
Main Motor P/J209 pin-1.
The voltage between the main motor P/J210 pin-1 (+) and GND(-) is+5VDC.
Y N
The voltage between the MCU PWB P/J412 pin-B7 (+) and GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) to check the +5VDC circuit to the
MCU PWB P/J412 pin-B7.
Check the connection between the main motor P/J210 pin-1 and MCU PWB P/J412
pin-B7 for open circuit, or poor contact.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the MCU PWB P/J412
and the main motor P/J210 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
If no problem is found, install new components in sequence:
0 4 2 - 3 2 6 B e l t H o m e Po s i t i o n To o Lo n g R A P Y N
end
Verify the reflective mark is located at the rear of the transfer belt.
The reflective mark positioned correctly and reflects properly.
Belt Home Position too long
Y N
Initial Actions Clean the reflective mark and reposition it properly, if the fault persists, install a new IBT belt,
PL 90.14 Item 14.
Note: If this fault is declared 3 times in succession, the print mode will be disabled. In order to clear Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-200] transfer belt home sensor, then rotate the
this condition, reset NVM location 741-119 to 0. belt manually for 1 turn.
The display changes.
1. Verify the drawer unit, PL 80.19, and the IBT belt unit, PL 90.12 Item 6, are installed and seated
Y N
correctly.
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the transfer belt home sensor, PL
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 90.16 Item 12.
3. Verify that the IBT belt is not installed reversed. Check the operation of the actuator of the transfer belt edge sensor assembly.
Procedure The actuator moves smoothly.
Y N
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the Install a new transfer belt edge sensor assembly, PL 90.15 Item 7.
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- Select [042-016] IBT steering motor [CW High Current] and [042-017] steering motor [CCW High
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Current].
Check the following: The IBT Steering Motor runs.
Y N
1. Open the IBT drawer and inspect the transfer belt: Perform GP 20, How to Check a Motor, to troubleshoot the IBT steering motor, PL 90.15 Item
• If the belt is torn or damaged, install a new IBT belt, PL 90.14 Item 14. 6.
Verify the installation position of the IBT belt module.
• If belt edge flare, curled edge, is present causing the belt to ride up the belt edge sensor, PL
90.15 Item 7, order Anti-Curl Ski Kit, p/n 655N00282. The IBT belt module is installed in the proper position.
Y N
2. Remove the transfer belt, REP 90.3. Clean the entire inside surface, including the reflective patch, Adjust the installation position of the IBT belt unit, PL 90.12 Item 6.
with a soft cloth. If the reflective patch is peeling, worn, wrinkled, or damaged, install a new re-
flective patch, p/n 604K45000. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Set dC131 NVM Read/Write code [741-104] angle data initial value
3. Clean the rollers in the IBT chassis, especially on the inboard ends. (A0) to 0.
4. Remove the IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15 Item 7, then clean the sensor by gently tapping on a 2. Install the IBT belt unit in the center.
hard surface, or by blowing it out to dislodge contamination.
Note: The IBT belt edge and the IBT belt frame are approximately the same distance front to
Note: Do not scrub or use any cleaner. rear.
5. Clean the IBT belt home position sensor, PL 90.16 Item 12, by blowing it out to dislodge 3. Perform ADJ 9.13, Belt Edge Learn Cycle.
contamination. The Belt Edge Learn Cycle ends abnormally.
Y N
Note: Do not scrub or use any cleaner. Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
6. Check the HFSI counters for the cleaning blade, PL 90.21 Item 9, and the 2nd BTR.
CAUTION: Check if the fault is cleared after installing each component, before, in-
Install new components as required: stalling the next component.
a. Cleaning blade, PL 90.21 Item 9. 1. Check the 2nd BTR roll assembly, PL 80.19 Item 32. Verify the 2nd BTR roll turns freely and does
b. 2nd BTR roll, PL 80.19 Item 32. not cause the belt to drag. Clean the 2nd BTR roll as required.
7. Reassemble the IBT assembly. Perform ADJ 9.13, belt edge learn. 2. If the fault persists, install new components in order as required:
The fault persists. a. 2nd BTR roll assembly, PL 80.19 Item 32.
Y N b. IBT belt unit, PL 90.12 Item 6.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Verify the transfer belt is in the center, adjust to center as required, refer to, REP 90.3.
Perform ADJ 9.13, Belt Edge Learn Cycle.
The belt edge learn cycle ends abnormally.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the 2. Set the Angle Data Initial Value [A0] to 0.
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- 3. Install the IBT belt in the center.
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
4. Perform ADJ 9.13, Belt Edge Learn cycle.
Check the fault history for 042-326 - Belt Home Position Too Long Fail. The belt edge learn cycle ends abnormally.
042-326 fault code is the only fault code in the fault list. Y N
Y N Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform the RAP for all failures in the fault history list. If the fault persists, install a new IBT belt unit, PL 90.12 Item 6.
Install the IBT belt in the centered. Perform ADJ 9.13 Belt Edge Learn Cycle.
The Belt Edge Learn Cycle ends abnormally.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Check for a the Belt Position Fault Code - 042-327.
The Belt Position Fault Code is the only Code in the Fault List
Y N
Perform the RAP for all failures in the fault history list.
Check the reflective mark at the rear of the IBT belt.
The reflective mark positioned correctly and reflects properly.
Y N
Clean the reflective mark and reposition it properly, if the fault persists, install a new IBT belt,
PL 90.14 Item 14.
Check the surface of the IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15 Item 7, for dust or toner.
The surface is clean.
Y N
Clean the surface.
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to actuate the IBT belt edge sensor.
The actuator moves smoothly.
Y N
Install a new IBT belt edge sensor, (PL 90.15 Item 7).
Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-200] IBT belt edge sensor. Rotate the belt man-
ually for 1 turn.
The display changes.
Y N
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15
Item 7.
Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-018] IBT steering motor [CW Low Current].
0 4 2 - 3 2 8 B e l t Ed g e S e n s o r Fa u l t R A P 0 4 2 - 3 3 0 Fu s e r E x h a u s t Fa n Fa u l t R A P
Note: The change in output of the IBT belt edge sensor Assembly when the IBT Belt rotates by 1 Initial Actions
turn is lower than the specified value (output does not change). Steering control cannot be carried
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
out normally.
0 4 2 - 3 3 1 B l o w e r Fa n Fa u l t R A P A
Y N
0 4 2 - 3 3 8 C C I n t a ke Fa n Fa u l t R A P 0 4 2 - 3 4 3 Re a r A d d Fa n Fa u l t R A P
CC Intake Fan Fault Rear Add Fan Fault
Procedure Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3, enter dC330, code [042-034] CC intake fan [Low] , then code [042-033] 2. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3, enter dC330, code [042-042] rear add fan.
CC intake fan [High] alternating the fan speed.
3. +24 VDC is measured between P/J433 pin-12 and P/J433 pin-14 on the IOT drive PWB.
3. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417 pin-1 and P/J417 pin-2 on the MCU PWB. 4. +24 VDC is measured between P/J433 pin-13 and P/J433 pin-14 on the IOT drive PWB.
4. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417 pin-1 and P/J417 pin-4 on the MCU PWB. 5. Install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
5. Install a new CC intake fan, PL 40.9 Item 14.
6. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 4 2 - 6 0 0 B e l t Wa l k Fa u l t R A P A
Measure the voltage between P/J 402-B9 and GND on the MCU PWB. Move the actuator of
the Transfer belt edge sensor manually.
Belt Walk Fault The voltage changes.
Y N
Note: The Color Reg conversion value obtained from the IBT Belt Edge Assembly output voltage
exceeded the specified value throughout the 3 rotations of the belt. Install a new IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15 Item 7.
Install a new IBT belt, PL 90.14 Item 14. Perform ADJ 9.13 Belt Edge Learn Cycle.
As this is an image quality failure, the device does not stop. However, Color Reg is not guaranteed. The Belt Edge Learn end abnormally.
Y N
Initial Actions
End
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Set dC131 NVM Read/Write, code [741-107], No Edge Learn Mode Selection to [1].
• Verify that the IBT Belt is Not on Backwards
Note: With this setting, Active Steering control of the IBT belt is carried out but its accuracy
Procedure is low and Color Registration is not guaranteed. Also, Belt Walk Fail will not be detected.
Perform ADJ 9.9 Registration Measurement Cycle.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- The AC Lateral (OUT/CNT/IN) value is out of the specifications.
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform ADJ 9.9 Reg Measurement Cycle. Install a new IBT belt, PL 90.14 Item 14, then perform ADJ 9.9 and ADJ 9.13 again.
The AC Lateral (OUT/CNT/IN) value is out of the specifications.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform ADJ 9.13 Belt Edge Learn Cycle.
The Belt Edge Learn ends normally.
Y N
Check the operation of the actuator of the IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15 Item 7.
The actuator moves smoothly.
Y N
Install a new IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15 Item 7.
Check the surface of the IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15 Item 7.
The surface is clean of dust or toner.
Y N
Clean the surface.
Check the installation of the IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15 Item 7.
The Transfer belt edge sensor is properly installed.
Y N
Remove, then install the IBT belt edge sensor, PL 90.15 Item 7.
Check the connection of P/J156,P601 to J601,P/J402, and P/J409.
All connectors are properly connected.
Y N
Connect the connectors properly.
Check the wire between P/J156 and P/J409 for open circuit and short circuit.
The wiring between P/J 156 and P/J 409 is OK.
Y N
Repair the open circuit or short circuit.
Measure the voltage between P/J409 pin-10 and GND on the MCU PWB.
The voltage is approximately +5VDC.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 4 2 - 6 0 1 B e l t Ed g e Le a r n Fa u l t R A P 0 4 2 - 6 0 2 B e l t Ed g e C h e c k Fa u l t R A P
Note: The Edge Learn Cycle does not meet the conditions for normal completion even when the Note: The change in shape at the edge of the IBT belt was huge during Belt Edge Check Cycle. Re-
IBT belt has rotated more than the specified times during the Belt Edge Learn Cycle. quest to start Belt Edge Learn.
As this is an image quality failure, the device does not stop. However, Color Reg is not guaranteed. As this is an image quality failure, the device does not stop. However, Color Reg is not guaranteed.
Initial Actions Belt Edge Learn Cycle is executed immediately after this failure occurs.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Belt Edge Learn Cycle updates the IBT Belt edge shape accurately.
• Verify that the IBT Belt is Not on Backwards
Initial Actions
Procedure • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the • Verify that the IBT Belt is Not on Backwards
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Procedure
Install the IBT belt in the center (where the IBT Belt Edge and the IBT Belt Frame are approx. the Check the Fault History.
same distance from the front and rear). Perform ADJ 9.13 Belt Edge Learn Cycle. A 042-601 Belt Edge Learn Fault Code has occurred
The Belt Edge Learn Cycle ends abnormally. Y N
Y N Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform the 042-601 (Belt Edge Learn Fault).
Perform ADJ 9.13 Belt Edge Learn Cycle continuously for 2 or 3 times.
The Belt Edge Learn Cycle ends abnormally.
Y N
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
The IBT belt has been replaced.
Y N
Install a new IBT Belt (PL 90.14 Item 14) and repeat the procedure.
Set dC131 NVM Read/Write [741-108] No Edge Learn Mode Selection to 1 (= select No Edge Learn
Mode).
Note: With this setting, Active Steering control of the IBT belt is carried out but its accuracy is low
(100Micro-m) and Color Reg is not guaranteed. Also, Belt Walk Fail will not be detected.
0 4 2 - 6 0 3 S u c t i o n / O z o n e F i l t e r L i fe E n d Fa u l t R A P 0 4 2 - 6 4 2 U F P F i l t e r L i fe Fa i l ( H i d d e n Fa i l ) R A P
The UFP Filter must be replaced.
Suction/Ozone Filter Life End Fault
Procedure
Note: It was notified that the rotation count of the Blower Motor was monitored and it had ex- Install a new UPF filter, PL 1.1 Item 13, then clear HFSI code [954-860].
ceeded the specified value.
The end of the life of the Suction/Ozone Filter is detected through the number of Blower Fan Motor
rotations at cycle down. dC131 NVM Read/Write [741-019] Blower Motor Rotation Number
Initial Actions
Switch the power Off and install a new Suction Filter, (PL 40.7 Item 19) and Ozone Filter (PL 40.7
Item 20).
• Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Execute dC135 HFSI Counter, then reset counter 954-835 (Ozone Filter)
to [0].
Procedure
If the fault persists, verify that the connectors of the MCU PWB are seated correctly.
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 4 3 - 3 7 6 U F P Fa n Fa i l R A P
UFP Fan failure was detected.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/
2).
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Enter diagnostics, GP 3. Enter dC330, code [042-047], then select [on] to run the UFP fan.
The UPF fan rotates.
Y N
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19. Verify the fan turns manually and no foreign object are
blocking rotation.
2. Check connectors,P/J 421 MCU PWB, and P/J231 UFP fan, PL 1.1 Item 12, are fully
seated.
3. Check the harness for any damage, short circuit, frayed or broken wires. Repair as
required.
4. If the fault persists, install new components in order as required:
a. UPF fan, PL 1.1 Item 12.
b. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Perform SCP 5 Final Actions.
0 4 5 - 3 1 0 I m a g e Re a d y N G R A P 0 4 5 - 3 1 1 Co n t r o l l e r Co m m Fa u l t R A P
Image Ready NG. An internal processing error occurred in the ESS PWB. Controller Comm Fault. Communication was not possible between the ESS and the MCU.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Go to one of the following to troubleshoot the MCU and ESS PWBs.
If the problem still exists, switch the power off and Verify that the connectors are seated correctly
at the Controller PWB and MCU PWB. Switch the power On. • OF 2.1 IOT DC Power (+3.3/ +5 VDC)
0 4 5 - 3 1 2 D r i v e r Co n n e c t Fa u l t R A P 0 4 5 - 3 1 4 I OT S e q u e n c e T i m e O v e r R A P
Driver Connect Fault. The connection between the MCU and the IOT Drive PWB failed. This fault is displayed because a time-out occurred while waiting for an expected signal that did not
happen. This is a fail-safe function to prevent the machine from a run-away condition.
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the Note: The symptom is that the copier appears ready to copy or make a print. The machine starts
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- but nothing happens. After 10 to 15 minutes, the code is displayed.
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
The IOT software sets the fail-safe timer when it expects to receive a certain signal.
Verify that the harness is securely connected between P/J431 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J403 on
the MCU PWB and that there is no damage to the connectors or pins. Initial Actions
If the fault persists, install a new IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11). Faults that could possibly cause this code:
• A piece of paper is blocking a fuser temperature sensor.
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
– Remove the Fuser (REP 10.1).
– Remove the Fuser Top Cover.
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the OF 3.2. Go to the Wirenets and check Input Voltage to MCU PWB. If input power is Ok,
install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 4 5 - 3 1 5 V i d e o L i n e M Fa u l t R A P 0 4 5 - 3 1 6 V i d e o L i n e K Fa u l t R A P
Video Line M Fault. Non-lit Beam occurrence due to M Video Line failure between VECKY and LDD is Video Line K Fault. Non-lit Beam occurrence due to K Video Line failure between VECKY and LDD is
detected. detected.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example: Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example:
MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections for MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections for
broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several times to broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several times to
remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants will change remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants will change
the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a multimeter. the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a multimeter.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Check that the Flat Cables are seated at the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and at the MCU PWB. • Check that the Flat Cables are seated at the ROS Assembly (C, K) and at the MCU PWB.
• If the Flat Cables are seated correctly, install a new Flat Cable. (PL 5.1) • If the Flat Cables are seated correctly, install a new Flat Cable. (PL 5.1)
• If the fault persists, install a new ROS Assembly (Y, M). (PL 5.1) • If the fault persists, install a new ROS Assembly (C, K). (PL 5.1)
• If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB. (PL 1.2) • If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB. (PL 1.2)
0 4 5 - 3 1 7 M C U C P L D S e r i a l I / F Fa u l t R A P 0 4 5 - 3 1 8 F P G A Co n fi g Fa u l t o n M C U R A P
Serial I/F Fault between CPLD (Complex Programmable Logic Device) and FPGA (Field-Program- FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array) Config error on MCU.
mable Gate Array) on MCU.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Turn the power Off then On.
Turn the power Off then On.
Procedure
Procedure WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• If the problem still exists, switch the power off and verify that the connectors are seated cor-
• If the problem still exists, switch the power off and verify that the connectors are seated cor- rectly at the FPGA and MCU PWB.
rectly at the CPLD, FPGA and MCU PWB. • Check software version. Reload software if required.
• Check software version. Reload software if required. • Switch the power On.
• Switch the power On. • If the problem still exists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• If the problem still exists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 4 5 - 3 6 0 C O N T I F Fa u l t Y 0 4 5 - 3 6 1 C O N T I F Fa u l t M
CONTIF Fault Y Fault. Vecky CONITIF setting error Y. CONTIF Fault M Fault. Vecky CONITIF setting error M.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the following in order: Perform the following in order:
• Reseat the interface cable between the DFE and the IOT • Reseat the interface cable between the DFE and the IOT
• Verify that the latest software is loaded in the machine • Verify that the latest software is loaded in the machine
• Reseat the VSEL PWB into the Backplane PWB • Reseat the VSEL PWB into the Backplane PWB
• Check that the flat cables are securely connected to the Y, M ROS and the MCU PWB • Check that the flat cables are securely connected to the Y, M ROS and the MCU PWB
• Install a new Flat Cable (PL 5.1) • Install a new Flat Cable (PL 5.1)
• Install a new Y, M ROS (PL 5.1) • Install a new Y, M ROS (PL 5.1)
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) • Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2)
0 4 5 - 3 6 2 C O N T I F Fa u l t C 0 4 5 - 3 6 3 C O N T I F Fa u l t K
CONTIF Fault C Fault. Vecky CONITIF setting error C. CONTIF Fault K Fault. Vecky CONITIF setting error K.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the following in order: Perform the following in order:
• Reseat the interface cable between the DFE and the IOT • Reseat the interface cable between the DFE and the IOT
• Verify that the latest software is loaded in the machine • Verify that the latest software is loaded in the machine
• Reseat the VSEL PWB into the Backplane PWB • Reseat the VSEL PWB into the Backplane PWB
• Check that the flat cables are securely connected to the C, K ROS and the MCU PWB • Check that the flat cables are securely connected to the C, K ROS and the MCU PWB
• Install a new Flat Cable (PL 5.1) • Install a new Flat Cable (PL 5.1)
• Install a new C, K ROS (PL 5.1) • Install a new C, K ROS (PL 5.1)
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) • Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2)
0 4 5 - 3 6 4 I R E C T Fa u l t Y 0 4 5 - 3 6 5 I R E C T Fa u l t M
IRECT Fault Y Fault. IRECT Memory Under RUN error or IRECT Common error (Y). IRECT Fault M Fault. IRECT Memory Under RUN error or IRECT Common error (M).
Procedure Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Check that the Flat Cables are seated at the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and at the MCU PWB. • Check that the Flat Cables are seated at the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and at the MCU PWB.
• If the Flat Cables are seated correctly, install a new Flat Cable. (PL 5.1) • If the Flat Cables are seated correctly, install a new Flat Cable. (PL 5.1)
• If the fault persists, install a new ROS Assembly (Y, M). (PL 5.1) • If the fault persists, install a new ROS Assembly (Y, M). (PL 5.1)
• If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB. (PL 1.2) • If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB. (PL 1.2)
0 4 5 - 3 6 6 I R E C T Fa u l t C 0 4 5 - 3 6 7 I R E C T Fa u l t K
IRECT Fault C Fault. IRECT Memory Under RUN error or IRECT Common error (C). IRECT Fault K Fault. IRECT Memory Under RUN error or IRECT Common error (K).
Procedure Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Check that the Flat Cables are seated at the ROS Assembly (C, K) and at the MCU PWB. • Check that the Flat Cables are seated at the ROS Assembly (C, K) and at the MCU PWB.
• If the Flat Cables are seated correctly, install a new Flat Cable. (PL 5.1) • If the Flat Cables are seated correctly, install a new Flat Cable. (PL 5.1)
• If the fault persists, install a new ROS Assembly (C, K). (PL 5.1) • If the fault persists, install a new ROS Assembly (C, K). (PL 5.1)
• If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB. (PL 1.2) • If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB. (PL 1.2)
0 4 7 - 2 1 0 O C T O f fs e t Fa u l t R A P
OCT Offset Fault
Note: Movement to the front position, center position and rear position failed in the OCT Offset
operation (movement in the same direction failed 3 times consecutively).
However, when both the OCT Front Position Sensor and OCT Rear Position Sensor are turned On,
this failure occurs immediately.
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
The paper is within the specifications and application for offsetting.
Y N
Change the paper to one within the specifications.
Check the OCT mechanism for foreign substances, damaged gears and rotation failure.
The OCT mechanism in OK.
Y N
Remove the foreign substances and repair/install a new faulty parts.
Check the Rear and Front Position Sensors for dirt and foreign substances.
The sensors are free of dirt or foreign substances.
Y N
Clean the sensors.
Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Select dC330, code [047-001/002] OCT Motor, then select [on] to run the
motor.
The OCT motor comes runs.
Y N
Check connectors P/J803 and P/J444.
The connectors are properly connected.
Y N
Connect P/J803 and P/J444 properly.
Check the wire between P/J803 and P/J444 for open circuit and short circuit.
The wiring is OK.
Y N
Repair the open circuit or short circuit.
1. Measure the voltage between the IOT Drive PWB P/J444 pin-6 and GND when running
dC330 [047-001]
2. Measure the voltage between IOT Drive PWB P/J444 pin-5 and GND when running dC330
[047-001].
+24VDC is measured between pins 4 and 5 of P/J444.
Y N
Go to OF 2.2 IOT DC Power (+24 VDC).
Install a new OCT Motor, PL 12.2 Item 5.
Select [047-200 OCT Front Position Sensor]. Move the OCT from the rear to the front manually.
The display changes.
Y N
Check connectors P/J806,SJ802,J801,P/J444, and DP/DJ680.
0 4 7 - 3 1 0 O u t p u t D e v i c e Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l R A P
Communication cannot be established between the IOT and the Output device (Finisher).
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to BSD, BSD 1.2 M/C Power Control or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/
2).
Cause/Action
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. If the fault persists, switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the following:
Note: For more information on the PWB and power supply at the Finisher, refer to the appropri-
ate Finisher Supplementary Service Manual.
a. Verify the connection between the MCU PWB P/J411, and the Finisher Circuit Board for open
circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
b. Verify the connection between the IOT drive PWB P/J444, and the Finisher Circuit Board for
open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
c. Verify the connection of the drawer connector DP/DJ680, for broken/bent pins, burn dam-
age, and foreign substances.
d. Verify the power supply at the Finisher.
Note: For more information on the PWB and power supply at the Finisher, refer to the ap-
propriate Finisher Supplementary Service Manual.
If the fault persists, install new components as required, in order:
a. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
b. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
Note: For more information on the PWB and power supply at the Finisher, refer to the appropriate Procedure
Finisher Supplementary Service Manual. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure 2. If the fault persists, install a new DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2, then perform GP 2, USB Software
Upgrade.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Note: For more information on the PWB and power supply at the Finisher, refer to the appropriate
Finisher Supplementary Service Manual.
Perform the following:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify that the communication cable between IOT, Interface Module and Finisher (All Output
Devices) is/are properly connected. unplug and then plug-in the harnesses from the IOT to IFM,
IFM to Output device several times to verify connections. Especially over time when ozone build-
up may cause interference in the harness.
3. Check the finisher for proper function and initialization.
4. Go to OF 3.2 and check CR8 is blinking which gives Finisher Communication status.
5. Finisher PWB damage.
0 5 7 - 3 2 4 M C U F 9 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V) or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation
(+24VDC) (2/2).
Procedure
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cord from the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Check the +5VDC supply line to the MCU PWB.
The voltage between MCU PWB P/J400 pin4 (+) and the GND(-) is +5VDC.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J502
pin-3 and the MCU PWB P/J400 pin-4 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the MCU PWB and
measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• P/J407 pin-B12 (Xero ENV Sensor)
• P/J406 pin-B4 (Procon ENV Sensor)
• P/J406 pin-B18 (MOB Out Sensor)
• P/J406 pin-B11 (MOB In Sensor)
• P/J406 pin-A15 (MOB Center Sensor)
• P/J406 pin-A8 (ADC Sensor)
• P/J407 pin-B8 (Drum Motor K)
• P/J407 pin-A10 (Drum Motor YMC)
• P/J415 pin-B12 (MSI Pre Regi Sensor)
• P/J416 pin-A13 (Feed Out 1 Sensor)
• P/J416 pin-A7 (MSI No Paper Sensor)
• P/J416 pin-A8 (MSI Paper Set Sensor)
• P/J416 pin-A9 (MSI Lift Down Sensor)
• P/J416 pin-A10 (MSI Lift Up Sensor)
• P/J416 pin-A5 (MSI Pre Feed Sensor)
All resistance values 5 ohm or higher.
Y N
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V) or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation
(+24VDC) (2/2).
Procedure
Check the +5VDC supply line to the MCU PWB.
Is the voltage between MCU PWB P/J400 pin-4 (+) and the GND (-) +5VDC.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J503
pin-3 and the MCU PWB P/J400 pin-4 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the MCU PWB and
measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• P/J414 pin-A4 (Low Toner Sensor)
• P/J414 pin-B7 (Toner Cartridge CRUM YM)
• P/J414 pin-B1 (Toner Cartridge CRUM CK2)
• P/J414 pin-A6 (Toner Cartridge CRUM K1)
• P/J413 pin-B6 (Drum CRUM K)
• P/J413 pin-A1 (Drum CRUM C)
• P/J413 pin-A6 (Drum CRUM M)
• P/J413 pin-B1 (Drum CRUM Y)
• P/J418 pin-8 (ATC Sensor K)
• P/J418 pin-5 (ATC Sensor C)
• P/J418 pin-14 (ATC Sensor M)
• P/J418 pin-11 (ATC Sensor Y)
• P/J409 pin-B10 (IBT Belt Edge Sensor)
• P/J412 pin-A8 (Fusing Drive Motor)
• P/J412 pin-B7 (Main Motor)
• P/J412 pin-B15 (Deve YMC Drive Motor)
• P/J409 pin-B18 (IBT Drive Motor)
• P/J409 pin-B1 (IBT Belt Home Position Sensor)
• P/J409 pin-B6 (1st BTR Contact/Retract Sensor YMC)
• P/J405 pin-A3 (Fusing Exit Sensor)
0 5 7 - 3 2 6 M C U F 1 3 Fu s e Fa i l R A P 0 5 7 - 3 2 7 M D TM F 5 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V) or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation
(+24VDC) (2/2).
Procedure
BSD 10.6 Inverter (1/2)
Check the +24VDC_SQ supply line to the MCU PWB.
Is the voltage between MCU PWB P/J400 pin-7 (+) and the GND (-) +24VDC.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J503 Fuse 5 on the TM Drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2, has blown.
pin-2 and the MCU PWB P/J400 pin-7 for short circuit.
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect the following connectors from the MCU PWB and meas- be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V) or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation
ure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND. (+24VDC) (2/2).
• P/J408 pin-1 (MSI Cover Interlock Switch)
Procedure
• P/J408 pin-8 (Front Cover Interlock Switch)
Are all resistance values 5 ohm or higher. Check the +5VDC supply line to the TM Drive PWB.
Y N Is the voltage between LVPS N11A P/J502 pin-3 (+) and the GND (-) +5VDC.
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits. Y N
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15. Switch off the machine, GP 19. Check the harness between the LVPS N11A P/J502 pin-3 and
the TM Drive PWB P/J460 pin-4 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect the following connectors from the TM Drive PWB and
measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• P/J463 pin-A5 (Tray 1 Level Sensor)
• P/J463 pin-A8 (Tray 1 No Paper Sensor)
• P/J463 pin-A13 (Tray 1 Pre Feed Sensor)
• P/J463 pin-B7 (Tray 2 Level Sensor)
• P/J463 pin-B10 (Tray 2 No Paper Sensor)
• P/J463 pin-B13 (Tray 2 Pre Feed Sensor)
• P/J463 pin-B16 (Feed Out Sensor 2)
• P/J464 pin-A7 (Tray 3 Level Sensor)
• P/J464 pin-A10 (Tray 3 No Paper Sensor)
• P/J464 pin-A13 (Tray 3 Pre Feed Sensor)
• P/J464 pin-A16 (Feed Out Sensor 3)
• P/J464 pin-B7 (Tray 4 Level Sensor)
• P/J464 pin-B10 (Tray 4 No Paper Sensor)
• P/J464 pin-B13 (Tray 4 Pre Feed Sensor)
• P/J464 pin-B16 (Feed Out Sensor 4)
• P/J465 pin-B3 (Invert In Sensor)
• P/J465 pin-B6 (IOT Exit Sensor)
• P/J467 pin-B12 (Invert End Sensor)
• P/J467 pin-A9 (Waste Toner Not Position Sensor)
• P/J467 pin-A12 (Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor)
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V) or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation
(+24VDC) (2/2).
Procedure
Check the +5VDC supply line to the TM Drive PWB.
Is the voltage between LVPS N11A P/J502 pin-3 (+) and the GND (-) +5VDC.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Check the harness between the LVPS N11A P/J502 pin-3 and
the TM Drive PWB P/J460 pin-4 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the following connectors from the TM Drive PWB
and measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• P/J465 pin-B9 (Dup Fan 1)
• P/J465 pin-B7 (Dup Fan 2)
Are all resistance values 5 ohm or higher.
Y N
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Install a new TM Drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
0 5 7 - 3 2 9 M D TM F 7 Fu s e Fa i l R A P
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V) or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation
(+24VDC) (2/2).
Procedure
Check the AVREF +3.3VDC supply line to the TM Drive PWB.
Is the voltage between LVPS N11A P/J502 pin-3 (+) and the GND (-) +5VDC.
Y N
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Check the connection between the LVPS N11A P/J502 pin-3
and the TM Drive PWB P/J461 pin-11 for short circuit.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect the following connectors from the TM Drive PWB and
measure the resistance between each connector terminal and the GND.
• P/J467 pin-B8 (Tray 1 Paper Size Sensor)
• P/J467 pin-B4 (Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor)
• P/J467 pin-A6 (Tray 3 Paper Size Sensor)
• P/J467 pin-A3 (Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor)
Are all resistance values 5 ohm or higher.
Y N
Check the connections that are in earth fault (at 5 ohm or lower) for short circuits.
Install a new TM Drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
0 5 8 - 3 4 9 D C I n p u t Fa i l R A P
Note: This fail is the sub system fail and when this fail occurs, +24VDC_C13 and +24VDC_Intlk will
be cut off. Refer to, BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V) or BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation
(+24VDC) (2/2).
Procedure
1. Unplug the AC cord from the outlet.
2. Install a new following parts:
• AC power supply assembly, PL 1.3 Item 13.
• Power switch assembly, PL 1.1 Item 7.
• AC Power Supply N11A, PL 1.3 Item 11.
3. Check that AC power is supplied from the power outlet.
4. Connect to AC power supply.
0 5 9 - 3 1 3 Wa i t H e a t Ro l l Fu s i n g S h o r t O n Ti m e Fa i l R A P 0 5 9 - 3 2 6 H e a t Ro l l S e n s o r D i s c o n n e c t i o n Fa i l R A P
The Lamp ON duration during warm up is short. An open circuit abnormality of the heat roll sensor was detected. The AD value of the sensor is
equivalent to the open circuit value.
Procedure
Check the following:
Procedure
Check the following:
• Does the rated voltage of the machine match the rated voltage of the installed fusing unit.
• Heat roll sensor: dC140 [010-206] PL 10.3 Item 21.
• The fusing unit for improper installation
– Open Circuit AD Value: 900 or higher
If no problems are found, install a new fuser: • The drawer connector DP612 /DJ612 for poor contact.
• 8R13102 - 110 Volt CRU • The fusing unit for improper installation
• 8R13065 - 220 Volt CRU
Note: Note that the 059-326 fail may also occur when the PH drawer is closed without the indi-
vidual fusing unit installed.
If no problems are found, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 6 1 - 3 1 0 V i d e o A S I C 1 Fa u l t R A P
Initial Actions
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then Verify that the connectors on the ROS (Y, M) are connected
correctly.
Verify that the connectors on the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS (Y, M) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 1 1 V i d e o A S I C 2 Fa u l t R A P 0 6 1 - 3 1 3 S O S Lo n g Fa u l t M a g e n ta R A P
SOS Long Fault Magenta. The interval between SOS signals was longer than the specified value.
Video ASIC 2 Fail
The write data and read data did not match during the Read/Write test to the register memory. Initial Actions
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Initial Actions
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Procedure
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then Verify that the connectors on the ROS (Y, M) are connected
Procedure correctly.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then Verify that the connectors on the ROS (C, K) are connected 2. Verify that the connectors on the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
correctly. 3. If the problem still exists, replace the ROS (Y, M) (PL 5.1).
Verify that the connectors on the MCU PWB are connected correctly. 4. If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS (C, K) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 1 5 S O S Lo n g Fa u l t B l a c k R A P 0 6 1 - 3 1 7 S O S S h o r t Fa u l t M a g e n t a R A P
SOS Long Fault Black. The interval between SOS signals was longer than the specified value. SOS Short Fault Magenta. The interval between SOS signals was shorter than the specified value.
Procedure
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then Verify that the connectors on the ROS (C, K) are connected
correctly.
2. Verify that the connectors on the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
3. If the problem still exists, replace the ROS (C, K) (PL 5.1).
4. If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 1 9 S O S S h o r t Fa u l t B l a c k R A P 0 6 1 - 3 2 0 Po l y g o n M o t o r 1 Fa u l t R A P
SOS Short Fault Black. The interval between SOS signals was shorter than the specified value. Polygon Motor Fault. The revolutions of the polygon motor did not reach the proper number of revo-
lutions within 4 seconds after the polygon motor came on.
Procedure
Perform 061-315, SOS Long Fault Black RAP. Procedure
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the wires between P 247Y of the ROS Motor (Y, M) and
P/J417 of the MCU PWB for an open circuit and short circuit. Verify that these connectors are con-
nected correctly.
Verify that the connectors of the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1).
0 6 1 - 3 2 1 Po l y g o n M o t o r 2 Fa u l t R A P 0 6 1 - 3 2 3 N o S O S Fa u l t M a g e n t a R A P
Polygon Motor 2 Fault. The revolutions of the polygon motor did not reach the proper number of No SOS Fault Magenta. The SOS signal was not detected.
revolutions within 4 seconds after the polygon motor came on.
Procedure
Procedure Perform 061-313, SOS Long Fault Magenta RAP.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the wires between P 247Y of the ROS Motor (C, K) and P/
J417 of the MCU PWB for an open circuit and short circuit. Verify that these connectors are con-
nected correctly.
Verify that the connectors of the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1).
0 6 1 - 3 2 5 N o S O S Fa u l t B l a c k R A P 0 6 1 - 3 2 6 R O S Co n n e c t Fa u l t Y R A P
No SOS Fault Black. The SOS signal was not detected. ROS Connect Fault Y. The connection between the ROS LD and the MCU PWB failed.
Procedure
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the wires between the ROS Y and the MCU PWB (J
345AY, J A431, J 345BY and P/J 409) for an open circuit and short circuit. Verify that these connec-
tors are connected correctly.
Verify that the connectors of the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 2 7 R O S Co n n e c t Fa u l t M a g e n t a R A P 0 6 1 - 3 2 8 R O S Co n n e c t Fa u l t Cy a n R A P
ROS Connect Fault Magenta. The connection between the ROS LD and the MCU PWB failed. ROS Connect Fault Cyan. The connection between the ROS LD and the MCU PWB failed.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the wires between the ROS M and the MCU PWB (J1AM, Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the wires between the ROS C and the MCU PWB (J
JA432, J1BM, and JB432) for an open circuit and short circuit. Verify that these connectors are con- 345AC, JA 433, J 345BC, and JB433) for an open circuit and short circuit. Verify that these connec-
nected correctly. tors are connected correctly.
Verify that the connectors of the MCU PWB are connected correctly. Verify that the connectors of the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1). If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 2 9 R O S Co n n e c t Fa u l t B l a c k R A P 0 6 1 - 3 3 4 R O S Ye l l o w / M a g e n t a V D D Fa u l t R A P
ROS Connect Fault Black. The connection between the ROS LD and the MCU PWB failed.
ROS Yellow/Magenta VDD Fault
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the wires between the ROS K and the MCU PWB (J1AK,
JA 434, J 1BK, and LB 434) for an open circuit and short circuit. Verify that these connectors are Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1).
Verify that the connectors of the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 3 5 R O S B l a c k / Cy a n V D D Fa u l t R A P 0 6 1 - 3 3 6 R O S Ye l l o w / M a g e n t a V D D D o w n Fa u l t R A P
Procedure Procedure
Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (C, K) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly. Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1). If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 3 7 R O S B l a c k / Cy a n V D D D o w n Fa u l t R A P 0 6 1 - 3 3 8 S O S S t o p M a g e n ta Fa u l t R A P
0 6 1 - 3 3 9 S O S S t o p B l a c k Fa u l t R A P 0 6 1 - 3 4 0 R O S L D Fa u l t B l a c k R A P
SOS Stop Black Fault ROS LD Fault Black. At least three channels (NVM 749-105) of the 32 channels had detected LD
degradation when the LD alarm was generated.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
Procedure
Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (C, K) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (C, K) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1).
If the problem continues, replace the Black Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 4 1 R O S L D Fa u l t Y R A P 0 6 1 - 3 4 2 R O S L D Fa u l t M a g e n t a R A P
ROS LD Fault Y. At least three channels (NVM 749-105) of the 32 channels had detected LD degra- ROS LD Fault Magenta. At least three channels (NVM 749-105) of the 32 channels had detected LD
dation when the LD alarm was generated. degradation when the LD alarm was generated.
Initial Actions Initial Actions
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure Procedure
Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly. Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem continues, replace the Y Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1). If the problem continues, replace the Magenta Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1). If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 6 1 - 3 4 3 R O S L D Fa u l t Cy a n R A P 0 6 1 - 3 4 8 Po l y g o n M o t o r 1 Re a d y C h e c k Fa u l t R A P
ROS LD Fault Cyan. At least three channels (NVM 749-105) of the 32 channels had detected LD Polygon Motor Fault. The revolutions of the polygon motor did not reach the proper number of revo-
degradation when the LD alarm was generated. lutions within 4 seconds after the polygon motor came on.
Procedure Procedure
Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (C, K) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then check the wires between P 247Y of the ROS Motor (Y, M) and
P/J417 of the MCU PWB for an open circuit and short circuit. Verify that these connectors are con-
If the problem continues, replace the Cyan Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1). nected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1). Verify that the connectors of the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1).
0 6 1 - 3 4 9 Po l y g o n M o t o r 2 Re a d y C h e c k Fa u l t R A P 0 6 1 - 3 8 0 R O S D a t a Fa u l t Y R A P
Polygon Motor 2 Fault. The revolutions of the polygon motor did not reach the proper number of ROS Data Fault Y. Serial data communication is not possible between the MCU PWB and ROS (hid-
revolutions within 4 seconds after the polygon motor came on. den failure).
0 6 1 - 3 8 1 R O S D a t a Fa u l t M a g e n ta R A P 0 6 1 - 3 8 2 R O S D a t a Fa u l t Cy a n R A P
ROS Data Fault Magenta. Serial data communication is not possible between the MCU PWB and ROS Data Fault Cyan. Serial data communication is not possible between the MCU PWB and ROS
ROS (hidden failure). (hidden failure).
Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example: Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example:
MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections
for broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several for broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several
times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants
will change the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a will change the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a
multimeter. multimeter.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the following: Perform the following:
• Verify that the Flat Cable connectors of the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and the MCU PWB are con- • Verify that the Flat Cable connectors of the ROS Assembly (C, K) and the MCU PWB are con-
nected correctly. nected correctly.
• Check the connectors on the Y, M ROS and the MCU PWB. • Check the connectors on the C, K ROS and the MCU PWB.
• Reseat the NVM PWB on the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). • Reseat the NVM PWB on the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• Replace the Flat Cable (PL 5.1). • Replace the Flat Cable (PL 5.1).
• Replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1) • Replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1)
Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example:
MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections
for broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several
times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants
will change the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a
multimeter.
Procedure
Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (C, K) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
Reseat the NVM PWB
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1).
Go to the OF 3.2. Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
LD Alarm Magenta. A problem occurred in one of the 32 beams (hidden failure). LD Alarm Cyan. A problem occurred in one of the 32 beams (hidden failure).
Procedure Procedure
Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly. Verify that the connectors of the ROS Assembly (C, K) and the MCU PWB are connected correctly.
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M) (PL 5.1). If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1).
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
If the problem still exists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K) (PL 5.1). Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example:
MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections for
If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several times to
remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants will change
the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a multimeter.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Check that the Flat Cables are seated at the ROS Assembly (C, K) and at the MCU PWB.
• If the Flat Cables are seated correctly, replace the Flat Cable. (PL 5.1)
• If the problem persists, replace the ROS Assembly (C, K). (PL 5.1)
• If the problem persists, replace the MCU PWB. (PL 1.2)
0 6 1 - 6 0 9 V i d e o L i n e M H i d d e n Fa u l t R A P
Video Line M Hidden Fault. Non-lit Beam occurrence due to M Video Line failure between VECKY
and LDD is detected.
Procedure
CAUTION: Power Off and then Power On the DFE prior to Powering Off/On the IOT
and Accessories. The Accessories have their own power cord. Whenever a procedure
states to Power Off and then Power On, POPO, etc., powering Off and then powering
On the IOT does NOT Power Off the Accessory. The Accessory will have to be Powered
Off and then On separately from the IOT by unplugging the Accessory power cord.
Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example:
MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections for
broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several times to
remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants will change
the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a multimeter.
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Check that the Flat Cables are seated at the ROS Assembly (Y, M) and at the MCU PWB.
• If the Flat Cables are seated correctly, replace the Flat Cable. (PL 5.1)
• If the problem persists, replace the ROS Assembly (Y, M). (PL 5.1)
• If the problem persists, replace the MCU PWB. (PL 1.2)
0 6 2 - 3 1 1 I I T S o f t w a r e Lo g i c Fa u l t R A P 0 6 2 - 3 1 3 U n e x e c u ta b l e E r r o r R A P
A software problem was detected with the IIT PWB. Execution is not possible with the combination of scan command parameters.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1. Switch off the power. Disconnect and reconnect connectors P/J 750 from/to the IIT PWB. If the
fault persists, perform the following in the order shown: 2. If the fault persists, replace the Controller PWB. (PL 3.2)
Note: Remove the old U2 (EEPROM) from the old IIT PWB. Replace the new U2 (EEPROM) on the
IIT PWB with the old one, PL 60.4.
0 6 2 - 3 4 5 I I T E E P R O M Fa u l t ( I I T ) R A P 0 6 2 - 3 6 0 C a r r i a g e Po s i t i o n Fa u l t R A P
A write failure to EEPROM or a communication failure with EEPROM occurred. A problem was detected with the carriage position.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off the power. Remove the Platen Glass. Manually move the Full Rate Carriage right and left.
2. Remove, then reinstall the U505 (EEPROM) on IIT PWB (PL 60.4). The Carriage moves smoothly, not interfering.
Y N
3. If the fault persists, install a new IIT PWB (PL 60.4).
Check for a mechanical load on the operating Carriage, poor winding of Carriage Cable, dirt/
Note: Remove the old U505 (EEPROM) from the old IIT PWB. Replace the new U505 (EEPROM) on foreign objects on the rails, improper position of Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage ADJ 5.1.
the IIT PWB with the old one (PL 60.4). Switch on the power. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [062-
005] (Scan) or [062-006] (Return). Select Start.
The Carriage moves.
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J 721-1/2 on the IIT PWB and GND.
Y N
Replace the IIT PWB (PL 60.4).
Switch off the power. Disconnect P/J 721 from the IIT PWB. Measure the wire-wound resist-
ance of the Carriage Motor:
• P/J 721-1 to P/J 721-3/4
• P/J 721-2 to P/J 721-5/6
Every resistance is approx. 0.9 ohm.
Y N
Replace the Carriage Motor (PL 60.5).
Replace the IIT PWB (PL 60.4).
Press the Stop button. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [062-
212] (IIT Registration Sensor). Select Start. Manually moving the Carriage, turn On then Off the IIT
Reg Sensor.
The display changes between H and L.
Y N
Go to BSD 6.1 Platen Document Sensing and check the IIT Reg Sensor circuit for an open.
At the service call, no fault is thought to exist. Recheck for an improper Carriage operation, any
noise source around the machine, any abnormal internal discharge, etc. If the fail occurs frequently,
replace the IIT PWB (PL 60.4).
Note: Remove the old U2 (EEPROM) from the old IIT PWB. Replace the new U2 (EEPROM) on the
new IIT PWB with the old one (PL 60.4).
0 6 2 - 3 6 2 X H a r d Fa u l t R A P 0 6 2 - 3 7 1 L a m p I l l u m i n a t i o n Fa i l R A P
Procedure
1. Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Insufficient light from Lamp detected in CCD. (During white gradation correction/AGC before Scan
starts)
• Reinstall the latest version of the IIT Software.
• Switch off the power. Disconnect and reconnect U2 (EEPROM) from/to IIT PWB. If this does Note: When turning the power OFF, turn OFF the power switch first and then the main power
not resolve the problem, replace the IIT PWB (PL 60.4). switch.
Note: Remove the old U2 (EEPROM) from the old IIT PWB. Replace the new U2 (EEPROM) on the Initial Actions
new IIT PWB with the old one (PL 60.4).
Check whether there is something blocking the light and check the Lamp, Lens, Mirror, and White
Color Correction Plate for deterioration or contamination.
Procedure
1. Turn ON the power and enter the Diag mode. Change the value of NVM [715-030] to '1' and
then perform IIT Faulty Parts Diagnosis. After performing the IIT Faulty Parts Diagnosis, select
[Change Settings].
2. A 3-digit or 4-digit number is displayed in the [Current Value] field.
3. Check the upper 1 or 2 digits, or the lower 2 digits using Table 1, then install the corresponding
part.
Sample Display
• 110 (3-digit display):
LED Lamp failure and LED Lamp Flexible Print Cable is damaged or has poor contact.
(The first digit '1' in '110' is the upper digit, which indicates the LED Lamp ('0' in '01' is not
displayed). The lower 2 digits '10' indicates the LED Lamp Flexible Print Cable.)
• 1000 (4-digit display):
The LED Lamp Flexible Print Cable is damaged or has poor contact.
(The first 2 digits '10' in '1000' are the upper digits, which indicates the LED Lamp Flexible
Print Cable. The lower 2 digits '00' indicates that nothing is applicable (no failure).
Table 1 Current Value List
Current value Component Name PL No.
7. If no problem is found, replace the Controller PWB, (PL 3.2). 02 CCD lens assembly PL 60.4
17 Wire harness (CCD power) PL 60.4 3. Check the upper 1 or 2 digits, or the lower 2 digits and replace the appropriate parts. (For more
information on display example and part selection, refer to Procedure 3 in 062-371.)
18 This value is not displayed - 4. After replacing the appropriate parts, change the value of NVM [715-030] to '1' and then per-
form IIT Faulty Parts Diagnosis. After performing the IIT Faulty Parts Diagnosis, select [Change
19 Controller PWB PL 3.2 Settings].
5. Check that the display in the [Current Value] field becomes '0'.
7. After installation of the appropriate components from Table 1 :
6. If the fault persists after performing the above procedure, check the following:
a. Reenter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode. • The connection between the CCD Lens Assy J701 and the IIT Trans PWB J710 for open cir-
b. Enter UI Diagnostics, Accessing UI Diagnostics. cuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
c. Enter NVM Rear/Write, dC131 NVM Read/Write. • Check the Flat Cable between the CCD Lens Assy J700 and the Controller PWB J336 for open
circuits, short circuits, and poor contacts (especially, check whether the Flat Cable was in-
d. Change the value of NVM [715-030] to (1).
serted in a skewed manner).
e. Perform IIT Faulty Parts Diagnosis.
7. If no problem is found, replace the following parts in sequence. However, each time a part is re-
f. Select [Change Settings]. placed, check whether the Fail is still occurring and return the part if it has no problems.
8. Check that the display in the [Current Value] field becomes (0). • CCD Lens Assembly (PL 60.4).
9. If the fault persists after performing the above procedure, check the following: • Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• Check the LED lamp, dC330, code [062-002], PL 60.6 Item 9.
• Check the flat cable between the LED lamp PWB J7001 and the IIT trans PWB J723 for open
circuits, short circuits, and poor contacts (especially, check whether the flat cable was in-
serted in a skewed manner).
• The connection between the CCD lens assembly J701 and the IIT trans PWB J710 for open
circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
• Check the flat cable between the CCD lens assembly J700 and the controller PWB J336 for
open circuits, short circuits, and poor contacts (especially, check whether the flat cable was
inserted in a skewed manner).
10. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
06 2 - 3 8 9 Ca rr ia g e O ver R u n ( Sc an E n d ) R A P 0 6 2 - 3 9 3 C C D P W B Sy n c S i g n a l Fa i l R A P
The carriage overran the scan end side. • Write failure to the Shading Memory has occurred.
• Write failure to the DARTS2 Memory has occurred.
Procedure • Averaging processing error has occurred in the ASIC.
Remove the Platen Glass. Manually move the Full Rate Carriage right and left.
Note: When turning the power OFF, turn OFF the power switch first and then the main power
The Carriage moves smoothly, not interfering. switch.
Y N
Check for a mechanical load on the operating Carriage, poor winding of Carriage Cable, dirt/ Procedure
foreign objects on the rails, improper position of Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage (ADJ 5.1).
Switch on the power. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [062- 1. Turn the power ON and enter the Diag mode. Change the value for dC131 [715-030] to ‘1’ and
005] (Scan) or [062-006] (Return). Select Start. then execute [NVM Write].
The Carriage moves. 2. Press the “Confirm/Change” button on the UI. A number will be displayed.
Y N
3. Check the upper 1 or 2 digits, or the lower 2 digits using Table 1, then install the corresponding
Check the Carriage cable for distortion, being stranded, damage and foreign substances on part.
the Carriage rail.
Sample Display
Press the Stop button. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [062-
212] (IIT Reg Sensor). Select Start. Manually moving the Carriage, turn On then Off the IIT Reg • 110 (3-digit display):
Sensor. LED Lamp failure and LED Lamp Flexible Print Cable is damaged or has poor contact.
The display changes between H and L. (The first digit '1' in '110' is the upper digit, which indicates the LED Lamp ('0' in '01' is not
Y N displayed). The lower 2 digits '10' indicates the LED Lamp Flexible Print Cable.)
Go to BSD 6.10 Carriage Control and check the IIT Reg Sensor circuit.
• 1000 (4-digit display):
Recheck for improper Carriage operation, noise source around the machine, 0r any abnormal inter-
nal arching. If the failure occurs frequently, replace the IIT PWB (PL 60.4). The LED Lamp Flexible Print Cable is damaged or has poor contact.
(The first 2 digits '10' in '1000' are the upper digits, which indicates the LED Lamp Flexible
Note: Remove the old U2 (EEPROM) from the old IIT PWB. Replace the new U2 (EEPROM) on the Print Cable. The lower 2 digits '00' indicates that nothing is applicable (no failure).)
new IIT PWB with the old one (PL 60.4).
Table 1 Current Value List
Current value Component Name PL No.
17 Wire Harness (CCD Power) PL 60.4 2. Replace the Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
4. After installation of new components, change the value for dC131 [715-030] to ‘1’ and then ex-
ecute [NVM Write].
5. Check that the current value column becomes ‘0’.
6. If the fault persists after performing the above procedure, check the Flat Cable between the
Lens & CCD and the IIT PWB for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact (especially, check
whether the Flat Cable was inserted in a skewed manner).
If no problems are found, replace the Controller PWB. (PL 3.2)
0 6 2 - 3 9 5 Tra n s P W B Po w e r C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa u l t R A P 0 6 2 - 3 9 7 I I T - Co n t V i d e o C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa u l t
The IIT PWB power source error was detected. An SBC Video Cable connection error was detected.
Procedure Cause/Action
1. Turn the power OFF and ON.
Turn the power OFF and remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 28.6).
2. Turn the power OFF and check the following:
Turn the power ON.
• The coaxial cable between the IIT PWB P/J 7191 and the BP PWB for open circuit, short cir-
Is the voltage between the IIT LVPS P/J 505-1 (+) and P/J 505-3 (-) +24VDC? cuit, and poor contact
Y N
Go to OF 2.2 IOT DC Power (+24 VDC) RAP. • The connector (J 309) between the Controller PWB and the BP PWB for damage and foreign
substances
Turn the power OFF and check the connection between the IIT LVPS and the IIT Trans PWB for
open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact. If no problems are found, replace the following parts in sequence:
• Controller PWB (PL 3.2)
If the fault persists, install a new IIT Trans PWB (switch the EEPROM) (PL 60.4 Item 13).
• IIT PWB (Switch the EEPROM) (PL 60.4)
• BP PWB (PL 1.2)
0 6 2 - 3 9 8 I I T - Co n t I / O C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa u l t R A P 0 6 2 - 3 9 9 DA D F - Co n t I / O C a b l e Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l R A P
An SBC I/O Cable connection error was detected. An IIT-ESS I/O Cable (DADF) connection error was detected.
Primary Causes
• An error was detected when writing data to the IISS-ROM.
Not able to carry out normal operation because ROM content is missing.
Procedure
• Retry job. If retry failed, replace the IISS-ROM and perform VerUP operation on the DLD method
again.
0 6 5 - 2 2 1 C I S AG C Fa i l
The CIS AGC process has not completed/resolved.
Note: When turning the power OFF, turn OFF the power switch first and then the main power
switch.
Procedure
Enter Diag Mode and execute DC945 IIT Calibration, ADJ 5.5, [Side2 Shading Correction]. After the
execution, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
End. Initialize Side2-NVM (IISS-Extension) and turn the power OFF then ON.
Initialize the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM) in dC131 NVM Initialization by going to
the Diag mode. Turn the power OFF then ON and check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Turn OFF the power and check the following:
• The connection between the Controller PWB J390 and the DCDC PWB J745 for poor contact.
(Especially, check if the connector screws to be connected to the Controller are tightened.)
• The Flat Cable between the DCDC PWB J746 and the CIS J1 for open circuits, short circuits, and
poor contacts.
• The connection between the DCDC PWB J7461 and the CIS J2 for open circuit, short circuit, and
poor contact.
Are the connection and cable normal?
Y N
Repair or Install a new cable and connect it appropriately.
Check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
End
Perform the following: After the execution, check if the error is solved.
1. Save the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM).
2. Install a new DCDC PWB, PL 5.4 Item 3.
3. Initialize the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM) in dC131 NVM Initialization.
4. Restore the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM).
5. Enter Diag Mode and execute DC945 IIT Calibration, ADJ 5.5, [Side2 Shading Correction].
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new CIS PL 5.4 Item 9. After replacement, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new DADF-Controller Cable PL 5.4 Item 4. After replacement, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Note: When turning the power OFF, turn OFF the power switch first and then the main power
switch.
Procedure
Go to the Diag mode and execute dC131 NVM Read/Write to change the value of NVM [716-173]
(Color AOC Resolution Allowable Lower Limit Threshold Value) and NVM [716-183] (Color AOC Res-
olution Allowable Upper Limit Threshold Value) to '128', and then check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
End
Turn OFF the power and check the following:
• The connection between the Controller PWB J390 and the DCDC PWB J745 for poor contact.
(Especially, check if the connector screws to be connected to the Controller are tightened.)
• The Flat Cable between the DCDC PWB J746 and the CIS J1 for open circuits, short circuits, and
poor contacts.
• The connection between the DCDC PWB J7461 and the CIS J2 for open circuit, short circuit, and
poor contact.
Are the connection and cable normal?
Y N
Repair or Install a new cable and connect it appropriately.
Check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
End
Perform the following: After the execution, check if the error is solved.
1. Save the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM).
2. Install a new DCDC PWB, PL 5.4 Item 3.
3. Initialize the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM) in DC131 NVM Initialization.
4. Restore the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM).
5. Enter Diag Mode and execute DC945 IIT Calibration, ADJ 5.5, [Side2 Shading Correction].
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new CIS PL 5.4 Item 9. After replacement, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new DADF-Controller Cable PL 5.4 Item 4. After replacement, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new DADF, PL 5.1 Item 1.
0 6 5 - 2 2 3 C I S Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l 0 6 5 - 2 2 4 C I S D e v i c e Fa i l
The CIS Cable may have poor contact. The FPGA on the DARTS2 PWB is not operating properly.
Note: When turning the power OFF, turn OFF the power switch first and then the main power Note: When turning the power OFF, turn OFF the power switch first and then the main power
switch. switch.
Procedure Cause/Action
Refer to 065-223 (CIS Connection Fail).
Turn OFF the power and check the following:
• The connection between the Controller PWB J390 and the DCDC PWB J745 for poor contact.
(Especially, check if the connector screws to be connected to the Controller are tightened.)
• The Flat Cable between the DCDC PWB J746 and the CIS J1 for open circuits, short circuits, and
poor contacts.
• The connection between the DCDC PWB J7461 and the CIS J2 for open circuit, short circuit, and
poor contact.
Are the connection and cable normal?
Y N
Repair or Install a new cable and connect it appropriately.
Check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
End
Perform the following: After the execution, check if the error is solved.
1. Save the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM).
2. Install a new DCDC PWB, PL 5.4 Item 3.
3. Initialize the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM) in DC131 NVM Initialization.
4. Restore the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM).
5. Enter Diag Mode and execute DC945 IIT Calibration, ADJ 5.5, [Side2 Shading Correction].
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new CIS PL 5.4 Item 9. After replacement, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new DADF-Controller Cable PL 5.4 Item 4. After replacement, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new DADF, PL 5.1 Item 1.
0 6 5 - 2 2 5 C I S Fa i l
The CIS may be broken.
Note: When turning the power OFF, turn OFF the power switch first and then the main power
switch.
Procedure
Perform the following: Save the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM) and initialize the NVM
value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM) in dC131 NVM Initialization. After initialization, check if the
error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Turn OFF the power and check the following:
• The connection between the Controller PWB J390 and the DCDC PWB J745 for poor contact.
(Especially, check if the connector screws to be connected to the Controller are tightened.)
• The Flat Cable between the DCDC PWB J746 and the CIS J1 for open circuits, short circuits, and
poor contacts.
• The connection between the DCDC PWB J7461 and the CIS J2 for open circuit, short circuit, and
poor contact.
Are the connection and cable normal?
Y N
Repair or Install a new cable and connect it appropriately.
Check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
End
Perform the following: After the execution, check if the error is solved.
1. Save the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM).
2. Install a new DCDC PWB, PL 5.4 Item 3.
3. Initialize the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM) in dC131 NVM Initialization.
4. Restore the NVM value of IISS-Extension (Side2 NVM).
5. Enter Diag Mode and execute DC945 IIT Calibration, ADJ 5.5, [Side2 Shading Correction].
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new CIS PL 5.4 Item 9. After replacement, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new DADF-Controller Cable PL 5.4 Item 4. After replacement, check if the error is solved.
Is an error displayed?
Y N
Go to Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting.
Install a new DADF, PL 5.1 Item 1.
0 7 1 - 1 0 0 Tra y 1 Pr e Fe e d S e n s o r O n 0 7 1 - 1 0 1 Tra y 1 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n
Tray 1 Pre Feed Sensor did not turn On within the specified time after paper is fed from Tray 1. Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor did not turn On within the specified time after paper is fed from Tray 1.
0 7 1 - 1 0 4 Tra y 1 Pr e Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m 0 7 1 - 1 0 5 Tra y 1 Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m
Pre Registration Sensor On Jam (Tray 1). The paper from Tray 1 did not turn on the Pre Registration Registration Sensor On Jam (Tray 1). The paper from Tray 1 did not turn on the Registration Sensor
Sensor within the specified time. within the specified time.
0 7 1 - 2 1 0 Tra y 1 L i f t U p Fa u l t 0 7 1 - 2 1 1 Tra y 1 S i z e S e n s o r R A P
Tray 1 Lift Up Fault. The Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor did not turn on within the specified time after Five consecutive failures in the Tray Size Sensor that monitors Tray 1 at intervals of 100ms have
the tray was inserted. been detected.
0 7 1 - 9 4 0 Tra y 1 L i f t U p N G R A P
Procedure
1. Open tray 1, then verify there is no paper jammed in tray causing the error. Close tray 1.
2. Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor to verify the tray 1 level sensor operates correctly. Install
a new tray 1 level sensor, PL 80.1 Item 7, as required.
3. Perform GP 20, How to Check a Motor to verify the tray 1 lift/feed motor. Install a new tray 1
lift/feed motor, PL 80.1 Item 16, as required.
4. Check the harness between the TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 1, and the MCIU PWB, PL 1.2 Item
15, for loose connections or damage to the harness.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
a. TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
b. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 7 2 - 1 0 0 Tra y 2 Pr e Fe e d S e n s o r O n R A P 0 7 2 - 1 0 1 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n R A P
Tray 2 Pre Feed Sensor did not turn On within the specified time after paper is fed from Tray 2. Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor did not turn On within the specified time after paper is fed from Tray 2.
Procedure Procedure
Check the following: Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [072-101 Tray 2 Feed Out
• Clear any paper jam and Sensor the power Off then On Sensor]. Block and unblock the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor.
The display changes.
• LH Cover Connector connection failure
Y N
• [072-100 Tray 2 Pre Feed Sensor] Pre Feed Sensor operation failure Go to BSD 80.4 Tray Paper Feeding (1/2) and check the following wires for an open wire, short
• Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid operation failure or poor contact:
• Transport failure due to Feed Roll wear/deterioration/contamination • Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133B-2 to TM Drive PWB P/J 463-B15
• [072-001 Tray 2 Feed Motor] Tray 2 Feed Motor operation failure • Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133B-1 to TM Drive PWB P/J 463-B16
• [077-001 Takeaway Motor] Takeaway Motor operation failure • Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133B-3 to TM Drive PWB P/J 463-B14
• [077-002 Takeaway Clutch 1] Takeaway Clutch 1 operation failure If OK, install a new the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor (PL 80.10) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL
• Use of out-of-spec paper 1.2).
Execute dC330, code [072-001 Tray 2 Feed].
There is operation noise from the Tray 2 Feed Lift Motor.
Y N
Go to BSD 70.8 Tray 3 Paper Stacking and troubleshoot the Tray 2 Lift/Feed Motor circuit.
Execute dC330, code [077-001 Takeaway Motor].
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Motor.
Y N
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Drive and check the Takeaway Motor Circuit for an open.
Execute dC330, code [077-002 Takeaway Clutch 1].
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Clutch 1.
Y N
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Driveand check the Takeaway Motor Clutch 1 for an open.
Check the following:
• Feed Roll/Nudger Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Retard Roll for a problem
• Takeaway Rolls 2 and 3 for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Connectors P/J 662 for a poor connection
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
• If the fault persists, install a new TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11)
and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2 Item 15) one at a time in the order shown.
0 7 2 - 1 0 2 Tra y 2 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n R A P 0 7 2 - 1 0 4 Pr e - Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m ( Tra y 2 ) R A P
The Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor does not turn On during paper transport on the Takeaway Path for the Pre-Registration Sensor On Jam (Tray 2). The paper from Tray 2 did not turn on the Pre Registration
paper fed from Tray 2. Sensor within the specified time.
0 7 2 - 1 0 5 Re g i s t ra t i o n I n S e n s o r O n J a m ( Tra y 2 ) R A P 0 7 2 - 2 1 0 Tra y 2 L i f t U p Fa u l t R A P
Registration Sensor On Jam (Tray 2). The paper from Tray 2 did not turn on the reg sensor within Tray 2 Lift Up Fault. The Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor did not come on within the specified time after
the specified time. the tray was inserted.
• Drawer Connector P/J 609 contact points for foreign objects/bent pins/burnout • MCU PWB P/J 404-A6 to TM Drive PWB P/J 462-A9
• If the fault persists, reseat/install a new TM Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 3), Pre Registration Motor • MCU PWB P/J 404-A5 to TM Drive PWB P/J 462-A10
(PL 80.22 Item 12), IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11) and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2 Item 15) one at Press the Stop button. Enter dC330, code [072-200] (Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor) Select Start. Man-
a time in the order shown ually raising and lowering the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly, turn the sensor On, then Off.
The display changes between H and L.
Y N
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor.
Slide out the tray and perform the following:
• Manually rotate the Gear Pulley at the rear of the tray to check the tray smoothly goes up and
down.
• Check the couplings and gears are not broken. Check that the couplings are securely engaged in
each other when the tray is gently pushed in.
• Check for other problems including a mechanical load.
0 7 2 - 2 1 1 Tra y 2 S i z e S e n s o r R A P 0 7 2 - 9 4 0 Tra y # 2 / T TM # 2 L i f t U p N G R A P
Five consecutive failures in the Tray Size Sensor that monitors Tray 2 at intervals of 100ms have
been detected. An error was detected when tray 2 attempted a paper feed.
Procedure Procedure
Check the following: 1. Open tray 2, then verify there is no paper jammed in tray causing the error. Close tray 2.
• The bottom of the Tray for broken link and damage 2. Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor to verify the tray 2 level sensor operates correctly. Install
• The Actuator at the rear of the Tray for operation failure a new tray 2 level sensor, PL 80.3 Item 7, as required.
• The Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor (PL 70.1 Item 15) for failure: dC330, code [072-200], dC330, code 3. Perform GP 20, How to Check a Motor to verify the tray 2 lift/feed motor. Install a new tray 2
[072-202] lift/feed motor, PL 80.3 Item 16, as required.
• The connection between the Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor P/J 129, TM Drive PWB P/J 467 and MCU 4. Check the harness between the TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 1, and the MCIU PWB, PL 1.2 Item
PWB P/J 404 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact 15, for loose connections or damage to the harness.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
If the fault persists, install a new the following parts in sequence:
• Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor (PL 70.1 Item 15). a. TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
• TM Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 3). b. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
• MCU PWB (PL 1.2 Item 15).
0 7 3 - 1 0 0 Tra y 3 Pr e Fe e d S e n s o r O n R A P
Tray 3 Pre Feed Sensor did not turn on after paper is fed from Tray 3.
Initial Actions
CAUTION: Power Off and then Power On the DFE prior to Powering Off/On the IOT
and Accessories. The Accessories have their own power cord. Whenever a procedure
states to Power Off and then Power On, POPO, etc., powering Off and then powering
On the IOT does NOT Power Off the Accessory. The Accessory will have to be Powered
Off and then On separately from the IOT by unplugging the Accessory power cord.
Procedure
Check the following:
• Clear any paper jam and switch the power Off then On.
• LH Cover Connector connection failure
• [073-100 Tray 3 Pre Feed Sensor] Pre Feed Sensor operation failure
• Tray Nudger Solenoid operation failure
• Transport failure due to Feed Roll wear/deterioration/contamination
• [073-001 Tray 3 Feed Motor] Tray 3 Feed Motor operation failure
• [077-001 Takeaway Motor] Takeaway Motor operation failure
• [077-002 Takeaway Clutch 1] Takeaway Clutch 1 operation failure
• Use of out-of-spec paper
0 7 3 - 1 0 1 Tra y 3 M i s fe e d J a m R A P 0 7 3 - 1 0 2 Tra y 3 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n J a m R A P
Tray 3 Misfeed Jam. Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor did not turn on within the specified time after the start Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On Jam (Tray 3). The paper from Tray 3 did not turn on Tray 3 Feed Out
of feed for Tray 3. Sensor within the specified time.
• Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133C-1 to TM Drive PWB P/J 464-A16 • Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133C-2 to TM Drive PWB P/J 464-A15
• Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133C-3 to TM Drive PWB P/J 464-A14 • Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133C-1 to TM Drive PWB P/J 464-A16
• Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133C-3 to TM Drive PWB P/J 464-A14
If the fault persists, install a new the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor (PL 80.10) before replacing the
MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If the fault persists, install a new the Feed Out Sensor 1 (PL 80.14) before replacing the MCU
Execute dC330, code [073-001 Tray 3 Feed]. PWB (PL 1.2).
There is operation noise from the Tray 3 Feed Lift Motor. Execute dC330, code [073-001 Tray 3 Feed].
Y N There is operation noise from the Tray 3 Feed Lift Motor.
Go to BSD 70.9 Tray 4 Paper Stacking and troubleshoot the Tray 3 Lift/Feed Motor circuit. Y N
Execute dC330, code [077-001 Takeaway Motor]. Go to BSD 70.9 Tray 4 Paper Stacking and troubleshoot the Tray 3 Lift/Feed Motor circuit.
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Motor. Execute dC330, code [077-001 Takeaway Motor].
Y N There is operation noise from the Takeaway Motor.
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Drive and check the Takeaway Motor Circuit for an open. Y N
Execute dC330, code [077-003 Takeaway Clutch 2]. Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Drive and check the Takeaway Motor Circuit for an open.
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Clutch 2. Execute dC330, code [077-003 Takeaway Clutch 2].
Y N There is operation noise from the Takeaway Clutch 2.
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Drive and check the Takeaway Motor Clutch 2 for an open. Y N
Check the following: Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Driveand check the Takeaway Motor Clutch 2 for an open.
• Feed Roll/Nudger Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation Check the following:
• Retard Roll for a problem • Feed Roll/Nudger Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Takeaway Rolls 1/2/3 for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation • Retard Roll for a problem
• Connectors P/J 666 for a poor connection • Takeaway Rolls 1/2/3 for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Drive gears for wear/breakage • Connectors P/J 666 for a poor connection
• If the fault persists, install a new TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11) • Drive gears for wear/breakage
and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown. • If the fault persists, install a new TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11)
and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2/15) one at a time in the order shown.
0 7 3 - 1 0 4 Pr e Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m ( Tra y 3 ) R A P 0 7 3 - 1 0 5 Re g i s t ra t i o n I n S e n s o r O n J a m ( Tra y 3 ) R A P
Pre Registration Sensor On Jam (Tray 3). The paper from Tray 3 did not turn on the Pre Registration The paper from Tray 3 did not turn on the Reg Sensor within the specified time.
Sensor within the specified time.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions • Clear any jam and switch the power Off then On.
• Clear any jam and switch the power Off then On. • Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Check for out-of-spec paper. • Check the Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper
• Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper
Procedure
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-102 Registration In
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-100 Pre Registration Sensor]. Place paper in front of the Registration In Sensor.
Sensor]. Place paper in front of the Pre Registration Sensor. The display changes.
The display changes. Y N
Y N Go to BSD 80.9 Registration (1/2)and check the following for an open wire, short or poor
Go to BSD 80.9 Registration (1/2) and check the following for an open wire, short or poor contact:
contact: • Pre Regi Motor P/J 229-pin 2 to IOT Drive PWB P/J 229-pin 1/3
• Pre Reg Sensor P/J 121-2 to IOT Drive PWB P/J 439-A2
• Pre Regi Motor P/J 229-pin 5 to IOT Drive PWB P/J 229-pin 4/6
• Pre Reg Sensor P/J 121-1 to IOT Drive PWB P/J 439-A3
If the fault persists, install a new the Registration In Sensor (PL 80.23 Item 18) before replac-
• Pre Reg Sensor P/J 121-3 to IOT Drive PWB P/J 439-A1 ing the IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11).
If the fault persists, install a new the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 80.14 Item 16) before replac- Execute dC330, code [077-006 Pre Registration Motor: 640mm/s].
ing the IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11). There is operation noise from the Pre Reg Motor.
Execute dC330, code [077-006 Pre Registration Motor: 640mm/s]. Y N
There is operation noise from the Pre Reg Motor. Go to BSD 80.9 Registration (1/2) and troubleshoot the Pre Registration Motor circuit.
Y N Check the following:
Go to BSD 80.9 Registration (1/2)and troubleshoot the Pre Registration Motor circuit. • Takeaway Rolls 1/2/3 for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
Execute dC330, code [077-003 Takeaway Clutch 2].
• Pre Reg Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Clutch 2.
Y N • Drive gears for wear/breakage
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Driveand check the Takeaway Motor Clutch 2 for an open. • Drawer Connectors P/J 609 contact points for foreign objects/bent pins/burnout
Check the following: • If the fault persists, install a new TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11)
• Takeaway Rolls 1/2/3 for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown
• Pre Reg Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
• If the fault persists, install a new TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11)
and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2/15) one at a time in the order shown.
0 7 3 - 2 1 0 Tra y 3 L i f t U p Fa u l t R A P 0 7 3 - 2 1 1 Tra y 3 S i z e S e n s o r R A P
Five consecutive failures in the Tray Size Sensor that monitors Tray 3 at intervals of 100ms have
Tray 3 Lift Up Fault. The Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor did not turn on within the specified time after been detected.
the tray was inserted.
Procedure
Initial Actions Check the following:
• Clear any paper jam and switch the power Off then On. • The bottom of the Tray for broken link and damage
• Check for out-of-spec paper. • The Actuator at the rear of the Tray for operation failure
• Check the Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper • The Tray 3 Paper Size Sensor for failure: dC330, code [073-200], dC330, code [073-202]
Procedure • The connection between the Tray 3 Paper Size Sensor P/J 130, TM Drive PWB P/J 467 and MCU
PWB P/J 404 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact
Slide out the tray. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [073-
002] (Tray 3 Lift/Feed Motor). Select Start. If the fault persists, install a new the following parts in sequence:
The Tray 3 Lift/Feed Motor operates • Tray 3 Paper Size Sensor (PL 2.3)
Y N
• TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2)
Turn Off the power. Disconnect P/J 464 from the TM Drive PWB. Measure the wire-wound re- • MCU PWB (PL 1.2)
sistance of Tray 3 Lift/Feed Motor:
• P/J 464-A4 pin to pins P/J 464-A1
• P/J 464-A3 pin to pins P/J 464-A2
Every resistance is approx. 1.3 ohms.
Y N
Check the following for an open wire or poor contact. If the wires are good, install a
new the Tray 3 Lift Feed Motor (PL 80.5 Item 16).
• P/J 464-A4 to P/J 220-1
• P/J 464-A3 to P/J 220-2
• P/J 464-A2 to P/J 220-3
• P/J 464-A1 to P/J 220-4
Check the following for an open wire or poor contact. If the wires are good, install a new TM
Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• MCU PWB P/J 404-A14 to TM Drive PWB P/J 462-A1
• MCU PWB P/J 404-A13 to TM Drive PWB P/J 462-A2
Press the Stop button. Enter dC330, code [073-201] (Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor). Select Start. Man-
ually raising and lowering the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly, turn the sensor On, then Off.
The display changes between H and L.
Y N
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor.
Slide out the tray and perform the following:
• Manually rotate the Gear Pulley at the rear of the tray to check the tray smoothly goes up and
down.
• Check the couplings and gears are not broken. Check that the couplings are securely engaged in
each other when the tray is gently pushed in.
• Check for other problems including a mechanical load.
0 7 3 - 9 4 0 Tra y # 3 / T TM # 3 L i f t U p N G R A P
Procedure
1. Open tray 3, then verify there is no paper jammed in tray causing the error. Close tray 3.
2. Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor to verify the tray 3 level sensor operates correctly. Install
a new tray 3 level sensor, PL 80.5 Item 7, as required.
3. Perform GP 20, How to Check a Motor to verify the tray 3 lift/feed motor. Install a new tray 3
lift/feed motor, PL 80.5 Item 16, as required.
4. Check the harness between the TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 1, and the MCIU PWB, PL 1.2 Item
15, for loose connections or damage to the harness.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
a. TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
b. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 7 4 - 1 0 0 Tra y 4 Pr e Fe e d S e n s o r O n 0 7 4 - 1 0 1 Tra y 4 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n
Tray 4 Pre Feed Sensor did not turned On after paper is fed from Tray 4. Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor did not turned On within the specified time after the start of feed from Tray
4.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
CAUTION: Power Off and then Power On the DFE prior to Powering Off/On the IOT
• Clear any paper jam and Sensor the power Off then On.
and Accessories. The Accessories have their own power cord. Whenever a procedure
states to Power Off and then Power On, POPO, etc., powering Off and then powering • Check for out-of-spec paper.
On the IOT does NOT Power Off the Accessory. The Accessory will have to be Powered • Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper
Off and then On separately from the IOT by unplugging the Accessory power cord.
Procedure
Procedure
Check the following: Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [074-101 Tray 4 Feed Out
Sensor]. Move the actuator of the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor manually or with paper.
• Clear any paper jam and Sensor the power Off then On. The display changes.
• LH Cover Connector connection failure Y N
• [074-100 Tray 4 Pre Feed Sensor] Pre Feed Sensor operation failure Go to BSD 80.5 Tray Paper Feeding (2/2) and check the following wires for an open wire, short
or poor contact:
• Tray Nudger Solenoid operation failure
• Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133D-2 to TM Drive PWB P/J 464-B15
• Transport failure due to Feed Roll wear/deterioration/contamination
• Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133D-1 to TM Drive PWB P/J 464-B16
• [074-001 Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor] Tray 4 Feed Motor operation failure
• Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor P/J 133D-3 to TM Drive PWB P/J 464-B14
• [077-001 Takeaway Motor] Takeaway Motor operation failure
• [077-002 Takeaway Clutch 1] Takeaway Clutch 1 operation failure If OK, replace the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor (PL 80.10) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Execute dC330, code [074-001 Tray 4 Feed].
• Use of out-of-spec paper
There is operation noise from the Tray 4 Feed Lift Motor.
Y N
Go to BSD 70.9 Tray 4 Paper Stacking and troubleshoot the Tray 4 Lift/Feed Motor.
Execute dC330, code [077-001 Takeaway Motor].
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Motor.
Y N
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Drive and check the Takeaway Motor Circuit for an open.
Execute dC330, code [077-003 Takeaway Clutch 2].
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Clutch 2.
Y N
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Drive and check the Takeaway Motor Clutch 2 for an open.
Check the following:
• Feed Roll/Nudger Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Retard Roll for a problem
• Takeaway Rolls 1/2/3 for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
• If the results of the above checks are OK, replace TM Drive PWB PL 1.3 Item 2), IOT Drive PWB
(PL 1.2 Item 11) and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown.
0 7 4 - 1 0 2 Tra y 4 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n J a m 0 7 4 - 1 0 3 Tra y 4 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n
Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On Jam. The paper from Tray 4 did not turn on Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor with- The Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor did not turn On within the specified time during paper transport on the
in the specified time. Takeaway Path for paper fed from Tray 4
0 7 4 - 1 0 4 Pr e Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r O n J a m ( Tra y 4 ) 0 7 4 - 1 0 5 Re g i s t ra t i o n I n S e n s o r O n J a m ( Tra y 4 )
Pre Registration Sensor On Jam (Tray 4). The paper from tray 4 did not turn on the Pre-registration Registration Sensor On Jam (Tray 4). The paper conveyed from Tray 4 did not turn on the Reg Sen-
Sensor within the specified time. sor within the specified time.
0 7 4 - 2 1 0 Tra y 4 L i f t U p Fa u l t 0 7 4 - 2 1 1 Tra y 4 S i z e S e n s o r
Five consecutive failures in the Tray Size Sensor that monitors Tray 4 at intervals of 100ms have
Tray 4 Lift Up Fault. The Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor did not come on within the specified time after been detected.
the tray was inserted.
Procedure
Initial Actions Check the following:
• Clear any paper jam and Sensor the power Off then On. • The bottom of the Tray for broken link and damage
• Check for out-of-spec paper. • The Actuator at the rear of the Tray for operation failure
• Check the Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper • The Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor for failure: dC330, code [074-200], dC330, code [074-202] (PL 2.3)
Procedure • The connection between the Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor P/J 131 and the TM Drive PWB P/J 467
for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
Slide out the tray. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [074-
002] (Tray 4 Lift Motor). Select Start. If no problems are found, replace the following parts in sequence:
The Tray 4Lift/Feed Motor operates • Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor (PL 70.3)
Y N
• TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2)
Turn Off the power. Disconnect P/J 464 from the TM Drive PWB. Measure the wire-wound re- • MCU PWB (PL 1.2)
sistance of Tray 4 Lift/ Motor:
• P/J 220-1 to pin P/J 220-3
• P/J 220-2 to pin P/J 220-4
Every resistance is approx. 1.3 ohms.
Y N
Check the following for an open wire or poor contact. If the wires are good, replace the
Tray 4 Lift/Feed Motor (PL 80.7 Item 16).
• P/J 464-B4 to P/J 220-1
• P/J 464-B3 to P/J 220-2
• P/J 464-B2 to P/J 220-3
• P/J 464-B1 to P/J 220-4
Check the following for an open wire or poor contact. If the wires are good, replace TM Drive
PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• MCU PWB P/J 404-B3 to TM Drive PWB P/J 462-B12
• MCU PWB P/J 404-B2 to TM Drive PWB P/J 462-B13
Press the Stop button. Enter dC330, code [074-201] (Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor). Select Start. Man-
ually raising and lowering the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly, turn the sensor On, then Off.
The display changes between H and L.
Y N
Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor.
Slide out the tray and perform the following:
• Manually rotate the Gear Pulley at the rear of the tray to check the tray smoothly goes up and
down.
• Check the couplings and gears are not broken. Check that the couplings are securely engaged in
each other when the tray is gently pushed in.
• Check for other problems including a mechanical load.
0 7 4 - 9 4 0 Tra y # 4 L i f t U p N G R A P
Procedure
1. Open tray 4, then verify there is no paper jammed in tray causing the error. Close tray 4.
2. Perform GP 21, How to Check a Sensor to verify the tray 4 level sensor operates correctly. Install
a new tray 4 level sensor, PL 80.7 Item 7, as required.
3. Perform GP 20, How to Check a Motor to verify the tray 4 lift/feed motor. Install a new tray 4
lift/feed motor, PL 80.7 Item 16, as required.
4. Check the harness between the TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 1, and the MCIU PWB, PL 1.2 Item
15, for loose connections or damage to the harness.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as required:
a. TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2.
b. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 7 5 - 1 0 9 Pa p e r fr o m Tra y 5 O n Pr e Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r 0 7 5 - 1 3 5 Re g i . I n S e n s o r O n J a m ( M S I )
Paper from Tray 5 does not turn On Pre Registration Sensor within a spec time. Paper from Tray 5 does not turn on the Registration Sensor within a spec time.
0 7 5 - 2 1 0 Tra y 5 L i f t U p S e n s o r O n 0 7 5 - 2 1 1 Tra y 5 L i f t D o w n S e n s o r O n
Tray 5 Lift Up Sensor does not turn On a spec time after Tray 5 starts lifting up. Tray 5 Lift Down Sensor does not turn On a spec time after Tray 5 starts lowering.
Note: The following procedure must be performed with the Tray 5 Cover Interlock Switch closed. Note: The following procedure must be performed with the Tray 5 Cover Interlock Switch closed.
Initial Actions Procedure
• Clear any paper jam and switch the power Off then On.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [075-006] (Down). Select
• Check for out-of-spec paper. Start.
• Check the Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper The tray has lowered.
Y N
Procedure Remove the Tray 5 Rear Cover. Manually rotate the Tray 5 Lifter gears.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [075-200 Tray 5 Lift Up The gears rotate with no load.
Sensor]. Lift the Tray Elevator up and down manually. Y N
Does the display change? Remove any load from the Lift Down mechanism.
Y N +24VDC is measured between P/J 226-2 (+) on the Tray 5 Lift Motor and GND (-).
Go to BSD 70.10 MSI Paper Stacking and troubleshoot the Tray 5 Lift Up Sensor. Y N
Execute dC330, code [075-005 Tray 5 Lift Motor: Lift Up (CW) Sensor Stop]. Check the wire between P/J 435-6 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J 226-1 on the Tray 5
Lift Motor for an open wire or poor contact. If the wire is good, replace the IOT Drive
Does the Tray 5 Nudger Roll lift down and the Tray 5 Lifter lift up stopping automatically at the
PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11).
normal height?
Y N Enter dC330, code [075-006] (Down). Select Start.
Go to BSD 70.10 MSI Paper Stacking and troubleshoot the Tray 5 Lift Up Motor. +1VDC or less is measured between P/J 226-2 (+) on the Tray 5 Lift Motor and GND (-).
Y N
Check the operation of the gear section of the Elevator Tray.
Disconnect and reconnect the cable between P/J 431 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J
The gear section operates properly.
401 on the MCU PWB. If this does not resolve the problem, replace the IOT Drive PWB
Y N
(PL 1.2 Item 11) and MCU PWB (PL 1.2) in that order.
Replace the faulty parts in the gear section.
+24VDC is measured between P/J 226-1 (+) on the Tray 5 Lift Motor and GND (-).
Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Y N
Check the wire between P/J 435-5 on the IOT Drive PWB and 226-1 on the Tray 5 Lift
Motor for an open wire or poor contact
Replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 70.12).
Press the Stop button. Enter dC330, code [075-201] (Tray 5 Down Sensor). Select Start. While rais-
ing and lowering the Tray 5 Bottom Plate, turn On then Off the Tray 5 Lift Down Sensor.
The display changes between H and L.
Y N
Go to BSD 70.10 MSI Paper Stacking and troubleshoot the Tray 5 Down Sensor.
Check if there were any obstacles on the Tray 5 Bottom Plate when the failure occurred preventing
the tray from freely going up and down. If the failure frequently occurs, replace the IOT Drive PWB
(PL 1.2 Item 11) and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2) in that order.
0 7 7 - 1 0 3 Fu s e r E x i t S e n s o r O f f J a m S t ra i g h t R A P
The Fuser Exit Sensor did not turn off within the specified time in straight exit mode.
Initial Actions
• Clear any paper jam and switch the power Off then On.
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [010-201 Fuser Exit Sensor].
Move the actuator of the Fuser Exit Sensor manually or with paper.
The display changes.
Y N
Go to BSD 10.5 Fusing.
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-2 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A2
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-1 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A3
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-3 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A1
If OK, replace the Fuser Assembly (PL 1.1) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Execute dC330, code [077-010 Exit Motor].
There is operation noise from the Exit Motor.
Y N
Go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and check the wire-wound resistance of Exit Motor is approx-
imately. 1.3 ohms at the measurement points below.
• P/J222-2 to pins 1/3
• P/J222-5 to pins 4/6
If OK, go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and troubleshoot the Exit Motor circuit.
Check the following:
• Fuser Exit Rolls for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Connectors P/J 612 for a poor connection
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Check the exit roll paper guide for being deformed.
• If the results of the above checks are OK, replace TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), and the MCU
PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown.
0 7 7 - 1 0 6 Fu s e r E x i t S e n s o r O n J a m R A P Y N
Go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and check the wire-wound resistance of Exit Motor is approx-
imately. 1.3 ohms at the measurement points below.
The Fuser Exit Sensor did not come on within the specified time after the Registration Motor came
on. • P/J222-2 to pins 1/3
• P/J222-5 to pins 4/6
Initial Actions
If OK, go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and troubleshoot the Exit Motor circuit.
• Clear any paper jam and switch the power Off then On.
Check the following:
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Fuser Exit Rolls for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper.
• Connectors P/J 612 for a poor connection
• Remove the Fuser. Remove the Fuser Entrance Baffle. Look into the Fuser for any obstruction,
and remove. Clean and replace the baffle. Re-install the Fuser. • Drive gears for wear/breakage
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
Procedure
• If the results of the above checks are OK, replace TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), and the MCU
Check the condition of the IBT belt. PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown.
The IBT belt is in proper condition without being damaged.
Y N
Replace the IBT Belt (PL 90.14 Item 14).
The fed sheet of paper is stuck to the IBT belt.
Y N
Remove the paper. If the problem returns, check the installation of the 2nd BTR.
Check the installation condition of the Fuser.
The Fuser is properly installed.
Y N
Install the Fuser properly.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [010-201 Fuser Exit Sensor].
Move the actuator of the Fuser Exit Sensor manually or with paper.
The display changes.
Y N
Go to BSD 10.5 Fusing and check the following wires for an open wire, short or poor contact:
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-2 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A2
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-1 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A3
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-3 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A1
If OK, replace the Fuser Assembly (PL 1.1) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Execute dC330, code [010-004 Fuser Drive Motor].
There is operation noise from the Fuser Drive Motor.
Y N
Go to BSD 10.1 Fusing Unit Drive and Nip Control (1/2) and check the wire-wound resistance
of Fuser Drive Motor is approximately. 1.3 ohms at the measurement points below.
• P/J 212-2 to pins 1/3
• P/J 212-5 to pins 4/6/7
If OK, go to BSD 10.1 Fusing Unit Drive and Nip Control (1/2) and troubleshoot the Fuser
Drive Motor circuit.
Execute dC330, code [077-010 Exit Motor].
There is operation noise from the Exit Motor.
0 7 7 - 1 0 7 Fu s e r E x i t S e n s o r O f f J a m I n v e r t R A P 0 7 7 - 1 0 9 I OT E x i t S e n s o r O n J a m S t r a i g h t R A P
(1/2)
The Fuser Exit Sensor did not turn off within the specified time in invert exit mode.
The IOT Exit Sensor did not come on at the specified time in non-invert mode. (Straight output)
Initial Actions
• Clear any paper jam and switch the power Off then On.
Initial Actions
• Clear any paper jam, perform GP 19, to switch off, then switch on the machine.
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper
• Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper
Procedure
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [010-201 Fuser Exit Sensor].
Move the actuator of the Fuser Exit Sensor manually or with paper. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [010-201] to energize the
The display changes. Fuser Exit Sensor. Move the actuator of the Fuser Exit Sensor manually or with paper to verify
Y N operation.
Go to BSD 10.5 Fusing and check the following wires for an open wire, short or poor contact: The display changes.
Y N
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-2 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A2
Go to BSD 10.5 Fusing and check the following wires for an open wire, short or poor contact:
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-1 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A3
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-2 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A2
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-3 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A1
• Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-1 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A3
If OK, replace the Fuser Assembly (PL 1.1) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). • Fuser Exit Sensor P/J 149-3 to MCU PWB P/J 405-A1
Execute dC330, code [077-013 Inverter Gate Solenoid In].
If OK, replace the Fuser Assembly (PL 10.1) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
There is operation noise from the Inverter Gate Solenoid.
Y N Execute dC330, code [077-013] to actuate the Inverter Gate Solenoid In.
Go to BSD 10.6 Inverter (1/2) and troubleshoot the Inverter Gate Solenoid circuit. There is operation noise from the Inverter Gate Solenoid.
Y N
Execute dC330, code [077-010 Exit Motor].
There is operation noise from the Exit Motor. • Go to BSD 10.7 Inverter (2/2),then troubleshoot the Inverter Gate Solenoid circuit.
Y N • Install a new Inverter gate Solenoid, PL 10.9 item 31.
Go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and check the wire-wound resistance of Exit Motor is approx- Execute dC330, code [077-008] to run the Exit Motor.
imately. 1.3 ohms at the measurement points below.
There is operation noise from the Exit Motor.
• P/J222-2 to pins 1/3 Y N
• P/J222-5 to pins 4/6 Go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit, then check the wire-wound resistance of the Exit Motor to
approximately 1.3 ohms at the measurement points below.
If OK, go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and troubleshoot the Exit Motor circuit.
• P/J222-2 to pins 1/3
Execute dC330, code [077-016 Reverse Invert Solenoid].
There is operation noise from the Reverse Invert Solenoid. • P/J222-5 to pins 4/6
Y N If OK, refer to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit (1/2),to troubleshoot the Exit Motor circuit.
Go to BSD 10.7 Inverter (2/2) and troubleshoot the Reverse Gate Solenoid circuit. Check the following:
Check the following:
• Invert Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Invert Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Invert Gate for an improper operation
• Invert Gate for an improper operation
• Fuser Exit Rolls for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Fuser Exit Rolls for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Connectors P/J 612 for a poor connection
• Connectors P/J 612 for a poor connection
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Check/Adjust the Release Invert Solenoid, PL 10.5.
• Check/Adjust the Release Invert Solenoid (PL 10.5).
• If the results of the above checks are OK, install a new TM Drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2, then the
• If the results of the above checks are OK, replace TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), and the MCU MCU PWB, , one at a time in order.
PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown.
0 7 7 - 1 1 3 I OT E x i t S e n s o r O f f J a m S t r a i g h t R A P 0 7 7 - 1 1 5 I OT E x i t S e n s o r O f f J a m I n v e r t R A P
The IOT Exit Sensor did not turn off at the specified time in non-invert mode. The IOT Exit Sensor did not turn off within the specified time in invert exit mode.
Procedure Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-110 IOT Exit Sensor]. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-110 IOT Exit Sensor].
Move the actuator of the IOT Exit Sensor manually or with paper. Move the actuator of the IOT Exit Sensor manually or with paper.
The display changes. The display changes.
Y N Y N
Go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and check the following wires for an open wire, short or poor Go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and check the following wires for an open wire, short or poor
contact: contact:
• IOT Exit Sensor P/J111-2 to TM Drive PWB P/J 465-B5 • IOT Exit Sensor P/J111-2 to TM Drive PWB P/J 465-B5
• IOT Exit Sensor P/J111-1 to TM Drive PWB P/J 465-B6 • IOT Exit Sensor P/J111-1 to TM Drive PWB P/J 465-B6
• IOT Exit Sensor P/J111-3 to TM Drive PWB P/J 465-B4 • IOT Exit Sensor P/J111-3 to TM Drive PWB P/J 465-B4
• MCU PWB P/J 404-B10 to TM Drive PWB P/J 462-B5 • MCU PWB P/J 404-B10 to TM Drive PWB P/J 462-B5
If OK, replace the IOT Exit Sensor (PL 10.4) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If OK, replace the IOT Exit Sensor (PL 10.4) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Execute dC330, code [077-012 Inverter Gate Solenoid Exit]. Execute dC330, code [077-012 Inverter Gate Solenoid Exit].
There is operation noise from the Inverter Gate Solenoid. There is operation noise from the Inverter Gate Solenoid.
Y N Y N
Go to BSD 10.6 Inverter (1/2) and troubleshoot the Inverter Gate Solenoid circuit. Go to BSD 10.6 Inverter (1/2) and troubleshoot the Inverter Gate Solenoid circuit.
Execute dC330, code [077-010 Exit Motor]. Execute dC330, code [077-010 Exit Motor].
There is operation noise from the Exit Motor. There is operation noise from the Exit Motor.
Y N Y N
Go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and check the wire-wound resistance of Exit Motor is approx- Go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and check the wire-wound resistance of Exit Motor is approx-
imately. 1.3 ohms at the measurement points below. imately. 1.3 ohms at the measurement points below.
• P/J222-2 to pins 1/3 • P/J222-2 to pins 1/3
• P/J222-5 to pins 4/6 • P/J222-5 to pins 4/6
If OK, go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and troubleshoot the Exit Motor circuit. If OK, go to BSD 10.8 Fused Paper Exit and troubleshoot the Exit Motor circuit.
Check the following: Check the following:
• Finisher for poor docking • Finisher for poor docking
• Exit Rolls for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation • Exit Rolls for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Drawer Connectors P/J 608 contact points for foreign objects/bent pins/burnout • Drawer Connectors P/J 608 contact points for foreign objects/bent pins/burnout
• Drive gears for wear/breakage • Drive gears for wear/breakage
• Check for out-of-spec paper. • Check for out-of-spec paper.
• If the results of the above checks are OK, replace TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), and the MCU • If the results of the above checks are OK, replace TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), and the MCU
PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown. PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown.
0 7 7 - 1 1 8 P r e Re g i s t r a t i o n I n S e n s o r O n ( D u p l e x ) R A P • If the results of the above checks are OK, replace TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), IOT Drive PWB
(PL 1.2 Item 11) and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown
The paper transported from duplex did not turn on the Pre Registration In Sensor within the speci-
fied time.
Initial Actions
• Clear any jam and switch the power Off then On.
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-100 Pre Registration
In Sensor]. Place paper in front of the Pre Registration In Sensor.
The display changes.
Y N
Go to BSD 80.9 Registration (1/2) and check the following for an open wire, short or poor
contact:
• Pre Registration In Sensor P/J 121-2 to IOT Drive PWB P/J 439-A2
• Pre Registration In Sensor P/J 121-1 to IOT Drive PWB P/J 439-A3
• Pre Registration In Sensor P/J 121-3 to IOT Drive PWB P/J 439-A1
If OK, replace the Pre Registration In Sensor (PL 80.14 Item 16) before replacing the IOT
Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11).
Execute dC330, code [077-006 Pre Registration Motor: 640mm/s].
There is operation noise from the Pre Registration Motor.
Y N
Check the wire-wound resistance of Pre Registration Motor is approximately. 0.8 ohms at the
measurement points below.
• P/J 229-2 to pins 1/3
• P/J 229-5 to pins 4/6
If OK, go to BSD 80.9 Registration (1/2) and troubleshoot the Pre Registration Motor circuit.
Execute dC330, code [077-011 (Duplex Motor Forward) and 077-012 (Duplex Motor Reverse)].
There is operation noise from the Duplex Motor.
Y N
Check the wire-wound resistance of Duplex Motor is approximately. 0.8 ohms at the measure-
ment points below.
• P/J 219-2 to pins 1/3
• P/J 219-5 to pins 4/6
If OK, go to BSD 10.10 Duplex Transmission and troubleshoot the Duplex Motor circuit.
Check the following:
• Duplex Path Roll 2 for dirt/paper particles/wear/ poor rotation
• Duplex Out Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Pre Registration Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
• Drawer Connectors P/J 607A contact points for foreign objects/bent pins/burnout
• Drawer Connectors P/J 609 contact points for foreign objects/bent pins/burnout
0 7 7 - 1 2 0 Po s t 2 n d BT R S e n s o r O n J A M R A P 0 7 7 - 1 2 1 Po s t 2 n d BT R S e n s o r Pa p e r O n B e l t J A M R A P
Post 2nd BTR Sensor On JAM Post 2nd BTR Sensor Off JAM
Initial Actions Initial Actions
• Turn the power Off then On.
CAUTION: Power Off and then Power On the DFE prior to Powering Off/On the IOT
• Check for foreign substances on the paper transport path. and Accessories. The Accessories have their own power cord. Whenever a procedure
• This fault can occur if the IBT Drive Motor fails. Check fault history for 042-324 faults. If found, states to Power Off and then Power On, POPO, etc., powering Off and then powering
go to the 042-324 and troubleshoot that fault first. On the IOT does NOT Power Off the Accessory. The Accessory will have to be Powered
Off and then On separately from the IOT by unplugging the Accessory power cord.
Procedure
• Turn the power Off then On.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-007 Registration • Remove the foreign substances on the paper transport path.
Motor].
• Verify that the Paper Trays are programmed correctly if 3 hole paper is used. It will cause inter-
The Registration Roll turns.
mittent jams
Y N
Check the gears in the Registration Transport for damage. Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example:
MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections
If OK, go to BSD 80.9 Registration (1/2) and troubleshoot the Registration Motor circuit. for broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several
Check the condition of the Transfer Belt. times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants
The belt is undamaged and installed correctly. will change the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a
Y N multimeter.
Enter dC330, code [042-018 IBT Steering Motor (CW) Low Current]. Procedure
The IBT Steering Motor comes On.
Y N Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-007 Registration
Perform, GP 20, How to Check a Motor, to troubleshoot the IBT Steering Motor, BSD Motor].
90.18 IBT Belt Drive Control. The Registration Roll turns.
Reinstall/adjust/replace the Transfer Belt (PL 90.14). Y N
The fed sheet of paper is stuck to the IBT belt. Check the gears in the Registration Transport for damage.
Y N
If OK, go to BSD 80.9 Registration (1/2) and troubleshoot the Registration Motor circuit.
Remove the paper. If the problem returns, check the installation of the 2nd BTR.
Check the condition of the Transfer Belt.
Enter dC330, code [042-200 Belt Home Position Sensor].
The belt is undamaged and installed correctly.
The IBT Belt Home position can be detected. Y N
Y N
Reinstall/adjust/replace the Transfer Belt (PL 90.14).
Perform, GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the Transfer Belt Home Sensor, BSD
The fed sheet of paper is stuck to the IBT belt.
90.19 IBT Belt Steering Control.
Y N
Enter dC330, code [094-202 Post 2nd BTR Sensor]. Place paper in front of the Post 2nd BTR Sensor.
Remove the paper. If the problem returns, check the installation of the 2nd BTR.
The display changes.
Enter dC330, code [042-018 IBT Steering Motor (CW) Low Current].
Y N
The IBT Steering Motor comes On.
Perform, GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the Post 2nd BTR Sensor BSD 90.25
Y N
2nd Transfer & 2nd BTR Cleaning (2/2).
Perform, GP 20, How to Check a Motor, to troubleshoot the IBT Steering Motor, BSD 90.19
Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
IBT Belt Steering Control.
Select [042-200 Belt Home Position Sensor].
The IBT Belt Home position can be detected.
Y N
Perform, GP 21, How to Check a Sensor, to troubleshoot the Transfer Belt Home Sensor, BSD
90.18 IBT Belt Drive Control.
Enter dC330, code [094-202 Post 2nd BTR Sensor]. Place paper in front of the Post 2nd BTR Sensor.
The display changes.
077-130 Duplex Out Sensor ON Jam RAP • Duplex out roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Drawer connectors P/J 607B contact points for foreign objects/bent pins/burnout
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
Duplex out sensor does not turn ON at specified time after duplex in sensor turns ON.
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
Initial Actions • If the results of the above checks are OK, replace TM drive PWB, PL 1.3 Item 2, and the MCU
• Check inverter 1 transport upper chute, PL 10.7 Item 10, for proper installation. PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, one at a time in the order shown.
1. Verify the inverter duplex gate, PL 10.7 Item 11, is not blocked by the inverter transport 1
upper.
2. Correct the inverter 1 transport upper as required to allow the inverter duplex gate to open
properly.
• Clear all paper jams, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19, to attempt clearing the
fault.
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Paper path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper.
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-109 duplex out sen-
sor]. Move the actuator of the duplex out sensor manually or with paper.
The display changes.
Y N
Go to BSD 10.10 Duplex Transmission and check the following wires for an open wire, short or
poor contact:
• Duplex out sensor P/J 106-2 to IOT drive PWB P/J 439-A13
• Duplex out sensor P/J 106-1 to IOT drive PWB P/J 439-A14
• Duplex out sensor P/J 106-3 to IOT drive PWB P/J 439-A12
• IOT drive PWB J431-B12 to MCU PWB P/J 403-B4
If OK, replace the duplex out sensor, PL 80.21 Item 6, before replacing the IOT drive PWB, PL
1.2 Item 11.
Execute dC330, code [077-009 invert motor].
There is operation noise from the Invert Motor.
Y N
Go to BSD 10.6 Inverter (1/2) and check the wire-wound resistance of invert motor is approxi-
mately. 1.3 ohms at the measurement points below.
• P/J221-2 to pins 1/3
• P/J221-5 to pins 4/6
If OK, go to BSD 10.6 Inverter (1/2) and troubleshoot the invert motor circuit.
Execute dC330, code [077-011 duplex motor].
There is operation noise from the Duplex Motor.
Y N
Check the wire-wound resistance of duplex motor is approximately 4.6 ohms at the measure-
ment points below.
• P/J 219-2 to pins 1/3
• P/J 219-5 to pins 4/6
If OK, go to BSD 10.10 Duplex Transmission and troubleshoot the duplex motor circuit.
Check the following:
• Duplex path roll 2 for dirt/paper particles/wear/ poor rotation
07 7 - 1 3 2 I n ve r t I n Se n s o r Of f Ja m R A P 0 7 7 - 1 4 5 L e a d Re g i s t r a t i o n E r r o r R A P
When Registration Sync to Registration Out Sensor time deviates, a design value or more, for every
The Invert In Sensor does not turn OFF within the specified time during the paper transportation process speed, and when NVM [Lead Registration Error Switch] = “1: Jam (Dynamic)” is selected, the
for Face Down output. fault is sent to make type change to Jam.
07 7 - 1 6 8 I n ve r t I n Se n s o r Of f C h e c k Ja m R A P 0 7 7 - 3 0 0 Fr o n t C o v e r I n t e r l o c k O p e n R A P
0 7 7 - 3 0 1 Le f t H a n d Co v e r I n t e r l o c k O p e n R A P 0 7 7 - 3 0 2 R i g h t H a n d Co v e r I n t e r l o c k O p e n R A P
The Left Hand Interlock is open. The Right Hand Cover Interlock is open
0 7 7 - 3 0 3 Tra n s fe r M o d u l e 2 I n t e r l o c k O p e n R A P 0 7 7 - 3 0 4 M S I Tra y 5 / By p a s s Co v e r I n t e r l o c k O p e n R A P
Transfer Module 2 Interlock Open. The MSI Tray 5/Bypass Cover Interlock is open
0 7 7 - 3 1 2 Fe e d e r Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l R A P 0 7 7 - 3 2 0 A l l Fe e d Tra y B r o ke n Fa i l R A P
Feeder Communication Fault All Feed Trays including MSI and HCF inoperative.
Initial Actions Initial Actions
Switch the power Off, then On, if the problem still exists, continue with the RAP. CAUTION: Power Off and then Power On the DFE prior to Powering Off/On the IOT
and Accessories. The Accessories have their own power cord. Whenever a procedure
Procedure states to Power Off and then Power On, POPO, etc., powering Off and then powering
1. Turn the power OFF and ON. On the IOT does NOT Power Off the Accessory. The Accessory will have to be Powered
2. Turn OFF the power and check the following: Off and then On separately from the IOT by unplugging the Accessory power cord.
Note: For more information on the PWB and power supply at the HCF, refer to the HCF Supple- Switch the power Off, then on, if the problem still exists, continue with the RAP.
mentary Service Manual.
Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example:
• The connection between the MCU PWB J411 and the HCF Circuit Board for open circuit, MCU PWB, IOT PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections for broken,
short circuit, and poor contact. bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several times to remove
• The connection between the IOT Drive PWB J435 and the HCF Circuit Board for open circuit, contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants will change the ma-
short circuit, and poor contact. chine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a multimeter.
• The Drawer Connector (DP/DJ678, DP/DJ679) for broken/bent pins, burn damage, and for- Procedure
eign substances. • Check Fuse F6001 on the Main Low Voltage Power Supply
• The power supply at the HCF. • Check Fuse F1 on the TM Drive PWB
If no problem is found, replace the following parts in sequence. • Check Fuse F10 on the TM Drive PWB
• MCU PWB (PL 1.2 Item 15)
• IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11)
0 7 7 - 9 0 9 I OT S t a t i c J a m Fa u l t R A P 0 7 7 - 9 1 1 Pa p e r S i z e M i s m a t c h , J o b C o n t i n u e R A P
The selected paper size is different from the size of the paper loaded.
One of the IOT sensors detected paper when power was turned on or when an interlock was closed.
Procedure
Initial Actions Verify the machine UI settings and the paper in the tray are correct for the job. Change the ma-
Perform the following: chuine UI settings or laod the correct paper for the job requested.
Procedure
If the problem persists after performing the Initial Actions, check the following sensors in Table 1 to
determine which sensor is causing the problem. Execute dC330, and the corresponding code in the
table for the device. Actuate each sensor as appropriate to determine if the display changes on ac-
tuation. See dC330, for a complete list of sensors.
Table 1 IOT Sensors
Component
Sensor Control Code BSD
0 7 7 - 9 6 7 A P S Pa p e r Ty p e Fa u l t R A P 0 7 7 - 9 6 8 Pa p e r Ty p e C h a n g e d Fa u l t R A P
The specified paper type and the paper type being used are different. The type of paper in the tray was changed.
0 7 8 - 1 0 1 Tra y 1 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r O n
The Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor did not come on within the specified time after the start of feed from
Tray 6 (HCF).
Initial Actions
• Clear any paper jam and switch the power Off then On.
• Check for out-of-spec paper.
• Paper Path for a foreign object/burr/piece of paper
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, GP 3, dC330, code [071-101 Feed Out Sensor 1]. Move the actuator of the Tray 1
Feed Out Sensor manually or with paper.
The display changes.
Y N
Go to BSD 80.4 Tray Paper Feeding (1/2) and check the following wires for an open wire, short
or poor contact:
• Feed Out Sensor 1 P/J 133A-2 to MCU PWB P/J 416-A12
• Feed Out Sensor 1 P/J 133A-1 to MCU PWB P/J 416-A13
• Feed Out Sensor 1 P/J 133A-3 to MCU PWB P/J 416-A11
If OK, install a new Feed Out Sensor 1 (PL 80.14) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Execute dC330, code [077-001 Takeaway Motor].
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Motor.
Y N
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Drive and check the Takeaway Motor Circuit for an open.
Execute dC330, code [077-002 Takeaway Clutch 1].
There is operation noise from the Takeaway Clutch 1.
Y N
Go to BSD 80.3 Take Away Drive and check the Takeaway Motor Clutch 1 for an open.
Check the following:
• Takeaway Rolls 1/2/3 for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• HCF and IOT for a poor docking
• HCF Transport Belt for poor tension
• HCF Transport Roll for dirt/paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• HCF Takeaway Rolls 1-3 for dirt/ paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• HCF Exit Roll for dirt/ paper particles/wear/a poor rotation
• Drive gears for wear/breakage
• If the results of the above checks are OK, install a new TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2), and the
MCU PWB (PL 1.2) one at a time in the order shown.
0 8 9 - 6 0 0 I n c o r r e c t Fa s t S c a n Po s i t i o n i n g Cy a n
Incorrect Fast Scan positioning for the reference color Cyan was detected during fine adjustment.
Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults.
Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be
resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority):
1. 089-616
2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613,
089-614, 089-615
3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603
4. 089-600
5. 089-617
Procedure
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Switch the power
On.
If the fault persists, run ADJ 9.13, Belt Edge Learn.
If the fault persists, run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
If the fault persists, go to 042-602 Belt Edge Check RAP.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Switch the power Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Switch the power
On. On.
If the fault persists, run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8). If the fault persists, run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
If the fault persists, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16) and run Registration Control If the fault persists, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16) and run Registration Control
- Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8) again. - Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8) again.
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 8 9 - 6 0 3 O U T E R M O B S e n s o r Fa u l t 0 8 9 - 6 0 4 I N N E R M O B S e n s o r Fa u l t
The OUTER MOB Sensor failed to detect the fine-adjustment patterns properly during fine The INNER MOB Sensor failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Y rough
adjustment. adjustment.
Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults. Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults.
Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be
resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority): resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority):
1. 089-616 1. 089-616
2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613, 2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613,
089-614, 089-615 089-614, 089-615
3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603 3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603
4. 089-600 4. 089-600
5. 089-617 5. 089-617
Initial Actions Initial Actions
Verify that the MOB ADC Assembly is installed correctly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface
of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc-
Procedure curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14).
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Switch the power Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On.
On.
Procedure
If the fault persists, run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed.
If the fault persists, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16) and run Registration Control The density is normal.
- Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8) again. Y N
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP.
Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex-
ceeds the A4L width (297mm).
Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll.
For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis-
tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6).
If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the
MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly.
If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control -
Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see
ADJ 9.8).
0 8 9 - 6 0 7 I N N E R M O B S e n s o r M Ro u g h A D J 0 8 9 - 6 0 8 C E N T E R M O B S e n s o r M Ro u g h A D J
The INNER MOB Sensor failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns correctly during Magenta The CENTER MOB Sensor failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Magenta
rough adjustment. rough adjustment.
Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults. Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults.
Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be
resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority): resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority):
1. 089-616 1. 089-616
2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613, 2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613,
089-614, 089-615 089-614, 089-615
3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603 3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603
4. 089-600 4. 089-600
5. 089-617 5. 089-617
Initial Actions Initial Actions
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface
of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc- of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc-
curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14) curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14).
Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On. Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed.
The density is normal. The density is normal.
Y N Y N
Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP. Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP.
Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex- Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex-
ceeds the A4L width (297mm). ceeds the A4L width (297mm).
Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll. Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll.
For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis- For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis-
tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6). tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6).
If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the
MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly. MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly.
If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control - If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control -
Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8). Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see
ADJ 9.8). ADJ 9.8).
0 8 9 - 6 0 9 O U T E R M O B S e n s o r M Ro u g h A D J 0 8 9 - 6 1 0 I N N E R M O B S e n s o r C Ro u g h A D J
The OUTER MOB Sensor failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Magenta The INNER MOB Sensor failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Cyan rough
rough adjustment. adjustment.
Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults. Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults.
Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be
resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority): resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority):
1. 089-616 1. 089-616
2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613, 2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613,
089-614, 089-615 089-614, 089-615
3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603 3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603
4. 089-600 4. 089-600
5. 089-617 5. 089-617
Initial Actions Initial Actions
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface
of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc- of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc-
curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14). curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14).
Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On. Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed.
The density is normal. The density is normal.
Y N Y N
Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP. Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP.
Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex- Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex-
ceeds the A4L width (297mm). ceeds the A4L width (297mm).
Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll. Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll.
For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis- For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis-
tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6). tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6).
If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the
MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly. MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly.
If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control - If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control -
Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8). Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see
ADJ 9.8). ADJ 9.8).
0 8 9 - 6 1 1 C E N T E R M O B S e n s o r C Ro u g h A D J 0 8 9 - 6 1 2 M O B S e n s o r O U T C Ro u g h A D J
The CENTER MOB Sensor failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Cyan The MOB Sensor OUT failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Cyan rough
rough adjustment. adjustment.
Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults. Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults.
Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be
resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority): resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority):
1. 089-616 1. 089-616
2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613, 2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613,
089-614, 089-615 089-614, 089-615
3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603 3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603
4. 089-600 4. 089-600
5. 089-617 5. 089-617
Initial Actions Initial Actions
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface
of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc- of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc-
curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14). curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14).
Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On. Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed.
The density is normal. The density is normal.
Y N Y N
Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP. Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP.
Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex- Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex-
ceeds the A4L width (297mm). ceeds the A4L width (297mm).
Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll. Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll.
For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis- For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis-
tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6). tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6).
If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the
MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly. MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly.
If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control - If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control -
Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8). Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see
ADJ 9.8). ADJ 9.8).
0 8 9 - 6 1 3 I N N E R M O B S e n s o r K Ro u g h A D J 0 8 9 - 6 1 4 C E N T E R M O B S e n s o r K Ro u g h A D J
The INNER MOB Sensor failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Black rough The CENTER MOB Sensor failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Black
adjustment. rough adjustment.
Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults. Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults.
Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be
resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority): resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority):
1. 089-616 1. 089-616
2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613, 2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613,
089-614, 089-615 089-614, 089-615
3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603 3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603
4. 089-600 4. 089-600
5. 089-617 5. 089-617
Initial Actions Initial Actions
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface
of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc- of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc-
curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14). curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14).
Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On. Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed. Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed.
The density is normal. The density is normal.
Y N Y N
Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP. Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP.
Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex- Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex-
ceeds the A4L width (297mm). ceeds the A4L width (297mm).
Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll. Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll.
For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis- For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis-
tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6). tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6).
If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the
MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly. MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly.
If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control - If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control -
Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8). Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see
ADJ 9.8). ADJ 9.8).
0 8 9 - 6 1 5 M O B S e n s o r O U T K Ro u g h A D J 0 8 9 - 6 1 6 RC D a t a O v e r F l o w Fa u l t
The MOB Sensor OUT failed to detect the rough-adjustment patterns properly during Black rough
The calculated adjustment amount has exceeded the specifiable range.
adjustment.
Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults.
Refer to Printing CE Reports and print a Fault Report. Examine the report for any Chain 089 faults.
Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be
Troubleshoot any Chain 089 faults according to the following priority (lower priority failures may be
resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority):
resolved by correcting a failure of higher priority):
1. 089-616
1. 089-616
2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613,
2. 089-604, 089-605, 089-606, 089-607, 089-608, 089-609, 089-610, 089-611, 089-612, 089-613,
089-614, 089-615
089-614, 089-615
3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603
3. 089-601, 089-602, 089-603
4. 089-600
4. 089-600
5. 089-617
5. 089-617
Initial Actions Initial Actions
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and IBT Module. Switch the power On.
Switch the power Off and remove and reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module. Check the surface
of the Transfer belt for even surface, scratches, or distortion around the area where the failure oc-
curred. install a new Transfer belt if damaged (PL 90.14). Procedure
Reinstall each Drum and Transfer Module and switch the power On. Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8).
Identify the items that are out of the adjustable range from the following.
Procedure
• Fast Scan Margin: -4720 to +4720
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern, select test pattern 9. Check the density of the color that failed. • Slow Scan Margin: -4720 to +4720
The density is normal.
Y N • Skew: -540 to +540
Go to IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP. • Bow: -140 to +140
• Fast Scan Magnification (All%): -3040 to +3040
Note: The distance between the Registration Control patches in the IN-OUT direction (304mm) ex-
ceeds the A4L width (297mm). • Fast Scan Horizontal Magnification (Left and Right%): -660 to +660
Any of the following is in the adjustable range: Fast Scan Margin, Slow Scan Margin, Fast Scan
Check the areas other than the paper path area on both sides of the Mag Roll.
Magnification, or Fast Scan Horizontal Magnification.
For the color that the failure occurred, examine the Mag Roll for damage, foreign substance, or dis- Y N
tortion. If the Mag Roll is damaged, install a new Developer Housing Kit (PL 90.6). install a new Drum of the relevant color. If the trouble persists, install a new ROS Assembly
(PL 5.1).
If there is no damage or contamination, check the wiring for an open or short circuit between the Any of the following is in the adjustable range: Slow Scan Margin or Fast Scan Horizontal
MCU PWB and the MOB ADC Assembly. Magnification.
If the wiring is OK, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Run Registration Control - Y N
Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8). Every color is aligned in the same direction.
Y N
If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Run Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see install a new ROS Assembly of that color (PL 5.1).
ADJ 9.8).
install a new MOB ADC Assy (PL 1.1 Item 16).
If the fault persists install a new ROS Assembly for that color (PL 5.1).
The Slow Scan Margin is in the adjustable range.
Y N
install a new ROS Assembly of that color (PL 5.1).
install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 8 9 - 6 1 7 RC D a t a O v e r Ra n g e Fa u l t 0 8 9 - 6 2 1 RC Te m p S e n s o r Fa u l t
0 8 9 - 6 3 9 L e a d Re g i s t r a t i o n O u t o f Ra n g e 0 8 9 - 6 7 4 , 0 8 9 - 6 7 5 , 0 8 9 - 6 7 6 M O B L E D Fa i l R A P
Initial Actions
• Remove the MOB ADC Assembly and check the MOB In Sensor for contamination.
Procedure
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then insert a blank sheet between MOB assembly, PL 1.1 Item
16, and the IBT belt, PL 90.14 Item 14.
2. Switch on the machine, GP 19, then enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Turn ON dC140, code [089-200]
MOB Monitor In A.
The analog monitor value is 92 or lower.
Y N
1. Press the [stop] button, then switch off the machine, GP 19.
0 9 1 - 3 1 2 C h a r g e K / Pr e c l e a n H V P S 0 9 1 - 3 1 3 D r u m C a r t r i d g e C R U M A S I C Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t
Check the Charge Scorotron Wire for contamination. 091-326 BCR C Line Cut Fail
Procedure Procedure
1. Check if the BCR cover is removed.
Remove the Drum Cartridge. Check the Scorotron Wire.
2. If it is removed, install a new drum cartridge assembly (C, M, Y), PL 90.1 Item 13.
The Scorotron Wire is open.
Y N 3. If it is not removed, remove the BCR Cover, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Open the PWB Chassis.
The High Voltage cables, CC1 and CC2 on the Charge K/ Preclean HVPS are properly
connected.
Y N
Reconnect the CC1 and CC2.
Install a new Scorotron Connector (PL 90.1).
Install a new Scorotron Wire (PL 90.1).
0 9 1 - 4 0 0 Wa s t e To n e r B o t t l e ( Re g u l a r ) N e a r Fu l l 0 9 1 - 4 0 1 B l a c k D r u m C a r t r i d g e N e a r E n d - o f - L i fe
The Waste Toner Bottle (regular) is near full. The Black drum cartridge is near the end-of-life.
Procedure
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171K on the Drum CRUM PWB K.
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB K (PL 90.5).
0 9 1 - 4 0 6 D r u m C a r t r i d g e K Pr e N e a r L i fe 0 9 1 - 4 0 7 D r u m K C R U M D a t a Tr o u b l e I n fo
DRUM K CRUM Comm Fail
The Drum (K) is near end of life.
DRUM K CRUM Data Broken
Procedure DRUM K CRUM Data Mismatch
Prepare a new Drum (K) (PL 90.1) for installation.
When any of the above has occurred.
Procedure
1. Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 13.
2. If the fault persists, install a new drum cartridge. PL 90.1 Item 13.
0 9 1 - 4 1 1 Y D r u m C a r t r i d g e N e a r E n d - o f - L i fe 0 9 1 - 4 1 6 D r u m C a r t r i d g e Y Pr e N e a r L i fe
The Y drum cartridge is near the end-of-life. It was detected that the end of life for Drum (Y) is closer than near.
Procedure
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171Y on the Drum CRUM PWB Y,
M,C,K.
• Install new components in order as required:
1. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
2. Drum CRUM PWB Y,M,C,K, PL 90.5 Item 11.
0 9 1 - 4 1 7 D r u m Y C R U M Tr o u b l e I n fo 0 9 1 - 4 2 1 M D r u m C a r t r i d g e N e a r E n d - o f - L i fe
DRUM Y CRUM Comm Fail
The Magenta drum cartridge is near the end-of-life.
DRUM Y CRUM Data Broken
Drum Y CRUM Data Mismatch Initial Actions
When any of the above has occurred. Switch off, then switch on the machine. If the fault persists, install a new Magenta Drum Cartridge
(PL 90.1).
Procedure Procedure
1. Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 13.
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171M on the Drum CRUM PWB
2. If the fault persists, install a new drum cartridge. PL 90.1 Item 13. M.
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB M (PL 90.5).
0 9 1 - 4 2 4 D r u m K L i fe E n d 0 9 1 - 4 2 6 D r u m C a r t r i d g e M Pr e N e a r L i fe
The DRUM K Life End (Dead Stop) has occurred.
The Drum Cartridge (M) is near end of life.
Procedure
1. Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 13. Procedure
2. If the fault persists, install a new drum cartridge. PL 90.1 Item 13. Prepare a new Drum Cartridge (M) (PL 90.1) for installation.
0 9 1 - 4 3 1 C D r u m C a r t r i d g e N e a r E n d - o f - L i fe 0 9 1 - 4 3 6 D r u m C a r t r i d g e C Pr e N e a r L i fe
The Cyan drum cartridge is near the end-of-life. The Drum Cartridge (C) is near end of life.
Procedure
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171C on the Drum CRUM PWB C.
• install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB C (PL 90.5).
0 9 1 - 4 3 7 D r u m C C R U M Tr o u b l e I n fo 0 9 1 - 4 4 2 D r u m C a r t r i d g e C R U M Tr o u b l e I n fo
DRUM C CRUM Data Broken DRUM CARTRIDGE CRUM Comm Fail
DRUM C CRUM Comm Fail DRUM CARTRIDGE CRUM Data Broken
DRUM C CRUM Data Mismatch DRUM CARTRIDGE CRUM Data Mismatch
When any of the above has occurred. When any of the above has occurred.
Procedure Procedure
1. Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 13. 1. Remove, then reinstall the drum cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 13.
2. If the fault persists, install a new drum cartridge. PL 90.1 Item 13. 2. If the fault persists, install a new drum cartridge. PL 90.1 Item 13.
0 9 1 - 6 0 0 E n v i r o n m e n t Te m p e ra t u r e Fa u l t 0 9 1 - 6 0 1 E n v i r o n m e n t H u m i d i t y Fa u l t
The measured temperature was out of the prescribed range. Fault due to Environment Temperature The measured humidity was out of the prescribed range.
Sensor output failure NVM 751-060 (ENV_SNR_TEMP), NVM 751-061 (ENV_SNR_HUM).
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Check that the Drawer Connectors (P602) on the Marking Drawer and the main unit are free from
Check that the Drawer Connectors (P602) on the Marking Drawer and the main unit are free from bent pins, foreign objects, burnouts, etc.
bent pins, foreign objects, burnouts, etc.
Procedure
Procedure
Open the Front Door. Remove the Marking Drawer Front Cover.
Open the Front Door. Remove the Marking Drawer Front Cover. +5VDC is measured between P/J135-1 and -3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor.
+5VDC is measured between P/J 135-1 and -3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor. Y N
Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J 407-B4 and -B2 on the MCU PWB.
+5VDC is measured between P/J 406-B4 and -B2 on the MCU PWB. Y N
Y N +5VDC is measured between J 400-4 on the MCU PWB and GND.
+5VDC is measured between P/J 400-4 on the MCU PWB and GND. Y N
Y N Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to J 400-4
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to J400-4 on the MCU PWB.
on the MCU PWB. Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Check the wires between J 135-1 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and P/J 406-B4 on the
Check the wires between P/J 135-1 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and P/J 406-B4 on MCU PWB, and between J 135-3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and P/J 406-B2 on the
the MCU PWB, and between P/J 406-3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and P/J406-B2 MCU PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
on the MCU PWB for an open wire or poor contact. Check Humidity/Temperature Sensor J 135-4 to MCU PWB P/J 406-B1 for continuity. If the wire is
Check Humidity/Temperature Sensor P/J 135-4 to MCU PWB P/J 406-B1 for continuity. If the wire is good, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16) before installing a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
good, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16) before installing a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 9 1 - 6 0 2 B C R A C O U T Fa u l t 0 9 1 - 9 1 0 Wa s t e B o t t l e N o t Po s i t i o n
Environmental sensor and Drum Cartridge abnormality FAIL, the connection between Environmen- The waste toner bottle is not present.
tal sensor and Drum Cartridge harness and HVPS. Chain Link No 750-387 (Constant AC OUT Coun-
ter) in 0 Procedure
Initial Actions Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [091-200 Waste Toner Bot-
tle Sensor]. Remove and reinstall the Waste Bottle.
Check Harness/Connector. If no problem, install a new Xero Temp & Humidity Sensor (PL 90.5 Item The display changes.
19). Y N
Procedure Turn Off the power. Check the following for continuity:
Open the Front Door. Remove the Marking Drawer Front Cover. • TM Drive PWB P/J 467-A9 to Waste Bottle Set Sensor J153-1
+5VDC is measured between P/J 135-1 and -3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor. • TM Drive PWB P/J 467-A7 to Waste Bottle Set Sensor J153-3
Y N • TM Drive PWB P/J 467-A8 to Waste Bottle Set Sensor J153-2
+5VDC is measured between P/J 406-B4 and -B2 on the MCU PWB.
Y N Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between J 400-4 on the MCU PWB and GND.
Y N Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Refer to , check the +5VDC circuit to J 400-4 on the MCU PWB, BSD 1.4 DC Power Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT Drive PWB and P/J402 on the MCU
Generation (2/2) PWB. If this does not resolve the problem, install a new following in order:
Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). • Waste Bottle Full Sensor (PL 90.5)
Check the wires between J135-1 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and P/J 406-B4 on the • TM Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2)
MCU PWB, and between J135-3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and P/J 406-B2 on the
MCU PWB for an open wire or poor contact. • MCU PWB (PL 1.2)
Check Humidity/Temperature Sensor J 135-4 to MCU PWB P/J -B1 for continuity. If the wire is good, Check if the Bottle is properly installed; the Sensor actuator properly operates; the Sensor is properly
install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16) before installing a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). installed; and the Waste Toner Cover is properly installed.
0 9 1 - 9 1 1 Wa s t e B o t t l e Fu l l 0 9 1 - 9 1 3 D r u m C a r t r i d g e K L i fe E n d
The waste toner bottle is full. The Black drum cartridge (K) has reached the end-of-life.
Procedure Initial Actions
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [091-201 Waste Toner Near Switch off, then switch on the machine. If the fault persists, install a new Black Drum Cartridge (PL
Full Sensor]. Actuate the Waste Bottle Full Sensor (PL 90.5) with waste toner. 90.1).
The display changes.
Y N Procedure
Remove the R/H Cover. Remove the Waste Toner Full Sensor along with the bracket. (Leave • Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171K on the Drum CRUM PWB K.
the connectors as they are.)
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB K (PL 90.5).
+3.3VDC is measured between P/J 152-2 on the Waste Bottle Full Sensor and GND.
Y N
+3.3VDC is measured between J 403-A16 on the MCU PWB and GND.
Y N
Disconnect and reconnect the cable between J 461 on the TM Drive PWB and J
403 on the MCU PWB. If this does not resolve the problem, install a new TM
Drive PWB (PL 1.3 Item 2) before installing A new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Check the wire between P/J 152-2 on the Waste Bottle Full Sensor and P/J -A11 467on
the TM Drive PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
+5VDC is measured between P/J 152-1 and -3 on the Waste Bottle Full Sensor.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J 467-A12 and -A10 on the TM Drive PWB.
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2). Check the +5VDC circuit to P/J 460-
4 on the TM Drive PWB.
Check the wires between P/J 467-A12 on the TM Drive PWB an dP/J 152-1 on the
Waste Bottle Full Sensor, and between 467-A10 on the TM Drive PWB and P/J 152-3 on
the Waste Bottle Full Sensor for an open wire or poor contact.
Install a new Waste Bottle Full Sensor (PL 90.5).
Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2)
0 9 1 - 9 1 4 D r u m K C R U M Co m m Fa u l t 0 9 1 - 9 1 5 D r u m K C R U M D a t a Fa u l t
Communication failure between the MCU and the Black Drum CRUM The MCU detected incorrect data in the Black drum cartridge CRUM.
0 9 1 - 9 1 8 D r u m M C R U M Co m m Fa u l t 0 9 1 - 9 1 9 D r u m C C R U M Co m m Fa u l t
Communication failure with the Magenta Drum CRUM Communication failure with the Cyan Drum CRUM
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. Switch the power Off then On.
091-918 remains displayed. 091-919 remains displayed.
Y N Y N
The MCU PWB made a faulty detection due to external noise or internal discharge-related The MCU PWB made a faulty detection due to external noise or internal discharge-related
noise. Check if there are any noise sources around the machine or if any abnormal discharge noise. Check if there are any noise sources around the machine or if any abnormal discharge
(arching) has occurred. (arching) has occurred.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect and reconnect the following connectors: Turn Off the power. Disconnect and reconnect the following connectors:
• P/J 413 on the MCU PWB • P/J 413 on the MCU PWB
• P/J 171M on the Drum CRUM PWB • P/J 171C on the Drum CRUM PWB
If the above action does not resolve the problem, install a new following in order: If the above action does not resolve the problem, install a new following in order:
• Drum Cartridge (M) (PL 90.1) • Drum Cartridge (C) (PL 90.1)
• Drum CRUM PWB (M) (PL 90.5) • Drum CRUM PWB (C) (PL 90.5)
• MCU PWB (PL 1.2) • MCU PWB (PL 1.2)
0 9 1 - 9 2 0 D r u m Y C R U M D a t a Fa u l t 0 9 1 - 9 2 1 D r u m K C R U M N o t Po s i t i o n
The MCU detected incorrect data in the Y drum cartridge CRUM. Drum CRUM (K) is disconnected.
Procedure Procedure
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171Y on the Drum CRUM PWB Y, • Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171K on the Drum CRUM PWB Y,
M,C,K. M,C,K.
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB Y,M,C,K (PL 90.5). • Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB Y,M,C,K (PL 90.5).
0 9 1 - 9 2 2 D r u m M C R U M D a t a Fa u l t 0 9 1 - 9 2 3 D r u m C C R U M D a t a Fa u l t
Wrong Data in Magenta drum cartridge. Wrong data in Cyan drum cartridge.
Procedure Procedure
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171M on the Drum CRUM PWB • Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171C on the Drum CRUM PWB C.
M. • Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB C (PL 90.5).
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB M (PL 90.5).
0 9 1 - 9 2 4 D r u m Y C R U M D a ta M i s m a tc h 0 9 1 - 9 2 5 D r u m M C R U M D a ta M i s m a tc h
The CRUM authentication registration data on the Y drum cartridge is incorrect. Wrong data in Magenta cartridge.
Procedure Procedure
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171Y on the Drum CRUM PWB Y, • Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171M on the Drum CRUM PWB
M,C,K. Y,M,C,K.
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB Y,M,C,K (PL 90.5). • Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB Y,M,C,K (PL 90.5).
Procedure Procedure
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171C on the Drum CRUM PWB Y, • Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171Y on the Drum CRUM PWB Y,
M,C,K. M,C,K.
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB Y,M,C,K (PL 90.5). • Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB Y,M,C,K (PL 90.5).
0 9 1 - 9 2 8 D r u m M C R U M N o t Po s i t i o n 0 9 1 - 9 2 9 D r u m C C R U M N o t Po s i t i o n
Magenta Drum CRUM is disconnected. Cyan Drum CRUM is disconnected.
Procedure Procedure
• Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171M on the Drum CRUM PWB • Verify P/J 413 on the MCU PWB is connected properly and P/J 171C on the Drum CRUM PWB C.
M. • Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB C (PL 90.5).
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2) before installing a new Drum CRUM PWB M (PL 90.5).
0 9 2 - 6 4 9 A D C S h u t t e r O p e n Fa u l t
Initial Actions
• Switch the power Off then On.
• Check the installation of the MOB ADC Assembly.
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [092-005 ADC Shutter
Close]. Switch the power Off then On.
092-649 is still present.
Y N
The MCU PWB made a faulty detection due to some electrical noise such as arcing. Check for
any sources of electrical noise or arcing around the machine.
Install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Execute dC330 [092-004 ADC Shutter Open]
and dC330 [092-005 ADC Shutter Close] alternately.
The ADC Shutter is operating properly.
Y N
Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
The ADC Shutter is now operating properly.
0 9 2 - 6 5 0 A D C S h u t t e r C l o s e Fa u l t 0 9 2 - 6 5 1 A D C S e n s o r Fa u l t
The MOB ADC Shutter remains closed due to shutter failure. The output read by ADC Sensor from the clean Photoreceptor surface is out of range (100~1000)
(in Mini-Setup).
Initial Actions
• Switch the power Off then On.
Note: This is a hidden failure. Therefore, even if this failure occurs, prints can be made.
• Check the installation of the MOB ADC Assembly. Initial Actions
Procedure • Switch the power Off then On.
• Check the installation of the MOB ADC Assembly.
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [092-004 ADC Shutter
Open]. Switch the power Off then On. Procedure
092-650 is still present.
Y N Switch off the power. Perform the following:
The MCU PWB made a faulty detection due to some electrical noise such as arcing. Check for • Check the ADC Sensor for dirt
any sources of electrical noise or arcing around the machine. • Disconnect and reconnect ADC Sensor Connectors P/J 136, and P/J 616A on the MOB ADC PWB.
Install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16). Execute dC330 [092-005 ADC Shutter Closed]
and dC330 [092-004 ADC Shutter Open] alternately. • Check for improperly installed/deformed ADC Sensor bracket.
The ADC Shutter is operating properly. • Check the Drum surface for unevenness. (Install a new Drum Cartridge. (PL 90.1)
Y N • Check the following for continuity: If the wires are good, install a new ADC Sensor (PL 1.1 Item
Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). 16) and the MCU PWB (PL 1.2) in order.
The ADC Shutter is now operating properly. – MCU PWB J 406-A5 to P 136-4
– MCU PWB J 406-A3 to P 136-6
– MCU PWB J 406-A4 to P 136-5
– MCU PWB J 406-A8 to P 136-1
• Install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16).
0 9 2 - 6 5 2 A D C Pa t c h Fa u l t 0 9 2 - 6 5 7 AT C S e n s o r Y A m p l i t u d e Fa u l t
0 9 2 - 6 5 8 AT C S e n s o r M A m p l i t u d e Fa u l t 0 9 2 - 6 5 9 AT C S e n s o r C A m p l i t u d e Fa u l t
The amplitude of ATC Magenta Sensor output is smaller (<10). The amplitude of ATC Cyan Sensor output is smaller (<10).
Note: This is a hidden failure. Therefore, even if this failure occurs, prints can be made. Note: This is a hidden failure. Therefore, even if this failure occurs, prints can be made.
Procedure Procedure
Enter Diagnostic mode. Check the value in dC131 NVM Read/Write [752-130] (ATC Average Enter Diagnostic mode. Check the value in dC131 NVM Read/Write [752-130] (ATC Average
Output). Output).
The value is 1022 or more. The value is 1022 or more.
Y N Y N
The value is 150 or less. The value is 150 or less.
Y N Y N
Check the following: If the circuits are good, install a new Magenta Developer Housing Check the following: If the circuits are good, install a new Cyan Developer Housing (PL
(PL 90.6). 90.6).
• MCU PWB P 418-13 to ATC Sensor P/J 134M-2 • MCU PWB P 418-4 to ATC Sensor P/J 134C-2
• MCU PWB P 418-12 to ATC Sensor P/J 134M-1 • MCU PWB P 418-3 to ATC Sensor P/J 134C-1
• MCU PWB P 418-14 to ATC Sensor P/J 134M-3 • MCU PWB P 418-5 to ATC Sensor P/J 134C-3
If the problem persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). If the problem persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Turn Off the power GP 19, disconnect P/J 436 from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resist- Turn Off the power. Disconnect P/J 436 from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance be-
ance between Connector Pin P/J 436-A11 and the frame. tween Connector Pin P/J 436-A9 and the frame.
The resistance is 10 ohms or less. The resistance is 10 ohms or less.
Y N Y N
If no resistance is read, check the wire between P/J 436-A11 and Dispense Motor P/J Check if the cable is properly connected between the IOT Drive PWB an dP/J 402 on
201M-2 for broken wires, connectors, and the connectors are seated fully. the MCU PWB. If no problem is found, install a new Cyan Dispense Motor (PL 90.4), Flat
If greater than 10 ohms, check the wire between P/J 436-A11 and Dispense Motor P/J 201M- Print Cable (PL 2.2), IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11) and MCU PWB (PL 1.2) in that
2 for a short to ground. order.
Check the following: Check the wire between/J 436-A9 and Dispense Motor P/J 201C-2 for a short to GND.
• The Magenta Toner Cartridge has toner and that no toner blocking has occurred on the path to Check the following:
the Developer Unit. • The Cyan Toner Cartridge has toner and that no toner blocking has occurred on the path to the
• Enter Diagnostics. Check Fault History. If code 093-315, 093-320 or 93-424 is present, go to the Developer Unit.
appropriate RAP. • Enter Diagnostics. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Fault History. If code 093-316, 093-320
or 93-425 is present, go to the appropriate RAP.
• Install a new Developer Housing Kit (M) (PL 90.6) followed by the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• Install a new Developer Housing Kit (C) (PL 90.6) followed by the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 9 2 - 6 6 0 AT C S e n s o r K A m p l i t u d e Fa u l t 0 9 2 - 6 6 1 E n v i r o n m e n t a l Te m p e ra t u r e S e n s o r Fa u l t
The amplitude of ATC Black Sensor output is smaller (<10). The temperature output of the Humidity/Temperature Sensor was not in the appropriate range
(140 ~ 896).
Note: This is a hidden failure. Therefore, even if this failure occurs, prints can be made.
Note: This is a hidden failure. Therefore, even if this failure occurs, prints can be made.
Procedure
Initial Actions
Enter Diagnostic mode. Check the value in dC131 NVM Read/Write [752-130] (ATC Average
Output). Check that the Drawer Connectors (P602) on the Marking Drawer and the main unit are free from
The value is 1022 or more. bent pins, foreign objects, burnouts, etc.
Y N
The value is 150 or less.
Procedure
Y N Open the Front Door. Remove the Marking Drawer Front Cover.
Check the following: If the circuits are good, install a new Black Developer Housing (PL +5VDC is measured between P/J 135-1 and -3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor.
90.6). Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J 406-B4 and -B2 on the MCU PWB.
• MCU PWB P 418-7 to ATC Sensor P/J 134K-2
Y N
• MCU PWB P 418-6 to ATC Sensor P/J 134K-1 +5VDC is measured between J 400-4 on the MCU PWB and GND.
• MCU PWB P 418-8 to ATC Sensor P/J 134K-3 Y N
If the problem persists, install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to J 400-4
on the MCU PWB.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect P/J 436 from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance be-
tween Connector Pin P/J 436-A7 and the frame. Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
The resistance is 10 ohms or less. Check the wires between J 135-1 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and J 406-J on the
Y N MCU PWB, and between J 135-3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and J 406-B2 on the
MCU PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
Check if the cable is properly connected between the IOT Drive PWB and P/J 402 on
the MCU PWB. If no problem is found, install a new Black Dispense Motor (pl 90.4), Flat Check Humidity/Temperature Sensor J 135-4 to MCU PWB P/J 406-B1 for continuity. If the wire is
Print Cable (PL 2.2), IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11) and MCU PWB (PL 1.2) in that good, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16) installing a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
order.
Check the wire between P/J 4346-A7 and Dispense Motor P/J 201K-2 for a short to GND.
Check the following:
• The Toner Cartridge has toner and that no toner blocking has occurred on the path to the Devel-
oper Unit.
• Go toBSD 90.9 Deve K Drive Control and check the Developer Drive (K) Clutch for an open
circuit.
• Enter Diagnostics. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) History. If code 093-317, 93-421, or
093-422 is present, go to the appropriate RAP.
• Install a new Developer Housing Kit (K) (PL 90.6) followed by the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 9 2 - 6 6 2 E n v i r o n m e n ta l H u m i d i t y S e n s o r Fa u l t 0 9 2 - 6 6 3 M i n i s e t u p A D C Fa u l t
The humidity output of the Humidity/Temperature Sensor was not in the appropriate range (30 ~ The two levels of ADC Patch density created in Mini-Setup: high (LD_OUT+60) and low (LD_OUT-
607). 60) are reversed.
Note: This is a hidden failure. Therefore, even if this failure occurs, prints can be made. Note: This is a hidden failure. Therefore, even if this failure occurs, prints can be made.
Initial Actions Procedure
Check that the Drawer Connectors (P 602) on the Marking Drawer and the main unit are free from Perform ADJ 9.11. If the density is badly uneven and cannot be corrected, install a new following in
bent pins, foreign objects, burnouts, etc. order:
• Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1)
Procedure
• Developer Housing (PL 90.6)
Open the Front Door. Remove the Marking Drawer Front Cover.
• K Developer Bias HVPS (PL 1.2)
+5VDC is measured between P/J 135-1 and -3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor.
Y N • Clean or install a new Transfer Belt (PL 90.14).
+5VDC is measured between P/J 406-B4 and -B2 on the MCU PWB. • Install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16)
Y N
• Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
+5VDC is measured between J 400-4 on the MCU PWB and GND.
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to 400-4
on the MCU PWB.
Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Check the wires between J 135-1 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and P/J 406-B4 on the
MCU PWB, and between J 135-3 on the Humidity/Temperature Sensor and J 406-B2 on the
MCU PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
Check Humidity/Temperature Sensor J 135-4 to MCU PWB P/J 406-B1 for continuity. If the wire is
good, install a new MOB ADC Assembly (PL 1.1 Item 16) installing a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 9 2 - 6 6 5 AT C Y M C K A v e ra g e Fa i l
Procedure
1. Verify the toner cartridge is a Genuine Xerox toner cartridge. Advise the customer to install a
Genuine Xerox toner cartridge if not.
2. Print test chart 82E13120 to check whether the density has recovered.
3. Clean any toner adhering to the facing section of ATC Sensors YMCK?
4. Perform GP 20, How to Check a Motor to test the dispense motor YMC or K for the fault required.
If the test fails, install a new dispense motor, PL 90.4 Item 7.
5. The connection between the MCU PWB P/J418 and ATC Sensor,P/J134Y,P/J134M,P/J134C,P/
J134K for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact.
If the fault persists, install new components in order as required:
1. ATC Sensor YMCK, PL 90.4 Item 7.
2. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
WARNING: When a new ATC Sensor has been installed, perform dC950 ATC Sensor
Setup (MAX Setup), for the applicable color before proceding.
0 9 3 - 3 0 0 M a r k i n g D ra we r I n t e r l o c k O p e n 0 9 3 - 3 1 3 Lo w To n e r S e n s o r Fa u l t
0 9 3 - 3 1 4 Y D i s p e n s e Fa u l t A
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect connector P/J201 Y on the dispense motor. Meas-
ure the wire-wound resistance of the dispense motor.
The resistance is between P/J201 Y -1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Dispense Y failure. Y N
Dispense Status Y NVM [763-368] Install a new dispense motor Y, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Check the following for continuity:
• 0: Dispense Ready
• IOT Drive PWB P/J438 -8 to dispense motor Y P/J201 Y -1
• 1: Dispense Doubt
• IOT Drive PWB P/J438 -7 to dispense motor Y P/J201 Y -2
• 2: Dispense Near Broken
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
• 3: Dispense Broken
Y N
Initial Actions Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following:
1. Check if an exchange from YMCK to Vivid or Fluorescent toner has been made.
• Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT Drive PWB and P/J402 -B14 (+) and
Note: It is possible the dispense motor connector is not installed properly, or damaged, causing B13 (-) on the MCU PWB.
failure of the dispense motor to dispense toner, depleting the developer housing. • Remove toner dispenser Y. Check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking and drive gears
2. Check NVM location [763-368]. Set to 0. Refer to, 001 Toner CRUM Mismatch RAP. binding.
3. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code If fault persists, install a new IOT Drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11, and MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15,
[093-006] dispense motor Y, PL 90.4 Item 7. in that order.
4. Select Start. +5VDC is measured between Connectors P/J653A -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the Low Toner Sensor PWB.
5. If the dispense motor fails to run, before following the RAP procedure below, check the in-line Y N
motor connector for proper connection when the toner dispense assembly is inserted. +5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A4 (+) and -A5 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Y N
6. Reform the connector bracket, if necessary, then ensure the connector is fully connected when
inserting the toner dispense assembly, Figure 1. +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/J400
-4 on the MCU PWB. If the wires are OK, install a new low toner sensor PWB, PL
90.3.
Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Check the wires between P/J414 -A4 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -2, and be-
tween P/J414 -A5 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -1 for an open wire or poor
contact.
Remove the low toner sensor Y.
Figure 1 Dispense motor connector bracket
There is toner on the detection area of the low toner sensor Y.
7. Check for obstructions from the dispenser through the inner cover assembly to the developer Y N
housing.
1. Check for toner blocking, poor auger rotation, gears binding, etc.
Procedure
2. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code Install new components, in order, as required:
[093-006] dispense motor Y.
2. Select Start. 1. Low toner sensor Y, PL 90.4 Item 8.
Dispense Motor Y is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.) 2. IOT Drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
Y N 3. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
+24VDC is measured between P/J438 -8 (+) on the IOT Drive PWB and GND (-). 4. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.6 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (1/2) , check the +24VDC circuit to P/
J430 -1 (+) and 2 (-) and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/2) check the
+24VDC circuit to P/J430 -3 (+) and 4 (-) on the IOT drive PWB.
0 9 3 - 3 1 5 M a g e n t a D i s p e n s e Fa u l t A
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect connector P/J201 M on the dispense motor. Meas-
ure the wire-wound resistance of the dispense motor.
The resistance between P/J201 M -1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Dispense M failure. Y N
Dispense Status M NVM [763-369] Install a new dispense motor M, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Check the following for continuity:
• 0: Dispense Ready
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -6 to dispense motor P/J201 M -1
• 1: Dispense Doubt
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -5 to dispense motor P/J201 M -2
• 2: Dispense Near Broken
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
• 3: Dispense Broken
Y N
Initial Actions Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following:
1. Check if an exchange from YMCK to Vivid or Fluorescent toner has been made.
• Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J402 -B7 (+) and
Note: It is possible the dispense motor connector is not installed properly, or damaged, causing B6 (-) on the MCU PWB.
failure of the dispense motor to dispense toner, depleting the developer housing. • Remove the magenta toner dispenser. check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking and
2. Check NVM location [763-369]. Set to 0. Refer to, 001 Toner CRUM Mismatch RAP. drive gears binding.
3. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code If no problem is found, replace the IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11, and MCU PWB, PL 1.2 in
[093-007] dispense motor M, PL 90.4 Item 7. that order.
4. Select Start. +5VDC is measured between Connectors P/J653A -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the Low Toner Sensor PWB.
5. If the dispense motor fails to run, before following the RAP procedure below, check the in-line Y N
motor connector for proper connection when the toner dispense assembly is inserted. +5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A4 (+) and -A5 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Y N
6. Reform the connector bracket, if necessary, then ensure the connector is fully connected when
inserting the toner dispense assembly, Dispense motor connector bracket. +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/J400
-4 on the MCU PWB. If the wires are OK, replace the Low Toner Sensor PWB, PL
90.3 Item 8.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Check the wires between P/J414 -A4 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -2, and be-
tween P/J414 -A5 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -1 for an open wire or poor
contact.
Remove the low toner sensor M.
Figure 1 Dispense motor connector bracket
There is toner on the detection area of the low toner sensor.
7. Check for obstructions from the dispenser through the inner cover assembly to the developer Y N
housing. Check for toner blocking, poor auger rotation, gears binding, etc, then perform, SCP 5 Final
Procedure Actions.
Install a new low toner sensor M, PL 90.4 Item 7, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code
[093-007] dispense motor M.
2. Select Start.
Dispense Motor rotates. (On duration is 2 sec.)
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J201 M -8 (+) on the IOT Drive PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.6 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (1/2) , check the +24VDC circuit to P/
J430 -1 (+) and 2 (-) and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/2) check the
+24VDC circuit to P/J430 -3 (+) and 4 (-) on the IOT drive PWB.
0 9 3 - 3 1 6 Cy a n D i s p e n s e Fa u l t A
Switch off the machine. Disconnect connector P/J201 C on the dispense motor. Measure the
wire-wound resistance of the dispense motor.
The resistance between P/J201 C -1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Dispense C failure. Y N
Dispense Status C NVM [763-370] Install a new cyan dispense motor, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Check the following for continuity:
• 0: Dispense Ready
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -4 to dispense motor P/J201 C -1
• 1: Dispense Doubt
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -3 to dispense motor P/J201 C -2
• 2: Dispense Near Broken
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
• 3: Dispense Broken
Y N
Initial Actions Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following:
1. Check if an exchange from YMCK to Vivid or Fluorescent toner has been made.
• Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J410 -B7 (+) and
Note: It is possible the dispense motor connector is not installed properly, or damaged, causing B6 (-) on the MCU PWB.
failure of the dispense motor to dispense toner, depleting the developer housing. • Remove the cyan toner dispenser. Check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking and drive
2. Check NVM location [763-370]. Set to 0. Refer to, 001 Toner CRUM Mismatch RAP. gears binding.
3. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code If no problem is found, Install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11, and MCU PWB, PL 1.2 in
[093-008] dispense motor C, PL 90.4 Item 7. that order.
4. Select Start. +5VDC is measured between connectors P/J653A -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the low toner sensor PWB.
5. If the dispense motor fails to run, before following the RAP procedure below, check the in-line Y N
motor connector for proper connection when the toner dispense assembly is inserted. +5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A4 (+) and -A5 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Y N
6. Reform the connector bracket, if necessary, then ensure the connector is fully connected when
inserting the toner dispense assembly, Dispense motor connector bracket. +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/J400
-4 on the MCU PWB. If the wires are OK, replace the low toner sensor PWB, PL
90.3 Item 8.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Check the wires between P/J414 -A4 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -2, and be-
tween P/J414 -A5 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -1 for an open wire or poor
contact.
Remove the low toner sensor C.
Figure 1 Dispense motor connector bracket
There is toner on the detection area of the low toner sensor.
7. Check for obstructions from the dispenser through the inner cover assembly to the developer Y N
housing. Check for toner blocking, poor auger rotation, gears binding, etc, then perform, SCP 5 Final
Procedure Actions.
Install a new low toner sensor C, PL 90.4 Item 7, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code
[093-008], cyan dispense motor.
2. Select Start.
Dispense Motor is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.)
Y N
Open the PWB chassis.
+24VDC is measured between P/J430 -8 (+) on the IOT drive PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.6 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (1/2) , check the +24VDC circuit to P/
J430 -1 (+) and 2 (-) and BSD 1.7 DC Power Generation (+24VDC) (2/2) check the
+24VDC circuit to P/J430 -3 (+) and 4 (-) on the IOT drive PWB.
0 9 3 - 3 1 7 B l a c k D i s p e n s e Fa u l t A
The resistance between P/J201K -1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Y N
Install a new black dispense motor, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Dispense K failure.
Check the following for continuity:
Dispense Status K NVM [763-371] • IOT drive PWB P/J438 -2 to dispense motor P/J201K -1
• 0: Dispense Ready • IOT drive PWB P/J438 -1 to dispense motor P/J201K -2
• 1: Dispense Doubt Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
• 2: Dispense Near Broken Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
• 3: Dispense Broken
Perform the following:
Initial Actions • Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J415 -B7 (+) and
1. Check if an exchange from YMCK to Vivid or Fluorescent toner has been made. B6 (-) on the MCU PWB.
• Remove the black toner dispenser. Check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking and drive
Note: It is possible the dispense motor connector is not installed properly, or damaged, causing gears binding.
failure of the dispense motor to dispense toner, depleting the developer housing.
2. Check NVM location [763-371]. Set to 0. Refer to, 001 Toner CRUM Mismatch RAP. If no problem is found, install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11, and MCU PWB, PL 1.2, in
that order.
3. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code +5VDC is measured between connectors P/J653A -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the low toner sensor PWB.
[093-009] dispense motor K, PL 90.4 Item 7. Y N
4. Select Start. +5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A4 (+) and -A5 (-) on the MCU PWB.
5. If the dispense motor fails to run, before following the RAP procedure below, check the in-line Y N
motor connector for proper connection when the toner dispense assembly is inserted. +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N
6. Reform the connector bracket, if necessary, then ensure the connector is fully connected when
inserting the toner dispense assembly, Dispense motor connector bracket. Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/J400
-4 on the MCU PWB. If the wires are OK, replace the low toner sensor PWB, PL
90.3 Item 8.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Check the wires between P/J414 -A4 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -2, and be-
tween P/J414 -A5 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -1 for an open wire or poor
contact.
Remove the low toner sensor C.
There is toner on the detection area of the low toner sensor.
Y N
Figure 1 Dispense motor connector bracket
Check for toner blocking, poor auger rotation, gears binding, etc, then perform, SCP 5 Final
7. Check for obstructions from the dispenser through the inner cover assembly to the developer Actions.
housing. Install a new low toner sensor K, PL 90.4 Item 8, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Procedure
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code
[093-009] black dispense motor.
2. Select Start.
Dispense motor is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.)
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J430 -8 (+) on the IOT drive PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +24VDC circuit to P/J430 -5 (+)
and 6 (-) on the IOT drive PWB.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect connectors P/J201K on the dispense motor. Measure the wire-
wound resistance of the dispense motor.
0 9 3 - 3 2 0 D e v e l o p e r M o t o r Fa u l t A
B
C
D
There was a problem with the developer motor Y,M,C rotation. Y N
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Procedure Check for an open wire or poor contact between P/J412 -B9 on the MCU
PWB and P/J206 -7 on the developer motor.
1. Open the front cover, remove the inner cover, PL 90.2 Item 7, then cheat the front cover inter-
lock switch, PL 28.1 Item 22. Enter dC330 , code [093-019] (the drum motor also rotates), +3.3VDC is meas-
ured between P/J206 -4 (+) on the developer motor and GND (-).
2. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code Y N
[093-019] (220MM/S). Select Start. (the drum motor also rotates.)
+3.3VDC is measured between P/J412 -B12 (+) on the MCU PWB and
The auger and the mag roll in the developer unit rotate. GND (-).
Y N Y N
Enter dC330, code [093-019] (220MM/S). Select Start , the drum motor also rotates, Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
The developer motor rotates. Check the wire between P/J206 -4 on the developer motor and P/J412
Y N -B12 on the MCU PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
+24VDC is measured between J205 -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the developer motor. Install a new developer motor assembly (Y, M,C), PL 40.6 Item 19.
Y N Enter dC330 , code [093-019] (the drum motor also rotates), +5VDC is measured be-
+24VDC is measured between P/J514 -6 (+) and -2 (-) on the AC power unit. tween P/J412 -B13 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J400 -10 (+) on the MCU PWB and Check the wire between P/J412 -B13 on the MCU PWB and P/J206 -3 on the de-
GND (-). veloper motor for an open wire or poor contact.
Y N Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Refer to BSD 1.11 Interlock +24VDC Distribution , check the +24VDC Check for any mechanical load in the developer unit such as poor auger rotation, drive gears
circuit to P/J400 -10 on the IMCU PWB. binding, bearing binding and poor mag roll rotation.
Install a new IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11. The MCU PWB made a faulty detection due to some external noise or internal discharge-related
Check the wires between P/J514 -6 on the AC power unit and J205 -1 on the de- noise.
veloper motor, and between P/J514 -2 on the AC power unit and J205 -2 on the
developer motor for an open wire or poor contact. 1. Check if there are any noise sources around the machine and if any abnormal discharge has
+5VDC is measured between P/J206 -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the developer motor. occurred.
Y N 2. If the check shows there is no problem, check the wire between P/J206 -4 on the developer mo-
+5VDC is measured between P/J412 -B15 (+) and -B14 (-) on the MCU PWB. tor and P/J412 -B12 on the MCU PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
Y N 3. If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Check the wires between P/J412 -B15 on the MCU PWB and P/J206 -1 on the de-
veloper motor, and between P/J412 -B14 on the MCU PWB and P/J206 -2 on the
developer motor for an open wire or poor contact.
Enter dC330 , code [093-019] (the drum motor also rotates), +5VDC is measured be-
tween P/J206 -3 (+) on the developer motor and GND (-).
Y N
Enter dC330 , code [093-019] (the drum motor also rotates), approximately
1.4kHz is measured between P/J206 -7 (+) on the developer motor and GND
(-).
Y N
Enter dC330 , code [093-019] (the drum motor also rotates), approxi-
mately 1.4kHz is measured between P/J412 -B9 (+) on the MCU PWB
and GND (-).
0 9 3 - 3 2 9 To n e r Re fi l l S t o p 0 9 3 - 4 0 7 Y To n e r C a r t r i d g e Pr e N e a r E m p t y
It was detected that a refill toner cartridge is being used. It was detected toner cartridge Y/Y-Flou/Clear should be replaced soon.
When NVM [761-109] Custom Mode Switch is set to [2] One Time CRUM Mode. Y Toner Status NVM [762-330]
• 0: Toner Full
Note: Switch off the machine, GP 19. Verify all lights have turned off in the UI before changing to-
ner cartridges • 1: Low Toner
• 2: Toner Near Empty
Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. • 3: Toner Empty
2. Enter NVM [761-109], change the value to [1]. The default is [2]. Procedure
3. Exit Diagnostics, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Ready a new toner cartridge Y/Y-Flou/Clear, PL 90.1 Item 17, for installation as required.
4. If the fault persists, install a new Genuine Xerox toner cartridge, enter Diagnostics and change
NVM [761-109] back to [2].
5. Exit Diagnostics, switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
0 9 3 - 4 0 8 M To n e r Ca r t r i d g e Pr e N e a r E m p t y 0 9 3 - 4 0 9 C To n e r C a r t r i d g e Pr e N e a r E m p t y
It was detected toner cartridge M/M-Flou/Silver should be replaced soon. It was detected toner cartridge C/C-Flou/White should be replaced soon.
M/M-Flou/Silver Toner Status NVM [762-331] C Toner Status NVM [762-332]
• 0: Toner Full • 0: Toner Full
• 1: Low Toner • 1: Low Toner
• 2: Toner Near Empty • 2: Toner Near Empty
• 3: Toner Empty • 3: Toner Empty
Procedure Procedure
Prepare a new toner cartridge M/M-Flou/Silver, PL 90.1 Item 15, for installation as required, then Prepare a new toner cartridge C/C-Flou/White, PL 90.1 Item 14 as required, then perform, SCP 5 Fi-
perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. nal Actions.
0 9 3 - 4 2 1 K 1 To n e r C a r t r i d g e N e a r E m p t y a n d t h e K 2 E m p t y 0 9 3 - 4 2 2 K 2 To n e r C a r t r i d g e N e a r E m p t y a n d t h e K 1 E m p t y
Note: The fault may be associated with the single K/Gold cartridge when the machine is config- Note: The fault may be associated with the single K/Gold cartridge when the machine is config-
ured with the Adaptive CYMK toner. The following procedure is applicable. ured with the Adaptive CYMK toner. The following procedure is applicable.
The black toner cartridge (K1) is near empty and the black toner cartridge (K2) is empty. The Black Toner Cartridge (K2) is near empty and the Black Toner Cartridge (K1) is empty
K2 Toner Status NVM [762-333] K2 Toner Status NVM [762-333]
• 0: Toner Full • 0: Toner Full
• 1: Low Toner • 1: Low Toner
• 2: Toner Near Empty • 2: Toner Near Empty
• 3: Toner Empty • 3: Toner Empty
K1 Toner Status NVM [762-334] K1 Toner Status NVM [762-334]
• 0: Toner Full • 0: Toner Full
• 1: Low Toner • 1: Low Toner
• 2: Toner Near Empty • 2: Toner Near Empty
• 3: Toner Empty • 3: Toner Empty
Initial Actions Initial Actions
1. Install a new K2 toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 15. 1. Install a new K1 toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 15.
2. Remove the K1 toner cartridge and inspect for damage to the CRUM. 2. Remove the K2 toner cartridge and inspect for damage to the CRUM.
3. Carefully roll the K1 toner cartridge to ensure toner is evenly distributed within. 3. Carefully roll the K2 toner cartridge to ensure toner is evenly distributed within.
4. Reinsert the K1 toner cartridge, then print a configuration report to test the image quality. 4. Reinsert the K2 toner cartridge, then print a configuration report to test the image quality.
5. If the fault persists, perform the following procedures. 5. If the fault persists, perform the following procedures.
Procedure Procedure
1. Install a new K1 toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 15. 1. Install a new K2 toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 15.
2. Check each connector on the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM connectors for any loose or dam- 2. Check each connector on the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM connectors for any loose or dam-
aged harness components. aged harness components.
3. Check the harness between the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM for excessive wear and damage. 3. Check the harness between the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM for excessive wear and damage.
4. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. 4. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
0 9 3 - 4 2 3 Y To n e r E m p t y 0 9 3 - 4 2 4 M To n e r E m p t y
Procedure Procedure
1. Install a new Y/Y-Flou/Clear toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 17. 1. Install a new M/M-Flou/Silver toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 15.
2. Check each connector on the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM connectors for any loose or dam- 2. Check each connector on the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM connectors for any loose or dam-
aged harness components. aged harness components.
3. Check the harness between the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM for excessive wear and damage. 3. Check the harness between the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM for excessive wear and damage.
4. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. 4. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
0 9 3 - 4 2 5 C To n e r E m p t y 0 9 3 - 4 2 6 , 0 9 3 - 4 2 7 , 0 9 3 - 4 2 8 , 0 9 3 - 4 2 9 , 0 9 3 - 4 3 6 To n e r K Y M C
C R U M / D R U M Tr o u b l e I n fo
C/C-Flou/White toner empty.
093-426 Toner K CRUM Trouble Info.
C Toner Status NVM [762-332]
• 0: Toner Full 093-427 Toner Y CRUM Trouble Info.
• 1: Low Toner 093-428 Toner M CRUM Trouble Info.
• 2: Toner Near Empty 093-429 Toner C CRUM Trouble Info.
• 3: Toner Empty
093-436 Drum/Toner Cartridge CRUM Trouble Info.
Initial Actions
Primary Causes
1. Remove the C/C-Flou/White toner cartridge and inspect for damage to the CRUM.
• TONER K YMC CRUM Comm Fail.
2. Carefully roll the toner cartridge to ensure toner is evenly distributed within.
• TONER K YMC CRUM Data Broken.
3. Reinsert the C/C-Flou/White toner cartridge, then print a configuration report to test the image
quality. • TONER K YMC CRUM Data Mismatch.
4. If the fault persists, perform the following procedures. • When any of the above has occurred.
Procedure Procedure
1. Install a new C/C-Flou/White toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 14. 1. Verify the toner cartridge is Genuine Xerox, if not, install a Genuine Xerox toner cartridge.
2. Check each connector on the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM connectors for any loose or dam- 2. Remove, then install the toner cartridge.
aged harness components. 3. Install a new toner cartridge:
3. Check the harness between the MCU PWB and the toner CRUM for excessive wear and damage. • K/Gold, PL 90.1 Item 16.
4. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, then perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. • Y/Y-Flou/Clear, PL 90.1 Item 17.
• M/M-Flou/Silver, PL 90.1 Item 15.
• C/C-Flou/White PL 90.1 Item 14.
• Drum Cartridge Assembly K, PL 90.1 Item 1.
• Drum Cartridge Assembly C, M, Y, PL 90.1 Item 13.
0 9 3 - 4 3 2 , 0 9 3 - 4 3 3 , 0 9 3 - 4 3 4 , 0 9 3 - 4 3 5 To n e r K 1 , K 2 , K N e a r L i fe 0 9 3 - 4 3 5 D r u m / To n e r C a r t r i d g e Q u a l i t y E m p t y
End The Drum/Toner Cartridge has ran out of toner or has reached the end of its lifespan. Print opera-
tion still continues.
The remaining toner amount is low.
Note: This is used when both K1 and K2 exist and there is a need to perform individual detection Procedure
for them. Install a new drum/toner cartridge for the color in fault, PL 90.1.
Procedure
Install new K/Gold toner cartridge, PL PL 90.1 Item 16.
0 9 3 - 6 0 0 D i s p e n s e N e a r B r o ke n Y Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A4 (+) and -A5 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y Dispense near failure. Y N
Y Dispense Status NVM [762-368] Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/J400
-4 on the MCU PWB. If the wires are OK, install a new low toner sensor PWB, PL
• 0: Dispense Ready 90.3.
• 1: Dispense Doubt Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
• 2: Dispense Near Broken Check the wires between P/J414 -A4 on the MCU PWB and Connector P/J653A -2, and be-
tween P/J414 -A5 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -1 for an open wire or poor
• 3: Dispense Broken contact.
Initial Actions Remove the low toner sensor Y.
• Check NVM location [762-368]. If it is at 3, reset to 0 to troubleshoot. There is toner on the detection area of the low toner sensor.
Y N
• Check for obstruction of the dispenser through the inner cover assembly to the developer Check for toner blocking, poor auger rotation, gears binding, etc, then perform, SCP 5 Final
housing. Actions.
Procedure Install new components, in order, as required:
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code 1. Low toner sensor Y, PL 90.4 Item 8.
[093-006] Y dispense motor. 2. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
2. Select Start. 3. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Dispense motor is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.) 4. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J438 -8 (+) on the IOT drive PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +24VDC circuit to P/J430 -5 (+)
and 6 (-) on the IOT drive PWB.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect connectors P/J201 Y on the Y dispense motor. Measure the
wire-wound resistance of the dispense motor.
The resistance between P/J201 Y -1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Y N
Install a new Y dispense motor, PL 90.4 Item 8.
Check the following for continuity:
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -8 to dispense motor P/J201 Y -1
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -7 to dispense motor P/J201 Y -2
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following:
• Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J402 -B14 (+) and
B13 (-) on the MCU PWB.
• Remove the Y toner dispenser. Check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking and drive
gears binding.
If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required:
1. IOT Drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
2. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
+5VDC is measured between connectors P/J653A -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the low toner sensor PWB.
0 9 3 - 6 0 1 D i s p e n s e N e a r B r o ke n M Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A4 (+) and -A5 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Magenta dispense near failure. Y N
M Dispense Status NVM [762-369] Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/J400
-4 on the MCU PWB. If the wires are OK, install a new low toner sensor PWB, PL
• 0: Dispense Ready 90.3.
• 1: Dispense Doubt Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
• 2: Dispense Near Broken Check the wires between P/J414 -A4 on the MCU PWB and Connector P/J653A -2, and be-
tween P/J414 -A5 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -1 for an open wire or poor
• 3: Dispense Broken contact.
Initial Actions Remove the low toner sensor M.
• Check NVM location [762-369]. If it is at 3, reset to 0 to troubleshoot. There is toner on the detection area of the low toner sensor.
Y N
• Check for obstructions from the dispenser through the inner cover assembly to the developer Check for toner blocking, poor auger rotation, gears binding, etc.
housing.
Install new components, in order, as required:
Procedure
1. Low toner sensor M, PL 90.4 Item 8.
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code 2. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
[093-007] magenta dispense motor.
3. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
2. Select Start.
4. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Dispense motor is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.)
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J430 -8 (+) on the IOT Drive PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +24VDC circuit to P/J430 -5 (+)
and 6 (-) on the IOT drive PWB.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect connectors P/J201 M on the dispense motor.
Measure the wire-wound resistance of the dispense motor.
The resistance between P/J201 M -1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Y N
Install a new magenta dispense motor, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Check the following for continuity:
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -6 to dispense motor P/J201 M -1
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -5 to dispense motor P/J201 M -2
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following:
• Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J402 -B7 (+) and
B6 (-) on the MCU PWB.
• Remove the magenta toner dispenser. Check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking and
drive gears binding.
If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required:
1. Low toner sensor M, PL 90.4 Item 8.
2. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
3. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
+5VDC is measured between connectors P/J653A -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the low toner sensor PWB.
0 9 3 - 6 0 2 D i s p e n s e N e a r B r o ke n C +5VDC is measured between connectors P/J653A -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the low toner sensor PWB.
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A4 (+) and -A5 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Y N
Cyan Dispense near failure. +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N
C Dispense Status NVM [762-370]
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/J400
• 0: Dispense Ready -4 on the MCU PWB. If the wires are OK, install a new low toner sensor PWB, PL
• 1: Dispense Doubt 90.3 Item 8.
• 2: Dispense Near Broken Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Check the wires between P/J414 -A4 on the MCU PWB and Connector P/J653A -2, and be-
• 3: Dispense Broken tween P/J414 -A5 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -1 for an open wire or poor
Initial Actions contact.
Remove the low toner sensor C.
• Check NVM location [762-370]. If it is at 3, reset to 0 to troubleshoot.
There is toner on the detection area of the low toner sensor.
• Check for obstructions from the dispenser through the inner cover assembly to the developer Y N
housing. Check for toner blocking, poor auger rotation, gears binding, etc.
Procedure Install new components, in order, as required:
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code 1. Low toner sensor C, PL 90.4 Item 8.
[093-008] cyan dispense motor. 2. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
2. Select Start. 3. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Dispense motor is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.) 4. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
Open the PWB Chassis.
+24VDC is measured between P/J430 -8 (+) on the IOT Drive PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +24VDC circuit to P/J430 -5 (+)
and 6 (-) on the IOT drive PWB.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect connectors P/J201 C on the dispense motor. Measure the
wire-wound resistance of the dispense motor.
The resistance between P/J201 C -1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Y N
Install a new cyan dispense motor, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Check the following for continuity:
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -4 to dispense motor P/J201 C -1
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -3 to dispense motor P/J201 C -2
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following:
• Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J410 -B7 (+) and
B6 (-) on the MCU PWB.
• Remove the cyan toner dispenser. Check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking and drive
gears binding.
If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required:
1. Low toner sensor C, PL 90.4 Item 8.
2. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
3. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
0 9 3 - 6 0 3 D i s p e n s e N e a r B r o ke n K Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A4 (+) and -A5 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Y N
Black Dispense near failure. +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N
K Dispense Status NVM [762-371]
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/J400
• 0: Dispense Ready -4 on the MCU PWB. If the wires are OK, install a new low toner sensor PWB, PL
• 1: Dispense Doubt 90.3 Item 8.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
• 2: Dispense Near Broken
Check the wires between P/J414 -A4 on the MCU PWB and Connector P/J653A -2, and be-
• 3: Dispense Broken tween P/J414 -A5 on the MCU PWB and connector P/J653A -1 for an open wire or poor
contact.
Initial Actions
Remove the low toner sensor K.
• Check NVM location [762-371]. If it is at 3, reset to 0 to troubleshoot. There is toner on the detection area of the low toner sensor.
• Check for obstructions from the dispenser through the inner cover assembly to the developer Y N
housing. Check for toner blocking, poor auger rotation, gears binding, etc.
Procedure Install new components, in order, as required:
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code 1. Low toner sensor K, PL 90.4 Item 8.
[093-009] black dispense motor. 2. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
2. Select Start. 3. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Dispense motor is heard rotating. (On duration is 2 sec.) 4. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N
+24VDC is measured between P/J430 -8 (+) on the IOT drive PWB and GND (-).
Y N
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +24VDC circuit to P/J430 -5 (+)
and 6 (-) on the IOT drive PWB.
Turn Off the power. Disconnect connectors P/J201K on the dispense motor. Measure the wire-
wound resistance of the dispense motor.
The resistance between P/J201K -1 and -2 pins is between 22.0 and 27.0 ohms.
Y N
Install a new black dispense motor, PL 90.4 Item 7.
Check the following for continuity:
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -2 to dispense motor P/J201K -1
• IOT drive PWB P/J438 -1 to dispense motor P/J201K -2
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Perform the following:
• Disconnect and reconnect the cable between the IOT drive PWB and P/J415 -B7 (+) and
B6 (-) on the MCU PWB.
• Remove the black toner dispenser. Check for poor auger rotation, toner blocking and drive
gears binding.
Install new components, in order, as required:
1. Low toner sensor K, PL 90.4 Item 8.
2. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
3. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
+5VDC is measured between connectors P/J653A -1 (+) and -2 (-) on the low toner sensor PWB.
0 9 3 - 9 1 2 To n e r E m p t y K 0 9 3 - 9 1 8 To n e r C R U M Co m m Fa u l t K 2
A communication failure is detected with black toner cartridge CRUM K2.
The K/Gold dispense motor rotation timed out indicating the black cartridge and reserve tank are
empty. Procedure
K1/Gold Toner Status NVM [762-334] Install a new black toner cartridge K2.
• 0: Toner Full The fault cleared.
Y N
• 1: Low Toner
Fault 093-918 persists.
• 2: Toner Near Empty +5VDC is measured between P/J172C -6 (+) and -5 (-) on the toner cartridge CRUM
• 3: Toner Empty coupler.
Y N
K2 Toner Status NVM [762-333] +5VDC is measured between P/J414 -B1 (+) and -B2 (-) on the MCU PWB.
• 0: Toner Full Y N
• 1: Low Toner +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N
• 2: Toner Near Empty Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/
• 3: Toner Empty J400 -4 on the MCU PWB.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
Procedure
1. Install a new K/Gold toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 16. 1. Check the wires between P/J414 -A1 on the MCU PWB and P/J172C -6 on the Toner
Cartridge CRUM Coupler.
2. If the fault persists, perform 093-317 Black Dispense Fault RAP.
2. Check the wires between P/J414 -A2 on the MCU PWB and P/J172C -5 on the Toner
Cartridge CRUM Coupler for an open wire or poor contact.
Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect connectors P/J414 and P/J172C from the MCU
PWB, then check the following for continuity:
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B3 to toner cartridge CRUM PWB C, K2 coupler P/J172C -4
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B4 to toner cartridge CRUM PWB C, K2 coupler P/J172C -3
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B5 to toner cartridge CRUM PWB C, K2 coupler P/J172C -2
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Install new components, in order, as required:
1. Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C, K2, PL 90.3 Item 7.
2. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
The Toner Cartridge K2 was defective.
0 9 3 - 9 2 4 To n e r C R U M Co m m Fa u l t K 1 0 9 3 - 9 2 5 To n e r C R U M D a t a B r o ke n Fa u l t K 1
A communication failure is detected with black toner cartridge CRUM K1 The data written to the toner CRUM K1 did not agree with the data read.
Procedure Procedure
Install a new black toner cartridge K1 with a new one. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Remove, then reinstall the toner cartridge K/Gold.
The fault cleared. Fault 093-925 cleared.
Y N Y N
Fault 093-918 persists. Install a new K/Gold toner cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 16.
+5VDC is measured between P/J172K1 -6 (+) and -5 (-) on the toner cartridge CRUM Fault 093-925 cleared.
coupler. Y N
Y N
+5VDC is measured between P/J414 -A6 (+) and -A7 (-) on the MCU PWB. Switch off the machine, GP 19. Disconnect Connectors P/J414 and P/J172K1 from the
Y N MCU PWB. Check the following for continuity:
+5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-). • MCU PWB P/J414 -A8 to toner cartridge CRUM PWB K1 coupler P/J172K1 -4
Y N • MCU PWB P/J414 -A9 to toner cartridge CRUM PWB K1 coupler P/J172K1 -3
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/
• MCU PWB P/J414 -A10 to toner cartridge CRUM PWB K1 coupler P/J172K1 -2
J400 -4 on the MCU PWB.
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15. All measurements 1 ohm or less.
Y N
Check the wires between P/J414 -A6 on the MCU PWB and P/J172K1 -6 on the toner
cartridge CRUM coupler, and between P/J414 -A7 on the MCU PWB and P/J172K1 -5 Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
on the toner cartridge CRUM coupler for an open wire or poor contact. Install new components, in order, as required:
Switch off the machine, GP 19, disconnect connectors P/J414 and P/J172K1 from the MCU
1. Toner cartridge CRUM PWB K1, PL 90.3 Item 6.
PWB, then check the following for continuity:
2. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
• MCU PWB P/J414 -A8 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB K1 Coupler P/J172K1 -4
3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
• MCU PWB P/J414 -A9 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB K1 Coupler P/J172K1 -3
The Toner Cartridge CRUM is was defective.
• MCU PWB P/J414 -A10 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB K1 Coupler P/J172K1 -2
The Toner Cartridge was improperly installed.
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required:
1. Toner cartridge CRUM PWB K1, PL 90.3 Item 6.
2. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Toner Cartridge K1 was defective.
0 9 3 - 9 2 6 To n e r C R U M D a t a M i s m a t c h Fa u l t K 1 0 9 3 - 9 2 7 To n e r C R U M Co m m Fa u l t Y
Incorrect authentication area data was detected in the K/Gold toner CRUM. This fault is displayed A communication failure with Y/Y-Flou/Clear Toner Cartridge CRUM
when incorrect color or model toner cartridge is installed.
Procedure
Procedure
Install a new Y/Y-Flou/Clear Toner Cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 17.
Remove, then reinstall toner cartridge K/Gold. Fault 093-927 cleared.
The fault persists. Y N
Y N Fault 093-927 persists.
Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. +5VDC is measured between P/J172Y -6 (+) and -5 (-) on the Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB.
Enter Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC131 NVM Read/ Y N
Write. +5VDC is measured between P/J414 -B7 (+) and -B8 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Y N
Check the NVM locations in Table 1.
Table 1 CRUM Data NVM +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
Y N
NVM Location Name Values (read-only) Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/
J400 -4 on the MCU PWB.
762-873 Geographic Setting 3 = North America/Europe
Install a new MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
12 = DMO
15 = Worldwide Check the wires between P/J414 -B7 on the MCU PWB and P/J172Y -6 on the Toner
Cartridge CRUM PWB, and between P/J414 -B8 on the MCU PWB and P/J172Y -5 on
762-875 Billing Type 2 = Sold the Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
3 = Metered Turn Off the power. Disconnect Connectors P/J414 and P/J172Y from the MCU PWB. Check
31= Neutral the following for continuity:
The NVM values match the expected customer configuration. • MCU PWB P/J414 -B9 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -4
Y N • MCU PWB P/J414 -B10 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -3
Determine correct billing type from customer. Contact technical support center or NTS for the • MCU PWB P/J414 -B11 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -2
CRUM conversion procedure.
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
1. Clean the connection terminals between the toner cartridge CRUM PWB (K1) and the Toner Car- Y N
tridge K/Gold. Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Install new components, in order, as required:
Note: When cleaning, do not use Drum cleaner or other acidic cleaning medium. Isopropyl alco-
hol would be best if a wet medium is required to clean the CRUM and CRUM connector. A pencil 1. Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y,M, PL 90.3 Item 7.
eraser works well as a dry cleaner.
2. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
2. Check the following:
3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
a. The connection between the MCU PWB P/J414 and the toner cartridge CRUM PWB (K1) P/ The Toner Cartridge Y was defective.
J172K1 for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact
b. The connection terminals between the toner cartridge CRUM PWB (K1) and the toner car-
tridge K/Gold for damage and foreign substances
c. Toner cartridge K/Gold for improper installation
3. If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required:
a. Toner cartridge K/Gold, PL 90.1 Item 16.
b. Toner cartridge CRUM PWB (K1), PL 90.3 Item 6.
c. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
d. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
0 9 3 - 9 2 8 To n e r C R U M Co m m Fa u l t M 0 9 3 - 9 2 9 To n e r C R U M Co m m Fa u l t C
A communication failure with Magenta Toner Cartridge CRUM M A communication failure with toner cartridge CRUM C.
Procedure Procedure
Install a new Magenta Toner Cartridge M with a new one. Install a new toner cartridge C/C-Flou/White.
Fault 093-928 cleared. 093-929 is gone.
Y N Y N
Fault 093-928 persists. +5VDC is measured between P/J172C -6 (+) and -5 (-) on the toner cartridge CRUM PWB.
+5VDC is measured between P/J172Y -6 (+) and -5 (-) on the Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB. Y N
Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J414 -B1 (+) and -B2 (-) on the MCU PWB.
+5VDC is measured between P/J414 -B7 (+) and -B8 (-) on the MCU PWB. Y N
Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-).
+5VDC is measured between P/J400 -4 (+) on the MCU PWB and GND (-). Y N
Y N Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/
Refer to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) , check the +5VDC circuit to P/ J400 -4 on the MCU PWB.
J400 -4 on the MCU PWB. Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Install a new MCU PWB (PL 1.2). Check the wires between P/J414 -B1 on the MCU PWB and P/J172C -6 on the toner car-
Check the wires between P/J414 -B7 on the MCU PWB and on the Toner Cartridge tridge CRUM PWB C, and between P/J414 -B2 on the MCU PWB and P/J172C -5 on the
CRUM PWB, and between P/J414 -B8 on the MCU PWB and P/J172Y -5 on the Toner Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB for an open wire or poor contact.
Cartridge CRUM PWB for an open wire or poor contact. Turn Off the power. Disconnect Connectors P/J414 and P/J172C from the MCU PWB. Check
Turn Off the power. Disconnect Connectors P/J414 and P/J172Y from the MCU PWB. Check the following for continuity:
the following for continuity: • MCU PWB P/J414 -B3 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C P/J172C -4
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B9 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -4 • MCU PWB P/J414 -B4 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C P/J172C -3
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B10 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -3 • MCU PWB P/J414 -B5 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C P/J172C -2
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B11 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -2 Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less. Y N
Y N Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact. Install new components, in order, as required:
1. Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y,M, PL 90.3 Item 7. 1. Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C, PL 90.3 Item 7.
2. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15. 2. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. 3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
The Toner Cartridge M was defective. The Toner Cartridge C was defective.
0 9 3 - 9 3 2 To n e r C a r t r i d g e E x c h a n g e Ti m e O v e r 0 9 3 - 9 3 3 To n e r C R U M D a t a B r o ke n Fa u l t Y
The data written to the toner cartridge CRUM Y did not agree with the data read.
Cartridge Exchange Time Over
Procedure
Initial Actions
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Remove, then reinstall toner cartridge Y/Y-Flou/
• Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Clear.
• Check the toner cartridge cover, PL 90.2 Item 10, for damage and ease of opening and closing. Fault 093-933 cleared.
• Check the installation condition of the dispense cover switches 1, 2, PL 90.3 Item 5. Y N
Install a new Y/Y-Flou/Clear Toner Cartridge, PL 90.1 Item 17.
• Remove, then reinstall the toner cartridge.
Fault 093-933 persists.
Procedure Y N
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC330, code Turn Off the power. Disconnect Connectors P/J414 and P/J172Y from the MCU PWB.
[093-205], dispense cover switch 1 and dispense cover switch 2. Check the following for continuity:
2. Select Start , then open and close the dispense cover. • MCU PWB P/J414 -B9 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -4
The display changes between H and L. • MCU PWB P/J414 -B10 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -3
Y N • MCU PWB P/J414 -B11 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, M P/J172Y -2
Go to BSD 1.10 Interlock Switching (2/2) for troubleshooting dispense cover switch 1 and dis-
pense cover switch 2. Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N
The Cartridge Door actuator is normal.
Y N Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Install a new dispense cover for the appropriate dispenser, PL 90.3. Install new components, in order, as required:
Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. 1. Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y, PL 90.3 Item 7.
The problem is misalignment between the dispense cover and one of the dispense cover switches. 2. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
Check if one of the actuators is not broken and if the dispense cover is properly installed. 3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
The Toner Cartridge CRUM is defective.
The Toner Cartridge was improperly installed.
0 9 3 - 9 3 4 To n e r C R U M D a t a B r o ke n Fa u l t M 0 9 3 - 9 3 5 To n e r C R U M D a t a B r o ke n Fa u l t C
The data written to the toner CRUM M did not agree with the data read. The data written to the toner cartridge CRUM C did not agree with the data read.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Remove, then reinstall toner cartridge M/M-Flou/ Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Remove, then reinstall toner cartridge C/C-Flou/
Silver. White.
Fault 093-934 cleared. Fault 093-935 cleared.
Y N Y N
Install a new toner cartridge M/M-Flou/Silver with a new one. Install a new toner cartridge C/C-Flou/White, PL 90.1 Item 14.
Fault 093-934 cleared. Fault 093-935 cleared.
Y N Y N
Turn Off the power. Disconnect Connectors P/J414 and P/J172Y from the MCU PWB. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect connectors P/J414 and P/J172C from
Check the following for continuity: the MCU PWB. Check the following for continuity:
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B9 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB M P/J172Y -4 • MCU PWB P/J414 -B3 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C, P/J172C -4
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B10 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB M P/J172Y -3 • MCU PWB P/J414 -B4 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C, P/J172C -3
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B11 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB M P/J172Y -2 • MCU PWB P/J414 -B5 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C, P/J172C -2
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less. Every resistance is 1 ohm or less.
Y N Y N
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact. Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
Install new components, in order, as required: Install new components, in order, as required:
1. Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB M, PL 90.3 Item 7. 1. Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB C, PL 90.3 Item 7.
2. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15. 2. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. 3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
The Toner Cartridge CRUM is defective. The Toner Cartridge CRUM is was defective.
The Toner Cartridge was improperly installed. The Toner Cartridge was improperly installed.
0 9 3 - 9 3 6 To n e r C R U M D a t a B r o ke n Fa u l t K 2 0 9 3 - 9 3 7 To n e r C R U M D a t a M i s m a t c h Fa u l t Y
The data written to the toner CRUM K2 did not agree with the data read. Incorrect authentication area data was detected in the toner CRUM. This fault is displayed when
an incorrect type of toner cartridge is installed.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Remove, then reinstall toner cartridge K2.
093-936 is gone. Remove, then reinstall the Y/Y-Flou/Clear toner cartridge.
Y N Fault 093-937 persists.
Install a new Black Toner Cartridge K2 with a new one. Y N
093-936 is gone. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Y N Enter Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC131 NVM Read/
Write.
Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect connectors P/J414 and P/J172C from
the MCU PWB. Check the following for continuity: Check the NVM locations in, CRUM Data NVM.
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B3 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB K2, P/J172C -4 Table 1 CRUM Data NVM
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B4 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB K2, P/J172C -3 NVM Location Name Values (read-only)
• MCU PWB P/J414 -B5 to Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB K2, P/J172C -2 762-873 Geographic Setting 3 = North America/Europe
Every resistance is 1 ohm or less. 12 = DMO
Y N 15 = Worldwide
Check any wire with more than 1 ohm for an open wire or poor contact.
762-875 Billing Type 2 = Sold
Install new components, in order, as required: 3 = Metered
31= Neutral
1. Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB K2, PL 90.3 Item 7.
2. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15. The NVM values match the expected customer configuration.
Y N
3. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Determine correct billing type from customer. Contact technical support center or NTS for the
The Toner Cartridge CRUM is was defective. CRUM conversion procedure.
The Toner Cartridge was improperly installed.
1. Clean the connection terminals between the toner cartridge CRUM PWB (K1) and the Toner Car-
tridge (K/Gold).
Note: When cleaning, do not use Drum cleaner or other acidic cleaning medium. Isopropyl alco-
hol would be best if a wet medium is required to clean the CRUM and CRUM connector. A pencil
eraser works well as a dry cleaner.
2. Check the following:
a. Toner cartridge Y/Y-Flou/Clear for improper installation
b. The connection terminals between the toner cartridge CRUM PWB Y and the toner cartridge
Y/Y-Flou/Clear for damage and foreign substances
c. The connection between the MCU PWB P/J414 and the toner cartridge CRUM PWB Y, P/
J172Y, for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact
3. If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required:
a. Toner cartridge Y/Y-Flou/Clear, PL 90.1 Item 17.
b. Toner cartridge CRUM PWB Y, PL 90.3 Item 7.
c. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
d. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
0 9 3 - 9 3 8 To n e r C R U M D a t a M i s m a t c h Fa u l t M 0 9 3 - 9 3 9 To n e r C R U M D a t a M i s m a t c h Fa u l t C
Incorrect authentication area data was detected in the Toner CRUM. This fault is displayed when Incorrect authentication area data was detected in the Toner CRUM. This fault is displayed when
an incorrect type of toner cartridge is installed. an incorrect type of toner cartridge is installed.
Procedure Procedure
Remove, then reinstall the Toner Cartridge M/M-Flou/Silver. Remove, then reinstall toner cartridge C/C-Flou/White.
Fault 093-938 persists. Fault 093-939 persists.
Y N Y N
Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC131 NVM Read/ Enter Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC131 NVM Read/
Write. Write.
Check the NVM locations in Table 1. Check the NVM locations in Table 1.
Table 1 NVM Values Table 1 NVM Values
NVM Location Name Values (read-only) NVM Location Name Values (read-only)
762-873 Geographic Setting 3 = North America/Europe 762-873 Geographic Setting 3 = North America/Europe
12 = DMO 12 = DMO
15 = Worldwide 15 = Worldwide
Note: When cleaning, do not use Drum cleaner or other acidic cleaning medium. Isopropyl alco- Note: When cleaning, do not use Drum cleaner or other acidic cleaning medium. Isopropyl alco-
hol would be best if a wet medium is required to clean the CRUM and CRUM connector. A pencil hol would be best if a wet medium is required to clean the CRUM and CRUM connector. A pencil
eraser works well as a dry cleaner. eraser works well as a dry cleaner.
2. Check the following: 2. Check the following:
a. Toner cartridge M/M-Flou/Silver for improper installation a. Toner cartridge C/C-Flou/White for improper installation
b. The connection terminals between the toner cartridge CRUM PWB M and the toner cartridge b. The connection terminals between the toner cartridge CRUM PWB C and the toner cartridge
M/M-Flou/Silver for damage and foreign substances C/C-Flou/White for damage and foreign substances
c. The connection between the MCU PWB P/J414 and the toner cartridge CRUM PWB M, P/ c. The connection between the MCU PWB P/J414 and the toner cartridge CRUM PWB C, P/
J172Y, for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact J172C, for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact
3. If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required: 3. If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required:
a. Toner cartridge M/M-Flou/Silver, PL 90.1 Item 15. a. Toner cartridge C/C-Flou/White, PL 90.1 Item 14.
b. Toner cartridge CRUM PWB M, PL 90.3 Item 7. b. Toner cartridge CRUM PWB C, PL 90.3 Item 7.
c. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15. c. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
d. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions. d. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
0 9 3 - 9 4 0 To n e r C R U M D a t a M i s m a t c h Fa u l t K 2
Incorrect authentication area data was detected in the toner cartridge CRUM K2. This fault is dis-
played when an incorrect type of toner cartridge is installed.
Procedure
Remove, then reinstall toner cartridge K2.
Fault 093-940 persists.
Y N
Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
Enter Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then enter dC131 NVM Read/
Write.
Check the NVM locations in Table 1.
Table 1 NVM Values
NVM Location Name Values (read-only)
Note: When cleaning, do not use Drum cleaner or other acidic cleaning medium. Isopropyl alco-
hol would be best if a wet medium is required to clean the CRUM and CRUM connector. A pencil
eraser works well as a dry cleaner.
2. Check the following:
a. Toner cartridge K2 for improper installation
b. The connection terminals between the toner cartridge CRUM PWB K2 and the toner car-
tridge K2 for damage and foreign substances
c. The connection between the MCU PWB P/J414 and the toner cartridge CRUM PWB K2, P/
J172C, for open circuit, short circuit, and poor contact
3. If the fault persists, install new components, in order, as required:
a. Toner cartridge K, PL 90.1 Item 16.
b. Toner cartridge CRUM PWB K2, PL 90.3 Item 7.
c. MCU PWB, PL 90.1 Item 15.
d. Perform, SCP 5 Final Actions.
0 9 4 - 3 2 0 1 s t BT R Re t ra c t Fa u l t 0 9 4 - 3 2 1 1 s t BT R Co n t a c t Fa u l t
Retraction was not detected within the specified time (2400ms) after retraction of the 1st BTR First BTR Contact Failure.
started.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Verify the Transfer Belt (PL 90.14) is installed properly.
Verify the Transfer Belt (PL 90.14) is installed properly.
Procedure
Procedure
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [094-002 1st BTR Retract]
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [094-002 1st BTR Retract] and [094-001 1st BTR Contact] alternately, executing dC330 [094-200 1st BTR Retract Sensor] at
and [094-001 1st BTR Contact] alternately, executing dC330 [094-200 1st BTR Retract Sensor] at the same time with each execution.
the same time with each execution. The display changes.
The display changes. Y N
Y N Remove the Transfer Belt.
Remove the Transfer Belt.
Rotate the shaft of the 1st BTR Retract Motor manually and block/expose the 1st BTR Contact
Rotate the shaft of the 1st BTR Retract Motor manually and block/expose the 1st BTR Contact / Retract Sensor with the actuator. Execute dC330 [094-200 1st BTR Retract Sensor].
/ Retract Sensor with the actuator. Execute dC330 [094-200 1st BTR Retract Sensor]. Does the display change by blocking/exposing the light?
Does the display change by blocking/exposing the light? Y N
Y N Reinstall the Transfer Belt.
Reinstall the Transfer Belt.
Go to BSD 90.22 1st Transfer Y,M,C (2/2) and check the 1st BTR Contact / Retract Sen-
Go to BSD 90.22 1st Transfer Y,M,C (2/2) and check the 1st BTR Contact / Retract Sen- sor for an open or short circuit.
sor for an open or short circuit. Reinstall the Transfer Belt.
Reinstall the Transfer Belt.
Go to BSD 90.22 1st Transfer Y,M,C (2/2) and troubleshoot the 1st BTR Retract Motor circuit.
Go to BSD 90.22 1st Transfer Y,M,C (2/2) and troubleshoot the 1st BTR Retract Motor circuit. Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
11) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
0 9 4 - 3 2 2 2 n d BT R Re t ra c t Fa u l t 0 9 4 - 3 2 3 2 n d BT R Co n t a c t Fa u l t
Second BTR Retract Failure. Contact was not detected within the specified time after contact with the 2nd BTR started.
Procedure Procedure
Connect the meter between P/J 439-B6 (+) and P/J 439-B4 (-) on the IOT Drive PWB. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, stack the code [042-001 Main
There is +5 VDC present Motor] with [094-004 2nd BTR Retract] and [094-003 2nd BTR Contact] alternately.
Y N The color that can be seen from window on the IBT Drawer switch between black and yellow
Check F5001 on the Main LVPS for an open. with each execution.
F5001 is OK. Y N
Y N Execute dC330 [094-005 2nd BTR Retract Clutch].
Replace F5001. If F5001 blows again, go to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) and The 2nd Retract Cam Drive Clutch operates (noise heard).
Wirenets and check the +5 VDC (IOT Drive PWB) for a short circuit. Y N
Replace the Main LVPS (PL 1.3). Go to BSD 90.25 2nd Transfer & 2nd BTR Cleaning (2/2) and troubleshoot the 2nd BTR
Connect the meter between P/J 433-10 (+) and ground (-). Retract Cam Clutch and Cam Clutch circuit for proper operation.
There is +24 VDC present. Go to BSD 90.25 2nd Transfer & 2nd BTR Cleaning (2/2) and check the 2nd BTR Contact / Re-
tract Sensor for an open or short circuit.
Y N
Check F10 on the IOT Drive PWB for an open. Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item
11) before replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
F10 is OK.
Y N
Replace F10. If F10 blows again, go to BSD 1.4 DC Power Generation (2/2) and Wire-
nets and check the +24 VDC for a short circuit.
Replace the IOT Drive PWB. (PL 1.2 Item 11).
Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, stack the code [042-001 Main
Motor] with [094-004 2nd BTR Retract] and [094-003 2nd BTR Contact] alternately.
Does the color that can be seen from window on the IBT Drawer switch between black and yel-
low with each execution?
Y N
Execute dC330 [094-005 2nd BTR Retract Clutch].
The 2nd Retract Cam Drive Clutch operates (noise heard).
Y N
Go to BSD 90.25 2nd Transfer & 2nd BTR Cleaning (2/2) and troubleshoot the 2nd BTR
Retract Cam Clutch and Cam Clutch circuit for proper operation.
Go to BSD 90.25 2nd Transfer & 2nd BTR Cleaning (2/2) and check the 2nd BTR Contact / Re-
tract Sensor for an open or short circuit.
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, replace the IOT Drive PWB () bef PL 1.2
Item 11 ore replacing the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 0 2 - 3 1 1 t o 1 0 2 - 3 1 8 U S B D o n g l e Fa i l R A P
102-311 USB Dongle Access Fail
102-312 USB Dongle Illegal MAC Address Fail
102-313 USB Dongle Illegal IOT Speed Key Fail
102-314 USB Dongle IOT Speed Setting Fail
102-315 USB Dongle SW Key Setting Fail
102-316 USB Dongle Supply Setting Fail
102-317 USB Dongle Page Pack Setting Fail
102-318 USB Dongle Country Code Setting Fail
Procedure
1. Check if the USB dongle has been installed properly.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
3. Attach a known good USB dongle to verify the machine USB port. If the machine does not rec-
ognize the USB dongle, check the harness from the USB port to the controller PWB for loose con-
nection or damage, repair as required.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 2, then attach the known good USB dongle to the USB port to verify
connectivity.
5. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 0 2 - 3 1 9 U S B D o n g l e N V M L i s t S e t t i n g Fa i l R A P 1 0 2 - 3 5 6 E W S S o f t Fa u l t
The NVM Rewriting List process failed during the initial installation by the USB Dongle. Fatal error related to the EWS. A problem occurred during software processing, and processing could
no longer continue.
Procedure
1. Check whether the correct USB Dongle is used. Procedure
2. Attach a known good USB dongle to the machine to verify the machine recognizes the USB don- Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
gle. If the check fails, verify the harness from the USB port to the controller PWB is fully con-
nected and no damage has occured. Repair as required. CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
3. Perform dC301, NVM Initialization to reset all NVM back to default. Attach the known good and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
USB dongle to verify connectivity. 1. Reinstall the latest version of the ESS Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem is
4. If the HDD is installed, perform dC355, Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test, to check whether fail- repeated.
ures are found in the HDD. 2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB if any
5. If failures on HDD are found, perform dC355, HDD Initialization, to set the HDD to default, Up- are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
grade the Software, GP 2, then attach the known good USB dongle to the USB port. • NVM RAM
6. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. • System Memory (J 330)
• Page Memory (J 331)
3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the UI PWB (PL 2.2).
5. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 0 2 - 3 8 0 M F U I Co n t S o f t Fa u l t 1 0 2 - 3 8 1 D a t a L i n k L a y e r Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Fatal error in the MF UI count. A problem occurred during software processing, and processing could There was notification of a scope initialization error on the ESS side, a message sending error, or an
no longer continue. error obtaining the received data, during communication between ESS and the control panel.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Reinstall the latest version of the ESS Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem is 1. Reinstall the latest version of the ESS Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem is
repeated. repeated.
2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB. if any 2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB if any
are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM • NVM RAM
• System Memory (J 330) • System Memory (J 330)
• Page Memory (J 331) • Page Memory (J331)
3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. 3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the UI PWB (PL 2.2). 4. If the problem still persists, replace the UI PWB (PL 2.2).
5. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 5. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 0 2 - 3 8 2 A p p l i c a t i o n L a y e r Co m m a n d Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
A required message was sent to the control panel and a verification message was not returned
within the specified time, after a required parameter had not been attached from the control panel,
or a problem with its length was detected for a variable length parameter.
Initial Actions
Check the Controller PWB and Panel connector cables and install the UI PWB (if installed) securely,
and then repeat the same operation under which the error occurred.
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Reinstall the latest version of the ESS Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem is
repeated.
2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB if any
are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory (J 330)
• Page Memory (J 331)
3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the UI PWB (PL 2.2).
5. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 0 3 - 3 1 0 S W O p t i o n Fa i l ( H y b r i d Wa t e r M a r k N o t E x i s t ) R A P 1 0 3 - 3 1 1 H y b r i d ( S e c u r e ) Wa t e r M a r k S e t t i n g M i s m a t c h R A P
Hybrid WaterMark detection hardware unloaded is detected with SW option function being set to This is a configuration error type of fault related to the Secure Watermark Kit.
Valid. Detected prior to 103-311 detection.
Procedure
Procedure Check the following:
Check the following:
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Verify the password for the Secure Watermark Kit, Software Option is
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Verify the password for the Secure Watermark Kit, Software Option is installed.
installed. 2. Verify that the Hybrid WaterMark (HWM) PWB is installed and connected correctly. Plugs into
2. Verify that the Hybrid WaterMark (HWM) PWB is installed and connected correctly. Plugs into IIT/IPS PWB under the IPS PWB cover (SGS 9 o’clock for kit instructions and location).
IIT/IPS PWB under the IPS PWB cover (SGS 9 o’clock for kit instructions and location).
3. Verify the HDD, PL 3.2 Item 1, is installed and connected correctly.
3. Verify the HDD, PL 3.2 Item 1, is installed and connected correctly. 4. Confirm System Memory is sufficient for this option (4GB).
4. Confirm System Memory is sufficient for this option (4GB).
Note: If the Hybrid (Secure) WaterMark was installed and is no longer installed (PWB not
plugged into the top of the IIT/IPS PWB) but the SW Key had been previously installed, the only
way to clear fault is to enter NVM Read/Write and reset NVM location 785-021 to “0”.
1 0 3 - 3 1 2 H y b r i d ( S e c u r e ) Wa t e r M a r k H W n o t d e t e c t e d ( S i d e 2 ) 1 0 3 - 3 1 3 S W O p t i o n Fa i l ( I I S S M e m fo r H W M N o t E x i s t )
Hybrid Water Mark detection hardware unloaded is detected with SW option function being set to When the optional HWM function is being enabled, the system detected that the IISS Ext Memory
Valid for Secure Watermark detection on Side 2 of document. Detected prior to 103-311 detection. (Slot1: 128MB + Slot: 128MB or larger) is not installed.
Procedure Procedure
Check the following: Check the installation of the IISS Ext Memory (Slot1: 128MB + Slot: 128MB or larger). After check-
ing the installation, turn the power OFF then ON. If the problem persists, replace the IISS Ext board.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3, then verify that the password for the Secure Watermark Kit, Software
Option is installed.
2. Verify that the Hybrid WaterMark (HWM) PWB is installed and connected correctly. Plugs into
IIT/IPS PWB under the IPS PWB cover (SGS 9 o’clock for kit instructions and location).
3. Verify that the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) is installed and connected correctly.
4. Confirm System Memory is sufficient for this option (1 GB).
Note: If the Hybrid (Secure) WaterMark was installed and is no longer installed (PWB not
plugged into the top of the IIT/IPS PWB) but the SW Key had been previously installed, the only
way to clear fault is to enter NVM Read/Write and reset NVM location 785-021 to 0.
1 0 3 - 3 1 4 Po s s i b l e Pr o h i b i t e d O r i g i n a l s ( Sy s t e m Fa i l )
PreIPS X Authentication Fail (System Fail)
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1 1 2 - 7 0 0 P u n c h e r Wa s t e B i n Fu l l
BSD 12.10 A/P Finisher Booklet/Punch Transport
Puncher Waste Bin Full was detected.
Initial Actions
Remove, empty, and reinstall the Puncher Waste Bin.
Check the Puncher Waste Bin Actuator and Guide for deformation.
Procedure
Enter Component Control [14-275], Puncher Box Set Sensor, Parts List 21.5 in the Finisher Service
Manual. Select Start. Remove and insert the Puncher Waste Bin.
The display changes
Y N
Select Stop. Go to BSD 12.10 A/P Finisher Booklet/Punch Transport in the A/P Finisher Service
Manual. Troubleshoot the Puncher Box Set Sensor.
If the problem continues, replace the Puncher Box Set Sensor, Parts List 21.5 in the Finisher
Service Manual.
If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB, Parts List 21.5 in the Finisher Service
Manual.
The Puncher Waste Bin can be removed and inserted properly.
Y N
Repair or replace the Puncher Waste Bin, Parts List 21.5 in the Finisher Service Manual.
Select Stop. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB, Parts List 21.5 in the Finisher Serv-
ice Manual.
If the problem remains, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 1 6 - 2 1 0 M e d i a Re a d e r Fa ta l Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 2 1 1 M e d i a Re a d e r C a b l e D i s c o n n e c t e d
Media Reader Fatal Error Media Reader Cable disconnected
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch the power Off and check the USB Cable connection. If the fault persists, perform the
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing following:
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
1. Replace the Media Reader, USB Cable, or Extended Board for the Media Reader connection. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
2. Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: 1. Replace the USB Cable.
• Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same 2. Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
problem is repeated.
• Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same
• Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB. if problem is repeated.
any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB. if
– NVM RAM any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
– System Memory – NVM RAM
– Page Memory – System Memory
• If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. – Page Memory
• If the problem still persists, replace the UI PWB (PL 2.2). • If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
• If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). • If the problem still persists, replace the UI PWB (PL 2.2).
• If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 2 1 2 [ M e d i a Re a d e r ] M e d i a L i b S W Lo g i c Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 2 2 0 D o w n l o a d e r I n i t i a l i z a t i o n Fa i l
The downloader software that processes downloads within the controller failed to initialize during
[Media Reader] MediaLib SW Logic Failure transition into download mode.
1 1 6 - 3 1 0 s s m m J o b Lo g Fu l l 1 1 6 - 3 1 2 H D D E n c r y p t K e y Fa u l t
An error was detected while checking Controller font DIMM 4G. An error was detected in the HDD encryption key during activation.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing 1. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in UI Diagnostics.
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. 2. If the fault persists, replace the HDD (PL 3.2).
1. Pull out the DIMM 4G and reinsert it. 3. When the system has been recovered, set the HDD encryption key.
2. Go to BSD 3.1 PWBS Communication (Controller-MCU) and check the cable connections on the
Controller PWB.
3. If the fault persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 1 3 H D D E n c r y p t S e t U p Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 1 4 E t h e r n e t A d d r Co n t r o l l e r Fa u l t
An encryption key was specified but the HDD itself was not encrypted. An ethernet error was detected.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in UI Diagnostics. CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
2. If the fault persists, replace the HDD (PL 3.2).
3. When the system has been recovered, set the HDD encryption key. 1. Check the installation of the DIMM 4G on the Controller PWB.
2. Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
• Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same
problem is repeated.
• Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
– NVM RAM
– System Memory
– Page Memory
• If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
• Check all the Controller connections for being loose or disconnected.
3. If the fault persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 1 5 Co n t r o l l e r R A M D I M M # 1 W / R C h e c k Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 1 6 Co n t r o l l e r R A M D I M M # 2 W / R C h e c k Fa u l t
An error was detected during System Memory 1 R/W. An error was detected during System Memory 2 R/W.
Procedure Procedure
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Remove and re-install System Memory. 1. Remove and re-install System Memory 2
2. If the problem still persists, install a new Controller PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15). 2. If the problem still persists, install a new Controller PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15).
1 1 6 - 3 1 7 S ta n d a r d R O M D I M M # 1 C h e c k Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 1 8 E x p a n s i o n R O M D I M M # 2 C h e c k Fa u l t
An error was detected when checking the ROM DIMM #1 on the Controller PWB (J330). An error was detected when checking the Expansion ROM DIMM #2 on the Controller PWB (J331).
Procedure Procedure
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Switch the power Off, then On.
1. Switch the power Off, then On.
2. If the fault persists, switch power off and remove and re-install the DIMM 4GB on the Controller
PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15) 2. If the fault persists, switch the power off and remove and re-install the DIMM 4G.
3. If the problem still persists, install a new Controller PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15). 3. If the fault persists, replace the DIMM 4G (PL 3.2 Item 2).
1 1 6 - 3 1 9 M i s m a t c h C o n t R O M a n d P a n e l C o n fi g 1 1 6 - 3 2 0 S T R E A M Z S o f t Fa ta l e r r o r
A mismatch between the installed ROM and Panel configuration (FCW-UI or HB-UI). A problem has occurred in the software processing and it is unable to continue with the subsequent
processes.
Procedure
Upgrade the software, GP 2. Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
1 1 6 - 3 2 1 Sy s t e m S o f t w a r e Fa t a l Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 2 2 We b DAV S / W Fa u l t
System Software Fatal Error. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procCon- WebDAV S/W Failure. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering
trollering could no longer continue. could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If problem still exists, check the CE log to see if the same fail fre-
quently occurred. If the problem frequently occurred, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Verify that Page Memory PM1 or Page Memory PM2 is correctly installed.
1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem
2. Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- is repeated.
lem is repeated.
2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install RAM DIMM or replace RAM DIMM.
3. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). 3. Collect Failure Analysis Log data. (Apply the measure on which information is separately pro-
vided for common use.)
• SD Card (PL 3.2)
• DIMM 4G (PL 3.2 Item 2)
• HDD (PL 3.2)
4. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
5. If the problem still persists, replace the UI PWB (PL 2.2).
6. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 2 3 Co n t r o l l e r N V R A M W / R C h e c k Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 2 4 S o f t w a r e E x c e p t i o n Fa u l t
An error was detected during the Controller PWB NVM Read/Write Check. This fault will frequently A fatal software exception error has occurred in the Controller PWB CPU. The cause is most likely
appear immediately after replacing the Controller NVM PWB. the Controller software failure.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing • Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
– Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same
• Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 3.2) if any are installed problem is repeated.
(the model configuration determines which are installed).
– Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
– NVM RAM 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
– System Memory ♦ NVM RAM
– Page Memory ♦ System Memory
• If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. ♦ Page Memory
• If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). – If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
– Check all the Controller connections for being loose or disconnected.
– Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in UI Diagnostics.
1 1 6 - 3 2 5 Co n t r o l l e r Fa n Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 2 8 L 2 C a c h e Fa i l
A failure was detected in the Level 2 Cache built in the CPU.
An error occurred in Controller fan rotation.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, refer to the BSD and check the Controller Fan 2. If the fault persists, instal a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
(PL 3.2) for a good connection.
1 1 6 - 3 2 9 S e r i a l I F S o f t w a r e Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 3 0 H D D F i l e Sy s t e m Fa u l t
A system call error related to the serial I/F was detected. Error during the check of the HDD when the power was turned on, or the HDD was not formatted.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. Check to see if the problem is repeated. Check dC120 Failure Coun- Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
ter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the problem frequently occurred. If the problem frequently
occurred, perform the following: 1. Enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diag Program and make a diagnosis of
HDD.
1. Install the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem
is repeated. 2. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in UI Diagnostics.
2. If the fault persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 3. If the fault persists, replace the HDD (PL 3.2).
4. If the fault persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 3 1 I n v a l i d Lo g I n fo 1 1 6 - 3 3 2 Co n t r o l l e r O n B o a r d R O M Fa u l t
An error related to the log was detected. An error in the DIMM 4G was detected.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Remove and reinstall the HDD:
1. Remove and re-install the DIMM 4G.
a. Switch off the power, remove the HDD, and switch the power On.
2. If the problem still persists, replace the DIMM 4G (PL 3.2 Item 2).
b. Switch off the power, reinstall the HDD, and switch the power On.
2. If the problem continues, perform a Forced HDD Format (GP 14).
3. If the problem persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 3 3 Lo c a l Ta l k S o f t w a r e Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 3 4 E S S N V R A M D a t a Co m p a r e Fa i l
During a check of Read/Write at power on, System Cont detects [ESS-NVRAM with factory settings
A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering could no longer is installed] or [Illegal ESS-NVRAM data is occurring].
continue.
Because data for initialization in ESS-ROM is written on ESS-NVRAM data when 116-334 is de-
Procedure tected, powering OFF then ON after that causes System Fails (124-3xx) that indicate mismatches in
various data between the three locations.
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Procedure
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3, then enter dC132, Machine ID/Billing Data.
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
2. Verify the data in [IOT], [SYS1], and [SYS2] are all the same. Follow the instructions in dC132 to
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- correct any missmatched data.
lem is repeated.
3. After the machine restarts, verify the re-enter dC132 and verify the changes have held.
b. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
Note: Upon restart, the machine is likely to produce a 124-xxx fault. Switch off the machine,
GP 19, then allow a few minutes before switching on the machine. If the 124-xxx fault persists,
enter dC132, then verify the three datat locations match. Correct the missmatch per the dC132
instructions.
4. If the fault persists, enter dC301, NVM Initialization, then perform the operation. After restart,
perform GP 2, Software Upgrade.
5. If the fault continues to persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 1 6 - 3 3 6 Re d i r e c t o r H D Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 3 7 S N T P S / W Fa u l t
Redirector HD Failure. A problem was detected during HD accController. Fatal error with SNTP in general. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and proc-
Controllering could no longer continue.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Remove and reinstall the HDD:
1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem
a. Switch off the power, remove the HDD, and switch the power On. is repeated.
b. Switch off the power, reinstall the HDD, and switch the power On. 2. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6.
2. Enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diag Program to diagnose the HDD. 3. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 3 8 J B A S / W Fa u l t 116-339 JBA No HD
When the JBA is started up, the HDD is not installed
Fatal error with JBA in general. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procCon-
trollering could no longer continue. Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
2. Perform dC355, Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test. If the test fails, perform dC355, HDD
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Initialization.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. 4. If the fault persists, install new components in order:
1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2). a. HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
There was insufficient page memory, input buffers, or work area. The ROM DIMMs installed are incorrect versions or an invalid combination of ROM DIMMs are
installed.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If this does not resolve the problem, add Page Memory PM2.
1. Check the versions of the ROM DIMMs installed. Replace the incorrect version(s) with the correct
version so that the correct combination is installed.
2. When installing multiple ROM DIMMs, match the major version with the minor version.
1 1 6 - 3 4 2 S E S A M i M a n a g e r Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 4 3 M a i n P W B A I C Fa u l t
Fatal error related to the SNMP agent. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and An IC error within the Controller PWB was detected.
procControllering could no longer continue.
Procedure
Procedure Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
• Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same lem is repeated.
problem is repeated.
2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
• Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
– NVM RAM
• System Memory
– System Memory
• Page Memory
– Page Memory
3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
• If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• Check all the Controller connections for being loose or disconnected.
1 1 6 - 3 4 5 To ke n R i n g B o a r d Fa i l 1 1 6 - 3 4 6 Fo r m a t t e r Fa u l t
Token Ring Control IC Access error
Formatter failure. Error return from a system call.
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 4 8 Re d i r e c t o r Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 4 9 S I F P f l i t e Fu n c t i o n C a l l Fa u l t
Redirector failure. Error return from a system call. There was an error with a call within SIF related to Pflite.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- 1. Reinstall the latest version of the Controller Firmware (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated. lem is repeated.
2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM • NVM RAM
• System Memory • System Memory
• Page Memory • Page Memory
3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. 3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 4. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 5 0 A p p l e Ta l k S o f t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 5 1 A p p l e Ta l k S o f t Fa u l t
Fatal error with AppleTalk in general. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and Fatal error related to EtherTalk. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procCon-
procControllering could no longer continue. trollering could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If 1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following: the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated. lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM • NVM RAM
• System Memory • System Memory
• Page Memory • Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 5 2 N e t Wa r e S o f t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 5 3 H D D P h y s i c a l Fa u l t
Fatal error related to NetWare. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procCon- A physical problem was detected with the HDD during activation, causing the HDD not to activate.
trollering could no longer continue.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diag Program and initialize the HDD.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. 2. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6.
3. Replace the HDD (PL 3.2).
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following: 4. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 5 4 H D D Pr o d u c t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 5 5 A g e n t S o f t Fa u l t
A problem with the HDD product code was detected during activation, so the HDD was not acti- Fatal error related to the SNMP agent. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and
vated. A possibility exists that the HDD was formatted with a different model machine. procControllering could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch the power Off and replace the HDD (PL 3.2). Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
2. To format an HDD from a different model machine, conduct the Special Boot GP 14.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
3. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 5 6 H D D Fo r m a t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 5 7 Po s t S c r i p t Fa u l t
The HDD was formatted, but either an incorrect HDD was connected or an HDD failure occurred. PostScript fatal system error. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procCon-
trollering could no longer continue.
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diag Program and initialize the HDD.
2. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6. CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
3. Replace the HDD (PL 3.2).
4. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 5 8 S a l u t a t i o n S o f t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 5 9 P LW S o f t Fa u l t
Fatal error related to the salutation. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and Fatal error in PLW. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering
procControllering could no longer continue. could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If 1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following: the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated. lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM • NVM RAM
• System Memory • System Memory
• Page Memory • Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 6 0 S M B S o f t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 6 1 S p o o l Fa t a l H D D Fa u l t
Fatal error related to SMB. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControl- SPL HDD fatal error. Spool Cont detected an error during HDD accController.
lering could no longer continue.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Enter dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diag Program and initialize HDD.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following: 2. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- • NVM RAM
lem is repeated.
• System Memory
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). • Page Memory
• NVM RAM 3. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
• System Memory 4. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6.
• Page Memory 5. Replace the HDD (PL 3.2).
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. 6. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 6 2 S S D P S o f t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 6 3 B M L i n k S / Pr i n t S e r v i c e S o f t w a r e Fa u l t
SSDP software failure. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering BMLinkS or print service software failure. A problem occurred during software procControllering,
could no longer continue. and procControllering could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If 1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following: the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated. lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM • NVM RAM
• System Memory • System Memory
• Page Memory • Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6. d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
e. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 6 4 Ti m e r Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 6 5 S p o o l Fa t a l Fa u l t
A timer error was detected. SPL fatal error. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering could
no longer continue.
Procedure
Replace the Controller NVM PWB (PL 3.2).
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 6 6 Re p o r t G e n e ra t o r O p e ra t i o n Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 6 7 Pa ra l l e l I F S o f t Fa u l t
Report generator incorrect operation. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and Parallel fatal error. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering
procControllering could no longer continue. could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If 1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following: the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated. lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM • NVM RAM
• System Memory • System Memory
• Page Memory • Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 6 8 D u m p Pr i n t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 7 0 X J C L Fa u l t
Dump Print fatal error. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering XJCL fatal error. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering could
could no longer continue. no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If 1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following: the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated. lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM • NVM RAM
• System Memory • System Memory
• Page Memory • Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 7 1 P C L D e c o m p S / W Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 7 2 P - Fo r m a t t e r Fa i l
Due to an error in software processing, subsequent processes cannot be performed.
PCL Decomposer Software Failure. PCL fatal error. A problem occurred during software procControl-
lering, and procControllering could no longer continue. Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 7 3 D y n a m i c D N S S o f t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 7 4 A u t o S w i t c h Fa u l t
Fatal error related to Dynamic DNS. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and Auto SW fatal error. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControllering
procControllering could no longer continue. could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB. and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If 1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following: the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated. lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed). 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM • NVM RAM
• System Memory • System Memory
• Page Memory • Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 7 5 I - Fo r m a t t e r Fa i l 1 1 6 - 3 7 6 Po r t 9 1 0 0 S o f t w a r e Fa u l t
A response such as system function recall error was detected.
Port 9100 Software Fail
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 7 7 V i d e o D M A Fa i l 1 1 6 - 3 7 8 M C R S o f t Fa u l t
Video DMA failure was detected.
Fatal error related to MCR. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControl-
Procedure lering could no longer continue.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 7 9 M C C S o f t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 8 0 Co n t r o l l e r Fo n t R O M D I M M # 1 C h e c k Fa u l t
Fatal error related to MCC. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procControl- An error was detected while checking Controller font ROM DIMM #1.
lering could no longer continue.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob- the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
lem is repeated.
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
b. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 3 8 1 A B L I n i t i a l i z e Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 8 2 A d d r Co n t r o l l e r B o o k L i b r a r y I n i t i a l i z a t i o n D i s a b l e d
It was detected that the ABL didn't agree with the ABL version information in NVM, or the data An ABL accController to NVM or HDD failed.
was corrupted.
Procedure
Procedure
1. Set Diagnostic Code 790-664 to 0.
Note: Before performing the following, obtain the consent of the user. The entire addrController in-
fo will be cleared by this action. 2. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6.
3. If the problem still persists, replace NVM PWB before replacing the HDD (PL 3.2).
Clear the Controller NVMs.
1 1 6 - 3 8 3 P I T L i b Fa i l u r e 1 1 6 - 3 8 4 D C S S o f t w a r e Fa i l
• A Hard Disk access error was detected when a job is in progress. Due to an error in software processing, subsequent processes cannot be performed.
• A PIT Lib internal error has occurred during the creation of Image Log or Thumbnail.
Procedure
Note: Although 016-231 is detected at power ON, this Fail is [detected when a job is in progress], Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
and hence has a different timing.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Check the UI top right display for fault [016-231], without the current fault [116-383] occurring.
• If fault 016-231 has occurred, perform the 016-231.
• If it has not occurred, go to (2) because it is a Hard Disk access error.
3. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Perform dC355, Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test. If the test fails, install
a new HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
1 1 6 - 3 8 5 I D C S o f t w a r e Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 8 6 I n c o r r e c t U S B p o r t u s e d fo r FA X
At startup, the Fax USB Cable was connected to an incorrect port.
Fatal error related to the IDC. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procCon-
trollering could no longer continue. Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. If the fault persists, Install a new Controller PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15).
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) Shutdown History to see if the code frequently occurred. If
the code frequently occurred, perform the following:
a. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
b. Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory
• Page Memory
c. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
d. If the problem still persists, Install a new Controller PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15).
1 1 6 - 3 9 1 Co u n t r y Co d e / Te r r i t o r y Co d e / Pa p e r S i z e Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 9 2 M a c h i n e Co d e C h e c k Fa i l
• The machine code that is stored in the SEEPROM of the ESS ROM, which is inserted in SLOT1 or
SLOT2, does not match the machine code that is stored in the SEEPROM on the Controller board
Incorrect specification of the country code, territory code, or paper size group. (or on the Back Plane).
Procedure • # KOHAKU #
• Check the machine codes for both SLOT1 and SLOT2. If even one of them does not match, this
1. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write and set up the correct country code/territory code/paper size
Fault will occur.
group.
700-165=Country Code; • Although the correct way is to insert ESS ROM for Netware into SLOT1 and the ESS ROM for
Printer Kit into SLOT2, the machine will not display this Fault Code even if they are inserted
700-337=Product Info; wrongly as long as the machine codes are matched.
700-338=Territory Code;
700-402=Paper Size Group Procedure
1. Insert the Printer Kit or the PS Kit and Emulation Kit that is specified for this machine into their
700-165 -> 392 / 700-337 -> 13 / 700-338 -> 1 / 700-402 -> 1
specified slots on the Controller Board.
2. After setting up the correct values, initialize the NVM. (Otherwise, the incorrect country, territory
2. The correct way is to insert the ESS ROM for Netware into SLOT1 and the ESS ROM for Printer
and paper size will remain unchanged.)
Kit into SLOT2.
3. However, if the problem persists even when the Printer Kit or the PS Kit and Emulation Kit that is
specified for this machine has been inserted into their specified slots, either replace the Kits or
the Controller Board.
1 1 6 - 3 9 5 U S B S o f t Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 3 9 6 F I P S 1 4 0 S e l f - Te s t Fa i l
At start, the FIPS140 Encryption Module self-test has detected a failure. Self-Test Error due to illegal
Fatal error related to the USB. A problem occurred during software procControllering, and procCon- ROM (FW).
trollering could no longer continue.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following: 2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem
is repeated.
2. If the problem continues, install a new Controller PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15).
1 1 6 - 3 9 7 A A A m g r I l l e g a l S e t t i n g A r e a Co v e ra g e T h r e s h o l d 1 1 6 - 3 9 9 M a c h i n e U n d e r I n i t i a l i z a t i o n Fo r 1 0 M i n u t e s
When the condition below is met in setting system data values in boot sequence: • When 10 minutes had passed after the Pflite has started up, the machine remains in initializing
state was detected. => 10 minutes had passed in a situation where neither Ack nor Nack was re-
720-061(threshold B) <= 720-060(threshold A) turned from any task.
• This failure is detected only in startup modes such as Normal Cold Boot and Reboot Mode [dur-
Note: If Chain-Link 720-060 Value is not below 720-061 Value, FAULT will be detected. ing Diag exit, etc.]. In other modes such as Recovery from Power Save and [Special Boot Mode],
the failure is not detected because the timeout time of 10 minutes is difficult to guarantee.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Initial Actions
2. Set up system data values that meet the relation between them as below: 1. Reboot the machine once if it remains in initializing state even when the 10-minute timeout
time has passed after power ON.
Chain-Link 720-061(threshold B) > Chain-Link 720-060(threshold A)
2. [Ready to Copy] is displayed and the error code is not displayed at normal start up after
Note: Chain-Link 720-060 Value must be below 720-061 Value. rebooting.
3. If 116-399 occurs again after rebooting, the System Fail screen is displayed.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
1 1 6 - 7 0 0 I m a g e E x t e n s i o n K i t I n s u f fi c i e n t M e m o r y 1 1 6 - 7 0 1 M e m o r y - D u p l e x Fa u l t
When the system data [Log/Image Creation Guarantee Level] is set to [Low], the Image Extension
Kit has insufficient memory. Duplex printing is not possible due to insufficient memory.
Procedure Procedure
Set the image quality to [Normal].
Delete unneeded files from memory (DIMM 4G).
If the machine has no HDD, install the HDD (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 7 0 2 Pr i n t w i t h S u b s t i t u t e Fo n t 116-703
Printing occurred with a substitute font. There was a problem with the PostScript data so that an error occurred during PostScript grammar
interpretation or language interpretation.
Procedure
Procedure
Install a new Controller PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15).
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when removing
and re-installing items from the Controller PWB (PL 1.3 Item 15).
1. Switch the power Off, then On. If the fault persists, perform the following:
• Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same prob-
lem is repeated.
• Switch the power Off. Remove and re-install the following items from the Controller PWB (PL
1.3 Item 15). if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
– NVM RAM
– System Memory
– Page Memory
• If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
• Check the print data or Click ‘Spool Setting’ under the printer driver ‘Detailed Settings’ tab
and set Interactive Communication to Off.
1 1 6 - 7 0 4 M e d i a Re a d e r N o t I n s t a l l e d 1 1 6 - 7 0 5 M e d i a Re a d e r Fo r m a t
Media Reader No Insert (No Job) Media Reader Format Error (No Job)
Procedure Procedure
Check that the Media is inserted. Check the contents in the Media from the PC.
Check the file format/directory and selected mode (Digital Camera Print/Document Print).
1 1 6 - 7 0 6 M e d i a Re a d e r : F i l e A t t r i b u t e Re a d 1 1 6 - 7 0 7 M e d i a Re a d e r : I m a g e F i l e R e a d
Media Reader: File Attribute Read Error (No Job) Media Reader: Image File Read Error (No Job)
Procedure Procedure
Check the contents in the Media from the PC. Check the contents in the Media from the PC.
Check whether the printed file attribute information is displayed in the PC. Check whether the print file images are displayed in the PC.
1 1 6 - 7 0 8 M e d i a Re a d e r : F i l e A t t r i b u t e Re a d 1 1 6 - 7 0 9 M e d i a Re a d e r : I m a g e F i l e R e a d
Media Reader: File Attribute Read Error (In Job) Media Reader: Image File Read Error (Occurs during job)
Procedure Procedure
Check the contents in the Media from the PC. Check the contents in the Media from the PC.
Check whether the printed file attribute information is displayed in the PC. Check whether the print file images are displayed in the PC.
11 6 - 7 1 0 H P - G L Sp o o l F il e O ver f l o w 1 1 6 - 7 1 1 P LW S i z e / O r i e n t a t i o n M i s m a t c h
The size and direction of the specified ART EX form do not agree with that of the paper to be
It is possible that the size of the original was not correctly determined because the incoming data printed.
exceeded the HP-GL/2 (option) spool size.
Procedure
Procedure
Select paper that has the same size and orientation as the registered form.
Increase the HP-GL spool size. Or, install the HDD (PL 3.2).
1 1 6 - 7 1 2 I n s u f fi c i e n t R A M o r H D S p a c e 1 1 6 - 7 1 3 H D D Fu l l Wa r n i n g
The PLW form/logo data cannot be registered due to insufficient RAM or HD space. The job was divided because the HDD was full.
Procedure Procedure
After checking the registered forms/logos using the Operation Panel utility, delete the unnecessary 1. Delete the stored documents and clear HDD Full.
forms/logos. Or, increase the allocated capacity of the RAM disk.
2. If the problem persists, split the job so that HDD Full does not occur.
3. Refer to the dC 355 Initialize Hard Disk Procedure in Section 6.
1 1 6 - 7 1 4 H P - G L / 2 Co m m a n d Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 7 1 5 M a x Fo r m t o P LW Re g i s t e r e d
An HP-GL/2 (option) command error occurred. The form could not be registered because the ART EX form registration upper limit was reached.
Procedure Procedure
Correct or remove the data in the print data that causes the error. After checking the registered forms using the Operation Panel utility, delete the unnecessary forms/
logos. Or, delete the unnecessary forms with Print Command.
1 1 6 - 7 1 6 M e d i a Re a d e r F i l e N o t E x i s t 1 1 6 - 7 1 7 M e d i a L i b : N o t E x e c u t e N e w Re q u e s t
Media Reader File Does Not Exist MediaLib: Not Execute of New Request
Procedure Procedure
Check the contents in the Media from the PC. Check the contents in the Media from the PC. It is not necessary to check the file format/directory
in the Media (as this error does not occur when the previous job is complete).
Check the file format/directory and selected mode (Digital Camera Print/Document Print).
1 1 6 - 7 1 8 S e l e c t e d P LW Fo r m N o t Re g i s t e r e d 1 1 6 - 7 1 9 X P I F Pa r a m e t e r C a n c e l l e d
The specified ART EX form has not been registered. • The device was instructed to execute a function it did not support.
• The device was instructed to execute a function or a combination of functions that it was not
Procedure ready to execute.
Use one of the registered forms, or register the necessary one. Procedure
Some of the parameters are disabled by XPIF so the device cannot execute them; cancel the dis-
abled parameter(s).
1 1 6 - 7 2 0 P C L M e m o r y L o w Pa g e S i m p l i fi e d 1 1 6 - 7 2 1 Pe r m i s s i o n - Pr i n t i n c o l o r ( J o b m o d i fi e d )
Since color print was executed during the time zone in which color print was prohibited, the print
PCL Memory Low, Page Simplified was continued after changing the output color to Black & White according to the system settings.
Procedure Procedure
Print it during the time zone in which it is allowed, or ask the administrator to change the permis-
Disable unnecessary ports, or increase buffer memory sizes, or add Page Memory. sions (same operation as user actions).
1 1 6 - 7 2 2 Pe r m i s s i o n - P r i n t i n c o l o r ( 2 4 / 7 n e v e r ) 1 1 6 - 7 2 3 Pe r m i s s i o n - Pr i n t A p p l i c a t i o n I n Co l o r
Since color print was executed even though it is prohibited at all times, the print was continued Since color print was executed from an application program where it was prohibited, the print was
after changing it to Black & White according to the system settings. continued after changing it to Black & White according to the system settings.
Procedure Procedure
Ask the administrator to change the permissions (same operation as user actions). Ask the administrator to change the permissions (same operation as user actions).
1 1 6 - 7 2 4 Pe r m i s s i o n - P r i n t A p p l i c a t i o n I n S i m p l e x 1 1 6 - 7 2 5 H D D Fu l l Fo r I m a g e Lo g
Since 1-sided print was executed from an application program where it was prohibited, the print With the system data [Level of Ensuring Log Image Creation] set to [Low], the log image storage
was continued after changing the mode to 2-sided according to the system settings. area on the disk is full.
Procedure Procedure
Ask the administrator to change the permissions (same operation as user actions). 1. Rerun the job.
2. If the situation is the same despite some re-attempts, delete unnecessary documents saved in
the device.
1 1 6 - 7 2 6 Pe r m i s s i o n - P r i n t A p p l i c a t i o n I n C o l o r / S i m p l e x 1 1 6 - 7 2 7 Pe r m i s s i o n - Pr i n t 1 - S i d e d D o c u m e n t s
Since color/1-sided print was executed from an application program where it was prohibited, the Since 1-sided print was executed even though it is prohibited at all times, the print was continued
print was continued after changing the mode to Black & White/2-sided according to the system after changing it to 2-sided according to the system settings.
settings.
Procedure
Procedure Ask the administrator to change the permissions (same operation as user actions).
Ask the administrator to change the permissions (same operation as user actions).
1 1 6 - 7 3 8 S i z e / O r i e n ta t i o n M i s m a tc h 1 1 6 - 7 3 9 O u t o f D i s k A r e a - Fo r m / Lo g o R E G I
Synthesis was not possible because the specified ART IV form size and direction were different from
the paper size and direction. It was not possible to register the form or logo data because there was insufficient ART IV memory
or HDD capacity.
Procedure
Procedure
Select paper that has the same size and orientation as the registered form.
After checking the registered forms/logos using the Operation Panel utility, delete the unnecessary
forms/logos. Or, increase the allocated capacity of the RAM disk.
1 1 6 - 7 4 0 N u m e r i c Va l u e C a l c u l a t i o n Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 7 4 1 M a x Fo r m t o N o t P LW Re g i s t e r e d
An arithmetic error occurred because the print data exceeded the printer limit. No more forms can be registered because the number of ART IV Forms registered has reached the
upper limit.
Procedure
Procedure
1. The print data includes data that exceeds the value to which the printer limits it. Remove this
data. After checking the registered forms using the Operation Panel utility, delete the unnecessary forms/
2. Upgrade the driver. logos. Or, delete the unnecessary forms with Print Command.
1 1 6 - 7 4 2 M a x L o g o Re g i s t e r e d 1 1 6 - 7 4 3 Fo r m / Lo g o S i z e O v e r f l o w
No more logo data can be registered because the number of ART IV log data registered has
reached the upper limit. The form or logo data could not be registered due to insufficient ART IV memory.
Procedure Procedure
Check logos registered at the Operation Panel Utility and then remove unnecessary ones. Or remove Increase memory space, or install the HDD (PL 3.2).
unnecessary logos by print command.
1 1 6 - 7 4 5 A RT Co m m a n d Fa u l t 1 1 6 - 7 4 6 S e l e c t e d Fo r m N o t Re g i s t e r e d
The specified form has not been registered.
An ART IV command error occurred. During Decompose, the Decomposer checks for syntax error
and values that exceed their respective limit values. Procedure
Procedure Use one of the registered forms, or registered the necessary one.
1 1 6 - 7 4 7 I n v a l i d Pa g e M a r g i n 1 1 6 - 7 4 8 Pa g e W i t h o u t I m a g e D r a w D a t a
The paper margin value is too large for the HP-GL/2 (option) effective coordinate area. The HP-GL/2 (option) print data does not contain any image data.
Procedure Procedure
Reduce paper margins and instruct the machine to reprint. Check the print data.
Procedure
Return the paper tray for banner sheet to a normal working condition (refer to [Detection Condi-
tions]), or change the paper tray for banner sheet.
1 1 6 - 7 5 2 Pr i n t J o b Ti c ke t D e s c r i p t i o n Wa r n i n g 1 1 6 - 7 7 1 I n v a l i d J B I G Pa r a m D L
When a user instructs to print from an application that directly sends PDF, such as Contents- Invalid JBIG Parameter DL Fixed. A problem with the parameters included in the data was auto-
Bridge2005, the machine received the print job ticket sent together with the PDF but the job ticket matically corrected.
data includes printing instructions that are not supported by the machine.
Procedure
Procedure
Advise the customer to print from a different PC application. The printed image could be defective. Ask the sender to check the image or to resend it.
1 1 6 - 7 7 2 I n v a l i d J B I G Pa r a m D 1 1 6 - 7 7 3 I n v a l i d J B I G Pa r a m P
Invalid JBIG Parameter D Fixed. A problem with the parameters included in the data was automati- Invalid JBIG Parameter P Fixed. A problem with the parameters included in the data was automati-
cally corrected. cally corrected.
Procedure Procedure
The printed image could be defective. Ask the sender to check the image or to resend it. The printed image could be defective. Ask the sender to check the image or to resend it.
1 1 6 - 7 7 4 I n v a l i d J B I G Pa r a m Y D 1 1 6 - 7 7 5 I n v a l i d J B I G Pa r a m L 0
Invalid JBIG Parameter YD Fixed. A problem with the parameters included in the data was auto- Invalid JBIG Parameter LO Fixed. A problem with the parameters included in the data was auto-
matically corrected. matically corrected.
Procedure Procedure
The printed image could be defective. Ask the sender to check the image or to resend it. The printed image could be defective. Ask the sender to check the image or to resend it.
1 1 6 - 7 7 6 I n v a l i d J B I G Pa r a m M X 1 1 6 - 7 7 7 I n v a l i d J B I G Pa r a m M Y
Invalid JBIG Parameter MX Fixed. A problem with the parameters included in the data was auto- Invalid JBIG Parameter MY Fixed. A problem with the parameters included in the data was auto-
matically corrected. matically corrected.
Procedure Procedure
The printed image could be defective. Ask the sender to check the image or to resend it. The printed image could be defective. Ask the sender to check the image or to resend it.
1 1 6 - 7 7 8 I n v a l i d J B I G Pa r V L E N G T H 1 1 6 - 7 8 0 A t t a c h e d D o c u m e n t Fa u l t
Invalid JBIG Parameter VLENGTH Fixed. A problem with the parameters included in the data was There was a problem with the document attached to the received mail.
automatically corrected.
Procedure
Procedure
Check the attached doc.
The printed image could be defective. Ask the sender to check the image or to resend it.
1 1 6 - 7 9 0 S ta p l i n g Ca n c e l l e d
Stapling was cancelled.
Procedure
No corrective action is required because the user cancelled the operation.
1 1 7 - 3 1 2 D e v i c e S e l f Te s t E r r o r 1 1 7 - 3 1 6 Co n t ra c t M a n a g e r S o f t w a r e Fa i l
Description Description
• In an OS self program determination test, it was detected that the Checksum value and the Mini • When the Contract Manager is running, it can no longer perform task control due to software
OS/Program were different. malfunction.
-Unsuccessful due to the Mini OS fault.
Procedure
-Unsuccessful startup due to the damaged program.
• Turn the power OFF, make sure that the Control Panel has turned OFF, and then turn the power
-(It was detected that) the data was illegally overwritten as the Mini OS/Program are different ON again.
from the Checksum value.
Procedure
• Reload software using GP 2.
1 1 7 - 3 1 7 Co n t ra c t M a n a g e r P P P _ c o n t ra c t F i n i s h i n g Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 1 8 Co n t ra c t M a n a g e r P P P D C Co m m a n d Fa i l
Description Description
• The Contract Manager detected that the PPP contract has ended. • The Contract Manager detected that the DC command write that was performed at the end of
a PPP contract has failed.
Procedure
• Wait for reboot. Procedure
• Wait for reboot.
1 1 7 - 3 1 9 S D C a r d Pr o g ra m o r Fo n t D a t a A c c e s s Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 2 0 S D C a r d H W Fa i l
Description Description
• When attempting to extract programs and font data from the SD Card into the memory imme- • When starting up, SD Card Hardware Error was detected by SysCheckSD.
diately after Power ON, an access error occurs and retrying still results in access failure.Or, the
[Write Protection Switch] of the SD Card is locked and prohibits writing, which will also be Procedure
treated as an error. • Perform the following, starting from 1 (Reboot and check after each step. If the problem is fixed
by a step, there is no need to perform the rest.)
Procedure
• Check whether there is any problem with the installation of the SD Card and whether the Write 1. Clear Log Data (Energy Saver + Stop + 1)
Protection Switch lock at the left of the SD Card is enabled. If there is no problem with the in- 2. Clear Spool Area (Energy Saver + Stop + 6 or Stop + Start)
stallation and the Write Protection Switch setting, rewrite the program and font data into the
SD Card. 3. Format HDD (SD Card) (Energy Saver + Stop + 4)
• If the problem persists after the rewrite, replace the SD Card. 4. Replace the SD Card
If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
1 1 7 - 3 2 1 S D C a r d I n v a l i d Ty p e Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 2 2 S D C a r d E n c r y p t Fa i l
Description Description
• When starting up, the installed SD Card was detected to be unsupported by SysCheckSD. • When starting up, SD Encryption Error was detected by SysCheckSD.
Procedure Procedure
• Perform the following, starting from 1. • Perform the following, starting from 1.
Reboot and check after each step. If the problem is fixed by a step, there is no need to perform Reboot and check after each step. If the problem is fixed by a step, there is no need to perform
the rest. Refer to GP 14 for more information. the rest. Refer to GP 14 for more information.
1. Clear Log Data (Energy Saver + Stop + 1) 1. Clear Log Data (Energy Saver + Stop + 1)
2. Clear Spool Area (Energy Saver + Stop + 6 or Stop + Start) 2. Clear Spool Area (Energy Saver + Stop + 6 or Stop + Start)
3. Format HDD (SD Card) (Energy Saver + Stop + 4) 3. Format HDD (SD Card) (Energy Saver + Stop + 4)
4. Replace the SD Card 4. Replace the SD Card
If the problem persists, call service support for assistance. If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
1 1 7 - 3 2 3 S D C a r d F i l e A c c e s s Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 2 4 S D C a r d O t h e r Pr o d u c t Fa i l
Description Description
• When starting up, SD Card File System Access Error was detected by SysCheckSD. • When the OS is starting up, the system detected that the SD Card is meant for another product
and an error is issued.
Procedure
Perform the following, starting from 1. Reboot and check after each step. If the problem is fixed by Procedure
a step, there is no need to perform the rest. Refer to GP 14 for more information. • Check the parts number of the SD Card and install the correct SD Card.
1. Clear Log Data (Energy Saver + Stop + 1)
2. Clear Spool Area (Energy Saver + Stop + 6 or Stop + Start)
3. Format HDD (SD Card) (Energy Saver + Stop + 4)
4. Replace the SD Card
5. If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
1 1 7 - 3 2 5 Co n t ra c t M a n a g e r RT C H a r d w a r e Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 2 6 E S S N V R A M S W A c c e s s Fa i l
Description Description
• When obtaining the RTC time value (Hardware Info) has failed (only when the device is starting • When assessing the NVRAM data during start up or operation, a software malfunction where
up). the software parameters detected by the OSDD is mismatched, etc. occurs.
Procedure Procedure
• Turn the power OFF, make sure that the Control Panel has turned OFF, and then turn the power • Turn the power OFF, make sure that the Control Panel has turned OFF, and then turn the power
ON again. ON again.
1 1 7 - 3 2 7 E S S N V R A M ( S D C a r d ) H W A c c e s s Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 2 8 D e t e c t i n v a l i d c o m b i n a t i o n o f fu n c t i o n fo r i m a g e l o g
Description Fa i l
• When accessing using nv_memmove(), if an Error on the SD Card is detected or when 3 retry at- Description
tempts using the SD Card Driver is still unable to end in recovery, the nv_memmove() will be in
• When Delayed Print is set to a method which uses PDL storage and the Image Log function is
Assertion Fail (= state, Fail Code cannot be identified) and the access to the corresponding task
set to enabled.
is stopped. (Same as the existing NV Fail Detection)
Procedure Procedure
• Change the following settings.
• If the problem reoccurs after turning the power OFF then ON, perform the following:
1. Change the image processing method for the data storage of Delayed Print.
1. Perform SD Card Hardware Diag using Long Boot. If the Diag results in error, replace the SD
Card. 2. Disable the Image Log function.
2. Perform SD Card Hardware Diag using Long Boot. If no error can be detected, perform the
NVRAM Area Initialization process.
3. Perform the NVRAM Area Initialization process. If the error clears, the repair is complete.
4. Perform the NVRAM Area Initialization process. If the error reoccurs, replace the SD Card.
1 1 7 - 3 2 9 S D C a r d N o t Fo u n d Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 3 0 X B D S S o f t Fa i l
Description Description
• When starting up, the SD Card was detected to be not connected by the OS or SysCheckSD. • XBDS-related Fatal Error
A problem has occurred in the software processing and it is unable to continue with the subse-
Procedure quent processes.
• Check whether there is any problem with the installation of the SD Card. If there is no problem
with the installation, replace the SD Card. Procedure
• Turn the power OFF and ON, perform the same operation and check whether the problem is
reoccurring.
Check whether HTTP and HTTPS have started up normally and are operable.
As data is obtained via SNMP for the Alert section, it depends on whether the SNMP Agent has
started up normally.
If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
Procedure Procedure
• Initialize the HDD. • Initialize the NVM.
If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
Note: If the Controller ROM is already of the latest version, there is no need to update it.
4. If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
1 1 7 - 3 3 5 I n v a l i d N V M o f Co n v e r t Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 3 6 P C I O p t i o n N o S u p p o r t D e v i c e Fa i l
Description Description
• Detected at startup after the power is cut off during the NVM Map convert. • Unknown PCI Option is detected by the controller.
Procedure Procedure
• Initialize the NVM. 1. Check if PCI Option is supported.
MF: Turn ON the power ->ESS NVM Initialization while holding down the <Power Save> + <Stop> 2. Re-insert PCI Option.
+ <2> keys. Refer to GP 14 for more information.
3. Replace PCI Option.
If problem persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 7 - 3 3 7 P C I E X O p t i o n N o S u p p o r t D e v i c e Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 3 8 S D C a r d Co n n e c t i o n Fa i l
Description Description
• Unknown PCI Ex Option is detected by the controller. • Fault in the connection with SD card is detected by the controller.
Procedure Procedure
1. Check if PCI Option is supported. 1. Re-insert SD card.
2. Re-insert PCI Option. 2. Replace SD card.
3. Replace PCI Option. If problem persists, replace Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
If problem persists, replace Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 1 7 - 3 3 9 N V M B a c k u p I s N o t C a r r i e d O u t Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 4 0 O t h e r H D D Fa i l
Description Description
• When the Hard Disk replacement is detected, it was also detected that the NVM had not been • A Hard Disk that was formatted by another machine was detected.
backed up beforehand.
Procedure
Procedure • Install the correct Hard Disk. Or, install an unformatted Hard Disk.
• Restore the previous Hard Disk, turn OFF the power again to check for proper operation, and If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
then back up the NVM.
If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
1 1 7 - 3 4 1 E P - B B C e r t i fi c a t e S i g n M i s m a t c h 1 1 7 - 3 4 2 S t o ra g e d e v i c e i n c o r r e c t - e x c h a n g e d Fa u l t
Description Description
• When the signature method of EPBB Certificate does not match the signature method that was • An SSD is installed to a machine that had a HDD installed. A HDD is installed to a machine that
set in 701-291 after the EPBB installation. had an SSD installed. Or, the type of storage device that is stored in the Seep has become an un-
defined value.
Procedure
• Turn the power OFF and ON. Procedure
Login using the CE Mode, set 701-291 from [0] -> [1] or from [1] -> [0], and then reboot. • 1. Turn OFF the power, make sure that the Control Panel has turned OFF, and then turn ON the
power again.
If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
2. Restore the previously installed storage device (HDD or SSD).
1 1 7 - 3 4 3 Lo g S e n d i n g Pa ra m e t e r Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 4 4 I n v a l i d U s e r J o b Ty p e Fa i l
Description Description
• When an incorrect setting of the log transfer function was detected. • When verifying the User Job Info of the Job that is being executed.
1. When the Image Log function is disabled and the Auto Transfer function is enabled, [Transfer
in Job Units] is set. Procedure
2. When the Job Log Auto Transfer function is disabled (no Hard Disk), the Auto Transfer func- • Turn the power OFF and ON.
tion of the log is set to enabled.
Procedure
• Change the setting of Log Transfer function.
1. For detection condition 1, change the operation method for Log Auto Transfer to anything
other than [Transfer in Job Units].
2. For detection condition 2, check whether a Hard Disk is installed or change the Auto Transfer
function of the log to disable it.
3. If the problem persists, call service support for assistance.
1 1 7 - 3 4 5 S S M M B a t c h S e t t i n g D u ra t i o n Fa i l R A P 1 1 7 - 3 4 7 S E E P B i l l i n g Co u n t e r L i fe E n d Fa i l
Description Description
• During the batch setting of LoDeM, a reboot occurred due to a change in system data. When the SEEP Extension Billing Counter have all been used up and billing count cannot be per-
formed as New Extension Counter cannot be obtained.
Procedure
• Information only. Procedure
1. Switch off, the switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15.
1 1 7 - 3 4 8 U n i n i t i a l i z e U s e d S D C A R D Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 4 9 G R S S o f t w a r e Fa i l
Description Detects this Fail when enters a state where it is unable to continue operating as GRS.
• An un-initialized SD Card that had been used in another device was recognized.
Procedure
Procedure Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1.
2. Switch off, then switch one the machine, GP 19.
3. Verify the SD Card is correct for the machine installed.
4. Enter GP 4, Serial Number Synchronization Procedure, then verify all three numbers are match-
ing for [IOT, SYS1, SYS2]. Follow the procedure to correct any unmatching numbers.
5. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 1 7 - 3 5 0 C l i e n t S c a n S / W Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 5 4 J o b L i m i t Sy s t e m Fa i l
A problem has occurred in the Client Scan Service software processing and it is unable to continue An error has occurred at Coml_SsmiIsJoblimit before the job was executed.
with the subsequent processes.
Procedure
Procedure Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
1 1 7 - 3 5 5 H a r d D i s k N o t Fo u n d Fa i l o n D e v i c e U s i n g H a r d D i s k 1 1 7 - 3 5 6 J o b L i m i t E s t i m a t i o n Sy s t e m Fa i l
Although the hard disk was connected at the previous startup, it was not recognized at this startup. When obtaining the JobLimit estimation, a system error was detected in ComlDvm_GetEstimation.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the HDD harness plug is fully seated in to jack of the controller PWB.
3. To make a disk-less configuration, initialize the hard disk, dC355.
1 1 7 - 3 5 7 T P M Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 5 8 J A L S o f t w a r e Fa i l
When any one of the following conditions is met. A problem has occurred during the software process and the process is unable to continue.
• The TPM device can not be recognized.
Procedure
• TPM self-diagnosis failed. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Communication with TPM failed.
• Failed to initialize TPM.
• The key generated by TPM was used but TPM became unusable.
Procedure
Replace the TPM if it does not recover with power OFF/ON. If the TPM device can not be recog-
nized, or initialization of the TPM or communication fails, there is a possibility of a controller board
failure.
Procedure Procedure
1. Turn OFF the power, make sure that the Control Panel has turned OFF, and then turn ON the 1. Turn the power OFF and ON. If the problem persists, do the following:
power again. (If the problem reoccurs, contact the administrator/telephone center, etc.). 2. Check the Billing Meter Type (720-002) or the Billing Counter Type (720-052) settings.
2. When the power is turned ON again, the time will be set to 2034 or later. Set the correct time 3. Check the license and for whether the Billing Counter Type (720-052) has to be set to other than
again. '0'; note that when 720-052 = other than '0', 720-002 must be = '1'.
1 1 7 - 3 6 2 U S B D o n g l e I l l e g a l T S C Co n t ra c t Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 6 3 U S B D o n g l e Co u n t U p M o d e S e t t i n g Fa i l
When using the USB dongle for the first time installation, the TSC agreement mode setting failed. When using the USB dongle for the first time installation, the count up mode setting failed.
Procedure Procedure
Turn the power OFF and ON. Check that the correct USB dongle is used. Turn the power OFF and ON. Check that the correct USB dongle is used.
1 1 7 - 3 6 4 K e y Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 6 5 W i - F i Lo n g d i a g Fa i l
When any one of the following conditions is met at the time of machine initialization. Error has occurred at Wi-Fi Diag Test.
• The encryption key file is destroyed
Procedure
• TPM key information file is destroyed 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• TPM backup file is missing or corrupted during automatic recovery of encryption key file 2. Verify the Wi-Fi settings in the machine UI are correct for the customer network. Correct any in-
• Either the access key information, MAC address, or serial number that was held in the SEEP area correct settings.
was changed 3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
• Decryption of encryption key failed in TPM 4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
Procedure 5. If the fault persists, install a new controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. If restart causes a fault, perform the RAP fr that
fault.
2. If the same fault occurs, even after GP 19 is performed more than 2 times:
a. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3, then enter dC131 NVM Read/Write, code [700-449].
[000000000000] as the data string.
b. Enter dC355,then execute HDD initialization. When HDD initialization completes, switch off,
then switch on the machine to clear the fault.
1 1 7 - 3 6 7 M O D E _ LO C K _ S e v e r e _ Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 7 1 Sy s t e m Fa i l o f J o b L i m i t s w i t h H C S c o n fi g u ra t i o n
The mode lock release request to modelib has failed. [Detection Conditions]
• When started up with JobLimits enabled and HCS Dynamic Sample Operation Mode set to
Procedure [Exclusive].
1. Switch off, the switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 2. Procedure
• Turn the power OFF and ON, and perform the following.
1. Set the HCS Dynamic Sample Operation Mode to [Inclusive]
2. Turn OFF the JobLimits setting
1 1 7 - 3 7 2 D e t e c t i o n o f O p e ra t i n g Sy s t e m Fa i l u r e 1 1 7 - 3 7 3 U s e r D a t a Co n v e r t Fa i l
The operating system was detected to have hanged. Data conversion cannot be done and the default value was set instead.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Turn the power OFF and ON, then try again. Perform NVM Clear, and if the problem persists, per-
form Hard Disk Clear.
2. Enter Diagnostics, GP 3. Execute dC301 NVM Initialization.
3. Perform dC355, Initialize Hard Disk.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
1 1 7 - 3 7 5 S t o ra g e D e v i c e E n c r y p t i o n Fa i l 1 1 7 - 3 7 6 E n c r y p t e d S t o ra g e M o u n t Fa i l
An error was detected at the encryption process during startup Any of the following was detected
• The key used for storage encryption is invalid
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. • The file system is corrupted
2. enter Diagnostics, GP 3, then perform dC355, Initialize Hard Disk. • Other possible cause is that a storage that was used at another machine is connected to this
machine or the Hard Disk could be physically damaged.
3. Install a new, HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. enter Diagnostics, GP 3, then perform dC355, Initialize Hard Disk.
3. Install a new, HDD assembly, PL 3.2 Item 1.
1 1 8 - 3 1 0 I P S E C I n t e r n a l Fa i l
An internal error was detected during initialization of the IPSEC.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the network settings in the machine UI are correct for the customer network.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
4. Verify the security certificate requested is correct for the operation requested.
1 1 8 - 3 1 1 G C P S o f t Fa t a l E r r o r 1 1 8 - 3 1 2 C S B S o f t Fa t a l E r r o r
Problem occurs at software processing, and processing is unable to proceed. A problem has occurred in the software processing and it is unable to continue with the subsequent
processes.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the network settings in the machine UI are correct for the customer network.
2. Verify the network settings in the machine UI are correct for the customer network.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 2.
4. Verify the security certificate requested is correct for the operation requested.
4. Verify the security certificate requested is correct for the operation requested.
1 2 1 - 3 1 0 F D I - A c c e s s o r y Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa i l
Transmission between the Foreign Device Interface (FDI) and the accessories failed.
Initial Actions
Power Off/On
Procedure
Check the electrical connectors on the HDD (PL 3.2).
If the problem persists perform dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test.
If the problem persists replace the FDI.
If the problem persists replace the foreign device accessory.
1 2 3 - 2 0 7 Co m m M a n a g e r Ta r g e t Fa u l t
Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 2 0 9 E V M Re t u r n s W r o n g Va l u e 1 2 3 - 3 1 0 S e n d Q u e u e Fu l l
EVM Returns Wrong Value (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Send Queue Full (UI-Control panel). The upper bound for the ability to send data from the control
panel to ESS was exceeded.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
Receive Queue Full (UI-Control panel). The data received from ESS exceeded the upper boundary of EVM Uses Wrong API (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
the processing ability within the control panel.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 1 7 Re c e i v e M e s s a g e Q u e u e Fu l l 1 2 3 - 3 1 8 R e c e i v e F i n i s h Q u e u e Fu l l
Receive Message Queue Full (UI-Control panel). The data received from ESS exceeded the upper Receive Finish Queue Full (UI-Control panel). The data received from ESS exceeded the upper boun-
boundary of the processing ability within the control panel. dary of the processing ability within the control panel.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 2 0 N V M i n i t i a l i z e d fo r FC W 1 2 3 - 3 2 2 Ta r g e t Fa u l t
Polling Fault (UI-Control panel). Serial communication error. Target Fault (UI-Control panel). Serial communication error.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 2 3 A d d r e s s Fa u l t 1 2 3 - 3 2 5 O bj e c t C r e a t i o n Fa u l t
Address Fault (UI-Control panel). Serial communication error. Object Creation Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
12 3 - 3 2 6 M e mo r y Ove r fl o w 1 2 3 - 3 27 B u t t o n Ove r f l o w
Memory Overflow (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Button Overflow (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 2 8 U I I n t e r n a l I / F Fa u l t 1 2 3 - 3 2 9 U I I n t e r n a l I / F Fa u l t
UI Internal Fault with Out of Area. UI software error within the Controller PWB. UI Internal Fault with Invalid Coordinates. UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 3 2 I / F Fa u l t ( I n v a l i d Pa ra m e t e r C P ) 1 2 3 - 3 3 3 I / F Fa u l t ( I m p o s s i b l e Co m m u n i c a t i o n )
I/F Fault (Invalid Parameter CP). UI software error within the Controller PWB. I/F Fault (No Communication). H/W connection Fault within the UI Interface PWB, or an internal
connection could not be corrected detected.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 3 7 Fra m e D a ta Fa u l t w i t h I n v a l i d D a ta Ty p e 1 2 3 - 3 3 8 Fra m e D a t a Fa u l t O f fs e t A d d r e s s O u t
Frame Data Fault with Invalid Data Type. UI software error within the Controller PWB. Frame Data Fault Offset Address Out. UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 3 9 D i s p l a y Re q u e s t C o d e I n v a l i d 1 2 3 - 3 4 0 I n t e r fa c e Fa u l t G U A M - D M I / F
Display Request Code Invalid. UI software error within the Controller PWB. Interface Fault GUAM-DM I/F. UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 4 1 E v e n t Q u e u e Fu l l 1 2 3 - 3 4 2 Ev e n t Q u e u e E m p t y
Event Queue Full (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Event Queue Empty (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 4 5 T i m e r Q u e u e Fu l l 1 2 3 - 3 4 6 I n v a l i d Ti m e r N u m b e r
Timer Queue Full (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Invalid Timer Number (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 5 0 O n e To u c h K ey Fa u l t 1 2 3 - 3 5 2 S y s E E P R O M Re a d E r r o r ( U I - Pa n e l )
Privilege Command (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. An error internal to the con-panel (an abnormal value in EEPROM for Sys) has been detected.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 5 3 U I C a b l e Co n n e c t E r r o r 1 2 3 - 3 5 4 D e c r e a s e i n 2 4 V E r r o r ( U I - Pa n e l )
Procedure The Control Panel has detected a drop in 24V power voltage.
Switch the power off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Procedure
1. Reseat the UI Interface Cable. Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
2. Perform ADJ 2.1 UI Touch Panel Origin Point Correction.
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
3. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB PL 3.2 Item 7.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 5 5 D e c r e a s e i n 5 V E r r o r ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 5 6 FA X OT K Ca b l e Co n n e c t E r r o r ( U I - Pa n e l )
The Control Panel has detected a drop in 5V power voltage. The Control Panel has detected that FFC is disconnected from One Touch Key for FAX or that One
Touch Key has a problem.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 5 7 S y s E E P R O M W r i t e E r r o r ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 5 8 L o g E E P R O M W r i t e E r r o r ( U I - Pa n e l )
The Control Panel has detected that writing in the EEPROM there failed. The Control Panel has detected that writing in the EEPROM there for logging failed.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 6 2 N o O b j e c t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 6 8 S h o r t o f U I M e m o r y ( U I - Pa n e l )
No Object (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Short of UI Memory (UI-Control panel). There is insufficient memory or a connection problem.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 6 9 I n v a l i d I n t e r fa c e Va l u e ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 7 0 I n t e r fa c e Le n g t h Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Invalid Interface Value (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Interface Length Fault (UI-Control panel). There was a mistake in a parameter received from ESS.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 7 1 I n t e r fa c e Pa ra m e t e r Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 7 2 I n t e r fa c e S e q u e n c e Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Interface Parameter Fault (UI-Control panel). There was a mistake in a parameter received from Interface Sequence Fault (UI-Control panel). There was no notification of an initialization command
ESS. from ESS within the specified time.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 7 3 C h a n n e l Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 7 4 I n v a l i d U s e r J o b I D ( U I - Pa n e l )
Channel Fault (UI-Control panel). There was a mistake in a cancel received from ESS. Invalid User Job ID (UI-Control panel). There was an error in a job ID parameter received from ESS.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 7 5 I n t e r n a l Re s o u r c e Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 7 6 I n t e r n a l M e m o r y Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Internal Resource Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Internal Memory Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 7 7 U I Ti m e r Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 7 8 I n t e r fa c e Fo r m a t Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
UI Timer Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Interface Format Fault (UI-Control panel). There was an error in a data format received from ESS.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 7 9 D i s p a tc h Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 8 0 Co p y I n t e r fa c e Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Dispatch Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Copy Interface Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 8 1 Fa x I n t e r fa c e Fa i l ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 8 2 S c a n n e r I n t e r fa c e Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
UI-SW failure in the Controller PWB. Scanner Interface Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 8 3 Re p o r t I n t e r fa c e Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 8 4 S e r v e r A c c e s s Fa u l t ( H B / FC W )
Report Interface Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Server Access Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 8 5 S e r v i c e O b j e c t O v e r f l o w ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 8 6 I n v a l i d S e r v i c e O b j e c t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Service Object Overflow (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Invalid Service Object (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 8 7 I n v a l i d S e r v i c e O b j e c t A t t r i b u t e ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 8 8 A t t r i b u t e Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Invalid Service Object Attribute (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Attribute Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 8 9 A r g u m e n t Fa u l t ( H B / FC W ) 1 2 3 - 3 9 0 J o b Pa ra m e t e r Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Argument Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Job Parameter Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 9 1 J o b E x e c u t i o n A r g u m e n t Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 9 2 A u d i t r o n I l l e g a l ( U I - Pa n e l )
Job Actual Parameter Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Auditron Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 9 3 E P Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 9 4 F i l e A c c e s s I l l e g a l ( U I - Pa n e l )
EP Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. File Access Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 9 5 N V M Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 9 6 F F Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
NVM Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. FF Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 9 7 M G R Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 3 9 8 D e l a y R e l e a s e Q u e u e Fu l l ( U I - P a n e l )
MGR Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Delay Release Queue Full (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB.
Procedure Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following: Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 3 - 3 9 9 I n t e r n a l Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l ) 1 2 3 - 4 0 0 J R M I / F I n t e r n a l Fa u l t ( U I - Pa n e l )
Internal Fault (UI-Control panel). UI software error within the Controller PWB. Internal Fault (UI-Control panel). Insufficient registration, internal error, or an IF sequence or pa-
rameter outside the specification was input to the converter.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
Switch off, then switvh on the machine, GP 19. If the fault persists, perform the following:
1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. 1. Upgrade ESS Firmware to the latest version, GP 2.
2. If the fault persists, install a new Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 4 - 3 1 0 Pr o d u c t N o Fa u l t
The product number was not specified.
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
• Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 1 1 S e r i a l N o Fa u l t 1 2 4 - 3 1 2 Pr o d u c t N o Fa u l t
The serial number registration field failed. Product numbers did not agree.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
• Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure. • Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). • If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). • If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 4 - 3 1 3 S e r i a l N o Fa u l t 1 2 4 - 3 1 4 I OT S p e e d Fa u l t
Serial numbers did not agree. IOT Speed Fault
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
• Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure. • Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). • If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). • If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 1 5 A l l I OT S p e e d M i s m a t c h 1 2 4 - 3 1 6 Pr o d u c t M o d e l Fa u l t
IOT Speed Mismatch Product a/f Model Fault
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Check the values at the following Chain Link Codes. • Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
Note: IOT refers to MCU PWB, SYS 1 to EEPROM (on Backplane PWB), and SYS 2 to Controller
NVM PWB. • If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-600] (IOT) :
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-601] (SYS 1) :
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-602] (SYS 2) :
The three values are all different.
Y N
Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 4 - 3 1 7 A l l Pr o d u c t M o d e l M i s m a t c h 1 2 4 - 3 1 8 Pr o d u c t Ty p e Fo r S W K ey Fa u l t
Product a/f All Product Model Mismatch Product Type for S/W Key Fault
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Check the values at the following Chain Link Codes. • Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
Note: IOT refers to MCU PWB, SYS 1 to EEPROM (on Backplane PWB), and SYS 2 to Controller
NVM PWB.
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-600] (IOT) :
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-601] (SYS 1) :
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-602] (SYS 2) :
The three values are all different.
Y N
Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 4 - 3 1 9 A l l Pr o d u c t Ty p e Fo r S W K ey M i s m a t c h 1 2 4 - 3 2 0 E E P R O M Fa u l t
All Product Type For S/W Key Mismatch EEPROM Fault. A EEPROM write problem occurred.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Check the values at the following Chain Link Codes. CAUTION: Switch the power Off. Observe correct ESD procedures. Be careful not to
damage the EEPROM, it is not spared.
Note: IOT refers to MCU PWB, SYS 1 to EEPROM (on Backplane PWB), and SYS 2 to Controller
NVM PWB. 1. Remove and reinsert the EEPROM on the Controller PWB; or on the Backplane PWB.
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-606] (IOT) : 2. If the problem still exists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-607] (SYS 1) : 3. If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-608] (SYS 2) :
The three values are all different.
Y N
Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 4 - 3 2 1 B a c k u p S R A M Fa u l t 1 2 4 - 3 2 2 Co p y / S c a n / Pr i n t D i s a b l e d Fa u l t
Backup SRAM Fault. An NVM ROM write problem occurred on the Controller PWB. Copy/Scan/Print S/W Key by PWE Fault
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
• Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off. Observe correct ESD procedures.
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1. Pull out and reinsert the Controller NVM PWB (PL 3.2). Switch the power On. • If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
2. If the problem still exists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still exists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
• Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Check the values at the following Chain Link Codes. Replace any
PWB that exhibits a mismatch. • If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Note: IOT refers to MCU PWB, SYS 1 to EEPROM (on Backplane PWB), and SYS 2 to Controller
NVM PWB.)
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-603] (IOT):
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-604] (SYS 1):
• dC131 NVM Read/Write [700-605] (SYS 2):
1 2 4 - 3 2 5 B i l l i n g Re s t o ra t i o n Fa u l t 1 2 4 - 3 2 6 I OT S p e e d N o t Re g i s t e r e d
Billing Restoration Fault. Billing automatic recovery was not possible. It was detedted that at boot, IOT Speed registration procedure status was 1 or 2.
Procedure Procedure
This Fail triggers the procedure for changing IOT Speed. Accordingly the user needs to follow the di-
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: alog displayed on the UI in order to enter the SW Key for changing IOT Speed.
Compare the Serial Numbers in GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
The three Numbers are all different.
Y N
Replace the PWB whose values do not match.
• Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 4 - 3 2 7 I OT S p e e d C h a n g e S W Fa i l 1 2 4 - 3 3 1 E S S R O M D I M M # 1 N o t Fo u n d
A SW error was detected during the procedure for changing IOT Speed. The system detected that the ESS ROM DIMM #1 was not installed (deleted because unable to
display)
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. If the fault persists, install new components in order as required:
2. If the fault persists:
a. IOT drive PWB, PL 1.2 Item 11.
b. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. a. Remove then install the DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
b. Install a new DIMM 4GB, PL 3.2 Item 2.
1 2 4 - 3 3 2 Co n t ra c t D a ta M i s m a t c h 1 2 4 - 3 3 4 S t a n d a r d Fo n t R O M Fa u l t
Case where the contract data on IOT side and Controller side mismatches. Standard Font ROM Error. A problem was detected with the standard installed font ROM.
Procedure Procedure
Perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data (Adjustment/Others).
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem
is repeated.
2. Extract and re-insert MF ROM (J 332). If the problem still persists, replace the ROM (PL 3.2)
3. Extract and re-insert the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 3.2) if any are installed
(the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory (J 330)
• Page Memory (J 331)
4. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 4 - 3 3 5 Fo n t R O M N o t Fo u n d 1 2 4 - 3 3 7 Co n t r o l l e r S t a n d a r d R A M E r r o r
Font ROM Not Found. The font ROM could not be detected. Controller Standard RAM Error. An error was detected with the Controller installed standard RAM.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract- CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB. ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem 1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem
is repeated. is repeated.
2. Extract and re-insert MF ROM (J 332). If the problem still persists, replace the ROM. 2. Remove and install the DIMM 4G (J 330) (PL 3.2 Item 2). If the problem still persists, replace
3. Extract and re-insert the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 3.2) if any are installed the DIMM 4G.
(the model configuration determines which are installed). 3. Extract and re-insert the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 3.2) if any are installed
• NVM RAM (the model configuration determines which are installed).
1 2 4 - 3 3 8 I d e n t i c a l Fo n t R O M s I n s ta l l e d 1 2 4 - 3 3 9 R O M D I M M Fr o m A n o t h e r P r o d u c t I n s t a l l e d
Same Font ROMs Found. It was detected that identical font ROMs were installed. ROM DIMM of another product found. It was detected that a different type of font ROM was
installed.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB. CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
1. Check the standard Font ROM (J 332) and optional Font ROM. Install the appropriate ROM. If
the ROM is correct, extract and re-insert it. 1. Check the standard Font ROM (J 332) and optional Font ROM. Install the appropriate ROM. If
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). the ROM is correct, extract and re-insert it.
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 4 - 3 4 0 C R U M M a r ke t Fa u l t A l l 1 2 4 - 3 4 1 C R U M M a r ke t Fa u l t M C U
The three CRUM market destination values are not set up (0 or different). One CRUM market destination value is different (IOT).
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
1. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 1. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). 2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 4 2 C R U M M a r ke t Fa u l t S Y S 1 1 2 4 - 3 4 3 C R U M M a r ke t Fa u l t S Y S 2
One CRUM market destination value is different (SYS 1). One CRUM market destination value is different (SYS 2).
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off. Observe correct ESD procedures. Be careful not to CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
damage the EEPROM, it is not spared. ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
1. Remove and reinsert the EEPROM on the Controller PWB; or on the Backplane PWB. 1. Pull out and insert the Controller NVM PWB.
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). 3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
• Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure. • Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). • If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). • If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 4 6 A l l B i l l i n g Co u n t Ty p e s M i s m a t c h 1 2 4 - 3 4 7 B i l l i n g Co u n t Ty p e Re s t o ra t i o n Fa i l
All the billing count types kept at multiple locations are different. When one billing count type did not match, this machine tried to automatically correct it but failed.
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following: Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
• Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure. • Perform GP 4 Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). • If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). • If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 4 8 A l l M o d a l B r e a k Po i n t s M i s m a t c h 1 2 4 - 3 4 9 M o d a l B r e a k Po i n t Re s t o ra t i o n Fa i l
All the Modal Break Points kept at multiple locations are different. When one Modal Break Point did not match, this machine tried to automatically correct it but
failed.
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following: Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, do the following:
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
• If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 5 0 C R U M O E M Fa u l t A l l 1 2 4 - 3 5 1 C R U M O E M Fa u l t M C U
The three CRUM OEM destination values are not set up (0 or different). One CRUM OEM destination value is different (IOT).
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
1. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 1. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). 2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 5 2 C R U M O E M Fa u l t S Y S 1 1 2 4 - 3 5 3 C R U M O E M Fa u l t S Y S 2
One CRUM OEM destination value is different (SYS 1). One CRUM OEM destination value is different (SYS 2).
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off. Observe correct ESD procedures. Be careful not to CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
damage the EEPROM, it is not spared. ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
1. Remove and reinsert the EEPROM on the Backplane PWB. 1. Pull out and insert the Controller NVM PWB.
2. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). 3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 5 6 S e r i a l N o Re s t o ra t i o n Fa i l 1 2 4 - 3 5 7 Pr o d u c t N o Re s t o ra t i o n Fa i l
When at least one Serial No. is not matched and the machine automatic correction has failed to When at least one Product No. is not matched and the machine automatic correction has failed to
correct the problem. correct the problem.
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Perform dC131, NVM Read / Write to compare the following 3 NVM values: 2. Perform dC131, NVM Read / Write to compare the following 3 NVM values:
[700-600], [700-601], [700-602] [700-600], [700-601], [700-602]
3. If 2 of them are the same, perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data (Adjustment/Others), to 3. If 2 of them are the same, perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data (Adjustment/Others), to
match the 3 values. match the 3 values.
4. perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data (Adjustment/Others). If all 3 are different, install a new 4. perform dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data (Adjustment/Others). If all 3 are different, install a new
MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, and controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7. MCU PWB, PL 1.2 Item 15, and controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
1 2 4 - 3 5 9 I OT N V M B a c k u p Re s t o r e Fa i l 1 1 2 4 - 3 6 0 C R U M Va l i d a t i o n Fa u l t A l l
The Restore function of the IOT NVM, which checks three points for automatic correction, had com- CRUM Valid/Invalid is not set up at the three locations (0 or different values).
pleted successfully.
Procedure
Procedure
No action is required. Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
1. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 6 1 C R U M Va l i d a t i o n Fa u l t M C U 1 2 4 - 3 6 2 C R U M Va l i d a t i o n Fa u l t S Y S 1
CRUM Validation Fault MCU. CRUM valid/invalid data was different (IOT). CRUM Validation Fault SYS 1. CRUM valid/invalid data was different (SYS 1).
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
1. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). CAUTION: Switch the power Off. Observe correct ESD procedures. Be careful not to
2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). damage the EEPROM, it is not spared.
1. Remove and reinsert the EEPROM on the Controller PWB; or on the Backplane PWB.
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 6 3 C R U M Va l i d a t i o n Fa u l t S Y S 2 1 2 4 - 3 6 4 I OT N V M B a c k u p Re s t o r e Fa i l 1
CRUM Validation Fault SYS 2. CRUM valid/invalid data was different (SYS 2). It was detected that the Restore function of the IOT NVM, which checks three points for automatic
correction, was executed and had finished successfully.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: The machine reboots automatically.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
1. Pull out and insert the Controller NVM PWB.
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 6 7 I OT S p e e d C h a n g e I OT M o d e l M i s m a t c h 1 2 4 - 3 6 8 S h i p p i n g P l a c e Fa i l
The speed range (Low/Mid/High) and Software Key settings do not match. The Shipping Place that is retained in 3 locations are not initialized.
Procedure Procedure
Turn the power OFF and ON. If the problem persists, re-set the Software Key in the IOT model (Low/ Turn the power OFF and ON. If the problem persists, replace the MCU PWB and the ESS PWB.
Mid/High).
1 2 4 - 3 7 2 I OT s c S o f t Fa u l t 1 2 4 - 3 7 3 I OT M a n a g e r S W Fa u l t
IOT sc Soft Fault. IOT controller software problem. A problem occurred during software procControl- IOT Manager SW Fault. IOT manager software failure.
lering, and procControllering could no longer continue.
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract- ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem
1. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem is repeated.
is repeated. 2. Check all the connectors on the IOT Drive PWB and the Controller PWB for being properly
2. Check all the connectors on the IOT Drive PWB and the Controller PWB for being properly installed.
installed. 3. Extract and re-insert the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 3.2) if any are installed
3. Extract and re-insert the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 3.2) if any are installed (the model configuration determines which are installed).
(the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• NVM RAM • System Memory (J 330)
• System Memory (J 33 0) • Page Memory (J 331)
• Page Memory (J331) 4. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
4. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices. 5. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11).
5. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11). 6. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
6. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). 7. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
7. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 7 4 I OT I M D e v i c e D r i v e r S W Fa u l t 1 2 4 - 3 8 0 C R U M M a r ke t Fa u l t A l l ( 2 )
IOT IM Device Driver software failure. CRUM Market fail ALL (2)
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off, then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract- 1. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB. 2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1. This fault can also be caused by incorrect Drum installed. An X700 Drum will fit and the machine
will be recognized but this fault will be declared when first print or copy is made.
The correct Drum for this product is 013R00664 for color and 013R00663 for Black.
2. Upgrade Controller Firmware to the latest version (GP 2) and check to see if the same problem
is repeated.
3. Check all the connectors on the IOT Drive PWB and the Controller PWB for being properly
installed.
4. Extract and re-insert the following items from the Controller PWB (PL 3.2) if any are installed
(the model configuration determines which are installed).
• NVM RAM
• System Memory (J 330)
• Page Memory (J 331)
5. If the problem still persists, replace the appropriate devices.
6. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 1.2 Item 11).
7. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
8. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 8 1 C R U M M a r ke t Fa u l t M C U ( 2 ) 1 2 4 - 3 8 2 C R U M M a r ke t Fa u l t S Y S 1 ( 2 )
CRUM Market fail MCU (2) CRUM Market fail SYS 1 (2)
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
1. Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). CAUTION: Switch the power Off. Observe correct ESD procedures. Be careful not to
2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). damage the EEPROM, it is not spared.
1. Remove and reinsert the EEPROM on the Controller PWB; or on the Backplane PWB.
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 8 3 C R U M M a r ke t Fa u l t S Y S 2 ( 2 ) 1 2 4 - 3 9 0 C R U M O E M Fa u l t A l l ( 2 )
CRUM Market fail SYS 2 (2) CRUM OEM fail ALL (2)
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract- 1. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB. 2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1. Pull out and insert the Controller NVM PWB.
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 9 1 C R U M O E M Fa u l t M C U ( 2 ) 1 2 4 - 3 9 2 C R U M O E M Fa u l t S Y S 1 ( 2 )
CRUM OEM fail MCU (2) CRUM OEM fail SYS 1 (2)
Procedure Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following: Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
1. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). CAUTION: Switch the power Off. Observe correct ESD procedures. Be careful not to
2. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). damage the EEPROM, it is not spared.
1. Remove and reinsert the EEPROM on the Controller PWB; or on the Backplane PWB.
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
1 2 4 - 3 9 3 C R U M O E M Fa u l t S Y S 2 ( 2 ) 1 2 4 - 7 0 1 O u t p u t Tra y C h a n g e d fr o m S i d e Tra y
CRUM OEM fail SYS 2 (2) Side Tray to Center Tray. The exit destination was changed to the center tray because there was a
problem with the specified exit tray (side tray).
Procedure
Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. If the problem still exists, perform the following:
Repair the Side Tray using the proper RAP.
CAUTION: Switch the power Off and observe correct ESD procedures when extract-
ing and inserting items from the Controller PWB.
1. Pull out and insert the Controller NVM PWB/
2. If the problem still persists, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. If the problem still persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Procedure Procedure
Repair the Folder Tray using the proper RAP. Repair the Punch using the proper RAP.
1 2 4 - 7 0 6 Fo l d i n g C a n c e l l e d 1 2 4 - 7 0 8 O u t p u t Tra y C h a n g e d t o S u b Tra y
Folding Cancelled. A folding specification was deleted. The output tray has been changed to the Sub Tray because a failure was detected in the specified
output tray.
Procedure
Procedure
Repair the Folder Tray using the proper RAP.
Repair the specified Output Tray using the proper RAP.
1 2 4 - 7 0 9 M a x S h e e t Vo l u m e fo r S t a p l i n g E x c e e d e d
Stapler Sheet Count is too high.
Procedure
The No. of Stapler Sheets exceeded was detected, but printing continued.
1 2 5 - 3 1 1 P S W c o n t U n e x p e c t e d Fa u l t
PSW cont Unexpected Failure. A problem occurred during ESS software (PST cont) processing, and
processing could no longer continue.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Turn the power Off then On. If the problem persists, perform the following procedure to repair it.
• Check that the latest version of software is installed (GP 2).
• Check connections on the Controller PWB.
• Check the wiring to the Controller PWB.
• If the above checks are OK, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 7 - 2 1 0 D F E Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t 1 2 7 - 2 1 1 D F E Pa ra m e t e r Fa u l t
Network Controller Communication Fault Network Controller Parameter Fault
Procedure Procedure
• Pull out and insert the Network Controller connection cable. • Pull out and insert the Network Controller connection cable.
Turn the power Off then On. Turn the power Off then On.
1 2 7 - 3 1 2 D F E V i d e o L i n k Fa i l 1 2 7 - 3 1 3 E S S V i d e o L i n k Fa i l
re ESS detected a Video Link error.
1. Disconnect, then connect the DFE connection cable.
Procedure
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 1. Disconnect, then connect the DFE connection cable.
3. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 2. 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
3. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 2.
1 2 7 - 3 1 4 W S D Pr i n t S / W Fa i l 1 2 7 - 3 1 5 T h i n Pr i n t S / W Fa i l
ESS detected a Video Link error. A problem has occurred with software processing, causing the processing to stop ever since.
Procedure Procedure
1. Disconnect, then connect the DFE connection cable. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. 2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 2.
3. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 2.
1 2 7 - 2 2 0 D E F Co m m u n i c a t i o n Fa u l t ( V i d e o ) 1 2 7 - 2 2 1 Fa x Pa ra m e t e r Va l u e I n v a l i d
Communication Fault (video) detected by the Network Controller. Communication Fault (Command) detected by the Network Controller.
Procedure Procedure
This Fault Code may occur in the following situation: Resubmit the job, check cable connections.
• When the Controller can detect commands but cannot detect input video, data, or clock.
To recover, check cable connections.
1 2 7 - 3 1 0 E x t S r v . Re q S o f t Fa u l t 1 2 7 - 3 1 1 P S Wc o n t U n e x p e c t e d Fa u l t
ESR Task Fatal Fault. An ESR task caused a fatal error. ExtPRT
Procedure Procedure
This Fault Code may occur in the following situation: This Fault Code may occur in the following situation:
• When the Controller can detect commands but cannot detect input video, data, or clock. • When the Controller can detect commands but cannot detect input video, data, or clock.
To recover, check cable connections. To recover, check cable connections.
1 2 7 - 3 2 0 D F E C r i t i c a l Fa u l t 1 2 7 - 3 3 7 Te m p l a t e H D W r i t e Fa u l t
Network Controller Critical Fault Job Template HDD Write Fault. Internal polling file access error, or a write error to a local HDD in a
job template (other than full).
Procedure
• Take the corrective actions based on the Fault Code displayed in the Network Controller monitor, Procedure
then reboot the system. • Turn the power Off then On. If the problem persists, perform the following procedures in se-
If the problem persists, perform the following procedures. quence to repair it.
dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test Hard Disk Diagnostics/Setup
1. Check the connection to the Network Controller.
GP 2 Software Download
2. Check the device settings.
Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
3. Check the Network Controller HW.
4. Check the device HW.
1 2 7 - 3 4 2 J o b Te m p l a t e M o n i t o r Fa u l t 1 2 7 - 3 5 3 L P D S o f t Fa t a l Fa u l t
Job Template Monitor Fault. Fault return from a system call, etc. LPD Soft Fatal Fault. Fatal error related to LPD. A problem occurred during software processing, and
processing could no longer continue.
Procedure
• Turn the power Off then On. If the problem persists, perform the following procedures in se-
Procedure
quence to repair it. Check the Network connections
Check the connectors and wiring on the Controller PWB.
GP 2 Software Download
Replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
1 2 7 - 3 5 4 F T P S e r v e r S o f t w a r e Fa u l t 1 2 7 - 3 9 6 M a i l I O S o f t Fa t a l Fa u l t
Mail I/O Soft Fatal error. Fatal error related to mail IO. A problem occurred during software process-
FTP Server Software Fault. FTP server fatal error. ing, and processing could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
Check the Network connections Check the Network connections
1 2 7 - 3 9 8 ' I P P S o f t Fa t a l Fa u l t 1 2 7 - 3 9 9 J M E S o f t Fa t a l Fa u l t
IPP Soft Fatal Fault. Fatal error related to IPP. A problem occurred during software processing, and JME Soft Fatal Fault. Fatal error related to JME. A problem occurred during software processing, and
processing could no longer continue. processing could no longer continue.
Procedure Procedure
Check the Network connections Check the Network connections
1 2 7 - 7 0 0 S I P Re g i s t ra t i o n Fa i l
An error has occurred in registering device info with the SIP Registration Server.
Procedure
1. Check what the SIP Registration Server is set to on the device.
2. Check that the SIP Registration Server is available.
1 3 2 - 3 1 0 , 1 3 2 - 3 1 1 , 1 3 2 - 3 1 2 , 1 3 2 - 3 1 3 LU I / U I Fa i l R A P s
132-310 LUI Browser Software Fail
132-311 LUI Contents Software Fail
132-312 UI DisplayPortLinkFail
132-313 UI DisplayPortLinkFail
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
2. Verify the UI cable and the back plane PWB are installed properly, then perform the same oper-
ation causing the fault.
3. If the LED on the UI is flashing, perform UI Self Diagnostics to identify the fault location.
4. If the fault persists, install new components in order as required:
a. Controller PWB, PL 3.2 Item 7.
b. Control panel assembly, PL 2.1 Item 1.
c. Back plane PWB, PL 1.2 Item 2.
1 3 3 - 2 1 0 I l l e g a l Fa x Pa ra m e t e r R A P 1 3 3 - 2 1 1 Fa x Pa ra m e t e r Va l u e I n v a l i d R A P
The parameter value is incorrect due to reasons such as excessive length. A parameter value exceeds the range or the required parameter is not sent.
The required parameter is not sent. Initial Actions
Initial Actions Power Off/On
Power Off/On Procedure
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
Procedure the UI.
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
1 3 3 - 2 1 2 Fa x Re a d E r r o r - N o D a t a R A P 1 3 3 - 2 1 3 Fa x Re a d E r r o r - I n v a l i d D a t a R A P
The specified data does not exist (incorrect number or channel). Corrupted data interrupted a read on the specified data.
• The specified data cannot be read due to reasons such as the specified data is broken.
Initial Actions
– The host may treat this failure as a System Fail.
Power Off/On
Initial Actions
Procedure
Power Off/On
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. Procedure
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. the UI.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module
• Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13
1 3 3 - 2 1 4 Fa x U S B I n i t i a l i z i n g R A P 1 3 3 - 2 1 5 Fa x U S B D e v i c e R A P
Fax failed initialization. There is an error in the Fax USB interface.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5). • Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
1 3 3 - 2 1 6 Fa x U S B H o s t Fa t a l R A P 1 3 3 - 2 1 7 Fa x M a n a g e r S h o r t o f M e m o r y R A P
There is a Fax/USB processing error. There is a Fax/USB processing error. Insufficient Fax Manager Memory.
Procedure Procedure
• Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5). • Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
1 3 3 - 2 1 8 Fa x C a r d M e s s a g e L i b ra r y S h o r t o f M e m o r y R A P 1 3 3 - 2 1 9 Fa x Wo r k M e m o r y R A P
There is a Fax/USB processing error. Insufficient Fax Card Message Library Memory Memory capacity reached during Fax processing. Due to insufficient memory, the system was un-
able to reserve the memory required for the processing.
Procedure
• Turn the power Off/On. Procedure
• Turn the power Off/On.
• Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5).
• Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. the UI.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
1 3 3 - 2 2 0 Fa x Co n t r o l Ta s k R A P 1 3 3 - 2 2 1 Fa x C a r d B o o t R A P
An error during Fax Controller software processing caused a Fax shutdown. The FAX PWB did not respond within the specified time to boot.
Procedure Procedure
• Turn the power Off/On. • Turn the power Off/On.
• Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5). • Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
1 3 3 - 2 2 2 Fa x C a r d d o e s n o t r e s p o n d R A P 1 3 3 - 2 2 3 Fa x C a r d Re s e t R A P
The FAX PWB did not respond within the specified time. The controller reset when the FAX PWB did not respond.
Procedure Procedure
• Turn the power Off/On. • Turn the power Off/On.
• Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5). • Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable (PL 20.1 Item 5).
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
the UI. the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2. • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13. • Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
1 3 3 - 2 2 4 Co n t r o l l e r R O M Fa x C a r d R O M R A P 1 3 3 - 2 2 5 Fa x A d d r e s s B o o k I l l e g a l S e t t i n g R A P
The Controller detected a version mismatch. After rewriting the Address Book in EasyAdmin and before rebooting, a speed dial entry was rewrit-
ten from the Panel.
Procedure
Check the electrical connections on the FAX PWB. Upgrade both the Controller and Fax Card ROM Procedure
to the latest version.If the fault persists reload software (GP 2). 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
1 3 3 - 2 2 6 Co u n t r y Co d e R A P 1 3 3 - 2 8 0 Fa x O p t i o n S l o t 1 B o a r d R A P
The Controller detects an invalid country code. The code that does not provide FAX Service is set in Failure was detected on the Fax Option Slot 1 board. Due to either a Fax Card failure or Fax Cont
the System Data Country Code. SW failure, subsequent processes could not be performed
Procedure Procedure
Check Country Code setting (GP 15).
Pull out and insert the FAX PWB. Switch on the power.
The fault persists.
Y N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Check the connection of each FAX PWB connector.
The connectors are securely connected.
Y N
Connect the connectors.
Turn on the power again.
The fault persists.
Y N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Upgrade the software, GP 2.
1 3 3 - 2 8 1 Re c e i v e d u n k n o w n m e s s a g e R A P 1 3 3 - 2 8 2 Fa x C a r d D o w n l o a d R A P
A message not specified in I/F settings was received from the Fax Card. An FAX PWB download could not be completed when either a FAX PWB or Fax Controller software
failure occurred.
Procedure
Procedure
Pull out and insert the FAX PWB. Switch on the power. • Turn the power Off/On.
The fault persists.
Y N • Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable.
Return to Service Call Procedures. • Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing
Check the connection of each FAX PWB connector. the UI.
The connectors are securely connected. • Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
Y N • Upgrade the software, GP 2.
Connect the connectors.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
Turn on the power again.
The fault persists.
Y N
Return to Service Call Procedures.
Upgrade the software, GP 2.
1 3 3 - 2 8 3 Fa x Re p o r t M a i l b o x R A P 1 3 3 - 7 0 0 S ta p l e / Pu n c h Ca n c e l l e d R A P
The Fax Report mailbox did not open. The Controller cancelled the Staple/Punch operation due to staple relationship with the print paper,
or during data format processing for fax receive document printing in the Controller.
Procedure
Staple/Punch request is canceled to continue printing.
• Turn the power Off/On.
• Check the USB connection. If OK then replace the USB cable. Procedure
• Verify that the customer is programming a job within the parameters of the machine utilizing Change Staple/Punch position designation or select paper according to Staple/Punch position.
the UI.
• Disconnect then reconnect the PWBs in the FAX Module.
• Upgrade the software, GP 2.
• Perform FAX Diagnostic GP 13.
1 3 3 - 7 0 1 Re p l a c e m e n t C h a r a c t e r D e t e c t e d 1 3 3 - 7 1 0 Tra y S e l e c t Fa i l R A P
Character replacement has occurred in destination name, sender name, comment, station name. When printing Fax-received documents, it was performed via the Bypass tray since the selected tray
cannot be used for Fax.
Procedure • The “Receiving Paper Size Tray Mode Function” is provided to determine “Which tray to print
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine. the Fax-received data from”. This error can occur when this function is “enabled.”
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics. Even if this function is “disabled,” this error can also occur when printing Fax reports and docu-
ments for polling.
* When set to automatically print Fax/Internet FAX received documents, this machine automati-
cally selects a paper tray. During that selection, any of the following occurs.
– Since the selected tray is set as “Unavailable for Fax document print”, the machine selects
the Bypass tray to continue printing.
– Since the paper size in the selected tray is set as a size that cannot be used for Fax, the ma-
chine selects the Bypass tray to continue printing.
– Since the paper type (= paper quality) in the selected tray is set as a quality that cannot be
used for Fax, the machine selects the Bypass tray to continue printing.
– If none of the above applies, the selected tray might be malfunctioning.
* This error also occurs when any of the four conditions above is detected when “the customer
selects the Bypass tray and tries to print from a mailbox”.
Procedure
• Load the paper size that can be used for Fax printing.
A3SEF, A4LEF, B4SEF, B5LEF, A4SEF, A5SEF, B5SEF, Letter SEF, Legal (14inch), Legal (13inch),
Ledger, Letter LEF, and Half Letter SEF can be used.
• Load the paper type (= paper quality) that can be used for Fax printing.
Plain Paper, Bond Paper, Recycled Paper, Backing Paper, and Custom Paper can be used.
• When the machine is set to “Enable Receiving Paper Size Tray Mode Function”, perform any one
of the following:
1. Select [Settings List] → [Fax Control] → [Tray Mode] to add the tray number that the custom-
er wants to specify for printing.
2. Select a tray number for the customer's printing use from the one of the trays that are set in
[Settings List] → [Fax Control] → [Tray Mode].
Instead of selecting [Settings List] → [Fax Control] → [Tray Mode], the same settings can be per-
formed through [SystemData: 820-002] → [Tray selection in tray mode].
If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 2.
1 3 4 - 2 1 0 , 1 3 4 - 2 1 1 Fa x Fa i l R A P s
134-210 Fax Cont Parameter Invalid
134-211 Fax Card Main Board Failure
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine.
2. If the fault persists, perform GP 13, Fax Diagnostics.
5 0 0 - 0 3 0 Ti m e r I n t e r n a l Fa u l t
Timer Internal Failure. The following occurs (However, this includes the cases that may not occur
when dC612 Print Test Pattern starts):
• Fuser: Shifted to Warming Up and Sagging occurred.
• The CC Cleaner Position was moved from the Home Position.
• Fuser Relay State: Shifted to Not Ready.
• Drum Cycle State: Shifted to Cleaning Request.
• CC Wire Warning: Occurred.
• Drum Crum State: Unknown.
Procedure
Return from the Wait state and repeat.
500-033 Diag Document Not Detected/Enough 500-035 Diag Document Invalid Size
When a Diag job requiring a document is performed and the document cannot be detected. When the size of the detected document is different from the specified document size.
When a Diag job requiring multiple documents is performed and the number of loaded sheets is Procedure
not sufficient to meet the specification.
Use a document of the specified size and perform the job again.
Procedure
Load the required number of documents and perform the job again.
5 0 0 - 9 9 0 Pr i n t i n g A b o r t e d
Printing could not start due to unknown reason in Diagnostic Code dC612 Print Test Pattern, or it
was aborted.
• This occurs during Diagnostic execution only, and the Fault Code is displayed on the PC-Diag-
nostics and Panel.
Procedure
Return from the wait state and repeat.
O F 1 . 1 Po w e r O n O F 1 . 2 A C Po w e r
This RAP is used for power up and initializing problems. The Control Panel may be dead or illumi-
nated, but the copier will not initialize properly or not initialize at all. This RAP is used for problems in the AC circuitry for primary distribution and control. The Control
Panel may or may not be illuminated, but the copier will not begin to initialize.
Procedure
Initial Actions
WARNING: Use extreme care when working near electrically energized components
and high voltage cables that are exposed during troubleshooting or repair. Contact WARNING: Use extreme care when working near electrically energized components
with electrical components or high voltage cables represents a shock potential that and high voltage cables that are exposed during troubleshooting or repair. Contact
could result in serious personal injury. with electrical components or high voltage cables represents a shock potential that
could result in serious personal injury.
DANGER: Faire très attention en travaillant près des éléments sous tension et des câ-
bles HT qui sont exposés pendant le dépannage. Tout contact avec les éléments électri- DANGER: Faire très attention en travaillant près des éléments sous tension et des câ-
ques ou les câbles haute tension représente un risque de choc et de graves blessures. bles HT qui sont exposés pendant le dépannage. Tout contact avec les éléments électri-
ques ou les câbles haute tension représente un risque de choc et de graves blessures.
AVVERTENZA: Fare estrema attenzione quando si lavora vicino a componenti sotto
tensione e cavi elettrici esposti durante l'intervento. Il contatto con componenti sotto AVVERTENZA: Fare estrema attenzione quando si lavora vicino a componenti sotto
tensione o cavi elettrici comportano un serio pericolo di scossa elettrica e gravi ferite. tensione e cavi elettrici esposti durante l'intervento. Il contatto con componenti sotto
tensione o cavi elettrici comportano un serio pericolo di scossa elettrica e gravi ferite.
VORSICHT: Während dem Reparieren oder der Fehlerbehebung muss man beim Um-
gang mit elektonisch aufgeladenen Bauteilen und Hochspannunsgleitungen äußerste VORSICHT: Während dem Reparieren oder der Fehlerbehebung muss man beim Um-
Vorsicht walten. Beim Umgang mit elektrischen Bauteilen und Hochspannungsleitun- gang mit elektonisch aufgeladenen Bauteilen und Hochspannunsgleitungen äußerste
gen erhöht sich das Unfallrisiko. Äußerste Vorsicht ist geboten. Vorsicht walten. Beim Umgang mit elektrischen Bauteilen und Hochspannungsleitun-
gen erhöht sich das Unfallrisiko. Äußerste Vorsicht ist geboten.
AVISO: Use extrema precaución altrabajar cerca de componentes cargados eléctrica-
mente y cables de alto voltaje que estén expuestos mientras soluciona problemas o AVISO: Use extrema precaución altrabajar cerca de componentes cargados eléctrica-
realiza reparaciones. Todo contacto con componentes eléctricos o cables de alto vol- mente y cables de alto voltaje que estén expuestos mientras soluciona problemas o
taje representa un peligro que puede ocasionar daños personales graves. realiza reparaciones. Todo contacto con componentes eléctricos o cables de alto vol-
taje representa un peligro que puede ocasionar daños personales graves.
The machine is completely dead (no Console indicators, no LEDs lit, and no sound at power up).
Y N • Verify that the correct voltage is being applied to the printer from the wall outlet.
Go to the appropriate DC Power RAP: • For a Network Controller Power On problem refer to BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V)
• OF 2.1 IOT DC Power (+3.3/ +5 VDC) and Verify that there is ACH at P/J 14.
Go to the appropriate AC Power RAP: If the problem still exists, go to the Controller Service Manual.
• OF 1.2 AC Power • For a Finisher power problem, refer to BSD 1.1 Main Power ON for (208V-240V) and Verify that
there is ACH at CN3.
Note: The Reset Switch acts as a GFCI. The AC Protect circuit senses line leakage. If there is line
leakage or an overvoltage condition, it energizes the Reset Switch and opens the contacts for AC
power. Refer to the OF 1.3 AC Protect Circuit.
Procedure
Be sure both Power Switches are on (one is behind the Front Door).
Observe the DC Power LEDs on the Controller PWB.
CR201, 203 and 208 (+3.3V, LED) on the Controller PWB is lit.
Y N
There is AC Line voltage at the PWS Outlet.
Y N
There is AC Line voltage between J11-1 and 4 on the AC Power Supply.
Y N
Suspect an open GFI Breaker or an open line between J11 -1 and 4.
• Wirenets If OK, go to the DADF Wirenets and check the DADF +24 VDC wirenet for a short to ground.
The DADF DC Power is OK. For any other problems, go to DADF Wirenets and check for an open
circuit.
O F 3 N e t w o r k J o b Fa i l R A P O F 3 . 1 N e t w o r k Co n t r o l l e r C h e c ko u t
Procedure
This RAP is used to locate problems with the Network Controller.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Print a configuration report to find the TCP/IP address of the machine. Use the PING command Procedure
from a computer on the customer network to test communication of the machine on the
Go to GP 7 (Network Printing Simulation) and send a print job.
network.
An acceptable print is produced.
2. Check the version of controller ROM on the configuration report. Upgrade the software, GP 19, Y N
Machine Software, if the controller ROM version is not the latest.
The problem is Image Quality (print mode)
3. Verify and collect for Support, the customer procedures for reproducing the fault, verify UI set- Y N
ting are correct for the Job type, then rerun the print Job causing the fault. Verify that the AC power, Scan, and CDI cables are connected correctly.
• Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
If the cables are OK, refer to the FreeFlow configuration setup to verify the correct op-
• Check the job settings from the UI. eration of the DFE. If the Network Controller appears to be working correctly, check the
• Check if print spool is turned on in the WebUI. following in the IOT:
• Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error. • verify machine settings
4. If the fault persists, perform GP 2, Software Update. • reload system software (GP 2)
Refer to the Network Controller service documentation (FreeFlow configuration setup) and
user documentation for color calibration information.
There is a scan to file problem.
Y N
The problem is in the customer network or the setup. Check the following:
• Verify that the Static IP/DHCP setting matches the customer’s network
• Verify that the machine’s IP address is correct
• “Ping” the Network Controller from a Client to verify connectivity
Go to BSD 3.7 and check the cable connection from J340 on the Controller PWB to the Network
Controller.
O F 3 . 2 S t a t u s L E D s ( O n P W B s ) I n fo r m a t i o n R A P Power/
Location Color Signal Status
Initial Actions
CR30 Green 6V (Power On 6V is powered
Note: Prior to replacing a component, unplug the connectors to the component (For Example: source of
MCU PWB, IOT Drive PWB, Controller PWB, Sensors, Motors, Solenoids). Check the connections for LD5V)
broken, bent and dirty pins (Oxidation Buildup). Unplug and plug-in the connectors several times to
remove contaminants due to oxidation. The resistance created by the contaminants will change Off 24V is not supplied to MCU
the machine timing (measured in ms) which is incapable of being observed with a multimeter. or Fuse F3 on MCU blows out
due to short circuit
Procedure or DC/DC converter on MCU
Note: ¤ Since blinking speed is very fast, it might seem to be on continuously (dark). is broken
Table 1 MCU PWB
CR31 Green 2.5V On 2.5V is powered
Power/
Location Color Signal Status Off 12V is not supplied to MCU
or Fuse F1 on MCU blows out
CR6 Green Controller Blinking¤ Receiving Command data due to short circuit
Command from Controller or DC/DC converter on MCU
is broken
CR7 Green HCF Status Blinking¤ Receiving status data from
HCF CR38 Green AVREF (Ana- On AVREF is powered
log reference
CR8 Green Finisher Blinking¤ Receiving status data from
voltage)
Status Finisher
On NVM-PWB is not connected CR10 Red CPLD Reset On MCU PWB failed to start-up
correctly or
or 3.3V is low (Refer to status Connection between MCU PWB and IOT
of CR21) PWB is incomplete
or AVREF is low. 5V is not
supplied to MCU or voltage On Power~On reset status
regulator on MCU is broken. (tem-
porari-
On (tempo- Power~On reset status ly)
rarily) Table 3 PH Driver PWB
CR21 Green 3.3V On 3.3V is powered Power/
Location Color Signal Status
Off 12V is not supplied to MCU
or Fuse F1 on MCU blows out CR10 Red CPLD Reset On MCU PWB failed to start-up
due to short circuit or
or DC/DC converter on MCU Connection between MCU PWB and IOT
is broken PWB is incomplete
CR27 Red Video ASIC On CPU keeps Reset signal ac- On Power~On reset status
Reset tive due to some errors. (tem-
porari-
On (tempo- Power~On reset status ly)
rarily)
O F 8 . 1 Pa p e r Fe e d C h e c ko u t A
• Friction Clutch PL 80.8.
This Procedure is used to isolate the cause of Paper Feed problems for which no faults are declared • Feed Clutch PL 80.8.
such as wrinkled paper, dog ears, etc.
• Feed in Chute PL 80.8.
Initial Actions For Tray 5, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Repair/re-
• Check for bent or damaged baffles and guides in the paper feed area. place any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved.
• Check for loose, missing or stretched springs in the paper feed area. • Roll Assembly PL 80.15.
• Verify that the paper presently being used is fresh paper which is included in the RML. • Pinch Roll PL 80.15.
• If the problem occurs only when making 2-sided copies with high solid area density images on • Chute PL 80.15.
both sides, it may be necessary to make single-sided copies to minimize or eliminate the Check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage or contamination. Repair/replace any parts
problem. that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved.
• If the problem occurs only when using plain or coated light-weight paper, it is recommended • Upper Exit Open Chute Assembly
that a heavier weight paper be used to minimize the problem.
• Top Buffer Chute Assembly
Procedure • Bottom Buffer Chute Assembly
The problem occurs from all trays.
Y N • Entrance Pinch Roller
• Exit Pinch Roller
For Tray 1,check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Repair/re-
place any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved. • Upper Entrance Chute Assembly
• Feed/Nudger/Retard Roll Assembly PL 80.2. • Entrance Roll
• Retard Roll PL 80.2. • Top Tray Exit Baffle
• Friction Clutch PL 80.2. • Exit Pinch Roller
• Feed Clutch PL 80.2. • Lower Top Exit Chute Assembly
• Feed in Chute PL 80.2. • Upper Top Exit Chute Assembly
For Tray 2, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Repair/re- • Exit Roll Shaft Assembly
place any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved. • Lower Exit Roll 2
• Feed/Nudger/Retard Roll Assembly PL 80.4. • Exit Pinch Roller 1
• Retard Roll PL 80.4. • Exit Pinch Roller 2
• Friction Clutch PL 80.4.
• Feed Clutch PL 80.4.
• Feed in Chute PL 80.4.
For Tray 3, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Repair/re-
place any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved.
• Feed/Nudger/Retard Roll Assembly PL 80.6.
• Retard Roll PL 80.6.
• Friction Clutch PL 80.6.
• Feed Clutch PL 80.6.
• Feed in Chute PL 80.6.
For Tray 4, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Repair/re-
place any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved.
• Feed/Nudger/Retard Roll Assembly PL 80.8.
• Retard Roll PL 80.8.
Slow Flashing Red The authentication device has no connection to the server. Note: If there is another working card reader available, the readers can be switched to confirm
failure. If the Card Reader is not functioning, the web page of the machine has a setting that
Slow Flashing The authentication device is communicating to the server. will enable UI keypad access. If the users know their card access number, they can use the ma-
Green chine by manually entering their number. The process is as follows:
Fast flashing red Invalid card / password; access denied. 1. Go to the machine web page under properties and then security and check the box that says
“Allow local user interface initiation”.
The Green LED on the Card Reader is On 2. Enable the keypad and test with valid credentials. This will validate the rest of the secure access
function.
• This indicates an active Secure Access Session and the Card Read correctly corresponds to a val-
id Secure Access Account. 3. Leave it in this mode until the new card reader can be installed.
• If the UI on the machine is locked, check with the customer for a second PIN number for addi-
tional security. This PIN number will need to be entered via the soft keys on the UI.
• Verify that the card corresponds to a valid Secure Access Account.
The Green LED on the Card Reader Flashes Rapidly
• This indicates a valid card swipe and in the process of authentication on the server.
• If the UI on the machine is locked, check with the customer for a second PIN number for addi-
tional security. This PIN number will need to be entered via the soft keys on the UI.
• If the UI on the machine is locked and no secondary PIN is required. Check that the Xerox Se-
cure Access is installed correctly, and ask customer to check the configuration at the server.
The Red LED on the Card Reader is On
• This indicates the Card Reader is in an idle state. If the red LED remains on, and the UI remains
locked after a card is swiped, re-orient the card and re-swipe.
• Try a known good card in the reader. If the other card is working on the problem Card Reader.
Ask customer to make sure the card corresponds to a valid Secure Access Account.
O F 1 I n t e r m i t t e n t Fa u l t R A P O F 2 O t h e r Fa u l t s R A P
The purpose of this RAP is to provide guidance for resolving an intermittent problem. This is not an Use this RAP to help troubleshoot problems not covered by a Status Code RAP, the Intermittent
exact procedure, but a set of recommended actions that use the resources of the service manual to Fault RAP, or the Audible Noise RAP.
help locate the cause of an intermittent problem.
Initial Actions
Procedure • Refer to the BSDs in the chain(s) related to the apparent problem.
1. Check the service log. Recent service actions may provide information about the problem. For ex-
ample, a component that was recently replaced to correct another problem may be the cause • Refer to the corresponding RAPs.
of the new intermittent problem. • Inspect the Service Log for any recent activity or previous problems that could relate to the cur-
2. Run the machine in a mode that vigorously exercises the suspected problem area. The machine rent problem.
may fail more frequently or may completely fail under these conditions. Identify any signs of
failure or abnormal operation. Note any Fault or Jam codes that are displayed. Procedure
• Refer to any NVM values associated with the apparent problem. Reset any incorrect values.
3. Inspect any HFSI items that are related to the problem, even if they are not near or have not ex-
ceeded the Specified Copy Count Threshold. • Carefully inspect any harnesses related to the apparent problem. Look for broken, bent, dam-
aged or missing pins. Look for arcing due to a bad connection. Inspect how the harness is in-
4. Refer to the BSDs in the chains that relate to the suspected problem and identify any fault co- stalled, looking for mechanical interference that may cause a short circuit or a bad connection
des that are associated with the intermittent problem. Using the RAPs examine the components when a door is closed or other mechanical component activated.
that are referenced in the RAP. Check the following:
• Inspect rolls for contamination or damage and refer to the Cleaning Procedures in Section 1
as needed.
• Check the operation solenoids for slow response.
• Unplug all connectors related to the problem circuit. Check for broken, bent, or dirty pins.
Plug and unplug the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Re-
sistance created by contaminants can interfere with the machine timing (measured in ms)
but this resistance would not normally be observed with a multimeter.
• Inspect the wiring harnesses for chafing against components of the machine, especially
against moving components.
• Look for misaligned, improperly adjusted or incorrectly installed components.
• Inspect the components for damage.
• Inspect the components for excessive heat or symptoms of excessive heat such as
discoloration.
5. Refer to Section 4 and identify any adjustments that are related to the problem. Perform the ad-
justments. Verify that there is an adequate range of adjustment and that the adjustment can
be successfully completed. Any abnormality that is observed may be an indication of the cause
of the problem. For example, a component can be adjusted to the nominal value, but is at the
limit of the adjustment range. This is not normal and may be an indication of the root cause of
the problem.
6. Utilize Diagnostics and operate the components that are associated with the problem. Observe
the components for any symptoms of abnormal operation, hesitation, or an unusual sound from
the component.
7. Check the AC and DC input power to Verify that they are within the range which is specified in
Section 1 of the Service Manual, or on the BSD for the component.
8. Replace components or consumables that are known to be a frequent cause of the problem.
When performing servicing procedures consider the cost and time required. If the suspected
component is inexpensive, can be installed in a short period of time, and has a high probability
of resolving the problem, then install a new item.
9. Leave in the service log an accurate and detailed record of the actions performed. Describe what
was observed, any actions that were performed and recommended steps for the improvement
of service procedures.
Procedure
Ask the customer if there are any specific HCF functions which cause noisy operation. Switch off
the machine and wait for 10 seconds. Open the HCF Front Door, cheat the Interlock, switch on the
machine, and allow it to perform a normal warm-up. Identify the source of noise by running print
jobs from HCF using different modes. Identify the faulty component using the relevant RAP. The fol-
lowing procedure is a list of possible causes of noise.
Drive Belts
• Belt whine and squeak can be caused by damaged or misadjusted drive belts. Locate the source
of the noise. If any items are worn or damaged, install new components. Adjust belt tension as
required.
• Jumping Drive Belts can be caused by worn Belts, Pulleys, Idlers, Bearings or Bushings.
Drive Shafts
Squeaks can be caused by contamination on Bearings, Bushings, and Shafts. Locate the source of
the noise and clean the component.
3 Image Quality
Image Quality RAPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1091
IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1091
IQ2 IIT Image Quality Entry RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1095
IQ3 Low Image Density RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1097
IQ4 Repeating Bands, Streaks, Spots, and Smears RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1097
IQ5 Blank Page RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1098
IQ6 Black Print RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1099
IQ7 Skew/Misregistration RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100
IQ8 Process Direction Bands and Streaks RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100
IQ9 Residual Image (Ghosting) RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1101
IQ10 Solid Color Print RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1102
IQ11 Background RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1102
IQ12 Spots RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1103
IQ13 Unfused Copy/Toner Offset RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1104
IQ14 Wrinkled Image/Paper RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1104
IQ15 Partial Image Deletions RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1105
IQ16 Cross Process Direction Faded Bands and Streaks RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1106
IQ17 Cross Process Direction Bands and Streaks RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1107
IQ18 Process Direction Faded Bands and Streaks RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1108
IQ19 Mottle RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1109
IQ20 2nd BTR Checkout RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1109
IQ21 1st BTR Checkout RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1110
IQ22 Developer Bias RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1110
IQ23 BCR Checkout RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1111
IQ24 Scorotron Checkout RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1111
IQ25 Scorotron Cleaner RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1112
IQ26 Color Misregistration RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1112
Image Quality Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1113
Image Quality Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1113
Image Quality Defect Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1115
Image Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1115
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1116
Color Misregistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1117
Debris-Centered Deletions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1117
Deletions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1118
High Frequency Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1118
Irregular Process Direction Streak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1119
Low Image Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1119
Moire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1120
Mottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1120
Newton Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1121
Regular (Repeating) Bands, Streaks, Spots, or Smears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1121
Residual Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1122
Streak Deletion in Process Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1122
Wrinkled Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1123
Cloud Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1123
IBT Cleaner Streak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1124
Scorotron Streaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1124
Scorotron Cleaner Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1125
I Q 1 I OT I m a g e Q u a l i t y E n t r y R A P
The purpose of this RAP is to serve as the entrance vehicle into the Image Quality RAPs section. All
Image Quality RAPs must be accessed through this RAP.
The RAP will have you evaluate the copies made during the SCP 2 Call Flow procedure for image
quality defects. It will refer you to the Image Quality Analysis RAPs, the Image Quality Defect sec-
tion in order to diagnose and repair any image quality problems.
Initial Actions
Ask the customer SA to perform the Auto Gradation Adjustment if any of the following problems
are reported for both copy and print:
• Incorrect colors
• Poor gray balance
• Colors have shifted over time
• Color densities too high or low
Note: Auto Gradation Adjustment (refer to the Interactive User Guide ) is a color calibration for
the copier and printer. An Auto Gradation Adjustment compensates for differences between the ac-
tual and the expected (target) toner densities for each color. An Auto Gradation Adjustment should
be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in the appearance (quality) of the output, par-
ticularly changes in color tones or densities. Performing an Auto Gradation Adjustment on a regular
basis will help to maintain consistent color quality over time.Since an Auto Gradation Adjustment
can affect all jobs for all users, it is recommended that this procedure be performed only by the Ma-
chine Administrator.
If the customer is dissatisfied with machine output image quality, check machine customer select-
able image quality settings on the UI and the Print Driver.Determine if adjustments to these set-
tings should be made to tune image output to meet customer IQ requirements.
Refer the customer to user documentation to review the following image quality settings:
• Original Type
• Sharpness / saturation
• Image Quality Presets
• Auto Exposure
• Color Shift
• Light / Dark / Contrast
• Color Balance
Use the following Customer Mode Settings as a baseline to evaluate Image Quality:
• Output Color - Full Color
• Original Type - Text & Photo / Halftone
• Lighten/Darken - Normal
• Color Balance - 0
• Color Saturation - Normal
• Sharpness - Normal
Verify that the correct image quality settings are selected for the paper type that the customer is
using. Different image quality settings can be selected for Bond Paper, Plain Paper, Recycled Paper,
and Custom Paper 1 to 5. Setting the correct image quality setting will produce the best quality of
the output.
Background Undesirable toner deposits on the copy or print. The toner deposits can be localized or may cover the entire copy or print. De- Go to the IQ11 Background
pending on the density of the background, it is referred to as low, medium, high, or very high background. It may occur in all RAP
colors, single colors, or any combination of single colors.
Blank Print This copy is printed completely White. Go to the IQ5 Blank Page RAP
Black Print This copy is printed completely Black Go to the IQ6 Black Print RAP
Solid Color Print This copy is printed in one solid color Go to the IQ10 Solid Color
Print
Deletions The undesirable absence of toner from the copy or print. May show as white, light, or untrue colored areas. The most common Go to the IQ5 Blank Page RAP
• Debris-Centered Deletions causes are “tenting” of paper from mishandling or moisture, or defects in the Transfer Belt. (For process direction streak
• Streak Deletion in Process • Debris-Centered : Deletions in the areas surrounding toner agglomerates. deletion, go to the IQ8 Process
Direction • Process Direction Streak : A deletion in the form of a single streak that runs from the lead edge to the trail edge of the Direction Bands and Streaks
• Spot Deletions copy. RAP)
• Spot Deletion : Deletion caused by system contamination, typically from paper. Go to the IQ15 Partial Image
Deletions RAP
Fuser Offset Areas of poorly-fused toner are lifted from one area of a print and deposited on a different area, or onto a subsequent print. Go to the IQ13 Unfused Copy/
Toner Offset RAP
High Frequency Bands Repeating interval bands that are most noticeable in low density (20-30%) halftone areas of the copy. These bands run per- Go to the IQ16 Cross Process
pendicular to process direction. Direction Faded Bands and
Streaks RAP
IBT Cleaner Streak Multi-color streaks, sometimes LE-TE, sometimes shorter. May have registration chevron pattern visible. Go to the IQ8 Process Direc-
tion Bands and Streaks RAP
Irregular Process Direction Streak Streaks: Usually medium-width streaks of (or shifts in) color most noticeable in low density 20-30%) halftone areas of the Go to the IQ8 Process Direc-
copy. tion Bands and Streaks RAP
A deletion in the form of a single streak that runs from the lead edge to the trail edge of the copy. and IQ18 Process Direction
Faded Bands and Streaks RAP
Lead Edge Toner Smear (fused) Smears of fused toner on the lead edge of prints Go to the IQ8 Process Direc-
tion Bands and Streaks RAP
Lead Edge Toner Smear (unfused) Smears of unfused toner on the lead edge of prints Go to the IQ13 Unfused Copy/
Toner Offset RAP
Low Image Density A condition that results when too little toner of a single color or combination of colors is developed on the copy or print. This For hardware related prob-
results in lighter copies or prints for the single-color toner or the color that results from the combination of color toners. lems, go to the IQ3 Low Im-
age Density RAP
Misregistration/Skew The position and/or alignment of the image relative to the top edge and side edge of the paper is not within specification. Go to the IQ7 Skew/Misregis-
tration RAP
Mottle Areas of solid, or high density coverage that are reproduced with a blotchy, non-uniform appearance. Go to the IQ19 Mottle RAP
Regular (Repeating) Bands, Streaks, A defect that repeats at an interval from14 to 264 mm, is most noticeable in low density (20-40%) halftone areas of the copy, Go to the IQ16 Cross Process
Spots, or Smears and runs perpendicular to process direction. Direction Faded Bands and
Lines and bands are generally uniform in shape from one end to the other. Streaks RAP and IQ17 Cross
Streaks are generally shorter than lines and are of nonuniform width along their length. They may have a more ragged or Process Direction Bands and
fuzzy appearance than lines. Streaks RAP
Residual Image A toner image that remains on the photoreceptor or Transfer Belt after cleaning. The next image is placed on top of the resid- Go to the IQ9 Residual Image
ual image and both images are transferred to the next copy. (Ghosting) RAP
Spots Generally circular in shape, these defects can be caused by an absence of toner in a desired area, or a deposit of toner in an Go to the IQ12 Spots RAP
undesired area
Unfused prints Image can be rubbed off with little or no pressure Go to the IQ13 Unfused Copy/
Toner Offset RAP
Wrinkled Image Areas of prints (usually 11x17 in./A3) have distinctive “worm track” patterns, and/or wrinkles in the paper itself Go to the IQ14 Wrinkled Im-
age/Paper RAP
• Color Shift
Background Clean the Pad, CVT area of the Glass, Platen Glass and the Optics.
Calibrate the IIT (ADJ 5.11).
Blurred or Streaked Copy Verify that the Platen Glass is installed correctly.
Check/adjust the carriage alignment (ADJ 5.8).
Deletions Clean the Lens, the top and bottom surface of the Platen Glass, and all Mirrors with Lens and Mirror Cleaner and a soft, lint-free cloth.
If the problem persists, replace the Lens Assembly (PL 60.4).
Moire • Switch between photo modes and, if necessary, original types, to determine which mode minimizes the defect.
Patterns in the image areas of the print that have • Decrease the Sharpness level.
the appearance of a screen or grid overlaying the im- • Reduce or enlarge the copy slightly.
age. The pattern may be uniform or nonuniform in • Rotate the original on the platen by 90 degrees.
area or shape.
I Q 3 Lo w I m a g e D e n s i t y R A P I Q 4 Re p e a t i n g B a n d s , S t r e a k s , S p o t s , a n d S m e a r s R A P
Bands, Streaks, Spots, and Smears appear on the image at a regular pitch.
This RAP troubleshoots hardware-related causes of output images showing image density lower
than specification. Procedure
Measure the distance between the repeating defects.
Initial Actions
Locate the distance on the Table below and perform the indicated repair action (Table 1).
• Perform IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP first
Table 1 Repeating Defects
• Clean the ROS windows
Repetition
• Replace the paper in use with fresh, dry paper of the correct specification Spacing
• Check the 2nd BTR Cam for proper operation (mm) Components Repair Actions
Procedure 0.3 ROS (Stitching) Go to the Corrective procedure for 0.3mm white/black
The problem occurs in both copy and print mode. streaks.
Y N
The problem occurs in the copy mode only. 1 Developer Assembly / Go to BSD 90.9 Deve K Drive Control and BSD 90.10
Y N Developer Drives Deve Y,M,C Drive Control. Check the Developer Drives.
Developer Drive Assembly (K) (REP 90.11) (PL 1.1, PL
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow 40.1).
Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the connectors on the IIT Trans PWB are Developer Drive Assembly (Y, M, C) (REP 90.12) (PL
seated properly and the wires for damage. If the continues, replace the IIT (PL 60.3). If the 1.2, PL 40.1)
problem persists, replace the CCD PWB (PL 60.4).
Perform MAX Setup ADJ 9.1. 2 Developer Assembly / Go to BSD 90.9 Deve K Drive Control and BSD 90.10
The problem is still present. Developer Drives Deve Y,M,C Drive Control. Check the Developer Drives.
Y N Developer Drive Assembly (K) (REP 90.11) (PL 1.1, PL
40.1)
Return to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Developer Drive Assembly (Y, M, C) (REP 90.12) (PL
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Make prints of Test Pattern 12. 1.2, PL 40.1)
The Defect is a single color.
Y N 6 Developer Assembly / Developer Drive Assembly (K) (REP 90.11) (PL 1.1, PL
Go to dC612 Print Test Pattern. Print Test Pattern 12. Open the Front Door approximately sev- Xero/IBT / Developer 40.1)
en seconds into the job. Extend the IBT. Drives Developer Drive Assembly (Y, M, C) (REP 90.12) (PL
There is a good toner image on the Transfer Belt. 1.2, PL 40.1)
Y N IBT (PL 90.12)
Xero/ Developer Drawer Unit (PL 90.6)
Go to the IQ22 Developer Bias RAP to check the Developer Bias Circuit. If the problem
continues, go to the IQ20 2nd BTR Checkout RAP to check the 2st BTR Bias. If the prob- 44 BCR (Y, M, C) Go to the IQ23 BCR Checkout RAP.
lem persists, check the ROS for contamination or misalignment.
Check the 2nd BTR for damage or an incorrect installation. Go to the IQ20 2nd BTR Checkout 36 Developer Roll (K, Y, Go to the IQ22 Developer Bias RAP.
RAP to check the 2nd BTR. M, C)
The problem reoccurs.
Y N 36 (Horizon- Developer Drive Go to BSD 90.9 Deve K Drive Control and BSD 90.10
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow tal streaks) Deve Y,M,C Drive Control. Check the Developer Drives.
Developer Drive Assembly (K) (REP 90.11) (PL 1.1, PL
Replace the 2nd BTR Assembly (PL 80.19). If the problem continue, replace the Transfer Belt
40.1)
(PL 90.14).
Developer Drive Assembly (Y, M, C) (REP 90.12) (PL
Swap the affected Drum Cartridge with an adjacent cartridge. Print Test Pattern 12. 1.2, PL 40.1)
The defect moved to the new color.
Y N 58 1st BTR Go to the IQ21 1st BTR Checkout RAP.
Go to IQ22 Developer Bias RAP. Check the Developer Bias. If the problem continues, go to
IQ21 1st BTR Checkout RAP, to check the 1st BTR Bias. If the problem persists, replace the De- 62.8 2nd BUR Go to the IQ20 2nd BTR Checkout RAP.
veloper for the affected color (PL 90.6).
Replace the Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1). 88 2nd BTR Go to the IQ20 2nd BTR Checkout RAP.
94-95 Fuser Pressure Belt All Colors - Remove the Fuser Assembly. Check the
Heat Roll for damage (nicks, wear, or cuts) or
Repetition I Q 5 B l a n k Pa g e R A P
Spacing
(mm) Components Repair Actions
110 Fuser Heat Roll Verify correct paper type is set for the actual paper in
the paper tray. Remove the Fuser Assembly. Check the The copy is printed completely white.
Heat Roll for damage (nicks, wear, or cuts) or contami-
nation. Clean or replace as required (REP 10.1) (PL Procedure
10.1).
The problem occurs in both Copy mode and Print mode.
126 Y/M/C Drum (REP 90.8) (PL 40.1) Y N
The problem only occurs in Copy mode only.
188 Black Drum (REP 90.8) (PL 40.1) Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Corrective procedure for 0.3mm white/black streaks Check that the IIT to IOT cable connection is fully seated.
(Table 2) The cable connection is OK.
Y N
• Stitching is an Image defect that appears as Streaking. Reconnect the IIT to IOT cable.
• Stitching is caused by a change in the Image Density from the first set of 32 scanning beams Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the IIT Trans PWB connectors are fully
and the next set of scanning beams. seated and free from damage. Turn the power Off and On.
• Stitching normally results in black streaks of 0.3mm Pitch. However, over correction will produce The problem reoccurs.
white streaks. Y N
• To correct black streaks, change the NVM Value in the plus (+) direction. This will strengthen the Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
stitching action. Check the mirrors on the Full Rate and Half Rate Carriages for alignment.
• To correct white streaks, change the NVM Value in the minus (-) direction. The mirror are properly installed.
Y N
Table 2 White/Black Streaks
Install the mirror properly.
Initial Replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL 60.4). If the problem continues, replace the CCD PWB (PL
Beam No. NVM (749-) -2 -1 Value +1 +2 +3 +4 60.4).
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Print Test Pattern 12. Open the Front Door about seven seconds into
Ch0 749-002 3 2 1 0 0 0 0
the Job. Extend the IBT Drawer.Check the surface of the IBT Belt.
Ch31 749-095 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 There is a good toner image on the surface of the IBT Belt.
Y N
Ch1 749-005 3 3 3 3 2 1 0 Print test pattern 12 again.
The developer assemblies rotate correctly
Ch30 749-092 3 3 3 3 2 1 0
Y N
Go to BSD 90.9 Deve K Drive Control and BSD 90.10 Deve Y,M,C Drive Control. Check
Note: It may be difficult to visually detect small changes. Make a large change in one direction the Developer Drives.
and work backwards in small increments. When no change can be detected after a value has been Go to BSD 60.6 Laser Y Control ,, BSD 60.7 Laser M Control , BSD 60.8 Laser C Control and
changed, replace the relevant ROS (PL 5.1). BSD 60.9 Laser K Control. Check that the connectors on each ROS Unit are fully seated and
free of damage.
The connectors are OK.
Y N
Reseat the connectors.
Check the installation of each ROS Unit.
Each ROS Unit is properly installed.
Y N
Install the ROS Unit properly.
Replace the ROS Unit (PL 60.1). If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Procedure
The problem occurs in both Copy mode and Print mode.
Y N
The problem only occurs in Copy mode only.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Check that the IIT to IOT cable connection is fully seated.
The cable connection is OK.
Y N
Reconnect the IIT to IOT cable.
Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the IIT Trans PWB connectors are fully
seated and free from damage. Turn Off and On.
The problem reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Check the mirrors on the Full Rate and Half Rate Carriages for alignment.
The mirror are OK.
Y N
Install the mirror properly.
Replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL 60.4). If the problem continues, replace the CCD PWB (PL
60.4).
Verify that each Drum Unit is installed and seated correctly.Turn the power Off then On.
The problem reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Go to BSD 90.20 1st K Transfer , 1st BTR HVPS, BSD 90.7 Charging and Exposure K , Charge K/ Pre-
clean HVPS, and BSD 90.8 Charging and Exposure Y,M,C ,- Y, M, C Bias Charge Roll HVPS. Check that
the connectors are fully seated and the wires are free from damage. Turn the power Off then On.
The problem reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Go to BSD 60.6 Laser Y Control , BSD 60.7 Laser M Control , BSD 60.8 Laser C Control and BSD 60.9
Laser K Control. Check that the connectors on each ROS Unit are fully seated and free of damage.
Turn the power Off then On and print.
The problem reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
I Q 7 S ke w / M i s r e g i s t ra t i o n R A P I Q 8 Pr o c e s s D i r e c t i o n B a n d s a n d S t r e a k s R A P
Verify that the paper being used is fresh, dry, and within specification. Initial Actions
• Check the Fuser for damage and contamination.
Procedure
• Verify that the Platen Glass is clean and without damage.
The problem is System (LE/SE) Registration
Y N • Verify that HFSI service is being performed as required. Check HFSI for Ozone Filter, Developers,
The problem occurs in the copy mode only. and BTRs.
Y N Procedure
The defect occurs on copies from all five Paper Trays. The problem occurs in both Copy mode and Print mode.
Y N Y N
Adjust the IOT Lead Edge/Side Edge Registration (ADJ 9.7). Check the affected The problem only occurs in Copy mode.
Feed Tray for wear, slipping, damage, and/or contamination. Y N
Go to dC612 Print Test Pattern. Print out test pattern #1. Adjust the outboard end of Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
the Registration Transport (PL 80.19) until skew is no longer evident.
Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the IIT Trans PWB connectors are fully
The problem occurs using the DADF only (CVT mode). seated and free from damage. Turn the power Off and On.
Y N
The defect reoccurs.
Check the IIT Half Rate/Full Rate carriage for proper position ADJ 5.8 and operation. Y N
Check for binding and cable condition. Check position of rear and side registration
edges, if incorrect replace Platen Glass PL 60.3. If the problem still exists Go to BSD Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the connectors on the IIT Trans PWB are Check the mirrors on the Full Rate and Half Rate Carriages for alignment and contamination.
seated and free of damage. If the problem continues, replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL The mirrors are OK.
60.4). If the problem persists, replace the Lens Assembly (PL 60.4). Y N
Check the DADF Drive Rolls and Pinch Rolls for wear and glossing. Check the Document Han- Clean and/or reposition the mirrors as required.
dler Adjustments ADJ 5.6, ADJ 5.7, ADJ 5.8, ADJ 5.9, ADJ 5.10, ADJ 5.11. Replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL 60.4). If the problem continues, replace the CCD PWB (PL
The paper path is OK. 60.4).
Y N Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Make a print of Test Pattern 11. Open the Front Door about seven
Clean and/or repair the paper path as required. seconds into the Job. Extend the IBT Drawer.
Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the connectors on the IIT Trans PWB are The image on the Belt is defect free.
seated and free of damage. If the problem continues, replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL 60.4). If Y N
the problem persists, replace the Lens Assembly (PL 60.4). Check the following:
Adjust the IOT Lead Edge/Side Edge Registration (ADJ 9.7).
• Check the IBT Belt for damage and/or contamination
There is a problem with registration for all trays
Y N • Verify that there is nothing in contact with the belt. Clean or replace as required
Check the paper feeders in the affected trays for wear, dirt, or damage • Check the Developer Housings and Drum Cartridges for toner clumping, damage and
Check the Registration Transport (PL 80.19) for wear or damage contamination
• Go to IQ21 1st BTR Checkout RAP to check the 1st BTR Bias
• Check the ROS Window for damage or contamination and that the connectors are fully
seated. Clean and/or replace as required (PL 5.1)
Check the IBT Cleaner Assembly; check for toner buildup on the top side of the Cleaner Blade that
contacts the IBT Belt. Replace the IBT Cleaner Assembly as required (PL 90.14).
The defect is still present.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
The defect is still present.
I Q 1 0 S o l i d Co l o r Pr i n t R A P I Q 1 1 B a c kg r o u n d R A P
Initial Actions
• Perform IQ1 IOT Image Quality Entry RAP first.
• Perform Max Setup (ADJ 9.1).
Copy is printed in one solid color.
• Verify that the paper being used is fresh, dry, and within specification.
Procedure
The problem occurs in both Copy mode and Print mode.
Note: Some background is unavoidable on certain media, such as heavyweight paper and transpar-
encies. Verify that the customer selects the correct settings on the UI and print driver.
Y N
The problem only occurs in Copy mode. Procedure
Y N
The problem is a yellow or green background that started after Auto Gradation was performed.
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow. Y N
Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the IIT Trans PWB connectors are fully The problem is high density, single-color background.
seated and the wires are free from damage. Turn the power Off and On. Y N
The defect reoccurs. Check the face of the ADC Sensor.
Y N
The ADC Sensor is clean.
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow. Y N
Replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL 60.4). If the problem continues, replace the CCD PWB (PL Go to the 092-651 to troubleshoot the ADC Sensor.
60.4).
Check the Transfer Belt for excessive dirt, damage, or uncleaned toner.
Remove and reinstall the Drum Unit for the effected color.Turn the power Off then On.
The Belt is clean.
The problem reoccurs. Y N
Y N
Check the IBT Cleaner Assembly for damage or wear. Clean or replace as required
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow. (PL 90.14).
Install a new Drum Unit for the effected color (PL 90.1).Turn the power Off then On. Go to IQ22 Developer Bias RAP to troubleshoot the Developer Bias Circuit.
The problem reoccur. The circuit is OK.
Y N Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow. Repair the Developer bias circuit as required.
Go toBSD 90.21 1st Transfer Y,M,C , 1st BTR HVPS, BSD 90.7 Charging and Exposure K Charge K/ Replace the Transfer Belt (PL 90.14). If the problem continues, replace the 2nd BTR (PL
Preclean HVPS, and BSD 90.8 Charging and Exposure Y,M,C , -Y, M, C Bias Charge Roll HVPS. Check 90.21). If the problem persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
that the connectors are fully seated and the wires are free from damage.Turn the power Off then
On. If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
The problem reoccur. The background is very high and even density, and covers the entire sheet (no edge erase.
Y N Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Check the following:
Go to BSD 60.6 Laser Y Control , BSD 60.7 Laser M Control , BSD 60.8 Laser C Control and BSD 60.9
Laser K Control. Check the connectors on each ROS Unit are fully seated and free of damage. Turn • Check the end-of-life counter for the Toner Cartridge and Drum Cartridge for the af-
the power Off then On and print. fected color. Replace if at or near end-of-life.
The problem reoccurs. • Check the Developer Housing for the affected color. Check for toner bridging, un-
Y N even brush, or loose High Voltage terminals. Clean, repair, or replace as required (PL
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow. 90.6).
Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). • If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2). Go to the IQ23 BCR Checkout RAP for Y, M, C.
Go to the IQ24 Scorotron Checkout RAP for K.
Perform the following:
• Max Setup (ADJ 9.1)
• Verify that the IIT Calibration (ADJ 5.11) is performed per the instructions
• Go to IQ22 Developer Bias RAP to troubleshoot the Developer Bias Circuit.
I Q 1 3 U n fu s e d Co p y / To n e r O f fs e t R A P I Q 1 4 W r i n k l e d I m a g e / Pa p e r R A P
The image is not properly fused. Areas of prints have distinctive ‘worm track’ patterns or light ‘cloudy’ areas in the image. Actual
wrinkles in the paper itself can also occur.
Initial Actions
• Replace the paper in use with fresh, dry paper of the correct specification. Initial Actions
• Check the post-Fuser transport areas for dirt. Note: The following factors can/will increase the occurrence of this problem:
• Verify that the media being used matches the settings on the UI screen or print driver. Using • Lighter weight papers.
the next heavier setting may resolve the problem.
• Larger papers.
Procedure • Short-grain 11x17 in / A3 papers.
Check the Fuser for damage, toner offsetting, paper wrap, or incorrect installation. Remove and re- • Old paper.
seat the Fuser. If the problem continues, replace the Fuser (PL 10.1).
• 2 sided printing
• Fuser with 1100 or more hours of operating life.
Check the following:
• Verify the Paper Tray Side Guides are set correctly.
• Check the paper path for dirt and/or obstructions
Procedure
• For Fuser related problems, remove and reinstall the Fuser. If the problem continues, replace the
Fuser. (PL 10.1).
• Go to OF 8.1.
I Q 1 5 Pa r t i a l I m a g e D e l e t i o n s R A P Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 1.3). If the problem continues, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
There are extremely light parts on the image or parts that are completely omitted. These omitted If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
parts appear on limited areas on the paper.
Procedure
The problem occurs in both Copy mode and Print mode.
Y N
The problem only occurs in Copy mode.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Check the Platen Glass for dirt or contamination.
The Platen Glass is OK.
Y N
Clean or replace the Platen Glass (PL 60.3).
Check the mirrors on the Full Rate and Half Rate Carriages for alignment.
The mirrors are OK.
Y N
Install the mirror properly.
Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the IIT Trans PWB connectors are fully
seated and free from damage. Turn the power Off then On.
The problem reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL 60.4). If the problem continues, replace the CCD PWB (PL
60.4).
Remove each Drum Unit and reinstall.Turn the power Off then On.
The defect reoccur.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Install a new Drum Unit(s) for the affected color(s) (PL 90.1).Turn the power Off then On.
The defect reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Check the IBT Belt for damage or contamination.
The IBT Belt is OK.
Y N
Replace the IBT Belt (PL 90.12).
Check the 2nd BTR Assembly for damage or contamination.
The 2nd BTR Assembly OK.
Y N
Replace the 2nd BTR Assembly (PL 90.21).
Check the 2nd BTR CAM mechanism for binding.
The 2nd BTR Assembly is OK.
Y N
Replace the 2nd BTR Assembly (PL 80.19).
Go to BSD 90.24 2nd Transfer and 2nd BTR Cleaning (1/2). Check that the connectors on the 2nd
BTR HVPS are seated and that the wires free from damage. Turn the power Off then On.
The defect is still present.
I Q 1 7 C r o s s Pr o c e s s D i r e c t i o n B a n d s a n d S t r e a k s R A P Y N
Replace the 2nd BTR Assembly (PL 80.19).
Go to BSD 90.24 2nd Transfer and 2nd BTR Cleaning (1/2). Check that the connectors on the 2nd
BTR HVPS are seated and that the wires are free from damage. Turn the power Off and then On.
Cross Process Direction Bands and Streets
The defect reoccurred.
Initial Actions Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
• Verify that the Platen Glass is clean and without damage.
Replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 1.3).
• Check the 2nd BTR Cam for proper operation.
If the problem persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
Procedure
The problem occurs in both Copy mode and Print mode. If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
Y N
The problem only occurs in Copy mode only.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the IIT Trans PWB connectors are fully
seated and free from damage. Turn the power Off and On.
The defect reoccurs.
Y N
Go to v.
Check the mirrors on the Full Rate and Half Rate Carriages for alignment and contamination.
The mirror are OK.
Y N
Clean and/or reposition the mirrors as required.
Replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL 60.4). If the problem continues, replace the CCD PWB (PL
60.4).
Swap the affected Drum Cartridge with an adjacent Cartridge. Print Test Pattern 12.
The defect moves to the new color.
Y N
Check the Following:
• The 1st BTR of the affected color for damage and/or contamination
• The ROS Window for damage or contamination and that the connectors are fully seated.
Clean and/or replace as required (PL 5.1)
Replace the Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1).
The defect reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Make a print of Test Pattern 11. Open the Front Door about seven
seconds into the Job. Extend the IBT Drawer.
The image on the Belt is defect free.
Y N
Check the 1st BTR of the affected color for damage and/or contamination. Clean or replace
the IBT Belt (PL 90.12).
The defect reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
If the defect reoccurs, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
Check the 2nd BTR Assembly for damage or contamination.
The 2nd BTR Assembly OK.
Light bands of one color appear over the image in the process direction.
Initial Actions
Check the 2nd BTR Cam for proper operation
Verify that HFSI service is being performed as required. Check HFSI for Ozone Filter, Developers,
and BTRs.
Procedure
The problem occurs in both Copy mode and Print mode.
Y N
The problem only occurs in Copy mode only.
Y N
Go to v.
Go to BSD 60.2 Document Illumination. Check that the IIT Trans PWB connectors are fully
seated and free from damage. Turn the power Off and On.
The defect reoccurs.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Check the mirrors on the Full Rate and Half Rate Carriages for alignment.
The mirrors are properly installed.
Y N
Installed the mirrors properly.
Replace the IIT Trans PWB (PL 60.4). If the problem continues, replace the CCD PWB (PL
60.4).
Enter dC612 Print Test Pattern. Make a print of Test Pattern 11. Open the Front Door about seven
seconds into the Job. Extend the IBT Drawer.
The image on the Belt is defect free.
Y N
Check the IBT Belt for damage or contamination.
The IBT Belt is OK.
Y N
Clean or replace the IBT Belt as required (PL 90.14).
Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
If the problem continues, replace the Controller PWB (PL 3.2).
Check the Developer Housing and Drum Cartridges for Toner clumping, damage, and/or
contamination.
The Developer Housing and Drum Cartridge are OK.
Y N
Clean or replace the Developer Housing (PL 90.6) or Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1) as required.
Go to BSD 90.24 2nd Transfer and 2nd BTR Cleaning (1/2). Check that the connectors on the 2nd
BTR HVPS are seated and that the wires are free from damage. Turn the power Off and then On.
The defect reoccurred.
Y N
Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 1.3).
If the problem persists, replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2).
I Q 2 1 1 s t BT R C h e c ko u t R A P I Q2 2 D e vel o p e r B ia s RA P
This RAP is used to isolate mechanical failure and out-of-range voltage/current for the 1st BTR
Assembly
This RAP is used to isolate out-of-range voltage/current for the developer Bias.
Procedure
Procedure
Note: Because the 1st BTR HVPS location is very difficult to access, no actual voltage checks can
be made. WARNING: Do not perform repair activities with the power on or electrical power
supplied to the machine. The machine could activate and cause serious personal injury
Make a copy of the Color Test Pattern. If the high density gradation patches (100%, 85%, and
when the power is on or electrical power is supplied.
70%) for one or more of C, Y, M, or K appear to be light, perform the following:
• Refer to BSD 90.24 2nd Transfer and 2nd BTR Cleaning (1/2) and BSD 90.25 2nd Transfer & 2nd Refer toBSD 90.14 Development KBSD 90.13 Development C ,BSD 90.12 Development MBSD 90.11
BTR Cleaning (2/2). Reseat the connectors and check the wiring on the 1st BTR HVPS for Development Y. Check the voltage at:
damage. • P/J 592K on the K Developer Bias HVPS PL 1.2
• Check the Fault Code List for the following Fault Codes: • P/J 592C on the C Developer Bias HVPS PL 1.1.
– 094-320 • P/J 592M on the M Developer Bias HVPS PL 1.3
– 094-321 • P/J 592Y on the Y Developer Bias HVPS PL 1.3
If the above Fault Codes are OK, replace the 1st BTR HVPS (PL 90.15). If the problem continues,
replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2). There should be approximately 370VAC and -540VDC (+/- 10%) present.
The voltages are within range.
Y N
Go toBSD 90.14 Development K ,BSD 90.13 Development C ,BSD 90.12 Development M and
BSD 90.11 Development Y. Reseat the connections and check for damaged wires. If the prob-
lem continues:
• Replace the appropriate Developer Bias HVPS.
• Replace the MCU PWB (PL 1.2)
Go toBSD 90.14 Development K , BSD 90.13 Development C ,BSD 90.12 Development M and BSD
90.11 Development Y. Reseat connectors:
• P/J 592K on the K Developer Bias HVPS PL 1.2
• P/J 592C on the C Developer Bias HVPS PL 1.1
• P/J 592M on the M Developer Bias HVPS PL 1.3
• P/J 592Y on the Y Developer Bias HVPS PL 1.3
Check the wires for damage. If the checks are good, return to the RAP that directed you here.
I Q 2 3 B C R C h e c ko u t R A P I Q 2 4 S c o r o t r o n C h e c ko u t R A P
Use this procedure to troubleshoot edge-to-edge, very dense, single-color background. Use this procedure to troubleshoot edge-to-edge, very dense, Black background
WARNING: Do not perform repair activities with the power on or electrical power WARNING: Do not perform repair activities with the power on or electrical power
supplied to the machine. The machine could activate and cause serious personal injury supplied to the machine. The machine could activate and cause serious personal injury
when the power is on or electrical power is supplied. when the power is on or electrical power is supplied.
Procedure Procedure
Swap the Drum Cartridge that creates the high single-color background with any of the other Drum Install a new Black Drum Cartridge and run some test prints.
Cartridges and make a test print. The background color continues.
The background color remains the same. Y N
Y N Go to SCP 2 Call Flow.
Replace the Drum Cartridge causing the single-color background (PL 90.1). Go to BSD 90.7 Charging and Exposure K. Check the connectors on the Charge K/ Preclean HVPS
Go to BSD 90.8 Charging and Exposure Y,M,C. Check the connectors on the Y, M, C Bias Charge Roll are seated and the wires for damage.
HVPS are seated and the wires for damage. The connectors and wires check out OK.
The connectors and wires check out OK. Y N
Y N Repair or replace harness as required.
Repair or replace harness as required. Program a Black only job. While the job is running, check P/J 591-1 on the Charge K/ Preclean HVPS.
Approximately -400 VDC to -900 VDC is measured:
Note: The actual BCR bias voltage involves a high-frequency AC signal at a negative DC offset.
The voltage checks out OK.
The AC and DC values vary constantly, depending on run mode, Drum age, and several environmen-
Y N
tal variables. Measured voltages will vary from machine to machine and job to job.
+24VDC INTLK is measured between P/J415-B7 (+) and B6 (-) on the MCU PWB.
Program a Full Color copy job. While the job is running, measure the voltage on the pin on P/J593 Y N
that is associated with the problem color. Voltage should be -400 VDC to -900 VDC: Check the wires for damage or open circuit. Repair as required.
• C: pin 6 Replace the Charge/Preclean HVPS (K) (PL 1.1).
M: pin 4 Replace the Charge Scorotron Unit (PL 90.1). If the problem continues, replace the Charge/Preclean
HVPS (K) (PL 1.1).
Y: pin 1
The voltages check out OK.
Y N
+24VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 at P/J586 on the Y, M, C Bias Charge Roll
HVPS.
Y N
Check the wires for damage or open circuit. Repair as required.
Replace the Y, M, C Bias Charge Roll HVPS (PL 1.2).
Replace the affected Drum Cartridge (PL 90.1). If the problem continues, replace the Y, M, C Bias
Charge Roll HVPS (PL 1.2).
I m a g e Q u a l i t y S p e c i fi c a t i o n s AREA
Check for the Following Results
()
The following steps are used to set up the machine for the purpose of making test pattern copies to
G IIT Calibration Patches. These patches are scanned for IIT Calibration during the IIT
judge output image color density, balance, and registration. Calibration portion of MAX Setup.
1. Set the following Customer Mode Settings to the positions listed: H 100 Lines/Inch Image. A Moire defect will show on this image. Moire on a 100 Line/
Inch image is within specification.
a. Output Color - Full Color
I 175 Lines/Inch Image. This image is used to test for Moire. Depending on the degree of
b. Original Type - Text & Photo / Halftone the defect, moire seen on this image should be considered out of specification.
c. Lighten/Darken - Normal
Registration and border deletions are checked using the Step Scales on the Geometric Test Pattern,
d. Color Balance - 0
an example of which is shown in Figure1. All of the scales are 20mm in height, and are made up of
e. Color Saturation - Normal four 5mm steps. Step 1 will be described as at the top of the Step Scale, and Step 4 will be de-
f. Sharpness - Normal scribed as at the bottom.
2. Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen. Load 11x17” or A3 paper into Tray 1. Make a copy of
the test pattern.
3. Compare the copy to the test pattern. Refer to and for this evaluation.
A Text Reproduction. Each of the seven sentences in this area are fully reproduced with
no missing letters or portions of letters. The sentences are reproduced in Black, Cyan,
Magenta, Y, Red, Green and Blue.
C Front to Rear Density. The density of both the low density and high density bands Each Step Scale is positioned for a particular paper size and orientation. Table2 indicates the appro-
should be uniform from front to rear. This can be tested by folding the copy in the cen- priate Step Scales to use for the various paper sizes, orientations and measurement locations.
ter and comparing the front side of the copy to the rear side of the copy at location C.
Table 2 Geometric Checkout - Step Scale Data.
Both the high density and low density locations should exhibit even front to rear
density. Paper Orienta-
To check: Step Scales to use (refer to Figure1)
Size tion
D Color Gradation. This area should exhibit a decreasing density of each of the colors
from 100% density to 5% density. In a properly adjusted machine, the 10% patches 11x17 SEF Lead Edge LE1 through LE3
should be visible and the 5% patches should be barely visible or not visible on the test
pattern copy (except for the bottom row). Side Edge SE1 through SE4 (top); SE5 and SE8 (bottom)
Trail Edge TE3
E Routine Color. Location E represents three general tests for the machine to reproduce
colors common to customer originals. A3 SEF Lead Edge LE 1 through LE3
Location A is a general skin tone test. Side Edge SE1 through SE4 (top); SE6 and SE7 (bottom)
Location B represents the color of grass or other common foliage. Trail Edge TE4
Location C represents the color of the sky.
8.5x11 SEF Lead Edge LE 1 and LE2
F Photo Gradation. Location F is not used for any copy quality evaluation on this product. Side Edge SE1 through SE3 (top); SE9 (bottom)
Trail Edge TE5
Side Edge For skew from left to right, the distance from the side edge of the paper to the
1. Set the following Customer Mode Settings to the positions listed: Skew targets at SE1 and SE4 are measured. They must match each other to within
the tolerance below:
• Output Color - Full Color
• Trays 1 through 4: within ±1.6mm (±4.0mm for 2nd side of duplex job)
• Original Type - Photo & Text / Halftone
• Tray 5: within ±3.0mm
• Lighter/Darker - Auto Contrast
Perpendicu- 400mm ±0.6mm
• Color Saturation - Normal larity
• Sharpness - Normal Line Density This parameter is measured on the two 0.7G Text Blocks on the test pattern
copy. The machine should reproduce all of the characters shown in the block on
2. Place Test Pattern 82E8220 on the platen and 24# Xerox Color Xpressions 11x 17” or 90 GSM the output copy.
Colotech A3 paper in Tray 1. Make a copy of the test pattern.
Solid Repro- This specifies the desired standard for reproduction of solid gray images at 1.0
3. Follow the directions in Table1 to determine if the machine registration is within specification. duction K. The 1.0 K blocks on the output copy should reproduce with minimal mottle or
graininess.
Table 3 Test Pattern Image Data Locations for Geometric Specifications
Low Contrast This specifies the desired standard for reproduction of low density images. The
GEOMETRIC Reproduc- machine should reproduce all of the text in the 0.2 G Text Blocks on the output
CHECK PERFORMED
AREA tion copy.
Magnifica- Locate the 300mm line running from near LE1 to the trail edge of the 1.8 lp lad-
tion der. Locate the 200mm line running from near LE1 to near LE3. Make a copy.
The measurements should be:.
• Trays 1 through 4: ±0.3%
Resolution Observing the targets on the test pattern copy at locations R1 through R8, the
line pairs specified below are clearly visible for the magnification value
indicated:
• 70%: 3.0 lp/mm
• 100% through 400%: 4.3 lp/mm
Lead Edge Measure from the lead edge of the paper to the top of Step 3 on the LE2 Step
Registration Scale. The measurement should be:
• Trays 1 through 4: 10mm ±0.7mm (±1.2mm for 2nd side of duplex job)
GEOMETRIC
CHECK PERFORMED
I m a g e D e fe c t s
AREA
The following figures contain examples of defects and their possible causes.
ROS Borders Measure from the lead edge of the paper at LE2, the side edge of the paper at
(Image Loss) SE2 and SE7, and the trail edge at TE4, to the top edge of the step scales in • Background
those locations. The measurements should conform to the following
specifications: • Color Misregistration
Trays 1 through 4:
• Debris-Centered Deletions
• Lead Edge 4mm ± 0.7mm
• Deletions
• Side Edges 3mm ±1.2mm
• Trail Edge 4mm ± 0. mm • High Frequency Bands
Tray 5: • Irregular Process Direction Streak
• Lead Edge 4mm ± 1.5mm
• Low Image Density
• Side Edges 3mm ± 2.9mm
• Trail Edge 4mm ± 1.5mm • Moire
• Residual Image
• Wrinkled Image
B a c kg r o u n d
Corrective Action
Go to the IQ11 Background RAP.
Co l o r M i s r e g i s t ra t i o n D e b r i s - Ce n t e r e d D e l e t i o n s
Cause Cause
Failure of the ROS or IBT “walking” from rear to front or front to rear. Toner agglomerates cause deletions in the areas surrounding them during transfer.
Deletions H i g h Fr e q u e n c y B a n d s
Figure 1 Deletions Defect Sample Figure 1 High Freq. Bands Defect Sample
Cause Cause
Defective IBT Belt, damp paper, uneven charge. Faulty ROS Assembly or Photoreceptor/Developer Housing gear or bearing problem.
Corrective Action Corrective Action
Go to the IQ15 Partial Image Deletions RAP. Go to the IQ4 Repeating Bands, Streaks, Spots, and Smears RAP.
I r r e g u l a r Pr o c e s s D i r e c t i o n S t r e a k Lo w I m a g e D e n s i t y
Moire Mottle
Newton Rings Re g u l a r ( Re p e a t i n g ) B a n d s , S t r e a k s , S p o t s , o r S m e a r s
Figure 1 Newton Rings Defect Sample Figure 1 Repeating Defects Sample Image
Cause Cause
Highly reflective surfaces on a glossy photograph. Damage, density variation, or deletions caused by rotating component. Spacing equal to effective
circumference of part.
Corrective Action
Perform the following: Corrective Action
Go to the IQ4 Repeating Bands, Streaks, Spots, and Smears RAP.
• Clean the Document Glass
Re s i d u a l I m a g e S t r e a k D e l e t i o n i n Pr o c e s s D i r e c t i o n
Figure 1 Residual Image Defect Sample Figure 1 Streak Deletion Defect Sample
Cause Cause
Improper IBT cleaning and/or defective IBT Belt. Contamination of ROS window, damage to or contact with Transfer Belt or Drum Cartridge
Wrinkled Image C l o u d D e fe c t
Cause Cause
Non-uniform paper buckle between IBT and Fuser; Fuser “tenting” of paper. Actual wrinkling of the Non-uniform paper buckle between IBT and Fuser; Fuser “tenting” of paper
paper itself can also occur. Corrective Action
Corrective Action Go to the IQ4 Repeating Bands, Streaks, Spots, and Smears RAP.
Go to the IQ14 Wrinkled Image/Paper RAP.
I BT C l e a n e r S t r e a k Scorotron Streaks
INBOARD EDGE
LEAD EDGE
Corrective Action
Go to the IQ25 Scorotron Cleaner RAP.
R E P 1 . 1 A C Po w e r S u p p l y A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 1.3
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Disconnect all cables that are connected to the control part at the left of the machine.
3. Disconnect all cables that are connected to the power unit part at the right of the machine.
4. Remove the rear lower cover, REP 28.3.
5. Remove the IIT LVPS, REP 1.3.
6. Remove the 2nd BTR HVPS, REP 90.32.
7. Remove the right rear lower cover, Figure 1.
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the EPSV cover (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the right rear lower cover (4).
R E P 1 . 2 M a i n LV P S
Parts List on PL 1.3
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION: Observe ESD procedures during this procedure. CAUTION: Observe ESD procedures during this procedure.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord. 1. Print a Configuration Report. Refer to GP 6, Printing Reports [Printer Reports > Configuration
2. Remove the rear lower cover, REP 28.6. Report].
3. Remove the IIT LVPS, Figure 1. 2. Save the NVM, GP 18, Save and Restore NVM.
3. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2 3
Disconnect three Remove two mounting screws. 4. Remove the rear upper right cover, REP 28.5.
connectors.
4
1 VIEW FROM REAR OF Loosen two mounting screws,
Disconnect the PRINTER then remove the IIT LVPS
connector. from the machine.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Remove
the NVM
PWB
1
Loosen ten
2 screws.
Remove one
screw on the
front, then
remove two
screws on the
side.
7. Disconnect the connectors across the top, left side, and bottom of the MCU PWB, Figure 3.
Note: The ribbon cable connectors have a latch on the bottom of the connector. Lower the
latch to unlock the cable, then remove the ribbon cable. Do not use excessive force when lower-
ing the latch.
WARNING: When installing a new MCU PWB, move the NVM PWB from the old
MCU PWB to the new MCU PWB.
Remove
the NVM
PWB
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Disconnect all external cables connected to the controller at the left rear of the machine.
3. Remove the rear upper left, REP 28.4, and rear upper right cover, REP 28.5.
4. Release four cable clamps (1) attaching the controller harness (2), Figure 1.
Replacement
After installating a new NVM PWB, perform the following:
1. Serialize the MCU NVM PWB, refer to GP 4, Serial Number Synchronization Procedure.
2. Restore MCU PWB NVM, refer to GP 18, Save and Restore NVM.
3. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Verify NVM value 742-180 is set to 1.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the controller PWB, REP 3.3.
3. Remove the rear upper left, REP 28.4, and rear upper right covers, REP 28.5.
4. Remove the VSEL PWB, REP 1.6.
5. Remove the MCU cover. Refer to REP 1.4.
6. Remove the CONT Harness Guide, PL 1.1 Item 6.
7. Remove the BP PWB assembly, Figure 1 :
a. Disconnect two connectors (1).
b. Remove seven screws (2).
c. Remove the BP PWB assembly (3).
R E P 1 . 8 C h a r g e / Pr e c l e a n H V P S ( K )
Parts List on PL 1.1
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2
Remove the two mounting
2. Disconnect the bypass tray connector, Figure 1. screws.
1 1
Lift up the Open the spring-loaded
Tray Lower Cover.
5/Bypass.
4. Remove the bypass tray from the machine by gripping it firmly at the front and rear edges and
lifting it upwards to clear the mounting lugs.
2
Disconnect 5. Remove the bypass tray cover from the left side of the machine, Figure 3.
the
connector.
Charge K /
Preclean
HVPS area
1
Remove the two mounting screws and
remove the cover.
4
Remove the Charge K / 3 2
Preclean HVPS from the Release the four Remove the ground
machine. quick-release tabs from screw.
around the perimeter of the
Charge K / Preclean HVPS.
1
VIEW FROM LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE, Disconnect the four
ABOVE BYPASS TRAY. connectors and route the
wires out of the way.
Replacement
R E P 1 . 9 TM D r i v e P W B
Parts List on PL 1.3
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the TM drive PWB, Figure 1.
3
Remove
board
from
4
2 Remove board
Disconnect from mounting
connectors (5) studs (2)
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 2 . 1 U s e r I n t e r fa c e U I
Parts List on PL 2.1
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord. Rear UI Cover
2. Remove Hinge Cover from the base of the UI, Figure 1.
a. Remove the two screws on the UI swivel.
b. Remove the two plastic Hinge Covers.
Mounting screw
Two screws.
Two Hinge
Covers.
4. Remove the UI from the Tilt Swivel brackets, Figure 3.
a. Disconnect the UI connector and release the three (3) cable clips.
b. Loosen the (4) screws, then raise the UI up to disengage.
3. Remove the Rear UI cover, Figure 2. c. Slide the UI off of the bracket and remove.
a. Remove the mounting screw.
b. Slide the Rear UI Cover up and then remove.
UI
Connector.
(4) screws
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 3 . 1 Co n t r o l l e r D o o r O p e n
Parts List on PL 3.1
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the rear upper left cover, REP 28.4.
3. Remove the rear upper right cover, REP 28.5.
4. Remove the controller cover, Figure 1 :
a. Release the DADF cable from the controller cover (1)
b. Loosen four screws (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the controller cover.
Figure 2 Controller PWB cable removal Figure 3 Controller door fasteners loosened
6. Loosen three screws (5), Figure 3. 7. Swing the controller door open, Figure 4.
R E P 3 . 2 Co n t r o l U n i t
Parts List on PL 3.1
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the rear upper left cover, REP 28.4.
3. Remove the rear upper right cover, REP 28.5.
4. Remove the controller cover, Controller cover removal :
a. Release the cable from the controller cover (1)
b. Loosen four screws (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
d. Remove the controller cover.
Figure 4 Controller door open
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 3 . 3 Co n t r o l l e r P W B
Parts List on PL 3.2
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION: The Serial Number, Product Number, and Billing Data are held at the fol-
lowing 3 locations respectively. Therefore, when replacing the following parts, do it
one-by-one (do not replace several simultaneously). Figure 1 HDD Assembly
1. SEEP ROM of BP PWB 5. Remove three screws (1), then remove the plastic safety cover, Figure 2.
2. Controller PWB SRAM
3. NVM PWB of MCU PWB
• The IOT displayed on the UI screen represents the MCU PWB, while SYS1 repre-
sents the BP PWB, and SYS2 represents the Controller PWB. Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 DC132 UI List
Diag screen (DC132) Parts to be replaced
SYS1 BP PWB
Note: Controller PWB SRAM is directly attached to the board and can not be removed.
Procedure
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the controller door, REP 3.1.
3. Remove the control unit, REP 3.2.
4. Remove the HDD assembly, Figure 1 : Figure 2 Safety cover removal
a. Disconnect two connectors (1). 6. Remove the screw (1), then four connector screws (2), Figure 3.
REP 3 .4 SD Ca rd
Parts List on PL 3.2
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the rear upper left cover, REP 28.4.
3. Remove the HDD assembly, then remove the HDD bracket. Refer to REP 3.3.
4. Remove the Memory Card, Figure 1 :
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the bracket (2).
c. Remove the SD card (3).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 5 . 1 DA D F
Parts List on PL 5.1
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION: When removing the DADF, make sure you have 2 persons to perform the
procedure as the DADF (about 15.5 kg) is heavy.
1. Remove the rear upper left cover, REP 28.4.
2. Remove the rear upper right cover, REP 28.5.
3. Disconnect the DADF-ESS cable (1) from the control unit, Figure 1.
R E P 5 . 2 DA D F L e f t L o w e r C o v e r
Parts List on PL 5.2
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.5.
2. Remove one screw (1), Figure 1.
Note: After replacement, clear the “DC135 HFSI” counter. Chain Link: 955-806: Document Feed. a. Remove two screws (1).
b. Remove the DADF left lower cover (2).
R E P 5 . 3 DA D F F r o n t C o v e r
Parts List on PL 5.2
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the DADF.
2. Remove the DADF front cover, Figure 1.
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Remove the DADF front cover (2).
R E P 5 . 4 N OT U S E D R E P 5 . 5 DA D F R e a r C o v e r
Parts List on Parts List on PL 5.2
Removal Removal
Replacement WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, Figure 1.
a. Remove two screws (1).
b. Remove the DADF rear cover (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 5 . 6 N OT U S E D R E P 5 . 7 I I T - DA D F C a b l e
Parts List on Parts List on PL 5.3
Removal Removal
Replacement WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. b. Remove six screws (2).
c. Remove the DADF PWB (3).
R E P 5 . 1 0 R i g h t Co u n t e r B a l a n c e
Parts List on PL 5.3
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
R E P 5 . 1 5 N OT U S E D R E P 5 . 1 6 DA D F Tra y M o t o r A s s e m b l y
Parts List on Parts List on PL 5.5
Removal Removal
Replacement WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
R E P 5 . 1 7 DA D F O i l D a m p e r a n d D o c u m e n t S e t L E D
Parts List on PL 5.5
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF oil damper, DADF-ESS cable disconnect.
a. Remove two screws (1).
b. Remove the DADF oil damper (2).
R E P 5 . 1 8 N OT U S E D
Parts List on
Removal
Replacement
Note: The replacement procedure for DADF tray APS sensor 1 to DADF tray APS sensor 4 are the
same as DADF tray APS sensor 2, so only DADF tray APS sensor 2 is described here.
1. Remove the DADF document tray, REP 5.55.
2. Remove two tray blocks (1) on both ends of the bottom tray assembly, Figure 1.
R E P 5 . 2 0 DA D F D o c u m e n t S e t S e n s o r
Parts List on PL 5.6
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove two tray blocks (1) by prying at the bottom using a flat blade screw driver, Figure 1.
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
R E P 5 . 2 3 DA D F L e f t C o v e r A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 5.7
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.5.
3. Remove the DADF registration motor and belt, REP 5.41.
4. Remove two screws (1), Figure 1.
R E P 5 . 2 4 DA D F L / H C o v e r I n t e r l o c k S e n s o r a n d A c t u a t o r R E P 5 . 2 5 DA D F Fe e d I n S e n s o r 1 / DA D F Fe e d I n S e n s o r 2
Parts List on PL 5.7 Parts List on PL 5.8
Removal Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3. 1. Remove the upper feeder cover, Figure 1.
2. Remove the DADF L/H cover interlock sensor, Figure 1. a. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly.
a. Disconnect the connector (1), then diconnect the cable clamp (2). b. Remove five screws (1).
b. Remove the screw (3), then remove the DADF L/H cover interlock sensor with the actuator as c. Remove the upper feeder cover (2).
an assembly.
c. Squeeze the tabs on the sensor to remove the sensor from the bracket.
d. Remove the spring (4).
e. Remove the E-clip (5), then remove the actuator from the shaft.
R E P 5 . 2 6 DA D F L e v e l S e n s o r
Parts List on PL 5.8
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper feeder cover, Figure 1.
a. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly.
b. Remove five screws (1).
c. Remove the upper feeder cover (2).
R E P 5 . 2 7 DA D F R e a r L a t c h A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 5.8
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly.
2. Remove the upper feeder cover, Figure 1.
a. Remove five screws (1).
b. Remove the upper feeder cover (2).
Figure 2 Latch shaft harware removal Figure 4 Rear latch and latch shaft removal
4. Remove the latch lever, Figure 3. Replacement
a. Remove two screws (1). The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
b. Remove the latch lever (2).
R E P 5 . 2 8 DA D F N u d g e r H o u s i n g A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 5.8
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF nudger housing assembly, Figure 1.
a. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly.
b. Remove two hooks (1).
c. Remove the DADF nudger housing assembly (2).
R E P 5 . 2 9 DA D F N u d g e r S o l e n o i d A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 5.8
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the upper feeder cover, Figure 1.
a. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly.
b. Remove five screws (1).
c. Remove the upper feeder cover (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Note: When installing the DADF nudger solenoid assembly, attach the hook of the guide to the
leading edge of the DADF nudger solenoid assembly, Figure 3.
R E P 5 . 3 0 N OT U S E D R E P 5 . 3 1 DA D F O u t S e n s o r
Parts List on Parts List on PL 5.9
Removal Removal
Replacement WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the pre registration in chute assembly, REP 5.47.
2. Remove the out sensor bracket, Figure 1.
a. Remove one screw (1).
b. Remove the out sensor bracket (2).
R E P 5 . 3 2 DA D F R e g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r
Parts List on PL 5.9
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the pre registration in chute assembly, REP 5.47.
2. Remove the DADF registration sensor, Figure 1.
a. Remove one screw (1).
b. Remove the lead registration sensor bracket (2).
c. Disconnect the connector (3).
d. Remove the DADF registration sensor (4).
R E P 5 . 3 3 DA D F P r e R e g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r / DA D F A P S S e n s o r 1 / R E P 5 . 3 4 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r / E x i t S e n s o r
DA D F A P S S e n s o r 2 / DA D F A P S S e n s o r 3 Parts List on PL 5.9
Parts List on PL 5.9 Removal
Removal WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 1. Remove the lower chute assembly, REP 5.42.
1. Remove the lower chute assembly, REP 5.42. 2. Remove the DADF feed out sensor, Figure 1.
2. Remove the DADF pre registration sensor, Figure 1. a. Remove two screws (1).
a. Remove one screw (1). b. Remove the exit sensor assembly (2).
b. Remove the APS sensor bracket (2). c. Disconnect one connector (3).
c. Disconnect one connector (3). d. Remove the DADF feed out sensor (4).
d. Remove the DADF pre registration sensor (4). e. Turn the exit sensor assembly (2) over, then remove the exit sensor.
e. Remove the DADF APS sensor as required (5).
R E P 5 . 3 5 S ke w D e t e c t S e n s o r R E P 5 . 3 6 DA D F L e a d R e g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r
Parts List on PL 5.9 Parts List on PL 5.9
Removal Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the lower chute assembly, REP 5.42. 1. Remove the DADF pre registration in chute assembly, REP 5.47
2. Remove the skew detect sensor, Figure 1. 2. Remove the lead registration sensor bracket, Figure 1.
a. Remove one screw (1). a. Remove one screw (1).
b. Remove the skew sensor bracket (2). b. Remove the lead registration sensor bracket (2).
c. Disconnect one connector (3).
d. Remove the skew detect sensor (4).
R E P 5 . 3 7 DA D F P r e R e g i s t r a t i o n M o t o r
Parts List on PL 5.10
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to PL 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.5.
2. Remove the DADF PWB wire harness and harness guide, REP 5.56.
3. Remove the DADF pre registration motor, Figure 1.
a. Remove one spring (1).
b. Remove three screws (2).
c. Remove the DADF pre registration motor (3).
R E P 5 . 3 8 DA D F Ta ke a w a y C l u t c h A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 5.10
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.5.
2. Remove the DADF PWB wire harness and harness guide, REP 5.56.
3. Remove the DADF pre registration motor, REP 5.37.
4. Remove one spring (1), Figure 1.
R E P 5 . 3 9 DA D F E x i t M o t o r a n d B e l t
Parts List on PL 5.10
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Figure 4 Take away clutch assembly removal 2. Remove the DADF exit motor, Figure 1.
Replacement R E P 5 . 4 1 DA D F R e g i s t r a t i o n M o t o r a n d B e l t
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 5.10
Note: Re-attach the belt to the platen motor before replacement. Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
R E P 5 . 4 3 DA D F F r i c t i o n C l u t c h
Parts List on PL 5.11
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the rear cover, REP 5.5.
2. Remove the friction clutch, Figure 1.
a. Remove the E-clip (1).
b. Remove the clutch stopper (2).
c. Remove the friction clutch (3).
R E P 5 . 4 4 R e t a r d Ro l l a n d S p r i n g
Parts List on PL 5.11
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the retard chute cover, Figure 1.
a. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly.
b. Remove the retard chute cover (1).
Note: After a replacement, enter the Diag Mode and use “Initialize HFSI Counter” to clear the HFSI
counter. Chain Link: 955-806.
R E P 5 . 4 5 DA D F E x i t E l i m i n a t o r
Parts List on PL 5.11
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.5.
3. Remove the DADF lower chute assembly, REP 5.42.
4. Remove the DADF document tray, REP 5.55.
5. Remove the friction clutch, REP 5.43.
6. Remove the gear (21T) (1) and ball bearing (2), Figure 1.
R E P 5 . 4 6 N OT U S E D
Parts List on
Removal
Replacement
R E P 5 . 4 7 DA D F P r e R e g i s t r a t i o n I n C h u t e A s s e m b l y R E P 5 . 4 8 DA D F R e g i s t r a t i o n O u t C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 5.12 Parts List on PL 5.12
Removal Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric- power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly. 1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Open the DADF left cover assembly. 2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.5.
1. Remove the pre registration in chute assembly, Figure 1. 3. Remove the DADF left lower cover, REP 5.2.
4. Remove the two front screws (1) securing the registration out chute assembly (2), Figure 1.
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Remove the pre registration in chute assembly (2).
R E P 5 . 4 9 P l a t e n H i g h Ro l l A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 5.12
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.5.
3. Open the DADF.REP 5.2
4. Remove the DADF left lower cover, REP 5.2.
5. Remove the pulley (20T), Figure 1.
a. Remove two springs (1).
b. Remove the E-clip (2).
c. Remove the pulley (3).
d. Loosen the screw (4).
Figure 2 Registration out chute assembly removal e. Remove the guide (5).
f. Remove the E-clip (6).
Replacement
g. Remove the pulley (20T) (7).
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 5 . 5 0 DA D F E x i t 1 a n d P l a t e n B e l t s
Parts List on PL 5.12
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the exit 1 belt, Figure 1.
a. Remove the E-clip (1).
b. Remove the gear (2).
c. Remove the exit 1 belt (3).
Note: When installing the platen high roll assembly, remember to install the spring into the hole of
the platen high roll assembly, Figure 1.
R E P 5 . 5 1 DA D F E x i t L o w e r C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 5.13
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF front cover, REP 5.3.
2. Remove the DADF rear cover, REP 5.5.
3. Remove the bracket PWB, Figure 1.
a. Disconnect two connectors (1).
b. Remove two screws (2).
c. Remove the bracket PWB (3).
Figure 2 Exit rear hinge removal Figure 4 Exit lower chute assembly removal
6. Remove the screw (1) securing the front hinge, Figure 3. Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 5 . 5 2 N OT U S E D R E P 5 . 5 3 DA D F O u t C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on Parts List on PL 5.13
Removal Removal
Replacement WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the DADF.
2. Open the exit lower chute assembly (1), Figure 1.
R E P 5 . 5 4 DA D F Fe e d Ro l l
Parts List on PL 5.14
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the DADF feeder cover assembly.
2. Remove the DADF nudger housing assembly, Figure 1.
a. Release two latches (1).
b. Remove the DADF nudger housing assembly (2).
a. Remove the E-clip (1). a. Remove the feed shaft (1) from the nudger housing (2).
b. Lift the open end of the feed shaft in the direction of arrow, then remove the bearing (2). b. Remove the feed roll (3) from nudger housing (2).
Note: Ensure that the pin (1) on the feed shaft align with groove on the nudger housing (2) during
installation, Figure 7.
R E P 5 . 5 6 DA D F P W B W i r e H a r n e s s a n d H a r n e s s G u i d e
Parts List on PL 5.3
Removal
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
R E P 1 0 . 1 Fu s e r
Parts List on PL 10.1
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Front Cover.
3. Remove the Fuser, Figure 1 :
1 3
2 Turn Release Lift Fuser out
Slide out the Handle to the of the Transfer
Transfer Unit right Unit
until it stops
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 1 0 . 2 Fu s e r B l o c k R E P 1 0 . 3 Fu s i n g U n i t N i p S e n s o r
Parts List on Parts List on PL 10.1
Removal Removal
1. Remove the Fuser, REP 10.1. The procedure will be available in the coming update.
2. Release the tabs on the back of the fuser block, then remove the fuser block from the transfer
tray, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
RE P 1 0 . 4 I n ve r t er A s s e mb l y
Parts List on PL 10.5
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Un-dock the Finisher from the IOT or remove the Offset Catch Tray.
3. Remove the Right Rear Upper and Right Upper Covers (Figure 1).
2
Remove screws (2)
and the Right Upper
Cover
Remove
screws (2)
and lift
Inverter
Cover to
remove
6. Remove Inverter 2 (Figure 3)
1
Remove screws
(2) and the
Right Rear Upper
Cover
1
Remove
screws
(2)
2
Remove
Inverter
2 1
Remove
screws
(2) Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 1 0 . 7 R H Co v e r I n t e r l o c k S w i t c h R E P 1 0 . 8 E x i t Fa n A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 10.7 Parts List on PL 10.10
Removal Removal
The procedure will be available in the coming update. The procedure will be available in the coming update.
Replacement Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 1 0 . 9 Fu s e r O u t Te m p S e n s o r R E P 1 0 . 1 0 Fu s e r I n l e t C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 10.1 Parts List on PL 10.2
Removal Removal
The procedure will be available in the coming update. The procedure will be available in the coming update.
Replacement Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 1 0 . 1 1 Fu s e r O u t Te m p S e n s o r R E P 1 0 . 1 2 Fu s e r I n l e t C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 10.5 Parts List on PL 10.5
Removal Removal
The procedure will be available in the coming update. The procedure will be available in the coming update.
Replacement Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 1 0 . 1 3 Fu s e r I n l e t C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 10.5
Removal
The procedure will be available in the coming update.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 2 8 . 1 R i g h t U p p e r Co v e r A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 28.1
Removal
1. Remove the right rear upper cover, REP 28.5.
2. Remove the right upper cover assembly, Figure 1.
a. Open the front cover assembly (1).
b. Remove two screws (2).
c. Remove the right upper cover assembly (3).
R E P 2 8 . 2 Le f t U p p e r Co v e r
Parts List on PL 28.1
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the tray assembly and UI, REP 5.16.
3. Remove the tray 5 / bypass, Figure 1 :
a. Raise the bypass tray.
b. Disconnect the connector to the left side of copier/printer.
c. Open the lower cover of the bypass tray, then remove two screws (1).
d. Grasp the bypass tray firmly with both hands, then lift up and out to remove.
2
1 Remove the
Remove four IIT left
screws. cover
1
Remove two
screws
1
Remove two
4. Remove the IIT front cover, REP 28.4. screws.
5. Remove the IIT left cover, Figure 2.
2
Remove the
left upper
cover
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 2 8 . 3 Re a r L o w e r C o v e r R E P 2 8 . 4 Re a r U p p e r L e f t C o v e r
Parts List on PL 28.1 Parts List on PL 28.3
Removal Removal
1. Remove the rear lower cover, Figure 1. 1. Remove the rear upper left cover, Figure 1.
a. Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the rear upper left cover (2).
2
Remove the
Rear Lower
Cover.
1
Remove four
(4) screws.
R E P 2 8 . 5 Re a r U p p e r R i g h t C o v e r R E P 2 8 . 6 M a i n Po w e r a n d Fr o n t C o v e r I n t e r l o c k S w i t c h
Parts List on PL 28.3 Parts List on PL 28.1
Removal Removal
1. Remove the rear upper right cover, Figure 1. The procedure will be available in the coming update.
a. Remove five screws (1). Replacement
b. Remove the rear upper right cover (2).
R E P 4 0 . 1 Fu s e r D r i v e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 40.3
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Chassis Assembly (REP 3.1).
3. Remove the Fuser Duct (Figure 1).
Remove
screws (2)
and the
Fuser Duct
Remove the
screws (2) and
remove the Fan
1 7. Disconnect connectors and release Harness from Harness Clips (Figure 5).
Remove the 2
screws and
remove the duct
Remove
screws (4)
and the
Fuser Drive
Assembly
1
Disconnect
connectors
(2)
2
Release Harness
from Harness
Clips (2)
Release Harness
from Harness
Clips (2)
RE P 4 0 . 2 M ai n Dr i ve A s s em bl y
Parts List on PL 40.1
Removal 2 Remove
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord. screws
(2) and
2. Open the Chassis Assembly, REP 3.1. the V -
Transport
3. Remove the Main K-Duct (1), Figure 1. Duct
1 Remove
screws (2)
and the Main
K - Duct
1
4. Remove the V-Transport Duct (2), Figure 2.
2
Remove two
screws and
the V -
Transport
fan and
Duct
3
Release
Wire
3 Remove Harness
screws from
(3) and Harness
the Clips
Tension
Bracket
1
Disconnect
connectors
7. Remove the Gear Bracket (4), Figure 5. 9. Remove the Main Drive Assembly (5), Figure 7.
4 Remove
screws (2)
and the
Gear
Bracket
8. Disconnect connectors (1,2), then release the Wire Harness from Harness Clips (3), Figure 6.
R E P 4 0. 3 D eve l o p er D ri ve A s s em bl y ( K ) an d Be l t s
Parts List on PL 40.1
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Chassis Assembly (REP 3.1).
3. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (K) (REP 40.5).
4. Remove the Tension Bracket (Figure 1).
5 Remove
screws (4)
and the Main
Drive
Assembly
Remove screws
(3) and the
Replacement Tension Bracket
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. 5. Remove the Gear Bracket (Figure 2).
Remove screws
(2) and the
Gear Bracket
1 2
Disconnect Remove Harness from Harness
connector Clips (3)
6. Disconnect connector and release Wire Harness from Harness Clips (Figure 3).
Remove the
Belt from the
Pulley
Loosen screws
and move
brackets to
loosen Belt
8. Remove the Belt from the Pulley (Figure 5). tension 9. Remove the Rear Cooling Fan and Duct (Figure 6).
2
Remove screws
(2) and the
Fan and Duct
RE P 4 0 . 4 D e vel o p e r D r ive A s s e mb l y ( Y , M , C )
Parts List on PL 40.1
Removal Remove
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord. screws
(2) and
2. Open the Chassis Assembly (REP 3.1). the V -
Transport
3. Remove the Main K-Duct (Figure 1). Duct
Remove screws
(2) and the
Main K - Duct
Remove screws
(2) and the Y, M
1 2 Cooling Duct
Remove Remove screws
screws (2) (2) and the 7. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (C) (Figure 5).
and Fuser Bracket
Duct
6. Remove the Y, M Cooling Duct (Figure 4).
1 1
Disconnect
Disconnect connectors (2)
connectors (2)
2 3 2 3
Release Harness Remove screws (3) Release Harness Remove screws (3) and
from Harness and the Drum Motor from Harness the Drum Motor
Clips (2) Assembly (C) Clip Assembly (M)
8. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (M) (Figure 6). 9. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (Y) (Figure 7).
2
Remove screws (2)
and the Drum Motor
YMC PWB
11. Remove the Developer Drive Assembly (Y, M, C) (Figure 9).
2
Remove screws (3) and the Drum
Motor Assembly (M)
10. Remove the Drum Motor YMC PWB Assembly (Figure 8).
2 1 Removal
Remove screws Disconnect
(3) connectors (2) 1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Chassis Assembly (REP 3.1).
3. Remove the Main - K Duct (Figure 1).
2
Remove screws (5) and the
Developer Drive Assembly
(Y, M, C)
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Remove screws
(2) and the
Main - K Duct
4. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (K) (Figure 2).
R E P 4 0 . 6 Fu s e r D r i v e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 1.1
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Chassis Assembly (REP 3.1).
1 3. Remove the Fuser Duct (Figure 1).
Disconnect
Connectors
(2)
Remove
screws (2)
and the
Fuser Duct
2 3
Remove screws Gently pull out the Drum
(3) Motor Assembly
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Remove the
screws (2) and
remove the Fan
1 7. Disconnect connectors and release Harness from Harness Clips (Figure 5).
Remove the 2
screws and
remove the duct
Remove
screws (4)
and the
Fuser Drive
Assembly
1
Disconnect
connectors
(2)
2
Release Harness
from Harness
Clips (2)
Release Harness
from Harness
Clips (2)
2
Open the cable clip,
then gently move ribbon
cables to the left
1
Disconnect
ribbon
cables (4)
Loosen screws
(3) and remove
IIT Plate
Note: NVM values can be negative values. There are 3 values for each color. K third value 759-912
2. After entering this data into NVM stick the bar-code label in the machine history log for storage
and future reference.
Note: Correctly entering the ROS specific NVM values into their correct NVM locations may create
a color registration accuracy improvement by as much as 40 microns
Replacement
Figure 1 Examples of Bar Code labels on ROS Assemblies 1. Ensure that ribbon cables are properly re-connected.
Note: If the value on the label is preceded by a zero (0), DO NOT enter the 0 in the NVM location. 2. Re-install parts in reverse order of the removal procedure.
Example: 3. Perform the Registration Control Setup Cycle (ADJ 9.8).
Table 1 Example of Translating Bar Code Label Values into NVM Location
Values
Y 759-901 759-905 759-909
Y -11 14 -7
M -11 21 -9
Y -11 14 -7
2
Open the cable Clip M 759-902 759-906 759-910
and gently move
ribbon cables to M -11 21 -9
the left
C 759-903 759-907 759-911
10. Remove the ROS assembly (Y, M), Figure 5.
C -28 3 -17
1 3 2
Remove screws Gently pull on the K 759-904 759-908 759-912
(3) ribbon cables to
get more slack K -4 -3 -17
(disconnected and
moved in step 5) Note: The following NVM locations exist on all 770, 550/560 and C75/J75 I OTs - also on 700s with
IOT software v54.43 or above.
Table 2 ROS Values-NVM Locations
ROS values NVM Location
2. After entering this data into NVM stick the bar-code label in the machine history log for storage 3. Remove the DADF IF Cover, PL 60.2 Item 5.
and future reference. 4. Disconnect the Connector, and release the clamp of DADF-ESS cable, Figure 1.
Note: Correctly entering the ROS specific NVM values into their correct NVM locations may create a. Release the clamp (1).
a color registration accuracy improvement by as much as 40 microns b. Disconnect the connector (2).
Replacement c. Release four clamps holding the harness (3).
Note: Push the platen glass in the direction of arrow A and the right side plate in the direction
of arrow B, Figure 2.
R E P 6 0 . 5 I I T Fr a m e O p e n i n g a n d C l o s i n g 10. Remove the rear upper left cover, REP 28.4, and the rear upper right cover, REP 28.5.
11. Remove the cooling fan duct assembly, Figure 2.
Removal
a. Disconnect the connector (1).
CAUTION: Move the brace shaft in the proper direction (A). The brace shaft might b. Remove two screws (2).
break if strength is applied in direction B, Figure 1.
c. Remove the filter duct assembly (3).
Figure 11 IIT left-side stopper installation a. Release the hook, and remove the connector (1) of the CCD-Cont video flat cable.
b. Disconnect the connector on the CCD lens power harness (2).
Figure 2 CCD-Cont video flat cable and connector removal Figure 3 CCD lens kit removal
5. Remove the CCD lens kit, Figure 3. Replacement
Note: When removing the CCD lens kit, never remove the screw of the jig pin (x2). 1. After installation of the new lens and CCD, make a copy of the test chart (499T 00283) on A3
paper. Check the lead/trail edges and both sides.
CAUTION: When removing the CCD lens kit, never remove the screw securing the jig
pins. 2. If any problems are found with the image (especially alignment), carry out ADJ 9.1, DC945 MAX
Setup.
a. Remove four screws (1). 3. Connect the CCD-Cont video flat cable and connector.
b. Remove the CCD lens kit (2). 4. Install the APS sensor 2 and APS sensor cover.
5. Install the CCD lens cover assembly and platen glass. (No need to install the guide for holding
the glass.)
6. Make a copy of the test chart (499T 00283) onto A3 paper. Check lead/trail edges and both
sides.
• If any problem is found in the image (especially alignment), jump to Step 11.
• In the following steps, it is best to work where outside light is minimized. If the
servicing site is located directly below the fluorescent light, perform the servicing
with the DADF covered to reduce external light.
• Optical Axis Correction Result: Displays OK/NG. If OK appears, the operation is complete. If
NG appears, correction is needed.
• Front/Rear Nut Correction Angle: Shows a combination of +/- and numerals.
• Front Nut refers to the Nut at the front of the CCD Lens Kit.
• Rear Nut refers to the Nut at the rear of the CCD Lens Kit.
Figure 4 Adjustment nut location
• +: Refers to right (CW) rotation.
13. After the adjustment, enter ADJ 9.1 MAX Setup [DC945: IIT Calibration] > White Reference Ad-
• -: Refers to left (CCW) rotation. justment > CCD Calibration > Optical Axis Correction >, then perform the Optical Axis Correction
• Numeral: Refers to the angle. (Unit: degrees) again.
11. Using the information on the UI screen and the content in, Table 1, as an example: 14. Repeat Steps 11 to 18 until the result on the UI displays [OK].
15. Reinstall all removed parts.
a. The Front Nut must be rotated 90 degrees to the left.
b. The Rear Nut must be rotated 555 degrees to the left.
c. If the value is an abnormal number such as 990, clean the platen glass and the mirror, etc.
and start again. This may be due to the light path being blocked.
12. Rotate the nut, Figure 4, as required in Figure 1.
Note: Draw a line on the tip of the box driver as shown in Figure 4 to ensure proper numbers of
screw rotation.
Replacement
Figure 1 APS sensor removal
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 6 0 . 9 I I T Tra n s P W B R E P 6 0 . 1 0 Fr o n t / Re a r C a r r i a g e C a b l e
Parts List on PL 60.4 Parts List on PL 60.5
Removal Removal
Note: Backup the NVM data before installing a new IIT Trans PWB. Refer to, dC301 Initialize NVM Note: Carriage cable has a different coating in the Front and Rear.
1. Remove the IIT rear cover, PL 60.2 Item 4. Rear: Silver
2. Remove the IIT Trans PWB, Figure 1. Front: Black
a. Disconnect six connectors (1).
Note: Only the replacement procedures for the Rear Carriage cable are described here. The replace-
b. Remove six screws (2). ment procedures for the Front Carriage cable is the same as for the Rear Carriage cable.
c. Remove the IIT Trans PWB (3).
Note: The Carriage cables must be replaced one by one. Never remove both front and rear cables
at the same time.
1. Open the DADF.
2. Remove the platen glass, REP 60.2.
3. Remove the screw of the full-rate carriage from the carriage cable, Figure 1.
a. Move the full-rate carriage (1) to the opening in the frame.
b. Remove the screw (2).
Figure 5 Carriage cable ball-end installation Figure 6 Correct carriage cable turns on the pulley
Note: The figure below shows the number of carriage cable turns at the front and rear, Figure 4. Install the ball end of the carriage cable, Figure 7 :
6.
a. Hang the cable on the idler pulley (1).
b. Hang the cable onto the rear side of the pulley of half-rate carriage (2).
c. Hang the ball on the notch of the frame (3).
Figure 7 Carriage cable ball-end installation Figure 8 Carriage cable spring installation
5. Carriage cable spring installation, Figure 8 : 6. Install the cable to the full-rate carriage, Figure 9 :
a. Peel off the tape that secures the cable (1). a. Remove the tape on the pulley (1).
b. Hang the cable on the pulley (2). b. Move the full-rate carriage to the notch on the frame (2).
c. Hang it onto the front side of the pulley of half-rate carriage (3). c. Attach the cable to the full-rate carriage (3).
d. Hang the cable onto the idler pulley (4).
e. Hang the spring on the cable and attach it to the frame (5).
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 6 0 . 1 2 P l a t e n I n t e r l o c k Sw i tc h R E P 6 0 . 1 3 I I T Re g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r
Parts List on PL 60.5 Parts List on REP 60.5
Removal Removal
1. Remove the front panel assembly, REP 60.17. 1. Remove the IIT rear cover, REP 60.3.
2. Remove the platen interlock switch, Figure 1 : 2. Remove the ESS cooling fan assembly to gain access to the IIT registration sensor bracket screw,
Figure 1 :
a. Disconnect the connector, then open the cable clamp (1).
a. Disconnect the connector (1).
b. Remove the screw (2)
c. Remove the platen interlock switch (3). b. Remove the screw (2).
c. Remove the ESS cooling fan assembly (3).
R E P 6 0 . 1 5 Fu l l - R a t e C a r r i a g e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 60.6
Removal
1. Remove the IIT rear cover, REP 60.3.
2. Disconnect the LED flat cable from the IIT Trans PWB, Figure 1.
R E P 6 0 . 1 6 H a l f - Ra t e C a r r i a g e A s s e m b l y R E P 6 0 . 1 7 To p Fr o n t Co v e r A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 60.6 Parts List on PL 28.4
Removal Removal
The procedure will be available in the next update. 1. Open the DADF.
2. Open the toner cartridge cover.
Replacement
3. Release the top front cover assembly, Figure 1 :
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
a. Remove the stylus pen (1).
Note: Perform ADJ 5.1 Full/Half-rate Carriage Position Adjustment. b. Loosen two screws (2).
c. Remove two screws (3).
R E P 7 0 . 1 Tra y 1 A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 70.1
Removal
1. Fully open Tray1.
2. Open the Left chute cover assembly.
3. Remove the Tray 1 Connector Cover, Figure 1.
a. Remove the screw.
b. Remove the Tray 1 Connector Cover.
Figure 3 j0hs41203
6. Remove the Tray 1 Feed Assembly, Figure 4.
a. Remove the screw (x2).
b. Remove the Tray 1 Feed Assembly.
Figure 1 j0hs41201
4. Remove the Tray 1 Feed Out Chute, Figure 2.
a. Remove the Tray 1 Feed Out Chute.
Figure 4 j0hs41204
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse if the removal procedure.
Figure 2 j0hs41202
5. Disconnect the connector, Figure 3.
a. Disconnect the connector (x2).
R E P 7 0 . 2 Tra y 2 A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 80.4
Removal
1. Remove Tray 2.
2. Open the Left Chute Cover Assembly.
3. Remove the Tray 2 Feed Out Chute, Figure 1.
a. Remove the Tray 2 Feed Out Chute.
NOTE:
Note the position of
the mounting bracket
prior to removal.
1
Remove the mounting screw and
bracket.
2 R E P 7 0 . 5 Tra y 3 C a b l e K i t
Carefully remove the Tray 3 Assembly from Parts List on PL 70.7
the machine.
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Tray 3 Assembly. REP 70.4
3. At the rear of the Tray 3 Assembly, remove (2) cable ends from the pocket of the Lift Shaft, Fig-
ure 1.
a. Remove (2) E-Clips, (2) Wire Guides, and (2) Pulleys.
b. When both sections of the cable are slack, disengage the Lift Shaft from its bracket, and
slide the Pulley on the Lift Shaft to release the cable ends trapped in the pocket underneath
the Pulley.
c. Remove (1) E-Clip, (1) Wire Guide, and (1) Pulley.
d. Disengage the Tray Cable from the Bottom Plate in 2 places and remove the Rear Cable.
1
Lift the outboard edge of the Tray 3
Assembly about 1 inch (25mm) in
order to clear the tray rails.
Replacement
1
1. The replacement is the reverse of the Removal procedure. Remove
these items
to put
slack in
the cable.
2
Slack cable
allows Lift
Shaft to be
disengaged and
Pulley moved,
freeing 2 cable
ends.
Replacement
1. Install the Rear Cable by carrying out the removal steps in reverse order.
2. Reinstall the Tray 3 Assembly on its rails in the copier/printer.
3. Reinstall the bracket, located under the left front corner of the copier/printer.
Replacement
R E P 7 0 . 7 Tra y 4 A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 70.8
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Pull out Tray 4 to the 15 cm position.
3. Remove the screws securing the Tray 4 Transport Assembly to the Tray 4 Assembly, Figure 1.
a. Remove the screws (2).
Note: The screws may be in a slightly different location than shown in the figure.
Note: If the Tray 4 Transport Assembly moves with the Tray 4 Assembly, use your left hand to
support the Transport Assembly as you pull the Tray 4 Assembly out of the copier/printer. You
can then separate the two pieces of equipment after they have been removed from the copier/
printer. If, however, the Tray 4 Transport Assembly stays in place on its rails, then just remove
the Tray 4 Assembly by itself, making replacement easier.
Replacement
1. If necessary, slide the Tray 4 Transport Assembly onto its rails inside the copier/printer.
2. Install the Tray 4 Assembly onto its rails and check to see that the assembly is moving freely on
its rollers.
3. Install the Stopper.
4. Roll the Tray 4 Assembly in to meet up with the Tray 4 Transport Assembly.
Figure 1 Removing the screws securing Tray 4 Transport Assembly 5. Secure the Tray 4 Transport Assembly to the Tray 4 Assembly with (2) screws.
4. Pull Tray 4 further out and remove the paper. 6. Place paper back into Tray 4 and slide Tray 4 back into the copier/printer.
5. Remove the Stopper, Figure 2.
a. Remove the screw.
b. Remove the Stopper.
R E P 7 0 . 8 Tra y 4 C a b l e K i t
Parts List on PL 70.9
Removal
Front cable removal:
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Tray 4 Assembly. REP 70.7
3. Remove the Tray 4 Cover, Figure 1.
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Remove the Tray 4 Cover.
1
Remove the
E-Clip and
slide the
Pulley
forward to
remove the
cable
ends.
5. Remove two E-Clips, two Wire Guides, and two Pulleys.
6. Disengage the Tray Cable from the Bottom Plate in two places and remove the Front Cable.
Rear Cable Removal :
1. At the rear of the Tray 4 Assembly, remove two cable ends from the pocket of the Lift Shaft, Fig-
ure 3.
a. Remove two E-Clips, two Wire Guides, and two Pulleys (1).
1 b. When both sections of the cable are slack, disengage the Lift Shaft from its bracket, and
Remove (4) slide the Pulley on the Lift Shaft to release the cable ends trapped in the pocket underneath
securing screws. the Pulley (2).
Note the screw
that has to be c. Remove the two cable ends from the Lift Shaft.
removed from the d. Disengage the Tray Cable from the Bottom Plate in two places and remove the Rear Cable.
sheet metal of
left side.
4. Remove the two cable ends from the pocket of the Lift Shaft, Figure 2.
a. Remove the E-Clip from the end of the Lift Shaft.
b. Slide the Pulley forward (towards you) on the Lift Shaft.
c. Remove the two cable ends.
R E P 7 0 . 9 Tra y 4 L i f t Co m p o n e n t s
Parts List on
Removal
To be added in coming update
Replacement
2
Slack cable
1 allows Lift
Remove these Shaft to be
items to put disengaged and
slack in the Pulley moved,
cable. freeing two
cable ends.
Replacement
1. Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement Replacement
R E P 7 0 . 1 2 M S I Tra y 5 / By p a s s Fe e d e r
Parts List on PL 70.10
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the MSI Tray 5 / Bypass, PL 70.10 Item 1.
a. Raise the MSI Tray 5 / Bypass.
b. Disconnect the connector to the left side of copier/printer.
c. Open the Lower Cover, PL 70.11 Item 16, of the MSI Tray 5 / Bypass, then remove the (2) se-
curing screws, Figure 1.
d. Grasping the Tray 5 / Bypass firmly with both hands, lift it up and out to remove.
1
Remove the left and
1
Securing
screws (2) 1
Lower
Plate 2
Lower
Cover
3. Place the Tray 5 / Bypass on a flat work surface, and remove the Lower Cover, Figure 2.
a. Remove the left and right UNDERSIDE-MOUNTED screws (1) securing the Lower Plate to the
Front and Rear Brackets.
For The replacement purposes, note the two springs, which are attached to the Lower Cover,
and are held in tension behind the Lower Plate. These springs assure correct (spring-actu-
ated) Lower Cover operation.
4. Working from the right side, remove the Rear Cover 2 and Torsion Spring, Figure 4.
a. Remove the securing screw (1).
b. Gently press down on the Rear Bracket (2).
1
Lift Up
Motor
1
Securing
Screws
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Note: When replacing, enter into Diag. mode and then clear the DC 135 HFSI counter (dC135
HFSI Counter). “Chain Link: 924-826”
R E P 7 0 . 1 3 Tra y 5 By p a s s Co v e r I n t e r l o c k S w i t c h R E P 7 0 . 1 4 Tra y 5 By p a s s Co v e r s
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
To be added in coming update To be added in coming update
Replacement Replacement
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 1 Tra y 1 L i f t / Fe e d M o t o r
Parts List on PL 80.1
Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 2 Tra y 1 Le v e l / N o Pa p e r / Pr e - Fe e d S e n s o r s a n d A c t u a t o r R E P 8 0 . 3 Tra y 1 Fe e d A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 80.1 Parts List on PL 80.2
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update 1. Pull out the Tray1.
2. Open the Left Chute Cover Assembly.
Replacement
3. Remove the Tray 1 Connector Cover, Figure 1.
a. Remove the screw.
b. Remove the Tray 1 Connector Cover.
R E P 8 0 . 4 Tra y 1 Fe e d / N u d g e r / Re t a r d Ro l l K i t
Parts List on PL 80.2
Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 5 Tra y 2 L i f t / Fe e d M o t o r R E P 8 0 . 6 Tra y 2 Le v e l / N o Pa p e r / Pr e - Fe e d S e n s o r s a n d A c t u a t o r
Parts List on PL 80.3 Parts List on PL 80.3
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 7 Tra y 2 Fe e d A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 80.4
Removal
1. Remove Tray 2.
2. Open the Left Chute Cover Assembly.
3. Remove the Tray 2 Feed Out Chute, Figure 1.
a. Remove the Tray 2 Feed Out Chute.
R E P 8 0 . 8 Tra y 2 Fe e d / N u d g e r / Re t a r d Ro l l K i t R E P 8 0 . 9 Re g i s t ra t i o n Tra n s p o r t A s s e m b l y
Parts List on Parts List on PL 80.19
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update 1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Front Cover.
Replacement
3. Open the Transport Drawer, Figure 1.
1 2
Turn release Slide out
handle to the Transport
right Drawer until it
stops
4. If the outboard screw is in the left hole, mark or note the setting of the Skew Adjustment guide
on the outboard frame and be sure to install the Skew Adjustment guide to the same setting,
Figure 2.
3
Remove
screw and
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Front Cover.
3. Open the Transport Drawer, Figure 1.
3 2
Remove the
Remove the handle (2
Inner screws)
Cover
1 2
Turn release Slide out
handle to the Transport
right Drawer until it
stops
4. Remove the Inner Cover, Figure 2.
4
Remove Harness
Clip from
Bracket
2
Remove (push)
P/J out from
Bracket
1
3
Open
Remove screws
(2) and the
Bracket
7. Release Belt Tension, Figure 5.
2
Push Belt
Tensioner down to
release tension
1 3
Loosen Tighten
screw screw
1 R E P 8 0 . 1 1 Tra y 3 Fe e d A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 80.5
Removal
1. Fully open tray 3, then remove the paper.
2. Remove the tray 3 stopper, Figure 1.
a. Loosen the screw (1).
2 b. Unhook the tray3 stopper (2).
Remove Harness
from Harness
Clips (2)
Remove screws
(3) and the
Duplex Motor
Assembly
R E P 8 0 . 1 2 Tra y 3 Fe e d / N u d g e r / Re t a r d Ro l l K i t
Parts List on PL 80.6
Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 1 3 Ta ke a w a y M o t o r 3
Parts List on PL 80.12 Remove
screw and
Removal the
bracket
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. If present, remove the network controller.
3. Remove the rear lower cover, PL 12.2.
2
4. Remove left rear lower and the filter cover, Figure 1. Remove
screws (2)
securing
the filter
case
1
Remove
screw
1 2
Remove the Remove screw and
screw and the the rear lower
filter cover cover
Remove screw
and the
filter case
2
Remove
screws (3)
and the
bracket
3
Remove
screws (2)
and the
Blower
Assembly
7. Remove bracket, Figure 4.
1
Open
Harness
clip and
disconnect
connector
2
Remove
screw
1
Disconnect 2
connector and Remove screws (2)
remove Ground
Strap (1 screw)
10. Remove the IIT LVPS, Figure 7. 11. Remove the T/A Motor, Figure 8.
2 R E P 8 0 . 1 4 Tra y 4 L i f t / Fe e d M o t o r
Remove screws Parts List on
(2) and the T/A
motor Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 1 5 Tra y 4 Le v e l / N o Pa p e r / Pr e - Fe e d S e n s o r s a n d R E P 8 0 . 1 6 Tra y 4 Fe e d A s s e m b l y
Actuator Parts List on PL 80.8
Parts List on Removal
Removal 1. Pull out Tray 4 to the 15 cm position.
The procedure will be in the coming update 2. Lift up Tray 4 Transport Assembly slightly, and push it in, Figure 1.
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 1 9 Tra y 3 / 4 G e a r A s s e m b l y R E P 8 0 . 2 0 Ta ke a w a y Ro l l C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 2 1 Ta ke a w a y Ro l l Fe e d O u t S e n s o r s 2 a n d 4 R E P 8 0 . 2 2 Ta ke a w a y Ro l l 1 A s s e m b l y
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 2 3 Ta ke a w a y Ro l l 2 / 3 / 4 A s s e m b l y R E P 8 0 . 2 4 Le f t Co v e r I n t e r l o c k S w i t c h
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 2 5 Le f t C h u t e Co v e r A s s e m b l y R E P 8 0 . 2 6 L e f t C h u t e P i n c h Ro l l
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 2 7 Le f t Co v e r L a t c h B ra c ke t s a n d H i n g e R E P 8 0. 28 T /A D r ive A sse mb l y
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 2 9 Ta ke a w a y C l u t c h 1 / 2 R E P 8 0 . 3 0 Ta ka w a y Ro l l / B e a r i n g s / B e l t
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 3 1 Tra y 5 / By p a s s C h u t e A s s e m b l y R E P 8 0 . 3 2 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Ta ke Aw a y Ro l l A s s e m b l y
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 3 3 Tra y 5 / By p a s s P i n c h Ro l l a n d S p r i n g R E P 8 0 . 3 4 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Pr e Re g i s t ra t i o n S e n s o r
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 3 5 Tra y 1 Fe e d O u t S e n s o r R E P 8 0 . 3 6 Tra y 5 / By p a s s M S I N u d g e r S o l e n o i d a n d S o l e n o i d
Parts List on Link
Removal Parts List on
Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 3 7 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Fe e d e r Co m p o n e n t s R E P 8 0 . 3 8 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Fe e d Ro l l K i t
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 3 9 Tra y 5 / By p a s s U p p e r Fe e d e r Co m p o n e n t s R E P 8 0 . 4 0 Tra y 5 / By p a s s M S I L i f t U p , N o Pa p e r , Pr e Fe e d S e n -
Parts List on sors and Actuator
Removal Parts List on
Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 4 1 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Lo w e r Fe e d e r Co m p o n e n t s R E P 8 0 . 4 2 D ra w e r L a t c h
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Front Cover.
3. Open the Transport Drawer, Figure 1.
3 2
Remove the
Remove the handle (2
Inner screws)
Cover
1 2
Turn release Slide out
handle to the Transport
right Drawer until it
stops
4. Remove the Inner Cover, Figure 2.
4
Remove Harness
Clip from
Bracket
2
Remove (push)
P/J out from
Bracket
1
3
Open
Remove screws
(2) and the
Bracket
7. Release Belt Tension, Figure 5.
2
Push Belt
Tensioner down to
release tension
1 3
Loosen Tighten
screw screw
2
Remove Harness
from Harness
Clips (2)
Remove screws
(3) and the
Duplex Motor
Assembly
Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 4 4 Fu s e r E n t r a n c e S e n s o r R E P 8 0. 45 D upl e x M o t o r B e l t an d Pul l ey
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
Replacement Replacement
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 5 0 P r e Re g i s t r a t i o n M o t o r A s s e m b l y R E P 8 0 . 5 1 P r e Re g i s t r a t i o n S l i d e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 5 2 Re g i s t r a t i o n Ro l l R E P 8 0 . 5 3 Re g i s t r a t i o n M o t o r
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 5 6 P r e Re g i s t r a t i o n a n d P i n c h Ro l l s R E P 8 0 . 5 7 P r e Re g i s t r a t i o n S e n s o r
Parts List on Parts List on
Removal Removal
The procedure will be in the coming update The procedure will be in the coming update
Replacement Replacement
R E P 8 0 . 5 8 Va c u u m Tra n s p o r t A s s e m b l y R E P 8 0 . 5 9 Tra n s p o r t B e l t
Parts List on PL 80.25 Parts List on PL 80.25
Removal Removal
1. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord. 1. Switch off the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Fuser, REP 10.1. 2. Remove the vacuum transport assembly, REP 80.58.
3. Remove the Roller, Figure 1.
Note: This removal procedure can be done without removing the Fuser. Removing the Fuser will
however give you a little more room to remove the Vacuum Transport Assembly.
3. Remove the Vacuum Transport Assembly, Figure 1.
1
Remove
screws
(2)
2
3
Remove
the
Vacuum
Transport Remove the Roller
Assembly from the
V-Transport
Assembly
4. Remove the transport belt, Figure 2.
Remove Transport
Belt from the
V-Transport
Assembly
R E P 9 0 . 1 Tra n s fe r B e l t U n i t
Parts List on PL 90.14
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Front Cover.
3. Open the Transfer Module (Figure 1).
2
1 Slide out the
Push in the Left and Right Transfer Module until
Rail stoppers it stops
5. Open the Handles on the Drum Cartridge Module and the IBT Drawer, Figure 3.
2 1
Slide out the Turn Release
Transfer Module Handle to the
until it stops right
4. Push in Rail stops and slide out Transfer Module completely (Figure 2).
7. To prevent waste toner spillage, remove the IBT Cleaner Assembly, PL 90.14 Item 1, before rais-
3 ing the Transfer Belt Unit to a vertical position
Remove Screws
(2) 8. Remove the Transfer Belt Unit, Figure 5.
Extend the
Transfer Belt
Support Arm and
put the Transfer
Belt Unit on the
back.1.
10. Remove the IBT Cleaner Assembly, if necessary, PL 90.14 Item
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1. Ensure that the white stud is positioned in the frame cut-out. Figure 7.
9. Extend the Transfer Belt Support Arm and put the Transfer Belt Unit on the back, (Figure 6.
Verify position
of the white
stud
R E P 9 0 . 2 I BT C l e a n e r A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 90.14
Removal
1. Switch off the the machine, GP 19, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Perform REP 90.1, Transfer Belt Unit, steps 1 through 6.
3. Lift and secure the Transfer Belt Unit using the Retract Shaft, Figure 1.
1
Lift the Transfer
Belt Unit using the
Front IBT handle
2
Pull IBT Cleaner Assembly
1 towards the front of the
Remove screws machine to remove the
(2) Assembly
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2
Secure the Transfer
Belt Unit with the
Retract Shaft
R E P 9 0 . 3 Tra n s fe r B e l t
Parts List on PL 90.14
Removal
1. Remove the IBT Cleaner Assembly, REP 90.2.
2. Remove the Transfer Belt Unit, REP 90.1.
3. Remove the Inlet, Figure 1.
2
Remove Support 1
Assembly Remove screws
(2)
2
1 Pull Inlet
Remove upward to
screw remove Inlet
Use 5.5 mm
driver and
turn the cam
clockwise
until the cam
locks in
place
R E P 9 0 . 4 2 n d BT R Ro l l A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 90.19
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Front Cover.
3. Open the Transfer Module, Figure 1.
2
Slide out
the
Transfer
Module
until it
stops
1
Push in the
Left and Right
Rail stoppers
2 1
Slide out the Turn Release
Transfer Module Handle to the
until it stops right
4. Push in Rail stops and slide out Transfer Module completely, Figure 2.
2 3
Remove the Remove the
handle (2 Inner Cover
screws)
1
Disconnect
connector
1 2 3
Remove the Disconnect Open cable
Indicator by connector tie
pulling it of from
the shaft
2
Remove screw and lift out the 2nd
BTR Assembly
Replacement
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 9 0 . 5 2 n d BT R Ro l l
Parts List on PL 90.12
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the 2nd BTR Assembly, REP 90.4.
3. Disconnect connector and release Wire Harness, Figure 1.
2
Release Wire
Harness from Wire
Clamps
1
Disconnect
connector
1 3 2
Remove the Remove gears Remove
Spring (2) E-clip
5
Remove 2nd BTR
Roll
4 2
Remove Front 3 Remove
Arm Remove E-Ring 1
Screw Remove
Spring
R E P 9 0 . 6 2 n d BT R B l a d e A s s e m b l y
Parts List on PL 90.21
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the 2nd BTR Assembly, PL 90.4.
3. Disconnect connector and release Wire Harness, Figure 1.
1 2
Disconnect Release Wire
connector Harness from
Wire Clamps
1 4
Disconnect Release the HVPS from the
connectors mounting stud and remove
(2) the 1st BTR HVPS
1
Remove springs (2)
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
2 3
Disconnect
connectors Remove
(4) screw
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Front Cover.
3. Open the IBT Drawer and Drum Cartridge Module handles, Figure 1.
1 2
Open the Open the Handle
Handle on the on the Drum
IBT Drawer Cartridge Module
2
1
Slide out the Drum
Cartridge Module
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Toner Cartridges and the Toner Cartridge Cover, Figure 1.
2
Loosen screws (2) and
remove the Toner
Cartridge Cover
Disconnect
connectors (2)
1
Remove Toner
Cartridges (5)
Remove screws
(4)
1 2
Open the IBT Drawer Open the Drum Cartridge
Handle Module Handle
9. Open the IBT Drawer and Drum Cartridge Module handles, Figure 7.
1 2
Slide out the Lift and remove
Drum Cartridge the Dispenser
Module Assembly
Replacement
Remove screws
(2) and the
Main - K Duct
4. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (K), Figure 2.
R E P 9 0. 11 D eve l o p er Dr ive A s s em bl y ( K ) a n d Be l t s
Parts List on PL 40.1
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Chassis Assembly, REP 3.1.
1 3. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (K), REP 90.10.
Disconnect
Connectors 4. Remove the Tension Bracket, Figure 1.
(2)
2 3
Remove screws Gently pull out the Drum
(3) Motor Assembly
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Remove screws
(3) and the
Tension Bracket
5. Remove the Gear Bracket, Figure 2.
Remove screws
(2) and the
Gear Bracket
1 2
Disconnect Remove Harness from Harness
connector Clips (3)
6. Disconnect connector and release Wire Harness from Harness Clips, Figure 3.
Remove the
Belt from the
Pulley
Loosen screws
and move
brackets to
loosen Belt
8. Remove the Belt from the Pulley, Figure 5. tension 9. Remove the Rear Cooling Fan and Duct, Figure 6.
1 The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Ensure that belts and harnesses are
Disconnect routed correctly.
connector
2
Remove screws
(2) and the
Fan and Duct
RE P 9 0 . 1 2 D e vel o p e r D ri ve A s s e mb l y ( Y , M , C )
Parts List on PL 40.2
Removal Remove
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord. screws
(2) and
2. Open the Chassis Assembly, REP 3.3. the V -
Transport
3. Remove the Main K-Duct, Figure 1. Duct
Remove screws
(2) and the
Main K - Duct
Remove screws
(2) and the Y, M
1 2 Cooling Duct
Remove Remove screws
screws (2) (2) and the 7. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (C), Figure 5.
and Fuser Bracket
Duct
6. Remove the Y, M Cooling Duct, Figure 4.
1 1
Disconnect
Disconnect connectors (2)
connectors (2)
2 3 2 3
Release Harness Remove screws (3) Release Harness Remove screws (3) and
from Harness and the Drum Motor from Harness the Drum Motor
Clips (2) Assembly (C) Clip Assembly (M)
8. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (M), Figure 6. 9. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (Y), Figure 7.
2
Remove screws (2)
and the Drum Motor
YMC PWB
11. Remove the Developer Drive Assembly (Y, M, C), Figure 9.
2
Remove screws (3) and the Drum
Motor Assembly (M)
2 1 TAG001
Remove screws Disconnect When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology
(3) connectors (2) for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070.
The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components.
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove Tray 5 / Bypass, REP 70.12.
3. Disconnect the HCF connector and remove the Left Upper Cover, REP 28.2.
4. Remove the Transfer Belt Assembly, REP 90.3.
5. Push in the Transfer Module.
6. Remove the Drum Cartridges, REP 90.8.
7. Release first stop on the left side, Figure 1.
2
Remove screws (5) and the
Developer Drive Assembly
(Y, M, C)
Replacement
Release stop and
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. pull drawer out
slightly
Disconnect
connector
R E P 9 0. 14 D eve l o p er Ho u s in g ( C ,M ,Y ,K )
Parts List on PL 90.6
TAG001
When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology
for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070.
The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components.
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Drum Cartridges, REP 90.8.
3. Release first stop on the right side, Figure 1.
1 2
Remove screw Remove bracket
and MOB ADC
Assembly
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Release stop and
pull drawer out
slightly
1 2 3
Slide cover Remove screws Lift Inner
forward (3) Cover up and
remove
Disconnect connector on
the Developer Housing(s)
to be removed.
9. Remove the Developer Housing(s), Figure 7.
1
Cover the opening on the Developer Housings
with a sheet of paper
3 2
Remove the Loosen screw and remove Bracket(s)
Developer on the Developer Housing(s) to be
Housing(s) removed.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 9 0 . 1 5 D e v e l o p e r Re p l a c e m e n t
Parts List on PL 90.6
TAG001
When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology
for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070.
The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components.
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Developer Housing, REP 90.14.
3. Remove screws, Figure 1.
Remove
Cover (4
snap locks)
WARNING: Carefully dispose of any material remaining in the Developer Housing.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
1. Add Developer, Figure 1.
Remove screws
(2)
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Dispenser Assembly, REP 90.6.
3. Remove one screw on the front of the Dispenser Assembly, Figure 1.
1
Add Developer 2
material evenly Turn Drive Pulley
into the Housing clockwise while
adding material
2. Install Developer Housing using theremoval procedure in, REP 90.14.
3. If the Developer Housing was replaced, perform the ADJ 9.2, ATC Sensor Setup.
4. Reset HFSI Counter. Refer to SCP 3 Detailed Maintenance Activities, for the Developer that was Remove screw
replaced:
• 954-805 (Yellow/Yellow-Flourescent/Clear - Y/Y-Flou/Clear)
• 954-806 (Magenta/Magenta-Flourescent/Silver - M/M-Flou/Silver)
• 954-807 (Cyan/Cyan-Flourescent/White - C/C-Flou/White)
• 954-808 (Black/Gold - K/Gold)
Slide Guide
Remove screw out to
remove
5. Remove the Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB (K), Figure 3. 7. Disconnect connectors, Figure 6.
2
Disconnect connector
and release harness
from harness clips
1 3
Disconnect Remove screws (2)
connector and and move Toner
release harness Cartridge CRUM PWB
from harness to the side
clips
Disconnect connectors
(2)
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Dispenser Assembly, REP 90.6.
3. Remove the (K) Dispenser, REP 90.16.
4. Remove front screw, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Remove screw
Disconnect
connectors
2
Disconnect
connectors
(2)
1
Remove screw
6. Remove the (C) Dispenser, Figure 3. 8. If replacing the C Dispenser, remove the Low Toner Sensor PWB, REP 90.20, then re-install it on
the new C Dispenser.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Dispenser Assembly, REP 90.6.
3. Remove the Guide, Figure 1.
Remove screw
2
Remove screws (2)
and move Toner
Cartridge CRUM PWB
to the side
Slide Guide
out to
remove
1
Disconnect
connector and
release harness
from harness
clips
3
Move harness
to the side
1 2
Remove screw Disconnect
connectors
(2)
Replacement
Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Dispenser Assembly, REP 90.6.
3. Remove the Guide, Figure 1.
Remove screw
2
Remove screws (2)
and move Toner
Cartridge CRUM PWB
to the side
Slide Guide
out to
remove
1
Disconnect
connector and
release harness
from harness
clips
2
Disconnect
connectors
(2)
1
Remove screw
Replacement
R E P 9 0 . 2 0 Lo w To n e r S e n s o r P W B R E P 9 0 . 2 1 Lo w To n e r S e n s o r ( K )
Parts List on PL 90.3 Parts List on PL 90.4
TAG001 TAG001
When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology
for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070. for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070.
The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components. The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components.
Removal Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord. 1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Dispenser Assembly, REP 90.6. 2. Remove the (K) Dispenser, REP 90.16.
3. Remove the (K) Dispenser, REP 90.16. 3. Remove the Low Toner Sensor, Figure 1.
4. Remove the (C) Dispenser, REP 90.17.
Note: The Low Toner Sensor can be removed without removing the Dispenser completely.
5. Remove the Low Toner Sensor PWB, Figure 1.
Replacement
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 9 0 . 2 2 Lo w To n e r S e n s o r ( C ) R E P 9 0 . 2 3 Lo w To n e r S e n s o r ( M )
Parts List on PL 90.4 Parts List on PL 90.6
TAG001 TAG001
When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology
for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070. for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070.
The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components. The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components.
Removal Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord. 1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the (C) Dispenser, REP 90.17. 2. Remove the (M) Dispenser, REP 90.18.
3. Remove the Low Toner Sensor, Figure 1. 3. Remove the Low Toner Sensor, Figure 1.
Note: The Low Toner Sensor can be removed without removing the Dispenser completely. Note: The Low Toner Sensor can be removed without removing the Dispenser completely.
Remove screws
Remove screws (2) and the
(2) and the Low Toner
Low Toner Sensor
Sensor
Replacement Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord. 1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Y Dispenser, REP 90.19. 2. Open the Chassis Assembly, REP 3.1.
3. Remove the Low Toner Sensor, Figure 1. 3. Remove the Drum Motor Assembly (K), REP 90.10.
4. Remove the Developer Drive Assembly (K), REP 90.11.
Note: The Low Toner Sensor can be removed without removing the Dispenser completely.
5. Remove the Cleaning Motor Assembly, Figure 1.
Remove screws
(2) and the
Low Toner
Sensor
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 9 0 . 2 6 To n e r D i s p e n s e r C l e a n i n g Pr o c e d u r e
Parts List on PL 90.2
TAG001 GENTLY
When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology lift
for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070. Locking
Tabs (2
The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components. front; 2
rear)
Removal
Note: This is a dirty procedure. Take precautions to keep the customer’s area clean.
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the Dispensor Assembly, REP 90.3.
3. Remove the Motor Assembly and Gear, Figure 1.
CAUTION: The spring on the rear agitator is very fragile. Use care when removing.
1
GENTLY
pull
Agitator
to unsnap
from Gear
end
3
1 Remove
Remove the the
screws (2) Gear
2
Remove the Motor
Assembly
Note
4. Gently lift the locking tabs (2 front, 2 rear), Figure 2.
7. Remove the rear Agitator by pulling back from the Gear. Note the orientation, Figure 4.
8. Vacuum the toner from underneath the Agitators, and from the surface of the Agitators.
9. Carefully unsnap the Gear and remove the Auger, Figure 5.
Remove screws
(2) and V
duct
1 2
Remove screws (2) and Remove screws (2) and Remove
Fuser Duct bracket screws (2)
and Y,M Duct
6. Remove the Y,M Cooling Duct, Figure 4. 7. Loosen the idler screw and remove the drive belt, Figure 5.
11. Pull out the Drum Drawer and cover the drums to protect them from light shock, Figure 8.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
R E P 9 0 . 2 8 Y , M , C B i a s C h a r g e Ro l l H V P S R E P 9 0. 29 ( C ) D e vel o p e r B ia s HV P S
Parts List on PL 1.2 Parts List on PL 1.2
TAG001 TAG001
When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology When working with special toner machines, refer to 001, Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology
for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070. for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070.
The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components. The following procedures are to be used for all toner color components.
Removal Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord. 1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Open the Chassis Assembly, REP 3.1. 2. Open the Chassis Assembly, REP 3.1.
3. Remove the Y, M, C Bias Charge Roll HVPS, Figure 1. 3. Remove the (C) Developer Bias HVPS, Figure 1.
2
Remove the cable from the
cable restraint.
3
Release the
1
Disconnect the 4
three connectors. Remove the (C)
Developer Bias
1 HVPS from the
Disconnect the machine.
two connectors.
3
Release the
4
Remove the
screw from the
ground.
5
Remove the Y, M, C
Bias Charge Roll
HVPS from the
machine.
2
VIEW FROM INSIDE BACK PANEL VIEW FROM INSIDE BACK PANEL Remove the screw from the
ground.
Replacement Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal Removal
1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord. 1. Switch off the machine, then disconnect the power cord.
2. Disconnect the Tray 5/Bypass connector, Figure 1.
Note: The Magenta and Y Developer Bias HVPS are located inboard of the Main LVPS and the
AC Power Supply.
2. Remove the AC Power Supply, REP 1.1.
3. Remove the M Developer Bias HVPS or Y Developer Bias HVPS, Figure 1.
1 NOTE:
Disconnect the Both the M Developer Bias HVPS
and the Y Developer Bias HVPS
are removed in the same way.
4
M Developer
Bias HVPS
Remove the M
Developer Bias
HVPS from the
1
machine. Lift up the
2 Tray
Remove the
screw from the
5/Bypass.
ground.
3
Release the
2
Disconnect
the
connector.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. 3. Remove the Tray 5/Bypass mounting screws, Figure 2.
K
Developer
2 Bias HVPS
Remove the two mounting Area
screws.
1
Open the spring-loaded
Lower Cover.
1
Remove the two mounting screws and
remove the cover.
Replacement
Note: The IIT LVPS must first be removed to gain access to the 2nd BTR HVPS.
2. Remove the IIT LVPS, REP 1.3.
3. Remove the 2nd BTR HVPS, Figure 1.
4
Remove the 2nd BTR
HVPS from the
machine.
3
Release the three
quick-release tabs
from around the
perimeter of the
1 2nd BTR HVPS.
Disconnect the
2
Remove the ground
screw.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
A D J 2 . 1 U I To u c h Pa n e l O r i g i n Co r r e c t i o n
To align the position of the buttons on the display and the Touch Panel so that the user can select
the contents on the display using the Touch Panel.
Perform this adjustment when the UI PWB and the Control Panel are replaced.
Note: To adjust, use the attached stylus pen and be careful not to damage the UI surface.
1. Switch off the machine, GP 19. Wait for the UI Console to completely shut down.
2. Press and hold the [0], [1], and [3] keys on the Control Panel while turning ON the machine.
3. Release the key when [1/6] is displayed, Figure 1.
Figure 4 Touch intersection response Figure 5 origin point correction save screen
• For each touched intersection, the point number is sequentially increased by 1 through 9. 7. If the correction has failed, the following screen appears, Figure 6.
6. After touching P9, Origin Point Correction is carried out and the following screen will appear for
a moment when the corrected data has been saved, Figure 5.
Figure 6 origin point correction failed screen Figure 7 Origin point correction complete screen
8. Upon Origin Point Correction completion, the following screen will display, Figure 7 : 9. If correction the fails, repeat Steps 1 to 9 again.
• Touch the 4 circled intersections. (In any order). A black box will be displayed on the part
which is touched and remains until the next input
• The buzzer sounds when the correction is complete -> Origin Point Correction complete.
• The buzzer does not sound if the correction has failed -> Perform correction again.
A D J 5 . 1 Fu l l / H a l f Ra t e C a r r i a g e Po s i t i o n A d j u s t m e n t
Parts List on PL 60.6
Adjust the position of the Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage.
WARNING: Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the
power cordfrom the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electric-
ity. Electricitycan cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the DADF by 90 degrees, and secure at position.
2. Remove the platen glass, REP 60.4.
3. Remove four screws, them remove the lens cover.
4. Remove the two red screws securing the jigs, then remove the jigs, Figure 1.
Note: The red screws will be used to install the jigs in the following procedure.
Figure 5 Full rate carriage jig installation Figure 6 Correct jig hole indentification
Note: The Full Rate Carriage Jig hole should use the right side hole (printed as 1 on the ma- 9. If unable to install the Jig because the Jig hole cannot be aligned, loosen the fixing screw of the
chine), see arrow, Figure 6. Carriage Cable, Figure 7 :
a. Loosen the screw.
b. Move the Full Rate Carriage to align the Jig hole.
c. Tighten the screw.
A D J 5 . 2 I I T L e a d E d g e Re g i s t r a t i o n
To adjust the IIT scan timing in the Slow Scan direction and to correct the copy position.
CAUTION: Avoid using this procedure when performing the adjustment of the Lead
Edge Registration. This procedure should be performed only when the actual IIT Regi
is not appropriate. This is because the IIT Lead Edge Registration affects the precision
of the document size detection, etc.
Note: Before performing this procedure, make sure that the IOT Lead Edge Registration is appro-
priate. (See ADJ 9.20 System Registration Adjustment.)
1. Place the Test Chart (499T 00283) on the Platen Glass correctly and make a copy in the follow-
ing copy mode:
• Copy Mode: Black
• Paper Size: A3
• Reduce/Enlarge: 100%
• No. of copies: 2
2. 10.0 +/-1.6 mm or the same as the dimension on the Test Chart, Figure 1.
Note: Before performing this procedure, make sure that the IOT Lead Edge Registration is appro-
priate. (See ADJ 9.20 System Registration Adjustment.)
1. Load A3 paper into Tray 2.
2. Place the Test Chart (499T 00283) on the Platen Glass correctly and make a copy in the follow-
ing copy mode:
• Copy Mode: Black
• Paper Tray: Tray 2
• Reduce/Enlarge: 100%
• No. of copies: 2
3. 10.0 +/-2.1 mm or the same as the dimension on the Test Chart, Figure 1.
Note: This adjustment may cause the following secondary problem to occur.
• RGB does not overlap, causing a color shift.
1. Enter dC131 [715-051].
2. Change the value.
• 1 step: 0.1%
• Increment of the value: Enlargement direction
Note: Before carrying out the "White reference adjustment", "CCD calibration", make sure the IIT
Lead Edge Registration, ADJ 5.2 and IIT Side Edge Registration, ADJ 5.3 are correct.
If the spec is not satisfied, perform ADJ 5.1 Full/Half Rate Carriage Position Adjustment.
And, then perform "White Reference Adjustment" and "CCD Calibration".
Note: If you are replacing a lens unit, before replacing the lens unit, make sure the IIT Lead Edge
Registration, ADJ 5.2 and IIT Side Edge Registration, ADJ 5.3 are correct.
If the spec is not satisfied, perform ADJ 5.1 Full/Half Rate Carriage Position Adjustment.
Then, replace the Lens Unit and perform Optical Axis Correction. And, then perform "White Refer-
ence Adjustment" and "CCD Calibration".
<White Reference Adjustment>
Note: Initializing the NVM will cause the value of dC131 [716-131] to revert to "1: J Paper" or
the parameter value in "0: Use NVM Individual Paper Coefficient". If you implement the NVM
initialization, set it to the setting value of the paper to be used, or perform a White Reference
Adjustment - Side 2.
1. Enter Diag Mode and select DC945 (IIT Calibration).
2. Select [Side 2 Shading Correction].
3. Set 2 sheets of new white paper (A3 or 11"x17") to DADF, and press [Start].
Note: During CIS replacement, use J paper and change [716-131] to '1'. When performing im-
age quality adjustment, perform Side 2 Shading Correction using the same paper without
changing [716-131] after White Reference Adjustment - Side 2 is performed, or if the paper to
be used can be selected in [716-131], re-enter [716-131] and perform Side 2 shading. However,
even if White Reference Adjustment - Side 2 was performed in advance, [716-131] should be set
to '10', before Side 2 shading implementation when using inch-based paper.
4. After scanning is completed, [OK] or [NG] will be displayed depending on whether the Shading
DATA retrieval has succeeded or failed.
Figure 1 Adjustment nut rotation 5. If it has failed, clean the Color CIS and perform the [Side 2 Shading Correction] again.
6. After adjustment, perform [Optical Axis Correction] again. 6. Press the [End] button.
7. Perform Steps 2 -7 until the result is OK.
<White Reference Adjustment - Side 2>
Note: If the result is [OK], the operation can be completed even if the number of rotations is 1. Enter Diag Mode and select DC945 (IIT Calibration).
still displayed.
2. Select [White Reference Adjustment - Side 2].
<Side 2 Shading Correction>
3. Set a single new white sheet of A3 or 11"x17" to DADF, and press [Start].
Before carrying out the Side 2 Shading Correction, it is necessary to set the dC131 [716-131] DADF
paper code. If you implement White Reference Adjustment - Side 2 in advance, 716-131 is auto- Note: If you run without any paper loaded, it will Abort.
matically switched to 0, and the calculated value was already entered into NVM716-132 to 134 (in-
dividual paper response correction amount). However, even if carrying out White Reference Note: Even if it is a blank sheet do not use paper that is recycled or the Rear side has been
Adjustment - Side 2 in advance, it is necessary to set 716-131 to 10 before Side 2 shading, when us- used.
ing inch-based paper. 4. When the reading is complete, 1/10 the value of the Correction Coefficient for the paper used is
displayed on White Reference Adjustment - Side 2 screen.
The setting values are as follows:
Note: When White Reference Adjustment - Side 2 is completed 716-131 is set to 0, and the Cor-
dC131 [716-131] rection Coefficient of the paper used in 716-132 to 134 is stored.
Default setting: 1 <CCD Calibration - Side 2>
• 0: NVM individual paper coefficient used (716-132 to 134) (value when White Reference Adjust-
ment - Side 2 has been performed) 1. Enter Diag Mode and select DC945 (IIT Calibration).
• 1: J Paper (factory adjustment value: CIS standard) A3 2. Select [CCD Calibration - Side 2].
• 2: P Paper A3 3. Face the front surface of the color chart (499T 00276) downward, set in DADF, and press [Start].
*2: List containing the NVM factory default setting values that is bundled with the machine. 716 58 Factory Default 0 255 146 O Factory
Table 1 NVM List (related to White Reference Adjustment) SD Data B Color Default
Correction
Setting Range NVM Default Coefficient
Value
Setting List 716 59 Factory Default 0 255 144 O Factory
De- *2 SD Data G Color Default
Mini- Maxi- fault O: Recorded Correction
Value X: Not Coefficient
Chai- Lin- mum mum
n k Contents Value Value *1 recorded Remarks 716 60 Factory Default 0 255 142 O Factory
SD Data R Color Default
White Reference Adjustment Related
Correction
Coefficient
715 92 W-Ref Correc- 70 255 140 O Factory
tion Coefficient Default 716 131 Paper Code 0 10 0 X The factory
Red Setting default set-
ting is "1: J
715 93 W-Ref Correc- 70 255 140 O Factory
Paper".
tion Coefficient Default
Green
A D J 5 . 6 DA D F H e i g h t A d j u s t m e n t 3. Loosen the nut of the Right Counter Balance and turn the screw to adjust the position of the
DADF such that the gap of the foot on the right in front is less than 0.5 mm, Figure 3.
To correct the feeding of the original by adjusting the height of the DADF. Turning the screw in direction D will cause the front of the DADF to rise and the rear to fall.
1. Check the gap between the DADF Platen Guide and the Platen Glass or DADF Platen Glass, Fig- Turning the screw in direction E will cause the front of the DADF to fall and the rear to rise.
ure 1.
a. Looking from the front of the DADF Platen Guide, the Bearing B (x2) at the Left Platen Roll
should be in contact with the Platen Glass.
b. Foot A (protrusions) (x2) at the front of the DADF Platen Guide should be in contact with the
Platen Glass.
A D J 5 . 7 DA D F L e a d S k e w A d j u s t m e n t
To correct the feeding of the original by adjusting the position of the DADF. (DADF Lead-Skew,
Perpendicularity)
Adjust the CVT (Side 1) and the CIS for both sides simultaneous reading (Side 2).
Note: The following adjustments must be made before carrying out checking and adjustment.
• System Registration Adjustment (ADJ 9.20)
• IIT lead edge/side registration (ADJ 5.3)
• DADF Height Adjustment, ADJ 5.6.
Note: CIS's Lead Skew adjustment, is performed after CVT's Lead Skew adjustment.
Note:
• When the adjustment test is started, change the DADF travel mode to [normal mode (looped
mode)].
[The default setting is silent mode (no loop mode)]
There are 2 methods to make this change as follows. Perform either one.
– Change method 1: In Administrator authentication or CE mode [System Settings] -> [Com-
mon Service Settings] -> [Other Settings] -> [Document Feeder Quiet Mode] -> select [Dis-
abled] (Loops) in [Copy].
– How to change 2: Change NVM 785-056(Copy) to [0 Normal mode]. (Default Value: 1)
[Reference NVM: 785-057 (Fax), NVM: 785-058 (Scan)]
After making a change, select [Reboot].
• After completion of the adjustment test, return the DADF travel mode to the default setting.
Note:
• To perform this manual adjustment, turn off factory default correction. Figure 1 Lead skew
[Factory default correction is On by default] 4. When carrying out the Lead Skew adjustment, compare the average difference of dimensions C,
– Change method: Change NVM 715-342 to [0: Do not perform factory default correction]. D for 3 copy sheets, and the specified value below
*: Do not return the above NVM to [Default value: 1 Perform factory default correction] after this Lead Skew Side1 specified value: 1.7 mm or less
adjustment. If the value is not specified, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
<Side1> <Side1>
1. Set the Test chart 499T 00247 with the reading surface (A3) faced on top, and so there is no 1. Calculate the Lead Skew adjustment amount.
gap between the Guide of the DADF. Determine the DADF adjustment value from the difference between the C, D dimensions, Figure
2. Take a copy by setting the following conditions. 3.
Color Mode: "Black" [e.g.change by 2 Scale marks for 1.0 mm adjustment.]
Paper Tray: "A3" [Reference: For 1 Scale mark change, the Lead Skew changes by about 0.5 mm]
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%" 2. Enable the opening and closing of the DADF at 90 degrees, Figure 2 :
No. of copies: "3" a. Remove the Screw (2) of Left Counter Balance, and remove the bracket.
2 Sided Printing: 1 -> 1-sided
b. Remove the Screw (2) of Right Counter Balance, and remove the bracket. (Figure instruction
3. The difference of dimensions C, D from the leading edge of the 3rd copy sheet, is the Lead Skew omitted)
amount, Figure 1.
2. Take a copy by setting the following conditions. 2. Remove the DADF Front Cover, REP 5.3.
Color Mode: "Black" 3. Move the CIS in the A or B direction to adjust the position of the CIS with respect to the DADF,
Figure 7.
Paper Tray: "A3"
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%" a. Loosen the Screw so CIS moves.
No. of copies: "3" b. Move the CIS in the A or B direction, while checking the Scale mark.
2 Sided Printing: 2 -> 1-sided
3. The difference of dimensions C, D from the leading edge of the 3rd copy sheet, is the Lead Skew
amount, Figure 6.
4. When carrying out the Lead Skew adjustment, compare the average difference of dimensions C,
D for 3 copy sheets, and the specified value below
Lead Skew Side2 specified value: 2.2 mm or less
If the value is not specified, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
A D J 5 . 8 DA D F Le a d i n g Ed g e Re g i s t ra t i o n ( 1 Pa s s )
To set the DADF Scan Position (original scan position) Lead Edge (Slow Scan Direction).
Note: The following adjustments must be made before carrying out checking and adjustment.
• System Registration Adjustment (ADJ 9.20)
• IIT lead edge/side registration (ADJ 5.3)
• DADF Height Adjustment (ADJ 5.6)
• DADF Lead Skew Adjustment (ADJ 5.7)
Note:
• When the adjustment test is started, change the DADF travel mode to [normal mode (looped
mode)].
See the notes of ADJ 5.7 DADF Lead Skew adjustment for how to change.
• After completion of the adjustment test, return the DADF travel mode to the default setting.
<Side1>
1. Set the Test chart 499T 00247 with the reading surface (A3) faced on top, and so there is no
gap between the Guide of the DADF.
2. Set the following conditions, and take a copy, and this will be the original.
Color Mode: "Black"
Paper Tray: "A3"
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%"
No. of copies: "5"
2 Sided Printing: 1 -> 1-sided
3. Measure the value from the document leading edge to the reference point (part A of the dia-
Figure 9 Direction B lead skew adjustment gram) of the output 3rd copy, Figure 1.
Check that the measured value is within the specified value.
e. Tighten the Screw, which was loosened in (1).
If the value is not specified, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
4. Restore the DADF Front Cover.
Lead Regi Side1 specified value: 10+/-2.0 mm
5. After adjustment, perform DADF Side Registration, ADJ 5.9, and DADF Lead edge Registration,
ADJ 5.8.
1 711- For all reading speeds Does not affect the other adjustment values.
140
<Side2>
1. Set the Test chart 499T 00247 with the reading surface (A3) faced down, and so there is no gap
between the Guide of the DADF.
2. Set the following conditions, and take a copy, and this will be the original.
Color Mode: "Black"
Paper Tray: "A3"
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%"
No. of copies: "5"
2 Sided Printing: 2 -> 1-sided
3. For the Side2 copy of the 3rd output sheet, measure the value from the leading edge of the
document to the reference point (A in the figure), Figure 2.
Check that the measured value is within the specified value.
If the value is not specified, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
Lead Regi Side2 specified value: 10+/-2.3 mm
Note:
• In this DADF, rewriting NVM711-140, does not rewrite NVM711-001 to 711-002.
To change the correction value for each reading speed, enter a correction value for each
reading speed to [NVM: 711-001 to 002]. Adjustment is not made for each speed by default.
1 716- For all reading speeds Does not affect the other adjustment values.
067
Note:
• When rewriting NVM 716-067, NVM 716-090 to 716-091 are also rewritten to the same
value.
To change the correction value for each reading speed, enter a correction value for each
reading speed to [NVM: 716-090 to 091].Adjustment is not made for each speed by default.
A D J 5 . 9 DA D F S i d e R e g i s t r a t i o n
To set the DADF Scan Position (original scan position) Side Edge (Fast Scan Direction).
Note: The following adjustments must be made before carrying out checking and adjustment.
• System Registration Adjustment (ADJ 9.20)
• IIT lead edge/side registration (ADJ 5.3)
• DADF Height Adjustment (ADJ 5.6)
• DADF Lead Skew Adjustment (ADJ 5.7)
Note: DADF Side Registration can also be adjusted using the NVM for every paper width.
Note:
• When the adjustment test is started, change the DADF travel mode to [normal mode (looped
mode)].
See the notes of ADJ 5.7 DADF Lead Skew adjustment for how to change.
• After completion of the adjustment test, return the DADF travel mode to the default setting.
<Side1>
1. Set the Test chart 499T 00247 with the reading surface (A3) faced on top, and so there is no
gap between the Guide of the DADF.
2. Set the following conditions, and take a copy, and this will be the original.
Color Mode: "Black"
Paper Tray: "A3"
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%"
No. of copies: "2"
2 Sided Printing: 1 -> 1-sided
Figure 1 Side 1 check
3. Fold the output 2nd sheet copy into 2, then check the central reference line of the test chart
copy, and deviation of the fold trace, Figure 1. 4. Check that the fold line is within the specified value, in relation to the reference line. If the value
is not specified, carry out the following adjustment procedure. (Perform adjustment of <Side1>)
Side Regi Side1 specified value: +/-2.5 mm
<Side1>
1. Enter Diag mode. Select dC131 (NVM Read/Write).
2. Adjust "NVM715-110"* so that measurement of the center line deviation (A) is within spec. The
following are for CVT-Side1. (For CIS-Side2, it is in the opposite direction)
• If the center line in the test chart is to the right of the center line in the copy: Set a larger
value.
• If the center line in the test chart is to the left of the center line in the copy: Set a smaller
value.
(1 Step in NVM = 0.1 mm)
3. Check the adjustment result and perform a re-adjustment.
Repeat Check Steps 1 to 5 and Adjustment Steps 1 to 2 until the measurement is within the
specified range.
4. "NVM715-110" to "NVM711-272" also.
*: NVM715-110 is rewritten by the value of NVM711-272 of DADF at Power-ON.
[NVM: 715-056 to 072].
All sizes are adjusted together by default.
6 715-064 215.9 mm Half letter LEF (5.5x8.5 inch LEF), Letter SEF
(8.5x11 inch SEF), Legal SEF (8.5x13 inch SEF/
8.5x14 inch SEF)
9 715-070 279.4 mm Letter LEF (8.5x11 inch LEF), 11x15 inch SEF, Tab-
loid (11x17 inch SEF)
<Side2>
1. Set the Test chart 499T 00247 with the reading surface (A3) faced down, and so there is no gap Figure 2 Side 2 check
between the Guide of the DADF.
4. Check that the fold line is within the specified value, in relation to the reference line. If the value
2. Set the following conditions, and take a copy, and this will be the original. is not specified, carry out the following adjustment procedure. (Perform [Adjustment of Side1])
Color Mode: "Black" Side Regi Side2 specified value: +/-2.9 mm
Paper Tray: "A3"
<Side2>
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%"
No. of copies: "2" 1. Enter Diag mode. Select dC131 (NVM Read/Write).
2 Sided Printing: 2 -> 1-sided 2. Adjust "NVM 716-068"* so that the measured value of the center line deviation (A) is within the
specified value. The following are for CVT-Side2. (For CIS-Side1, it is in the opposite direction)
3. Fold the output 2nd sheet Side2 copy into 2, the Check the central reference line of the test
chart copy, and deviation of the fold trace, Figure 2. • If the center line in the test chart is to the right of the center line in the copy: Set a smaller
value.
• If the center line in the test chart is to the left of the center line in the copy: Set a larger
value.
(1 Step in NVM = 0.1 mm)
3. Check the adjustment result and perform a re-adjustment.
Repeat Check Steps 1 to 5 and Adjustment Steps 1 to 2 until the measurement is within the
specified range.
[NVM: 716-104 to 112].
All sizes are adjusted together by default.
1 711- For all reading speeds Does not affect the other adjustment values.
144
<Side2>
1. Set the Test chart 499T 00247 (A3) with the reading surface face down (bottom), so that there
is no gap with the Guide of the DADF.
2. Set the following conditions, and take a copy, and this will be the original.
Color Mode: "Black"
Paper Tray: "A3"
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%"
No. of copies: "5"
2 Sided Printing: 2 -> 1-sided
3. Measure the length of the output 3rd copy and specified position of the test chart, Figure 2.
Compare the measured value to determine the magnification.
Slow Scan % (Vertical): Between 1-2, 2-3 and 1-3 in the figure.Magnification calculation: Length
of the copy/Length of the test chart = xxx%
Check the adjustment result.
Figure 1 Side 1 check
• SS (slow scan) % Side 2 specified value: 100+/-0.8%
<Side1>
1. Enter Diag mode. Select dC131 (NVM Read/Write).
2. Adjust "NVM 711-144"* so that the magnification value measured in Check Step 3 is within
specification.
• When the ratio is large (measured value of the copy is larger): increase the NVM's value
• If the ratio is small (measured value of the copy is smaller): reduce the NVM's value
(1 Step of NVM = 0.1%)
3. Check the adjustment result and perform a re-adjustment.
Repeat Check Steps 1 to 3 and Adjustment Steps 1 to 2 until the measurement is within the
specified range.
*: When rewriting NVM 711-144, NVM 711-041 to 711-042 are also rewritten to the same
value.
To change the correction value for each reading speed, enter a correction value for each reading
speed to [NVM: 711-041 to 042].Adjustment is not made for each speed by default.
A D J 5 . 1 1 DA D F Tra i l i n g Ed g e Re g i s t ra t i o n A d j u s t m e n t
To set the DADF Scan Position (original scan position) Trail Edge (Slow Scan Direction).
Note: The following adjustments must be made before carrying out checking and adjustment.
• System Registration Adjustment (ADJ 9.20)
• IIT lead edge/side registration (ADJ 5.3)
• DADF Height Adjustment (ADJ 5.6)
• DADF Lead Skew Adjustment (ADJ 5.7)
Note:
• When the adjustment test is started, change the DADF travel mode to [normal mode (looped
mode)].
See the notes of ADJ 5.7 DADF Lead Skew adjustment for how to change.
• After completion of the adjustment test, return the DADF travel mode to the default setting.
<Side1>
1. Correctly set a document that is about 30 mm shorter than the standard size, and there is a
reference point 10 mm from the trailing edge of the document, with the reading surface in front
(up), and so there is no gap between the Guide of the DADF.
2. Set the following conditions, and take a copy, and this will be the original.
Color Mode: "Black"
Paper Tray: "A3"
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%"
Edge erase setting value: "0 mm"
No. of copies: "5"
Figure 2 Side 2 check 2 Sided Printing: 1 -> 1-sided
3. Measure the value from the image trail edge to the reference point (part A of the diagram) of
<Side2>
the output 3rd copy, Figure 1.
1. Side2's Slow Scan % is adjusted automatically by adjusting Side1. Check that the measured value is within the specified value.
If Side2 cannot be adjusted by the above method, adjust in the same manner as"NVM716- If the value is not specified, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
069". Tail Regi Side1 specified value: 9+/-0.5 mm, Side2: 9+/-0.5 mm
1 711-142 For all reading speeds Does not affect the other adjustment
values.
<Side2>
1. Correctly set a document that is about 30 mm shorter than the standard size, and there is a
reference point 10 mm from the trailing edge of the document, with the reading surface in the
rear (down), and so there is no gap between the Guide of the DADF.
2. Set the following conditions, and take a copy, and this will be the original.
Color Mode: "Black"
Paper Tray: "A3"
Reduce/Enlarge: magnification "100%"
Edge erase setting value: "0 mm"
No. of copies: "5"
2 Sided Printing: 2 -> 1-sided
3. Measure the value from the image trail edge to the reference point (part A of the diagram) of
Side 2 of the output 3rd copy, Figure 2.
Check that the measured value is within the specified value.
If the value is not specified, carry out the following adjustment procedure.
Figure 1 Side 1 check Tail Regi Side2 specified value: 9+/-0.5 mm
<Side1>
1. Enter Diag mode. Select dC131 (NVM Read/Write).
2. Adjust "NVM711-142"*so the Trail Edge (A) value measured in the check step 3, is within the
specified value.
• When the measured value is equal to or less than the specified value, increase the value of
the NVM.
• When the measured value is equal to or greater than the specified value, reduce the value
of the NVM.
(1 Step in NVM = 0.1 mm)
3. Check the adjustment result and perform a re-adjustment.
Repeat Check Steps 1 to 3 and Adjustment Steps 1 to 2 until the measurement is within the
specified range.
*: In this DADF, rewriting NVM711-142, does not rewrite NVM711-021 to 711-022.
To change the correction value for each reading speed, enter a correction value for each reading
speed to [NVM: 711-021 to 022]. Adjustment is not made for each speed by default.
1 716-066 For all reading speeds Does not affect the other adjustment values.
A D J 5 . 1 2 DA D F D o c u m e n t D e t e c t i o n C o r r e c t i o n ( s i z e d e t e c t i o n A D J 7 . 1 Tra y 5 / By p a s s G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t
automatic correction) This procedure calibrates the paper size detection circuits for Tray 5. It should be performed when
the MSI size sensor is replaced or a size detection error occurs
To automatically adjust the original size during DADF scan to the desired original size.
1. Enter UI Diagnostics mode (see Accessing UI Diagnostics).
Proceed with this adjustment only after the following operations/events.
2. From the Registration menu, select Tray 5 (Bypass) Guide Adjustment. The Tray 5 (Bypass)
• The DADF Assy is replaced.
Guide Adjustment screen opens. The following radio buttons and dialog boxes are displayed:
• An abnormality is detected after replacing the Regi Roll, Feed Roll and Retard Roll.
• Minimum Size Position button
• A size detection error occurs.
• Maximum Size Position button
Note: The following adjustments must be made before carrying out checking and adjustment. 3. Remove any paper from the tray and move the side guides to the minimum position and press
• System Registration Adjustment (ADJ 9.20) the Minimum Size Position button.
• IIT lead edge/side registration (ADJ 5.3) 4. Press the Start button to calibrate the size. The dialog box indicates the results.
• DADF Height Adjustment (ADJ 5.6) • OK appears in the Result box if the sensor output value is within the specified range.
• DADF Lead Skew Adjustment (ADJ 5.7) • NG appears in the Result box if the sensor output value is out of the specified range. Check
the guide position and retry.
Overview 5. Move the side guides to the maximum position and press the Maximum Size Position button.
DADF reads 3 consecutive sheets, and the DADF compares the detected sub-scan length and refer- 6. Press the Start button to calibrate the size. The dialog box indicates the results.
ence value, and automatically changes the NVM's value.
• OK appears in the Result box if the sensor output value is within the specified range.
1. Enter the Diagnostics mode "ADF independent operation (size detection automatic correction) ". • NG appears in the Result box if the sensor output value is out of the specified range. Check
2. Set the 3* documents to be transported correctly, so that there is no gap between the DADF's the guide position and retry.
Guide.
* Document to be transported differs by market type as follows
• FX, XE/APO: A4LEF [slow scan length accuracy (210.0 mm +/- 0.7 mm)]
• XC: 8.5 inch x 11 inch LEF [slow scan length accuracy (215.9 mm +/- 0.7 mm)]
3. When the [Start] button is pressed, DADF starts to pull in the document, and automatically cal-
culates the correction value. At this time, [running] message is displayed.
4. The applicable NVM Data will then be updated. After the operation, the UI screen will be
displayed.
However, if this operation results in an NG, the NVM will not be updated and a message indicat-
ing that an NG has occurred will be displayed.
Note:
• This operation cannot be terminated (or aborted) halfway through the process and has to
be completed from start to finish regardless of any abnormalities that occur.
• In cases where more than 4 originals are loaded in the DADF, this operation will not feed
the originals that are fed after the fourth sheet.
• If it is still NG after the adjustment, repeat the procedure.
• Document to be transported by market type can be confirmed in the NVM715-307.
715-307 is 1 or 4 or 5: 8.5 inch x 11 inch LEF
715-307 is 2 or 3: A4LEF
5. The operation ends when the [Confirm] button is pressed.
Status Confirmation Specifications
After processing is completed, the correction value can be confirmed in NVM 711-164 docu-
ment slow scan size correction value, in the NVM Read.
A D J 8 . 1 Re g i s t ra t i o n Tra n s p o r t S ke w A d j u s t m e n t
This procedure adjusts the fine skew adjustment of paper registration using the adjustable Registra-
tion Transport.
1. Determine the direction of the skew on the print.
2. Open the Transport Drawer.
3. Loosen the inboard Transport Assembly mounting screw one full turn. (Figure 1)
4. If the outboard screw is in the right hole, remove the screw and place it in the left hole. (Figure
1)
Loosen the
screw
Note: The center line on the Registration Skew guide is the nominal setting. Each line is equal
to approximately 1mm of skew. (Figure 2)
5. Slide the Registration Transport toward the right to more the bottom side of the image on the
page, to the right.
6. Slide the Registration Transport toward the left to move the bottom side of the image on the
page, to the left.
A DJ 8 . 2 I n ver t e r S o l en o id A d ju s t me n t A D J 8 . 3 I n v e r t e r 2 P i n c h Ro l l s
This adjustment Verifys the Inverter Gate Solenoid is clean and aligned correctly. This procedure adjusts the Inverter Pinch Roll nip gap. Indications that this Adjustment may need
to be performed are:
Check for any of the following conditions:
• Noise from the Inverter area.
• Duplex jobs are producing simplex output.
• Inverter or Duplex jams.
• Check output for damage that appears as “pinch marks” on the side edges of the paper.
• 77-111 or 77-129 fault codes.
• Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330. Alternate execution of codes
[077-013] Invert Gate In, and [077-014] Invert Gate Exit. Check the operation Inverter Gate Sol- • Skew caused by Inverter area.
enoid, PL 10.9 Item 22 actuates the exit gate, PL 10.9 Item 12, and middle chute, PL 10.9 Item
1. Verify that the media or tabs being used are less than 256gsm (94.5lbs). Using heavyweight
14, correctly. stock (greater than 256gsm (94.5lbs)) will cause Inverter jams.
If any of these conditions are present, perform the Adjustment.
Note: If machine has system s/w 60.1x.xxx inversion will be limited to 220gsm(81.3lbs).
1. Remove the Exit Gate, PL 10.9 Item 12.
Note: Some specialty medias may have to run facedown.(ie: Perforated Business Cards).
2. Remove the Nip Solenoid Cover, PL 10.9 Item 24.
2. Separate the IOT from the Finisher.
3. Remove the Inverter Gate Solenoid, PL 10.9 Item 22.
3. Visually check the gap between the front side of the Inverter Cover and the Right Upper and
4. Clean the Inverter Gate Solenoid. Right Lower Covers, Figure 1.
a. Clean the Inverter Gate Solenoid plunger and cavity. Use Formula-A.
5. Correct the alignment of the Inverter Gate Solenoid.
a. Loosen two screws, Look for the “sweet spot” so that the Inverter Gate is just flush with the
Upper Chute when the solenoid is actuated.
1. With the screws loosened slide the solenoid all the way in one direction. Then, slide the
solenoid all the way in the opposite direction. Then, back to approximately center.
Note: Adjustments beyond flush will cause the Gate to not open completely, resulting in
simplex jobs being sent to the inverter or a jam will occur.
Note: Adjustments short of being flush will cause the Gate to not close completely, resulting
in duplex jobs being sent to the finisher or a jam will occur.
6. If any of the above checks are still present perform this adjustment again. If the fault persists,
install a new Inverter Gate Solenoid, PL 10.9 Item 22.
1
If the gap is wider towards
the lower side of the
Inverter Cover, the hinges
may have been accidentally
bent.
NOTE:
To reform a bent hinge, open the
Inverter 2 Door. Place a hand
underneath the door in the area
indicated and pull upwards
slightly.
CAUTION: In the following activity, Verify that the nut driver is held absolutely inline
and square to the adjustment screw being tightened. Do not allow any lateral drift in
the position of the nut driver shaft.
Note: In the following activity, if the two 5.5mm adjustment screws are missing, replace them
with 2 standard 5.5mm screws, 6 to 8mm in length. 4. Using a 5.5mm nut driver, tighten the two nip adjustment screws (Figure 4).
2. While the Inverter 2 Door is open, loosen the two nip adjustment screws (Figure 3).
3
Gently pull on the exposed front and
rear sections of the paper to verify
that the paper is captured between
the rollers.
5. Open the Inverter 2 Door.
6. Place one sheet of 8.5” x 11” 24lb. paper in the Inverter Nip Rolls and close the Inverter 2 Door
(Figure 5), 7. Enter Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, dC330, code [077-016].
8. Press Start.
9. The paper should fall downward, out of the Pinch Rolls.
10. Place 10 sheets of 8.5” x 11” 24lb. paper in the Inverter Nip Rolls and close the Inverter 2 Door,
Figure 5, The 10 sheets of paper should be held in the Nip Rolls and not fall.
11. The 10 sheets of paper should fall out of the Pinch Rolls.
12. If the 10 sheets did not fall from the Pinch Rolls, repeat the Adjustment starting at step 2 of the
Adjustment section.
13. If the second attempt fails, try 8 sheets of paper in the Pinch Rolls and repeat the process. If this
is also unsuccessful, install a new upper chute assembly, PL 10.8 Item 1.
Note: If the Inverter 2 Transport is replaced individually, perform the adjustment again for this
new transport. If the Inverter 1 and Inverter 2 are replaced as an assembly, the steps starting
from step 7 must be checked and adjustment performed as required.
1. If any IIT or IPS repairs were performed, perform the IIT Calibration (ADJ 5.11), then proceed to Procedure 2 - for existing ATC Sensors
step 2. Perform steps 1, 2, or 3 as appropriate if you need to restore ATC Sensor NVM calibration values:
2. Make a copy of the ProCon On pattern that was printed in step 2 of the Baseline Checks. Com-
pare the copy to the original print. Return to step 5 of the IOT Procedures. 1. If a known good Machine Settings exists, restore Machine Settings.
2. If a known good floppy is not available, but the original (as delivered) ATC Sensors are still in
the machine, perform the following:
a. Check the NVM Setting Value List in the Tray 1 pocket. Record the values for locations 752-
883 through 752-886 (these are the sensor barcode values).
b. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics..
c. Press <Machine Status>.
d. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance /
Diagnostics].
e. Select [Max Setup] , then [ATC Sensor Setup].
A D J 9 . 4 M a n u a l T RC A d j u s t A D J 9 . 5 Pr o Co n O n / O f f Pr i n t C h e c k
CAUTION: Perform this adjustment only to correct a strong customer complaint. Al- This procedure performs a Mini setup, outputs a printed test pattern for visual analysis, and prints a
tering the set points will affect both Print and Copy modes. Also, there is quite a bit of Job End patch. Selected process control NVM values are displayed, and a check for hidden process-
overlap among the low, medium, and high densities. For these reasons, it is recom- control-related faults is performed.
mended that this procedure not be used unless absolutely necessary.
There are 2 modes in this procedure:
To adjust image quality (TRC) to meet the user's preference, by increasing or decreasing the center • Procon On mode - the routine is run with ATC/ADC correction per the ProCon lookup table (LUT)
value of correction for each (YMCK) color, in low density, medium density, and high density ranges. and customer mode settings.
1. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics. • Procon Off mode: - the routine is run with ATC/ADC/LUT bypassed, using the default settings for
potential.
2. Press <Machine Status>.
3. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics]. 1. Verify that there is 11 x 17 in/A3 paper in Tray 1.
4. Select [Max Setup] , then [TRC Adjustment]. 2. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics..
5. Select Copy and Print 3. Verify that TRC (ADJ 9.4) and Color Balance (ADJ 9.6) values are set at midpoint.
6. Type in the new values; the default is 0, and the range is from -128 to +127. 4. Press <Machine Status>.
7. Select Start. 5. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics].
8. Perform a Complete Call Closeout, then switch the machine power Off then On 6. Select [Max Setup] , then [Procon On/Off Print].
9. Make 2 prints or copies. Ask the customer if the desired result is achieved. Note: Disregard any NG readings that are displayed when you first enter the routine - the data
10. Repeat steps 3 through 6 until the customer is satisfied with the image quality. are only valid after Start has been selected.
7. Select [ ProCon On] , then press Start. Mini setup will be executed in 4C mode. 1 sheet of the
built-in test pattern Pcon PG 200C will be printed and the job end patch created.
8. Check the ProCon Status and Judgement tables for any failures. If NG is displayed, perform the
Adjustment. If NG is not displayed, then all is OK.
9. Check the ProCon On/Off Values window. If any of the following values do not meet the listed
criteria, perform the Adjustment:
• ADC H(igh) (relevant to mid/high density reproduction) is within +/- 25 bits of ADC Target
H(igh) (+/- 50 bits for K).
• ADC Min 1 (relevant to mid/high density reproduction) is at least 50 bits lower than ADC
Min 2. The ADC Target H should fall between the Min1 and Min 2 values, +/- 50 bits
• Measured ADC L(ow) 1 - 4 (relevant to highlight density reproduction) is within +/- 25 bits
of ADC Target L(ow) 1 - 4 (+/- 50 bits for K).
• Measured ATC Average is within +/- 25 bits of ATC Target.
1. If NG is displayed, carry out the following failure correction as appropriate, then repeat the
Check.
• For ADC Shutter Open failures go to the 092-649.
A D J 9 . 6 Co p y M o d e Co l o r B a l a n c e A D J 9 . 7 L e a d E d g e / S i d e E d g e Re g i s t r a t i o n
To perform fine adjustment of the center value of the low density/medium density/high density Purpose
output balance for each color for copy images.
The purpose is to adjust the position of the printed image on the page. This is done by changing
• This adjustment is only applicable to the copy function. the value of the Lead Edge Registration and Side Edge Registration Parameters in NVM. Side Edge
• Adjustment is carried out in the TRC section of the IIT according to the set value. Registration is determined by when the ROS starts and stops writing the image. Lead Edge Registra-
tion is determined by the timing of the Registration Clutch.
• Perform this adjustment only when requested by the customer. The center of color adjustment
in Customer Mode will be changed by this setup. Note: Be aware if the customer has manually set the tray profiles using the SIQA Tool, these ad-
justments will affect customers output.
1. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics..
2. Press <Machine Status>. Specification
3. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics]. The specifications for Lead Edge and Side Edge are shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Specification
4. Select [Max Setup] , then [Color Balance Adjustment].
Item Simplex Duplex Tray 5 / Bypass
5. Select Max Setup, then Color Balance Adjustment.
6. Place an image on the platen Lead Edge 10±0.7mm 10±0.7mm 10±0.7mm
7. Use the (+) and (-) buttons to choose from 9 color balance adjustment values (from -4 to +4; 0
is the default value), for the range of low density, medium density and high density, for each col- Side Edge 10±1.2mm 10±1.2mm 10±1.2mm
or. The portion of the image in each range will become lighter from -1 to -4, and darker from +1
to +4.
Introduction
8. When all corrections have been entered, select Start. This series consists of the following procedures:
9. Perform a Temporary Call Closeout, then switch the machine power Off then On • Lead Edge Registration, Bond/Plain Paper, All Trays (1 - 6), Sides 1 and 2, are set separately.
10. Make 2 prints or copies. Ask the customer if the desired result is achieved. • Lead Edge Registration, Heavyweight Paper, All Trays (1 - 6), Sides 1 and 2, are set separately.
11. Repeat steps 6 through 10 until the customer is satisfied with the image quality.
Note: Lead Edge Registration is set by paper weight and paper type. One Lead Edge Registra-
12. Select a paper tray (1-4) containing the appropriate paper. tion setting for a particular weight and type applies to all trays (1-6).
13. Select Start. A copy of the image on the platen will be made in FC mode. • Side Edge Registration, All Trays (1 - 6), Sides 1 and 2, are set separately.
14. Ask the customer to examine the copy to determine if the corrections meet the desired
outcome. Note: If unable to set lead edge registration, enter NVM Read/Write. Verify NVM value 749-226
ROS Lead Edge Registration Correction, is set to the value specified on the factory setting sheet.
15. If further correction is needed, repeat steps 6 -14 as required.
16. When the image meets the customers requirements, select Save , then perform a Temporary Note: This procedure is part of a series of adjustments which need to be performed in order:
Call Closeout.
ADJ 9.15, ADJ 9.16, ADJ 9.17, ADJ 9.18, ADJ 9.7, ADJ 9.19.
Note: Whenever you adjust registration, you must perform the entire series, in the sequence given.
Read the entire procedure before performing the adjustment.
A D J 9 . 7 a L e a d E d g e Re g i s t r a t i o n Lead Edge
Measurement
Purpose
To correctly register the lead edge of the image in relation to the lead edge of the paper. There is a
baseline lead edge setting for Trays 1 - 6 on sides 1 and 2.
Note: Be aware if the customer has manually set the tray profiles using the SIQA Tool, these ad-
justments will affect customers output.
Checking Baseline Lead Edge Registration (Trays 1 - 4 and 6)
Note: You must set baseline registration for Bond/Plain paper before setting heavyweight
registration.
1. Load Trays 1 and 2, and the Tray 5 / Bypass, with 11 x 17 / A3 Bond/Plain or Heavyweight paper,
as appropriate. Load Trays 3, 4, and 6 with 8 1/2 x 11 / A4 Bond/Plain or Heavyweight paper, as
appropriate.
2. Enter UI diagnostics (see Accessing UI Diagnostics).
3. Press <Machine Status>.
4. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics].
5. Select [Registration > System Registration Adjustment].
6. Select [Paper Supply] and select the desired Tray, then Save.
7. Select [Adjusted Side] and select [Side 1] and [Save].
8. Set Number of Prints to 5 and select [Print].
Note: The routine automatically selects the appropriate NVM location to set, based on the Pa-
per Type setting for the trays.
Checking Side 2 Lead Edge Registration
9. Label each printed sheet with the number of the print (1 through 5), the words “Tray 1,” and Note: The test pattern for side 1 does not align with the side 2 test pattern; do not attempt to set
“Side 1.” registration by aligning the grids.
Note: The lead edge has the color patches. Side 1 has two lines on the lead edge, side two has 1. Make the following selections:
one line.
a. Select [Adjusted Side] and select [Side 2] and [Save].
10. Take the third print and measure the lead edge (as shown on Figure 1).
b. Select 5 for Number of Sheets , if not already selected.
11. If the measured value is not 10±0.7 mm, perform the Adjustment. If the Check is OK, proceed
to Checking Side 2 Lead Edge Registration. 2. Select Print on the UI screen.
3. Label each printed sheet with the number of the print (1 through 5), the words “Tray 1” and
“Side 2.”
4. Take the third print and measure lead edge (as shown on Figure 2).
5. If the measured value is not 10±1.5 mm, perform the Adjustment. If the Check is OK, proceed
to Checking Lead Edge Registration, Heavyweight paper.
Note: Select [Adjust] only once or the changes will be saved and applied multiple times.
The adjustment is applied to all stocks of the same weight.
7. Repeat the Check/Adjust Sequence until the measured value falls within the specification.
Note: If heavyweight paper is not available, use the same Bond/Plain paper that was used to
check and adjust baseline registration for Bond/Plain paper.
Note: Setting up the registration for Heavyweight 1 will automatically set up the registration
for Plain Gloss media.
2. For Trays 1 - 6, the routine automatically selects the appropriate NVM location to set, based on
the Paper Type setting for the trays. Verify that all paper trays are set to a Heavyweight paper
type (regardless of the actual weight of paper installed in the trays) by pressing the Machine
Status button on the UI, select the Paper Tray button to display attributes, and setting and Sav-
ing a Heavyweight paper type for each tray. Note that if this path has changed, you will need to
consult the copier/printer User Guide (Training and Information CD) for the correct menu path
3. Repeat the previously stated procedures for Checking and Adjusting (if necessary) Lead Edge
Registration (for Bond/Plain Paper) for Trays 1 - 6, If the Check is OK, proceed to Side Edge
Registration (ADJ 9.7b).
1. Select [Paper Supply] and select the desired Tray.
2. Select [Adjusted Side] and select Side 1 or Side 2 as required.
3. Select [Lead / Side Registration] and adjust the Lead Registration.
Note: Be aware if the customer has manually set the tray profiles using the SIQA Tool, these ad- Checking Side 2 Side Edge Registration
justments will affect customers output. 1. When side 1 is within specification, select [Adjusted Side] and select [Side 2] and [Save].
1. Check that paper is loaded in all trays, and that the paper guides are adjusted correctly. 2. Set Number of Prints to 5 and select [Print].
2. Enter UI diagnostics (see Accessing UI Diagnostics). 3. Label each printed sheet with the number of the print (1 through 5), the words “Tray 1,” and
“Side 1.”
3. Press <Machine Status>.
4. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics]. Note: The lead edge has the color patches. Side 1 has two lines on the lead edge, side two has
one line.
5. Select [Registration > System Registration Adjustment].
6. Select [Paper Supply] and select the desired Tray, then Save.
7. Select [Adjusted Side] and select [Side 1] and [Save].
8. Set Number of Prints to 5 and select [Print].
Note: The routine automatically selects the appropriate NVM location to set, based on the Pa-
per Type setting for the trays.
9. Label each printed sheet with the number of the print (1 through 5), the words “Tray 1,” and
“Side 1.”
Note: The lead edge has the color patches. Side 1 has two lines on the lead edge, side two has
one line.
Side Edge
Side Edge
4. Select Trays 2 through 4, then Tray 6, and repeat the check for each successive tray for Side 2.
5. If the measured value for Trays 2 through 4, and Tray 6 (Side 2) is not 10±1.2mm, perform the
Adjustment, where applicable.
A D J 9 . 9 Re g i s t r a t i o n M e a s u r e m e n t Cy c l e A D J 9 . 1 0 Re g i s t r a t i o n C o n t r o l S e n s o r C h e c k Cy c l e
To measure the color registration for 4 colors and display the status by indicating OK/NG (Check or This is a self-diagnostic cycle for checking that the misregistration detection system (MOB Sensor)
Adjustment). is operating normally. The color shift amount is detected using Cyan patch. Any misregistration de-
tected in the MOB sensor is displayed on the screen.
This cycle performs the color registration measurement that includes the detection of AC compo-
nent to determine the condition of AC control (Drum Drive, Belt Drive, and Belt Steering, etc.), which This detection result is compared again with the target value to determine the pass/fail (OK/NG)
is one of the color registration components. status. Correction is not performed.
• Performs registration measurement to determine the condition of the AC control. 1. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics.
• Checks that the Belt control etc. are operating normally. 2. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics].
• Measures/displays the amount of color shift relative to Black in the Fast Scan/Slow Scan 3. Select [Registration > Registration Control Sensor Check Cycle].
direction.
4. Press Start.
• Displays the result of comparing OK/NG (Check or Adjustment) with the target value.
5. When the test completes, the results will be displayed. If the measured value for any parameter
1. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics. is larger than the target value by 10, NG is displayed.
2. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics]. If NG, check that Cyan is being printed; if so, replace the MOB Sensor Assembly.
3. Select [Registration > Registration Measuring Cycle]. If Cyan is not being printed, there is a problem in Development or 1st Transfer.
4. Press Start.
Displays OK or NG in the Result column.
5. When NG is displayed, go to the OF 9.1.
If the result is NG for both AC/DC, fix the AC problem first.
ADJ 9.11 Inboard/Outboard Manual Density Setup 1. Categorize the variation according to one of the following general types, then choose the specif-
ic pattern number within that group that most closely represents the density variation:
This procedure corrects Inboard to outboard density variation of each of the primary colors (YMCK) • Darker or Lighter Center Density: Patterns 1, 4, 5, 6 - Figure 2.
independently by adjusting the Laser Diode output as it scans.
• Lighter Inboard Density: Patterns 2, 7, 10 - Figure 3.
Note: Be aware if the customer has manually set the tray profiles using the SIQA Tool, these ad- • Darker Inboard Density: Patterns 3, 8, 9 - Figure 4.
justments will affect customers output.
Note: The changes made by this routine are VERY slight, and may not be detectable without a
densitometer. It will not correct gross density variations caused by Image Quality faults.
1. Load 11 x 17”/A3 paper into Tray 1.
2. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. (refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics).
3. Press <Machine Status>.
4. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics].
5. Select [Max Setup] , then [In/Out Manual Setup].
6. Make the following selections on the UI:
• Select Primary Color.
• Press Start. The Primary Color Test Pattern is output, Figure 1.
Figure 5 Density Levels - Patterns 1 and 4 Figure 7 Density Levels - Patterns 2 and 7
A D J 9 . 1 2 S e c o n d a r y Tra n s fe r O u t p u t Vo l ta g e
The CE adjusts the secondary transfer voltage for the special paper which the customer uses.
Note: The amount of visible change is small, even when level 6 is selected. It may be necessary Heavyweight 1 S2 For manual settings
to perform several cycles to achieve the desired result.
Heavyweight Heavyweight 2A Cannot be changed (Standard Heavyweight 2)
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the density is even. If more than one color shows density variation, re- 2
peat the procedure as required. Heavyweight 2B Cannot be changed (Corresponds to application)
6 746-010 2nd BTR PWM Output Changeable Mode Sample Output Value No.6
7 746-011 2nd BTR PWM Output Changeable Mode Sample Output Value No.7
8 746-012 2nd BTR PWM Output Changeable Mode Sample Output Value No.8
9 746-013 2nd BTR PWM Output Changeable Mode Sample Output Value No.9
10 746-014 2nd BTR PWM Output Changeable Mode Sample Output Value No.10
*1 When the desired secondary output is more than 140% of the current output
E.g.: The high density parts have a low density even in sample No.10.
The 3C high density parts are bluish.
*2 When the desired secondary output is less than 60% of the current output
E.g.: The high density parts have mottles (spots/white spots) even in sample No.2.
(For other symptom, there may be many white dots at the H/T area, or there may be rustling
noise at H/T area of the color K.)
A D J 9 . 1 5 Tra p e z o i d a l A d j u s t m e n t
The purpose is to Verify there is equal nip pressure IB to OB between the 2nd BTR Roll and the 2nd
BTR Backup Roll, and the Fuser Heat Roll and Fuser Belt Assembly. An IB to OB nip variation causes
paper rotation during transfer and results in Image Stretch. This adjustment Verifys that Trapezoi-
dal Distortion due to IB to OB nip variation is within tolerances. The maximum acceptable deviation
is 0.6mm.
Check
Note: During this adjustment you will use the 700 Alignment Calculator. Select Trapezoidal Adjust-
ment. Note the ADJXX in the calculator do not match the adjustment numbers for the xc550-560.
Note: This procedure is part of a series of adjustments which need to be performed in order: ADJ
9.15, ADJ 9.16, ADJ 9.17, ADJ 9.18, ADJ 9.7, ADJ 9.19.
Note: Before starting this series of procedures, Verify that there are no custom paper profiles or
alignment profiles selected in customer tools mode:
1. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics.
2. Press <Machine Status>.
3. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Paper Tray Settings > Custom
Paper Settings].
4. The settings for tray 6/7 should display “not in use” or “No name”.
Figure 1 IB and OB Side Line Length Measurements
Note: Verify that the HFSI counter for (954-813) 2nd BTR Unit is below threshold and correctly in-
stalled. If the threshold has been exceeded, replace the unit. 5. Press Enter to get the results from the calculator.
6. The alignment calculator automatically calculates the difference ( 1A - 1B ) which represents
1. The following Steps need to be performed on ALL available Trays (IOT + Accessories). the Trapezoidal Misalignment Amount.
2. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics. • If the calculated value is within tolerances, the judgement will display “OK”. Continue to the
3. Print the test pattern. next adjustment, ADJ 9.16 Side1/Side2 Side Skew Adjustment.
a. Press <Machine Status>. • If the calculated value is not within tolerances, the judgement will display “NG”, you must
perform the Adjustment. The Correction Value box will display the number of increments
b. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / that the 2nd BTR Cams will need to be adjusted.
Diagnostics].
c. Select [Registration > System Registration Adjustment]. Adjustment
1. Remove the 2nd BTR Assembly (REP 90.4).
d. Under For Individual Trays, select [Paper Supply].
2. Adjust the inboard and outboard 2nd BTR Cams (Figure 2 and Figure 3) based on the Correction
e. Select the tray 6/7 paper size.
Value displayed in the XC or XE Xerox 700 Digital Color Press alignment field calculator:
• For the HCF select 8.5x11 inch (A4) 90gsm.
• For the OHCF select 11 X 17 inch (A3) 90gsm
Note: Rotate each cam CW or CCW as directed by the alignment tool. Place the 2nd BTR on a
flat surface and face the front of the unit to adjust the front cam. Then, rotate the unit end-for-
• Select [Save]. end to adjust the rear cam. Both cams must be rotated (Clockwise) or (Counterclockwise) as in-
f. Select [Adjusted Side]. dicated on the alignment tool. The net effect is removing roll torque.
b. Rotate the cam the number of increments indicated in the Correction Value of the alignment
tool. Rotate counterclockwise for negative values. Rotate clockwise for positive values.
c. Repeat steps a and b for the other cam.
3. Repeat the Check. If the result is OK, continue to ADJ 9.16 Side1/Side2 Side Skew Adjustment.
If the result is still NG, continue with the next step.
4. Remove and inspect the 2nd BTR Assembly (REP 90.4). Visually check the 2nd BTR Assembly
gears to check for wear. If parts on the 2nd BTR Assembly are worn or broken, replace the 2nd
BTR Assembly.
5. If the 2nd BTR Assembly was not broken or worn, replace the assembly in the machine, and Veri-
fy that it is properly seated.
6. Return to the beginning of the adjustment and perform the check.
7. If the Check continues to be NG, perform the Paper Stretch Check.
A D J 9 . 1 6 S i d e 1 / S i d e 2 S i d e S ke w A d j u s t m e n t 2B 2A
The purpose is to Verify that the IB edge of the paper is aligned with the image on the Transfer
Belt. The side skew is adjusted by changing the physical position of the Registration Transport in
the Paper Path Module. The maximum acceptable deviation is 0.5mm.
Note: Be aware if the customer has manually set the tray profiles using the SIQA Tool, these ad-
justments will affect customers output. Side 2
Lead Edge
Check
Note: This procedure is part of a series of adjustments which need to be performed in order: ADJ
9.15, ADJ 9.16, ADJ 9.17, ADJ 9.18, ADJ 9.7, ADJ 9.19.
1. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics.
2. Press <Machine Status>.
3. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics].
4. Select [Registration > System Registration Adjustment].
5. Select [Paper Supply] and select 11 X 17 (A3).
6. Select [Adjusted Side] and select [Side 2].
7. Set Number of Prints to 3 and select [Print].
11. Subtract the value for 2B from the value for 2A.
8. (Figure 1): Select the last print out. On Side 1, measure the distance at locations 1A and 1B.
12. If the difference in the measurements is 0.5mm or less, the measurement is OK.
Note: The lead edge has the color patches. Side 1 has two lines on the lead edge, side two has If the difference is greater than 0.5 mm, perform the adjustment for that side.
one line.
If the judgment is OK, go to ADJ 9.17 and perform the Perpendicularity Adjustment.
Note: If you cannot meet the specification, you can manually adjust the Registration Transport
Assembly using the Hardware Skew Adjustment.
6. When correct, go to ADJ 9.17 and perform the Perpendicularity Adjustment.
A D J 9 . 1 7 Pe r p e n d i c u l a r i t y A d j u s t m e n t
The purpose is to Verify that Lead Edge Image Skew is within specification. The maximum devia-
tion is 0.6mm.
Note: Be aware if the customer has manually set the tray profiles using the SIQA Tool, these ad-
justments will affect customers output.
Check
Note: This procedure is part of a series of adjustments which need to be performed in order: ADJ
9.15, ADJ 9.16, ADJ 9.17, ADJ 9.18, ADJ 9.7, ADJ 9.19.
1. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics
2. Press <Machine Status>.
3. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics].
4. Select [Registration > System Registration Adjustment].
5. Select [Paper Supply] and select 11 X 17 (A3).
6. Select [Adjusted Side] and select [Side 2].
7. Set Number of Prints to 3 and select [Print].
8. (Figure 1): Select the last print out. On Side 1, measure the distance at locations 1A and 1B.
Figure 1 Registration Transport Assembly Note: The lead edge has the color patches. Side 1 has two lines on the lead edge, side two has
one line.
3. Rotate the Registration Transport Assembly CW or CCW to adjust the skew.
Outboard Mounting 1A
Left Hole Screw
Side 1
Lead Edge
1B
A D J 9 . 1 8 F r o n t t o B a c k I m a g e M a g n i fi c a t i o n A d j u s t m e n t
The purpose of this procedure is to adjust front to back image magnification so that it is within
2A specification. The target deviation is within 0.3%.
Note: Be aware if the customer has manually set the tray profiles using the SIQA Tool, these ad-
justments will affect customers output.
Side 2
Lead Edge Check
Note: This procedure is part of a series of adjustments which need to be performed in order: ADJ
9.15, ADJ 9.16, ADJ 9.17, ADJ 9.18, ADJ 9.7, ADJ 9.19.
1. The following Steps need to be performed on ALL available Trays (IOT + Accessories).
2. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics.
3. Press <Machine Status>.
4. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics].
2B 5. Select [Registration > System Registration Adjustment].
6. Select [Paper Supply] and select 11 X 17 (A3).
7. Select [Adjusted Side] and select [Side 2].
11. Subtract the value for 2B from the value for 2A. 8. Set Number of Prints to 3 and select [Print].
12. If the difference in the measurements is 0.5mm or less, the measurement is OK. 9. (Figure 1): Select the last print out. On Side 1, measure the test pattern in the fast and slow scan
directions.
If the difference is greater than 0.5 mm, perform the adjustment for that side.
If the judgment is OK, go to ADJ 9.19 Lead/Side Edge Registration Adjustment. Note: The lead edge has the color patches. Side 1 has two lines on the lead edge, side two has
one line.
Adjustment
Note: The following adjustments are applied to ALL available Trays (IOT + Accessories).
1. In the System Registration Adjustment window, select [Perpendicularity].
2. If the difference is negative (1B is larger than 1A), use the negative arrow to adjust. 1A
If the difference is positive (1B is smaller than 1A), use the plus arrow to adjust. Fast Scan
Measurement
Note: 10 equals 1 mm, so select a number 10 times the number of mm in the difference. (For
example, it the perpendicularity is off 0.6 mm, you would select 6 in the Perpendicularity
window.)
3. Input the change for Side 1 and Side 2.
4. Select [Save].
1B
5. Select [Print] and check the perpendicularity. Repeat the adjustment as required. Slow Scan Measurement
6. When correct, go to ADJ 9.19 and perform the Side 1 Lead/Side Edge Registration Adjustment.
A D J 9 . 1 9 Fr o n t t o B a c k A l i g n m e n t A d j u s t m e n t
The purpose of this procedure is to Verify that front to back image alignment is within specification.
Maximum deviation is 1mm.
2A
Fast Scan Note: Be aware if the customer has manually set the tray profiles using the SIQA Tool, these ad-
Measurement justments will affect customers output.
Check
Note: This procedure is part of a series of adjustments which need to be performed in order: ADJ
9.15, ADJ 9.16, ADJ 9.17, ADJ 9.18, ADJ 9.7, ADJ 9.19.
Note: The following Steps need to be performed on ALL available Trays (IOT + Accessories).
2B
Slow Scan 1. Enter the Diagnostic Mode. Refer to Accessing UI Diagnostics.
Measurement
2. Press <Machine Status>.
3. Select [Tools > System Settings > Common Service Settings > Maintenance / Diagnostics].
4. Select [Registration > System Registration Adjustment].
5. Select [Paper Supply] and select the select the paper stock in each paper tray.
6. Select [Adjusted Side] and select [Side 2].
12. Subtract 2A from 1A. If the difference for each is 0.8mm or less, the check is OK. 7. Set Number of Prints to 3 and select [Print].
13. Subtract 2B from 2B. If the difference for each is 1.2mm or less, the check is OK. 8. (Figure 1): Select the last print out. On Side 1, measure 1A, 1B, 1C, and 1D.
14. If the difference is within specification, go to ADJ 9.19 and perform the Front to Back Alignment
Adjustment. Note: The lead edge has the color patches. Side 1 has two lines on the lead edge, side two has
one line.
Adjustment
Note: The following adjustments are applied to ALL available Trays (IOT + Accessories). 1B
1. For adjustments for the Fast Scan measurement, select [Fast Scan%].
2. Adjust the value in the window to increase or decrease the size of the image. The adjustments
are made on the top side of the image.
Note: 10 equals 1 mm, so select a number 10 times the number of mm in the difference. (For
example, it the difference is off 0.6 mm, you would select 6 in the Fast Scan% window.)
3. Input the change for Side 1 and/or Side 2 as required.
4. Select [Save].
5. Select [Print] and check the perpendicularity. Repeat the adjustment as required. 1A 1C
6. For adjustments for the slow Scan measurement, select [Slow Scan%].
7. Adjust the value in the window to increase or decrease the size of the image. The adjustments
are made on the left side of the image.
Note: 10 equals 1 mm, so select a number 10 times the number of mm in the difference. (For
example, it the difference is off 0.6 mm, you would select 6 in the Slow Scan% window.)
8. Select [Print] and check the Repeat the adjustment as required.
9. When correct, go to ADJ 9.7 and perform the Lead Edge/Side Edge Registration.
1D
9. (Figure 2): On Side 2, measure 2A, 2B, 2C, and 2D.
2B A D J 9 . 2 0 S y s t e m R e g i s t r a t i o n A d j u s t m e n t ( Re g i s t r a t i o n ) :
DC126
Purpose
Aligns the IOT Registration.
• IOT Registration Adjustment performs the Registration adjustment from the output result of
the Built-in Adjustment Test Pattern.
Feature
Print the Adjustment Test Pattern (containing the record of measurement (length) location of the
various alignment component) that is stored in the Controller and then follow the instructions on
2A 2C the UI screen to input the result of measurements from the measurement locations on the printout
via the UI screen to send the misalignment to the IOT and adjust the alignment component.
Furthermore, for adjustment items other than the Side 1/Side 2 Registration, succesive adjustments
can be done using the output result of 1 sheet of chart.
Adjustable Items
Adjustment should be done in the following order.
• Side 1 Trapezoid Correction
• Side 1/Side 2 Fast Scan Skew Fine Adjustment
• Side 1/Side 2 Perpendicularity Fine Adjustment
• Side 1/Side 2 Fast Scan Direction Reduce/Enlarge Fine Adjustment
2D
• Side 1/Side 2 Slow Scan Direction Reduce/Enlarge Fine Adjustment
10. Subtract the following: • Side 1/Side 2 Lead Regi/Side Regi Independent Adjustment
• 1A - 2A =
• 1B - 2B =
Procedure
Note: Before performing this adjustment, make sure that the following has already been
• 1C - 2C = completed.
• 1D - 2D = • DC675: Regi Control Setup Cycle (Appropriate alignment adjustment cannot be performed if Re-
11. If the measurements are within 0.7 mm, the check is good. Registration setup is compete. gi Control Setup Cycle is not finished properly)
If the measurements are not correct, return to the following Adjustments are repeat. 1. Enter Diag mode and select [Registration]. (Figure 1).
• 1C - 2C, go to ADJ 9.18 Front to Back Image Magnification Adjustment and repeat the Slow
Scan% adjustment.
• 1D - 2D, go to ADJ 9.18 Front to Back Image Magnification Adjustment and repeat the Fast
Scan% adjustment.
• 1A - 2A, go to ADJ 9.19 Side 1 Lead Edge/Side Edge Registration Adjustment and repeat the
Side Edge adjustment.
• 1B - 2B = go to ADJ 9.19 Side 1 Lead Edge/Side Edge Registration Adjustment and repeat
the Lead Edge adjustment.
12. Continue the Registration sequence from the Adjustment you repeat: ADJ 9.19, ADJ 9.18, ADJ
9.19.
Figure 1 j0pa41850
2. Select DC126 [System Registration Adjustment].
Figure 4 j0pr41856
3. Input the measured value and select [Calculate]. (Figure 5).
Figure 2 e0psm418506
Trapezoid Correction Adjustment
1. Select [Trapezoid Correction]. (Figure 3).
Figure 5 e0psm418508
4. The automatically calculated adjustment amount is displayed. (Figure 6).
Figure 3 e0psm418507
2. Measure Pa and Pb on the measurement chart. (Figure 4).
Note: When looking from the OB side, the direction of the rotation is reversed. When working
from the rear, the direction of the rotation is the same.
4. Repeat the check. If the result is [OK], proceed with the Fast Scan Skew Adjustment. If it persists
as [NG] go to the next step.
5. Remove the 2nd BTR Roll Assembly and inspect it.
Visually check to see whether the gears of the 2nd BTR Roll Assembly have worn out.
If the 2nd BTR Roll Assembly parts are worn out or damaged, replace the 2nd BTR Roll
Assembly.
6. If the 2nd BTR Roll Assembly parts are neither worn out nor damaged, replace the assembly in
the machine and check that it is installed properly.
7. Return to the beginning of this adjustment and perform the check.
8. If the result of the check persistently remains as [NG], check the paper for elongation.
9. Perform the Fast Scan Skew Adjustment.
Figure 7 Releasing the 2nd BTR Cam (j0psm418501)
Change the cam position at the IN/OUT of the 2nd BTR by the following procedure. At that Check the paper for elongation
time, pull the lever of the cam to release the latch, and then rotate the cam, Figure 8. Check for paper elongation at the Fusing Unit.
1. Open the Paper Tray that is being checked.
2. Remove 3 sheets of paper from the Tray.
3. Measure the paper width in the IB-OB direction at the Lead Edge and Trail Edge of the paper.
4. Reload the measured paper in the Tray, and execute pattern number [8] section 6, Print Test
Pattern.
5. Measure the paper width in the IB-OB direction at the Lead Edge and Trail Edge of the paper.
6. If the difference between the measured values is 0.4 mm or higher, replace the Fusing Unit.
2. Measure Sa and Sb on Side 1 of the measurement chart. (Figure 10). 4. The automatic adjustment is performed and [Adjustment completed.] will be displayed.
Note: Selecting [Calculate] again after the adjustment has completed returns the displayed
values to their default values. If the adjustment values are re-input and [Adjust] is selected at
this time, it will cause those values to be reflected. Therefore, never perform the adjustment
without printing out and measuring the chart first.
5. Next, measure Sa and Sb on Side 2 of the measurement chart in the same way as Step 2. Figure
12).
Figure 10 j0pa41853
3. Select [Software Adjustment (Side 1)], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure
11).
Figure 12 j0pr41862
6. Select [Software Adjustment (Side 2)], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure
13).
Figure 13 e0psm418512
Figure 15 j0pa41860
7. The automatic adjustment is performed and [Adjustment completed.] will be displayed.
3. Select [Side 1], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure 16).
Note: Selecting [Calculate] again after the adjustment has completed returns the displayed
values to their default values. If the adjustment values are re-input and [Adjust] is selected at
this time, it will cause those values to be reflected. Therefore, never perform the adjustment
without printing out and measuring the chart first.
Figure 16 e0psm418514
4. The automatic adjustment is performed and [Adjustment completed.] will be displayed.
5. Measure La and Lb on Side 2 of the measurement chart. (Figure 17).
Figure 14 e0psm418513
2. Measure La and Lb on Side 1 of the measurement chart. (Figure 15).
Figure 19 e0psm418516
Figure 17 j0pa41861
2. Measure Lfs on Side 1 of the measurement chart. (Figure 20).
6. Select [Side 2], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure 18).
Figure 24 e0psm418519
2. Measure Lss on Side 1 of the measurement chart. (Figure 25).
Figure 22 j0pr41872
6. Select [Side 2], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure 23).
Figure 25 j0pr41875
3. Select [Side 1], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure 26).
Figure 23 e0psm418518
7. The automatic adjustment is performed and [Adjustment completed.] will be displayed.
Figure 29 e0psm418522
2. Measure B on Side 1 of the measurement chart. (Figure 30).
Figure 27 j0pr41877
6. Select [Side 2], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure 28).
Figure 30 j0pa41865
3. Select [Side 1], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure 31).
Figure 28 e0psm418521
7. The automatic adjustment is performed and [Adjustment completed.] will be displayed.
Figure 34 e0psm418525
8. The automatic adjustment is performed and [Adjustment completed.] will be displayed.
9. Select [Apply Value to All Paper Types].
Figure 35 e0psm418526
Figure 33 j0pa41866 2. Measure A on Side 1 of the measurement chart. (Figure 36).
7. Select [Side 2], input the measured value, and select [Adjust]. (Figure 34).
5 Parts Lists
PL 1 - Standby Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1450 PL 40.3 Fuser Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1506
PL 1.1 Electrical (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1451 PL 40.4 Main Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1507
PL 1.2 Electrical (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1452 PL 40.5 Developer Drive Assembly (K). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1508
PL 1.3 Electrical (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1453 PL 40.6 Developer Drive Assembly (Y, M, C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1509
PL 1.4 Wire Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1454 PL 40.7 NOHAD (1 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1510
PL 2 - User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1455 PL 40.8 NOHAD (2 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1511
PL 2.1 Control Panel Assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1456 PL 40.9 NOHAD (3 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1512
PL 2.2 Control Panel Assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1457 PL 60 - Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1513
PL 2.3 HCF Tray Control Panel (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1458 PL 60.1 ROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1514
PL 2.4 IC Card Reader (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1459 PL 60.2 IIT Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1515
PL 3 - Machine Run Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1460 PL 60.3 Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1516
PL 3.1 Control Unit (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1461 PL 60.4 CCD Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1517
PL 3.2 Control Unit (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1462 PL 60.5 Carriage Cable, Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1518
PL 5 - DADF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1463 PL 60.6 Full/Half Rate Carriage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1519
PL 5.1 DADF Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1464 PL 70 - Paper Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1520
PL 5.2 DADF, DADF Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1465 PL 70.1 Tray 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1521
PL 5.3 DADF PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1466 PL 70.2 Tray 3/4 (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1522
PL 5.4 DCDC PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1467 PL 70.3 Tray 3/4 (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1523
PL 5.5 Document Tray, Tray Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1468 PL 70.4 Tray 1 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1524
PL 5.6 DADF Document Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1469 PL 70.5 Tray 2 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1525
PL 5.7 DADF Feeder Cover Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1470 PL 70.6 Tray 3 Assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1526
PL 5.8 DADF Feeder Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1471 PL 70.7 Tray 3 Assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1527
PL 5.9 Sensor Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1472 PL 70.8 Tray 4 Assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1528
PL 5.10 Drive Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1473 PL 70.9 Tray 4 Assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1529
PL 5.11 Lower Chute Assembly, Retard Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1474 PL 70.10 Tray 5 / Bypass Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1530
PL 5.12 Pre Regi. In Chute, Platen High Roll. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1475 PL 70.11 Tray 5 / Bypass Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1531
PL 5.13 Exit Lower Chute, Out Chute Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1476 PL 70.12 Tray 5 / Bypass Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1532
PL 5.14 DADF Nudger Housing Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1477 PL 70.13 MSI Lift Up Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1533
PL 10 - Copy Transportation and Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1478 PL 70.14 Tray 5 / Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1534
PL 10.1 Fuser Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1479 PL 80 - Paper Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1535
PL 10.2 Fusing Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1480 PL 80.1 Tray 1 Feed Assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1536
PL 10.3 Upper Frame Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1481 PL 80.2 Tray 1 Feed Assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1537
PL 10.4 Lower Frame Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1482 PL 80.3 Tray 2 Feed Assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1538
PL 10.5 Inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1483 PL 80.4 Tray 2 Feed Assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1539
PL 10.6 Inverter 1 Transport (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1484 PL 80.5 Tray 3 Feed Assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1540
PL 10.7 Inverter 1 Transport (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1485 PL 80.6 Tray 3 Feed Assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1541
PL 10.8 Inverter 2 Transport (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1486 PL 80.7 Tray 4 Feed Assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1542
PL 10.9 Inverter 2 Transport (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1487 PL 80.8 Tray 4 Feed Assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1543
PL 10.10 Exit Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1488 PL 80.9 Tray 4 Transport Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1544
PL 12 - SCT/OCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1489 PL 80.10 Takeaway Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1545
PL 12.1 OCT (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1490 PL 80.11 Left Chute Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1546
PL 12.2 OCT (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1491 PL 80.12 Takeaway Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1547
PL 12.3 SCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1492 PL 80.13 Tray 3/4 Gear Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1548
PL 20 - Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1493 PL 80.14 Tray 5 / Bypass Chute Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1549
PL 20.1 Fax Unit (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1494 PL 80.15 Tray 5 / Bypass Feeder Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1550
PL 20.2 Fax Unit (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1495 PL 80.16 Tray 5 / Bypass Upper Feeder Component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1551
PL 25 - Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1496 PL 80.17 Tray 5 / Bypass Lower Feeder Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1552
PL 25.1 Convenience Stapler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1497 PL 80.18 Retard/Feed/Nudger Roll Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1553
PL 28 - Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1498 PL 80.19 Drawer Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1554
PL 28.1 Cover (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1499 PL 80.20 Drawer Assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1555
PL 28.2 Cover (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1500 PL 80.21 Drawer Assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1556
PL 28.3 Cover (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1501 PL 80.22 Pre Registration Motor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1557
PL 28.4 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1502 PL 80.23 Registration Transport Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1558
PL 40 - Main Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1503 PL 80.24 Pre Registration Slide Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1559
PL 40.1 Drive Unit (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1504 PL 80.25 Vacuum Transport Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1560
PL 40.2 Drive Unit (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1505 PL 90 - Xerographics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1561
PL 1.1 Electrical (1 of 3)
Item Part Description
1 105E17732 Developer Bias HVPS (K) S5C (REP
90.31)
2 105K20971 Charge/Preclean HVPS (K) S4 (REP
1.8)
3 — Controller Cover (REP 3.1)
4 — MCU Cover
5 — Bracket
6 — CONT Harness Guide
7 110K17661 Power Switch Assembly
8 — Sub Power Switch (P/O PL 1.1
Item 7)
9 — Holder (P/O PL 1.1 Item 7)
10 — Bracket (P/O PL 1.1 Item 7)
11 962K77320 Wire Harness (Fusing)
12 054K59610 Fan Assembly
13 053K06160 UPF Filter
14 — Fan Duct
15 127K63080 Fan
16 130K71494 MOB ADC Assembly (Color) (REP
90.13)
17 — MOB ADC Bracket
18 — Bracket
PL 1.2 Electrical (2 of 3)
Item Part Description
1 — PWB Assembly
2 960K98261 Backplane PWB (REP 1.7)
3 540K24262 Memory Module
4 — Support Bracket
5 — Wire Harness
6 — Harness
7 — Conductor
8 105E19584 Bias Charge Roll HVPS PWB (Y, M,
C) - CD01 (REP 90.28)
9 — Support
10 105E17732 Developer Bias HVPS PWB (C) -
S5C (REP 90.29)
11 960K95572 IOT Drive PWB
12 960K69773 VSEL PWB (REP 1.6)
13 — Chassis Support
14 — MCU PWB Assembly (REP 1.4)
15 960K95556 MCU PWB
16 160K95234 NVM PWB (REP 1.5)
17 — Spacer (P/O PL 1.2 Item 14)
18 — Wire Harness
19 — Pin (upper)
20 — Pin (lower)
PL 1.3 Electrical (3 of 3)
Item Part Description
1 — Bracket (Not Spared)
2 960K95581 TM Drive PWB (REP 1.9)
3 — Bracket (Not Spared)
4 — Bracket (Not Spared)
5 — Post (Not Spared)
6 105E21602 IIT LVPS (REP 1.3)
7 105E17721 2nd BTR HVPS S2C (REP 90.32)
8 105E17732 Developer Bias HVPS (M-Top, Y-
Bottom) - SSC (REP 90.30)
9 — Cover Bracket
10 — Bracket (Not Spared)
11 105K33511 Main LVPS N11A (REP 1.2)
12 — PWB Support (Not Spared)
13 105K34250 AC Power Supply Assembly (110V)
(REP 1.1)
— 105K34260 AC Power Supply Assembly (220V)
(REP 1.1)
14 — AC Power Supply N11A (P/O PL
1.3 Item 13)
15 — Inlet Chassis Assembly (110V), In-
let Chassis Assembly (220V) (P/O
PL 1.3 Item 13)
16 — Wire Harness (220V) (P/O PL 1.3
Item 13)
17 117E24670 Power Cord (110V)
18 — Bracket
19 — Screw
P L 2 . 1 C o n t r o l Pa n e l A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 848K92298 Control Panel Assembly (XE) (REP
2.1)
— 848K90638 Control Panel Assembly (USSG/
XCL) (REP 2.1)
2 — Control Panel (P/O PL 2.1 Item 1)
3 — Rear Panel Cover (P/O PL 2.1 Item
1)
4 — Wing Tray Assembly
5 — Right Hinge Cover
6 — Left Hinge Cover
7 — Wing Bracket
8 — Wing Stopper
9 — Thumb Screw
10 — Clamp
P L 2 . 2 C o n t r o l Pa n e l A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Front Panel Cover
2 — Housing
3 — Key Assembly
4 — 10.4 Inch UI 10 Key PWB
5 — Screw
6 — LCD Frame Assembly
7 — 10.4 Inch Touch Panel Assembly
8 — 10.4 Inch UI I/F PWB
9 — UI LED PWB
10 — UI Wire Harness
11 — Screw
12 — Earth Plate
13 — Neck Bracket
14 — Rear Cover
15 — Rear Panel Cover
16 — UI Flexible Print Cable (10 key)
17 — UI Flexible Print Cable (LCDC)
18 — Screw
19 — Clamp
20 — Mole Cover
21 — Screw
P L 2 . 3 H C F Tra y Co n t r o l Pa n e l ( O p t i o n )
Item Part Description
1 — UI Plate Assembly
2 — Right Hinge Cover
3 — Left Hinge Cover
4 — Neck Hinge Assembly
5 — Guide Harness
6 — Neck Post Cover
7 — Front Post Cover
8 — Rear Post Cover
P L 2 . 4 I C C a r d Re a d e r ( O p t i o n )
Item Part Description
1 — IC Card Reader Box Top Cover
2 — USB Micro Cable
3 — IC Card Reader
4 — Label (IC Card Reader Box)
5 — IC Card Reader Box Bottom Cover
6 — IC Card Reader Box Inner Cover
7 — Hook Fastener Tape
8 — Loop Fastener Tape
P L 3 . 1 Co n t r o l U n i t ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Control Unit (REP 3.2)
P L 3 . 2 Co n t r o l U n i t ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 101K74590 HDD Assembly
2 133K28460 DIMM 4GB
3 540K24262 Memory Card (4GB) (REP 3.4)
4 — Bracket
5 — Controller PWB Housing Assembly
6 — Housing Assembly (P/O PL 3.2
Item 5)
7 960K98130 Controller PWB (REP 3.3) (See
NOTE)
8 — HDD Bracket (P/O PL 3.2 Item 5)
9 — Thumbscrew (P/O PL 3.2 Item 5)
10 — Earth Plate (P/O PL 3.2 Item 5)
11 — Blanking Plate (P/O PL 3.2 Item 5)
P L 5 . 1 DA D F C o m p o n e n t
Item Part Description
1 859K12944 DADF (DADF-250) (REF: PL 5.2)
(REP 5.1) (See NOTE)
2 — Seal (Not Spared)
3 — Counterbalance Bracket (Not
Spared)
4 — DADF Support (Not Spared)
5 — Counterbalance Cover (Not
Spared)
6 004K03761 DADF Platen Cushion
7 — Ferrite Core (Not Spared)
8 003K91881 Knob
9 — Label Kit
10 — Label (Instruction) (P/O PL 5.1
Item 9)
11 — Label (Clean) (P/O PL 5.1 Item 9)
12 — Label (Clean Point) (P/O PL 5.1
Item 9)
P L 5 . 2 DA D F , DA D F C o v e r
Item Part Description
1 822E38552 DADF Left Lower Cover (REP 5.2)
2 822E38503 DADF Front Cover (REP 5.3)
3 822E38511 DADF Front Top Cover
4 — LED Lens (P/O PL 5.2 Item 10)
5 822E38523 DADF Rear Cover (REP 5.5)
6 822E38581 Exit Cloth Cover
7 042E92802 Cloth Cleaner
8 003K22351 Stopper
9 — DADF (REF: PL 5.3 , PL 5.4 , PL 5.5
, PL 5.7 , PL 5.9 , PL 5.10 , PL 5.11 ,
PL 5.12 , PL 5.13)
10 948K35130 DADF Front Cover Assembly
P L 5 . 3 DA D F P W B
Item Part Description
1 — P Clamp (Not Spared)
2 121E25180 Core (NFT-10)
3 117K50380 IIT-DADF Cable (REP 5.7)
4 960K98361 DADF PWB (REP 5.8)
5 — Harness Guide (Not Spared)
6 — Bracket PWB (Not Spared)
7 952K37150 DADF PWB Wire Harness (REP
5.56)
8 036K92392 Left Counter Balance (REP 5.9)
9 036K92403 Right Counter Balance (REP 5.10)
10 — Right Bracket (Not Spared)
11 — Screw (Not Spared)
12 121E88780 Core (TFT-10201ON)
P L 5 . 5 D o c u m e n t Tra y , Tra y Fe e d
Item Part Description
1 127K74090 DADF Feed Motor (MOT05-001)
(REP 5.14)
2 023E28620 Belt
3 — Tension Spring (Not Spared)
4 — Feed Idler Bracket Assembly (Not
Spared)
5 — Pulley (52T/23T) (Not Spared)
6 — Idler Roller (Not Spared)
7 023E28661 Belt (REP 5.14)
8 — Tension Spring (Not Spared)
9 127K74030 DADF Tray Motor Assembly
(MOT05-051) (REP 5.16)
10 050K75076 DADF Document Tray (REF: PL
5.6) (REP 5.55)
11 — Tray Damper Bracket Assembly
(Not Spared)
12 004K02002 Oil Damper (REP 5.17)
13 — LED Bracket (Not Spared)
14 960K81820 Document Set LED (Q05-084)
(REP 5.17)
15 — Screw (Not Spared)
P L 5 . 6 DA D F D o c u m e n t Tra y
Item Part Description
1 063K00762 Film and Tape Assembly
2 — Tray Block (P/O PL 5.5 Item 10)
3 — Bottom Tray Assembly (P/O PL 5.5
Item 10)
4 — Upper Tray Assembly (P/O PL 5.5
Item 10)
5 — Inner Cover (P/O PL 5.5 Item 10)
6 930W00121 Tray APS Sensor 1 (Q05-215)/Tray
APS Sensor 2 (Q05-216)/Tray APS
Sensor 3 (Q05-217)/Tray APS Sen-
sor 4 (Q05-302)/Bottom Sensor
(Q05-202) (REP 5.19)
7 — Not Used
8 — Not Used
9 — Not Used
10 930W00212 DADF Document Set Sensor (Q05-
102) (REP 5.20)
11 019K99061 Retard Pad
12 — Wire Harness (Tray) (P/O PL 5.5
Item 10)
13 — Pinion Gear (P/O PL 5.5 Item 10)
P L 5 . 7 DA D F Fe e d e r Co v e r U n i t
Item Part Description
1 054K55156 DADF Feeder Cover Assembly
(REF: PL 5.8) (REP 5.21)
2 — Stopper Roll (Not Spared)
3 — Rear Hinge (Not Spared)
4 — Front Hinge (Not Spared)
5 110K18130 DADF Feeder Cover Interlock
Switch (S05-212) (REP 5.22)
6 — Wire Harness (Interlock Switch)
(Not Spared)
7 948K00991 DADF Left Cover Assembly (REP
5.23)
8 — Front Bracket Assembly (Not
Spared)
9 — Switch Bracket (Not Spared)
10 120E35980 Actuator (REP 5.24)
11 — Tension Spring (Not Spared)
12 930W00121 DADF L/H Cover Interlock Sensor
(Q05-223) (REP 5.24)
P L 5 . 8 DA D F Fe e d e r Co v e r A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — DADF Feeder Cover (P/O PL 5.7
Item 1)
2 — Feed Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 5.7
Item 1)
3 930W00222 DADF Feed In Sensor 1 (Q05-204)
/DADF Feed In Sensor 2 (Q05-
205) (REP 5.25)
4 — Not Used
5 — DADF Level Sensor Bracket (P/O
PL 5.7 Item 1)
6 930W00121 DADF Level Sensor (Q05-203)
(REP 5.26)
7 — Upper Feeder Cover (P/O PL 5.7
Item 1)
8 011E29160 Latch Lever (REP 5.27)
9 806E47360 Latch Shaft (REP 5.27)
10 803E26090 Rear Latch (REP 5.27)
11 809E99510 Lever Spring (REP 5.27)
12 948K00882 DADF Nudger Housing Assembly
(REF: PL 5.14) (REP 5.28)
13 121K57831 DADF Nudger Solenoid Assembly
(SOL05-086) (REP 5.29)
14 803E08630 Left Latch Front Cover
15 803E08640 Left Latch Rear Cover
16 — Rear Spring (P/O PL 5.7 Item 1)
17 — Front Spring (P/O PL 5.7 Item 1)
18 — Wire Harness (Top Sig) (P/O PL 5.7
Item 1)
P L 5 . 9 S e n s o r Co m p o n e n t
Item Part Description
1 — Out Sensor Bracket (Not Spared)
2 930W00121 DADF Out Sensor (Q05-208) (REP
5.31)/DADF Registration Sensor
(Q05-110) (REP 5.32)/DADF Pre
Registration Sensor (Q05-206)/
DADF APS Sensor 1 (Q05-218),
DADF APS Sensor 2 (Q05-219),
DADF APS Sensor 3 (Q05-220)
(REP 5.33)/DADF Feed Out Sensor
(Q05-205) (REP 5.34)/DADF Exit
Sensor (Q05-209) (REP 5.34)/Skew
Detect Sensor (Q05-192) (REP
5.35) (REP 5.33)
3 — DADF Lead Registration Sensor
Bracket (Not Spared)
4 930W00222 DADF Lead Registration Sensor
(Q05-207) (REP 5.36)
5 — APS Sensor Bracket (Not Spared)
6 — Exit Sensor Assembly (Not
Spared)
7 — Skew Sensor Bracket (Not Spared)
8 — Wire Harness (DADF Regi. Sensor)
P L 5 . 1 0 D r i v e Co m p o n e n t
Item Part Description
1 127K75920 DADF Pre Registration Motor
(MOT05-011) (REP 5.37)
2 — Tension Spring (Not Spared)
3 — Drive Bracket Assembly (Not
Spared)
4 023E28620 Belt (DADF Exit) (REP 5.39)
5 423W11955 Belt (DADF Take Away Clutch)
(REP 5.38)
6 121K52310 DADF Take Away Clutch Assembly
(CL05-087) (REP 5.38)
7 — DADF Take Away Clutch Stopper
(Not Spared)
8 127K74121 DADF Exit Motor (MOT05-041)
(REP 5.39)
9 023E28630 Belt (DADF Pre Regi.) (REP 5.38)
10 127K74101 DADF Platen Motor (MOT05-031)
(REP 5.40)
11 023E28640 Belt (DADF Platen) (REP 5.40)
12 127K74000 DADF Regi. Motor (MOT05-021)
(REP 5.41)
13 023E28760 Belt (DADF Regi.) (REP 5.41)
14 — Motor Assembly Harness (Not
Spared)
P L 5 . 1 1 L o w e r C h u t e A s s e m b l y , Re t a r d Ro l l
Item Part Description
1 054E60531 Retard Chute Cover
2 054K55143 Lower Chute Assembly (REP 5.42)
3 — Clutch Stopper (Not Spared)
4 005K14230 Friction Clutch (REP 5.43)
5 — Gear (21T) (Not Spared)
6 — Ball Bearing (Not Spared)
7 — Sleeve Bearing (Not Spared)
8 — Pivot Gear (Not Spared)
9 — Pivot Shaft (Not Spared)
10 — Retard Holder (Not Spared)
11 — Retard Shaft (Not Spared)
12 859K02461 Retard Roll (REP 5.44)
13 899E13651 Retard Spring (REP 5.44)
14 — Exit Guide (Not Spared)
15 105E22470 Exit Eliminator (REP 5.45)
16 921W20101 Magnet Interlock (REP 5.24)
17 — Magnet Cover (Not Spared)
18 063E07290 Fastener Tape
P L 5 . 1 2 P r e Re g i . I n C h u t e , P l a t e n H i g h Ro l l
Item Part Description
1 054K55160 Pre Registration In Chute Assem-
bly (REP 5.47)
2 054K55100 Registration Out Chute Assembly
(REP 5.48)
3 859K02620 Platen High Roll Assembly (REP
5.49)
4 — Pulley (20T) (Not Spared)
5 023E28630 Belt (Exit 1) (REP 5.50)
6 023E28620 Belt (Platen) (REP 5.50)
7 — Regi. In Chute (Not Spared)
P L 5 . 1 3 E x i t Lo w e r C h u t e , O u t C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 054K55123 Exit Lower Chute Assembly (REP
5.51)
2 — Exit Lower Chute (P/O PL 5.13
Item 1)
3 063K00710 Film S
4 063K00720 Film W
5 054K55130 Out Chute Assembly (REP 5.53)
6 — Exit Rear Hinge (Not Spared)
7 — Front Hinge (Not Spared)
P L 5 . 1 4 DA D F N u d g e r H o u s i n g A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — Feeder Chute Cover (Not Spared)
2 — Bearing (Not Spared)
3 — Nudger Shaft (Not Spared)
4 — Feed Shaft (Not Spared)
5 059K29520 Feed Roll (REP 5.54)
6 — Nudger Roll (P/O PL 5.8 Item 12)
7 — Nudger Housing (Not Spared)
8 — Idler Gear Shaft (Not Spared)
9 — Gear (27T) (Not Spared)
10 — Gear (33T) (Not Spared)
11 — Gear (31T) (Not Spared)
12 — Gear Assembly (26T) (Not
Spared)
13 — Bearing (PF101) (Not Spared)
14 — Sensor Shield (Not Spared)
15 — Front Nudger Spring (Not Spared)
16 — Rear Nudger Spring (Not Spared)
P L 1 0 . 1 Fu s e r U n i t
Item Part Description
1 014E48602 Block (110V) (REP 10.2)
— 014E59751 Block (220V) (REP 10.2)
2 008R13102 Standard Fuser (110V) (REP 10.1)
— 008R13065 Standard Fuser (220V) (REP 10.1)
— 126K28343 Heavy Weight Curl Reduction Fu-
ser (110V) (XC) (REP 10.1)
— 126K28354 Envelope Wrinkle Reduction Fuser
(110V) (XC) (REP 10.1)
— 126K28364 Heavy Weight Curl Reduction Fu-
ser (220V) (XE) (REP 10.1)
— 126K37280 Envelope Wrinkle Reduction Fuser
(220V) (XE) (REP 10.1)
3 — Label (220V) (Not Spared)
4 — Bracket (Not Spared)
5 — Base Bracket (Not Spared)
6 — Spring (Not Spared)
7 826E08080 Shoulder Screw
8 — Wire Harness (Fuser) (Not Spared)
9 — Frame Assembly (Not Spared)
10 130K88740 Out Temp Sensor (REP 10.9)
P L 1 0 . 2 Fu s i n g U n i t
Item Part Description
1 — Stopper (P/O PL 10.1 Item 2)
2 — Block (P/O PL 10.1 Item 2)
3 054K35970 Inlet Chute Assembly (REP 10.10)
4 — Eliminator (P/O PL 10.2 Item 3)
5 — Inlet Chute (P/O PL 10.2 Item 3)
6 — Upper Exit Chute
7 — Baffle
8 — Heat Roll (220V)
9 — Belt Assembly
10 — Spring
11 — Spring
12 — Main Lamp 1
13 — Main Lamp 2
14 — Sub Lamp
15 — Lower Frame Assembly
16 — Upper Frame Assembly
17 — Upper Cover Assembly
18 — Rear Cover
19 — Front Cover
20 — Gear (18T/22T) (50/60 hz)
21 — Bush
22 — Nip Spring
23 — Nip Screw
24 — Shoulder Screw
25 — Front Bracket
26 — Rear Bracket
27 — Paper Guide
28 — Tape
P L 1 0 . 3 U p p e r Fr a m e A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — Rear Frame
2 — Gear (32T)
3 — Latch Gear Assembly
4 — Brake Ring (P/O PL 10.3 Item 3)
5 013E87700 Ball Bearing
— 013E22230 Ball bearing (alternative)
6 — Brake Holder (P/O PL 10.3 Item 3)
7 — Shaft (P/O PL 10.3 Item 3)
8 — Gear (20T) (P/O PL 10.3 Item 3)
9 — Gear (33T) (P/O PL 10.3 Item 3)
10 — Nip Cam
11 — Sleeve
12 — Ball Bearing
13 — Insulator
14 — Saddle Clip
15 — Tie Plate
16 — Reflector
17 — Actuator
18 — Holder
19 — Fusing Fuse (220V Only)
20 — Center NC Sensor, Rear NC Sensor
21 — Heat Roll Sensor
22 — Thermostat
23 — Wire Harness (220V Only)
24 — Upper Front Frame
25 — Upper Rear Frame
26 — Front Cover
27 — Rear Cover
28 — Shaft
29 — Gear (18T/28T)
30 — Gear (25T)
31 — Bracket
32 — Bracket
33 — Bracket
34 930W00111 Fusing Unit Nip Sensor (REP 10.3)
35 — Wire Harness
P L 1 0 . 4 L o w e r Fr a m e A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — Gear (20T)
2 — Sleeve
3 — Exit Lower Chute Assembly
4 — Exit Lower Chute (P/O PL 10.4
Item 3)
5 — Fuser Exit Sensor (Q10-201) (P/O
PL 10.4 Item 3)
6 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 10.4 Item 3)
7 — Exit Roll
8 413W75959 Bearing
9 — Lower Frame
10 — Lower Cover
11 — Gear Cover
12 — Gear (24T)
13 — Gear (19T)
14 — Gear (18T)
15 — Spring
16 — Shoulder Screw
P L 10 . 5 In ver t e r
Item Part Description
1 038E31522 Bottom Guide
2 054E53930 Inverter 3 Chute
3 054K30653 OCT Exit Chute (REP 10.11)
4 054K51802 Inverter 4 Chute Assembly (REP
10.12)
5 — Inverter 4 Chute (P/O PL 10.5
Item 4)
6 130K87812 Inverter End Sensor (REP 10.13)
7 — Bracket (P/O PL 10.5 Item 4)
8 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 10.5 Item 4)
9 — Pin 1 (P/O PL 10.5 Item 14)
10 — Inverter 1 Transport (P/O PL 10.5
Item 14)
11 — Inverter 2 Transport (P/O PL 10.5
Item 14)
12 802E63744 Inverter Cover
13 — Connector Cover (Not Spared)
14 059K88168 Inverter Assembly (REP 10.4)
15 — Bracket
16 — Screw
17 — Spacer (P/O PL 10.5 Item 19)
18 — Support
19 604K92280 Chute Inverter Kit
P L 1 0 . 6 I n v e r t e r 1 Tra n s p o r t ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 127K71470 Exit Motor Assembly (REP 10.5)
2 — Exit Motor (P/O PL 10.6 Item 1)
3 — Bracket (P/O PL 10.6 Item 1)
4 — Support Bracket
5 — Gear Cover (P/O PL 10.5 Item 10)
6 — Gear (26T) (P/O PL 10.5 Item 10)
7 — Collar (22) (P/O PL 10.5 Item 10)
8 809E55030 Spring
9 127K63011 Inverter Motor Assembly (REP
10.6)
10 — Damper (P/O PL 10.6 Item 9)
11 — Inverter Motor (P/O PL 10.6 Item
9)
12 — Bracket (P/O PL 10.6 Item 9)
13 — Motor Cover (P/O PL 10.5 Item
10)
14 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 10.5 Item
10)
15 — Gear Assembly (23T) (P/O PL 10.5
Item 10)
16 — Gear Assembly (22T/16T) (P/O PL
10.5 Item 10)
P L 1 0 . 7 I n v e r t e r 1 Tra n s p o r t ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Collar
2 — Clutch
3 413W66250 Bearing
4 — Gate Link
5 — Bearing
6 — Gear (17T)
7 — Rear Frame
8 — Top Chute
9 — Inverter Roll
10 — Upper Chute
11 — Inverter Dup Gate
12 — Middle Chute
13 — Inverter Dup Roll
14 — Lower Chute Assembly
15 110E93440 RH Cover Interlock Switch (S77-
301) (REP 10.7)
16 006K89502 Pinch Shaft
17 — Ball Bearing
18 — Clip
19 — Collar
20 — Front Frame
21 038E32620 Decurler Guide 1
22 038E32631 Decurler Guide 2
23 — Gear
24 — Pin
P L 1 0 . 8 I n v e r t e r 2 Tra n s p o r t ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 054K46114 Upper Chute Assembly
2 — Spring (P/O PL 10.8 Item 1)
3 059K62210 Pinch Roll
4 — Shaft (P/O PL 10.8 Item 1)
5 — Chute (P/O PL 10.8 Item 1)
6 — Upper Chute (P/O PL 10.8 Item 1)
7 105E98690 Eliminator
8 130K88401 IOT Exit Sensor
9 — Sensor Cover (P/O PL 10.5 Item
11)
10 130K87712 Invert In Sensor
11 — Nip Solenoid Cover (P/O PL 10.5
Item 11)
12 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 10.5 Item
11)
13 130E15170 Conductor
P L 1 0 . 9 I n v e r t e r 2 Tra n s p o r t ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Exit Roll Clutch (P/O PL 10.9 Item
32)
2 — Gear (18T) (P/O PL 10.9 Item 32)
3 — Collar (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
4 413W66150 Ball Bearing
5 — Exit Roll Stopper (P/O PL 10.5
Item 11)
6 — Spring (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
7 — Bearing (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
8 — Bearing (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
9 — Inverter 2 Frame (P/O PL 10.5
Item 11)
10 413W66250 Bearing
11 059K69341 Exit Roll
12 050K52540 Exit Gate
13 — Nip Washer (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
14 — Middle Chute (P/O PL 10.5 Item
11)
15 — Reverse Inverter Solenoid (P/O PL
10.9 Item 31)
16 054K29612 Middle Chute Assembly
17 — Link (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
18 127K39590 Duplex 1/2 Fan
19 — Roll Pinch Spring (P/O PL 10.5
Item 11)
20 059K33322 Pinch Roll
21 — Lower Chute (P/O PL 10.5 Item
11)
22 121K35071 Inverter Gate Solenoid
23 — Collar (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
24 — Nip Solenoid Cover (P/O PL 10.5
Item 11)
25 — Latch Spring (P/O PL 10.5 Item
11)
26 — Lever Bracket (P/O PL 10.5 Item
11)
27 — Cover Latch (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
28 — Latch Lever (P/O PL 10.5 Item 11)
29 — Link Assembly (P/O PL 10.9 Item
31)
30 — Spacer (P/O PL 10.9 Item 31)
31 121K54140 Release Invert Solenoid Assembly
32 005K83420 Exit Roll Clutch Assembly
P L 1 0 . 1 0 E x i t Fa n A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — Fan Cover
2 127K63670 Exit Fan Assembly
3 — Knob
4 — Fan Support
PL 12.1 OCT (1 of 2)
Item Part Description
1 050K50987 OCT (REP 12.1)
2 — Catch Tray (P/O PL 12.1 Item 1)
3 — Extension Tray (P/O PL 12.1 Item
1)
4 — Catch Tray Cover (P/O PL 12.1
Item 1)
5 — Plate (P/O PL 12.1 Item 1)
6 — Spring (P/O PL 12.1 Item 1)
7 — Center Tray (P/O PL 12.1 Item 1)
8 — Spring (P/O PL 12.1 Item 1)
9 — Base Tray Assembly (P/O PL 12.1
Item 1)
PL 12.2 OCT (2 of 2)
Item Part Description
1 — Bearing (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
2 — Gasket (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
3 930W00211 Tray Full Sensor (Q47-202) (REP
12.2)
4 — Clamp (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
5 127K39971 OCT Motor (REP 12.3)
6 — Shaft (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
7 — Rack (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
8 — Bracket (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
9 — Plate (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
10 — Motor Cover (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
11 930W00121 Rear Position Sensor (Q47-201),
Front Position Sensor (Q47-200)
(REP 12.2)
12 — Wire Harness (Not Spared)
13 — Wire Harness (Not Spared)
14 — Base Tray (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
15 — Wall Tray (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
16 — Support (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
17 — Bottom Cover (P/O PL 12.1 Item
9)
18 — Actuator (P/O PL 12.1 Item 9)
PL 12.3 SCT
Item Part Description
1 050K50991 SCT (REP 12.4)
2 — Base Tray (P/O PL 12.3 Item 1)
3 — Center Tray (P/O PL 12.3 Item 1)
4 — Catch Tray (P/O PL 12.3 Item 1)
5 — Extension Tray (P/O PL 12.3 Item
1)
6 — Wall Tray (P/O PL 12.3 Item 1)
7 — Catch Tray Cover (P/O PL 12.3
Item 1)
8 — Spring (P/O PL 12.3 Item 1)
9 — Spring (P/O PL 12.3 Item 1)
10 — Plate (P/O PL 12.3 Item 1)
11 — Bottom Cover (P/O PL 12.3 Item
1)
12 — Support (P/O PL 12.3 Item 1)
P L 2 0 . 1 Fa x U n i t ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Fax Chassis Assembly
2 — Front Fax Cover
3 — Rear Fax Cover
4 — Fax Mount Bracket
5 117K51200 Fax USB Cable
6 952K42720 Fax Power Harness
7 — Fax Blind Cover
8 — Harness Guide
P L 2 0 . 2 Fa x U n i t ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Fax Chassis (P/O PL 20.1 Item 1)
2 — Riser Bracket Assembly (P/O PL
20.1 Item 1)
3 — Speaker Bracket (P/O PL 20.1 Item
1)
4 930K00260 Speaker Assembly
5 — Fax Panel (P/O PL 20.1 Item 1)
6 — Fax Snap Cover (P/O PL 20.1 Item
1)
7 — Label (P/O PL 20.1 Item 1)
8 — Lower Fax Bracket (P/O PL 20.1
Item 1)
9 — Upper Fax Bracket (P/O PL 20.1
Item 1)
10 — Label (Traceability) (P/O PL 20.1
Item 1)
11 960K87696 Fax PWB (IND/BRA/ARG)
— 960K79266 Fax PWB (USSG/XCL)
— 960K81232 Fax PWB (XE/SA)
12 960K77546 AG3 PWB
13 960K77550 Riser PWB
P L 2 5 . 1 Co n v e n i e n c e S t a p l e r
Item Part Description
1 604K35700 Convenience Stapler (XE)
— 604K35710 Convenience Stapler (XC)
P L 2 8 . 1 Co v e r ( 1 o f 3 )
Item Part Description
1 948K24980 Front Cover Assembly
2 — Right Upper Cover Assembly (REP
28.1)
3 — Right Upper Cover (P/O PL 28.1
Item 2)
4 — Snap Cover (P/O PL 28.1 Item 2)
5 — Right Rear Upper Cover
6 848K42280 Waste Toner Cover Assembly
7 — Waste Toner Cover (P/O PL 28.1
Item 6)
8 121E92870 Magnet
9 — Right Front Lower Cover
10 — Hinge
11 — Right Lower Cover
12 — Right Rear Lower Cover
13 — EPSV Cover
14 — Blind Cover
15 — Label (Outlet)
16 — Label (Breaker)
17 — Bracket
18 — Inner Cover
19 — Label (Main Switch)
20 110K16280 Main Power Switch Assembly (REP
28.6)
21 — Bracket (P/O PL 28.1 Item 20)
22 110E11980 Front Cover Interlock Switch (S77-
303) (REP 28.6)
23 — Main Power Switch (P/O PL 28.1
Item 20) (REP 28.6)
24 — Wire harness (P/O PL 28.1 Item
20)
P L 2 8 . 2 Co v e r ( 2 o f 3 )
Item Part Description
1 — Front Cover
2 — Fusing Duct
3 — Hinge
4 032E21491 Guide
5 121E92870 Magnet
P L 2 8 . 3 Co v e r ( 3 o f 3 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rear Upper Right Cover (REP 28.5)
2 — Rear Upper Left Cover (REP 28.4)
3 — Rear Lower Cover (REP 28.3)
4 — Left Upper Cover (REP 28.2)
5 — Left Front Lower Cover
6 — Left Lower Cover
7 — Left Lower Rear Cover
8 — Filter Cover
9 — Blind Cover
10 — Blind Cover
11 — EPSV Cover
12 — Filter Cover
13 — Bracket
14 — Bracket
P L 2 8 . 4 Fr o n t P a n e l
Item Part Description
1 — Top Front Cover (REP 60.17)
2 — Clip Cover
3 — USB Cover
4 — Bracket Assembly
5 — Screw (M3 x 6)
6 — Core Blind Housing
7 — Outer Cover Assembly
8 122E92851 Pen Stylus
9 — ICCR Cover
10 — LID Cover
11 — Screw (Black)
P L 40 . 1 D ri ve U n it ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 007K87844 Fuser Drive Assembly (REP 40.1 ,
REP 40.6)
2 007K23663 Main Drive Assembly (REP 40.2)
3 007K22220 Developer Drive Assembly (K)
(REP 40.3)
4 068K24231 Gear Bracket Assembly
5 — Gear Assembly (28/31T) (P/O PL
40.1 Item 4)
6 — Gear Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item 4)
7 — Gear Assembly (31/33) (P/O PL
40.1 Item 4)
8 127K66560 Drum Motor Assembly (K)
(MOT42-006) (REP 40.5)
9 — Tension Bracket
10 — Fuser Unit Drive Assembly
11 — Guard (P/O PL 40.1 Item 10)
P L 40 . 2 D ri ve U n it ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 007K14754 Developer Drive Assembly (Y, M,
C) (REP 40.4)
2 127K64581 Drum Motor Assembly (Y, M, C)
3 — Drum Motor YMC PWB (P/O PL
40.2 Item 6)
4 — Plate (P/O PL 40.2 Item 6)
5 — PWB Support (P/O PL 40.2 Item 6)
6 960K35932 Drum Motor YMC PWB Assembly
(Y, M, C) (MOT77-011)
P L 4 0 . 3 Fu s e r D r i v e A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 007K89292 Gear Assembly
2 413W08350 Bearing
3 — Shaft (P/O PL 40.3 Item 1)
4 — Gear (35T) (P/O PL 40.3 Item 1)
5 — Gear (62T) (P/O PL 40.3 Item 1)
6 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.3 Item 1)
7 — Fuser Drive Motor (P/O PL 40.1
Item 1)
8 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item 1)
P L 40 . 4 Ma in D r ive A sse mb l y
Item Part Description
1 — Shaft Assembly (P/O PL 40.1 Item
2)
2 — Gear Assembly (86T) (P/O PL 40.1
Item 2)
3 — Gear Assembly (21T/42T) (P/O PL
40.1 Item 2)
4 — Gear Assembly (31T/44T) (P/O PL
40.1 Item 2)
5 — Gear Assembly (40T) (P/O PL 40.1
Item 2)
6 — Gear Assembly (42T) (P/O PL 40.1
Item 2)
7 013E87700 Ball Bearing
— 013E22230 Ball Bearing (alternative)
8 — Brake Assembly (P/O PL 40.1 Item
2)
9 — Upper Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item
2)
10 — Lower Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item
2)
11 121K33942 2nd BTR Cam Clutch
12 — Shaft (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
13 121K42230 Developer K Drive Clutch
Assembly
14 127K39620 Main Motor Assembly (MOT42-
001)
15 413W08350 Bearing
16 413W77359 Bearing
17 — Shaft (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
18 — Gear (17T) (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
19 — Gear (18T) (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
20 — Gear (53T) (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
21 — Gear (30T) (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
22 — Gear (53T) (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
23 — Gear (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
24 — Connector (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
25 — Housing (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
26 — PWB Support (P/O PL 40.1 Item 2)
P L 40 . 5 D eve l o p er Dr ive A s s e m bl y ( K )
Item Part Description
1 005E17830 Retainer
2 — Shaft Assembly (P/O PL 40.1 Item
3)
3 009E94920 Spring
4 — Pulley (20T) (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
5 — Idler Pulley (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
6 — Pulley (31T) (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
7 — Pulley Assembly (P/O PL 40.1 Item
3)
8 — Belt (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
9 — Bracket Assembly (P/O PL 40.1
Item 3)
10 — Tension Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item
3)
11 — Tension Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item
3)
12 413W08350 Bearing
13 413W08950 Bearing
14 423W52154 Belt
15 — Shaft (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
16 — Gear (18T) (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
17 — Spring (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
18 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
19 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
20 — Support (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
21 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.1 Item 3)
22 — Flange
P L 40 . 6 D eve l o p er Dr ive A s s e m bl y ( Y , M , C )
Item Part Description
1 — Coupling Assembly (P/O PL 40.2
Item 1)
2 — Retainer (P/O PL 40.6 Item 1)
3 — Coupling (P/O PL 40.6 Item 1)
4 009E94920 Spring
5 413W08950 Bearing
6 — Pulley (P/O PL 40.6 Item 1)
7 — Gear Assembly (P/O PL 40.2 Item
1)
8 — Gear Assembly (P/O PL 40.2 Item
1)
9 013E22230 Ball Bearing
10 — Bracket Assembly (P/O PL 40.2
Item 1)
11 — Spring (P/O PL 40.2 Item 1)
12 — Pulley Assembly (P/O PL 40.6 Item
13)
13 — Tension Pulley Assembly (P/O PL
40.2 Item 1)
14 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.6 Item 13)
15 — Tension Pulley Assembly (P/O PL
40.2 Item 1)
16 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.6 Item 15)
17 — Pulley
18 — Film (P/O PL 40.2 Item 1)
19 127K57180 Developer Motor Assembly (Y, M,
C) (MOT93-018)
20 — Belt (P/O PL 40.2 Item 1)
21 — Belt (P/O PL 40.2 Item 1)
22 — Gear (P/O PL 40.2 Item 1)
23 — Spring (P/O PL 40.2 Item 1)
24 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.2 Item 1)
25 — Coupling Assembly (P/O PL 40.2
Item 1)
26 — Coupling (P/O PL 40.6 Item 25)
27 — Spring (P/O PL 40.6 Item 25)
28 — Shaft (P/O PL 40.6 Item 25)
29 — Flange (Not Spared)
PL 40.7 NOHAD (1 of 3)
Item Part Description
1 — Main Filter Assembly
2 — PCC Duct (Not Spared)
3 — CC Duct (Not Spared)
4 — Duct (Not Spared)
5 — Main - K Duct (Not Spared)
6 — Bracket (Not Spared)
7 — Bracket (Not Spared)
8 — Blower Duct (P/O PL 40.7 Item 7)
9 127K70132 Blower Fan
10 — Cooling Fan Duct Assembly (P/O
PL 40.7 Item 24)
11 — Screw (P/O PL 40.7 Item 24)
12 — Connector (P/O PL 40.7 Item 24)
13 127K78110 Rear Cooling Fan
14 — Filter Case
15 — Rear ADD Fan Assembly
16 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.7 Item 15)
17 — Rear ADD Fan (P/O PL 40.7 Item
15)
18 — Connector (P/O PL 40.7 Item 15)
19 053K96200 Suction Filter
20 053K91911 Ozone Filter
21 — Upper Duct (P/O PL 40.7 Item 10)
22 — Lower Duct (P/O PL 40.7 Item 10)
23 — Seal (P/O PL 40.7 Item 10)
24 — Rear Cooling Fan Assembly
PL 40.8 NOHAD (2 of 3)
Item Part Description
1 — Y,M Cooling Duct (Not Spared)
2 — Fusing Duct (Not Spared)
3 — Fusing Duct (Not Spared)
4 127K63360 Fuser Exhaust Fan
5 — Screw (Not Spared)
6 — V-Transport Duct (Not Spared)
7 127K39571 V-Transport Fan
8 — Screw (Not Spared)
9 — Duct (Not Spared)
10 — Y Duct (Not Spared)
11 — M/C Duct (Not Spared)
PL 40.9 NOHAD (3 of 3)
Item Part Description
1 — Connector (P/O PL 40.9 Item 20)
2 — Duct (P/O PL 40.9 Item 20)
3 127K67550 Exit Roll Fan 1, Exit Roll Fan 2, Exit
Roll Fan 3, Front Fan
4 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.9 Item 20)
5 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 40.9 Item
20)
6 — CC Duct (Not Spared)
7 — Fusing Duct (Not Spared)
8 — Duct (P/O PL 40.9 Item 18)
9 — Inverter Front Fan (P/O PL 40.9
Item 18)
10 — Screw (P/O PL 40.9 Item 18)
11 — Bracket (P/O PL 40.9 Item 18)
12 — CC Seal (Not Spared)
13 — CC Duct (Not Spared)
14 127K60991 CC Intake Fan
15 — Screw (Not Spared)
16 053K91981 CC Filter
17 — Seal (Not Spared)
18 — Fan Assembly (P/O PL 40.9 Item
19)
19 — Fan Kit
20 — Duct Assembly
PL 60.1 ROS
Item Part Description
1 — Guide (Not Spared)
2 — Seal (Not Spared)
3 — Clamp (Not Spared)
4 062K29623 ROS Assembly (C, K) (REP 60.1)
5 062K29633 ROS Assembly (Y, M) (REP 60.2)
6 952K14370 Flat Cable (C, K) (Alternate) (REP
60.1)
— 952K45370 Flat Cable (C, K) (REP 60.1)
7 952K14360 Flat Cable (Y, M) (Alternate) (REP
60.2)
— 952K45360 Flat Cable (Y, M) (REP 60.2)
8 130K88740 Registration Control Temp Sensor
P L 6 0 . 2 I I T Co v e r
Item Part Description
1 — IIT Top Assembly (REF: PL 60.3)
2 822E52331 IIT Left Cover
3 822E52352 IIT Right Cover (W)
4 — IIT Rear Cover (REP 60.3)
5 — DADF IF Cover
6 — Pivot Bracket
7 — Pivot Stud
8 — Left Stopper
9 — Left Locate Bracket
10 — Right Locate Bracket
11 — Rock Brace Bracket
12 — IIT Right Stopper
13 — Foot Bracket
14 — Arm Shaft
15 — Arm Shaft Holder
16 — DADF Support Bracket
17 — Sensor Shield
18 — UI USB Cable Holder
P L 6 0 . 4 C C D Le n s
Item Part Description
1 — CCD Lens Cover Assembly (Not
Spared)
2 607K02350 CCD Lens Kit (REP 60.6)
3 — CCD PWB (P/O PL 60.4 Item 2)
(See NOTE)
4 — Conductor (P/O PL 60.4 Item 2)
5 — Pin Assembly (Jig) (P/O PL 60.4
Item 2)
6 — Lens Assembly (P/O PL 60.4 Item
2)
7 130K64150 APS Sensor1 (Q62-251) (REP
60.7)/APS Sensor2 (Q62-253)
(REP 60.8)
8 — APS Sensor Cover (Not Spared)
9 — APS Sensor Bracket (Not Spared)
10 952K35020 Wire Harness (CCD Power)
11 — Clamp (Not Spared)
12 952K42730 CCD-Cont Video Flat Cable
13 960K98030 IIT Trans PWB (REP 60.9)
14 — PWB Bracket (Not Spared)
15 117K50290 IIT-Cont I/O Flat Cable
16 952K45130 Wire Harness (Sig)
P L 6 0 . 5 Ca r r i a g e Ca b l e , M o t o r
Item Part Description
1 120K93040 Actuator Assembly
2 130E87280 Platen Angle Sensor (Q062-301)
(REP 60.14)
3 012K96420 Front Carriage Cable (REP 60.10)
4 012K96430 Rear Carriage Cable (REP 60.10)
5 020E21630 Idler Pulley
6 023E26740 Drive Belt
7 127K77850 Carriage Motor (MOT62-005)
(REP 60.11)
8 910W00612 Platen Interlock Switch (alterna-
tive) (REP 60.12)
— 910W00901 Platen Interlock Switch (S62-300)
(REP 60.12)
9 809E76840 Tension Spring
10 — Clamp (Not Spared)
11 — Clamp (Not Spared)
12 — IIT Registration Sensor Bracket
(Not Spared)
13 930W00112 IIT Registration Sensor (Q62-212)
(REP 60.13)
P L 6 0 . 6 Fu l l / H a l f Ra t e C a r r i a g e A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 041K95850 Half Rate Carriage Assembly (REP
60.16)
2 041K96632 Full Rate Carriage Assembly (REP
60.15)
3 — Cord Guide (P/O PL 60.6 Item 2)
4 — LED Flat Cable (P/O PL 60.6 Item
2)
5 — LED Bracket (P/O PL 60.6 Item 2)
6 — LED Lamp PWB (P/O PL 60.6 Item
2)
7 — Plate Bridge (P/O PL 60.6 Item 2)
8 — Cushion (P/O PL 60.6 Item 2)
9 — LED Lamp Assembly (P/O PL 60.6
Item 2)
P L 7 0 . 1 Tra y 1 / 2
Item Part Description
1 050K78150 Tray 1 Assembly (REP 70.1)
2 050K78161 Tray 2 Assembly (REP 70.2)
3 054K45691 Tray 1 Feed Out Chute Assembly
4 054E36442 Tray 1 Feed Out Chute
5 — Guide (P/O PL 70.1 Item 3)
6 859K16640 Tray 1 Feed Assembly (REF: PL
80.1) (REP 80.3)
7 — Tray 2 Connector Cover (Not
Spared)
8 054E33803 Tray 2 Feed Out Chute
9 — Chute (Not Spared)
10 — Rear Cover (Not Spared)
11 859K14800 Tray 2 Feed Assembly (REF: PL
80.3) (REP 80.7)
12 059E07240 Roll (Left)
13 059E07260 Roll (Right)
14 059E03510 Roll
15 110K17950 Tray 1 Paper Size Sensor (Q71-
202), Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor
(Q72-202) (REP 70.3)
16 — Not Used
17 803E07421 Stopper
18 — Spacer (Not Spared)
19 014E59990 Slide Lock
20 897E09920 Tray Label (1)
21 897E10220 Tray Label (2)
22 890E25610 Label (Instruction)
23 — Plate (Not Spared)
24 — Tray1 Connector Cover (Not
Spared)
P L 7 0 . 2 Tra y 3 / 4 ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 050K78171 Tray 3 Assembly (REP 70.4)
2 050K79420 Tray 4 Assembly (REP 70.7)
3 059K87381 Tray 4 Transport Assembly (REP
80.18)
4 — Shaft
5 — Stopper (Tray3)
6 059E05060 Roll (REP 70.11)
7 — Stopper (Tray4)
8 803E07450 Stopper
9 803E07460 Stopper
10 970E38961 Label (Caution)
11 890E25620 Label (Instruction)
12 890E10111 Label
13 897E10230 Tray Label (3)
14 897E10240 Tray Label (4)
15 059E04690 Roll (REP 70.11)
16 — Bracket
17 — Bracket
18 019E71680 Pad
19 — Label (Caution L)
20 — Label (Caution R)
P L 7 0 . 3 Tra y 3 / 4 ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Connector Cover
2 054E44560 Feed Out Chute
3 — Cover (Not Spared)
4 859K14800 Tray 3 Feed Assembly (REF: PL
80.5) (REP 80.11)
5 859K16650 Tray 4 Feed Unit
6 — Lower Chute (P/O PL 70.3 Item 5)
7 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.3 Item 5)
8 — Cover (P/O PL 70.3 Item 5)
9 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.3 Item 5)
10 — Front Bracket (P/O PL 70.3 Item 5)
11 — Tray 4 Feed Assembly (REF: PL
80.7) (Part number the same as
item 4) (REP 80.16)
12 — Pivot Bracket (Not Spared)
13 110K17960 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensor (Q73-
202), Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor
(Q74-202)
14 — Tray Guide (Not Spared)
P L 7 0 . 4 Tra y 1 A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 019E71680 Pad
2 — End Label F (Not Spared)
3 — Side Label (Not Spared)
4 — End Label R (Not Spared)
5 050K78150 Tray 1 Assembly (REP 70.1)
6 — Handle (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
7 — Latch (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
8 — Spring (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
9 — Cover (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
10 — Cover (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
11 — Tray 1 Cover (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
12 893E09490 Label (Max)
13 — Stopper (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
14 — Guide (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
15 038E39091 Rear Paper Guide
16 — Roll (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
17 — Gear (13T) (P/O PL 70.4 Item 33)
18 — Gear (60T) (P/O PL 70.4 Item 33)
19 — Gear (13T/60T) (P/O PL 70.4 Item
33)
20 807E13521 Pinion Gear
21 — End Paper Guide Link (P/O PL 70.4
Item 5)
22 — Plate (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
23 019K09580 Bottom Plate Pad
24 — Bottom Plate (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
25 038K22280 Front Paper Guide
26 — Stopper (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
27 120E33840 Actuator
28 — Actuator (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
29 809E47091 Spring (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
30 038E44700 End Paper Guide
31 — Lift Shaft (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
32 — Cassette (P/O PL 70.4 Item 5)
33 604K20542 Tray Gear Kit
P L 7 0 . 5 Tra y 2 A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 019E71680 Pad
2 — End Label F (Not Spared)
3 — Side Label (Not Spared)
4 — End Label R (Not Spared)
5 050K78161 Tray 2 Assembly (REP 70.2)
6 — Handle (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
7 — Latch (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
8 — Spring (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
9 — Cover (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
10 — Cover (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
11 — Tray Cover (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
12 893E09490 Label (Max)
13 038E39091 Rear Paper Guide
14 — Roll (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
15 — Gear (13T) (P/O PL 70.5 Item 31)
16 — Gear (60T) (P/O PL 70.5 Item 31)
17 — Gear (13T/60T) (P/O PL 70.5 Item
31)
18 807E13521 Pinion
19 — End Paper Guide Link (P/O PL 70.5
Item 5)
20 — Plate (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
21 019K09580 Bottom Plate Pad
22 — Bottom Plate (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
23 038K22280 Front Paper Guide
24 — Stopper (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
25 120E33840 Actuator
26 — Actuator (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
27 809E47091 Spring
28 038E44700 End Paper Guide
29 — Lift Shaft (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
30 — Cassette (P/O PL 70.5 Item 5)
31 604K20542 Tray Gear Kit
P L 7 0 . 6 Tra y 3 A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 050K78171 Tray 3 Assembly (REP 70.4)
2 — Tray 3 Cover Assembly (P/O PL
70.6 Item 1)
3 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.6 Item 1)
4 — Tray 3 (P/O PL 70.6 Item 1)
5 — Bottom Plate (P/O PL 70.6 Item 4)
6 — Cassette Assembly (P/O PL 70.6
Item 4)
7 006K98080 Lift Shaft Assembly (REP 70.6)
8 807E36210 Gear (18T) (REP 70.6)
9 — Pulley (P/O PL 70.6 Item 4)
10 413W11860 Bearing (REP 70.6)
11 — Plate Spring (P/O PL 70.6 Item 4)
12 019K93921 Brake (REP 70.6)
13 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.6 Item 4)
14 032E38000 Wire Guide (REP 70.6)
15 — Shaft (P/O PL 70.6 Item 4)
16 — Front Cable (P/O PL 70.6 Item 21)
17 — Pulley (P/O PL 70.6 Item 4)
18 020E48770 Pulley (REP 70.6)
19 — Front Wire Guide (P/O PL 70.6
Item 4)
20 019K09580 Bottom Pad
21 604K91950 Tray 3 Cable Kit (REP 70.5)
P L 7 0 . 7 Tra y 3 A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 007E78190 Pinion (REP 70.10)
2 007E78370 Rack (REP 70.10)
3 — Front Guide Assembly (P/O PL
70.6 Item 1)
4 — Front Guide (P/O PL 70.7 Item 3)
5 — Knob (P/O PL 70.7 Item 3)
6 — Knob Assembly (P/O PL 70.7 Item
3)
7 — Spring (P/O PL 70.7 Item 3)
8 — Rear Guide Assembly (P/O PL 70.6
Item 1)
9 893E09490 Label (Max)
10 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.6 Item 1)
11 032E37990 Rear Wire Guide (REP 70.6)
12 — Actuator (P/O PL 70.6 Item 1)
13 — Pulley (P/O PL 70.6 Item 1)
14 — Shaft (P/O PL 70.6 Item 1)
15 — Rear Cable (P/O PL 70.6 Item 21)
16 020E48770 Pulley (REP 70.6)
17 059E05040 Roll (REP 70.11)
18 059E05060 Roll (REP 70.11)
P L 7 0 . 8 Tra y 4 A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 050K79420 Tray 4 Assembly (REP 70.7)
2 948K20210 Tray 4 Cover Assembly
3 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.8 Item 1)
4 — Tray 4 (P/O PL 70.8 Item 1)
5 — Plate Spring (P/O PL 70.8 Item 4)
6 — Cassette Assembly (P/O PL 70.8
Item 4)
7 — Lift Shaft Assembly (P/O PL 70.8
Item 4)
8 807E36210 Gear (18T) (REP 70.9)
9 413W11860 Pulley (REP 70.9)
10 — Bearing (P/O PL 70.8 Item 4)
11 019K18200 Brake (REP 70.9)
12 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.8 Item 4)
13 019K09580 Bottom Pad
14 — Bottom Plate (P/O PL 70.8 Item 4)
15 — Front Wire Guide (P/O PL 70.8
Item 4)
16 — Front Cable (P/O PL 70.8 Item 4)
(REP 70.8)
17 — Pulley (P/O PL 70.8 Item 4)
18 — Shaft (P/O PL 70.8 Item 4)
P L 7 0 . 9 Tra y 4 A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 007E78190 Pinion (REP 70.10)
2 007E78370 Rack (REP 70.10)
3 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.8 Item 1)
4 — Rear Guide Assembly (P/O PL 70.8
Item 1)
5 893E09490 Label (Max)
6 — Actuator (P/O PL 70.8 Item 1)
7 — Front Guide Assembly (P/O PL
70.8 Item 1)
8 — Front Guide (P/O PL 70.9 Item 7)
9 — Knob (P/O PL 70.9 Item 7)
10 — Knob Assembly (P/O PL 70.9 Item
7)
11 — Spring (P/O PL 70.9 Item 7)
12 032E37990 Rear Wire Guide (REP 70.9)
13 — Pulley (P/O PL 70.8 Item 1)
14 604K91960 Tray 4 Repair Kit (Front and Rear
Cable) (REP 70.8)
15 — Shaft (P/O PL 70.8 Item 1)
16 059E05040 Roll (REP 70.11)
17 059E05060 Roll (REP 70.11)
P L 7 0 . 1 0 Tra y 5 / By p a s s A c c e s s o r y
Item Part Description
1 059K87397 MSI (REP 70.12)
2 893E44111 Label (Instruction)
3 893E44122 Label (Size)
4 — Label (Caution)
P L 7 0 . 1 1 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Co v e r
Item Part Description
1 — Sector Gear (P/O PL 70.11 Item
24)
2 — Compression Spring (P/O PL 70.11
Item 24)
3 — Lock Pin (P/O PL 70.11 Item 24)
4 — Lock Plate (P/O PL 70.11 Item 24)
5 110E11430 Cover Interlock Switch (S77-304)
(REP 70.13)
6 — Screw (M2.3x9) (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1)
7 — Switch Bracket (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
8 — Front Bracket (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
9 — Rear Bracket (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
10 — Tray 5/Bypass (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
11 802E55622 Front Cover 1 (REP 70.14)
12 802E55634 Rear Cover 1 (REP 70.14)
13 802E55641 Front Cover 2 (REP 70.14)
14 802E55652 Rear Cover 2 (REP 70.14)
15 — Upper Cover (REP 70.14)
16 802K57485 Lower Cover Assembly (REP
70.14)
17 — Torsion Spring (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
18 — Lower Plate (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
19 962K17864 MSI Wire Harness
20 893E16170 Label (Max)
21 — Label (Number)
22 — Harness Guide (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
23 — Harness Cover (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
24 — Lock Gear Assembly (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1)
25 — MSI Lower Cover (P/O PL 70.11
Item 16)
26 — Spring (P/O PL 70.11 Item 16)
27 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.11 Item 16)
P L 7 0 . 1 2 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Co m p o n e n t
Item Part Description
1 — MSI Damper (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
2 007E79331 Sector Gear
3 007E79350 Gear (19T)
4 — Sleeve Bearing (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
5 — Sleeve Bearing (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
6 — Sleeve Bearing (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
7 050K78453 MSI Tray
8 059K55668 Feeder (REF: PL 80.15)
9 801K50651 MSI Lift Up Motor Assembly (REF:
PL 70.13)
10 — MSI Front Frame (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1)
P L 7 0 . 1 4 Tra y 5 / By p a s s
Item Part Description
1 — Lower Tray (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
2 050E19822 Extension Tray (REP 70.15)
3 — MSI Tray (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
4 — Bottom Plate (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
5 802E55680 Tray Lower Cover
6 038E26771 Front Side Guide (REP 70.15)
7 038E26781 Rear Side Guide (REP 70.15)
8 038E30911 Paper Guide (REP 70.15)
9 — Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
10 — Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
11 — Gear Plate (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
12 930W00111 MSI No Paper Sensor (Q75-202)
(REP 70.16)
13 130K64361 MSI Paper Set Sensor (Q750-203)
(REP 70.16)
14 130K64432 MSI Paper Size Sensor (Q75-200)
(REP 70.16)
15 — Shaft (P/O PL 70.10 Item 1)
16 007E79700 Pinion Gear
17 — Front Rack Gear (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1)
18 — Rear Rack Gear (P/O PL 70.10
Item 1)
19 809E49930 Compression Spring
20 012E11760 Sensor Link
21 — MSI Tray Wire Harness (P/O PL
70.10 Item 1)
22 — Harness Cover (P/O PL 70.10 Item
1)
P L 8 0 . 1 Tra y 1 Fe e d A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rail (P/O PL 70.1 Item 6)
2 807E30640 Gear (28T/21T)
3 013E26530 Bearing (6)
4 — Chute (P/O PL 70.1 Item 6)
5 — Upper Frame Assembly (P/O PL
70.1 Item 6)
6 120E22481 Actuator (REP 80.2)
7 930W00123 Tray 1 Level Sensor (Q71-201),
Tray 1 No Paper Sensor (Q71-200)
(REP 80.2)
8 930W00211 Tray 1 Pre Feed Sensor (Q71-100)
(REP 80.2)
9 005K83081 One Way Clutch
10 007K98130 One Way Gear
11 006K23221 Shaft Assembly Drive
12 807E20300 Gear (25T)
13 014E44770 Spacer
14 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.1 Item 6)
15 — Harness Holder (P/O PL 70.1 Item
6)
16 127K52790 Tray 1 Lift/Feed Motor (MOT71-
001) (REP 80.1)
17 807E00390 Gear (31T)
18 807E00800 Gear (13T)
19 809E50531 Spring
20 — Rear Frame Assembly (P/O PL 70.1
Item 6)
21 — Harness Guide (Front) (P/O PL
70.1 Item 6)
22 — Harness Guide (Rear) (P/O PL 70.1
Item 6)
23 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.1 Item 6)
24 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.1 Item 6)
P L 8 0 . 2 Tra y 1 Fe e d A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rear Frame (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
2 005K05890 Oneway Clutch
3 005K08820 Clutch (22T)
4 005K09290 Friction Clutch
5 — Nudger Shaft (P/O PL 80.1 Item
20)
6 — Retard Shaft (P/O PL 80.1 Item
20)
7 — Feed Shaft (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
8 807E20330 Gear (29T)
9 — Lever (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
10 013E40800 Bearing (6)
11 014E45030 Spacer
12 — Holder (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
13 607K12020 Feed/Nudger/Retard Roll Kit (Con-
tains All 3 Rolls) (REP 80.4)
14 — Feed in Chute (P/O PL 80.1 Item
20)
15 — Gear (25T) (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
16 — Spring (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
17 — Spring (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
18 — Spring (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
19 — Bearing (Not Spared)
20 — Nudger Support (P/O PL 80.1 Item
20)
21 — Retard Support (P/O PL 80.1 Item
20)
22 807E30650 Gear (25T)
23 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.1 Item
20)
24 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.1 Item 20)
P L 8 0 . 3 Tra y 2 Fe e d A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rail (P/O PL 70.1 Item 11)
2 807E30640 Gear (29T/24T)
3 013E26530 Bearing (6)
4 — Chute (P/O PL 70.1 Item 11)
5 — Upper Frame Assembly (P/O PL
70.1 Item 11)
6 120E22481 Actuator (REP 80.6)
7 930W00123 Tray 2 Level Sensor (Q72-201),
Tray 2 No Paper Sensor (Q72-200)
(REP 80.6)
8 930W00211 Tray 2 Pre Feed Sensor (Q72-100)
(REP 80.6)
9 005K83081 One Way Clutch Assembly
10 007K98130 One Way Gear Assembly
11 807E30650 Shaft Assembly Drive
12 807E20300 Gear (25T)
13 014E44770 Spacer
14 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.1 Item 11)
15 — Harness Holder (P/O PL 70.1 Item
11)
16 127K52790 Tray 2 Lift/Feed Motor (MOT72-
001) (REP 80.5)
17 807E00390 Gear (31T)
18 807E00800 Gear (13T)
19 809E50531 Spring
20 — Rear Frame Assembly (P/O PL 70.1
Item 11)
21 — Harness Guide (Front) (P/O PL
70.1 Item 11)
22 — Harness Guide (Rear) (P/O PL 70.1
Item 11)
23 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.1 Item
11)
24 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.1 Item
11)
P L 8 0 . 4 Tra y 2 Fe e d A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rear Frame (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
2 005K05890 One Way Clutch
3 005K08820 Clutch (25T)
4 005K83300 Friction Clutch
5 — Nudger Shaft (P/O PL 80.3 Item
20)
6 — Retard Shaft (P/O PL 80.3 Item
20)
7 — Feed Shaft (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
8 807E20330 Gear (29T)
9 — Lever (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
10 013E40800 Bearing (6)
11 014E45030 Spacer
12 — Holder (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
13 607K12020 Feed/Nudger/Retard Roll Kit (Con-
tains All 3 Rolls) (REP 80.8)
14 — Feed In Chute (P/O PL 80.3 Item
20)
15 — Gear (25T) (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
16 — Spring (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
17 — Spring (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
18 — Spring (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
19 — Bearing (Not Spared)
20 — Nudger Support (P/O PL 80.3 Item
20)
21 — Retard Support (P/O PL 80.3 Item
20)
22 807E30650 Gear (27T)
23 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.3 Item
20)
24 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.3 Item 20)
P L 8 0 . 5 Tra y 3 Fe e d A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rail (P/O PL 70.3 Item 4)
2 807E30640 Gear (29T/24T)
3 013E26530 Bearing
4 — Chute (P/O PL 70.3 Item 4)
5 — Upper Frame Assembly (P/O PL
70.3 Item 4)
6 120E22481 Actuator (REP 80.10)
7 930W00123 Tray 3 Level Sensor (Q73-201),
Tray 3 No Paper Sensor (Q73-200)
(REP 80.10)
8 930W00211 Tray 3 Pre Feed Sensor (Q73-100)
(REP 80.10)
9 005K83081 One Way Clutch Assembly
10 007K98130 One Way Gear Assembly
11 006K23221 Shaft Assembly Drive
12 807E20300 Gear (25T)
13 014E44770 Spacer
14 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.3 Item 4)
15 — Harness Holder (P/O PL 70.3 Item
4)
16 127K52790 Tray3 Feed Lift Motor (MOT73-
001) (REP 80.9)
17 807E00390 Gear (31T)
18 807E00800 Gear (13T)
19 809E50531 Spring
20 — Rear Frame Assembly (P/O PL 70.3
Item 4)
21 — Harness Guide (Front) (P/O PL
70.3 Item 4)
22 — Harness Guide (Rear) (P/O PL 70.3
Item 4)
23 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.3 Item 4)
24 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.3 Item 4)
P L 8 0 . 6 Tra y 3 Fe e d A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rear Frame (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
2 005K05890 Oneway Clutch
3 005K08820 Clutch
4 005K83300 Friction Clutch
5 — Nudger Shaft (P/O PL 80.5 Item
20)
6 — Retard Shaft (P/O PL 80.5 Item
20)
7 — Feed Shaft (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
8 807E20330 Gear (29T)
9 — Lever (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
10 013E40800 Bearing (6)
11 014E45030 Spacer
12 — Holder (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
13 607K12020 Feed/Nudger/Retard Roll Kit (Con-
tains All 3 Rolls) (REP 80.12)
14 — Feed In Chute (P/O PL 80.5 Item
20)
15 — Gear (25T) (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
16 — Spring (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
17 — Spring (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
18 — Spring (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
19 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
20 — Nudger Support (P/O PL 80.5 Item
20)
21 — Retard Support (P/O PL 80.5 Item
20)
22 807E30650 Gear (25T)
23 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
24 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.5 Item 20)
P L 8 0 . 7 Tra y 4 Fe e d A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rail (P/O PL 70.3 Item 11)
2 807E30640 Gear (29T/24T)
3 013E40800 Bearing (6)
4 — Chute (P/O PL 70.3 Item 11)
5 — Upper Frame Assembly (P/O PL
70.3 Item 11)
6 120E22481 Actuator (REP 80.15)
7 930W00123 Tray 4 Level Sensor (Q74-201),
Tray 4 No Paper Sensor (Q74-200)
(REP 80.15)
8 930W00211 Tray 4 Pre Feed Sensor (REP
80.15)
9 005K83081 Oneway Clutch Assembly
10 007K98130 Oneway Gear Assembly
11 006K23221 Shaft Assembly Drive
12 807E20300 Gear (29T)
13 014E44770 Spacer
14 — Bracket (P/O PL 70.3 Item 11)
15 — Harness Holder (P/O PL 70.3 Item
11)
16 127K52790 Tray 4 Lift/Feed Motor (MOT74-
001) (REP 80.14)
17 807E00390 Gear (31T)
18 807E00800 Gear (13T)
19 809E50531 Spring
20 — Rear Frame Assembly (P/O PL 70.3
Item 11)
21 — Harness Guide (Front) (P/O PL
70.3 Item 11)
22 — Harness Guide (Rear) (P/O PL 70.3
Item 11)
23 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.3 Item
11)
24 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 70.3 Item
11)
P L 8 0 . 8 Tra y 4 Fe e d A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Rear Frame (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
2 005K05890 Oneway Clutch
3 005K08820 Clutch (25T)
4 005K83300 Friction Clutch
5 — Nudger Shaft (P/O PL 80.7 Item
20)
6 — Retard Shaft (P/O PL 80.7 Item
20)
7 — Feed Shaft (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
8 807E20330 Gear (29T)
9 — Lever (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
10 013E40800 Bearing (6)
11 014E45030 Spacer
12 — Holder (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
13 607K12020 Feed/Nudger/Retard Roll Kit (Con-
tains All 3 Rolls) (REP 80.17)
14 — Feed In Chute (P/O PL 80.7 Item
20)
15 — Gear (25T) (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
16 — Spring (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
17 — Spring (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
18 — Spring (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
19 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
20 — Nudger Support (P/O PL 80.7 Item
20)
21 — Retard Support (P/O PL 80.7 Item
20)
22 807E30650 Gear (25T)
23 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
24 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.7 Item 20)
P L 8 0 . 9 Tra y 4 Tra n s p o r t A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 413W88650 Ball Bearing (REP 80.18)
2 — Upper Transport Chute (P/O PL
70.2 Item 3)
3 — Lower Transport Chute (P/O PL
70.2 Item 3)
4 059E99310 Pinch Roll (REP 80.18)
5 — Takeaway Roll Assembly (P/O PL
70.2 Item 3)
6 — Not used
7 — Joint (P/O PL 80.9 Item 5)
8 — Takeaway Roll (P/O PL 80.9 Item
5)
9 — Spring (P/O PL 80.9 Item 5)
10 — Support (P/O PL 70.2 Item 3)
11 — Pinch Spring (P/O PL 70.2 Item 3)
12 — Label (P/O PL 70.2 Item 3)
13 — Roll (P/O PL 70.2 Item 3)
14 — Pulley (P/O PL 70.2 Item 3)
15 — Collar (P/O PL 70.2 Item 3)
16 — Belt (P/O PL 70.2 Item 3)
17 — Shaft (P/O PL 70.2 Item 3)
P L 8 0 . 1 0 Ta ke a w a y Ro l l
Item Part Description
1 054K44041 Chute Assembly (REP 80.20)
2 — Chute (P/O PL 80.10 Item 1)
3 130K76910 Feed Out Sensor 2 (Q72-101),Feed
Out Sensor 3 (Q73-101) (REP
80.21)
4 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.10 Item
1)
5 054K44051 Chute Assembly (REP 80.20)
6 — Chute (P/O PL 80.10 Item 5)
7 — Not used
8 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.10 Item
5)
9 859K16740 Takeaway Roll 1 Assembly (REP
80.22)
10 — Gear (18T) (P/O PL 80.10 Item 9)
11 413W08350 Bearing (REP 80.22)
12 — Takeaway Roll 1 (P/O PL 80.10
Item 9)
13 413W88650 Bearing (REP 80.23)
14 859K16770 Takeaway Roll 2/3/4 Assembly
(REP 80.23)
15 — Takeaway Roll 2/3/4 (P/O PL
80.10 Item 14)
16 930W00211 Feed Out Sensor 4 (Q74-101) (REP
80.21)
17 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.10 Item 19)
18 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.10 Item
19)
19 — Sensor Bracket Assembly (Not
Spared)
20 — Chute Assembly (Not Spared)
P L 8 0 . 1 1 Le f t C h u t e Co v e r
Item Part Description
1 — Cover (P/O PL 80.11 Item 23)
2 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.11 Item 23)
3 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.11 Item
23)
4 110E11420 L/H Cover Interlock Switch (S77-
300) (REP 80.24)
5 — Bracket (Not Spared)
6 068K55701 Latch Bracket (REP 80.27)
7 068K55711 Latch Bracket (REP 80.27)
8 848K43293 Left Chute Cover Assembly (REP
80.25)
9 — Hook (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
10 — Handle (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
11 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
12 — Bearing (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
13 059E99241 Pinch Roll (REP 80.26)
14 — Left Chute Cover (P/O PL 80.11
Item 8)
15 — Shaft (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
16 — Spring (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
17 — Spring (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
18 — Latch (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
19 — Label (P/O PL 80.11 Item 8)
20 — Upper Chute (P/O PL 80.11 Item
8)
21 — Lower Chute (P/O PL 80.11 Item
8)
22 068K55791 Hinge (REP 80.27)
23 — L/H Cover Assembly (Not Spared)
24 — Label (1) (Option) (Not Spared)
P L 8 0 . 1 2 Ta ke a w a y D r i v e
Item Part Description
1 — Gear (28T) (Not Spared)
2 — Gear (45T) (Not Spared)
3 — Collar (Not Spared)
4 — Pulley (21T/36T) (Not Spared)
(REP 80.30)
5 059E03590 Roll
6 — Pulley (21T/52T)
7 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.12 Item 23)
8 — Pulley (14T) (P/O PL 80.12 Item
23 , 24)
9 — Spring (Not Spared)
10 007K17372 T/A Drive Assembly (REP 80.28)
11 — Shaft (P/O PL 80.12 Item 10)
12 — Gear (26T) (P/O PL 80.12 Item
10)
13 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.12 Item 10)
14 121K47590 Takeaway Clutch 1/2 (REP 80.29)
15 — Takeaway Motor (P/O PL 80.12
Item 10) (REP 80.13)
16 413W08350 Ball Bearing (REP 80.30)
17 413W77359 Bearing (REP 80.30)
18 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.12 Item 10)
19 — Gear (41T) (P/O PL 80.12 Item
10)
20 — Gear (54T) (P/O PL 80.12 Item
10)
21 423W50454 Belt (REP 80.30)
22 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.12 Item 24)
23 — Tension Bracket Assembly (Not
Spared)
24 — Tension Bracket Assembly (Not
Spared)
P L 8 0 . 1 3 Tra y 3 / 4 G e a r A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 049K04240 Tray 3 Gear Assembly (REP 80.19)
2 — Gear (17T/50T) (P/O PL 80.13
Item 1)
3 — Gear (16T/48T) (P/O PL 80.13
Item 1)
4 — Gear (51T) (P/O PL 80.13 Item 1)
5 — Gear (18T) (P/O PL 80.13 Item 1)
6 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.13 Item 1)
7 049K04260 Tray 4 Gear Assembly (REP 80.19)
8 — Gear (17T/50T) (P/O PL 80.13
Item 7)
9 — Gear (16T/48T) (P/O PL 80.13
Item 7)
10 — Gear (57T) (P/O PL 80.13 Item 7)
11 — Gear (18T) (P/O PL 80.13 Item 7)
12 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.13 Item 7)
13 — Bracket (Not Spared)
14 017E94310 Caster
15 417W51049 Caster
— 017K05390 Caster (alternative)
16 417W51149 Caster
17 — Wire Harness (Not Spared)
18 — Nut (Not Spared)
19 — Wire Harness (Main) (Not Spared)
P L 8 0 . 1 4 Tra y 5 / By p a s s C h u t e A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — Chute (Not Spared)
2 054K53111 Chute Assembly (REP 80.31)
3 — Frame Assembly (P/O PL 80.14
Item 2)
4 — Lower chute Assembly (P/O PL
80.14 Item 2)
5 — Upper Chute (P/O PL 80.14 Item
2)
6 059K26201 Take Away Roll Assembly (REP
80.32)
7 059K37990 Pinch Roll (REP 80.33)
8 962K17850 Wire Harness
9 413W08350 Bearing (REP 80.32)
10 — Gear Cover (P/O PL 80.14 Item 2)
11 — Shaft (P/O PL 80.14 Item 2)
12 — Gear (25T) (P/O PL 80.14 Item 2)
13 809E54941 Spring (REP 80.33)
14 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.14 Item 2)
15 — Support (P/O PL 80.14 Item 2)
16 930W00211 Pre Registration Sensor (Q77-101)
(REP 80.34)
17 — Chute Assembly (Not Spared)
18 — Harness (P/O PL 80.14 Item 17)
19 — Chute (P/O PL 80.14 Item 17)
20 130K71370 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (Q71-101)
(REP 80.35)
21 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.14 Item 17)
22 — Label (Regi. Information) (Not
Spared)
P L 8 0 . 1 5 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Fe e d e r Co m p o n e n t
Item Part Description
1 — Feeder Front Frame (P/O PL 70.12
Item 8)
2 — Feeder Rear Frame (P/O PL 70.12
Item 8)
3 012E11041 Solenoid Link (REP 80.36)
4 121K31341 MSI Nudger Solenoid (SOL75-
003) (REP 80.36)
5 — Torsion Spring (P/O PL 70.12 Item
8)
6 — Motor Bracket (P/O PL 70.12 Item
8)
7 007E78770 Gear (25T) (REP 80.37)
8 — Shaft (P/O PL 70.12 Item 8)
9 007E78760 Gear (19T) (REP 80.37)
10 007E78780 Gear (25T) (REP 80.37)
11 007K88730 One Way Clutch Gear (23T/27T)
(REP 80.37)
12 — Block (P/O PL 70.12 Item 8)
13 059K26591 Retard Roll (P/O PL 80.15 Item
22)
14 059K26691 Feed Roll
15 059K26702 Nudger Roll
16 — MSI Lower Feeder (REF: PL 80.17)
17 059K75863 MSI Upper Feeder (REF: PL 80.16)
18 127K38252 MSI Feed Motor (MOT75-001)
19 013E25530 Sleeve Bearing (REP 80.37)
20 413W66250 Ball Bearing (REP 80.37)
21 — Solenoid Cover (P/O PL 70.12
Item 8)
22 604K23660 Feed Roll Kit (Contains All 3 Rolls)
(REP 80.38)
P L 8 0 . 1 6 Tra y 5 / By p a s s U p p e r Fe e d e r Co m p o n e n t
Item Part Description
1 — Upper Feeder Frame (P/O PL
80.15 Item 17)
2 003E59570 Latch (REP 80.39)
3 — Latch Shaft (P/O PL 80.15 Item
17)
4 006K23314 Feed/Nudger Shaft (REP 80.39)
5 007E78180 Gear (Spur 25T) (REP 80.39)
6 — Lever (P/O PL 80.15 Item 17)
7 013E25540 Sleeve Bearing (REP 80.39)
8 — Spacer (P/O PL 80.15 Item 17)
9 — Pin (P/O PL 80.15 Item 17)
10 — Upper Rear Chute (P/O PL 80.15
Item 17)
11 — Upper Chute (P/O PL 80.15 Item
17)
12 930W00112 MSI Lift Up Sensor (Q75-201),
MSI No Paper Sensor (Q75-200)
(REP 80.40)
13 — Solenoid Guide (P/O PL 80.15
Item 17)
14 — Torsion Spring (P/O PL 80.15 Item
17)
15 120E21900 Actuator (REP 80.40)
16 930W00211 Pre Feed Sensor (Q75-100) (REP
80.40)
17 — MSI Upper Feeder Wire Harness
(P/O PL 80.15 Item 17)
18 — MSI Upper Feeder Cover (P/O PL
80.15 Item 17)
19 — Guide (P/O PL 80.15 Item 17)
20 — Upper Guide (P/O PL 80.15 Item
17)
P L 8 0 . 1 7 Tra y 5 / By p a s s Lo w e r Fe e d e r Co m p o n e n t
Item Part Description
1 — MSI Lower Feeder Frame (P/O PL
80.15 Item 16)
2 — Retard Shaft (P/O PL 80.17 Item
13)
3 — Retard Bracket (P/O PL 80.17 Item
13)
4 — Collar (P/O PL 80.17 Item 13)
5 005K06701 Friction Clutch (REP 80.41)
6 007E78170 Gear (15T)
7 007E89760 Gear (22T)
8 013E23600 Sleeve Bearing (Length: 5mm)
9 013E23610 Sleeve Bearing (Length: 6.6mm)
(REP 80.41)
10 — Retard Slide (P/O PL 80.15 Item
16)
11 — Lower Chute (P/O PL 80.15 Item
16)
12 809E41221 Compression Spring (REP 80.41)
13 006K23135 Retard Shaft Assembly (REP
80.41)
P L 8 0 . 1 8 Re t a r d / Fe e d / N u d g e r Ro l l Co m p o n e n t
Item Part Description
1 — Nudger Support (P/O PL 80.16
Item 4)
2 — Nudger Bracket (P/O PL 80.16
Item 4)
3 — Shaft (P/O PL 80.16 Item 4)
4 — Gear (23T) (P/O PL 80.16 Item 4)
5 — Gear (20T) (P/O PL 80.16 Item 4)
6 — One Way Clutch Gear (26T) (P/O
PL 80.16 Item 4)
7 — One Way Clutch Gear (22T) (P/O
PL 80.16 Item 4)
8 — Nudger Lever (P/O PL 80.16 Item
4)
9 — Sleeve Bearing (P/O PL 80.16 Item
4)
10 — Sleeve Bearing (P/O PL 80.16 Item
4)
11 — Spacer (P/O PL 80.16 Item 4)
12 — Pin (P/O PL 80.16 Item 4)
13 — Torsion Spring (P/O PL 80.16 Item
4)
P L 8 0 . 1 9 D ra we r U n i t
Item Part Description
1 803E19950 Knob
2 014E45620 Block
3 — Connector Bracket Assembly (Not
Spared)
4 — Shoulder Screw (P/O PL 80.19
Item 3)
5 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 3)
6 913W12117 Connector
7 913W12124 Connector
8 — Guide Assembly (Not Spared)
9 — Roller (P/O PL 80.19 Item 8)
10 — Shaft (P/O PL 80.19 Item 8)
11 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 8)
12 — Guide Assembly (Not Spared)
13 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 12)
14 — Roller (P/O PL 80.19 Item 12)
15 — Shaft (P/O PL 80.19 Item 12)
16 050K71504 Drawer Assembly (REF: PL 80.20,
PL 80.21) (REP 80.42)
17 — Roller (Not Spared)
18 801K32631 Right Rail
19 801K32642 Left Rail
20 — Drawer Cover Assembly (Not
Spared)
21 — Drawer Cover (P/O PL 80.19 Item
20)
22 — Label (P/O PL 80.19 Item 20)
23 — Label (Instruction 2A) (P/O PL
80.19 Item 20)
24 — Label (Instruction 2B) (P/O PL
80.19 Item 20)
25 — Shaft (Not Spared)
26 — Shoulder Screw (Not Spared)
27 — Screw (Not Spared)
28 — Indicator Stopper (Not Spared)
29 059K87216 Registration Transport Assembly
(REF: PL 80.23) (REP 80.43)
30 859K15281 Vacuum Transport Assembly (REF:
PL 80.25) (REP 80.58)
31 029E35540 Guide Pin
32 059K68397 2ND BTR Roll Assembly (REF: PL
90.19) (REP 90.4)
33 — Indicator Stopper (P/O PL 80.19
Item 16)
34 — Label (Caution) (P/O PL 80.19
Item 16)
35 — Connector Cover (Not Spared)
36 — Label (Caution) (Not Spared)
P L 8 0 . 2 0 D ra we r A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 003K13455 Drawer Latch
2 — Tension Bracket (P/O PL 80.19
Item 16)
3 — Frame Assembly (P/O PL 80.19
Item 16)
4 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 16)
5 — Duct (P/O PL 80.19 Item 16)
6 — Connector (P/O PL 80.19 Item 16)
7 127K49693 Duplex Motor Assembly (REP
80.45)
8 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.20 Item 7)
9 — Dup Motor (P/O PL 80.20 Item 7)
10 499W17061 Idler Pulley
11 130K87770 Fuser Entrance Sensor (REP 80.44)
12 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 16)
13 423W01554 Belt (REP 80.45)
14 499W14524 Pulley (REP 80.45)
15 — Idler Pulley (P/O PL 80.19 Item
16)
16 — Spring (P/O PL 80.19 Item 16)
17 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 16)
18 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 16)
19 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 16)
20 — Wire Harness (Not Spared)
21 913W12113 Connector
22 — Wire Harness (Not Spared)
23 913W12114 Connector
24 — Sensor Cover (P/O PL 80.19 Item
16)
P L 8 0 . 2 1 D ra we r A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 054K52793 Duplex Upper Chute Assembly
(REP 80.46)
2 — Pulley (P/O PL 80.21 Item 1)
3 — Duplex Upper Chute (P/O PL
80.21 Item 1)
4 059K33503 Duplex Roller 1 (REP 80.47)
5 059K33512 Duplex Roller 2 (REP 80.47)
6 130K87881 Duplex In Sensor (Q77-107), Du-
plex Out Sensor (Q77-109) (REP
80.48)
7 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.21 Item 1)
8 413W75959 Bearing (REP 80.47)
9 499W14124 Pulley (REP 80.47)
10 — Washer (P/O PL 80.21 Item 1)
11 059K82580 Duplex Roller 3 (REP 80.47)
12 054K52381 Lower Duplex Chute Assembly
(REP 80.49)
13 — Stopper (P/O PL 80.21 Item 12)
14 — Lever (P/O PL 80.21 Item 12)
15 — Tape Guide (P/O PL 80.21 Item
12)
16 — Lower Dup Chute (P/O PL 80.21
Item 12)
17 059K33351 Pinch Roll
18 413W11660 Bearing
19 — Latch Shaft (P/O PL 80.21 Item
12)
20 — Lever Shaft (P/O PL 80.21 Item
12)
21 — Spring (P/O PL 80.21 Item 12)
22 899E05630 Spring
23 — Spring (P/O PL 80.21 Item 12)
24 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.21 Item 12)
25 — Label (2b) (P/O PL 80.21 Item 12)
26 — Latch (P/O PL 80.21 Item 12)
27 — Knob (P/O PL 80.21 Item 12)
28 899E05621 Spring
29 — Sensor Cover (Not Spared)
30 — Bracket (Not Spared)
P L 8 0 . 2 2 P r e Re g i s t r a t i o n M o t o r A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 049K31140 Pre Registration Motor Assembly
(MOT77-006) (REP 80.50)
2 — Damper (P/O PL 80.22 Item 1)
3 — Collar (P/O PL 80.22 Item 1)
4 — Gear (20T) (P/O PL 80.22 Item 1)
5 — Spring (P/O PL 80.22 Item 1)
6 — Gear (34T) (P/O PL 80.22 Item 1)
7 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.22 Item 1)
8 — Gear (34T) (P/O PL 80.22 Item 1)
9 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.22 Item 1)
10 — Bracket Assembly (P/O PL 80.22
Item 1)
11 — Bracket Assembly (P/O PL 80.22
Item 1)
12 127K39650 Pre Registration Motor (MOT77-
006) (REP 80.50)
P L 8 0 . 2 3 Re g i s t ra t i o n Tra n s p o r t A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — Screw (P/O PL 80.19 Item 29)
2 010K92025 Pre Registration Slide Assembly
(REP 80.51)
3 — Lower Chute (P/O PL 80.19 Item
29)
4 013E23631 Bearing
5 — Upper Chute (P/O PL 80.23 Item
25)
6 — Roll Assembly (P/O PL 80.23 Item
25)
7 — Spring (P/O PL 80.23 Item 25)
8 — Spring (P/O PL 80.23 Item 25)
9 — Support (P/O PL 80.23 Item 25)
10 — Label (P/O PL 80.23 Item 25)
11 — Registration Chute Assembly (P/O
PL 80.19 Item 29)
12 059K62290 Registration Roll (REP 80.52)
13 127K66450 Registration Motor (Alternate)
(MOT77-007) (REP 80.53)
— 127K39641 Registration Motor (MOT77-007)
(REP 80.53)
14 413W82370 Bearing (REP 80.52)
15 — Front Frame Assembly (P/O PL
80.19 Item 29)
16 930W00211 Registration Out Sensor (REP
80.54)
17 — Registration Cover (P/O PL 80.19
Item 29)
18 — Registration In Sensor (REP 80.54)
19 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.19 Item
29)
20 — Gear (20T/35T) (P/O PL 80.19
Item 29)
21 — Gear (47T) (P/O PL 80.19 Item
29)
22 809E41710 Spring (REP 80.55)
23 809E95940 Spring (REP 80.55)
24 — Rear Frame Assembly (P/O PL
80.19 Item 29)
25 054K53001 Upper Chute Assembly (REP
80.55)
P L 8 0 . 2 4 P r e Re g i s t r a t i o n S l i d e A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — Inner Frame (P/O PL 80.23 Item
2)
2 — Collar (P/O PL 80.23 Item 2)
3 013E23631 Bearing (REP 80.56)
4 — Paper Guide (P/O PL 80.23 Item
2)
5 — Pre Registration Lower Chute (P/O
PL 80.23 Item 2)
6 — Chute Assembly (P/O PL 80.23
Item 2)
7 059K26191 Pinch Roll (REP 80.56)
8 059K33171 Pre Registration Roll (REP 80.56)
9 413W82370 Bearing (REP 80.56)
10 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.23 Item
2)
11 — Gear (25T) (P/O PL 80.23 Item 2)
12 809E54920 Spring (REP 80.56)
13 809E54930 Spring (REP 80.56)
14 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 80.23 Item
2)
15 830E60740 Support (REP 80.56)
16 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.23 Item 2)
17 930W00211 Pre Registration Sensor (Q77-100)
(REP 80.57)
P L 8 0 . 2 5 Va c u u m Tra n s p o r t A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 — Gear (15T) (P/O PL 80.19 Item
30)
2 — Shaft (P/O PL 80.19 Item 30)
3 413W93250 Ball Bearing
4 — Transport Belt (P/O PL 80.19 Item
30) (REP 80.59)
5 — Bracket (P/O PL 80.19 Item 30)
6 — Transport Chute (P/O PL 80.19
Item 30)
7 — Roller (P/O PL 80.19 Item 30)
8 — Frame Assembly (P/O PL 80.19
Item 30)
9 — Shaft (P/O PL 80.19 Item 30)
10 — Gear (29T) (P/O PL 80.19 Item
30)
P L 9 0 . 1 D r u m / To n e r C a r t r i d g e
Item Part Description
1 013R00663 Drum Cartridge Assembly (K) (REP
90.8)
2 — Drum Assembly (P/O PL 90.1 Item
1)
3 013R00650 Charge Scorotron Unit
4 — Scorotron (P/O PL 90.1 Item 3)
5 — Spring Wire (P/O PL 90.1 Item 3)
6 — Cleaner (P/O PL 90.1 Item 3)
7 — Rear Shield (P/O PL 90.1 Item 3)
8 — Front Shield (P/O PL 90.1 Item 3)
9 — Corotron Wire (P/O PL 90.1 Item
3)
10 — Front Cover (P/O PL 90.1 Item 3)
11 — Rear Cover (P/O PL 90.1 Item 3)
12 — Grid Plate (P/O PL 90.1 Item 3)
13 013R00664 Drum Cartridge Assembly (C, M,
Y) (REP 90.8)
14 006R01792 Toner Cartridge (C-Fluo) (NOTE 2)
(W/001)
— 006R01803 Toner Cartridge (White) (NOTE 1)
(W/001)
— 006R01524 Toner Cartridge (C) WW Metered
(W/O 001)
— 006R01735 Toner Cartridge (C) NASG/XCL
Sold (W/O 001)
15 006R01793 Toner Cartridge (M-Fluo) (NOTE
2) (W/001)
— 006R01523 Toner Cartridge (M) WW Metered
(W/O 001)
— 006R01804 Toner Cartridge (Silver) (NOTE 1)
(W/001)
— 006R01736 Toner Cartridge (M) NASG/XCL
Sold (W/O 001)
16 006R01734 Toner Cartridge (K) NASG/XCL
Sold (W/O 001)
— 006R01521 Toner Cartridge (K) WW Metered
(W/O 001)
— 006R01802 Toner Cartridge (Gold) (NOTE 1)
(W/001)
17 006R01794 Toner Cartridge (Y-Fluo) (NOTE 2)
(W/001)
— 006R01805 Toner Cartridge (Clear) (NOTE 1)
(W/001)
— 006R01522 Toner Cartridge (Y) WW Metered
(W/O 001)
— 006R01737 Toner Cartridge (Y) NASG/XCL
Sold (W/O 001)
18 — Drum (P/O PL 90.1 Item 1)
19 — PCC Corotron (P/O PL 90.1 Item
1)
20 — Vivid Toner Kit (W/001)
21 — Vivid Combination Toner Kit (W/
001)
Note: Also supplied with Vivid Toner Kit PL 90.1 Item 20 and
Vivid Combination Toner Kit PL 90.1 Item 21.
Note: Also supplied with Vivid Toner Kit PL 90.1 Item 20 and
Vivid Combination Toner Kit PL 90.1 Item 21.
Note: Also supplied with Vivid Toner Kit PL 90.1 Item 20 and
Vivid Combination Toner Kit PL 90.1 Item 21.
P L 9 0 . 8 Re a r Fr a m e ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 030K76362 Support Assembly
2 962K23524 Wire Harness (K)
3 — Bracket (P/O PL 90.8 Item 14)
4 — Connector (P/O PL 90.8 Item 14)
5 127K39542 Toner Cartridge Motor Assembly Y
(MOT93-001), M (MOT93-002), C
(MOT93-003), K1 (MOT93-004),
k2 (MOT93-005)
6 — Toner Cartridge Motor (P/O PL
90.8 Item 5)
7 — Gear (P/O PL 90.8 Item 5)
8 962K85860 Wire Harness (Y, M)
9 — Guide (Not Spared)
10 068K24431 Bracket Assembly
11 — Bracket (P/O PL 90.8 Item 10)
12 — Connector (P/O PL 90.8 Item 10)
13 962K85881 Wire Harness (C)
14 068K24420 Bracket Assembly
P L 9 0 . 9 Re a r Fr a m e ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 114K82650 Connector Assembly (K)
2 849E41210 Ground Clip
3 114K82700 Connector Assembly (BCR)
4 127K75610 Cleaning Motor Assembly (REP
90.25)
5 — Coupling (P/O PL 90.9 Item 4)
6 — Friction Clutch (P/O PL 90.9 Item
4)
7 — Bracket (P/O PL 90.9 Item 4)
8 — CC Cleaner Motor (P/O PL 90.9
Item 4)
9 — Gear (32T) (P/O PL 90.9 Item 4)
10 — Gear (10T) (P/O PL 90.9 Item 4)
11 — Encoder Gear (P/O PL 90.9 Item
4)
12 — Coupling Gear (P/O PL 90.9 Item
4)
13 — Spring (P/O PL 90.9 Item 4)
14 — Locate Bracket (Not Spared)
P L 9 0 . 1 1 J o i n t / Le v e l e r B o x A s s e m b l y
Item Part Description
1 093K20000 Joint Assembly
2 — Bearing (P/O PL 90.11 Item 1)
3 — Pulley (P/O PL 90.11 Item 1)
4 — Main Agitator (P/O PL 90.11 Item
1)
5 — Joint (Down) (P/O PL 90.11 Item
1)
6 — Joint (UP) (P/O PL 90.11 Item 1)
7 — Crank Shaft (P/O PL 90.11 Item 1)
8 — Washer (P/O PL 90.11 Item 1)
9 — Bracket (P/O PL 90.11 Item 1)
10 — Sub Agitator (P/O PL 90.11 Item
1)
11 052K98930 Leveler Box Assembly
12 — Side Flange (P/O PL 90.11 Item
11)
13 — Belt (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
14 — Oil Seal (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
15 — Seal (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
16 — Shutter (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
17 — Conductive Auger (P/O PL 90.11
Item 11)
18 — Leveler Box (P/O PL 90.11 Item
11)
19 130K76860 Waste Bottle Position Sensor
20 — Gear (18T/37T) (P/O PL 90.11
Item 11)
21 — Gear (40T) (P/O PL 90.11 Item
11)
22 — Gear Pulley (P/O PL 90.11 Item
11)
23 — Spring (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
24 — Spring (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
25 — Joint (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
26 — Bearing (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
27 — Bearing (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
28 — Conductor (P/O PL 90.11 Item 11)
P L 9 0 . 1 2 I BT U n i t ( 1 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 826E10681 Screw
2 — Cushion (Not Spared)
3 006E79751 Shaft
4 — Joint (Not Spared)
5 114K82580 Connector Assembly
6 604K74732 IBT Belt Unit (REP 90.1)
7 — IBT Drawer (Not Spared)
8 826E14500 Screw
P L 9 0 . 1 3 I BT U n i t ( 2 o f 2 )
Item Part Description
1 — Bracket (Not Spared)
2 114K82051 Connector Assembly
3 — Bracket (P/O PL 90.13 Item 2)
4 — Spring (P/O PL 90.13 Item 2)
5 — Bracket (P/O PL 90.13 Item 2)
6 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 90.13 Item
2)
7 — Wire Harness (P/O PL 90.13 Item
2)
8 — Block (Not Spared)
P L 9 0 . 1 4 Tra n s fe r B e l t U n i t
Item Part Description
1 042K94561 IBT Cleaner Assembly (REP 90.2)
2 — Bearing (P/O PL 90.14 Item 1)
3 — Plate (P/O PL 90.14 Item 1)
4 — Blade (P/O PL 90.14 Item 1)
5 — Cleaner Housing (P/O PL 90.14
Item 1)
6 — Cleaner Cover (P/O PL 90.14 Item
1)
7 — Auger (P/O PL 90.14 Item 1)
8 — Auger Gear (P/O PL 90.14 Item 1)
9 — Gear (P/O PL 90.14 Item 1)
10 — Gear (P/O PL 90.14 Item 1)
11 — Seal (Front) (P/O PL 90.14 Item
11)
12 — Seal (Rear) (P/O PL 90.14 Item
11)
13 — Support Assembly (P/O PL 90.12
Item 6)
14 675K72181 IBT Belt (REP 90.3)
15 — IBT Frame Assembly (P/O PL
90.12 Item 6)
16 815K06810 Inlet
17 — Pin (Not Spared)
P L 9 0 . 1 5 I BT Fra m e A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 4 )
Item Part Description
1 007K87835 IBT Drive Motor (MOT042-015)
2 019K98884 BTR Holder Assembly (Y, M, C, K)
3 059K79200 1ST BTR Roll (Y, M.C, K)
4 105E19852 1ST BTR HVPS (REP 90.7)
5 127K39101 1st BTR Retract Motor
6 127K39120 IBT Steering Motor
7 130K60830 IBT Belt Edge Sensor
8 — Frame Assembly (P/O PL 90.12
Item 6)
9 848K50282 BTR Housing Assembly
10 802K59471 1ST BTR Contact/Retract Sensor
Cover Assembly
11 — Spring (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
12 — Spring (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
13 848E30361 Sensor Cover
P L 9 0 . 1 6 I BT Fra m e A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 4 )
Item Part Description
1 — Stopper (Front) (P/O PL 90.15
Item 9)
2 — Stopper (Rear) (P/O PL 90.15 Item
9)
3 — Collar (P/O PL 90.15 Item 9)
4 — Collar (P/O PL 90.15 Item 9)
5 — Ball Bearing (8x16) (P/O PL 90.15
Item 9)
6 — Sleeve Bearing (P/O PL 90.15 Item
9)
7 — Ball Bearing (5x10) (P/O PL 90.15
Item 9)
8 — Clamp (P/O PL 90.15 Item 9)
9 059E99540 Contact Roll
10 059K32510 Idler Roll
11 059K71530 Backup Roll
12 130E84270 IBT Belt Home Position Sensor
(Q42-200)
13 — Pre Conductor (P/O PL 90.15 Item
9)
14 — Conductor Assembly (P/O PL
90.15 Item 9)
15 — BTR Housing (P/O PL 90.15 Item
9)
16 — Spring (P/O PL 90.15 Item 9)
17 — Bias Housing (P/O PL 90.15 Item
9)
18 — Conductor (P/O PL 90.15 Item 9)
P L 9 0 . 1 7 I BT Fra m e A s s e m b l y ( 3 o f 4 )
Item Part Description
1 005E18450 Collar
2 005E18460 Collar
3 — Collar (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
4 005E18490 Collar
5 — Shaft (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
6 007E76180 Drive Gear
7 413W93250 Ball Bearing (6x12)
8 413W95150 Ball Bearing (10x19)
9 — Bearing (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
10 — Bearing (Front) (P/O PL 90.12
Item 6)
11 — Bearing (Rear) (P/O PL 90.12 Item
6)
12 059K32501 Drive Roll
13 059K32510 Idler Roll
14 059K32792 Retract Roll Assembly
15 003E60770 Latch
16 — Spring (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
17 — Sleeve Bearing (P/O PL 90.12 Item
6)
18 — Rear Frame (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
19 — Front Housing (P/O PL 90.12 Item
6)
20 — Rear Housing (P/O PL 90.12 Item
6)
21 807E01710 Gear (Front)
22 807E01720 Gear (Rear)
23 807E01730 Drive Gear
24 809E52190 Spring
25 013E16540 Bearing
26 059E02600 Brush Roll
27 — Cleaner Roll (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
28 413W90350 Ball Bearing (6x12)
29 003E60760 Latch
P L 9 0 . 1 8 I BT Fra m e A s s e m b l y ( 4 o f 4 )
Item Part Description
1 — Ball Bearing (8x16) (P/O PL 90.12
Item 6)
2 015K63982 Tension Plate Assembly
3 — Tension Plate (P/O PL 90.18 Item
2)
4 809E52180 Tension Spring
5 016E93440 Bush (Inner)
6 — Bush (Outer) (P/O PL 90.12 Item
6)
7 — Bush (Inner) (P/O PL 90.12 Item
6)
8 019E57341 Holder
9 019K99043 Holder Assembly (Y, M, C), Holder
Assembly (K)
10 — Bracket Assembly (P/O PL 90.12
Item 6)
11 059K32520 Steering Roll
12 — Shaft (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
13 — Cam (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
14 — Bearing (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
15 — Cam Plate (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
16 — Tension Cam (P/O PL 90.12 Item
6)
17 — Slider (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
18 — Bearing (P/O PL 90.12 Item 6)
19 809E52190 Spring
20 — Wire Harness (IBT1) (P/O PL 90.12
Item 6)
21 962K23790 Wire Harness (IBT2)
22 — Tension Plate (P/O PL 90.12 Item
6)
23 962K22570 Wire Harness (BTR, Y)
24 962K22580 Wire Harness (BTR, M)
25 962K22591 Wire Harness (BTR, C)
26 962K22601 Wire Harness (BTR, K)
P L 9 0 . 1 9 2 n d BT R Ro l l A s s e m b l y ( 1 o f 3 )
Item Part Description
1 — Gear Cover
2 — Wire Saddle
3 — Inlet Chute Assembly
4 — Sensor Cover
5 130K87791 Retract Sensor Assembly
6 — Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 90.19 Item
5)
7 930W00111 2ND BTR Contact/Retract Sensor
8 — Front Plate
9 — Inlet Resistor
10 — Exit Plate
11 054K44152 Exit Chute Assembly
12 — Chute Guide (P/O PL 90.19 Item
11)
13 — Post 2ND BTR Sensor (P/O PL
90.19 Item 11)
14 — Exit Support Assembly (P/O PL
90.19 Item 11)
15 — Wire Harness
16 — Harness Guide
17 — Exit Resistor
18 — Helical Gear
19 — Ball Bearing (8x16)
20 — BTR Cam
21 — BTR Wedge
22 — Wedge Spring
23 — Helical Gear
24 — Roll Cover
25 — 2ND BTR Housing Assembly (REF:
PL 90.20)
P L 9 0 . 2 0 2 n d BT R Ro l l A s s e m b l y ( 2 o f 3 )
Item Part Description
1 — Spring
2 — Arm Plate (Front)
3 — Drive Gear
4 — Arm Plate (Rear)
5 — Shaft
6 — Retract Cam Assembly
7 — Retract Cam (P/O PL 90.20 Item
6)
8 413W11660 Sleeve Bearing
9 — Pin (P/O PL 90.20 Item 6)
10 — Cam Shaft (P/O PL 90.20 Item 6)
11 — Retract Gear (P/O PL 90.20 Item
6)
12 — Ball Bearing (8x16)
13 — BTR Wedge
14 — Wedge Spring
15 — Roll Gear
16 — BTR Cam
17 — Wire Harness
18 — Conductor
19 — Roll Cover
20 — Idler Gear
21 — 2ND BTR Housing Assembly (REF:
PL 90.21)
P L 9 0 . 2 1 2 N D BT R Ro l l A s s e m b l y ( 3 o f 3 )
Item Part Description
1 — Conductor (Front)
2 — Roll Holder
3 — Conductor (Rear)
4 — Roll Holder
5 — 2ND BTR Roll (REP 90.5)
6 — Holder Plate Assembly
7 — Conductor Plate
8 — Shaft Guide
9 033K96880 Cleaning Blade (REP 90.6)
10 — Blade Bracket Assembly
11 — Blade Spring
12 — Bearing
13 — BTR Brush Assembly
14 — Flicker Shaft Assembly
15 — Chute Bracket
16 — Adjust Lever
17 — Roll Seal
18 — Ball Bearing (8x16)
19 — BTR Housing
P L 9 0 . 2 2 I BT D ra w e r
Item Part Description
1 003K13470 Handle Assembly
2 — Handle (P/O PL 90.22 Item 1)
3 — Shaft (P/O PL 90.22 Item 1)
4 — Plate (P/O PL 90.22 Item 1)
5 — Bearing (P/O PL 90.12 Item 7)
6 — Front Frame (P/O PL 90.12 Item
7)
7 — Cover (P/O PL 90.12 Item 7)
8 — Cam (P/O PL 90.12 Item 7)
9 — Link (P/O PL 90.12 Item 7)
10 — Frame Assembly (P/O PL 90.12
Item 7)
11 801K14911 Left Rail
12 — Plate Spring (P/O PL 90.12 Item
7)
13 — Shoulder Screw (P/O PL 90.12
Item 7)
14 — Plate (P/O PL 90.12 Item 7)
15 050K50480 Right Rail Assembly
16 — Cam (P/O PL 90.22 Item 15)
17 — Link (P/O PL 90.22 Item 15)
18 — Frame Assembly (P/O PL 90.22
Item 15)
19 801K14921 Right Rail
20 — Plate Spring (P/O PL 90.22 Item
15)
21 — Shoulder Screw (P/O PL 90.22
Item 15)
22 — Plate (P/O PL 90.22 Item 15)
23 — Inner Cover (P/O PL 90.12 Item 7)
Co m m o n H a r d w a r e
Item Part Description
A 112W27677 Sems Screw (M3x6)
B 112W27678 Sems Screw (M3x6)
C 112W27898 Screw (M3x8)
D 112W28098 Sems Screw (M3x10)
E 113W15588 Pan Head Screw (M2x5)
F 113W16088 Screw (M2x10)
G 113W20478 Tapping Screw (M3x4)
H 113W20677 Screw (M3x6)
J 113W20678 Screw (M3x6)
K 113W20688 Pan Head Screw (M2.5x6)
L 113W20878 Screw (M3x8)
M 113W21078 Screw (M3x10)
N 113W21278 Screw (M3x12)
P — Screw (M3x8) (Same As Item L)
Q 113W27488 Pan Head Screw (M3x4)
R 113W27588 Pan Head Screw (M3x5)
S 113W27688 Pan Head Screw (M3x6)
T 113W27888 Pan Head Screw (M3x8)
U 113W35878 Screw (M4x8)
V 113W35888 Pan Head Screw (M4x8)
W 114W27678 Bind Head Screw (M3x6)
X 141W27451 Set Screw (M3x4)
Y 141W35651 Set Screw (M4x6)
Z 153W15888 Tapping Screw (M4x8)
AA 153W16288 Tapping Screw (M4x12)
AB 153W17688 Tapping Screw (M3x6)
AC 153W17888 Tapping Screw (M3x8)
AD 153W18088 Tapping Screw (M3x10)
AE 153W27878 Tapping Screw (M3x8)
AF 153W28078 Tapping Screw (M3x10)
AG 158W27678 Screw
AH 158W27688 Round Screw (M3x7)
AJ 158W27878 Screw (M3x8)
AK 158W28078 Screw (M3x10)
AL 158W35878 Tapping Screw (M4x8)
AM 220W21278 Flange Nut (3)
AN 251W19278 Washer (2.5) (10.5)
AP 251W21278 Washer (3) (10.5)
AQ 251W24278 Washer (4) (10.8)
AR 251W26278 Washer (5)
AS 252W24350 Nylon Washer (4)
AT 252W26450 Nylon Washer (5)
AU 252W27350 Nylon Washer (6) (10.5)
AV 252W27450 Nylon Washer (6) (11)
AW 252W29350 Nylon Washer (8) (10.5)
AX 252W31250 Nylon Washer (10) (10.25)
AY 252W31350 Nylon Washer (10) (10.5)
AZ 256W15278 Spring Washer (2) (10.5)
BA 271W10850 Dowel Pin (1.6x8)
1. Press and hold the 0 key for 5 seconds, then while still holding down the 0 key, press the Start
button.
The CE - Type Passcode screen will appear.
3. The top right area of the UI display will change to let the user know that the mode has changed
to Service Rep. mode. The words Service Rep. are displayed.
Note: If a system failure has occurred when the machine is turned On but it has not been recti-
fied, the diagnostic operation will not be guaranteed.
Exiting Diagnostics
There are three ways to exit from Service Rep. mode:
• Press and hold the 0 key then press the Start button.
• Switch the power Off then On (If actions performed in Service Rep. mode cause the machine to
restart upon exiting, the machine will come back up in normal user mode).
• Select Abort the Operation and Exit on the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen., then enter
dC131
Allows easy access to change System Time, System Date, Time Display format, and GMT Offset.
Procedure
1. Enter UI Diagnostics Mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
6. Select the appropriate item from the list. Available choices are:
a. System Date
• Month (1-12)
• Day (1-31)
• Year
b. System Time
• Minute
d. Connection Interval
f. Auto Clear
h. Auto Print
k. Time Zone
l. Daylight Savings
The Calibration procedure is used to Verify consistent color reproduction over time for copies and 12. Select the Start button on the UI. A Calibration Test Page will print with instructions on how to
prints. Performing the calibration procedure adjusts the output densities to be as close to the devi- perform the calibration.
ces specified values as possible. If performed on media which has lower densities the outcome will 13. Follow the instructions on the UI to perform the calibration.
be increased densities and vice versa. It should be performed if optimal color reproduction and con-
Note: The calibration sheet must be placed on the Document Glass with the printed side down
sistency over time is desired.
and with the magenta squares along the left side of the Document Glass. If the calibration
Note: To fully calibrate both copies and prints it is necessary to run all four job types and apply sheet is not positioned correctly, the massage, Original is not correctly placed on the docu-
them to the corresponding calibration type. If such precision is not needed, select the most impor- ment glass. Select Confirm and follow the instructions to place the original , will be
tant output type and then apply the results to both copy and print jobs. If there are color reproduc- displayed.
tion issues in one Job type but not the others, then it is only necessary to run calibration for the Select the Start button on the UI. A message stating whether the calibration was successful or
problematic job type. unsuccessful will be displayed.
Note: Color Calibration can be entered through Customer Admin mode (GP 9) or through Serv- 14. Repeat steps 6 ~ 12 for all required job types and calibration types
ice Rep. Mode.
15. When all calibrations are complete, select Close.
6. Select Calibration.
8. Select the Paper Supply button. Choose a paper tray to print the Calibration Test Page from the
list displayed, and then select the Save button.
• None
1. Enter the Service Rep. mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode. – Delete All Certificates / Initialize Settings
2. Press the Machine Status button on the control panel. The Machine Information screen – Printing CE Reports
appears.
3. Select Tools.
6. From the Features column, scroll down and select Maintenance / Diagnostics. The following se-
lections appear:
• Software Options
• IO Check
– Finisher Adjustments - this selection provides direction to the BR Finisher and STD/BM
Finisher Service Documentation finisher adjustment procedures.
• Registration
5. Select Save.
6. Select Reboot.
the process stops but a recovery message is not displayed. The fault code is displayed but it is not 006 Grid (slant) - 101 To verify slant line reproduction
recorded in History
007 Grid (slant) - 102 To verify slant line reproduction
Note: If fresh paper has been added, wait until the tray is fully raised before trying to print other-
008 Grid (90 degrees) - system registration Registration measurement
wise an error message will be displayed.
009 PH Regi Alignment confirmation
Procedure
010 4 - corners patch Auto alignment adjustment
1. Refer to Table 1 for the pattern you wish to print. NVM location 870-207 specifies which line
CAUTION: Single
screen pattern is printed.
color print only. Full
2. Enter UI Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
color print may dam-
3. Go to the Maintenance / Diagnostics screen. Select Print Test Pattern. age the Fuser.
4. Enter the following information: 011 Color Registration For measurement using Color
Registration Measurement device
• Test Pattern Number from the table
012 Banding Banding verification
• quantity to print
014 Auto Tone Correction (for correction) Auto tone correction (for
Note: For the test pattern selected, an incorrect output color (color Vs B/W) selection gives correction)
an Invalid Parameter error message.
015 Auto Tone Correction (for confirmation) Auto Tone Correction (for
• output color - select the appropriate color for the pattern being printed confirmation)
5. Press the Start button. A status message is displayed after printing. Press the Confirm button. 017 16 Tones Tone, Defect detection
6. Close the Print Test Pattern screen to return to the Maintenance / Diagnostics screen. 018 ADC check ADC sensor adjustment
7. Exit Diagnostics. The printer re-boots. 019 Whole Area - Half Tone Defect Detection
Note: Adjust Cin% for desired hal-
tone density.
Pattern Purpose
D ele te All D ata
Test Pattern Name
#
Purpose
021 In - Out adjustment (Secondary/Triery color) In - Out adjustment (Secondary/
Triery color) This procedure deletes user-defined/registered information and information recorded automatically
by the system from the hard disk, the ESS NVM PWB and Buffer RAM.
022 In - Out adjustment (Single color) In - Out adjustment (Each color)
Procedure
023 Highlight adjustment Highlight adjustment, verification
of reproduction 1. Enter UI Diagnostic mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
024 ATCN24 Tone verification 2. Select Delete All Data. The Delete All Data screen opens. The following messages are
displayed:
025 Gradation Tone Jump, verification of
reproduction • Ready to delete all data kept by the machine.
026 SS direction adjustment (YC) SS direction adjustment (YC) • The control panel is unavailable during deletion.
028 IT8 Tone, Color reproduction 4. A confirmation message appears. Select Yes.
031
S u b Sy s t e m Adjustment / Others
The following is a list of available procedures dealing with sub-system: The following is a list of available procedures dealing with Adjustment / Others:
• Belt Edge Learn (See ADJ 9.13) • dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data Settings (see GP 4)
dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data Settings
Purpose Purpose
This procedure is used to predict the failure of the hard drive. The serial no., product no., and billing count are stored at three locations; the MCU NVM PWB
• dC355 Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test (Sub System) (IOT), the EEPROM (SYS1) on the Controller PWB, and the ESS NVM PWB (SYS2). This procedure al-
lows the data in all three locations to be synchronized in case of replacement of one of the PWBs,
dC527 ADF Independent Operation or due to data corruption associated with one of the following faults:
Purpose
This procedure is used for testing functions of the ADF. • dC132 Machine ID/Billing Data (Adjustment/Others)
Finisher Adjustments
• For the BR Finisher, refer to the BR Finisher Service Documentation, Adjustments 12.1 through
12.14.
• For the STD/BM Finisher, refer to the STD/BM Service Documentation, Adjustments 17.1
through 17.15.
Re g i s t r a t i o n • Average value
Registration consists of a group of several related adjustments. Some routines must be performed • Minimum value
in a specific sequence; go to the referenced ADJ procedure for comprehensive instructions.
Table 1 Paper Path Timing Types
Color-to-Color Registration Timing Type Description Tray
• dC671 Registration Measuring Cycle (see ADJ 9.9) 1 Tray 1 Feed Start to Tray 1 feed out sensor - Letter / A4 1
LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
• dC673 Registration Control - Sensor Check Cycle (see ADJ 9.10)
2 Tray 1 Feed Start to Tray 1 feed out sensor - Letter / A4 1
• dC675 Registration Control - Setup Cycle (see ADJ 9.8) LEF Heavyweight 1
Paper Registration 3 Tray 2 Feed Start to Tray 2 feed out sensor - Letter / A4 2
LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
• System Registration Adjustment (see ADJ 9.15, ADJ 9.16, ADJ 9.17, ADJ 9.18, ADJ 9.7, ADJ
9.19) 4 Tray 2 Feed Start to Tray 2 feed out sensor - Letter / A4 2
LEF Heavyweight 1
• dC740 Tray 5 (Bypass) Guide Adjustment (see ADJ 7.1)
5 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor on to Tray 1 feed out sensor on 2, HCF
• Measure Paper Path Timing time - Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
Measure Paper Path Timing 6 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor on to Tray 1 feed out sensor on 2, HCF
Purpose time - Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1
This procedure is used to monitor the timing of paper between selected sensors during repeated
7 Tray 3 Feed Start to Tray 3 feed out sensor - Letter / A4 3
print cycles. The results are displayed in msec. LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
• Upper limit value 14 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor on to Tray 1 feed out sensor on 3, 4
time - Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1
• Normal value
15 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor on to Tray 1 pre Registration 1, 2, 3, 4, HCF
• Lower limit value sensor on time - Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or
punched paper
• Maximum value
16 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor on to Tray 1 pre Registration 1, 2, 3, 4, HCF
• Average +3 Sigma value sensor on time - Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1
17 Tray 5 (MSI) Feed Start to tray 5 feed sensor on time - 5 46 Inverter Out Sensor on to IOT Exit Sensor on time - Let- Any Tray
Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper ter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1
18 Tray 5 (MSI) Pre Feed Sensor on to Tray 5 Pre Registra- 5 47 Invert start to Duplex In Sensor on time - Letter / A4 Any Tray
tion Sensor on time - Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
punched paper
48 Invert start to Duplex In Sensor on time - Letter / A4 Any Tray
19 Tray 6 (HCF) Feed Start to Tray 6 feed out sensor - Let- 6 LEF Heavyweight 1
ter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
49 Duplex In Sensor on to Duplex Path Sensor on time - Any Tray
20 Tray 6 (HCF) Feed Start to Tray 6 feed out sensor - Let- 6 Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
ter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1
50 Duplex In Sensor on to Duplex Path Sensor on time - Any Tray
25 Tray 6 (HCF) Feed Out Sensor on to HCF Exit Sensor on 6 Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1
time - Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
51 Duplex In Sensor on to Duplex Out Sensor on time - Let- Any Tray
26 Tray 6 (HCF) Feed Out Sensor on to HCF Exit Sensor on 6 ter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
time - Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1
71 IOT Exit Sensor on to I/F Transport Entrance Sensor on_ Any Tray
31 Duplex Feed Start to Pre Registration Sensor on time - Any Tray Simplex_invert_top - Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or
Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper punched paper
32 Duplex Feed Start to Pre Registration Sensor on time - Any Tray 72 IOT Exit Sensor on to I/F Transport Entrance Sensor on_ Any Tray
Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1 Duplex_top - (Large size larger than 280mm) Plain, re-
cycled, or punched paper
33 Pre Registration Sensor on to Registration Sensor on Any Tray
time - Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper 73 IOT Exit Sensor on to I/F Transport Entrance Sensor on_ Any Tray
Simplex_invert_top - Heavyweight 1
34 Pre Registration Sensor on to Registration Sensor on Any Tray
time - Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1 74 IOT Exit Sensor on to I/F Transport Entrance Sensor on_ Any Tray
Duplex_top - (Large size larger than 280mm) Plain, re-
35 Registration Feed Start to Fuser Exit Sensor on time - Any Tray cycled, or punched paper
Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
75 I/F Transport Entrance Sensor on to I/F Transport Exit Any Tray
36 Registration Feed Start to Fuser Exit Sensor on time - Any Tray Sensor on_Simplex_invert_top - Letter / A4 LEF Plain, re-
Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1 cycled, or punched paper
37 Tray 5 Pre Registration Sensor on to Registration Sensor 5 76 I/F Transport Entrance Sensor on to I/F Transport Exit Any Tray
on - Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper Sensor on_Duplex_top - (Large size larger than 400mm)
Plain, recycled, or punched paper
41 Fuser Exit Sensor on to IOT Exit Sensor on (straight exit) Any Tray
- Letter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper 77 I/F Transport Entrance Sensor on to I/F Transport Exit Any Tray
Sensor on_Simplex_invert_top - Heavyweight 1
42 Fuser Exit Sensor on to IOT Exit Sensor on (straight exit) Any Tray
- Letter / A4 LEF Heavyweight 1 78 I/F Transport Entrance Sensor on to I/F Transport Exit Any Tray
Sensor on_Duplex_top - (Large size larger than 400mm)
43 Fuser Exit Sensor on to Inverter In Sensor on - Letter / Any Tray Heavyweight 1
A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper
79 I/F Transport Exit Sensor on to Transport Entrance Sen- Any Tray
44 Fuser Exit Sensor on to Inverter In Sensor on - Letter / Any Tray sor on _Simplex-_invert_top - Plain, recycled, or punched
A4 LEF Heavyweight 1 paper
45 Inverter Out Sensor on to IOT Exit Sensor on time - Let- Any Tray 80 I/F Transport Exit Sensor on to Transport Entrance Sen- Any Tray
ter / A4 LEF Plain, recycled, or punched paper sor on_Duplex _top - A3 Plain, recycled, or punched
paper
Timing Type Description Tray 4. Remove the NVM factory settings list from the Tray One storage pocket and entry the applicable
NVM values.
81 I/F Transport Exit Sensor on to Transport Entrance Sen- Any Tray
sor on _Simplex-_invert_top - Heavyweight 1 Power On Self Test
Purpose
82 I/F Transport Exit Sensor on to Transport Entrance Sen- Any Tray
sor on_Duplex _top - A3 Heavyweight 1 This setting enables a longer diagnostic boot sequence to be completed. System start-up time will
be increased with this setting enabled. Once enabled, the test will take place every time the system
83 Transport Entrance Sensor on to Top Tray Exit Sensor Any Tray
on_top - Plain, recycled, or punched paper is powered on until the test is disabled.
84 Transport Entrance Sensor on to Top Tray Exit Sensor Any Tray Procedure
on_top - Heavyweight 1
1. Enter UI Diagnostics mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
85 Transport Entrance Sensor on to Top Tray Exit Sensor Any Tray 2. Select Power On Self Test.
on_top_punch - (Large size - Larger than 230mm) Plain,
recycled, or punched paper 3. Select On to enable the Power On Self Test or Off to disable the Test.
86 Transport Entrance Sensor on to Top Tray Exit Sensor Any Tray 4. Exit Diagnostics and Power Off and Power On the machine to complete the self test.
on_top_punch Large size - Larger than 230mm) Heavy-
weight 1 5. After the test is no longer necessary, disable it so that the customer does not experience long
boot times.
87 Transport Entrance Sensor on to Compile Exit Sensor Any Tray
on_Stacker - Plain, recycled, or punched paper
Delete All Certificates / Initialize Settings
88 Transport Entrance Sensor on to Compile Exit Sensor Any Tray Purpose
on_Stacker - Heavyweight 1 This routine will delete all security certificates stored in the machine and re-initialize all settings as-
sociated with the security certificates.
dC120 Failure Counter (Faults)
Purpose Procedure
The purpose of this procedure is to display the number of occurrences of each IOT fault since the 1. Enter UI Diagnostics mode, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode.
last Service Exit with the Complete Closeout option selected. 2. Select Delete All Certificates / Initialize Settings. The Delete All Certificates / Initialize Settings
• dC120 Failure Counter (Faults) screen opens.
2. Select Restore NVM Values. If this function is not available or ‘beeps’, go to step 4. 5. Select CE. The following report selections will be displayed:
3. Select Start to begin the Restore NVM Values routine. The Machine will reboot automatically. • Debug Log Report
Do not power off the machine until the restoration routine completes. • HFSI Report
• Jam Report
– Automatically measures and adjust the skew for Platen and Side Registration.
NVM Setting Value Lis t
The NVM Setting Value List displays a list of NVM locations and their values. Also listed are the ma- • dC945 Side 2 Shading Correction (MAX Setup - IIT Calibration)
chine serial number and software versions.
– Collects the Side 2 CIS shading data with white paper, and determine the presence or ab-
sence of garbage. Side 2 white reference adjustment is also performed at the same time in
this adjustment
Purpose
– Calculates the reflection ratio dispersion correction value of the white reference sheet for
Side 2 color CIS and set the Side 2 color CIS white reference coefficient.
Purpose
Purpose
– Corrects color variation of individual IIT for image quality adjustment feature (DFE calibra-
tion, etc.) using scanned images.
Purpose
– Derives the sensitivity correction values [Correction Coefficient] and [Correction Offset] for
adjusting the ATC sensor output from the bar code numbers which display the sensitivity at-
tribute in every ATC Sensor. The bar code numbers are set in NVM [Bar Code Number] man-
ually from this adjustment screen.
Purpose
– Creates an Edge Profile Table (table for performing Belt Walk control) in order to set the
Edge Learn mode at factory shipment or during the replacement of Belt system component
(IBT Belt, Edge Sensor).
Purpose
– Sets an optimum Transfer output value for each paper type. Adjustment can be done by
reading the Transfer output value of the manual or sample print.
Purpose
d C 1 1 8 J a m Co u n t e r ( Fa u l t s ) d C 1 2 0 Fa i l u r e Co u n t e r ( Fa u l t s )
Purpose Purpose
Displays the number of times jams had occurred since the previous reset due to [Exit when work To display the Count for failures that have occurred since the previous reset due to [Exit (Clear Log)]
completed] up to now. up to now.
Procedure Procedure
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Faults. 1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select [Faults].
2. The following items are displayed on the Faults screen. 2. The following items are displayed on the [Faults] screen.
4. The following Items are displayed on the Jam Counter screen. 4. The following Items are displayed on the Failure Counter screen.
• Chain-Link • Chain-Link
• Count • Count
Note: Note:
• Displays the history of paper/document feeder jams based on the data obtained from the • Displays the history of failures based on the data obtained from the Main Unit.
Main Unit. • Failures that have occurred since the previous exit from the Service Mode with Exit (Clear
• Failures that have occurred since the previous exit from the Service Mode with Exit Clear Log) until now will be displayed.
Log until now will be displayed. • The Count is reset when exiting from the Service Mode by using Exit (Clear Log).
• The Count is reset when exiting from the Service Mode by using Exit Clear Log. 5. Select Close to return to the Faults screen.
5. Select Close to return to the Faults screen.
d C 1 2 2 S h u t d o w n H i s t o r y ( Fa u l t s ) d C 1 2 6 S y s t e m Re g i s t r a t i o n A d j u s t m e n t ( R e g i s t r a t i o n )
Purpose Purpose
To display the history in 4 categories: Document Feeder Jam, Paper Jam, Failure, and Last 40 Faults. Aligns the IOT Registration.
Procedure • IOT Registration Adjustment performs the Registration adjustment from the output result of
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Faults. the Built-in Adjustment Test Pattern.
4. The following Items are displayed on the Shutdown History screen. <Adjustable Items>
The Chain-Link, Date & Time, and Total CV of the selected button are displayed on the screen.
Note: Adjustment should be done in the following order.
• Paper Jam button
• Side 1 Trapezoid Correction
• Document Feeder Jam button
• Side 1/Side 2 Fast Scan Skew Fine Adjustment
• Failure button
• Side 1/Side 2 Perpendicularity Fine Adjustment
• Last 40 Faults button
• Side 1/Side 2 Fast Scan Direction Reduce/Enlarge Fine Adjustment
Note: • Side 1/Side 2 Slow Scan Direction Reduce/Enlarge Fine Adjustment
• Displays the history of failures based on the data obtained from the Main Unit.
• Side 1/Side 2 Lead Registration/Side Registration Independent Adjustment
• Failures that have occurred since the previous exit from the Service Mode with Exit Clear • Dual Registration (Not in use)
Log until now will be displayed.
Note: Before performing this adjustment, make sure that the following has already been
• The Count is reset when exiting from the Service Mode by using Exit Clear Log.
completed.
5. Selecting any of Paper Jam/Document Feeder Jam/Failures/Last 40 Faults displays the Chain-
• ADJ 9.8 - dC675: The appropriate alignment adjustment cannot be performed if Registration
Link, Date & Time, and Total CV.
Control - Setup Cycle is not completed successfully.
6. Select Close to return to the Faults screen.
Procedure
1. Select Registration on the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen.
• In the System Registration Adjustment screen, load A3, 11x17, A4LEF, 8.5 x 11LEF, or
SRA3 paper in the Tray, and then select Print to output the specified number of measure-
ment charts that have sides 1 and 2 printed.
4. Trapezoid Correction Note: Selecting Calculate again after the adjustment has completed returns the displayed
values to their default values. If the adjustment values are re-input and Adjust is selected at
a. Select Trapezoid in the System Registration Adjustment screen.
this time, it will cause those values to be reflected. Therefore, never perform the adjustment
• When displayed for the first time, the measurement reference value of 399.7 mm is dis- without printing out and measuring the chart first.
played for A3.
6. Perpendicularity Adjustment
b. Measure Pa and Pb of the measurement chart that was printed in Step 2.
a. Select Perpendicularity in the System Registration Adjustment screen.
c. Input the measured value and select Calculate.
• When displayed for the first time, the measurement reference value of 10.0 mm is
• Measurement value input is in the range of Pa: 396.7 to 402.7 mm and Pb: 396.7 to
displayed.
402.7 mm in the case of A3.
b. Measure La and Lb on Sides 1 and 2 of the measurement chart that was printed in Step 2.
d. The automatically calculated adjustment amount is displayed in the adjustment amount
column. c. Select Side 1 , input the measured value, and select Adjust.
• The effective ranges of measured values are 7.0 to 13.0 mm for La and 7.0 to 13.0 mm
e. Use the displayed adjustment amount to adjust the position of Eccentric Cam at 2 locations
of 2nd BTR IN/OUT. (ADJ 9.20) for Lb.
d. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
5. Fast Scan Skew Adjustment
displayed.
Note: Do not perform hardware adjustment.
e. And then, select Side 2 , input the measured value, and select Adjust.
a. Select Fast Scan Skew in the System Registration Adjustment screen. • The effective ranges of measured values are 7.0 to 13.0 mm for La and 7.0 to 13.0 mm
• When displayed for the first time, the measurement reference value of 10.0 mm is for Lb.
displayed. f. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
b. Measure Sa and Sb on Sides 1 and 2 of the measurement chart that was printed in Step 2. displayed.
c. Enter measured value of Software Adjustment (Side 1) , then select Calculate. 7. Fast Scan % Adjustment
• The effective ranges of measured values are Sa: 7.0 to 13.0 mm, Sb: 7.0 to 13.0 mm. a. Select Fast Scan % in the System Registration Adjustment screen.
d. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be • When displayed for the first time, the measurement reference value of 276.7 mm is dis-
displayed. played for A3.
Note: Selecting Calculate again after the adjustment has completed returns the displayed b. Measure Lfs on Sides 1 and 2 of the measurement chart that was printed in Step 2.
values to their default values. If the adjustment values are re-input and Adjust is selected at c. Select Side 1 , input the measured value, and select Adjust.
this time, it will cause those values to be reflected. Therefore, never perform the adjustment
• Measurement value input is in the range of Lfs: 273.7 to 279.7 mm in the case of A3.
without printing out and measuring the chart first.
d. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
e. Then select Software Adjustment (Side 2) , input the measured value, and select Adjust.
displayed.
• The effective ranges of measured values are Sa: 7.0 to 13.0 mm, Sb: 7.0 to 13.0 mm.
e. And then, select Side 2 , input the measured value, and select Adjust.
f. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
• Measurement value input is in the range of Lfs: 273.7 to 279.7 mm in the case of A3.
displayed.
f. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
displayed.
a. Select Slow Scan % in the System Registration Adjustment screen. c. Select Side 1 , input the measured value, and select Adjust.
• When displayed for the first time, the measurement reference value of 399.7 mm is dis- • The effective range of measured values is 7.0 to 13.0 mm for A.
played for A3. d. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
b. Measure Lss on Sides 1 and 2 of the measurement chart that was printed in Step 2. displayed.
c. Select Side 1 , input the measured value, and select Adjust. e. And then, select Side 2 , input the measured value, and select Adjust.
• The effective range of the measured values of Lss is 396.7 to 402.7 mm for A3. • The effective range of measured values is 7.0 to 13.0 mm for A.
d. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be f. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
displayed. displayed.
e. And then, select Side 2 , input the measured value, and select Adjust. g. Select an unadjusted Tray or MSI in For Individual Trays, print out the measurement chart,
• The effective range of the measured values of Lss is 396.7 to 402.7 mm for A3. and then perform the procedure from step 2 onwards.
f. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be Note: Load A3 SEF, 11 x 17, A4LEF, 8.5 x 11LEF, or SA3 paper in Tray/MSI.
displayed. 11. Side 1/Side 2 Registration Adjustment
9. Lead Registration Adjustment
Note: Do not use the Side 1/Side 2 Registration Adjustment.
a. Select Lead Registration in the System Registration Adjustment screen.
• When displayed for the first time, the measurement reference value of 10.0 mm is
displayed.
b. Measure B on Sides 1 and 2 of the measurement chart that was printed in Step 2.
d. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
displayed.
f. And then, select Side 2 , input the measured value, and select Adjust.
g. The automatic adjustment is performed and Adjustment has been completed. will be
displayed.
• When displayed for the first time, the measurement reference value of 10.0 mm is
displayed.
b. Measure A on Sides 1 and 2 of the measurement chart that was printed in Step 2.
2. Input the Chain-Link No. and select Confirm/Change. • 124-325 (1 Billing Counter Mismatch)
3. The Current Setting Value and the New Value input column are displayed. • 124-312 (Any Product Number mismatched)
4. Enter the value that you wish to change to into the New Value column using the Keypad and • 124-317 (dC132 System Fail-4)
select Save. • 124-319 (dC132 System Fail-8)
The entered value can be cleared using the C button. • 124-326 (Unregistered IOT Speed)
Note: If the entered value is invalid, the following message is displayed. • 124-341 (CRUM Market fail MCU)
5. The entered number is displayed in the Current Settings column. • 124-343 (CRUM Market fail SYS2)
6. Select Close to return to the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen. • 124-351 (CRUM OEM fail MCU)
• 124-345 (Billing Meter Type Fail (at least 1 location is mismatched, unable to correct d C 1 3 5 H F S I Co u n t e r ( A d j u s t m e n t / O t h e r s )
automatically))
Purpose
• 124-346 (Billing Count Type Fail (different at all 3 locations)) To display the Spec Life (threshold value) and the Current Value (usage status) of the periodic re-
• 124-347 (Billing Count Type Fail (at least 1 location is mismatched, unable to correct placement parts. You can change the Spec Life and reset the Current Value.
automatically))
The following tables list the HSFI counters for dC135 procedures:
• 124-348 (Modal Break Point Fail (different at all 3 locations))
1. Table 1 : dC135 HFSI Counters (IOT)
• 124-349 (Modal Break Point Fail (at least 1 location is mismatched, unable to correct
automatically)) 2. Table 2 : dC135 HFSI Counters (IPoC)
• The IOT displayed on the UI screen represents the MCU PWB, while SYS1 represents the BP 3. The Initialize HFSI Counter screen is displayed.
PWB, and SYS2 represents the Controller PWB. 4. Select the parts to be replaced and select Details.
Note: 5. The Details screen appears to display the Chain-Link and the Part Name of the parts to be re-
placed, as well as the Spec Life , Current Value , Last Replacement , Second Last Replacement
• This function can only be used when failure has occurred.
, and Third Last Replacement counters.
(This function is supposed to be available with the failure active.)
6. If you want to reset the Current Value, select Reset Current Value. The Reset Current Value
• When exiting the Service Mode after setting the Serial Number, the failure will be cancelled. screen is displayed.
(The Print Test Pattern is not available with the failure active.)
• Following the message and selecting Reset will update the previous 3 replacement records
Procedure in the HFSI Counter as follows.
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Adjustment/Others.
a. The Second Last Replacement value is moved to Third Last Replacement.
2. On the [Adjustment/Others] screen, select Machine ID/Billing Data.
b. The Last Replacement value is moved to Second Last Replacement.
3. The Machine ID/Billing Data screen is displayed.
c. The Current Value value is moved to Last Replacement.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen, select the PWBA that was not replaced or the PWBA with
d. The Current Value value is set to '0'.
the correct data and select Start.
7. If you want to change the Spec Life, select Change Spec Life. The Change Spec Life screen is
5. Enter the Serial Number and select Confirm.
displayed.
6. Select Close to return to the Adjustment/Others screen.
8. Set the new Spec Life (Max. 8 digits) using the selection buttons or the keyboard and select
Save.
• The Spec Life value is overwritten with the new Spec Life value.
954- Drum Cartridge No. of rotations of Drum Cartridge Y (PV 1 Performs PV conversion on the number of Drum Cycles at Power 133000 113000 115000 Xero
800 Y conversion) (PV) ON, Job completion, Marking Drawer Close, and NVM Initializa-
tion for counting up
954- Drum Cartridge No. of rotations of Drum Cartridge M (PV 1 Performs PV conversion on the number of Drum Cycles at Power 133000 113000 115000 Xero
801 M conversion) (PV) ON, Job completion, Marking Drawer Close, and NVM Initializa-
tion for counting up
954- Drum Cartridge No. of rotations of Drum Cartridge C (PV 1 Performs PV conversion on the number of Drum Cycles at Power 133000 113000 115000 Xero
802 C conversion) (PV) ON, Job completion, Marking Drawer Close, and NVM Initializa-
tion for counting up
954- Drum Cartridge No. of rotations of Drum Cartridge K (PV 1 Performs PV conversion on the number of Drum Cycles at Power 325000 278000 238000 Xero
803 K conversion) (PV) ON, Job completion, Marking Drawer Close, and NVM Initializa-
tion for counting up
954- CC Assy Charge time of CC Assy 1 Performs PV conversion on the number of Drum Cycles at Power 127000 127000 127000 Xero
804 (PV) ON, Job completion, Marking Drawer Close, and NVM Initializa-
tion for counting up
954- Developer Hous- Usage time of the Developer Housing Assy/ 1 Counts up when the Developer Housing Assy stops 1500000 150000- 1500000 Deve
805 ing Assy/Devel- Developing Powder Y (PV conversion) [PV] 0
Performs PV conversion of the Deve Motor On time for counting
oping Powder Y
up.
954- Developer Hous- Usage time of the Developer Housing Assy/ 1 Counts up when the Developer Housing Assy stops 1500000 150000- 1500000 Deve
806 ing Assy/Devel- Developing Powder M (PV conversion) [PV] 0
Performs PV conversion of the Deve Motor On time for counting
oping Powder M
up.
954- Developer Hous- Usage time of the Developer Housing Assy/ 1 Counts up when the Developer Housing Assy stops 1500000 150000- 1500000 Deve
807 ing Assy/Devel- Developing Powder C (PV conversion) [PV] 0
Performs PV conversion of the Deve Motor On time for counting
oping Powder C
up.
954- Developer Hous- Usage time of the Developer Housing Assy/ 1 Counts up when the Developer Housing Assy stops 1500000 150000- 1500000 Deve
808 ing Assy/Devel- Developing Powder K (PV conversion) [PV] 0
Performs PV conversion of the Deve Clutch On time for counting
oping Powder K
up.
954- 1st BTR Y Current-carrying time for 1st BTR Y (PV 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Secondary Transfer 800000 800000 800000 X’fer
809 conversion) [PV] Unit
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: FC/+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: FC/+2
* When the paper size is unknown for the above condition, apply
+2.
954- 1st BTR M Current-carrying time for 1st BTR M (PV 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Secondary Transfer 800000 800000 800000 X’fer
810 conversion) [PV] Unit
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: FC/+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: FC/+2
* When the paper size is unknown for the above condition, apply
+2.
954- 1st BTR C Current-carrying time for 1st BTR C (PV 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Secondary Transfer 800000 800000 800000 X’fer
811 conversion) [PV] Unit
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: FC/+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: FC/+2
* When the paper size is unknown for the above condition, apply
+2.
954- 1st BTR K Current-carrying time for 1st BTR K (PV 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Secondary Transfer 800000 800000 800000 X’fer
812 conversion) [PV] Unit
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/
+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
* When the paper size is unknown for the above condition, apply
+2.
954- 2nd BTR Unit Operation count of 2nd BTR (PV conversion) 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Secondary Transfer 300000 300000 300000 X’fer
813 [PV] Unit
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/
+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
* When the paper size is unknown for the above condition, apply
+2.
954- IBT Belt Operation count of IBT Belt (PV conversion) 1 Counts up when an image passes through the Secondary Transfer 600000 600000 600000 X’fer
814 [PV] Unit
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/
+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
* When the paper size is unknown for the above condition, apply
+2.
954- IBT Belt CLN IBT Belt Cleaner ON Count (PV conversion) 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Secondary Transfer 300000 300000 300000 X’fer
815 Assy [PV] Unit
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/
+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
* When the paper size is unknown for the above condition, apply
+2.
954- CC Filter Operation time of CC Filter (PV conversion) 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit (only Du- 280000 280000 280000 Drive
816 [PV] plex Side 1) and when paper is output (both from Simplex and
Duplex)
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm:
BW/+1, FC/+2
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer:
BW/+2, FC/+4
954- Ozone Suction Operation time of Ozone Suction Filter (PV 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit (only Du- 840000 840000 840000 Drive
817 Filter conversion) [PV] plex Side 1) and when paper is output (both from Simplex and
Duplex)
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm:
BW/+1, FC/+2
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer:
BW/+2, FC/+4
954- Fusing Filter Operation time of Fusing Filter (PV 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit (only Du- 800000 800000 800000 Drive
818 conversion) [PV] plex Side 1) and when paper is output (both from Simplex and
Duplex)
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm:
BW/+1, FC/+2
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer:
BW/+2, FC/+4
954- Standard Fusing No. of sheets that passed through the Fusing 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit. 200000 200000 200000 Fusing
819 Unit (Standard Fusing) [PV]
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/
+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
954- Tray 1 Feed/Re- No. of sheets fed through Tray 1 Feed Roll, 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 1 300000 300000 300000 P/H
820 tard/Nudger Tray 1 Retard Roll, and Tray 1 Nudger Roll [she-
Roll ets]
954- Tray 2 Feed/Re- No. of sheets fed through Tray 2 Feed Roll, 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 2 300000 300000 300000 P/H
821 tard/Nudger Tray 2 Retard Roll, and Tray 2 Nudger Roll [she-
Roll ets]
954- Tray 3 Feed/Re- No. of sheets fed through Tray 3 Feed Roll, 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 3 300000 300000 300000 P/H
822 tard/Nudger Tray 3 Retard Roll, and Tray 3 Nudger Roll [she-
Roll ets]
954- Tray 4 Feed/Re- No. of sheets fed through Tray 4 Feed Roll, 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 4 300000 300000 300000 P/H
823 tard/Nudger Tray 4 Retard Roll, and Tray 4 Nudger Roll [she-
Roll ets]
954- MSI Feed/Re- No. of sheets fed through the MSI Feed Roll, 1 Counts up at feeding from MSI (regardless of w/ or w/o HCF). 300000 300000 300000 P/H
824 tard/Nudger Roll MSI Retard Roll, and MSI Nudger Roll [she-
(Including w/ ets]
HCF)
954- Takeaway Roll 1 No. of sheets that passed through the Take- 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 1 to 4 and 2000HCF 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
827 away Roll 1 (immediately after Tray 1 [she- 0
Feeder) ets]
954- Takeaway Roll 2 No. of sheets that passed through the Take- 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 2 to 4 and 2000HCF 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
828 away Roll 2 (immediately after Tray 2 [she- 0
Feeder) ets]
954- Takeaway Roll 3 No. of sheets that passed through the Take- 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 3 and 4 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
829 away Roll 3 [she- 0
ets]
954- Takeaway Roll 4 No. of sheets that passed through the Take- 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 3 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
830 away Roll 4 (immediately after Tray 3 [she- 0
Feeder) ets]
954- Takeaway Roll 5 No. of sheets that passed through the Take- 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 4 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
831 away Roll 5 [she- 0
ets]
954- Takeaway Roll 6 No. of sheets that passed through the Take- 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 4 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
832 away Roll 6 (immediately after Tray 4 [she- 0
Feeder) ets]
954- Takeaway The number of times Takeaway Clutch 1 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 1 to 4 and 2000HCF 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
835 Clutch 1 turns ON/OFF [she- 0
ets]
954- Takeaway The number of time Takeaway Clutch 2 turns 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 3 and 4 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
836 Clutch 2 ON/OFF [she- 0
ets]
954- Tray 1 Feeder No. of feedings from Tray 1 Feeder Unit 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 1 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
837 Unit [she- 0
ets]
954- Tray 2 Feeder No. of feedings from Tray 2 Feeder Unit 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 2 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
838 Unit [she- 0
ets]
954- Tray 3 Feeder No. of feedings from Tray 3 Feeder Unit 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 3 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
839 Unit [she- 0
ets]
954- Tray 4 Feeder No. of feedings from Tray 4 Feeder Unit 1 Counts up at feeding from Tray 4 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
840 Unit [she- 0
ets]
954- MSI Feeder Unit No. of feedings from MSI Feeder Unit 1 Counts up at feeding from MSI (regardless of w/ or w/o HCF). 1500000 150000- 1500000 P/H
841 (Including w/ [she- 0
HCF) ets]
954- MSI Pre Regi No. of sheets that passed through the MSI 1 Counts up at feeding from MSI (regardless of w/ or w/o HCF). 300000 300000 300000 P/H
849 Roll Pre Regi Roll [she-
ets]
954- Thick Paper No. of sheets that passed through the Fusing 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit. 200000 200000 200000 Fusing
850 Fusing Unit (Thick Paper Fusing) [PV]
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/ 5000(FX) 5000 5000(FX)
+1 (FX)
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
954- Envelope Fusing No. of sheets that passed through the Fusing 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit. 200000 200000 200000 Fusing
851 Unit (Envelope Fusing) [PV]
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/ 50000(FX) 50000 50000
+1 (FX) (FX)
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
954- Conductive No. of sheets that passed through the Fusing 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit. 100000 100000 100000 Fusing
852 Fusing Unit (Conductive Fusing) [PV]
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/ 50000(FX) 50000 50000
+1 (FX) (FX)
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
954- TA Fusing No. of sheets that passed through the Fusing 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit. 200000 200000 200000 Fusing
853 Unit (TA Fusing) [PV]
Paper length in process direction shorter than 216.0 mm: BW, FC/
+1
Paper length in process direction 216.0 mm or longer: BW, FC/+2
954- UFP Filter Operation time of UFP Filter (PV conversion) 1 Counts up when paper passes through the Fusing Unit (only Du- 340000 340000 340000 Drive
860 [PV] plex Side 1) and when paper is output (for both Simplex and
Duplex).
Paper length in the Process direction is 216.0 mm or longer:BW,
FC/+2
Paper length in the Process direction is 216.0 mm or longer:BW/
+2,FC/+4
956- IIT Scan Scan Count Only count Platen Scans, not CVT Scans 6000000 1 Scan Count (including pre-Scan). IPoC
802 [times]
• Max count value = 6,000,000 times and above • Counts up with each scan.
• Scan count after clearing HFSI Counter
• Total Scan count without clearing Recycle
956- Lamp ON Time Light Lamp Time Count the total time that the LED Lamp has lit up 7200000 1 [Sec] LED Lamp lighting time. IPoC
803 (AGOC, Lamp Check, etc. as well).
• Starts timer when the LED Lamp turns
• LED Lamp life 2000 hours
ON.
• Max count value = 7,200,000 s and above
• Starts timer when the LED Lamp turns
• LED Lamp ON time after clearing HFSI Counter
OFF.
• Total LED Lamp ON time without clearing Recycle
• When Carriage Initialize, write to the
NVM.
956- Lamp ON Count Lamp Turn On Count all the times the LED Lamp has lit up (AGOC, 6000000 1 LED Lamp ON count after clearing HFSI IPoC
804 Count Lamp Check, etc. as well). [times] Counter.
• LED Lamp life 6,000,000 times • Counts up when the LED Lamp turns
• Max count value = 6,000,000 times and above ON.
• When Carriage Initialize, write to the
NVM.
956- Platen Open/Close Platen I/L Open Used during recycle 3000 1 Angle Sensor Full Interruption Count Up IPoC
808 Count Count [times]
Max count value = 1,000,000 times and above
(Platen machine)
956- Side 2 LED ON Time Light Back LED Used during recycle 35000 1 [Sec] When the LED turns ON: Start timing IPoC
809 Time
Max count value = 7,200,000 s and above When the LED turns OFF: Stop timing
Counts the total duration when the lamp is ON (includ- Recycle -> Total LED ON time without
ing AGOC, etc.). clearing
955- Document Feed Feed Count No. of sheets fed from the DADF Document Tray 200000 1 [times] Count Up after Feed start to DADF
806 DADF Feed In Sensor 1/2 On
• The number of operations after HFSI Counter Clear
• Total number of operations that did not Clear
recycling
955- Document Feed Simp Simplex Feed Count Counts the no. of document sheets fed in Simplex 3000000 1 [Feed] Count Up when DADF Exit Sen- DADF
807 mode. sor OFF during Simplex transport
955- Document Feed Dup Duplex Feed Count Counts the no. of document pages fed in Duplex mode. 3000000 1 [Feed] Count Up when DADF Exit Sen- DADF
808 sor OFF during Duplex transport
955- Platen Open/Close Count I/L Open Count Platen Open/Close Count 257000 1 [times] Count Up when Platen Interlock DADF
810 (Platen Interlock Switch) Open
955- TA Clutch ON Count TA Clutch On-Count The number of operations of the DADF Takeaway 3000000 1 [times] Count Up when DADF Takeaway DADF
812 Clutch Clutch On
955- Nudger Solenoid number of Nudger Sol On Count The number of operations of the DADF Nudger 3000000 1 [times] Count Up when DADF Nudger DADF
820 operations Solenoid Solenoid ON
955- DADF Stamp Solenoid Oper- Stamp Sol On Count DADF Stamp Solenoid Operation Count (Solenoid life- 100000 1 [times] Count Up after DADF Stamp Sol- DADF
830 ation Count (Solenoid life- span management) enoid ON
span management)
• The number of operations after HFSI Counter Clear
• Total number of operations that did not Clear
recycling
955- DADF Stamp Solenoid Oper- Stamp Action Count DADF Stamp Solenoid Operation Count (Ink lifespan 3000 1 [times] Count Up after DADF Stamp Sol- DADF
831 ation Count (Ink lifespan management) enoid ON
management)
• The number of operations after HFSI Counter Clear
955- Number of times of Feed FeedCover Open Feeder Upper Cover hinge lifespan (Front Hinge/Rear 35000 1 [times] Count Up at Feeder Upper Cover DADF
832 Cover Open Count Hinge) (DADF Feeder Cover Interlock
Switch)
dC140 Analog Monitor (IO Check) • Change Output Level button: To temporarily change the output level of an Output compo-
nent for checking purposes, enter the component which output level you want to change. Se-
Purpose
lect Change Output Level , enter the value using either the Keypad on the screen or the
Monitors the Analog value of the A/D converted sensor, by operating the various component (such
arrow keys and select Save.
as C.C). You can temporarily change the output value.
• Enter Number button: Refer to Step 4
Table 1, dC140 Analog Monitor, lists the chain-link values for Input/Output components for dC 140
• Show Current Status button: Refer to Step 4
test procedures.
4. Enter the Chain-Link No. of the analog Input/Output components using the Keypad.
Procedure
• To proceed, select Enter Number on the screen, enter the Chain-Link No. and press <Start>.
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select IO Check.
2. On the IO Check screen, select Analog Monitor. Note: The status of the latest turned ON component is displayed on the screen.
3. The Analog Monitor screen is displayed. • To check the status of a previously turned ON component, select Enter Number , enter the
Chain-Link No. of that component and select Show Current Status. The status of the previ-
• Input/Output column: Component type Input/Output component
ously turned ON component is displayed.
• Enable/Disable column: Operation status - Enable Checking in progress , Disable Checking
5. Select Stop Current Component or Stop All Components to stop the component operation.
stopped
6. Select Close to return to the IO Check screen.
• Level column: Displays the received output level value. Level: 0 to 65535
010- Fusing Center NC Sensor The detected temperature at the Heat Roll Center. O - - Normal Output Range: 1020 to 242 Fusing
200
Failure Determination Level: High temperature error is detected
when it is 242 or lower.
Open circuit is detected when it is 1020 or higher.
010- Fusing Center NC Sensor Temperature of the device itself (compensation output). O - - Normal Output Range: 1020 to 276 Fusing
201
Failure Determination Level: High temperature error is detected
when it is 276 or lower.
Open circuit is detected when it is 1020 or higher.
010- Fusing Center NC Sensor Differential output (the difference between the detection/ O - - Normal Output Range: 0 to 992 Fusing
202 compensation values x 10).
Failure Determination Level: High temperature error is detected
when it is 992 or higher.
010- Fusing Rear NC Sensor The detected temperature at the Heat Roll Rear. O - - Normal Output Range: 1020 to 242 Fusing
203
Failure Determination Level: High Temperature Failure is detected
when it is 242 or lower.
Open circuit is detected when it is 1020 or higher.
010- Fusing Rear NC Sensor Temperature of the device itself (compensation output). O - - Normal Output Range: 1020 to 276 Fusing
204
Failure Determination Level: High Temperature Failure is detected
when it is 276 or lower.
Open circuit is detected when it is 1020 or higher.
010- Fusing Rear NC Sensor The difference between the detection/compensation val- O - - Normal Output Range: 0 to 992 Fusing
205 ues ((Rear NC Sensor VC - Rear NC Sensor VD) x 10).
Failure Determination Level: High Temperature Failure is detected
when it is 992 or higher.
010- Fusing Heat Roll STS Displays the detected temperature at the Heat Roll Rear O - - Normal Output Range: 900 to 350 Fusing
206 (voltage value between Fusing Heat Roll STS) as an AD
Failure Determination Level: High Temperature Failure is detected
value.
when it is 350 or lower.
Open circuit is detected when it is 900 or higher.
010- Fusing Harness Type Displays the resistance of the Fusing Harness state. O - - Normal Output Range: 0 to 1023 Fusing
207
Standard Fusing: 0 to 127
Heavyweight Curl Handling Fusing: 128 to 255
Envelope Wrinkle Handling Fusing: 256 to 383
Electrostatic Offset Handling Fusing: 384 to 511
Not Installed: 896 to 1023
Failure Determination Level: Other than the above
Mod-
Chain- O- Time ule
Link Component Name Description IN UT Out CE Corrective Action Name
010- Out Temp Sensor Displays the external temperature sensor value as an AD O - - When NVM ’Temp_Fail_CNTR’ counts up, the value of external Fusing
208 value. sensor output is abnormal.
Using NVM ’Temp_SNSR_Fail’ value, perform the following
action:
1: Check the External Sensor Circuit System for open circuits
2: Check the External Sensor Circuit System for short circuits
If no open circuits and short circuits are found, replace the Exter-
nal Sensor.
Note: When the External Sensor has a failure, Fusing Temperature
Adjustment is not performed in the environment at 20 degrees C
or lower.
042- Belt Edge Sensor Displays the AD value for the Belt Edge Sensor when the O - - Normal Output Range: 0 to 1023 Drive
200 Belt Edge LED is ON.
IBT Belt axis direction position = Rear side: 0 to 171
(Moves the Edge Sensor Actuator displacement towards the Rear
up to the Max.)
IBT Belt axis direction position = Center +/−0.5 mm: 341 to 683
(The Edge Sensor Actuator is almost vertical.)
IBT Belt axis direction position = Front side: 852 to 1023
(Moves the Edge Sensor Actuator displacement towards the Front
up to the Max.
The Actuator and the IBT Belt are not in contact)
Failure Determination Level: Out of the above range
Presumed cause for failure:
The Edge Sensor has dirty light receptor surface or failure
Elec Harness/MCU PWB operation failure
Corrective action at failure:
Clean or replace the Edge Sensor
Check the Elec Harness connection or replace it
Replace the MCU PWB
071- Tray 1 Size Sensor Analog Displays the AD value for Tray 1 paper size. O - - Normal Output Range: 0 to 1023 P/H
200
When A4 LEF is loaded: 304 to 365
When B5 SEF is loaded: 735 to 796
When Tray is pulled out: 922 to 989
Sensor failure: 990 to 1023
Failure Determination Level: Out of the above range
Presumed cause for failure:
Size SW operation failure at the appropriate Tray
Mod-
Chain- O- Time ule
Link Component Name Description IN UT Out CE Corrective Action Name
072- Tray 2 Size Sensor Analog Displays the AD value for Tray 2 paper size. O - - Normal Output Range: 0 to 1023 P/H
200
When A4 LEF is loaded: 304 to 365
When B5 SEF is loaded: 735 to 796
When Tray is pulled out: 922 to 989
Sensor failure: 990 to 1023
Failure Determination Level: Out of the above range
Presumed cause for failure:
Size SW operation failure at the appropriate Tray
Size detection mechanism failure at the appropriate Tray
Elec Harness/Circuit Board operation failure
Software failure
Corrective action at failure:
Replace the Size SW for the appropriate Tray
Replace the Size detection mechanism at the appropriate Tray
Replace the Elec Harness and Circuit Board
073- Tray 3 Size Sensor Analog Displays the AD value for Tray 3 paper size. O - - Normal Output Range: 0 to 1023 P/H
200
When A4 LEF is loaded: 304 to 365
When 8.5x11’ LEF is loaded: 428 to 487
When Tray is pulled out: 922 to 989
Sensor failure: 990 to 1023
Failure Determination Level: Out of the above range
Presumed cause for failure:
Size SW operation failure at the appropriate Tray
Size detection mechanism failure at the appropriate Tray
Elec Harness/Circuit Board operation failure
Software failure
Corrective action at failure:
Replace the Size SW for the appropriate Tray
Replace the Size detection mechanism at the appropriate Tray
Mod-
Chain- O- Time ule
Link Component Name Description IN UT Out CE Corrective Action Name
074- Tray 4 Size Sensor Analog Displays the AD value for Tray 4 paper size. O - - Normal Output Range: 0 to 1023 P/H
200
When A4 LEF is loaded: 304 to 365
When 8.5x11’ LEF is loaded: 428 to 487
When Tray is pulled out: 922 to 989
Sensor failure: 990 to 1023
Failure Determination Level: Out of the above range
Presumed cause for failure:
Size SW operation failure at the appropriate Tray
Size detection mechanism failure at the appropriate Tray
Elec Harness/Circuit Board operation failure
Software failure
Corrective action at failure:
Replace the Size SW for the appropriate Tray
Replace the Size detection mechanism at the appropriate Tray
Replace the Elec Harness and Circuit Board
075- MSI Size Sensor Displays the AD value of MSI Size Sensor. O - - Normal Output Range: 60 to 966 (nominal) P/H
200
Failure Determination Level: No changes at 20 or lower
Presumed cause for failure: MSI Size Sensor operation failure
Corrective action at failure: Check the operation of the MSI Size
Sensor (check for hardware failures / Sensor output AD value). If
’NG’, replace the MSI Size Sensor.
089- MOB Moni In A MOB Sensor: Displays the Analog Monitor voltage at IN. O - - Operation Conditions: Start the Analog Monitor with a sheet of Regi-
200 paper inserted between the MOB Sensor and the IBT Belt. Con
Failure Determination Level: 93 (Equivalent to analog amplitude
of 0.3V)
If the level exceeds the above failure determination level, it will
be judged as an error. In that case, perform the following actions.
1. Remove the Sensor Assy from the IOT and visually check the
IN_MOB Sensor itself.
2a. (If it is found to have Toner contamination) Clean it and then
check the Analog Monitor and the displayed value again.
2b. (If the visual check reveals no problem) Replace the Sensor.
Mod-
Chain- O- Time ule
Link Component Name Description IN UT Out CE Corrective Action Name
089- MOB Moni Center A MOB Sensor: Displays the Analog Monitor voltage at O - - Operation Conditions: Start the Analog Monitor with a sheet of Regi-
201 CENTER. paper inserted between the MOB Sensor and the IBT Belt. Con
Failure Determination Level: 93 (Equivalent to analog amplitude
of 0.3V)
If the level exceeds the above failure determination level, it will
be judged as an error. In that case, perform the following actions.
1. Remove the Sensor Assy from the IOT and visually check the
CNT_MOB Sensor itself.
2a. (If it is found to have Toner contamination) Clean it and then
check the Analog Monitor and the displayed value again.
2b. (If the visual check reveals no problem) Replace the Sensor.
089- MOB Moni Out A MOB Sensor: Displays the Analog Monitor voltage at OUT. O - - Operation Conditions: Start the Analog Monitor with a sheet of Regi-
202 paper inserted between the MOB Sensor and the IBT Belt. Con
Failure Determination Level: 93 (Equivalent to analog amplitude
of 0.3V)
If the level exceeds the above failure determination level, it will
be judged as an error. In that case, perform the following actions.
1. Remove the Sensor Assy from the IOT and visually check the
OUT_MOB Sensor itself.
2a. (If it is found to have Toner contamination) Clean it and then
check the Analog Monitor and the displayed value again.
2b. (If the visual check reveals no problem) Replace the Sensor.
Note: Input components can easily be checked in batch by specific group components.
• Initialize NVM does not initialize the settings for Billing Counter, Machine Serial Number, Mar- The following tables list the Input Component Control Codes for dC330 troubleshooting:
ket, HFSI, Shutdown History, and Jam/Fail Counter. The values of Shutdown History and Jam/
Fail Counter are cleared when the Exit Clear Log is specified at Diag Exit. 1. Table 1 : dC330 Input Component Check List (IOT)
• Each password can be deleted with KO Tool. 2. Table 2 : dC330 Input Component Check List (IPoC)
PFIM Interface Module • To proceed, select Enter Number on the screen, enter the Chain-Link No. and press <Start>.
IISS (IIT/IPS) - Note: The status of the latest turned ON component is displayed on the screen.
IISS - Extension - • To check the status of a previously turned ON component, select Enter Number , enter the
Input Device DADF Chain-Link No. of that component and select Show Current Status. The status of the previ-
ously turned ON component is displayed.
Sys-SYSTEM Configurable system area of CE Mode
• Select Cyclic Motion for the component to repeat the operation.
Sys-USER User configurable system area
• A beep will sound according to the status of input components. The volume can be set by se-
4. Click Start. lecting Volume and toggling through the Loud, Normal, Soft, Off sequence. The default vol-
ume is Off and the changed volume will be effective until the Power is turned OFF.
5. Follow the message shown on the Initialize NVM screen and select Yes or No.
5. Input/Output column (component type), Status column (Operation status: High/Low), and
6. Select Close to return to the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen.
Counter column (Operation Count) are displayed on the Component Control screen.
6. Select Stop Current Component or Stop All Components to stop the component operation.
7. Select Close to return to the IO Check screen. dC330 Input Component Control Codes
010-200 Fusing Entrance Sensor Detects paper on Fusing Entrance Sensor. - X - Low Paper detected Fusing
010-201 Fusing Exit Sensor Detects paper on Fusing Exit Sensor. - X - Low Paper detected Fusing
010-202 Fusing Unit New Detects new Fusing Unit. - X - Low Detects new CC Fusing
010-203 Fusing Nip Sensor Detects Nip state of Fusing Unit. - X - Low Nipped Fusing
041-200 MCU F3 Status Detects the F3 fuse blow-out on the MCU PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-201 MCU F4 Status Detects the F4 fuse blow-out on the MCU PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-202 IOT F1 Status Detects the F1 fuse blow-out on the MD, IO PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-203 IOT F3 Status Detects the F3 fuse blow-out on the MD, IO PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-204 IOT F7 Status Detects the F7 fuse blow-out on the MD, IO PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-205 IOT F9 Status Detects the F9 fuse blow-out on the MD, IO PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-206 IOT F10 Status Detects the F10 fuse blow-out on the MD, IO PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-207 IOT F11 Status Detects the F11 fuse blow-out on the MD, IO PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-208 TM F1 Status Detects the F1 fuse blow-out on the MD, TM PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-209 TM F2 Status Detects the F2 fuse blow-out on the MD, TM PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-210 TM F3 Status Detects the F3 fuse blow-out on the MD, TM PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
041-211 TM F4 Status Detects the F4 fuse blow-out on the MD, TM PWB. - X - High Fuse has blown IOT
Manager
042-200 Belt Home Position Sensor Detects the Home Position of the IBT Belt. - X - High Home Drive
047-200 OCT Front Position Sensor Detects OCT Front Position Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Front Position OutCon
047-201 OCT Rear Position Sensor Detects OCT Rear Position Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Rear Position OutCon
047-202 OCT Full Stack Sensor Detects OCT Full Stack Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Full Stack OutCon
ON Status
Cyclic Multiple Out-
Chain- Time Opera- put Prohibited Connec- Module
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain-Link tor Meaning Name
047-203 OCT Detect Detects the OCT. - X - Low OCT detected OutCon
061-200 Polygon Motor#1:Ready Displays Polygon Motor (YM) Ready signal. - X - Low Ready ROS
061-201 Polygon Motor#2:Ready Displays Polygon Motor (CK) Ready signal. - X - Low Ready ROS
061-202 NO-SOS FAIL (M) Displays the status of the NO-SOS FAIL (M) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
061-203 NO-SOS FAIL (K) Displays the status of the NO-SOS FAIL (K) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
061-204 SOS LONG FAIL (M) Displays the status of the SOS LONG FAIL (M) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
061-205 SOS LONG FAIL (K) Displays the status of the SOS LONG FAIL (K) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
061-206 SOS SHORT FAIL (M) Displays the status of the SOS SHORT FAIL (M) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
061-207 SOS SHORT FAIL (K) Displays the status of the SOS SHORT FAIL (K) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
061-208 SOS STOP FAIL (M) Displays the status of the SOS STOP FAIL (M) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
061-209 SOS STOP FAIL (K) Displays the status of the SOS STOP FAIL (K) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
061-210 LD_ALM (Y) Displays the status of the LD_ALM (Y) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
Stores the details in [NVM] LD State at Occurrence of
LD_Alarm Y (749-138) when LD_ALM occurs.
061-211 LD_ALM (M) Displays the status of the LD_ALM (M) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
Stores the details in [NVM] LD State at Occurrence of
LD_Alarm M (749-139) when LD_ALM occurs.
061-212 LD_ALM (C) Displays the status of the LD_ALM (C) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
Stores the details in [NVM] LD State at Occurrence of
LD_Alarm C (749-140) when LD_ALM occurs.
061-213 LD_ALM (K) Displays the status of the LD_ALM (K) signal. - X - Low Normal ROS
Stores the details in [NVM] LD State at Occurrence of
LD_Alarm K (749-141) when LD_ALM occurs.
061-214 ROS Connect Fail (Y) Displays the status of the connection between the - X - Low Normal ROS
ROS Y PWB and the MCU.
061-215 ROS Connect Fail (M) Displays the status of the connection between the - X - Low Normal ROS
ROS M PWB and the MCU.
061-216 ROS Connect Fail (C) Displays the status of the connection between the - X - Low Normal ROS
ROS C PWB and the MCU.
ON Status
Cyclic Multiple Out-
Chain- Time Opera- put Prohibited Connec- Module
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain-Link tor Meaning Name
061-217 ROS Connect Fail (K) Displays the status of the connection between the - X - Low Normal ROS
ROS K PWB and the MCU.
071-100 Tray 1 Pre Feed Sensor Detects the Tray 1 Pre Feed Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
071-101 Feed Out Sensor1 Detects the Feed Out Sensor 1 ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
071-200 Tray 1 No Paper Sensor Detects the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High No paper detected P/H
071-201 Tray 1 Level Sensor Detects the Tray 1 Level Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High At this position, paper can P/H
be supplied
071-202 Tray 1 Size Sensor Digital Detects the Tray 1 Size Sensor Digital ON/OFF. - X - Low The Sensor is depressed P/H
072-100 Tray 2 Pre Feed Sensor Detects the Tray 2 Pre Feed Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
072-101 Feed Out Sensor2 Detects the Feed Out Sensor 2 ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
072-200 Tray 2 No Paper Sensor Detects the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High No paper detected P/H
072-201 Tray 2 Level Sensor Detects the Tray 2 Level Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High At this position, paper can P/H
be supplied
072-202 Tray 2 Size Sensor Digital Detects the Tray 2 Size Sensor Digital ON/OFF. - X - Low The Sensor is depressed P/H
073-100 Tray 3 Pre Feed Sensor Detects the Tray 3 Pre Feed Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
073-101 Feed Out Sensor 3 Detects the Feed Out Sensor 3 ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
073-200 Tray 3 No Paper Sensor Detects the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High No paper detected P/H
073-201 Tray 3 Level Sensor Detects the Tray 3 Level Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High At this position, paper can P/H
be supplied
074-100 Tray 4 Pre Feed Sensor Detects the Tray 4 Pre Feed Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
074-101 Feed Out Sensor 4 Detects the Feed Out Sensor4 ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
074-200 Tray 4 No Paper Sensor Detects the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High No paper detected P/H
074-201 Tray 4 Level Sensor Detects the Tray 4 Level Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High At this position, paper can P/H
be supplied
075-100 MSI Pre Feed Sensor Detects the MSI Pre Feed Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
075-200 MSI Lift Up Sensor Detects the MSI Lift Up Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Lift Up P/H
075-201 MSI Lift Down Sensor Detects the MSI Lift Down Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Lift Down P/H
075-202 MSI No Paper Sensor Detects the MSI No Paper Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High No paper P/H
075-203 MSI Paper Set Sensor Detects the MSI Paper Set Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Paper detected P/H
ON Status
Cyclic Multiple Out-
Chain- Time Opera- put Prohibited Connec- Module
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain-Link tor Meaning Name
077-100 Pre Regi Sensor Detects the Pre Regi Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
077-101 MSI Pre Regi Sensor Detects the MSI Pre Regi Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
077-102 Regi In Sensor Detects the Regi In Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
077-103 Regi Out Sensor Detects the Regi Out Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Paper detected P/H
077-104 Transparency Sensor Detects the Transparency Sensor ON/OFF. - X - Low Other than Transparency P/H
(Transparency frame
detected)
077-105 Invert In Sensor Detects the Invert In Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Paper detected P/H
077-106 Invert End Sensor Detects the Invert End Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Paper detected P/H
077-107 Duplex In Sensor Detects the Duplex In Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Paper detected P/H
077-109 Duplex Out Sensor Detects the Duplex Out Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Paper detected P/H
077-110 IOT Exit Sensor Detects the IOT Exit Sensor ON/OFF. - X - High Paper detected P/H
077-300 Left Hand Cover Interlock Detects the Left Hand Cover Interlock Open/Close. - X - Low Open P/H
077-301 Right Hand Cover Detects Right Hand Cover Interlock Open/Close. - X - Low Open P/H
Interlock
077-302 PH Drawer Interlock Detects PH Drawer Interlock Open/Close. - X - Low Open P/H
077-303 Front Cover Interlock Detects the Front Cover Interlock Open/Close. - X - High Open P/H
077-304 MSI Cover Interlock Detects MSI Cover Interlock Open/Close. - X - High Open P/H
091-200 Waste Toner Bottle Sensor Detects the Waste Toner Bottle. - X - Low Available Xero
091-201 Waste Toner Near Full Detects Waste Toner Bottle Near Full. - X - High Near Full Xero
Sensor
091-202 CC New Signal Detects the current-carrying/open circuit status of - X - Low Detects new CC Xero
Fuse.
093-200 Low Toner Sensor Y Detects amount of toner in Toner Reserve Tank (Y). - X 093-201 Low No Toner Deve
[I/O]Low Toner 093-202 Low -
[I/O]Toner Selector A 093-203 Low -
[I/O]Toner Selector B
Switches among YMCK according to the combination
of Toner Selector A and B.
* According to the configuration of the sensor hard-
ware, the level becomes unstable after approx. 3sec
ON Status
Cyclic Multiple Out-
Chain- Time Opera- put Prohibited Connec- Module
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain-Link tor Meaning Name
093-201 Low Toner Sensor M Detects amount of toner in Toner Reserve Tank (M). - X 093-200 Low No Toner Deve
[I/O]Low Toner 093-202 Low -
[I/O]Toner Selector A 093-203 High -
[I/O]Toner Selector B
Switches among YMCK according to the combination
of Toner Selector A and B.
* According to the configuration of the sensor hard-
ware, the level becomes unstable after approx. 3sec
from Power ON and 1sec after Component Check
begins.
093-202 Low Toner Sensor C Detects amount of toner in Toner Reserve Tank (C). - X 093-200 Low No Toner Deve
[I/O]Low Toner 093-201 High -
[I/O]Toner Selector A 093-203 Low -
[I/O]Toner Selector B
Switches among YMCK according to the combination
of Toner Selector A and B.
* According to the configuration of the sensor hard-
ware, the level becomes unstable after approx. 3sec
from Power ON and 1sec after Component Check
begins.
093-203 Low Toner Sensor K Detects amount of toner in Toner Reserve Tank (K). - X 093-200 Low No Toner Deve
[I/O]Low Toner 093-201 High -
[I/O]Toner Selector A 093-202 High -
[I/O]Toner Selector B
Switches among YMCK according to the combination
of Toner Selector A and B.
* According to the configuration of the sensor hard-
ware, the level becomes unstable after approx. 3sec
from Power ON and 1sec after Component Check
begins.
093-205 Dispense Cover Sensor Detects the open/closed status of the Dispense Cover. - X High Open state Deve
093-206 Marking Drawer Interlock Detects the open/closed status of the Marking Drawer - X Low Closed state Deve
Switch.
ON Status
Cyclic Multiple Out-
Chain- Time Opera- put Prohibited Connec- Module
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain-Link tor Meaning Name
094-200 1st BTR Contact Retract Detects the 1st BTR Contact Retract Sensor ON/OFF. - X Low Retract X’fer
Sensor
Position
094-201 2nd BTR Contact Retract Detects the 2nd BTR Contact Retract Sensor ON/OFF. - X Low Retract X’fer
Sensor
Position
094-202 Post 2nd BTR Sensor Detects the Post 2nd BTR Sensor ON/OFF. - X Low Paper detected X’fer
005- Bottom Sensor Bottom Sensor On (Tray is in the home position) - High
202
005- Level Sensor Level Sensor is ON (Nudger Roller high position) - High
203
005- Feed Out Sensor Feed Out Sensor On (document present) - High
205
005- Lead Regi Sensor Lead Regi Sensor On (document present) - Low
207
005- Feeder Cover Interlock Switch Feeder Cover Interlock Switch On (Feeder Cover Close) - High
212
005- APS No. 1 Sensor APS No. 1 Sensor On (document present) - High
218
005- APS No. 2 Sensor APS No. 2 Sensor On (document present) - High
219
005- APS No. 3 Sensor APS No. 3 Sensor On (document present) - High
220
Chain-
Link Component Name Description Timeout Connector Level
005- L/H Cover Interlock Sensor Sensor On (Left Hand Cover Close) - Low
223
010- Fusing Unit Drive Motor: Rotates the Fusing Unit Drive Motor when Process Speed is 320 mm/s. - X 010 002 Low ON State Fusing
001 320 mm/s
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor 010 003 High Gain 1
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 1 010 004 High Gain 2
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 2 010 005 - Clock
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Clock High -> Low -> Reverse Rota-
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Reverse: Sets the reverse rotation time High tion -> For-
by the combination of [NVM] 744-695~708 when the stop process is ward Rotation
carried out. -> Reverse
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Fusing Unit Rotation
Drive Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.)
When the operation starts: Reverse rotation -> Forward rotation
When the operation stops: Forward rotation -> Reverse rotation
010- Fusing Unit Drive Motor: Rotates the Fusing Unit Drive Motor when Process Speed is 308 mm/s. - X 010 001 Low ON State Fusing
002 308 mm/s
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor 010 003 High Gain 1
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 1 010 004 High Gain 2
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 2 010 005 - Clock
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Clock High -> Low -> Reverse Rota-
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Reverse: Sets the reverse rotation time High tion -> For-
by the combination of [NVM] 744-695~708 when the stop process is ward Rotation
carried out. -> Reverse
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Fusing Unit Rotation
Drive Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.)
When the operation starts: Reverse rotation -> Forward rotation
When the operation stops: Forward rotation -> Reverse rotation
010- Fusing Unit Drive Motor: Rotates the Fusing Unit Drive Motor when Process Speed is 220 mm/s. - X 010 001 Low ON State Fusing
003 220 mm/s
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor 010 002 Low Gain 1
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 1 010 004 High Gain 2
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 2 010 005 - Clock
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Clock High -> Low -> Reverse Rota-
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Reverse: Sets the reverse rotation time High tion -> For-
by the combination of [NVM] 744-695~708 when the stop process is ward Rotation
carried out. -> Reverse
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Fusing Unit Rotation
Drive Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.)
When the operation starts: Reverse rotation -> Forward rotation
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
010- Fusing Unit Drive Motor: Rotates the Fusing Unit Drive Motor when Process Speed is 154 mm/s. - X 010 001 Low ON State Fusing
004 154 mm/s
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor 010 002 Low Gain 1
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 1 010 003 High Gain 2
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 2 010 005 - Clock
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Clock High -> Low -> Reverse Rota-
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Reverse: Sets the reverse rotation time High tion -> For-
by the combination of [NVM] 744-695~708 when the stop process is ward Rotation
carried out. -> Reverse
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Fusing Unit Rotation
Drive Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.)
When the operation starts: Reverse rotation -> Forward rotation
When the operation stops: Forward rotation -> Reverse rotation
010- Fusing Unit Drive Motor: Rotates the Fusing Unit Drive Motor when Process Speed is 110 mm/s. - X 010 001 Low ON State Fusing
005 110 mm/s
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor 010 002 High Gain 1
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 1 010 003 Low Gain 2
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Gain 2 010 004 - Clock
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Clock High -> Low -> Reverse Rota-
[I/O] Fusing Unit Drive Motor Reverse: Sets the reverse rotation time High tion -> For-
by the combination of [NVM] 744-695~708 when the stop process is ward Rotation
carried out. -> Reverse
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Fusing Unit Rotation
Drive Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.)
When the operation starts: Reverse rotation -> Forward rotation
When the operation stops: Forward rotation -> Reverse rotation
010- Heat Roll Main Lamp 1 Turns Heat Roll Main Lamp 1 ON/OFF. 1000 X 010 008 Low On Fusing
007
[I/O] Fusing Main Lamp 1 ms 010 009
(The Faults (Chain-Link) that are also being detected while running this
Component:
10-311, 10-320, 10-322, 10-323, 10-324, 10-326, 10-327, 10-328, 10-
334, 59-313)
010- Heat Roll Main Lamp 2 Turns Heat Roll Main Lamp 2 ON/OFF. 1000 X 010 007 Low On Fusing
008
[I/O] Fusing Main Lamp 2 ms 010 009
(The Faults (Chain-Link) that are also being detected while running this
Component:
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
010- Heat Roll Sub Lamp Turns Heat Roll Sub Lamp ON/OFF. 1000 X 010 007 Low On Fusing
009
[I/O] Fusing Sub Lamp ms 010 008
(The Faults (Chain-Link) that are also being detected while running this
Component:
10-311, 10-320, 10-322, 10-323, 10-324, 10-326, 10-327, 10-328, 10-
334, 59-313)
042- Main Motor: 320 mm/s Rotates the Main Motor when Process Speed is 320 mm/s. - X 042 002 Low ON State Drive
001
[I/O] Main Motor 042 003 High -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 1 042 004 High -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 2 042 005 - Clock
[I/O] Main Motor Clock 042 023
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Main Mo- 042 024
tor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 025
042 026
042 027
093 023
042- Main Motor: 308 mm/s Rotates the Main Motor when Process Speed is 308 mm/s. - X 042 001 Low ON State Drive
002
[I/O] Main Motor 042 003 High -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 1 042 004 High -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 2 042 005 - Clock
[I/O] Main Motor Clock 042 023
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Main Mo- 042 024
tor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 025
042 026
042 027
093 023
042- Main Motor: 220 mm/s Rotates the Main Motor when Process Speed is 220 mm/s. - X 042 001 Low ON State Drive
003
[I/O] Main Motor 042 002 Low -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 1 042 004 High -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 2 042 005 - Clock
[I/O] Main Motor Clock 042 023
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Main Mo- 042 024
tor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 025
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 026
042 027
093 023
042- Main Motor: 154 mm/s Rotates the Main Motor when Process Speed is 154 mm/s. - X 042 001 Low ON State Drive
004
[I/O] Main Motor 042 002 High -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 1 042 003 Low -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 2 042 005 - Clock
[I/O] Main Motor Clock 042 023
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Main Mo- 042 024
tor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 025
042 026
042 027
093 023
042- Main Motor: 110 mm/s Rotates the Main Motor when Process Speed is 110 mm/s. - X 042 001 Low ON State Drive
005
[I/O] Main Motor 042 002 High -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 1 042 003 Low -
[I/O] Main Motor Gain 2 042 004 - Clock
[I/O] Main Motor Clock 042 023
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Main Mo- 042 024
tor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 025
042 026
042 027
093 023
042- Drum Motor K: 320 Rotates the Drum Motor (K) when Process Speed is 320 mm/s. - X 042 007 Low ON State Drive
006 mm/s
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 008 High -
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 009 High -
operation.) 042 010 - Clock
[I/O] Drum Motor K 042 016
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 1 K 042 017
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 2 K 042 018
[I/O] Drum Motor Clock K 042 019
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 027
093 023
042- Drum Motor K: 308 Rotates the Drum Motor (K) when Process Speed is 308 mm/s. - X 042 006 Low ON State Drive
007 mm/s
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 008 High -
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 009 High -
operation.) 042 010 - Clock
[I/O] Drum Motor K 042 015
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 1 K 042 017
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 2 K 042 018
[I/O] Drum Motor Clock K 042 019
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
093 023
042- Drum Motor K: 220 Rotates the Drum Motor (K) when Process Speed is 220 mm/s. - X 042 006 Low ON State Drive
008 mm/s
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 007 Low -
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 009 High -
operation.) 042 010 - Clock
[I/O] Drum Motor K 042 015
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 1 K 042 016
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 2 K 042 018
[I/O] Drum Motor Clock K 042 019
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
093 023
042- Drum Motor K: 154 Rotates the Drum Motor (K) when Process Speed is 154 mm/s. - X 042 006 Low ON State Drive
009 mm/s
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 007 Low -
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 008 High -
operation.) 042 010 - Clock
[I/O] Drum Motor K 042 015
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042- Drum Motor K: 110 Rotates the Drum Motor (K) when Process Speed is 110 mm/s. - X 042 006 Low ON State Drive
010 mm/s
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 007 High -
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 008 Low -
operation.) 042 009 - Clock
[I/O] Drum Motor K 042 015
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 1 K 042 016
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 2 K 042 017
[I/O] Drum Motor Clock K 042 018
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
093 023
042- Drum Motor YMC: 308 Rotates the Drum Motor (YMC) when Process Speed is 308 mm/s. - X 042 012 Low ON State Drive
011 mm/s
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 013 High -
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 014 High -
operation.) 042 023 Clock
[I/O] Drum Motor YMC 042 024
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 1 YMC 042 025
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 2 YMC 042 026
[I/O] Drum Motor Clock YMC 042 027
093 024
042- Drum Motor YMC: 220 Rotates the Drum Motor (YMC) when Process Speed is 220 mm/s. - X 042 011 Low ON State Drive
012 mm/s
042 013 High -
042 014 Low -
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 023 - Clock
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 024
operation.) 042 025
[I/O] Drum Motor YMC 042 026
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 1 YMC 042 027
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 2 YMC 093 024
[I/O] Drum Motor Clock YMC
042- Drum Motor YMC: 154 Rotates the Drum Motor (YMC) when Process Speed is 154 mm/s. - X 042 011 Low ON State Drive
013 mm/s
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 012 Low -
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 014 Low -
operation.) 042 023 - Clock
[I/O] Drum Motor YMC 042 024
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 1 YMC 042 025
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 2 YMC 042 026
[I/O] Drum Motor Clock YMC 042 027
093 024
042- Drum Motor YMC: 110 Rotates the Drum Motor (YMC) when Process Speed is 110 mm/s. - X 042 011 Low ON State Drive
014 mm/s
(Retract the Transfer Module before the operation. Also, in order to not 042 012 Low -
damage the IBT Belt, remove the IBT Marking Drawer before the 042 013 Low -
operation.) 042 023 - Clock
[I/O] Drum Motor YMC 042 024
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 1 YMC 042 025
[I/O] Drum Motor Gain 2 YMC 042 026
[I/O] Drum Motor Clock YMC 042 027
093 024
042- IBT Drive Motor: 320 Rotates the IBT Drive Motor when Process Speed is 320 mm/s [Walk - X 042 007 Low ON State Drive
015 mm/s control]. (The operation stops when the conditions for 042-326 Belt
042 008 High -
Home Position too long Fail / 042-327 Belt Position Fail / 042-328 Belt
Edge Sensor Fail are satisfied.) 042 009 High -
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor 042 010 - Clock
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 1 042 016
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 2 042 017
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Clock 042 018
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the IBT Drive 042 019
Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 020
042 021
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
093 023
042- IBT Drive Motor: 308 Rotates the IBT Drive Motor when Process Speed is 308 mm/s [Walk - X 042 006 Low ON State Drive
016 mm/s control]. (The operation stops when the conditions for 042-326 Belt
042 008 High -
Home Position too long Fail / 042-327 Belt Position Fail / 042-328 Belt
Edge Sensor Fail are satisfied.) 042 009 High -
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor 042 010 - Clock
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 1 042 015
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 2 042 017
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Clock 042 018
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the IBT Drive 042 019
Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 020
042 021
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
093 023
042- IBT Drive Motor: 220 Rotates the IBT Drive Motor when Process Speed is 220 mm/s [Walk - X 042 006 Low ON State Drive
017 mm/s control]. (The operation stops when the conditions for 042-326 Belt
042 007 Low -
Home Position too long Fail / 042-327 Belt Position Fail / 042-328 Belt
Edge Sensor Fail are satisfied.) 042 009 High -
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor 042 010 - Clock
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 1 042 015
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 2 042 016
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Clock 042 018
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the IBT Drive 042 019
Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 020
042 021
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
093 023
042- IBT Drive Motor: 154 Rotates the IBT Drive Motor when Process Speed is 154 mm/s [Walk - X 042 006 Low ON State Drive
018 mm/s control]. (The operation stops when the conditions for 042-326 Belt
042 007 High -
Home Position too long Fail / 042-327 Belt Position Fail / 042-328 Belt
Edge Sensor Fail are satisfied.) 042 008 Low -
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor 042 010 - Clock
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 1 042 015
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 2 042 016
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Clock 042 017
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the IBT Drive 042 019
Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 020
042 021
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
093 023
042- IBT Drive Motor: 110 Rotates the IBT Drive Motor when Process Speed is 110 mm/s [Walk - X 042 006 Low ON State Drive
019 mm/s control]. (The operation stops when the conditions for 042-326 Belt
042 007 High -
Home Position too long Fail / 042-327 Belt Position Fail / 042-328 Belt
Edge Sensor Fail are satisfied.) 042 008 Low -
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor 042 009 - Clock
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 1 042 015
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Gain 2 042 016
[I/O] IBT Drive Motor Clock 042 017
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the IBT Drive 042 018
Motor Gain 1, Gain 2 and Clock.) 042 020
042 021
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
093 023
042- IBT Steering Motor Rotates the IBT Steering Motor in the CW direction (strong excitation, - X 042 015 High ON State Drive
020 (CW) low drive frequency).
042 016 Low CW Direction
High Current [I/O] IBT Steering Motor
042 017 - Strong Current
[I/O] IBT Steering Motor Direction
042 018
[PWM] IBT Steering Motor Current
042 019
After 1 rotation in the CW direction and resetting to 0 degrees, it
042 021
stops.
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
042- IBT Steering Motor Rotates the IBT Steering Motor in the CCW direction (strong excitation, - X 042 015 High ON State Drive
021 (CCW) low drive frequency).
042 016 High CCW Direction
High Current [I/O] IBT Steering Motor
042 017 - Strong Current
[I/O] IBT Steering Motor Direction
042 018
[PWM] IBT Steering Motor Current
042 019
After 1 rotation in the CCW direction and resetting to 0 degrees, it
042 020
stops.
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042- IBT Steering Motor Rotates the IBT Steering Motor in the CW direction (weak excitation, - X 042 015 High ON State Drive
022 (CW) high drive frequency).
042 016 Low CW Direction
Low Current [I/O] IBT Steering Motor
042 017 - Weak Current
[I/O] IBT Steering Motor Direction
042 018
[PWM] IBT Steering Motor Current
042 019
After 1 rotation in the CW direction and resetting to 0 degrees, it
042 020
stops.
042 021
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
042- IBT Belt Check: <Multi Component Control> - X 042 001 - - Drive
023
320 mm/s Checks the operation of the IBT Belt drive system. (320 mm/s) 042 002
Carries out combined operation of the following components. 042 003
[Component] Drum Motor K: 042-006 042 004
[Component] IBT Drive Motor: 042-015 042 005
[Component] Main Motor: 042-001 042 006
* Retract the 1st BTR and contact the 2nd BTR before the operation. 042 007
042 008
042 009
042 010
042 011
042 012
042 013
042 014
042 015
042 016
042 017
042 018
042 019
042 020
042 021
042 022
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
093 023
093 024
042- IBT Belt Check: <Multi Component Control> - X 042 001 - - Drive
024
308 mm/s Checks the operation of the IBT Belt drive system. (308 mm/s) 042 002
Carries out combined operation of the following components. 042 003
[Component] Drum Motor YMC: 042-011 042 004
[Component] Drum Motor K: 042-007 042 005
[Component] IBT Drive Motor: 042-016 042 006
[Component] Main Motor: 042-002 042 007
* Contact the 1st BTR and 2nd BTR before the operation. 042 008
042 009
042 010
042 011
042 012
042 013
042 014
042 015
042 016
042 017
042 018
042 019
042 020
042 021
042 022
042 023
042 025
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
093 023
093 024
042- IBT Belt Check: [Multi Component Control] - X 042 001 - - Drive
025
220 mm/s -Checks the operation of the IBT Belt drive system. (220 mm/s) 042 002
Carries out combined operation of the following components. 042 003
[Component] Drum Motor YMC: 042-012 042 004
[Component] Drum Motor K: 042-008 042 005
[Component] IBT Drive Motor: 042-017 042 006
[Component] Main Motor: 042-003 042 007
042 008
042 009
042 010
042 011
042 012
042 013
042 014
042 015
042 016
042 017
042 018
042 019
042 020
042 021
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 026
042 027
042 028
042 029
093 023
093 024
042- IBT Belt Check: <Multi Component Control> - X 042 001 - - Drive
026
154 mm/s Checks the operation of the IBT Belt drive system. (154 mm/s) 042 002
Carries out combined operation of the following components. 042 003
[Component] Drum Motor YMC: 042-013 042 004
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042- IBT Belt Check: <Multi Component Control> - X 042 001 - - Drive
027
110 mm/s Checks the operation of the IBT Belt drive system. (154 mm/s) 042 002
Carries out combined operation of the following components. 042 003
[Component] Drum Motor YMC: 042-014 042 004
[Component] Drum Motor K: 042-010 042 005
[Component] IBT Drive Motor: 042-019 042 006
[Component] Main Motor: 042-005 042 007
* Contact the 1st BTR and 2nd BTR before the operation. 042 008
042 009
042 010
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 011
042 012
042 013
042 014
042 015
042 016
042 017
042 018
042 019
042 020
042 021
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 028
042 029
093 023
093 024
042- IBT Steering Motor Resets the IBT Steering Motor to 0 degrees. It stops after the - X 042 015 High ON State Drive
028 Reset operation.
042 016 Low CW Direction
[I/O] IBT Steering Motor
042 017 - Strong Current
[I/O] IBT Steering Motor Direction
042 018
[I/O] IBT Steering Motor Current
042 019
042 020
042 021
042 022
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
042 029
042- IBT Steering Cam Down Operates until the IBT Steering Cam is at the lowest point position. It - X 042 015 High ON State Drive
029 stops after the operation.
042 016 Low CW Direction
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042- Fusing Exhaust Fan: Rotates the Fusing Exhaust Fan at High Speed. Changes to Low Speed - X - - - ON State Drive
030 High Speed rotation at stop command.
(Also used by
[I/O] Fusing Exhaust Fan PWM
the Speed
Control)
042- Blower Fan: High Speed Rotates the Blower Fan at High Speed. - X 042 032 - ON State Drive
031
[I/O] Blower Fan PWM (Also used by
the Speed
Control)
042- Blower Fan: Low Speed Rotates the Blower Fan at Low Speed. - X 042 031 - ON State Drive
032
[I/O] Blower Fan PWM (Also used by
the Speed
Control)
042- CC Intake Fan: Rotates the CC Intake Fan at High Speed. - X 042 034 - ON State Drive
033
High Speed [I/O] CC Intake Fan PWM
042- CC Intake Fan: Rotates the CC Intake Fan at Low Speed. - X 042 033 - ON State Drive
034
Low Speed [I/O] CC Intake Fan PWM
042- V_tra Fan: High Speed Rotates the V_tra Fan at High Speed. - X 042 036 High ON State Drive
035
[I/O] V_tra Fan Low High Speed
[I/O] V_tra Fan Speed Rotation
042- V_tra Fan: Low Speed Rotates the V_tra Fan at Low Speed. - X 042 035 High ON State Drive
036
[I/O] V_tra Fan High Low Speed
[I/O] V_tra Fan Speed Rotation
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042- Dup Fan Rotates the Dup Fan. - X - - Low ON State Drive
037
[I/O] Dup Fan
042- Exit Roll Fan Rotates the Exit Roll Fan. - X - - Low ON State Drive
038
[I/O] Exit Roll Fan
042- Rear Cooling Fan Rotates the Rear Cooling Fan. - X - - High ON State Drive
039
[I/O] Rear Cooling Fan
042- Invert Front Fan Rotates the Invert Front Fan. - X - - Low ON State Drive
040
[I/O] Invert Front Fan
042- Rear Add Fan Rotates the Rear Add Fan. - X - - High ON State Drive
042
[I/O] Rear Add Fan
042- Option Exit Fan Rotates the Option Exit Fan. - X - - Low ON State Drive
043
[I/O] Option Exit Fan
042- LVPS Fan Rotates the LVPS Fan. - X - - High ON State Drive
044
[I/O] LVPS_FAN_SPEED
042- UFP Fan: Low Speed Rotates the UFP Fan at Low Speed. - X 042 046 High ON State Drive
045
[I/O] UFP Fan 042 047 Low Low speed
[I/O] UFP Fan PWM 042 048 rotation
042 049
042- UFP Fan: Mid Speed Rotates the UFP Fan at Mid Speed. - X 042 046 High ON State Drive
046
[I/O] UFP Fan 042 047 Low Mid speed
[I/O] UFP Fan PWM 042 048 rotation
042 049
042- UFP Fan: High Speed Rotates the UFP Fan at High Speed. - X 042 046 High ON State Drive
047
[I/O] UFP Fan 042 047 Low High speed
[I/O] UFP Fan PWM 042 048 rotation
042 049
042- UFP Fan: Max Speed Rotates the UFP Fan at Max Speed. - X 042 046 High ON State Drive
048
[I/O]UFP Fan 042 047 Low MAX rotation
[I/O]UFP Fan PWM 042 048
042 049
042- UFP Fan: LP_Mode Rotates the UFP Fan at LP Mode Speed. - X 042 046 High ON State Drive
049 Speed
[I/O] UFP Fan 042 047 Low LP mode
[I/O] UFP Fan PWM 042 048 rotation
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 049
047- OCT Motor (CW) Turns ON the OCT Motor CW in the rear direction. 200 ms X 047 002 Low ON State Out-
001 Con
When performing another check, move it in the opposite direction be- Low CW Direction
fore the operation.
[I/O] OCT Motor
[I/O] OCT Motor Direction
047- OCT Motor (CCW) Turns ON the OCT Motor CCW in the front direction. 200 ms X 047 001 Low ON State Out-
002 Con
When performing another check, move it in the opposite direction be- High CCW Direction
fore the operation.
[I/O] OCT Motor
[I/O] OCT Motor Direction
061- Polygon Motor #1: Rotates the Polygon Motor (YM) normally when Process Speed is 308 - X 061 002 Low ON State ROS
001 PS308 mm/s.
061 003 - Clock
[I/O] Polygon Motor 1
061 004
[Pulse] Polygon Motor Clock: Outputs [NVM] Polygon Motor Clock Fre-
061 005
quency Specification [for 308, 154 mm/s] (749-180).
061 006
061 007
061 008
061 009
061 010
061- Polygon Motor #1: Rotates the Polygon Motor (YM) normally when Process Speed is 220 - X 061 001 Low ON State ROS
002 PS220 mm/s.
061 003 - Clock
[I/O] Polygon Motor 1
061 004
[Pulse] Polygon Motor Clock: Outputs [NVM] Polygon Motor Clock Fre-
061 005
quency Specification [for 220, 110 mm/s] (749-181).
061 006
061 007
061 008
061 009
061 010
061- Polygon Motor #2: Rotates the Polygon Motor (CK) normally when Process Speed is 320 - X 061 001 Low ON State ROS
003 PS320 mm/s.
061 002 - Clock
[I/O] Polygon Motor 2
061 004
[Pulse] Polygon Motor Clock: Outputs [NVM] Polygon Motor Clock Fre-
061 005
quency Specification [for 320 mm/s] (749-182).
061 006
061 007
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
061 008
061 009
061 010
061- Polygon Motor #2: Rotates the Polygon Motor (CK) normally when Process Speed is 308 - X 061 001 Low ON State ROS
004 PS308 mm/s.
061 002 - Clock
[I/O] Polygon Motor 2
061 003
[Pulse] Polygon Motor Clock: Outputs [NVM] Polygon Motor Clock Fre-
061 005
quency Specification [for 308, 154 mm/s] (749-180).
061 006
061 007
061 008
061 009
061 010
061- Polygon Motor #2: Rotates the Polygon Motor (CK) normally when Process Speed is 220 - X 061 001 Low ON State ROS
005 PS220 mm/s.
061 002 - Clock
[I/O] Polygon Motor 2
061 003
[Pulse] Polygon Motor Clock: Outputs [NVM] Polygon Motor Clock Fre-
061 004
quency Specification [for 220, 110 mm/s] (749-181).
061 006
061 007
061 008
061 009
061 010
061- LASER#1: PS308 LASER (YM) PS308: Output when Process Speed is 308 mm/s. 60 s X 061 001 - - ROS
006
Drives Polygon Motor #1 at the same time. (Automatically stops when 061 002 Low ON State
Polygon Motor #1 is rotating abnormally.) 061 003
[I/O] Polygon Motor#1 061 004
[I/O] LASER #1 061 005
061 007
061 008
061 009
061 010
061- LASER#1: PS220 LASER (YM) PS220: Output when Process Speed is 220 mm/s. 60 s X 061 001 - - ROS
007
Drives Polygon Motor #1 at the same time. (Automatically stops when 061 002 Low ON State
Polygon Motor #1 is rotating abnormally.) 061 003
[I/O] Polygon Motor#1 061 004
[I/O] LASER #1 061 005
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
061 006
061 008
061 009
061 010
061- LASER#2: PS320 LASER (CK) PS320: Output when Process Speed is 320 mm/s. 60 s X 061 001 - - ROS
008
Drives Polygon Motor #2 at the same time. (Auto stops when Polygon 061 002 Low ON State
Motor #2 is rotating abnormally.) 061 003
[I/O] Polygon Motor#2 061 004
[I/O] LASER #2 061 005
061 006
061 007
061 009
061 010
061- LASER#2: PS308 LASER (CK) PS308: Output when Process Speed is 308 mm/s. 60 s X 061 001 - - ROS
009
Drives Polygon Motor #2 at the same time. (Auto stops when Polygon 061 002 Low ON State
Motor #2 is rotating abnormally.) 061 003
[I/O] Polygon Motor#2 061 004
[I/O] LASER #2 061 005
061 006
061 007
061 008
061 010
061- LASER#2: PS220 LASER (CK) PS220: Output when Process Speed is 220 mm/s. 60 s X 061 001 - - ROS
010
Drives Polygon Motor #2 at the same time. (Auto stops when Polygon 061 002 Low ON State
Motor #2 is rotating abnormally.) 061 003
[I/O] Polygon Motor#2 061 004
[I/O] LASER #2 061 005
061 006
061 007
061 008
061 009
071- Tray 1 Feed Drives the Motor in the Feed direction. - X 071 002 High Drive ON P/H
001
[I/O] Tray 1 Feed Motor Low Feed
[I/O] Tray 1 Feed Motor Direction - Current Value
[I/O] Tray 1 Feed Motor Current - Clock
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
071- Tray 1 Lift Up Drives the Motor in the Lift Up direction. - X 071 001 High Drive ON P/H
002
[I/O] Tray 1 Feed Motor High Lift Up
[I/O] Tray 1 Feed Motor Direction - Strong Current
[I/O] Tray 1 Feed Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Tray 1 Feed Motor Clock High ON State
[I/O] Tray 1 Level Sensor
<Operation Conditions>
-This does not operate if the Level Sensor turns ON at the start of the
drive.
-If Level Sensor ON is detected while driving, the operation will step
down to 0pps and finally stops.
-If the Tray is removed, the operation will not be performed.
072- Tray 2 Feed Drives the Motor in the Feed direction. - X 072 002 High Drive ON P/H
001
[I/O] Tray 2 Feed Motor Low Feed
[I/O] Tray 2 Feed Motor Direction - Current Value
[I/O] Tray 2 Feed Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Tray 2 Feed Motor Clock
072- Tray 2 Lift Up Drives the Motor in the Lift Up direction. - X 072 001 High Drive ON P/H
002
[I/O] Tray 2 Feed Motor High Lift Up
[I/O] Tray 2 Feed Motor Direction - Strong Current
[I/O] Tray 2 Feed Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Tray 2 Feed Motor Clock High ON State
[I/O] Tray 2 Level Sensor
<Operation Conditions>
-This does not operate if the Level Sensor turns ON at the start of the
drive.
-If Level Sensor ON is detected while driving, the operation will step
down to 0pps and finally stops.
-If the Tray is removed, the operation will not be performed.
073- Tray 3 Feed Drives the Motor in the Feed direction. - X 073 002 High Drive ON P/H
001
[I/O] Tray 3 Feed Motor Low Feed
[I/O] Tray 3 Feed Motor Direction - Current Value
[I/O] Tray 3 Feed Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Tray 3 Feed Motor Clock
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
073- Tray 3 Lift Up Drives the Motor in the Lift Up direction. - X 073 001 High Drive ON P/H
002
[I/O] Tray 3 Feed Motor High Lift Up
[I/O] Tray 3 Feed Motor Direction - Strong Current
[I/O] Tray 3 Feed Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Tray 3 Feed Motor Clock High ON State
[I/O] Tray 3 Level Sensor
<Operation Conditions>
-This does not operate if the Level Sensor turns ON at the start of the
drive.
-If Level Sensor ON is detected while driving, the operation will step
down to 0pps and finally stops.
-If the Tray is removed, the operation will not be performed.
074- Tray 4 Feed Drives the Motor in the Feed direction. - X 073 002 High Drive ON P/H
001
[I/O] Tray 4 Feed Motor Low Feed
[I/O] Tray 4 Feed Motor Direction - Current Value
[I/O] Tray 4 Feed Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Tray 4 Feed Motor Clock
074- Tray 4 Lift Up Drives the Motor in the Lift Up direction. - X 073 001 High Drive ON P/H
002
[I/O] Tray 4 Feed Motor High Lift Up
[I/O] Tray 4 Feed Motor Direction - Strong Current
[I/O] Tray 4 Feed Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Tray 4 Feed Motor Clock High ON State
[I/O] Tray 4 Level Sensor
<Operation Conditions>
-This does not operate if the Level Sensor turns ON at the start of the
drive.
-If Level Sensor ON is detected while driving, the operation will step
down to 0pps and finally stops.
-If the Tray is removed, the operation will not be performed.
075- MSI Feed Drives the MSI Feed Motor. - X High Drive ON P/H
001
[I/O] MSI Feed Motor - Medium
[I/O] MSI Feed Motor Current - Current
[I/O] MSI Feed Motor Pulse Clock
075- MSI Nudger Lowers the Nudger Roll. Suction by strong current. 2000 X 075 004 - PWM P/H
003
Solenoid: High [I/O] MSI Nudger Solenoid [ms] 075 005
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
075- MSI Nudger Lowers the Nudger Roll. Suction by weak current. 2000 X 075 003 - PWM P/H
004
Solenoid: Low [ms] 075 005
075- MSI Lift Motor Raises the MSI Lifter. 4500 X 075 003 - - P/H
005
Lift Up (CW) [I/O] MSI Nudger Solenoid [ms] 075 004 Low ON State
Sensor Stop [I/O] MSI Lift Motor 075 006 High Rise
[I/O] MSI Lift Motor Direction High Lift Up
[I/O] MSI Lift Up Sensor
<Operation Conditions>
-This does not operate if the MSI Lift Up Sensor turns ON at the start
of the operation.
-Stops when the MSI Lift Up Sensor ON is detected during the opera-
tion and the MSI Nudger Solenoid turns OFF.
075- MSI Lift Motor Lowers the MSI Lifter. 6000 X 075 005 Low ON State P/H
006 ms
Lift Down (CCW) [I/O] MSI Lift Motor Low Lower
Sensor Stop [I/O] MSI Lift Motor Direction High Lift Down
[I/O] MSI Lift Down Sensor
<Operation Conditions>
-This does not operate if the MSI Lift Down Sensor turns ON at the
start of the operation.
-Stops when the MSI Lift Down Sensor ON is detected during the
operation.
077- Takeaway Motor Turns ON the Takeaway Motor at the transport speed of 640 mm/s. - X Low ON State P/H
001
077- Takeaway Clutch 1 Turns ON the Takeaway Clutch 1. - X 077 004 - PWM P/H
002
Reference: Driving Take Away Roll 1 and 2 at 640 mm/s is possible by
combining with Takeaway Motor (077-001).
077- Takeaway Clutch 2 Turns ON the Takeaway Clutch 2. - X 077 005 - PWM P/H
003
Reference: Driving Take Away Roll 3, 4, 5 and 6 at 640 mm/s is possible
by combining with Takeaway Motor (077-001).
077- Takeaway Clutch 1 Cy- Turns ON the Takeaway Clutch 1. - X 077 002 - PWM P/H
004 clic Operation
[I/O] Takeaway Clutch 1 PWM
Reference: Driving Take Away Roll 1 and 2 at 640 mm/s is possible by
combining with Takeaway Motor (077-001).
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
077- Takeaway Clutch 2 Cy- Turns ON the Takeaway Clutch 2. - X 077 003 - PWM P/H
005 clic Operation
Reference: Driving Take Away Roll 3, 4, 5 and 6 at 640 mm/s is possible
by combining with Takeaway Motor (077-001).
077- Pre Regi Motor Drives the Pre Regi Roll and the MSI Pre Regi Roll. - X - - High ON State P/H
006
[I/O] Pre Regi Motor - Strong Current
[I/O] Pre Regi Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Pre Regi Motor Clock
077- Regi Motor Drives the Regi Roll. - X - - High ON State P/H
007
[I/O] Regi Motor - Medium
[I/O] Regi Motor Current - Current
[I/O] Regi Motor Clock Clock
077- Exit Motor Drives the Invert In Roll and the Exit Roll. - X - - High ON State P/H
008
[I/O] Exit Motor - Strong Current
[I/O] Exit Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Exit Motor Clock
077- Invert Motor Forward Drives the Invert Roll. - X 077 010 High ON State P/H
009 Rotation
[I/O] Invert Motor High CCW Direction
[I/O] Invert Motor Direction - Strong Current
[I/O] Invert Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Invert Motor Clock
077- Invert Motor Reverse Drives the Invert Roll in reverse rotation. - X 077 009 High ON State P/H
010 Rotation
[I/O] Invert Motor Low CW Direction
[I/O] Invert Motor Direction - Strong Current
[I/O] Invert Motor Current - Clock
[I/O] Invert Motor Clock
077- Duplex Motor Forward Drives the Duplex Roll 1, 2, and 3 at 640 mm/s in forward rotation (pa- - X 077 012 High ON State P/H
011 Rotation per feed side).
Low CW Direction
[I/O] Duplex Motor
- Strong Current
[I/O] Duplex Motor Current
- Clock
[I/O] Duplex Motor Direction
[I/O] Duplex Motor Clock
077- Duplex Motor Reverse Drives the Duplex Roll 1, 2, and 3 at 640 mm/s in reverse rotation - X 077 011 High ON State P/H
012 Rotation (jammed paper removal side).
High CCW Direction
[I/O] Duplex Motor
- Strong Current
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
077- Invert Gate In Switches the Invert Gate to the In direction. 80 ms X 077 014 Low Invert P/H
013 Direction
077 015
077- Invert Gate Exit Switches the Invert Gate to the Exit direction. 80 ms X 077 013 Low Exit Direction P/H
014
077 015
077- Switches between Invert Repetitively performs the Invert Gate ON for 80 ms/OFF for 720 ms in - X 077 013 Low Invert P/H
015 Gate In/Exit. the In direction and ON for 80 ms/OFF for 720 ms in the Exit direction. Direction
077 014 Low
[I/O] Invert Gate In Exit Direction
[I/O] Invert Gate Exit
077- Invert Solenoid Releases the Invert Roll. 6000 X - - - Released P/H
016 ms
089- MOB LED Turns the MOB LED (IN/CENTER/OUT) ON/OFF based on the value set - X - - - PWM Regi-
001 in the NVM. Con
- PWM
[I/O] LED set-IN (MOB LED Current Setting IN)
- PWM
[I/O] LED set-CENTER (MOB LED Current Setting CENTER)
[I/O] LED set-OUT (MOB LED Current Setting OUT)
091- Erase Lamp YMC Turns the Erase Lamp (YMC) ON/OFF. - X - - Low On Xero
001
091- Erase Lamp K Turns the Erase Lamp (K) ON/OFF. - X - - Low On Xero
002
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
091- BCR AC Clock Outputs the AC component frequency in the BCR. - X - - - Clock Xero
006
[I/O] BCR AC Clock: Outputs [NVM] BCR AC Frequency: Component
Check (751-095).
Discharging of each respective BCR (Y, M, C) is possible when used in
combination with any of [Component] BCR Y AC DC (091-003), BCR M
AC DC (091-004) and BCR C AC DC (091-005). It is necessary to stop
the BCR Y AC DC, BCR M AC DC or BCR C AC DC before stopping the
BCR AC Clock.
091- CC Discharges electricity by the CC Grid and CC Wire output in CC (K). - X - - - PWM Xero
007
[I/O] CC Grid K: Outputs [NVM] CC Grid K Volt: Component Check - PWM
(751-096).
[I/O] CC Wire K: Outputs [NVM] CC Wire K Current: Component Check
(751-097).
091- PCC DC Removes the electrical potential from the PCC Plus. - X - - - PWM Xero
008
[I/O] PCC K: Outputs [NVM] PCC: Component Check (751-098).
091- CC Cleaner Motor: Rotates the CC Cleaner Motor in the CW direction (Front -> Rear 15.5 s X 091 010 High ON State Xero
009 1500PPS (CW) High operation).
- -
Current
[I/O] CC Cleaner Motor
Low CW Direction
[I/O] CC Cleaner Motor Current
- -
[I/O] CC Cleaner Motor Direction
[I/O] CC Cleaner Motor Clock
1. Turns ON the CC Cleaner Motor at Mot frequency: 0[pps], Mot cur-
rent value: L (0.2[A]), and Mot rotation direction: CW. (Referred to as
Pre-excitation operation)
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
2. When 50[ms] has passed after 1., sets to Mot frequency: 800[pps]
and Mot current value: H (0.4[A]).
3. When 100[ms] has passed after 2., set to Mot frequency: 1500[pps].
091- CC Cleaner Motor: Rotates the CC Cleaner Motor in the CCW direction (CCW: Rear -> Front 15.5 s X 091 009 High ON State Xero
010 1500PPS (CCW) High operation).
- -
Current
[I/O] CC Cleaner Motor
High CCW Direction
[I/O] CC Cleaner Motor Current
- -
[I/O] CC Cleaner Motor Direction
[I/O] CC Cleaner Motor Clock
1. Turns ON the CC Cleaner Motor at Mot frequency: 0[pps], Mot cur-
rent value: L (0.2[A]), and Mot rotation direction: CCW. (Referred to as
Pre-excitation operation)
2. When 50[ms] has passed after 1., sets to Mot frequency: 800[pps]
and Mot current value: H (0.4[A]).
3. When 100[ms] has passed after 2., set to Mot frequency: 1500[pps].
092- ADC Diffuse Turns the ADC diffusion LED ON/OFF. - X - - Low LED 2 ON Pro-
002 State Con
092- ADC Shutter Open Opens the ADC Shutter. 100 ms X 092 005 Low Open state Pro-
004 Con
* After performing this Component Control, make sure the MOB ADC
Shutter is closed so that the sensor inside the shutter will not be dirtied
(the shutter, however, will close automatically if printing is carried out).
092- ADC Shutter Close Closes the ADC Shutter. 100 ms X 092 004 Low Closed state Pro-
005 Con
093- Toner Cartridge Motor Y Supplies toner (Y) to the Reserve Tank. 10 s X - - - ON State Deve
001
093- Toner Cartridge Motor Supplies toner (M) to the Reserve Tank. 10 s X - - - ON State Deve
002 M
093- Toner Cartridge Motor C Supplies toner (C) to the Reserve Tank. 10 s X - - - ON State Deve
003
093- Toner Cartridge Motor Supplies toner (K1) to the Reserve Tank. 10 s X - - - ON State Deve
004 K1
093- Toner Cartridge Motor Supplies toner (K2) to the Reserve Tank. 10 s X - - - ON State Deve
005 K2
093- Dispense Motor Y Supplies toner (Y) from the Reserve Tank to the Developer. 2s X - - - ON State Deve
006
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
093- Dispense Motor M Supplies toner (M) from the Reserve Tank to the Developer. 2s X - - - ON State Deve
007
093- Dispense Motor C Supplies toner (C) from the Reserve Tank to the Developer. 2s X - - - ON State Deve
008
093- Dispense Motor K Supplies toner (K) from the Reserve Tank to the Developer. 2s X - - - ON State Deve
009
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
093- Deve Motor: 308 Turns the Deve Motor ON/OFF. Operates at a Process Speed of 308 - X 093 019 Low ON State Deve
018 [mm/s].
093 020 High -
[I/O] Deve Motor
093 021 High -
[I/O] Deve Motor Gain 1
093 024 - Clock
[I/O] Deve Motor Gain 2
[I/O] Deve Motor Clock
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Deve Motor
Gain 1 and 2.)
093- Deve Motor: 220 Turns the Deve Motor ON/OFF. Operates at a Process Speed of 220 - X 093 018 Low ON State Deve
019 [mm/s].
093 020 Low -
[I/O] Deve Motor
093 021 High -
[I/O] Deve Motor Gain 1
093 024 - Clock
[I/O] Deve Motor Gain 2
[I/O] Deve Motor Clock
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Deve Motor
Gain 1 and 2.)
093- Deve Motor: 154 Turns the Deve Motor ON/OFF. Operates at a Process Speed of 154 - X 093 018 Low ON State Deve
020 [mm/s].
093 019 High -
[I/O] Deve Motor
093 021 Low -
[I/O] Deve Motor Gain 1
093 024 - Clock
[I/O] Deve Motor Gain 2
[I/O] Deve Motor Clock
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Deve Motor
Gain 1 and 2.)
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
093- Deve Motor: 110 Turns the Deve Motor ON/OFF. Operates at a Process Speed of 110 - X 093 018 Low ON State Deve
021 [mm/s].
093 019 Low -
[I/O] Deve Motor
093 020 Low -
[I/O] Deve Motor Gain 1
093 024 - Clock
[I/O] Deve Motor Gain 2
[I/O] Deve Motor Clock
(Sets the above speed according to the combination of the Deve Motor
Gain 1 and 2.)
093- Deve Clutch Turns the Deve Clutch ON/OFF. - X 093 023 Low ON State Deve
022
[I/O] Deve Clutch
When checking the Deve K operation, it is necessary to check it in com-
bination with the following outputs.
If the following procedures are not carried out, the developer might ac-
cumulate between the Drum and the Deve Roll.
1. Lower the IBT Module.
2. Turn ON the [Component] Main Motor (042-003).
3. Turn ON the [Component] Drum Motor K (042-008).
4. Turn ON the [Component] Deve Clutch (093-022).
* The Step 2. and 3. are in no particular order.
* 2. and 3. stops after 4. stops.
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
042 023
042 024
042 025
042 026
042 027
094- 1st BTR Contact Contact operation of the 1st BTR. Stops the contact operation of the - X 094 002 High ON State X’fer
001 1st BTR when the Contact Position of the 1st BTR Contact Retract Sen-
- Clock
sor is detected.
High Contact
[I/O] 1st BTR Retract Motor
- Position
[I/O] 1st BTR Retract Motor Clock
Current Value
[I/O] 1st BTR Contact Retract Sensor
[I/O] 1st BTR Retract Motor Current
094- 1st BTR Retract Contact operation of the 1st BTR. Stops the retract operation of the - X 094 001 High ON State X’fer
002 1st BTR when the Retract Position of the 1st BTR Contact Retract Sen-
- Clock
sor is detected.
Low Retract
[I/O] 1st BTR Retract Motor
- Position
[I/O] 1st BTR Retract Motor Clock
Current Value
[I/O] 1st BTR Contact Retract Sensor
[I/O] 1st BTR Retract Motor Current
094- 2nd BTR Contact Contact operation of the 2nd BTR. Stops the contact operation of the - X 094 004 Low ON State X’fer
003 2nd BTR when the Contact Position of the 2nd BTR Contact Retract
094 005 High Contact
Sensor is detected.
Position
[I/O] 2nd BTR Retract Clutch
[I/O] 2nd BTR Contact Retract Sensor
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
094- 2nd BTR Retract Retract operation of the 2nd BTR. Stops the retract operation of the - X 094 003 Low ON State X’fer
004 2nd BTR when the Retract Position of the 2nd BTR Contact Retract Sen-
094 005 Low Retract
sor is detected.
Position
[I/O] 2nd BTR Retract Clutch
[I/O] 2nd BTR Contact Retract Sensor
094- 2nd BTR Retract Clutch Turns the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch ON/OFF. - X 094 003 Low ON State X’fer
005
[I/O] 2nd BTR Retract Clutch 094 004
Multiple Output
Cyclic Prohibited ON State Mod-
Chain- Time Opera- ule
Link Component Name Description Out tion Chain Link Connector Meaning Name
094- 2nd BTR Current Charges according to the constant current output (34 microA) of the - X 094 011 - PWM X’fer
010 2nd BTR.
094 012
[I/O] 2nd BTR PWM
094- 2nd BTR Voltage Charges according to the voltage output of the 2nd BTR. - X 094 010 - PWM X’fer
011
[I/O] 2nd BTR PWM 094 012
Output value: [NVM] 2nd BTR Output Voltage Value (746-453)
094- 2nd Clean Charges according to the cleaning voltage output of the 2nd BTR. - X 094 010 - PWM X’fer
012
[I/O] 2nd Clean PWM 094 011
Output value: [NVM] 2nd BTR Reverse Bias Output Voltage Value (746-
454)
062- IIT Exposure Lamp Turns the Lamp ON for 180 s -> Auto OFF O X - L IPoC
002
Will also turn OFF when Stop is instructed before Auto OFF.
062- IIT Scan Motor (Scan direction) Moves it 50 mm from current position in Scan direction -> Auto OFF O X 062-006 4 phases IPoC
005 each
Will not accept Stop instruction before Auto OFF.
H/L switch
062- IIT Scan Motor (Return Moves it 50 mm from current position in Return direction -> Auto OFF O X 062-005 4 phases IPoC
006 direction) each
Will not accept Stop instruction before Auto OFF.
H/L switch
062- CCD Cooling Fan Operates the CCD Cooling Fan at high speed. X X - FAN ON: H IPoC
017
FAN Slow: L
005- Feed Motor (CW) 200.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O Motor ON : High
001
005- Feed Motor (CCW) 300.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
002
005- Feed Motor (CCW) 490.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
003
005- Feed Motor (CCW) 600.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
004
005- Feed Motor (CCW) 700.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
005
005- Pre Regi Motor (CW) 300.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
011
005- Pre Regi Motor (CW) 350.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
012
005- Pre Regi Motor (CW) 400.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
013
005- Pre Regi Motor (CW) 490.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
014
005- Pre Regi Motor (CW) 510.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
015
005- Pre Regi Motor (CW) 700.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
016
005- Pre Regi Motor (CW) 860.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
017
005- Regi Motor (CCW) 490.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF
021
005- Regi Motor (CCW) 700.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF
022
005- Platen Motor (CW) 490.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF
031
005- Platen Motor (CW) 700.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF
032
005- Exit2 Motor (CW) 220.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
041
005- Exit2 Motor (CW) 350.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
042
005- Exit2 Motor (CW) 490.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
043
Chain-
Link Component Name Function operation TimeOut Connector Level
005- Exit2 Motor (CW) 700.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
044
005- Tray Motor (CCW) 55.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
051
005- Tray Motor (CW) 55.0 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
052
005- Tray Motor (CCW) 12.5 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
053
005- Tray Motor (CW) 12.5 mm/s Turns ON for 60 s > Auto OFF O
054
005- Doc Set LED Turns ON for 5 s > Auto OFF O High
084
005- Tray raising operation Performs Tray raising operation regardless of the port of Document Set Sensor O
091
005- Tray fine-raising operation during Job Performs Tray fine-raising operation during Job regardless of the port of Document Set Sensor O
092
Carried out under the following conditions. Otherwise, there is a possibility of a Fail.
• When Raising operation is complete. (Level Sensor is already On)
• When the Raising operation is complete, and the document is removed and Level Sensor is turned OFF.
Chain-
Link Component Name Function operation TimeOut Connector Level
005- Tray lowering operation Performs Tray lowering operation regardless of the port of Document Set Sensor O
093
Procedure Procedure
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Initialize Hard Disk. 1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Sub System.
2. Select Partition A and select Start. 2. On the Sub System screen, select Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test.
3. Select Yes after the confirmation message is displayed. 3. The Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test screen is displayed.
Partition A of the Hard Disk is initialized. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen and press <Start>.
4. When the message: Partition A has been initialized. is displayed, select Confirm. 5. The result is displayed on the Hard Disk Failure Prediction Test screen.
5. Select Close to return to the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen. 6. If the result is NG , a Fault Code will be displayed.
Take action according to the message and select Confirm.
d C 5 2 7 A D F I n d e p e n d e n t O p e ra t i o n ( S u b Sy s t e m ) d C 6 1 2 Pr i n t Te s t Pa t t e r n
Purpose Purpose
To check for any unusual noise by operating the document feeder independently. To print the Test Pattern that is stored in the machine for the checking of image quality and isolat-
ing problems.
Procedure
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select [Sub System]. To perform No Paper Run.
2. On the Sub System screen, select ADF Independent Operation. Note: Perform this operation after verifying that there is enough paper loaded in the Tray to be
3. The ADF Independent Operation screen is displayed. used. (If No Paper condition occur during the execution, printing failure may occur on the paper
that is being run. The paper being used here are not counted.)
4. Follow the message and set the originals on the DADF. (3 sheets at the maximum)
5. Click Start.
Procedure
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Print Test Pattern.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen and select Confirm.
2. Set a Test Pattern Number.
7. Select Close to return to the Sub System screen.
• If the Pattern Number prerequisite is wrong, it cannot be executed. Refer to the following ta-
ble for the prerequisites for each pattern.
3. Select the following Setting Items and set the Setting Value.
• Pattern Number
• Quantity
• Paper Supply
• Output Color
• Cin %
• Select Screen
• Face Up/Down*
• 1 Sided/2 Sided
Note: * The display of Face Up/Down differs depending on the Option installation status.
4. Press Start.
Note: When Pattern Number is set to 71: No Paper Run , empty rotation is performed as many
times as the number set in Quantity (1 to 99). Press the Stop button to stop.
1 Grid 45 Degrees For checking the reprodu- 1*-999 A3SEF Tray1*, 2, 3, Input the size when All the paper types for IOT can be Simp*/ Y, M, C, K, R, 150 -
cibility of diagonal lines 4, Tray5 MSI is selected. The set. The paper types are as fol- Dup G, B, 3C, 4C*, Dot,
(MSI, Tray6 sizes are as follows: lows. Uncoated*, Coated, Re- BW (*1) 150
(HCF1), A4LEF, A4SEF, B4SEF, cycled, Hole Punched, Tab Stock, Line,
Tray7 A3SEF, Letter-L, Let- Labels, Transparency, Transfer Pa- 175Dot,
(HCF2) ter-S, Ledger-S per, Postcard, Uncoated (Side 2), 200
(11"x17") Coated (Side 2), Custom Paper Dot,
Type, Tack Film (Adhesive). 200
Line,
300
Dot,
600
Dot, FM
(*3)
2 Grid (Adjust Fold Adjust Fold Position Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as 150 -
Position) as as above above above Dot,
above above 200
Dot,
200
Line,
300
Dot,
600 Dot
3 Grid (90 De- Alignment measurement Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
grees) - 102 as as above above above as
above above above
4 Grid (90 De- Alignment measurement Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
grees) - 204 as as above above above as
above above above
5 Grid (90 De- Alignment measurement Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
grees) -208 as as above above above as
above above above
6 Grid (diagonal) For checking the reprodu- Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as 150 -
-101 cibility of diagonal lines as as above above above Dot,
above above 150
Line,
175Dot,
200
Dot,
200
Line,
300
Dot,
600
Dot, FM
(*3)
Ci-
Pat- n
tern Quanti- Image Paper Sizes when us- Paper Type when using the MSI Simp/ Output (-
No. Name Purpose/Overview ty Size Tray ing MSI (*2) Dup Color Screen %)
7 Grid (diagonal) For checking the reprodu- Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
-102 cibility of diagonal lines as as above above above as
above above above
8 Grid (90 De- Dual registration Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as 150 -
grees) - Both measurement as as above above above Dot,
sides above above 200
Dot,
200
Line,
300
Dot,
600 Dot
9 PH Regi Alignment check 1*-999 A3SEF Tray1*, 2, 3, Input the size when All the paper types for IOT can be Simp*/ Y, M, C, K, R, 150 -
4, Tray5 MSI is selected. The set. The paper types are as fol- Dup G, B, 3C, 4C* Dot,
(MSI, Tray6 sizes are as follows: lows. Uncoated*, Coated, Re- , BW(*1) 150
(HCF1), A4LEF, A4SEF, B4SEF, cycled, Hole Punched, Tab Stock, Line,
Tray7 A3SEF, Letter-L, Let- Labels, Transparency, Transfer Pa- 175Dot,
(HCF2) ter-S, Ledger-S per, Postcard, Uncoated (Side 2), 200
(11"x17") Coated (Side 2), Custom Paper Dot,
Type, Tack Film (Adhesive). 200
Line,
300
Dot,
600
Dot, FM
(*3)
10 4-corner Patch Auto Adjust Paper Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as 150 -
Registration as as above above above Dot,
above above 200
Dot,
200
Line,
300
Dot,
600 Dot
11 Color Regi (for Color Regi measuring in- Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as 150 -
measurement) strument measurement as as above above above Dot,
above above 200
Dot,
200
Line,
300
Dot,
600 Dot
(*3)
12 Banding Banding check Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as 150 -
as as above above above Dot,
above above 200
Dot,
Ci-
Pat- n
tern Quanti- Image Paper Sizes when us- Paper Type when using the MSI Simp/ Output (-
No. Name Purpose/Overview ty Size Tray ing MSI (*2) Dup Color Screen %)
200
Line,
300
Dot,
600 Dot
13 TED/Starvation TED/Starvation check Same A4LEF Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
as above above above as
above above
14 Calibration (for Calibration (correction) Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
correction) as as above above above as
above above above
15 Calibration (for Calibration (checking) Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
checking) as as above above above as
above above above
16 ProCon Process Control, Tone Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
Characteristics, Defect as as above above above as
detection above above above
17 16 Tone Tone Characteristics, De- Same A3SEF Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
fect detection as above above above as
above above
18 ADC Check ADC Sensor adjustment Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
as as above above above as
above above above
19 Full Halftone Defect detection Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same 0*
as as above above above as ~
above above above 1-
00
20 In-Out Adjust- In-Out Adjustment (all Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
ment (Primary primary colors) as as above above above as
Color) above above above
21 In-Out Adjust- In-Out Adjustment (all 1*-999 A3SEF Tray1*, 2, 3, Input the size when All the paper types for IOT can be Simp*/ Y, M, C, K, R, 150 -
ment (Secon- secondary/process colors) 4, Tray5 MSI is selected. The set. The paper types are as fol- Dup G, B, 3C, 4C*, Dot,
dary/Process (MSI, Tray6 sizes are as follows: lows. Uncoated*, Coated, Re- BW (*1) 200
Color) (HCF1), A4LEF, A4SEF, B4SEF, cycled, Hole Punched, Tab Stock, Dot,
Tray7 A3SEF, Letter-L, Let- Labels, Transparency, Transfer Pa- 200
(HCF2) ter-S, Ledger-S per, Postcard, Uncoated (Side 2), Line,
(11"x17") Coated (Side 2), Custom Paper 300
Type, Tack Film (Adhesive). Dot,
600 Dot
22 In-Out Adjust- In-Out Adjustment (for Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
ment (Single each color) as as above above above as
Color) above above above
Ci-
Pat- n
tern Quanti- Image Paper Sizes when us- Paper Type when using the MSI Simp/ Output (-
No. Name Purpose/Overview ty Size Tray ing MSI (*2) Dup Color Screen %)
23 Highlight Highlight adjustment, re- Same A4LEF Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
Adjustment producibility check as above above above as
above above
24 ATCN24 Gradation check Same A3SEF Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
as above above above as
above above
25 Gradation Tone Jump, Gradation Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
check as as above above above as
above above above
26 SS Direction Ad- Density adjustment in SS Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
justment (YC) direction (YC) as as above above above as
above above above
27 SS Direction Ad- Density adjustment in SS Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
justment (MK) direction (MK) as as above above above as
above above above
28 IT8 Tone Characteristics, Col- Same A4LEF Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
or Reproducibility as above above above as
above above
29 X'fer Voltage Secondary Transfer out- Same A3SEF Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
Setup Pattern put value adjustment as above above above as
above above
30 Custom Paper Secondary Transfer out- Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
Type Adjustment put value, alignment as as above above above as
adjustment above above above
31 ROS LDF Checking of ROS Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
Stitching as as above above above as
above above above
33 HT-GMC For production line in- Same Same Same as Same as above Same as above Same as Same as Same -
spection process (XERO/ as as above above above as
Developer Housing Assy above above above
defect confirmation)
*1: K indicates Black in Color mode and BW indicates Black in Black & White mode.
*2: The paper weight that is applicable for each paper type is indeterminate. The composition of pa-
per weight is as follows. 60-70 gsm, 71-82 gsm, 83-90 gsm, 91-105 gsm, 106-128 gsm, 129-150
gsm, 151-176 gsm, 177-220 gsm, 221-256 gsm, 257-300 gsm
*3: Gray Font 1200dpi will be output regardless of the screen that is selected.
52 Total Adjusted at ship- 1*-999 A3, Ledger-S Tray1*, 2, 3, Input the All the paper types for Simp*/ 4C Photo 600 x 600 Mul- ON/ ON*/
Chart ment inspection and (11"x17") 4, Tray5 size when IOT can be set. The Dup ti- OFF* OFF
Stand-
on the spot. Used (*4) (MSI, Tray6 MSI is se- paper types are as fol- val-
for isolating (HCF1), Tray7 lected. The lows. Uncoated*, ard ued
problems. (HCF2) sizes are as Coated, Recycled, Fine
follows: Hole Punched, Tab
A4LEF, Stock, Labels, Trans-
A4SEF, parency, Transfer Pa-
B4SEF, per, Postcard,
A3SEF, Let- Uncoated (Side 2),
ter-L, Letter- Coated (Side 2), Cus-
S, Ledger-S tom Paper Type, Tack
(11"x17") Film (Adhesive).
*4: Indicates 294 mm x 17" (short edge of A3 x long edge of Ledger) (Means either A3 or Ledger
size is supported)
102 Process Control Process Control 1*-999 Tray1*, 2, 3, Input the size All the paper types for IOT Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- On*,Off O-
PG/Binary Setup 4, Tray5 when MSI is se- can be set. The paper types p* ED ry n*,
(MSI, Tray6 lected. The sizes are as follows. Uncoated*, Off
(HCF1), are as follows: Coated, Recycled, Hole
Tray7 (HCF2) A4LEF, A4SEF, Punched, Tab Stock, Labels,
B4SEF, A3SEF, Let- Transparency, Transfer Paper,
ter-L, Letter-S, Postcard, Uncoated (Side 2),
Ledger-S (11"x17") Coated (Side 2), Custom Pa-
per Type, Tack Film
(Adhesive).
104 Auto Gradation Calibration 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- On*,Off O-
Correction/Binary above p* ED ry (*5) n*,
(for Document Off
Creation)
106 Calibration/Binary Calibration 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- On*,Off O-
(for Gradation above p* ED ry n*,
check) Off
108 Highlight PG/ Highlight 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- On*,Off O-
Binary Adjustment above p* ED ry n*,
Off
110 IIT Analog Grada- Analog - Pre IPS 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
tion RGB Connection CHK above p* (*6) ED ry
112 IIT Analog Grada- Analog - Pre IPS 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- BW Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
tion BW Connection CHK above p* ED ry
113 Pre IPS/FS Incre- ESS (Controller) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
ment RGB circuit board IPS above p* (*6) ED ry
CHK
115 Pre IPS/FS Incre- ESS (Controller) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- BW Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
ment BW circuit board IPS above p* ED ry
CHK
117 Pre IPS/SS Incre- ESS (Controller) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
ment RGB circuit board IPS above p* (*6) ED ry
CHK
119 Pre IPS/SS Incre- ESS (Controller) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- BW Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
ment BW circuit board IPS above p* ED ry
CHK
121 Pre IPS/Grid BW Uneven Light In- 1*-999 Tray1*, 2, 3, Input the size All the paper types for IOT Sim- BW Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
tensity Level, FS 4, Tray5 when MSI is se- can be set. The paper types p* ED ry
Streak CHK (MSI, Tray6 lected. The sizes are as follows. Uncoated*,
(HCF1), are as follows: Coated, Recycled, Hole
Tray7 (HCF2) A4LEF, A4SEF, Punched, Tab Stock, Labels,
B4SEF, A3SEF, Transparency, Transfer Paper,
IO-
Pat- Sim- Out- C- T
tern Quanti- Paper Sizes when Paper Type when using the p/ put TRACS L-
No. Name Purpose/Overview ty Tray using MSI MSI Dup Color Screen Resolution Tone LUT UT
122 Pre IPS/Shading Uneven Light In- 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
Data Color tensity Level, FS above p* (*6) ED ry
Streak CHK
123 Pre IPS/Shading Uneven Light In- 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- BW Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
Data BW tensity Level, FS above p* ED ry
Streak CHK
124 Pre IPS/YMCK Ver- ESS (Controller) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
tical Streak circuit board IPS above p* ED ry
CHK
125 Pre IPS/8 Grada- ESS (Controller) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
tion Patch circuit board IPS above p* (*6) ED ry
CHK
126 Pre IPS/Solid (For Development) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
above p* (*6) ED ry
127 Post IPS/Grid/4C (For Development) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
above p* ED ry
128 Post IPS/Grid/BW (For Development) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- BW Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
BW Path CHK above p* ED ry
129 Post IPS/FSRE/ ESS (Controller) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
Grid circuit board IPS, above p* ED ry
PS, and LS syn-
chronization CHK
130 Post IPS/FSRE/ ESS (Controller) 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- - -
Slanting Grid circuit board IPS, above p* ED ry
PS, and LS syn-
chronization CHK
168 Copy ED 24 Gra- Copy ED 24 Gra- 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- On*,Off O-
dation Patch FC1 dation Patch FC1 above p* ED ry n*,
Off
169 Copy ED 24 Gra- Copy ED 24 Gra- 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- 4C Copy 600 x 600 Bina- On*,Off O-
dation Patch FC2 dation Patch FC2 above p* ED ry n*,
Off
170 Copy ED 24 Gra- Copy ED 24 Gra- 1*-999 Same as Same as above Same as above Sim- BW Copy 600 x 600 Bina- On*,Off O-
dation Patch BW dation Patch BW above p* ED ry n*,
Off
*5: Though ON/OFF of the C-TRACS LUT is described, the IPoC forcedly turns it OFF. d C 6 7 1 Re g i s t r a t i o n M e a s u r i n g Cy c l e ( Re g i s t r a t i o n )
*6: 4 colors are available but the K color is not selectable. Feature
Measure the color registration and display the status by indicating OK / NG (Check or Adjustment).
Test Pattern Image Information Flow (Overall)
Note: Each PG No. in the following image information flow corresponds to the pattern No. of Test This cycle performs the color registration measurement that includes the detection of AC compo-
Pattern List, Figure 1. nent to determine the condition of AC control (Drum Drive, Belt Drive, and Belt Steering, etc), which
is one of the color Regi components.
• Measures/displays the amount of color shift relative to Black in the Fast Scan/Slow Scan
direction.
• Displays the result of comparing OK / NG (Check or Adjustment) with the target value.
Procedure
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Registration.
3. Press Start.
OK or NG will be displayed in the Result field.
4. When NG (Check or Adjustment) is displayed, refer to the corresponding FIP and correct the
problem.
d C 6 7 3 Re g i C o n t r o l S e n s o r C h e c k Cy c l e ( Re g i s t r a t i o n ) d C 6 7 5 Re g i s t r a t i o n C o n t r o l S e t u p Cy c l e ( Re g i s t r a t i o n )
Purpose Note: This function is available for color machines only.
To check if the misregistration detection system from the MOB Sensor is operating normally.
Feature
This is a self-diagnosis cycle to check that the detection system can operate properly. To verify that To set the most appropriate Regi Control correction value for skew etc. at the first execution when
the detection result is Misalignment = Zero , the color shift amount is detected using CUI patch replacing the ROS etc. (details of the relevant parts will be described in the note below).
(Cyan single color) and the misalignment detected in the MOB sensor is displayed on the UI screen.
The Setup Cycle is made up of the following 2 functions (operations).
This detection result is compared again with the target value to determine the OK / NG (Check or
Function 1: Performed right after assembling or during field installation, or when replacing a key
Adjustment) result which will be displayed. Correction is not performed.
part. Also, this is a Regi Control Full Cycle that can be performed in the Diag mode right after the
Procedure NVM is initialized. Executing this function corrects the Color Registration into the predefined range.
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Registration. The corrected shift amount for each color is saved in the NVM and it is displayed at normal
2. On the Registration screen, select Registration Control Sensor Check Cycle. completion.
3. Press Start. Function 2: On entering a setup cycle, the IOT does not start. The Regi Control shift correction
amount is displayed automatically on the UI screen and is used as a tool for determining the cause
The [Value] will be displayed along with OK or NG.
when a failure occurs.
4. When the measure value is larger than the target value by 10, NG (Check or Adjustment) is
displayed. Note: This Diag is to be performed during the following. After performing this, ADJ 9.8dC671
When NG , check that Cyan is being printed and replace the MOB Sensor Assembly. Registration Measuring Cycle must also be performed.
When Cyan is not being printed, repair the Marking accessories including the Deve. • ROS replacement/detachment
Note: After the ROS is replaced, change the value of NVM [759-913] from '0' -> '1'. It will auto-
matically revert to '0' after the Registration Control Setup Cycle. As the default value after an initi-
alization is '1', perform the Registration Control Setup Cycle and end.
Note: If a Fail occurs after performing this cycle, take corrective action on the Fail that has oc-
curred and then perform the Registration Control - Setup again. (The appropriate alignment adjust-
ment cannot be performed if Registration Control - Setup Cycle is not completed successfully.)
Procedure
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select Registration.
3. Press Start.
The shift amount for each color is corrected automatically.
d C 7 4 0 Tra y 5 G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t ( Re g i s t ra t i o n ) d C 9 1 9 Co l o r B a l a n c e S e t u p ( M A X S e t u p )
Purpose Purpose
To check that the MSI Guide paper width detection is properly carried out. To perform fine adjustment of the center value of the low density/medium density/high density
output balance for each color Y, M, C and K (Black) for copy images.
Note: This adjustment is performed during MSI Size Sensor replacement and when a size detection
error occurs. The focus of Color Balance Adjustment in Customer Mode will be changed by this setup.
4. Select Minimum Size Position or Maximum Size Position. sity, middle density, and high density outputs of each Y, M, C, K (Black) color. '0' is the default
value. The image will become lighter (lower density) from -1 to -4, and darker (higher density)
5. When Minimum Size Position is selected.
from +1 to +4.
a. Follow the instructions on the screen and align the Paper Guides to the minimum size 2. Image adjustment is carried out in the TRC section of the Controller PWB, according to the set
position. value.
b. Press Start. 3. Keep the set value as the NVM of the IISS.
• If the sensor output value is within the specified range, OK will be displayed. At the same 4. When the Output Color is BW , the adjustment value for K becomes effective.
time, the NVM [742-327] MSI Side Guide Minimum Position data is changed.
Procedure
• If the sensor output value is out of the specified range, NG will be displayed. If NG ,
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select MAX Setup.
check the guide position and try again.
2. On the MAX Setup screen, select Color Balance Adjustment.
6. When Maximum Size Position is selected.
3. On the Color Balance Adjustment screen, change the respective Shadows/Midtones/Highlights
a. Follow the instructions on the screen and align the Paper Guides to the maximum size values of each Y, M, C and K within the range of -4 to +4 and press Start , then work towards ob-
position. taining the customer's required image quality by making copies to visually check the image
b. Press Start. quality.
• If the sensor output value is within the specified range, OK will be displayed. At the same 4. Select Close to return to the MAX Setup screen.
time, the NVM [742-328] MSI Side Guide Maximum Position data is changed.
• If the sensor output value is out of the specified range, NG will be displayed. If NG ,
check the guide position and try again.
Manual Density Adjustment. Manually sets the offset amount of the ADC-LUT created by the ADC
patch and finely adjusts the gradation.
Note: When performing this adjustment, make sure that there is no problem with the IOT. After
performing the Calibration, only perform adjustment for density, especially highlight or central gra-
dation when necessary.
Note: To adjust the density of the printer, when selecting [Copy/Printer] as the scope of this adjust-
ment, copy density is also changed. If the copy density does not become the desired density when
the printer density is adjusted, perform ADJ 9.6 /dC919 : Color Balance Setup, and adjust the copy
density.
Adjustment Overview
1. The gradation adjustment amount can be set from the screen in 1/128 units (-128 to +127) for
the L/M/H gradation of each color Y, M, C and K. (0 indicates no adjustment. + numbers increase
the density, and - numbers reduce the density)
2. The actual ADC_LUT change takes place during the ADC_LUT calculation after the next ADC
patch is created. Therefore, perform checking, e.g. by performing PCON_ON_Print output.
3. None , Copy Jobs Only , or Copy & Print Jobs is displayed as the applicable scope for TRC_Ad-
just. This setting can be set from the screen.
4. Upon entering the adjustment screen, the Manual LUT adjustment value for the L/M/H of each
color Y, M, C and K, and the status of the Target will be displayed.
5. The Manual LUT adjustment value for each color can be changed on the adjustment screen.
6. When the Start button pressed, the NVM is updated according to the Manual LUT adjustment
value and the Target status is displayed on the screen.
7. Only the NVM for M LUT NVM Value and Target is updated. The ADC_LUT is not updated.
Procedure
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select MAX Setup.
• None
d C 9 3 1 D e n s i t y U n i fo r m i t y A d j u s t m e n t ( M A X S e t u p ) 8. Select the color to correct by using Y, M, C, K at the left of the screen and then perform the ad-
justment by using Shape 1 to 10 and Level 1 to 9 at the center of the screen.
Purpose
By adjusting the IN-OUT direction of the ROS light exposure amount (MC rear-front), the IN-OUT 9. After the adjustment, select Save and print out the test pattern again. Check the density and re-
uneven density of each of the colors YMCK is corrected independently. peat Steps 4 to 9 until the density is even.
10. For fine adjustment of the density distribution, Sensitivity Adjustment and Position Adjust-
Note: There are usually no problems adjusting in Primary Color, but even if the uneven density is
ment (5 positions - B, C, D, E, F), refer to Chapter 4 ADJ 9.3.
corrected for each single color (YMCK) by the status, environment and machine difference of the
MC image developing unit, the RGB and Gray for Secondary/Process Color may not necessarily be 11. Select Close to return to the MAX Setup screen.
corrected in equivalence. In this case, it is possible to specifically adjust the uneven density for RGB
or the specified color the customer wishes to adjust.
However, as the unevenness in density for each Single Color for YMCK may worsen instead in this
case, be sure to check the Primary Color after Secondary/Process Color adjustment and adjust the
density to the customer's desired level.
Primary Colors are Y, M, C, and K; Secondary Colors are R, B, and G, which are printed with 2 of the
colors Y, M, and C; Process Color is gray color printed with all 3 colors Y, M, and C.
Note: Although the standard test pattern density (Cin) is Low: 20% and Mid: 60%, if it is different
from the customer's density requirement, change the Cin % on the screen before performing this.
(However, limit the total Y, M, C, K to 240% or less.)
Note:
• To check the density and balance of all colors, select Full Color , and to check the density of
a specific color, select Single Color.
6. 2 copies of the test pattern will be printed out in the order of Primary color, Secondary color,
and Process color.
d C 9 3 8 Pr o c o n O N / O F F Pr i n t ( M A X S e t u p ) d C 9 4 5 W h i t e Re fe r e n c e A d j u s t m e n t ( M A X S e t u p - I I T
Purpose C a l i b ra t i o n )
The dC937 Procon ON/OFF Print consists of the following 2 types. Purpose
• Procon "On" Print: To perform automatic correction for IIT White Sensitivity Level and Gray Balance.
This is a Print mode that uses the current Procon Data with the Procon (Process Control) Soft en- Note: Perform this when there are smears and gray contamination etc. of the IIT.
abled and the TRC Adjustment enabled.
Note: This adjustment is to be performed at shipment and after replacing the Platen Glass, Lamp,
• Procon OFF Print: Lens Unit, or CCD.
This is a Print mode that uses only the features posessed by the IOT and with the Procon, etc. all
Note: For detailed procedures, refer to ADJ 5.5 in Chapter 4.
turned OFF.
Procedure
By comparing the above 2 modes, it is possible to identify whether the current print image quality
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select MAX Setup.
is being affected by an image quality failure at the Procon, etc. or an image quality failure due to
the status of the IOT elements. 2. On the MAX Setup screen, select IIT Calibration.
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select MAX Setup. • BW-Y (W-Ref correction coefficient BW-Y: NVM715-096)
2. On the MAX Setup screen, select Procon On/Off Print. • R (W-Ref correction coefficient BW-Red: NVM715-092)
3. On the Procon On/Off Print , select Procon "Off" Print. • G (W-Ref correction coefficient BW-Green: NVM715-093)
4. Load A3 paper into Tray 1 and press Start. • B (W-Ref correction coefficient BW-Blue: NVM715-094)
• 1 sheet of the built-in PG Pcon PG 200C is output and the execution result is displayed. 6. Select Close to return to the IIT Calibration screen.
d C 9 4 5 C C D C a l i b ra t i o n ( M A X S e t u p - I I T C a l i b ra t i o n ) d C 9 4 5 O p t i c a l A x i s Co r r e c t i o n ( M A X S e t u p - I I T C a l i b ra t i o n )
Purpose Purpose
To perform automatic correction for the CCD Color Sensitivity Dispersion. To automatically measure and adjust the skew for Platen and Side Registration.
Note: Perform this when the yellow component of the image looks abnormal. Note: Perform this when something is clearly wrong with the skew of Platen Regi.
Note: This adjustment is to be performed at shipment and after replacing the Platen Glass, Lamp, Note: Perform this adjustment after replacing the Lens Unit or CCD.
Lens Unit, or CCD. Also, perform this after performing the White Reference Adjustment.
Note: For detailed procedures, refer to ADJ 5.5 in Chapter 4.
Note: For detailed procedures, refer to ADJ 5.5 in Chapter 4.
Procedure
Procedure 1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen , select MAX Setup.
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select MAX Setup. 2. On the MAX Setup screen, select IIT Calibration.
2. On the MAX Setup screen, select IIT Calibration.
3. On the IIT Calibration screen, select Optical Axis Correction.
3. On the IIT Calibration screen, select CCD Calibration. 4. Follow the instructions on the screen and press <Start>.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen, then place the Color Chart (STP5001, 82E13120) on the Open the Platen Cover, make sure there is nothing on the glass, and then execute.
Platen and press <Start>.
5. The following data are displayed on the screen after the execution.
5. The following obtained data are displayed on the screen after the execution.
• Result: OK/NG
• b* Correction Coefficient
• Front NUT Correction Angle: numeric display
• b* Patch Measured Value
• Rear NUT Correction Angle: numeric display
• b* Standard Value
6. If NG , perform the necessary adjustment. (Refer to ADJ 5.5 in Chapter 4)
• Result
7. Select Close to return to the IIT Calibration screen.
• Color reflection ratio (R, G, B, Y, M, C, K)
6. [OK] or [NG] will be displayed in the [Result] field. When completed with error, the message:
[Calibration has been completed with an error.] is displayed.
d C 9 4 5 S i d e 2 S h a d i n g Co r r e c t i o n ( M A X S e t u p - I I T C a l i b ra t i o n ) d C 9 4 5 S i d e 2 W h i t e Re fe r e n c e A d j u s t m e n t ( M A X S e t u p - I I T
Purpose C a l i b ra t i o n )
Collect the Side 2 CIS shading data with white paper, and determine the presence or absence of Purpose
garbage. Side 2 white reference adjustment is also performed at the same time in this adjustment. To calculate the reflection ratio dispersion correction value of the White Reference Sheet for Side 2
Color CIS and set the Side 2 Color CIS White Reference Coefficient.
Note: This correction is performed when Side 2 color image quality is deteriorated, and when black
lines appear in the slow scan direction. • To perform this before Side 2 Shading Correction to measure the whiteness of the blank paper
to be used for Side 2 Shading and get ready to perform Side 2 Shading Correction correctly.
Note: This adjustment is to be performed at shipment and after replacing the Color CIS.
Note: When using paper that has been registered in advance to NVM716-131, White Reference
Note: Before carrying out the Side 2 Shading Correction, it is necessary to set the NVM [716-131] Adjustment - Side 2 can be omitted by entering the setting value into NVM716-131. The default
DADF paper code. If you implement White Reference Adjustment - Side 2 in advance, NVM716-131 value is, 1: J paper.
is automatically switched to 0, and the calculated value was already entered into NVM[716-132 to
134] (individual paper response correction amount). However, even if White Reference Adjustment - Note: This adjustment is to be performed at shipment and after replacing the Color CIS.
Side 2 was performed in advance, NVM716-131 should be set to '10', before Side 2 shading imple-
Note: For detailed procedures, refer to ADJ 5.5 in Chapter 4.
mentation when using inch-based paper.
Procedure
Note: For detailed procedures, refer to ADJ 5.5 in Chapter 4. 1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select [MAX Setup].
Procedure 2. On the [MAX Setup] screen, select [IIT Calibration].
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select [MAX Setup].
3. On the [IIT Calibration] screen, select [White Reference Adjustment - Side 2].
2. On the [MAX Setup] screen, select [IIT Calibration].
4. Set a single new white sheet of A3 or 11” x 17” to DADF, and press [Start].
3. On the [IIT Calibration] screen, select [Side 2 Shading Correction].
5. The following obtained data are displayed on the screen after the execution. If it has completed
4. Set 2 sheets of new white paper (A3 or 11" x 17") to DADF, and press [Start]. with error, the RGB setting values will be blank.
5. After scanning is completed, [OK] or [NG] will be displayed in the Result field depending on • G (W-Ref Correction Coefficient Green)
whether the Shading DATA retrieval has succeeded or failed. When completed with error, the • B (W-Ref Correction Coefficient Blue)
message: [Calibration has been completed with an error.] is displayed.
6. Select [Close] to return to the [IIT Calibration] screen.
6. If it NG is displayed, clean the Color CIS and perform the [Side 2 Shading Correction] again.
d C 9 4 5 S i d e 2 C C D C a l i b ra t i o n ( M A X S e t u p - I I T C a l i b ra t i o n ) d C 9 4 5 Co l o r S c a l e Ta r g e t Ca l i b ra t i o n ( M A X S e t u p - I I T
Purpose C a l i b ra t i o n )
To perform read color correction of the Side 2 Color CIS. (Color CIS dispersion correction) Purpose
Corrects color variation of individual IIT for image quality adjustment feature (DFE calibration, etc.)
Note: This adjustment is to be performed at shipment and after replacing the Color CIS. Also [CCD
using scanned images.
Calibration - Side 2] is to be performed after performing the [Side 2 Shading Correction] and the
[White Reference Adjustment - Side 2]. Note: This adjustment is to be performed at EX-i Print Server for the PrimeLink C9070/C9065 Print-
er installation and after replacing the Platen Glass, Illumination Unit, Lens Unit, or CCD.
Note: For detailed procedures, refer to ADJ 5.5 in Chapter 4.
Note: In order to use this feature, a color reference chart [Color Scale Target V3] (hereinafter
Procedure
[CST]) bundled with EX-i Print Server for the PrimeLink C9070/C9065 Printer is required. Therefore,
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select <MAX Setup>.
without using Print Server N04, calibration with this feature is unnecessary when using the printer
2. On the [MAX Setup] screen, select <IIT Calibration>. alone. Perform only"White Reference Adjustment" and "CCD Calibration" as usual. When there is EX-
3. On the [IIT Calibration] screen, select <CCD Calibration - Side 2>. i Print Server for the PrimeLink C9070/C9065 Printer, this feature is implemented after performing
white reference adjustment and CCD calibration in order to obtain the accuracy of DFE calibration.
4. Load the Color Chart (STP5001, 82E13120) on the DADF and press <Start>.
• CST is a calibration chart in which color patches and QR codes encoded with colorimetric data
5. The following obtained data are displayed on the screen after the execution.
of each color patch are paired on Side 1 and Side 2 as shown in the figure below. (Figure 1)
• b* Correction Coefficient
• b* Standard Value
• Result
6. [OK] or [NG] will be displayed in the [Result] field. When completed with error, the message:
[Calibration has been completed with an error.] is displayed.
If NG is displayed, clean the Side 2 Color CCD and repeat the CCD Calibration - Side 2.
Note: This feature calculates and sets the IIT individual difference correction coefficient and initi-
alizes the correction value in the event of market trouble, etc.
Procedure
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select [MAX Setup].
4. Follow the instructions on the screen, load the patch of the CST table on the platen glass, and
press [Read].
5. After it is read, load the QR code at the back of the CST table on the platen glass, and press d C 9 5 0 AT C S e n s o r S e t u p ( M A X S e t u p )
[Execute].
Purpose
Note: The QR code can be read even in the opposite direction of 180 degrees. To derive the sensitivity correction values [Correction Coefficient] and [Correction Offset] for adjust-
6. After reading is completed, various parameters used in the scan of Color Scale Target Calibra- ing the ATC sensor output from the bar code numbers which display the sensitivity attribute in every
tion are calculated and stored in the NVM. While calculating the parameters, the [Executing in ATC Sensor. The bar code numbers are set in NVM [Bar Code Number] manually from this adjust-
7. When the process is completed normally, the message, "Correction is completed" and "Confirm" When this adjustment is required:
button are displayed on the UI screen, and in the case of abnormal termination, the "Ended ab- • Developer Housing Assembly replacement (If the replacement is only for the developing pow-
normally" message and "Confirm" button will be displayed. der, this process is not required)
8. If it ends abnormally, select the [Confirm] button, return to the IIT calibration screen, confirm • ATC Sensor replacement
the placement of the CST (reverse placement, etc.) and contamination, and execute Color Scale
Target Calibration again.
Operation Overview
• Upon entering the adjustment screen, the NVM values [Bar Code Number], [Correction Coeffi-
9. Select [Confirm] to return to the IIT Calibration screen.
cient], and [Correction Offset] for each of the colors Y, M, C, and K will be displayed.
[About initialization of IIT individual difference correction coefficient] • The [Bar Code Number] value displayed on the adjustment screen can be rewritten with the
1. CE rewrites the value of NVM 715-489 [High Precision Calibration Coefficient Initialization Keypad.
Switch] from 0 to 1 in the NVM Read/Write screen.
• Pressing <Start> updates the NVM [Bar Code Number], [Correction Coefficient], and [Correction
Table 1 IPoC NVM
Offset] for each of the colors Y, M, C, and K after the calculation based on the [Bar Code Num-
De- Set-
ting ber] value displayed on the screen at that time. The [Correction Coefficient] and [Correction Off-
Chain- fault
Link NVM Name Settings Value Range Remarks set] screen displays will also be updated at the same time.
715-489 High Precision Cali- CE 0 0 to 1 High precision cali- Note: For detailed procedures, refer to ADJ 9.2 in Chapter 4.
bration Coefficient automatic bration-related NVM
Initialization Switch initialization switch Procedure
(0: Off, 1: On).
1. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select [MAX Setup].
2. When the NVM Read/Write screen is closed, various parameters stored in NVM with this feature 2. On the [MAX Setup] screen, select [ATC Sensor Setup].
return to their default values.
3. Use the selection buttons to enter the number that is recorded on the replacement Sensor into
the [Bar Code Number] field on the screen.
5. Check that the [Correction Coefficient] and [Correction Offset] have changed.
d C 9 5 6 B e l t Ed g e Le a r n i n g ( S u b sy s t e m ) d C 9 8 2 A d j u s t I m a g e Tra n s fe r ( M A X S e t u p )
Feature Purpose
Creates an Edge Profile Table (table for performing Belt Walk control) in order to set the Edge Learn When the toner image is not transferred in an optimum state to the sheet, you can set an optimum
mode at factory shipment or during the replacement of Belt system component (IBT Belt, Edge Transfer output value for each paper type. Adjustment can be done by reading the Transfer output
Sensor). value of the manual or sample print.
Note: This Diag. must be executed and completed successfully before executing the Regi Control Procedure
Setup Cycle (Registration): dC675. 1. Load the paper that you want to adjust for into the MSI.
Note: Processing time: Max. approx. 100 sec (13 Belt cycles) 2. On the Maintenance/Diagnostics screen, select [MAX Setup].
Figure 1 j0psm640006
Note:
– In the top right corner of the sample, the front face has [Side 1], the rear face has [Side
2] printed on it.
– If the paper size is A4, B4, or 8.5X11 inches, the sample is printed divided into 2 sheets.
• To adjust by [Specify Sample Number], proceed to [To adjust by specifying sample number].
• To adjust by [Specify custom (percent)], proceed to [To adjust by specifying custom Note:
(percent)].
a. The required number of scans is determined by the contents and the number of sample
• When adjusting by [Read sample], proceed to [To adjust Transfer output value by loading prints.
the sample print].
• When the sample print is 1 sheet 1-sided: 1 time
[To adjust by specifying sample number] • When the sample print is 1 sheet 2-sided: 2 times
1. Check the sample and take note of the number at the left side (-5 to +10) of the sample you
• When the sample print is 2 sheet 1-sided: 2 time
think to show the optimal transfer state.
• When the sample print is 2 sheet 2-sided: 4 times
• If it is printed on both sides, note the numerical value of both Side 1, and Side 2.
b. [Adjustment start] is displayed on the screen once a sample print is scanned 1 time. Press
2. In [Side 1] and [Side 2], specify the number noted in step 1.
after scanning the required number of sample prints.
3. Press [Adjustment value setting].
c. If you press [Start Adjustment] with insufficient number of scans, the Transfer output adjust-
• For the remaining prints, the Transfer output value set here will be reflected. ment in the following step will abort.
4. Select [Close] to return to the [MAX Setup] screen. d. Regardless of the content of the sample print, scanning can be performed up to four times.
If you scan beyond the necessary number of times, the later scanned data is used preferen-
[To adjust by specifying custom (percent)]
tially, and the Transfer output adjustment is performed with the scan data of the necessary
1. Check the sample and specify the adjustment value (percent) for [Side 1] and [Side 2] when the
number of times
current output is 100%. Increase the numerical value in case of poor transfer.
e. When scanning a sample print with 2 or more scans, make sure to scan the entire sample
Note: If you are accustomed to adjusting the Transfer output value, you can specify a custom
print set that was output in [Sample output]. If you scan together with a sample print which
value without printing the sample.
has output time difference greater than 24 hours, the sample print from more than 24 hours
• If it is printed on both sides, note the numerical value of both Side 1, and Side 2. before is not used for the adjustment data.
2. Press [Adjustment value setting]. 5. When the scan is finished, press [Start Adjustment].
• For the remaining prints, the Transfer output value set here will be reflected. • When the Transfer output adjustment is completed normally, the message [Completed] is
3. Select [Close] to return to the [MAX Setup] screen. displayed.
6. The recommended adjustment value that this unit calculated (sample number) is displayed in
[To adjust Transfer output value by loading the sample print]
[Side 1] and [Side 2].
1. Perform the same procedure up to step 6 of the sample output procedure.
7. Press [Adjustment value setting].
2. Select [Read sample] in the Transfer output adjustment screen.
• For the remaining prints, the Transfer output value set here will be reflected.
3. Following the instructions on the screen, set the sample print on the document glass.
8. Select [Close] to return to the [MAX Setup] screen.
4. Place 5 or more sheets of blank paper that are the same size as the sample print, on top of the
sample print, and close the document cover, and press [Read].
a. When the scan is finished, remove the sample print and blank sheet.
b. If the sample print is on both sides, perform steps 3 and 4on Side 1 and Side 2 of the sample
print.
• The difference between the current ATC Target Value and the ATC Measured Value is large (25 • (+) means Tone Up while (-) means Tone Down. Tone Up increases toner density and de-
bit or higher) creases the measured value.
• When you want to change the toner density intentionally 4. Pressing [Start] executes the Tone Up or Tone Down machine operation according to the num-
ber of sheets that was set.
Operation Overview
5. After the MC operation has completed, [Number of Sheets] returns to '0' sheets. The various
Machine operation:
NVM values of ATC Target Value, ATC Measured Value, and Toner Density Difference Tolerance
• At No Paper Run, the equivalent number of sheets for Max [Maximum number of Down sheets
Range are updated and displayed as the [TC Target], [TC Value], and [Toner Density Diff. Toler-
in the four colors, Maximum number of Up sheets in the four colors] is processed. In fact, as the
ance] for each of the colors Y, M, C, and K.
IOT only operates up to the equivalent of the max A4 L 60 sheets, even if a value of 60 or higher
6. Check the image quality and repeat the procedure until you obtain the appropriate density.
is set from the UI, operation will be by that of 60 sheets.
7. Select [Close] to return to the [MAX Setup] screen.
• For XERO/DEVE, this is the same as the case for normal images. Xfer 2nd Retract, Output OFF.
1st also turns off the output. Follow Diag No Paper Mode for Jam detection etc.
• During the operation, the V-Transport is stopped and the Fusing Unit cannot be driven. -> Con-
sidered as Standby status (no rotation, and the temperature is controlled in the same way as in
Standby)
• After No Paper Run of the number of sheets specified above, Cycle Down is carried out after
X'fer 2nd Contact and Belt 2 rotation. The Developer Housing Assy is also rotated during this pe-
riod (remove blank paper and perform mixing during this period)
Procon operation:
• Toner supply control settings are as follows and does not follow the settings in Customer mode.
After the operation, the Customer mode settings are restored.
• Potential Control, ADC Gradation Control and Calibration Control are the same as in Customer
mode settings.
G P 1 I n t e r m i t t e n t Pr o b l e m R A P 5. Operate all of the components in the appropriate RAP that is associated with the symptom of
the intermittent problem with Component Control. Observe the components for any symptoms
Purpose
of abnormal operation, such as a hesitation, or an unusual sound.
The purpose of this RAP is to provide guidance for resolving an intermittent problem. This is not an
exact procedure, but a set of recommended actions that use the resources of the service manual to 6. Check that the AC and DC power are within specification.
help locate the cause of an intermittent problem. 7. Get technical advice or assistance when it is appropriate. This will depend upon the situation
and the established local procedures.
Procedure
1. Check the service log. Recent service actions may provide information about the problem. For ex- 8. Examine the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated with the function that is
ample, a component that was recently replaced to correct another problem may be the cause failing. Refer to the BSDs. Look for:
of the new intermittent problem. • contamination, such as a feed roller that has a build up of dirt or toner
2. Run the machine in a mode that vigorously exercises the function that is suspected. The ma- • wear, such as gear teeth that are rounded or have excessive backlash
chine may fail more frequently or may fail completely under these conditions. Look for signs of
• HFSI, even if they are not near or have not exceeded the SPEC LIFE or COPY COUNT value
failure or abnormal operation.
• wires chafing against components of the machine, especially against moving components
An intermittent problem can usually be associated with a RAP, since when it does fail, it results
in a fault code, a jam code, or some other observable symptom. • misaligned, mis-adjusted, or incorrectly installed components
3. Using the RAP that is associated with the symptom of the intermittent problem, examine all of • slow or slipping clutches; slow or binding solenoids
the components that are referenced in the RAP. Look for: • damaged components
• contamination, such as a feed roller that has a build up of dirt or toner • excessive heat, or symptoms of excessive heat, such as the discoloration of a component
• wear, such as gear teeth that are rounded or have excessive backlash • loose cables or wires
• HFSI, even if they are not near or have not exceeded the SPEC LIFE or COPY COUNT value 9. Perform the adjustments for the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated with
• wires chafing against components of the machine, especially against moving components the function that is failing. Refer to the BSDs. Check to Verify that the adjustment CAN BE
MADE and that there is an adequate range of adjustment, and that it can be set to or near the
• misaligned, mis-adjusted, or incorrectly installed components
nominal value. Any abnormality that is observed may be an indication of the cause of the prob-
• slow or slipping clutches; slow or binding solenoids lem. For example, a component can be adjusted to the nominal value, but it is at the limit of
• damaged components the adjustment range. This is not normal and may be an indication of the cause of the problem
• excessive heat, or symptoms of excessive heat, such as the discoloration of a component 10. Operate all of the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated with the function that
is failing with Component Control. Refer to the BSDs. Observe the components for any symp-
• loose cables or wires
toms of abnormal operation, such as a hesitation, or an unusual sound.
• Packing materials not removed
11. Replace any components or consumables that are known to be a frequent cause of the problem.
4. Using the RAP that is associated with the symptom of the intermittent problem, perform all of When doing this, consider the cost and time required. If the suspected item is inexpensive, can
the adjustments for the components or functions that are referenced in the RAP. Check to Verify be installed quickly, and has a high probability of resolving the problem, then it is reasonable to
that the adjustment can be made and that there is an adequate range of adjustment, and that replace it.
it can be set to or near the nominal value. Any abnormality that is observed may be an indica-
12. Leave an accurate and detailed record of your actions in the service log. Describe what you have
tion of the cause of the problem. For example, a component can be adjusted to the nominal val-
observed, what actions you took, and the recommended next steps.
ue, but it is at the limit of the adjustment range. This is not normal and may be an indication of
the cause of the problem.
G P 2 S o f t w a r e U p g ra d e 5. Copy the appropriate .bin file from the PWS or computer to the dwld directory on the USB
drive.
Purpose
CAUTION: This procedure is generic in nature, and is intended as an overview only. CAUTION: Verify that this is the only file in this directory.
Always follow the instruction that may come with the software. There may be addi-
6. Insert the USB drive into the USB connector on the front panel of the C9065/C9070.
tional steps added, or other special requirements that vary from version to version.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19.
Upgrades machine software or reinstallation of the machine software as required.
CAUTION: For this procedure, use ONLY the main power switch located behind the
Note: Use the All-In-One file ( FULL.bin ) to upgrade software. If you are reinstalling software at front cover to power off and power on the machine. Do NOT use the sub power switch
the same version, you must use the individual files to reinstall software, as the All-in-One option will on the front panel.
not overwrite a file of the same version.
a. Open the front cover, locate the main power switch, then switch off the machine.
There are three processes for software ugrade:
b. Disconnect the RJ45 network connector to the customer's network.
• USB software upgrade - installs the software from USB drive using the USB port located on the
c. Hold the energy saver button down and use ONLY the main power switch to switch on the
front console of the machine.
machine.
Note: Customer upgrade from USB is not an option. d. Continue holding the Energy Saver button until [Download Mode] is displayed (approxi-
• HDD software upgrade - performs the software upgrade from the hard drive. mately 15 seconds).
8. After approximately 30 seconds the screen will display [TRANSFERRING] followed by [Process-
Note: The machine saves a backup file on the hdd automatically. The HDD software upgrade is
ing 0/10, 1/10,....10/10].
typically used to recover a device option that may not be at the correct software version of the
machine. Note: The Interrupt light will flash continually during the software upgrade. Download time:
• Network - used by the customer for software installation. This procedure is included in the cus- Approx. 10 min.
tomer documentation and not discussed here. 9. When the software upgrade is complete, the machine will restart, then print out a [Software Up-
USB Software Upgrade grade Report].
1. Download the software from Xerox.com to the PWS or a computer. 10. Remove USB drive once the software ugrade is complete.
2. Print the Copy Reports/Configuration Reports. Refer to GP 6, Printing Reports. CAUTION: After troubleshooting software issues, always verify the software version
3. Make a copy of the color test pattern and check for image quality problems. is the latest available on Xerox.com. Upgrade the machine to the latest software ver-
sion, when possible, before completing work performed.
Note: Resolve any problems before performing the software loading.
HDD Software Upgrade
4. Insert the USB Drive into the PWS or computer, then in the root directory, create a directory la-
1. Print the Copy Reports/Configuration Reports. Refer to GP 6, Printing Reports.
beled dwld.
2. Make a copy of the color test pattern and check for image quality problems.
Note: Generally, the All-in-One file ( Full.bin ) is used when upgrading to a newer version of
software. If you are reinstalling software at the same version, you must use individual files, as Note: Resolve any problems before performing the software upgrade.
the All-in-One option will not overwrite a file of the same version. When installing individual files 3. Perform the USB Software Upgrade.
the machine software version will display as either all zeroes or as the last file that was down-
loaded. This is a display issue only. Loading the All-in-One file after loading individual files will Note: The machine saves a backup file on the HDD automatically. The HDD software upgrade
correct this. is typically used to recover a device option that may not be at the correct software version of
the machine..
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 19. GP 3 Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode
CAUTION: For this procedure, use ONLY the main power switch located behind the Purpose
front cover to power off and power on the machine. Do NOT use the sub power switch Certain diagnostic routines and reports are available locally on the machine UI through Service
on the front panel. Rep. mode. Refer to, Accessing UI Diagnostics, for a list of available options within the UI.
a. Open the front cover, locate the main power switch, then switch off the machine. Entering Diagnostics
b. Disconnect the RJ45 network connector to the customer's network. 1. Press and hold the 0 key for 5 seconds, then while still holding down the 0 key, press the Start
button.
c. Hold the energy saver button down and use ONLY the main power switch to switch on the
The CE - Type Passcode screen will appear.
machine.
2. Enter 6789 and press Confirm.
d. Continue holding the Energy Saver button until [Download Mode] is displayed (approxi-
mately 15 seconds). 3. The top right area of the UI display will change to let the user know that the mode has changed
to Service Rep. mode. The words Service Rep. are displayed.
5. Hold the [start button] down until transferring begins.
6. When the software upgrade is complete, the machine will restart, then print out a [ Software Note: If a system failure has occurred when the machine is turned On but it has not been recti-
Upgrade Report ]. fied, the diagnostic operation will not be guaranteed.
CAUTION: After troubleshooting software issues, always verify the software version Exiting Diagnostics
is the latest available on Xerox.com. Upgrade the machine to the latest software ver- There are three ways to exit Diagnostics:
sion, when possible, before completing work performed.
1. Press and hold the 0 key then press the Start button.
Note: Some actions performed in Service Rep. mode cause the machine to restart upon exiting,
the machine will come back up in normal user mode.
G P 4 S e r i a l N u m b e r S y n c h r o n i z a t i o n Pr o c e d u r e 6. Enter the correct serial number (last six digits, leave off the last digit for XE machines) in both
boxes on the Serial Number screen and then select Confirm.
Purpose
This procedure is used to maintain serial number and billing data integrity when certain PWBs must 7. If any PWB will not synchronize, replace that PWB and re-synchronize.
be replaced. This data is stored at three locations; the MCU NVM PWB (IOT), the EEP ROM (SYS1)
on the Back Plane PWB (SYS1), and the Controller PWB (SYS2). This procedure allows the data in all
three locations to be synchronized in case of replacement of one of the PWBs, or due to data cor-
ruption associated with one of the following faults:
• 124-325 (1 Billing Counter Mismatch; Unable to recover Billing Counter during recovery)
Procedure
CAUTION: Verify that the software on the PWBs is the correct version for that PWB
before, and after, PWB replacement.
To maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data, never install all three
PWBs at once. Always install the PWBs, ONE PWB AT A TIME, in the following order:
Print the System Settings List (GP 6), then compare the ROM values to the table in the
software installation instructions on the current software upgrade CD.
2. Select Adjustment/Others.
Note: For any of the following conditions, escalate the call to Field engineering or the NTC:
• The displayed serial numbers all match each other but do not match the data plate.
• Two or more numbers do not agree with the data plate and the third number
5. Select Start.
G P 5 H a r d S t o p Pr o c e d u r e G P 6 P r i n t i n g Re p o r t s
Procedure Purpose
1. Enter UI Diagnostics (see Accessing UI Diagnostics) This procedure lists the various printed reports that can be generated by the machine, and describes
the procedure for accessing them.
2. Select dC131 NVM Read/Write.
3. To Hard Stop DADF: change location 711-296 (Independent Operation Time) from 0 to a value Procedure
between 2 and 999 , where the value represents the time between start of the feed operation There are three levels of reports available. Some reports are available to anyone, in User mode.
and the timed of the desired Hard Stop (each bit = 10 msec). There are additional reports that are only available in System Administrator mode (the User mode
To Hard Stop IOT: change location 740-012 (Paper Intentional Stop Timer) from 0 to a value reports are also available). A third group of reports is only available to CSEs (the reports available in
between 1 and 999 , where the value represents the time between start of the feed operation the other modes are also accessible).
and the timed of the desired Hard Stop (each bit = 10 msec). User Mode Reports
4. Exit UI Diagnostics mode without rebooting the Controller. If the machine reboots, the settings 1. Press the Machine Status button on the UI surround.
for the Hard Stop mode will be cleared. 2. Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab on the UI screen.
5. Paper Intentional Stop operation starts with the copy operation from the User Mode (1 copy 3. Select Print Report List. The following report selections will be displayed:
with Paper Tray settings as Simp, Dup, Inv etc.).
• Job Status
The M/C stops at the specified timing. Stop the operation by shutting down the M/C. The M/C
performs recovery operation (Marking recovery) when it restarts after shutting down. Under this selection there are 2 choices:
6. To cancel Hard Stop mode switch off the machine power: – Job History Report
• Scan Reports
– Reports
♦ Configuration Report
♦ Scan/Fax Configuration
– Address Book
• Copy Reports
– Configuration Report
• Printer Reports
– Configuration Report
– HP-GL/2 Logical Printers List • User software CD or driver files downloaded and extracted to a folder on the PWS.
9. When the Add Printer Wizard asks you to select the printer port, select Create a new port. In
the Type: menu, select Standard TCP/IP Port , then click Next. This will open the Add Standard
TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard. Click Next.
12. in the Protocol box, select LPR. In the LPR Settings box, type print for Queue Name :, then click G P 8 C l o n i n g N e t w o r k C o n fi g u r a t i o n
OK.
Purpose
13. Click Next. Click Finish to return to the Add Printer Wizard. This procedure is designed to be used by System Administrators to copy Network Configuration set-
14. If the printer driver was previously loaded on the PWS, select the printer from the list and click tings to multiple devices on the network such as Scan to File and/or Scan to Email configuration
Next. Otherwise, click Have Disk. Print Drivers can be found on the customer’s User Software settings. It can also be used to backup and restore Network Controller settings that are lost during
CD. The drivers can be downloaded from the Controller via Web Tools. The latest driver can also an Altboot software load.
be downloaded from the Xerox website. Navigate to the CD or downloaded driver for your PWS’
Establishing a LAN connection
operating system. Click OK.
The following steps establish a correctly configured Local Area Network (LAN) connection so that
15. On the Name Your Printer screen, enter a name for the printer. Do not set this printer as the de- the PWS can communicate with the Network Controller. Once the settings are established they will
fault. Click Next. remain in effect until changed.
16. Select Do not share...
Note: Record the original data for every place you make a change. You may or may not need to re-
17. Select Yes when asked if you want to print a test page. Correct printing indicates a functioning set the IP address, depending on PWS usage and local network practice
network connection.
1. Record any selections that you change, so that you can restore your original configuration when
Using the Simulator finished.
To use this simulator tool on different machines, modify the Setup as follows:
2. Print a Configuration Report (GP 6).
1. Print a new System Settings List (Configuration Report). Refer to GP 6. 3. Right click on the My Network Places icon.
2. Reconfigure the PWS IP Address per step 2 in Setup. 4. Select Properties to bring up the Network and Dial-up Connections window.
3. Click the Windows Start button. 5. Right click on Local Area Connection and select Properties.
4. Select Settings , then Printers and Faxes. 6. Select the General tab and scroll down to Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Highlight TCP/IP and se-
5. Right-click on the name of the test printer you created, and select Properties lect Properties.
6. Select the Ports tab, then click on Configure Port... 7. Select the Use the following IP address radio button.
7. Enter the printer’s IP address then click on OK. 8. Enter an IP address one digit different than the machine IP address listed on the Configuration
Report for example, if the machine IP address is 12.138.147.44, enter 12.138.147.45 or
12.138.147.43).
12. You may need to reboot the PWS to load the settings.
3. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address line and select Go.
Note: If the customer has enabled Administrator Password, you will be asked for a user name
and password. Defaults are admin as the user name, and 1111 for the password.
4. When the CentreWare Internet Services window opens, select the Properties Tab.
5. Click on the General Setup link, then the Cloning link (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Cloning Screen 1. Select the Clone button under the View Feature Details link (Figure 2).
6. Scroll down the page to see critical information about the cloning process (Figure 2). Click the Note: If the customer has enabled Administrator Password, you will be asked for a user name
View Feature Details link to get a list of data that is backed up and/or restored using the Clon- and password. Defaults are admin as the user name, and 1111 for the password.
ing Feature.
CAUTION: Do NOT attempt to open the clone file as it may cause the file to become
corrupt.
Note: When the file is saved, a.txt extension may automatically be placed at the end of the file
name. Before loading this clone file, navigate to the saved file, right-click on the file and select
Rename. The correct format for the file name is xxxxxxxx.dat.
Procedure
1. Press the Log In/Out button on the Control Panel
2. If there are Registered User accounts on the machine there will be a Pull Down menu displaying
Registered User. Select the pull down menu and select System Administrator.
3. If the customer has enabled the Login ID - default (admin), enter the Login ID. The password (
1111) is the default; the customer may have set a unique password).
Note: If this password does not work, the customer has reset the password. Ask customer for
password. Do not change password (GP 11) without customer’s consent.
2. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address line and select Go.
3. When the CentreWare Internet Services window opens, select the Properties Tab. Click on the
General Settings link, then the Cloning link (Figure 1).
5. Use the Browse button to navigate to the clone file, or type the full path to the file.
Click the Install button. If the machine does not reboot after five minutes, power the machine
off/on.
Procedure
1. Enter Service Rep. mode. (Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode)
7. Select Keyboard.
9. Select Next
G P 1 2 Co m m o n A c c e s s C a r d S e r v i c i n g Installation
The customer is responsible for installation of the hardware and the enablement kit software (un-
Description
less they have purchased Analyst services).
The Xerox Common Access Card & Personal Identity Verification ID System is an embedded authen-
tication solution. It supports Common Access Cards (CAC) cards issued to Department of Defense Service
(DoD) personnel. These types of smart cards store identity information in the form of Personal Iden- Note: Except for USAF installations, Xerox does not provide any on-site or remote repair or replace-
tification Numbers and of digitally encrypted certificates. These are used for id authentication and ment of CAC compatible Cards or Card readers. For USAF installations, Xerox Service supplies the
authorization in order to gain access to work areas, computers, networks, and peripheral devices. Card Reader. The card reader is manufactured by SCM Microsystems, model SCR3310, and can be
identified by the Xerox p/n (960K59280) on the underside of the device.Only readers with the Xerox
The Xerox CAC Enablement software supports a number of card readers and allows users to authen-
part number affixed are to be replaced by Xerox Service.
ticate at the device. The card reader is connected to a USB port on the WorkCentre.
Service for CAC hardware is limited to verifying correct operation:
Supported Card Types
The CAC solution is compatible with most common CAC card types listed below. Other card types • CSE should check the following NVM values:
may function with the CAC/PIV ID system but they have not been validated. – Location 850-009 should be set to 0
• Axalto Pegasus 64K / V2 – Location 700-379 should be set to 0101.
• Axalto Cyberflex 32K / V1 • Check out the machine in the service mode to insure no faults are displayed and that the Work-
• Axalto Cyberflex 64K / V2 Centre is functioning correctly in diagnostic mode.
• Gemplus GemXpresso 64K / V2 • If working properly, return the machine to customer user mode and have a user attempt to use
their card to gain access to the machine features.
• Oberthur 72K / V2
• Oberthur CosmopoIIC 32K / V1 If the card functions properly, the CSE’s responsibilities have been met.
• Gemplus GemPC USB SL Suggest that the user try their card in another device. If the card works in another device, suggest
that they alert their on-site supervisor to try another card reader on the failed device or check for
• Gemplus GemPC Twin
network connectivity to the failed device. For USAF installations, the CSE will replace the faulty Card
• SCM Micro SCR3310 Reader.
• Panasonic ZU 9PS
Suggest that another user try their card on the device where the original card failed. If the second
Other USB CCID compliant readers may function with the CAC ID system, but have not been card works, suggest that the user’s card has failed.
validated.
Servicing non-CAC problems.
Prerequisites Diagnostic Tools
USB Enablement Kit (software option).
Diagnostics can be accessed as usual when the Common Access Card & Personal Identity Verifica-
For most installations, the customer is responsible for supplying a compatible card reader for each tion ID System is installed.
MFP. The exception to this is for USAF installations (see the Note: under Service).
Customer Tools
If the Machine Status pathway has been locked, the Tools will only be available to the user who has 14. The session is terminated when the card is removed from the reader, or the administrator setta-
either logged in as a System Admin or has logged in and Authenticated to the machine using their ble timeout expires.
Common Access Card and the correct password for that card.
CAC Feature Limitations:
CAC Feature Principles of Operation • The CAC solution requires the Scan option to be installed.
The following steps represent an authentication process.
• When CAC authentication is enabled on the device the Copy Feature is locked by default and
1. The WorkCentre’s control panel will prompt the user to insert their card in the attached reader. can only be accessed once the user has successfully authenticated.
2. Once a card is inserted the user will be prompted to enter their PIN. Possible Fault Codes That May Be Observed
3. The PIN is validated against the card, and if they match, this will unlock the card so the Private • 021-210: USB Card Reader connection error.
4. The user’s digital Certificate is read from the card. • 021-212: USB Card Reader couldn’t start.
5. • 018-725: Users Kerberos password has expired. Please ask system administrator of KDC to ex-
tend password expiration date or change password.
Steps to validate the Chain of Trust
The WorkCentre may be configured to validate the Domain Controller (DC) certificate. If so it • 018-726: Not all of Certificate Authority certificate(s) of the CAC Root and Intermediate certifi-
submits the DC Certificate and any associated Trusted Root Certificates, to the Online Certifi- cates are registered in device.
cate Status Protocol (OCSP) Responder, to verify that the Domain Controller certificate is valid • 018-727: Check that CAC certificate is valid, or that the CAC user is registered on the configured
and not revoked. Domain Controllers.
6. The system receives a response from the OCSP responder stating whether the certificate is valid • 018-728: Check that the Domain Controller Certificate is invalid.
and has not been revoked.
• 016-533: Domain Controller server clock-skew error. Enable NTP.
7.
• 016-534: Could not connect with the configured Domain Controller realm.
Authenticating with the Domain Controller • 016-539: Fatal error on the Domain Controller.
The system calls the Domain Controller using the PKINIT protocol to validate the CAC user’s
• 016-231: A fault or an error has occurred with the CAC Card Reader.
Certificate.
9. The WorkCentre decrypts the challenge using the private key from the Domain Controller Certifi-
cate that was downloaded on the WorkCentre. The Domain Controller then provides a decrypted
session key that the machine uses to decode subsequent communication with the DC.
10. The CAC User’s Identity certificate is passed to the Domain Controller for Authorization.
11. If successful, the Domain Controller returns a Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT). Authentication is
complete and Authorization begins.
12. At this point authorization is complete and the authorized services such as (scan to e-mail, copy
& fax) are now available.
13. The E-mail address is retrieved from the Signing Certificate and is available for inclusion in the
From: field whenever the E-mail Service is selected.
This procedure describes the process for running fax diagnostic tests found in Accessing UI Signal No. Output Description
Diagnostics.
011 Tonal Signal Output 462Hz
Procedure 012 Tonal Signal Output 1080Hz
To Access Fax Diagnostics:
1. Enter Accessing UI Diagnostics. 013 Tonal Signal Output 1100Hz
2. Press the Log In/Out button on the Control Panel 014 Tonal Signal Output 1300Hz
3. On the display, select System Settings , then Common Settings , then Maintenance/ 015 Tonal Signal Output 1650Hz
Diagnostics.
016 Tonal Signal Output 1850Hz
4. Select Sub System.
017 Tonal Signal Output 2100Hz
5. Select Fax Diagnostics.
019 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 1
There are two tests for Fax Diagnostics, the Signal Sending Test and the Relay On/Off Test
020 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 2
Signal Sending Test
021 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 3
This test checks the ability of the Fax system to generate and transmit a specific signal.
022 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 4
To run this test:
023 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 5
1. From the Fax Diagnostics screen, select Signal Sending Test.
024 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 6
2. Select the line number you wish to test (standard line is 1. Lines 3 and 5 are for optional addi-
tional lines, 0 , 2 , and 4 are for FX use only). 025 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 7
3. Enter the Signal Number you wish to test and select Send Signals. Refer to Table 1 for the list 026 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 8
of signal numbers. 027 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 9
4. An audio tone or tones corresponding to the selected signal should be heard. This verifies com-
028 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone 0
munication from the UI to the Controller PWB, and demonstrates the ability of the system to
generate the specific signal being tested. 029 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone *
If an error occurs, a Fault Code will be displayed. 030 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone #
5. To stop the test, select Cancel Sending. 031 DTMF Signal Output Dual Tone A
1. From the Fax Diagnostics screen, select Relay On/Off Test. 035 V.21 (H) Signal Output HDLC Flag
2. Select the Line Number and select Relay On. 036 V.27ter Signal Output 2400 bps (HDLC Flag)
If an error occurs, a Fault Code will be displayed. Listen for the Relay to pick up the Line.
037 V.27ter Signal Output 4800 bps (HDLC Flag)
038 V.29 Signal Output 7200 bps (HDLC Flag) 112 V.34 Signal Output 19200/2743 (HDLC Flag)
039 V.29 Signal Output 9600 bps (HDLC Flag) 113 V.34 Signal Output 21600/2743 (HDLC Flag)
040 V.17 Signal Output 7200 bps (HDLC Flag) 114 V.34 Signal Output 24000/2743 (HDLC Flag)
041 V.17 Signal Output 9600 bps (HDLC Flag) 117 V.34 Signal Output 4800/3000 (HDLC Flag)
042 V.17 Signal Output 12000 bps (HDLC Flag) 118 V.34 Signal Output 7200/3000 (HDLC Flag)
043 V.17 Signal Output 14400 bps (HDLC Flag) 119 V.34 Signal Output 9600/3000 (HDLC Flag)
080 V.8 Signal Output ANSam 120 V.34 Signal Output 12000/3000 (HDLC Flag)
081 V.8 Signal Output CM 121 V.34 Signal Output 14400/3000 (HDLC Flag)
082 V.8 Signal Output JM 122 V.34 Signal Output 16800/3000 (HDLC Flag)
083 V.8 Signal Output INFOc 123 V.34 Signal Output 19200/3000 (HDLC Flag)
084 V.8 Signal Output INFOa 124 V.34 Signal Output 21600/3000 (HDLC Flag)
085 V.8 Signal Output PPh+ALT 125 V.34 Signal Output 24000/3000 (HDLC Flag)
096 V.34 Signal Output 2400/2400 (HDLC Flag) 126 V.34 Signal Output 26400/3000 (HDLC Flag)
097 V.34 Signal Output 4800/2400 (HDLC Flag) 127 V.34 Signal Output 28800/3000 (HDLC Flag)
098 V.34 Signal Output 7200/2400 (HDLC Flag) 129 V.34 Signal Output 4800/3200 (HDLC Flag)
099 V.34 Signal Output 9600/2400 (HDLC Flag) 130 V.34 Signal Output 7200/3200 (HDLC Flag)
100 V.34 Signal Output 12000/2400 (HDLC Flag) 131 V.34 Signal Output 9600/3200 (HDLC Flag)
101 V.34 Signal Output 14400/2400 (HDLC Flag) 132 V.34 Signal Output 12000/3200 (HDLC Flag)
102 V.34 Signal Output 16800/2400 (HDLC Flag) 133 V.34 Signal Output 14400/3200 (HDLC Flag)
103 V.34 Signal Output 19200/2400 (HDLC Flag) 134 V.34 Signal Output 16800/3200 (HDLC Flag)
104 V.34 Signal Output 21600/2400 (HDLC Flag) 135 V.34 Signal Output 19200/3200 (HDLC Flag)
106 V.34 Signal Output 4800/2743 (HDLC Flag) 136 V.34 Signal Output 21600/3200 (HDLC Flag)
107 V.34 Signal Output 7200/2743 (HDLC Flag) 137 V.34 Signal Output 24000/3200 (HDLC Flag)
108 V.34 Signal Output 9600/2743 (HDLC Flag) 138 V.34 Signal Output 26400/3200 (HDLC Flag)
109 V.34 Signal Output 12000/2743 (HDLC Flag) 139 V.34 Signal Output 28800/3200 (HDLC Flag)
110 V.34 Signal Output 14400/2743 (HDLC Flag) 140 V.34 Signal Output 31200/3200 (HDLC Flag)
111 V.34 Signal Output 16800/2743 (HDLC Flag) 142 V.34 Signal Output 4800/3429 (HDLC Flag)
164 DTMF Signal Output Signal Tone 1209Hz 3. Hold the buttons down until the boot up screen (progress bar) appears.
2. Power On using ONLY the Main Power Switch located behind the Front Door, while simultane-
ously holding the 6 , the Stop , and the Energy Saver buttons on the Control Panel.
3. Hold the buttons down until the boot up screen (progress bar) appears.
HDD Initialization
This step will delete all pending print or copy jobs in the IOT job queue, initializes the IOT HDD, and
will and then perform a reboot.
CAUTION: All customer data on the HDD (customer’s files/configuration such as To Execute:
mailboxes, scanned documents, user IDs and account IDs for accounting) will be
1. Power off using ONLY the Main Power Switch located behind the Front Door (refer to GP 19 for
deleted.
more information).
To Execute: 2. Power On using ONLY the Main Power Switch located behind the Front Door, while simultane-
1. Power off using ONLY the Main Power Switch located behind the Front Door (refer to GP 19 for ously holding the 3 , the Stop , and the Energy Saver buttons on the Control Panel.
more information). 3. Hold the buttons down until the boot up screen (progress bar) appears.
2. Power On using ONLY the Main Power Switch located behind the Front Door, while simultane-
ously holding the 4 , the Stop , and the Energy Saver buttons on the Control Panel.
3. Hold the buttons down until the boot up screen (progress bar) appears.
NVM Initialization
If possible, save NVM to be restored after the procedure is complete (GP 18).
CAUTION: STOP HERE! This portion of the routine will set all ESS NVM values to de-
fault. DO NOT execute this step unless specifically directed to perform this portion.
If possible, save NVM to be restored after the procedure is complete (GP 18).
This step will initialize the ESS NVM (SYS-System and SYS-User) and then perform a reboot.
To Execute:
1. Power off using ONLY the Main Power Switch located behind the Front Door (refer to GP 19 for
more information).
2. Power On using ONLY the Main Power Switch located behind the Front Door, while simultane-
ously holding the 2 , the Stop , and the Energy Saver buttons on the Control Panel.
3. Hold the buttons down until the boot up screen (progress bar) appears.
4. Use the Main Power Switch to Switch to switch off, then switch on the machine. Refer to GP 19.
5. Fault 116-334 will occur. Again, use the Main Power Switch to switch off, then switch on ma-
chine. Refer to GP 19.
CAUTION: STOP HERE! This portion of the routine will set all IOT NVM values to de-
fault. DO NOT execute this step unless specifically directed to perform this portion.
If possible, save NVM to be restored after the procedure is complete (GP 18).
This step will initialize the IOT NVM and then perform a reboot.
G P 1 5 S e t t i n g Co u n t r y Co d e G P 1 6 Fo r e i g n D e v i c e I n t e r fa c e S e t u p
Purpose Purpose
This procedure is used to set the Country Code for correct FAX operation. This procedure explains the process for installing and configuring the Foreign Device Interface (FDI)
PIN: 498K14141.
Procedure
1. Enter Tools mode (GP 9). Procedure
1. Perform internal dip switch setup for the Bear DCS6061 FDI:
2. Follow the path, System Settings -> System Settings -> Common Settings -> Other Settings.
3. Scroll the Other Settings menu to find Country (on page 2; item 14, 15, or 16 depending on con- a. Remove the 3 Phillips screws on under side of the FDI.
figuration). To change the value: b. Remove top cover to gain access to the internal DIP switches.
• Select Change Settings. c. Set switches as shown in Figure 1.
• Scroll through the list to select the Country.
J1 DIP Switches
• Select Save. 1 through 4, 7
ON
4. Exit Tools mode. Switch 5 ON for
Copy Only; OFF
for Copy and
Print
P2
b. Connect the cable from P351 on the controller Chassis to J1 on the FDI.
3. Go to dC131 NVM Read/Write. Set the following locations depending on the type of device and
the customer’s wishes:
• Auto-sets to 1 when FDI attached, but does not reset to 0 if FDI is removed.
b. Location 850-007 (UI Messaging). The default is 0, Ready to Copy. This must be changed G P 1 7 P W S N V M A c c e s s / S o f t w a r e D o w n l o a d To o l Co n n e c t i o n
to one of the following messages:
CAUTION: Currently there is no NVM Access Tool for Primelink. Do not try and
• For Additive Mode (Auditron-type devices). use the C60/70 Tool it will not work. Please escalate the need for this tool by con-
– 1 = Use a Valid Card tacting the hotline.
– 4 = Insert Coins
g. Make the appropriate selection depending on the type of device and the customer’s wishes.
h. Select Save
G P 1 8 S a v e a n d Re s t o r e N V M G P 1 9 S p e c i a l Po w e r O f f / Po w e r O n P r o c e d u r e
CAUTION: Currently there is no NVM Access Tool for Primelink. Do not try and Procedure
use the C60/70 Tool it will not work. Please escalate the need for this tool by con- The Special Power Off/Power On procedure is required to access some service modes.
tacting the hotline.
CAUTION: Use this procedure ONLY if specifically Instructed to do so.
Refer to dC131 NVM Read/Write to view or change NVM values.
Power Off the Machine
1. Check to Verify there are no jobs in progress or pending.
2. Open the Front Door and locate the Main Power Switch (Figure 1).
Note: Do NOT use the Top Power Switch (Figure 1) to power off the machine.
3. Power off the machine using ONLY the Main Power Switch behind the Front Door.
Top Power
Switch
Main Power
Switch
2. Continue holding the buttons until the indication described in the procedure that called GP 19
occurs.
Initial Actions
WARNING: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Check that all the motor’s mechanisms are clean, free to move and lubricated correctly.
3. Enter the component control code for the motor. Refer to dC330. Run the motor for 30 seconds. If the motor shows signs of, or can be heard to slow down, then the motor is defective. Replace the
motor.
Note: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
• Disconnect PJB (Flag 2). Check that +24V is measured when the component control code for the motor is entered.
• Disconnect PJC (Flag 3). Check that the signal changes on the controller PWB when the component control code for the motor is entered.
• Check the wiring and the connectors for the motor circuit.
• Disconnect PJH (Flag 6). Check the motor on pulses on the harness when the component control code for the motor is entered.
• Disconnect PJJ (Flag 6). Check the motor on pulses on the harness when the component control code for the motor is entered.
• Check the wiring and the connectors for the motor circuit.
• Disconnect PJF (Flag 5). Check the +24V supply and the motor on pulses when the component control code for the motor is entered.
• Check the wiring and the connectors for the motor circuit.
GP 21 How to Check a Sensor • Disconnect PJC (Flag 2). Check the wiring and the connectors for the sensor circuit.
Purpose • Check for +3.3V and 0V at PJC (Flag 2) on the controller PWB.
Use this procedure to check the operation of a sensor. • If necessary, install new components or repair the wiring.
Note: The upper circuit diagram in Figure 1, shows a flag sensor. Some sensors have a resistor with-
in the sensor. Other sensors require a resistor on the PWB, such as R1 in Figure 1. The resistor limits
the current through the LED. This decreases the voltage on the sensor LED to 1.2V, typically.
Note: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Initial Actions
WARNING: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while perform-
ing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the power cord. Elec-
tricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
5. If the sensor actuates by a surface that reflects, check that the surface is clean. Also ensure that
there is not an obstruction between the sensor and the surface.
6. If the sensor actuates by an encoder disc, ensure the holes or gaps in the disc are aligned cor-
rectly with the sensor.
Sensor Action
Refer to Figure 1. When light from the LED is allowed to fall on the registration sensor, photo-sensi-
tive transistor, the sensing line, PJA, pin 2, is low (Flag 1). When light from the LED is blocked by the
flag, the sensing line is high.
Refer to Figure 1. When light from the LED is reflected by the paper onto the ltray 3 feed sensor,
photo-sensitive transistor, the sensing line, PJE, pin 2 is low. When no paper is present, no light falls
on the transistor and the sensing line is high.
Procedure
For the upper sensor in Figure 1 :
• Disconnect PJA (Flag 1). Check for +3.3V and 0V at PJA on the harness.
Initial Actions
WARNING: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while perform-
ing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the power cord. Elec-
tricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. For a clutch, check that the mechanical components are clean, free to move and are lubricated
correctly
2. For a solenoid, check that the armature and associated mechanical components are free to
move.
Procedure
Note: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Note: When a solenoid is energized in diagnostics, armature movement is seen. When a clutch is
energized in diagnostics, the sound of the clutch action is heard. If possible, energize the motor con-
nected to the clutch to confirm when the clutch is energized.
• Check that the signal changes on the controller PWB (PL 3.2 Item 7) when the component con-
trol code for the clutch or solenoid is entered.
• Refer to Figure 1. Disconnect PJA (Flag 1) from PJC (Flag 2). Check that +24V is measured when
the component control code for the clutch or solenoid is entered.
• Refer to Figure 1. Disconnect PJD (Flag 3) from PJC (Flag 2). Check for +24V on the LVPS.
• Check the wiring and the connectors for the clutch or solenoid circuit.
G P 2 3 H o w t o C h e c k a Sw i tc h G P 2 4 J a m By p a s s M o d e
Purpose Procedure
Use this procedure to check the operation of a switch. 1. Enter UI Diagnostics (see Accessing UI Diagnostics)
Note: The circuit in Figure 1 shows an example of an interlock switch actuated by the closing of a 2. Select dC131 NVM Read/Write.
door. 3. DADF Jam Bypass: change location 711-297 (Communication Fail Bypass) from 0 to 1.
Initial Actions IOT Jam Bypass: change location 742-002 (Jam Bypass Switching) from 0 to 1.
WARNING: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while perform- 4. Exit the UI Diagnostics mode without rebooting the Controller. If the machine reboots, the set-
ing tasks that do not need electricity. Refer to GP 19. Disconnect the power cord. Elec- tings for the Jam Bypass mode will be reset to 0.
tricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
5. Jam Bypass operation starts with the copy operation from the User Mode. Stop it with the Stop
Manually check that the switch operates. Ensure that the magnet or other actuator has enough me- key.
chanical movement to operate the switch. 6. To cancel Jam Bypass mode switch off the machine power.
Note: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Procedure
• Disconnect PJA, Flag 1. Check the electrical operation of the switch.
• Disconnect PJB, Flag 1. Check for +5V and 0V on the IOT PWB.
• Check the wiring and the connectors for the switch circuit.
The hazardous substances are: 2. Select the option [or enter a serial number to get all the keys for a machine], then click
[Next]. If a Speed Enablement code has been previously generated, it is displayed on the
• Lead (Pb)
screen.
• Mercury (Hg)
3. Enter UI Diagnostics, Entering and Exiting Diagnostics Mode, then Software Options, to install
• Cadmium (Cd) the Feature Install Key (FIK).
• Hexavalent Chromium (Cr 6+, Cr [VI])
Due to control of the machine speed, the Speed Enablement Kit, which contains the Speed PIN, is
• Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE’s) not supported in spares as a standard spare part. The Speed Enablement Kit is supplied as part of
• Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB’s) the Initialization Kit, Speed Badge, CDs, Customer Documentation, and Install Instructions. See Ta-
ble 1 for the Initialization Kit part numbers.
Identification of a RoHS Compliant Machine
Table 1 Initialization Kits
Xerox will maintain a central list of RoHS compliant machines.
Initialization Kit Part Number OPCO
All XxxxXxxx xxx//xxx machines are RoHS compliant at time of manufacture. C9065 Initialization Kit with 097S05058 Americas
BIM GQV
Procedure
C9065 Initialization Kit - 097S05059 Americas
CAUTION: Failure to comply with RoHS guidelines can result in product recalls, im- speed only GQW
prisonment, fines or penalties.
C9070 Initialization Kit with 097S05060 Americas
Use only spares that are listed in the PrimeLink® C9065/C9070 Spare Parts List. Do not use spare BIM GQY
parts from other similar machines, even if the parts look identical. All PrimeLink® C9065/C9070 ma- C9065 Initialization Kit - 097S05061 Americas
chines are RoHS compliant at time of manufacture and must be maintained as RoHS compliant. speed only GQZ
Initialization Kit Part Number OPCO • XE: For Speed Enablement Kit replacements. Follow the standard product replacement process
(DOA/TEX) for the relevant part number.
DMOE C9065 ppm INBOUND 650S42630 EMEA - E
INITIALIZATION KIT • EMEA — E: Log a complaint in the system PNP. ISC STE (Integrated Supply Chain Service Team
(with Page Pack Grace period East) will handle the complaint and arrange shipment.
off)
• US: The Speed Enablement Kit replacement is a part of the Product Coded Initialization Kit and
must be ordered using the DOA (Dead on Arrival) or IDR (Identical Replacement) tools.
If a replacement is needed at the time of install, and the equipment has not yet been recorded
as installed, use the DOA tool to order the Initialization Kit accessory only. The DOA should be
requested to be shipped via air to ensure timely delivery.
• Canada: The Speed Enablement Kit replacement is part of the Product Coded Initialization Kit.
Follow the Like for Like equipment process through the Customer Relations Specialist to order
the replacement Initialization Kit.
• Authorized Service Provider: Use this link to order a Speed Enablement Kit: www.office.xerox.
com/partners/productreplacementform/index.cfm
In the Box Description of technical problem and any steps taken to resolve, enter, Speed Enable-
ment Kit request. In the Box Options, Speed Enablement Kit. Under Reason for Return, select
Other then enter Speed Enablement Kit in the comments section.
• Xerox Business Solution (XBS): - Replacement Speed Kit for XBS Field Service should be ordered
as product coded Initialization Kit via the standard Returned Goods Equipment Spares Consum-
ables XBS Process Guide (Version 2011.05.16).
• LATAM (Latin America): Log a complaint request in the system PNP. ISC STW (Integrated Sup-
ply Chain Service Team West) will handle the complaint and arrange shipment.
The service envelope depth (including device dimensions) is always 102” (2591 mm). The service B Front of IOT 60” 48”
envelope Width is the sum of the System Width + D1 + D2. 1524 mm 1219 mm
IOT (Base) (IOT +UI + UI Mtg.) 46 in. / 1168.6mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 563 lbs.
IOT + OCT 62 in. / 1574 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 576 lbs.
HCF + IOT + OCT 62 in. / 1574 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 640 lbs.
IOT+ BR Finisher 78.8 in. / 2002 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 679 lbs.
HCF + IOT +BR Finisher 78.8 in. / 2002 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 740 lbs.
IOT + CZ Folder + BR Finisher 88.3 in. / 2243 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 779 lbs.
HCF + IOT + CZ Folder + BR Finisher 88.3 in. / 2243 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 843 lbs.
OHCF + IOT + BR Finisher 105.2 in. / 2673 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1010 lbs.
OHCF + IOT + CZ Folder + BR Finisher 114.4 in. / 2905 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1113 lbs
IOT + BR Booklet Maker Finisher 81.4 in. / 2068 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 727 lbs
HCF + IOT + BR Booklet Maker Finisher 81.4 in. / 2068 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 791 lbs
IOT + CZ Folder + BR Booklet Maker Finisher 90.6 in. / 2301mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 830 lbs.
HCF + IOT + CZ Folder + BR Booklet Maker 90.6 in. / 2301 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 894 lbs.
Finisher
OHCF + IOT + BR Booklet Maker Finisher 98.4 in. / 2500.5 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1061 lbs.
OHCF + IOT + CZ Folder + BR Booklet Maker 107.6 in. / 2732.5mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1164 lbs.
Finisher
IOT + IFM + PR Finisher 93.1 in. / 2363.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 860lbs.
IOT + IFM + Inserter + PR Finisher 99.8 in. / 2370.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 959 lbs.
IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + PR 116.9 in, / 2968.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1120 lbs.
Finisher
IOT + IFM + Inserter + Two Sided Trimmer + 123.6 in, / 3133.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1219 lbs.
PR Finisher
HCF + IOT + IFM + PR Finisher 93.1 in. / 2363.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 924 lbs.
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + PR Finisher 99.8 in. / 2528.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1023 lbs.
HCF + IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + PR 116.9 in. / 2986.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1184 lbs.
Finisher
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + Two Sided 123.6 in. / 3133.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1283 lbs.
Trimmer + PR Finisher
IOT + IFM + PR Booklet Marker Fin 94.5 in. / 2400.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 904 lbs.
IOT + IFM + Inserter + PR Booklet Marker Fin 101.2 in. / 25635 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1003 lbs
IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + PR Booklet 118.3 in. / 3005.3mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1164 lbs
Marker Fin
IOT + IFM + Inserter + Two Sided Trimmer + 125 in. / 3170.3mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1283 lbs.
PR Booklet Marker Fin
HCF + IOT + IFM + PR Booklet Marker Fin 94.5 in. / 2400.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 968 lbs.
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + PR Booklet 101.2 in. / 2563.5 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1067 lbs.
Marker Fin
HCF + IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + PR 118.3 in, / 3005.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1228 lbs.
Booklet Marker Fin
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + Two Sided 125 in. / 3170.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1327 lbs.
Trimmer + PR Booklet Marker Fin
HCF + IOT+ IFM + CZ Folder + PR Finisher 102.2 in. / 2595.9 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1038 lbs.
HCF + IOT+ IFM + Inserter + CZ Folder + PR 108.9 in. / 2760.5 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1137 lbs.
Finisher
HCF + IOT+ IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + CZ 126 in. / 3200.9 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1298 lbs.
Folder + PR Finisher
HCF + IOT+ IFM + Inserter + Two Sided Trim- 132.7 in. / 3365.9 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1397 lbs.
mer + CZ Folder + PR Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM + PR Booklet Maker Fin 119.5 in. / 3035.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1238 lbs.
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + PR Booklet 126.2 in. / 3200.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1337 lbs.
Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + PR 143.3 in. / 3640.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1498 lbs.
Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + Two Sided 150 in. / 3805.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1597 lbs.
Trimmer + PR Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + CZ Folder + PR Booklet 128.6 in. / 3266.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1352 lbs.
Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + CZ Folder + 135.3 in. / 3431.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1451 lbs.
PR Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + 152.4 in. / 3871.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1612 lbs.
CZ Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + Two Sided 159.1 in. / 4036.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1711 lbs.
Trimmer + CZ Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin
HCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + PR Finisher 110.6 in. / 2808.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1144 lbs.
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter +GBC + PR 117.3 in. / 2973.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1243 lbs.
Finisher
HCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + Two Sided Trimmer 134.4 in. / 3413.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1404 lbs.
+ PR Finisher
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + Two 141.1 in. / 3578.6 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1503 lbs.
Sided Trimmer +PR Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + PR Finisher 127.8 in. / 3247.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1414 lbs.
OHCF + IOT + IFM + inserter + GBC + PR 134.5 in. / 3412.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1513 lbs.
Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + Two Sided Trim- 151.6 in. / 3852.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1674 lbs.
mer + PR Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + Two 158.3 in. / 4017.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1772 lbs.
Sided Trimmer + PR Finisher
2T OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + PR Finisher 127.8 in. / 3247.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1481 lbs.
HCF + IOT + IFM +GBC + CZ Folder + PR 137 in. / 3479.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1258 lbs.
Finisher
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + CZ Fold- 143.7 in. / 3644.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1357 lbs.
er + PR Finisher
HCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + Two Sided Trimmer 160.8 in. / 4084.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1518 lbs.
+ CZ Folder + PR Finisher
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + Two 167.5 in. / 4249.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1617 lbs.
Sided Trimmer + CZ Folder + PR Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM +GBC + CZ Folder + PR 137 in, / 3479.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1528 lbs.
Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter +GBC + CZ Fold- 143.7 in. / 3644.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1627 lbs.
er + PR Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM +GBC + Two Sided Trim- 160.8 in. / 4084.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1788 lbs.
mer + CZ Folder + PR Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + Two 167.5 in. / 4249.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1887 lbs.
Sided Trimmer + CZ Folder + PR Finisher
OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + PR Booklet Maker 129.2 in. / 3282.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1458 lbs.
Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM +Inserter + GBC + PR 135.9 in. / 3447.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1557 lbs.
Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + Two Sided Trim- 153 in. / 3887.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1718 lbs.
mer + PR Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM +Inserter + GBC + Two 158.7 in. / 4052.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1817 lbs.
Sided Trimmer + PR Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM +GBC + CZ Folder + PR 138.4 in. / 3514.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1572 lbs.
Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + inserter +GBC + CZ Fold- 145 in. / 3683 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1671 lbs.
er + PR Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM +GBC + Two Sided Trim- 162 in. / 4114.8 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1832 lbs.
mer + CZ Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter +GBC + Two 168.7 in. / 4279.8 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1931 lbs.
Sided Trimmer + CZ Folder + PR Booklet Mak-
er Fin
HCF + IOT + IFM + PR Booklet Maker Fin + 136.4 in. / 3465.4 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1177 lbs.
SQFT
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + PR Booklet 143 in. / 3630.4 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1276 lbs.
Maker Fin + SQFT
HCF + IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + PR 160.2 in. / 4069 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1437 lbs.
Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
HCF + IOT + IFM + PR Booklet Maker Fin + 166.9 in. / 4239.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1536 lbs.
SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + PR Booklet Maker Fin + 153.7 in. / 3904 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1447 lbs.
SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + PR Booklet 160.4 in. / 4074.2 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1546 lbs.
Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer PR 177.5 in. / 4508.5 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1707 lbs.
Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + Two Sided 184.2 in. / 4678.7 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1806 lbs.
Trimmer + PR Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
HCF + IOT + IFM + CZ Folder + PR Booklet 145.5 in. / 3696 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1291 lbs.
Maker Fin + SQFT
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + CZ Folder + PR 152.2 in. / 3861 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1390 lbs.
Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
HCF + IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + CZ 169.3 in. / 4301 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1551 lbs.
Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
HCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + Ttwo Sided 176 in. / 4466 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1650 lbs.
Trimmer + CZ Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin
+ SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + CZ Folder + PR Booklet 162.8 in. / 4135.2 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1561 lbs.
Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + CZ Folder + 169.5 in. / 4300 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1660 lbs.
PR Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Two Sided Trimmer + 186.6 in. / 4740 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1821 lbs.
CZ Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + Two Sidded 193.3 in. / 4905 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1920 lbs.
Trimmer + CZ Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin
+ SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + PR Booklet Maker 171.2 in. / 4348.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1667 lbs.
Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + PR 178 in. / 4513.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1766 lbs.
Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + Two Sided Trim- 195 in. / 4953.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1927 lbs.
mer+ PR Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + Two 201.7 in. / 5118.3 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 2026 lbs.
Sided Trimmer + PR Booklet Maker Fin +
SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + CZ Folder + PR 180.3 in. / 4580 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1781 lbs.
Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + CZ 187 in. / 4745 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 1880 lbs.
Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin + SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + GBC + Two Sided Trim- 201 in. / 5185 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 2041 lbs.
mer + CZ Folder + PR Booklet Maker Fin +
SQFT
OHCF + IOT + IFM + Inserter + GBC + Two 210.8 in. / 5350 mm 31.6 in. / 803.5 mm 54.8 in. / 1,391.5 mm 2140 lbs.
Sided Trimmer + CZ Folder + PR Booklet Mak-
er Fin + SQFT
Component Weights P r o d u c t S p e c i fi c a t i o n s
Table 3 Weights
Product Codes
Weight Kgs
Table 1 Color C9065-C9070 Product Codes
Configuration Weight lbs (approx.) (approx.)
Item Product Code
Weight (approximate base unit only) 604 lbs 273 Kgs
C9065/C9070 IOT 110 VAC E2B
Tri-fold and Z Fold Unit for Standard and MUA Warm-up Time
Bookletmaker
• At Power On: 85 sec.
Interface Module for Standard and Booklet AB8
Maker Finishers • From Sleep mode: 85 sec.
GBC Advanced Punch Letter Size UAD • From Low Power mode: 30 sec.
• Color
Oversized High Capacity Feeder XY9
– 6.5 sec max (Platen to SCT; Color Priority mode)
2 Tray Oversized High Capacity Feeder YA0
– 7.8 sec max (Platen to SCT; B/W Priority mode)
Xerox Secure Access w/ Magstripe Reader RAF
(USB) – 7.8 sec max (DADF to OCT; Color Priority mode)
Xerox Secure Access w/ Mifare/HID iClass Read- RAG – 7.6 sec max (Platen to Finisher Top Tray; Color Priority mode)
er (USB)
– 9.4 sec max (DADF to Finisher Top Tray; Color Priority mode)
Xerox Secure Access w/ LEGIC Reader (USB) RAH
• B/W
Xerox Secure Access w/ HID 125K Reader RAK
(USB) – 5.1 sec max (Platen to SCT; Color Priority mode)
Billing Impression Mode Kit C9X – 4.1 sec max (Platen to SCT; B/W Priority mode)
XMPie VDP Software Kit X3G – 5.7 sec max (DADF to OCT; B/W Priority mode)
– 5.8 sec max (Platen to Finisher Top Tray; B/W Priority mode)
Voltage Requirements
– 7.2 sec max (DADF to Finisher Top Tray; B/W Priority mode)
• Single phase (two wires plus ground)
Copy Speed
• 110 VAC/60 Hz (110 - 127 VAC, 55 to 62 Hz)
• B/W (plain paper; simplex; fed from Tray 1)
• 220 - 240 VAC/50 Hz (198 to 255 VAC, 48.5 to 51.5 Hz)
– letter size LEF: 65 ppm (C9065), 75 ppm (C9070)
Environmental Requirements
– letter size SEF: 47 ppm (C9065), 54 ppm (C9070)
• Temperature: 10 ~ 28 degrees Centigrade
– legal size: 39 ppm (C9065), 44 ppm (C9070)
• Humidity 15 ~ 85% (no condensation - max. humidity@ 32 degrees = 62%, 85% @ 28
degrees) – A3/11x17 in.: 33 ppm (C9065), 37 ppm (C9070)
• Altitude: 8200 feet or 2500 meters max. • Color (plain paper; gloss off, simplex; fed from Tray 1)
• Must be level +/- 5 mm front-to-rear; 10 mm side-to-side – letter size LEF: 60 ppm (C9065), 70 ppm (C9070)
• Ambient Light: 3,000 lux max (no direct sunlight) max. – letter size SEF: 44 ppm (C9065), 51 ppm (C9070)
R/E Capability: Variable Percentages: 25% to 400% in 1% increments Screw Driver (-) 3 x 50 600T40205
Preset Percentages: Screw Driver (+) 6 x 100 600T1989
• 25%
Screw Driver (+) NO.1 499T356
• 50% (A3 to A5)
• 64% (11 x17 in. to 8.5 x 11 in.) Stubby Driver (+) (-) 600T40210
• 70% (A3 to A4; B4 to B5)
Screw Driver (-) 100MM 499T355
• 100%
• 129% (8.5 x 11 in. to 11 x17 in.) Spanner and Wrench 5.5 x 5.5 600T40501
Loupe 600T42008
Brush 600T41901
Pr o d u c t To o l s a n d Te s t Pa t t e r n s Cleaning Materials
Table 1 Tools and Test Patterns Table 1 Cleaning Materials
Description Part Number USSG Part XE Part
Description
Number Number
Color Test Pattern 82E13120
Cleaning fluid 43P48 8R90034
Geometric Test Pattern 82E8220
(8oz., Formula A)
HVPS test probe (1/10X) 600T1653
Film remover (8 oz.) 43P45 8R90176
HVPS test probe adapter 600T1996
Lens/mirror cleaner 43P81 8R90178
Copy Paper Carrying Case 600T1999 Lint-free (white) cleaning cloth 19P3025 19P3025
Copy Paper Zip Lock Bag 600T2000 Lint-free Optics cleaning cloth 499T90417 499T90417
Xerox Color Xpressions Plus 24# 11×17 in 3R5465 Cleaning towels 35P3191 600S4372
Colotech + - 90 gsm - A3 3R94642 Drop cloth 35P1737 35P1737
Serial cable 600T2058 Cotton Swab 35P2162 35P2162
Network Interface (Crossover) cable 600T02252
I n s t a l l a t i o n / M a i n t e n a n c e / Re m o v a l K i t s
Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070 Color
Printer Kit Instructions
The following is an overview of the conversion and installation process. Each step is detailed in the
Adaptive CMYK Service Installation Guide.
Before beginning the conversion process, print a Configuration Report to verify the machine soft-
ware level is the same version or newer than the version identified in the Xerox® Adaptive CMYK
Plus Technology for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070 Announcement bulletin, 001.
– Printer conversion parts Figure 1 Xerox adaptive CMYK plus technology cart
• Vivid and Fluorescent Toner Kit • The printer conversion parts include, Figure 2 :
– Fluorescent Toner Dispenser Assembly – Connector assemblies for CMYK toner assembly
– Fluorescent Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow starter toner cartridges – Pre-assembled connector assemblies for IOT
– Vivid Toner Kit components* – ATC sensors for CMYK developer housings
– Magnets
– Set screws
– Allen wrench
– Safety labels
M a c h i n e Co n s u m a b l e s
Table 1 Consumables
Name Yield Part Number
Part Number - 497K20240 Black (K)/Gold Toner Car- 30,000 pages 006R01521 - Metered (World Wide)
tridge, PL 90.1 Item 16
006R01734 - Sold (NA, EMEA)
Table 1, lists the parts supplied in the installation kit.
006R01802 - Gold
Table 1 USB Hub Kit BOM
Waste Toner Bottle 50,000 pages 008R12990
No Name Qty
Scorotron (K) 13R00650
1 Hub PWB 1
Installation instructions are located in the Reference Library - USB Hub Kit Instructions
G l o s s a r y o f Te r m s Term Description
Table 1 Glossary
CA Certificate Authority or Certification Authority - an entity that issues digital
Term Description certificates for use by other parties.
A3 Paper size 297 millimeters (11.69 inches) x 420 millimeters (16.54 inches). CCD Charge Coupled Device (Photoelectric Converter)
A4 Paper size 210 millimeters (8.27 inches) x 297 millimeters (11.69 inches). CD 1:Circuit Diagram; 2: Compact Disc
AC Alternating Current is type of current available at power source for machine. CDUP Use the CDUP subcommand to change the working directory to the parent di-
rectory on the foreign host.
A/D Analog to Digital refers to conversion of signal
Chip Integrated Circuit (IC)
ADC Automatic Density Control
CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device - a programmable logic device with
ADJ Adjustment Procedure complexity between that of PALs and FPGAs, and architectural features of
both. The building block of a CPLD is the macro cell, which contains logic im-
AGC Automatic Gain Control plementing disjunctive normal form expressions and more specialized logic
operations.
A/P Advanced/Professional (Finishers)
CRU Customer Replaceable Unit
ApeosWare connected to external authentication server, Active Directory, does the au-
Authentica- thentication of your devices, be it a multifunction or a network printer. CRUM Customer Replaceable Unit Memory
tion changes in Active Directory are automatically reflected in Authentication
Agent. Usage restriction can be set on copy, print, scan, fax, color or mono- CYMK Toner colors for machine; Y=yellow, C=cyan, M=magenta, and K=black
chrome by user and by user group.
DADF Duplexing Automatic Document Feeder
APS Auto Paper Select - The machine selects a suitable size of copy paper auto-
matically based on the detected original size and the reproduction ratio you DC Direct Current is type of power for machine components. Machine converts
select. AC power from power source to DC power.
ATC Automatic Toner Concentration
DIMM Dual In-line Memory Module - a series of dynamic random access memory in-
ATS Auto Tray Switch - The machine will automatically select a usable tray that tegrated circuits.
has paper when the one presently in use becomes empty. This feature only
works when the Auto Tray Switch is selected and the paper size being used is DLD Download Direct Method - Down Load Direct (DLD) was developed to acceler-
the same for all usable paper trays. ate downloads
DMA Direct memory access (DMA) is a feature of modern computers and micro-
Attestation Remote attestation provides the basis for one platform to establish trusts on
processors that allows certain hardware subsystems within the computer to
Agent another.
access system memory for reading and/or writing independently of the cen-
tral processing unit.
ASIC Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) is an integrated circuit (IC) cus-
tomized for a particular use, rather than intended for general-purpose use.
DMM Digital Multimeter is generic name for meter that measures voltage, current,
or electrical resistance.
Bit Binary digit, either 1 or 0, representing an electrical state.
DNS Domain Name System - a hierarchical naming system for computers, services,
BMLinks stands for Business Machine Linkage Service. BMLinkS is a specification devel- or any resource connected to the Internet or a private network. It associates
oped with participation of major Office Automation appliance vendors in Ja- various information with domain names assigned to each of the participants.
pan. With BMLinkS, it now becomes possible to create multi-vendor systems Most importantly, it translates domain names meaningful to humans into the
where Office Automation appliances are simple and easy to use on networks. numerical (binary) identifiers associated with networking equipment for the
purpose of locating and addressing these devices worldwide.
BSD Block Schematic Diagram
DTMF Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency signaling - is used for telecommunication signal-
BTR Bias Transfer Roll ing over analog telephone lines in the voice-frequency band between tele-
phone handsets and other communications devices and the switching center.
BUR Back up Roll
Duplex 2-sided printing or copying
EA Emulsion Aggregation (toner) IPSEC Internet Protocol Security - a protocol suite for securing Internet Protocol (IP)
communications by authenticating and encrypting each IP packet of a data
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory - a type of non-volatile stream. IPsec also includes protocols for establishing mutual authentication
memory used in computers and other electronic devices to store small between agents at the beginning of the session and negotiation of crypto-
amounts of data that must be saved when power is removed, e.g., calibration graphic keys to be used during the session.
tables or device configuration.
IOT Image Output Terminal - the ROS/Xero/paper handling/ fusing portion of the
EME Electromagnetic Emissions are emitted from machine during normal opera- machine
tion and power of these emissions are reduced by machine design features.
IM Image Management Software - Windows and Macintosh software for view-
ESD Electrostatic Discharge. A transfer of charge between bodies at different elec- ing, organizing, cataloging, managing, browsing, storing, sharing, and printing
trostatic potential. images.
ESG European Solutions Group - also referred to as XE (Xerox Europe) IPS Image Processing Subsystem
FIFO First In, First Out - an abstraction in ways of organizing and manipulation of JBA Job-based Accounting
data relative to time and prioritization. This expression describes the principle
of a queue processing technique or servicing conflicting demands by ordering JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group - JBIG was designed for compression of bi-
process by first-come, first-served (FCFS) behavior: what comes in first is nary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
handled first, what comes in next waits until the first is finished, etc.
KC 1000 copies
FoIP FAX Over Internet Protocol
Kerberos a computer network authentication protocol, which allows nodes communi-
FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array - an integrated circuit designed to be config- cating over a non-secure network to prove their identity to one another in a
ured by the customer or designer after manufacturing secure manner.
FTP File Transfer Protocol - a standard network protocol used to exchange and LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol - an application protocol for querying
manipulate files over a TCP/IP-based network, such as the Internet. and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP
GND Ground LE Lead Edge of copy or print paper, with reference to definition of term TE
MCU Machine Control Unit - a microcontroller (also microcomputer, MCU or C) is a PWS Portable Workstation for Service
small computer on a single integrated circuit consisting internally of a rela-
tively simple CPU, clock, timers, I/O ports, and memory. PJ Plug Jack (electrical connections)
MF Multi-Function Proxy Server a server (a computer system or an application program) that acts as an inter-
mediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other servers.
MN Multinational
RAM Random Access Memory
MOB Marks On Belt> MOB Sensor is used to determine Color Registration
RAP Repair Analysis Procedure for diagnosis of machine status codes and abnor-
MRD Machine Resident Disk mal conditions
MSI Multi Sheet Inserter R/E Reduction/Enlargement refers to features selection or components that ena-
ble reduction or enlargement
NAK Negative Acknowledgement - negative acknowledgment or not acknowl-
edged. It is a signal used in digital communications to Verify that data is re- Redirector an operating system driver that sends data to and receives data from a re-
ceived with a minimum of errors. mote device. A network redirector provides mechanisms to locate, open, read,
write, and delete files and submit print jobs.
NIC Network Interface Card
OCT Offsetting Catch Tray REP Repair Procedure for disassembly and reassembly of component on machine
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect - a computer bus for attaching hardware SCP Service Call Procedure
devices in a computer. These devices can take either the form of an inte-
grated circuit fitted onto the motherboard itself, called a planar device in the SEF Short Edge Feed
PCI specification, or an expansion card that fits into a slot.
Self-test An automatic process that is used to check Control Logic circuitry. Any fault
PDL Page Description Language - a language that describes the appearance of a that is detected during self-test is displayed by fault code or by LEDs on PWB.
printed page in a higher level than an actual output bitmap.
SIMM Single Inline Memory Module used to increase printing capacity
PIO Programmed Input/Output - a method of transferring data between the CPU
and a peripheral such as a network adapter or an ATA storage device. Simplex Single sided copies
PJL Printer Job Language - a method developed by Hewlett-Packard for switching SIP Session Initiation Protocol - a signaling protocol, widely used for controlling
printer languages at the job level, and for status readback between the print- multimedia communication sessions such as voice and video calls over Inter-
er and the host computer. net Protocol (IP).
PL Parts List S/MIME Secure/Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions - a standard for public key en-
cryption and signing of MIME data.
P/O Part of (Assembly Name)
Software a small program that will generate valid CD keys or serial/registration num-
POP Server Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to Key bers for a piece of software.
dynamically access a maildrop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually,
this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a workstation to retrieve SSL Secure Socket Layer - cryptographic protocols that provide security for com-
mail that the server is holding for it. munications over networks such as the Internet
PWB Printed Wiring Board SMB Server Message Block - operates as an application-layer network protocol[1]
mainly used to provide shared access to files, printers, serial ports, and miscel-
laneous communications between nodes on a network.
Term Description Ta g s / M O D s
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol - an Internet standard for electronic mail (e- Purpose
mail) transmission across Internet Protocol (IP) networks.
To provide a list of all the tag numbers used, together with a description, of each of the machine
SSL Secure Sockets Layer - are cryptographic protocols that provide security for modifications.
communications over networks such as the Internet.
Description
TE Trail Edge of copy or print paper, with reference to definition of term LE
Each modification to the system is assigned a unique tag number. This section of the service docu-
TMA Toner Mass/unit Area detection. The combined function of the MOB/ADC mentation contains a listing and brief description of all change tags.
Sensors.
TRC Tone Reproduction Curve Change tags listed in this section are listed by machine module. The module to which the tag re-
lates is identified by the tag prefix letter.
UM Unscheduled Maintenance
• Procedure Tags - TAG 001
UI User Interface
Tag/MOD Information
USB Universal Serial Bus
Information that may be included with each tag item is as follows:
W/ With - indicates machine condition where specified condition is present
• Tag - identifies the control number for the tag.
WebDAV Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning - a set of extensions to the
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) that allows computer-users to edit and • Class - identifies the classification code as listed in Classification Codes.
manage files collaboratively on remote World Wide Web servers. RFC 4918
defines the extensions. • Use - indicates the block build or model designation of the machine.
W/O Without - indicates machine condition where specified condition is not • Manufacturing Serial Number - indicates the serial number of the factory-built machines with
present the modification installed.
XE Xerox Europe - also referred to as ESG (European Solutions Group) • Purpose - provides a brief description of the modification.
XEIP Xerox Extensible Interface Platform (EIP). Xerox EIP is a software platform • Kit Number - identifies the part number of the kit or part required to install the modification.
upon which developers can use standard web-based tools to create server-
based applications that can be configured for the MFP’s touch-screen user • Parts List On - identifies the Part List location of the modification part.
interface.
• Reference - Indicates all other Tag/MOD numbers that are related to this product configuration.
XLA Xerox Latin America These may supercede or be superceded by another Tag/MOD.
YCMK Toner colors for machine; Y=yellow, C=cyan, M=magenta, and K=black
Mod/Tag Plate Location
XMEX Xerox Mexico Tags are identified by a tag number which is recorded on a tag matrix inside the front door.
Classification Codes
The classification codes and their descriptions are listed in, Table 1.
Table 1 Classification codes
NAS-
G
Code Description
NAS- Pr o c e d u r e Ta g s
G
Code Description T AG : 0 0 1
CLASS: M
O Optional: install as a customer option or a field engineering decision.
USE: Xerox® PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070.
S Situational: install as the situation demands.
NAME: Xerox® Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology for PrimeLink™ C9065/C9070.
N Manufacturing: cannot be installed in the field.
PURPOSE: Introduction of two new toner color series for fluorescent and vivid toner
color printing. Information for the parts to be serviced in the C9065/
C9070 printer shipped with Adaptive CMYK Plus Technology and a retro-
fit kit for the C9065/C9070 printer shipped W/O Adaptive CMYK Plus
Technology.
The Parts List below will represent W/TAG 001, parts of concern to this
TAG, and W/OTAG 001, parts not concerned with this TAG.
Refer to, Adaptive CMYK Service Installation Guide to install.
7 Wiring Data
7.1 Plug/Jack Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1746 BSD 60.1 - 60.13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1872
7.1 Plug/Jack Location List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1746 BSD 70.1 - 70.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1885
WireNets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1771 BSD 80.1 - 80.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1896
7.2.1 IOT/IIT/ESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1771 BSD 90.1 - 90.32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1906
7.2.1.1 IOT ACH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1772 Electrical Component Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1937
7.2.1.2 IOT ACN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1773 7.4.1 Sensor Location (DADF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1938
7.2.1.3 ESS +3.3VDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1774 7.4.2 Sensor Location (IIT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1939
7.2.1.4 IOT +3.3VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1775 7.4.3 Sensor Location (IOT Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1940
7.2.1.5 ESS +5VDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1776 7.4.4 Sensor Location (IOT Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1941
7.2.1.6 ESS 3.3V RTN/5V RTN/24V RTN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1777 7.4.5 Sensor Location (Invert\Dup Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1942
7.2.1.7 IOT +5VDC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1778 7.4.6 Sensor Location (TM Drive Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1943
7.2.1.8 IOT +5VDC-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1779 7.4.7 Sensor Location (MSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1944
7.2.1.9 IOT +5VDC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1780
7.2.1.10 IOT +5VDC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1781
7.2.1.11 IOT +5VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1782
7.2.1.12 IOT +5VDC-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1783
7.2.1.13 IOT DC COM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1784
7.2.1.14 IOT DC COM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1785
7.2.1.15 IOT DC COM-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1786
7.2.1.16 IOT DC COM-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1787
7.2.1.17 IOT DC COM 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1788
7.2.1.18 IOT DC COM-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1789
7.2.1.19 IOT DC COM 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1790
7.2.1.20 IOT DC COM-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1791
7.2.1.21 ESS +24VDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1792
7.2.1.22 IOT +24VDC-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1793
7.2.1.23 IOT +24VDC-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1794
7.2.1.24 IOT +24VDC-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1795
7.2.1.25 IOT +24VDC-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1796
7.2.1.26 IOT +24VDC-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1797
7.2.1.27 IOT +24V RTN-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1798
7.2.1.28 IOT +24V RTN-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1799
7.2.1.29 IOT 24V RTN-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1800
7.2.1.30 IOT 24V RTN-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1801
7.2.1.31 IIT +5VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1802
7.2.1.32 IIT 3.3V RTN/5V RTN/24V RTN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1803
7.2.1.33 IIT +24VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1804
7.2.53 DADF 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1804
7.2.53.1 DADF 250 +5VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1805
7.2.53.2 DADF 250 +24VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1806
7.2.53.3 DADF 250 DC COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1807
BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1807
1. How to Use BSDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1808
2. Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1808
3. Signal Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1811
4. DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1812
5. Other Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1812
BSD 1.1 - 1.13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1814
BSD 2.1 - 2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1827
BSD 3.1 - 3.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1831
BSD 5.1 - 5.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1839
BSD 10.1 - 10.14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1850
BSD 25.1 - 25.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1864
BSD 34.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1870
BSD 40.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1871
7 . 1 P l u g / J a c k Lo c a t i o n L i s t Figure Item
P/J No. No. No. Remarks (where to Connect)
How to Use the Plug/Jack Location List
P/J1B M 9 16 LDD PWB M/K
• Within the document are links to each P/J within each P/J map. Clicking on the P/J link in the
document takes the reader to the map and specific P/J. J2 5 7 CIS
• The P/J Locations Table lists the P/J, Figure number, item number within the figure, and P/J a P/J3 2 5 S104 UI I/F PWB (S104 Touch Panel)
short component name/description. P/J3 34 4 AC Power Supply N11A
• P/J No. on 7.1.2 Plug/Jack Location List is expressed in the nine ways below: P/J3 R1 9 19 LDD PWB M/K
– P/J250 represents Plug/Jack 250. P/J3 R2 9 12 LDD PWB M/K
– P250 represents Plug 250. P/J4 34 3 AC Power Supply N11A
– J250 represents Jack 250. J4A R1 9 2 LDD PWB Y/C (Connect to P341)
– DP250 represents Double Plug 250.
J4A R2 9 8 LDD PWB M/K (Connect to P341)
– DJ250 represents Double Jack 250.
P/J4B R1 9 20 LDD PWB M/K
– CN1 represents Connector 1.
P/J4B R2 9 13 LDD PWB Y/C
– FS1 represents Faston Terminal 1.
P/J5 2 9 S104 UI I/F PWB
– SJ1 represents Shorting Jack 1.
P/ J5 R1 9 3 SOS PWB Y/M
– T1 represents Terminal 1. P/J5 R2 9 14 SOS PWB C/K
P/J17 34 13 AC Power Supply N11A P/J103 30 4 Tray 1-4 Pre Feed Sensor
P/J118 3 2 DADF Tray APS Sensor 3 P/J137 9 15 Xero Temp &Humidity Sensor
P/J172Y 10 6 Toner Cartridge CRUM PWB Y,M P/J213 4 7 DADF Pre Regi. Motor
P/J202C 11 3 Cartridge Motor C P/J217 28 8 2nd BTR Retract Cam Drive Clutch
J580 35 3 HVPS S5C (DB Y) (Connect to P585) DP607 18 3 Connector (Connect to DJ607)
J583 35 2 HVPS S5C (DB M) (Connect to P585) DJ607 29 18 Connector (Connect to DP607)
P/J642 19 6 Connector
P/J592 27 7 HVPS S5C (DB C)
P647 12 5 Marking Drawer Unit (Connect to J647)
P/J592 35 4 HVPS S5C (DB Y)
J647 29 3 Marking Drawer Unit (Connect to P647)
P/J592 35 20 HVPS S5C (DB M)
P601 13 4 IBT Belt Unit (Connect to J601) J648 29 1 Connector (Connect to P648)
P602 13 5 IBT Belt Unit (Connect to J602) P/J653A 10 11 Low Toner Sensor PWB
P/J1305 36 2 USB HUB PWB (Option) SJ1 28 19 Shorting Plag (WHITE) 1,5:GRY / 2-4,6:ORN
J1306/USB_J2 36 1 USB HUB PWB (Option) SJ2 28 18 Shorting Plag (WHITE) 1-6:VIO
J1312 25 17 Controller PWB (Fax) SJ3 28 16 Shorting Plag (BLACK) 1-4:VIO / 5-8:GRY
P/J1371 26 11 BP PWB
FS64 19 15 Thermo-Stat
FS65 19 14 Thermo-Stat
P341
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 I OT A C H
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 I OT A C N
7 . 2 . 1 . 4 I OT + 3 . 3 V D C
7 . 2 . 1 . 6 E S S 3 . 3 V RT N / 5 V RT N / 2 4 V RT N
7 . 2 . 1 . 7 I OT + 5 V D C - 1
7 . 2 . 1 . 8 I OT + 5 V D C - 2
7 . 2 . 1 . 9 I OT + 5 V D C - 3
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 0 I OT + 5 V D C - 4
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 1 I OT + 5 V D C
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 2 I OT + 5 V D C - 6
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 3 I OT D C C O M - 1
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 4 I OT D C C O M - 2
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 5 I OT D C C O M - 3
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 6 I OT D C C O M - 4
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 7 I OT D C C O M 5
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 8 I OT D C C O M - 6
7 . 2 . 1 . 1 9 I OT D C C O M 7
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 0 I OT D C C O M - 8
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 2 I OT + 2 4 V D C - 1
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 3 I OT + 2 4 V D C - 2
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 4 I OT + 2 4 V D C - 3
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 5 I OT + 2 4 V D C - 4
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 6 I OT + 2 4 V D C - 5
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 7 I OT + 2 4 V R T N - 1
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 8 I OT + 2 4 V R T N - 2
7 . 2 . 1 . 2 9 I OT 2 4 V R T N - 3
7 . 2 . 1 . 3 0 I OT 2 4 V R T N - 4
7 . 2 . 1 . 3 2 I I T 3 . 3 V RT N / 5 V RT N / 2 4 V RT N
7 . 2 . 5 3 . 1 DA D F 2 5 0 + 5 V D C
7 . 2 . 5 3 . 2 DA D F 2 5 0 + 2 4 V D C
7 . 2 . 5 3 . 3 DA D F 2 5 0 D C C O M
Figure 2 9051
PL 7.7 This symbol is used to refer to the Parts List. PL stands for Parts List and
7.7 denotes Plate No. This shows the appropriate part is shown on the
indicated plate. This symbol is added to all the replaceable parts on the
BSD.
This symbol is used to refer to the adjustments in the Repair and Adjust-
ment chapters. The number 7.7.1 shows the adjustment procedure is
found as ADJ 7.7.1 in the Adjustment chapter.
Figure 3 9053
Figure 4 9054
Figure 5 9061
This symbol is used to show where the input into the functions comes
from. This example shows the input comes from the Group Functions in
Chain 1-3.
Figure 6 9055
This symbol is used to show where the output from the functions go. This symbol shows the power output line in Chain 1.
This example shows the output goes to the Group Functions in Chain 6-
1.
This symbol shows signal lines are connected vertically. This symbol shows frame ground.
This symbol shows signal lines are connected horizontally. This symbol represents a twisted pair of wires.
This symbol shows a signal line is connected to a specific location in the This symbol shows a signal runs from right to left in the opposite direc-
same function. This example shows the destination the signal line goes tion of the usual one.
to is marked in Zone (E-3).
This symbol shows a signal line is connected to a specific location in the This represents a feedback signal.
same function. This example shows the location the signal line starts
from is marked in Zone (E-4).
This symbol shows a signal line is connected to a specific location in an- This symbol shows a mechanical linkage to a part.
other sheet (shown at lower right of the BSD).This example shows the
destination the signal line goes to is marked in Zone (A-2) in BSD 80.5.
This symbol shows a signal line is connected to a specific location in an- This symbol represents a mechanical drive signal and shows the direc-
other sheet (shown at lower right of the BSD).This example shows the tion in which the signal runs.
location the signal line starts from is marked in Zone (H-4) in BSD 80.5.
This symbol represents a document or paper and shows the direction in This symbol shows that an electrically conductive material such as a leaf
which it runs. spring and a plate is used for connection.
This symbol represents a heat, light or air signal and shows the direction This symbol shows the part the arrow points to has been modified by
in which it runs. 1V.
Figure 22 9040
Figure 29 4001
This symbol shows Control Logic.
This symbol shows the part the arrow points to has not been modified
by 1V. It still has the previous configuration.
Figure 23 9063
Figure 30 4002
This symbol shows a double plug connector.
This symbol shows the whole figure or the framed illustration is modi-
fied by 1V.
Figure 24 9064
Figure 31 5005
This symbol shows a drawer plug connector.
This symbol shows the whole figure or the framed illustration has not
been modified by 1V. The area still has the previous configuration.
Figure 25 9065
Figure 32 5006
This symbol shows a shorting plug connector.
This symbol shows derection the air flows.
Figure 26 9066
Figure 33 9074
This symbol shows the fasten is used for connection.
This symbol shows switch and is also used as Interlock Switch.
Figure 27 9028
Figure 34 9075
• Input Component
Figure 35 9076
Figure 36 9077
Figure 1 9069
The example indicates that when paper is sensed, the signal level is (L) and that when paper is
not sensed, the signal level is (H) with the voltage +5VDC.
• Output Component
Figure 2 9073
The example indicates that when the component is ON, the signal level is (L) and that when it is
OFF, the signal level is (H) with the voltage +24VDC.
4 . D C Vo l t a g e 5. Other Descriptions
A measurement of DC voltage is made between the particular test point and the frame unless oth- DC330 Input Component Voltage Leve l
erwise specified by note and test data. The measured DC voltage is in the range below: • The voltage levels (H/L) shown on the BSDs are the levels that are measured by the tester.
Table 1 LVPS N09A DC voltage specification
• Some of them are therefore different from H/L displayed on the PSW.
LVPS Voltage Level Range
Wire Color
LVPS N11 +5VDC (H) +4.59 ~ +5.35VDC
• Wires are distinguished by color in port of the BSDs for this model.
+24VDC (H) +22.05 ~ +26.95VDC
• The colors of wires are shown below the signal lines in their respective abbreviations listed
AC Power Sup- +24VDC (H) +21.38 ~ +26.95VDC
ply N11 below:
RED Red
ORN Orange
YEL Yellow
GRN Green
BLU Blue
VIO Violet
GRY Gray
WHT White
BLK Black
GN/YL Green/yellow
PNK Pink
SKY Sky
ABSD Brown
ACN Blue
+3.3VDC Yellow/Green
+5VDC Gray
+24VDC Orange
DC Common Violet
Note: Actual wire color may differ from BSD colors listed.
• The grayed-out portion of the figure shows the path from motor solenoid to parts to drive.
Figure 6 BSD 5.6 DADF Document Pre Registration and Skew Detect
Figure 1 BSD 10.1 Fusing Unit Drive and Nip Control (1/2)
Figure 2 BSD 10.2 Fusing Unit Drive and Nip Control (2/2)
BSD 34.1
BSD 40.1
Figure 24 BSD 90.24 2nd Transfer & 2nd BTR Cleaning (1/2)
Figure 25 BSD 90.25 2nd Transfer & 2nd BTR Cleaning (2/2)
7 . 4 . 1 S e n s o r L o c a t i o n ( DA D F )
7 . 4 . 2 S e n s o r Lo c a t i o n ( I I T )
7 . 4 . 3 S e n s o r L o c a t i o n ( I OT Fr o n t )
7 . 4 . 4 S e n s o r L o c a t i o n ( I OT R e a r )
7 . 4 . 5 S e n s o r L o c a t i o n ( I n v e r t \ D u p Fr o n t )
7 . 4 . 6 S e n s o r L o c a t i o n ( TM D r i v e Fr o n t )
7 . 4 . 7 S e n s o r Lo c a t i o n ( M S I )
Reference Library
Reference Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1946
Re fe r e n c e L i b ra r y
• NVM Tables
• Bulletin T9117-08-17